Catalogo Geral Lovato PDF

Index
Motor
control and
protection
Motor protection circuit breakers
Contactors
Motor protection relays
Electromechanical starters
Soft starters
AC motor drives
Control and
signalling
RUN
MON
STOP
ENT
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Signal towers and beacons
Limit, micro and foot switches
Rotary cam switches
10
Switch disconnectors
11
OFF
ON
Fuse holders and fuses
Circuit
protection
and isolation
Miniature and residual circuit breakers
12
13
NEW
Surge protection devices
14
13(
Modular contactors
7)
15
3
1
5.10
CN2
1
A1
2
24V
13
14
(7)
(8)
A2
0Hz
50/6
ctor
lar
Earth leakage relays
conta
Modu
R1
0,
G
TE
R
LK
H
E
R
LA
EA
O
oreest
au
t(sec
T
SE
In0,x
tx1
Inx
In1x
RE
reesn
ma
tx
2,
In(A
ST
TE
0,
0,
0,
0,0
0,0
I
TR
1,
1
0,
0,2
0,
reesn
ma
tx
T
C
OIN
FU
oreest
au
tx
oreets
au
In0,x
tx1
16
Inx
reesn
ma
L
A
C
IE
S
nT
IN
In1x
In1x
In0,x
tx1
Inx
reesn
ma
tx
oreest
au
In1x
Inx
In0,x
tx1
Inx
In1x
Automation
and control
Energy
management
In0,x
Time relays
17
Protection relays
18
Level control relays
19
Micro PLCs
20
Switching power supplies
21
Automatic battery chargers
22
Metering instruments and current transformers
23
Power factor controllers and thyristor modules
24
Automatic transfer switch controllers
25
Engine and generator controllers
26
Software and applications

Expansion modules and accessories
NEW
27
28
2014 new products
Insulated
polycarbonate IP65
enclosures
A new frame size allows
mounting direct-on-line
starters and changeover
contactor assemblies up to
38A.
Available in two versions, with
a deep cover (M25) or a
shallow one (M24), for
different configurations of
electromechanical or
electronic devices which can
be fixed to the standard
supplied metal plate.
ADXC soft starters

ADXC soft starters have a
45mm wide casing. They can
be installed either on 35mm
DIN rail or fixed on a
mounting plate, by scews, are
suitable for soft start and
stop, by current limitation, of
three-phase asynchronous
motors rated up to 45A.
Alarms are available, across
the range, for overcurrent,
over temperature and over
voltage conditions. The 600V
version is also equipped with
two relay outputs for remote
signalling of alarms and
bypass relay closing.
Spring-clamp
terminal contact and
LED elements
LOVATO Electric add
new spring-clamp
terminal types to the
existing screw and
faston terminal
contact and LED
elements, all to be mounted
on the LPXAU120 adapter.
This type of push-in
connecting technology is time
saving during wiring since it
is a tool-less operation.
Auto-monitor contact
elements
These particular NC
contacts, used with
non-illuminated latch
emergency stop
pushbuttons, provide
for constant monitoring
of exact mounting and
operation of the NC contacts.
Once the contacts are
installed on the mounting
adapter in a correct way and
with a correct running of the
equipment, they work as
normal NC contacts.
Their trait is to break to
normally-open state and, in
so doing, isolate the circuit
when malfunctions take
place, for instance after the
contact detaches from the
adapter or if these two come
loose from the pushbutton
itself, due to strong vibrations
or shock of some sort.
Control stations and

base-mount contact
and LED elements
LOVATO Electric
release the new
insulated
polycarbonate LPZ
control stations
featuring modern
design and aesthetics in line
with
pushbuttons and selector
switches.
The types include empty
stations, with 1 to 6 holes,
having excellent protection
degrees per IEC IP66, 67,
69K and UL Type 4/4X. The
extreme sturdiness allows
use in every type of
application. To ease wiring
inside the new LPZ
pushbutton stations,
dedicated contact and LED
elements have been made to
directly fit onto the control
station base. This sort of
installation provides for all
wiring to be entirely within
the base. As a result, cover
opening and fixing are safe,
quick and simple operations.
IP65 enclosed switch

disconnectors
Fuse holders 10x38

size
LOVATO Electric have

completed the line of
enclosed switch
disconnectors by introducing
a new enclosure frame size in
between the two available
GAZ1 and GAZ3 types. The
new GAZ2 version is available
empty or already complete
with either a three or fourpole switch disconnector,
rated 63A, 80A or 100A in
IEC AC21A duty. The IP65
protection degree allows
them to be installed in severe
ambient conditions.
This product range has been
extended to include new
changeover switches, in both
three and four-pole versions,
rated 25A to 125A in IEC
AC21A duty, housed in
insulated enclosures.
The range is composed of:

one-pole, one-pole with light
indicator, one-pole + neutral,
two-pole, three-pole and
three-pole + neutral versions.
Using the available
accessories, multi-pole types
can be assembled starting
from the single-pole device.
In addition, there is an
insertable label to identify
each single pole. UL
certifications, as Listed or
Recognized (cULus or cURus)
for USA and Canada
depending on type, have now
been obtained for all
10x38mm fuse holders, both
AC and photovoltaic DC
versions.
Miniature and
residual circuit
breakers
LOVATO Electric include in its
product offering new modular
devices dedicated to protect
people and installations. They
are miniature circuit breakers
(MCBs) up to 125A and
residual current circuit
breakers (both RCBOs and
RCCBs).
The MCBs have a high
breaking capacity of 10kA
and most are certified by UL
for USA and Canada as
supplementary protectors per
UL 1077.
New GE series handles

New design for the direct operating and door-coupling
handles introduced for GE switch disconnectors 160 to 1600A ratings.
OFF and ON positions are clearly and precisely
identifiable.
Surge protection
devices
Interface protection
PMVF 51
LOVATO Electric release two

new types of surge protection
devices for photovoltaic
applications, compliant with
the new EN 50539-11
standard.
The new products, available
with removable plug-in
cartridges, are used in
installations with voltage up
to 1200VDC. By using their
contact remote feature,
indication of the device status
can be remoted so as to
signal when replacement is
needed. The new SPDs have
high Iscpv short-circuit
current rating up to 1000A.
This current value is very
important because it
indicates the maximum
current which their thermal
disconnector is capable of
isolating.
The PMVF 51 interface

protection gives all the
functions and controls
required by the Italian
CEI 0-21 standard (June 2012
edition and subsequent
revisions) regarding lowvoltage connection of microgeneration systems, such as
solar or wind installations,
between the energy
generation system and the
national power grid. In
addition to compulsory
voltage and frequency
controls, when current
transformers are connected
with the PMVF51 interface
protection, it can also put at
disposal current and energy
measurements as well as
unbalanced power control
with the optional dedicated
expansion module installed.
2014 new products
Micro PLC with

built-in RS485
Automatic battery
chargers BCG
LRD20R D024 P1
is a new version of
the Micro PLCs,
featuring integrated
RS485 serial
interface, which
provides for simple
automated function
integration, typical of the LRD
series with supervision and
control software.
Transducers, field and user
commands can all be easily
elaborated by the Micro PLC
to program its outputs.
The new BGC battery charger

series introduces switching
technology even for the 12A
12VDC and 10A 24VDC
ratings of lead-acid battery
applications. Two voltage
levels can be selected,
suitable for different sorts of
battery and maximum
charging current can be
adjusted. The battery
chargers are enhanced by
automatic protections and
indication LEDs for alarm
and battery operating
conditions.
The relay output is
automatically activated
whenever a malfunction of
the system takes place.
Digital multimeters
DMG 600 - DMG 610
(96x96mm)
DMG6 digital multimeters,
for single or three-phase
systems, permit to view
electrical quantities of the
installation on their backlight
LCD screen and, by installing
one of the EXP series
communication modules
(USB, RS232, RS485,
Ethernet), these
measurements can be
accessible to the supervision
software via appropriate
protocol.
The DMG 610 type is already
equipped with built-in RS485
interface. Data collection can
be done directly on the
multimeter front as well, by
connecting the CX01 or CX02
dongle to its optical port,
without having to open the
electrical panel.
Supervision and energy management

software
The new software is based on the most modern
technology that provides for the management of
multiclient access through Web browser, thus allowing
supervision and control of installations by any computer
whatsoever.
Graphic pages, data logs and trend graphs can be
created and easily navigated. Moreover, alarms and
functions can be operated to send emails with
notifications and reports.
supports all LOVATO Electric products
equipped with communication interface.
DME energy meters

Four new models complete
the existing range:
DME D115 T1 (40A single
phase, 2-module type)
improves legibility of
installation energy and power
measurements by users,
DME D130 (63A single
phase) is expandable with
EXP series modules (e.g. for
load supervision); while
DME D121 (63A single
phase) and DME D320 (CT
/5A three phase) have a builtin RS485 communication port
making these two directly
integrable in supervision
systems.
Therefore, acquired data of
the energy meters can be
centralised and then
developed with software
elaboration.
Data concentrator
DME CDPV1 for
photovoltaic
monitoring
DME CDPV1 is a device
specifically for monitoring
photovoltaic installations. By
connecting at least two single
or three-phase DMED energy
meters to the data concentrator
in an installation, the user can
obtain energy produced by the
PV installation, energy drawn
by loads and ultimately, energy
exchanged (import and export)
with the energy provider.
DME CDPV1 is already duly
programmed to automatically
calculate the percentages of
produced (total and partial) and
consumed apparent power,
average power values and the
operating status of the AC/DC
inverter (if it is equipped with
any digital outputs).
It is customisable by the user
by setting up additional values
to control the installation
efficiency. In addition, with the
EXM series expansion modules,
DME CDPV1 can also be used
to supervise loads according to
logic functions, defined by the
user and based on the energy
availability. By adding an
Ethernet communication port in
addition to the RS485 already
built in, remote control and
supervision can be done by the
software.
.
Current transformer
DM0T
LOVATO Electric extend the
series of its solid-core current
transformers to include new
DM0T 50 to 150A types.
The new transformers are
tested according to a class 1
accuracy and reduce line
current to a 5A secondary
value. They have screw
terminals on the secondary
and sealable terminal blocks
are standard supplied.
Automatic power
factor controllers
DCRL (96x96mm)
The new DCRL3 and DCRL5
power factor controllers have
3 and 5 steps respectively
built in to connect capacitor
banks. When needed, two
extra steps can be added by
installing the EXP10 06
expansion module to obtain a
maximum of 7 steps in total.
The backlight icon LCD
viewing is made up of
symbols and texts which offer
a clear, intuitive image of the
installation status. The
controllers are equipped with
all the functions and alarms to
guarantee long capacitor
bank life.
An optical communication
port is available on the
controller front and provides
for controller setup,
programming and data
collection for diagnotics and
elaboration, in a safe way, by
using the CX01 or CX02
dongle, without having to
disconnect and open the
electrical panel.
Automatic transfer
switch controllers
ATL 600 / 610
(144x144mm)
The automatic transfer switch
controllers ATL 600 and
ATL 610 permit to supervise
two power sources interacting
with the user through the
backlight graphic LCD and
LED synoptic capable of
viewing the installation status,
with complete text and
graphs.
The ATL 610 version has the
12 or 24VDC supply inputs in
addition to the 110240VAC
inputs of the ATL 600 type,
and comes equipped with two
expansion slots for EXP series
modules to combine
additional digital inputs and
outputs and communication
function, such as USB,
RS232, RS485, Ethernet. In
this way, the ATS switchboard
can be remotely controlled
through supervision software.
Communication devices CX
The CX communication dongles available as USB and
Wi-Fi versions allow connection between tablets,
smartphones, PCs and LOVATO Electric products with
front optical communication interface.
Dual power supply

module ATL DPS1
LOVATO Electric release a
dual power supply module for
the product offering of
automatic transfer switching.
This new device is capable of
checking the voltage values at
its inputs and identifying
which is the ideal to use and
connect to its output.
ATL DPS1 is suitable to
supply motorised changeover
switches and circuit breakers.
The module functionality is
done by a microprocessor.
The two single-phase voltage
inputs are independent,
isolated from each other and
each capable of supplying the
internal measuring circuit.
Additional controls are made
on the output voltage to check
that the device operation is
correctly carried out. In case
of malfunction, the red LED
will switch on to signal it;
voltage flow is stopped and
not available at output
terminals. The green LEDs on
the module front permit to
constantly monitor the status
of the power sources,
availability of input lines and
presence of the module
output voltage.
APP
Configuration and
maintenance operations, often
done in intolerable ambiance
due to weather or noisy
conditions, are now easier to
do for all LOVATO Electric
products with communication
interface on front compatible
with CX02 dongle. Indeed,
tablets and smartphones with
Android or iOS operating
system can connect to them
using the new application
called
directly
downloadable from Google
Play or iTunes. Therefore, it is
no longer necessary to
connect and switch on a PC
using cables to change
configurations, set up
parameters or even clone
device programming. With
this APP, a file previously
saved can be uploaded;
commands can be sent;
measured quantities can be
read from LOVATO Electric
devices. The events can be
viewed and saved in a text file
and later copied and sent by
email.
The story of a family,

the spirit of a company
Since 1922
Italian design
LOVATO Electric head offices were first established in

Bergamo, Italy, in 1922: the starting point of a great
industrial adventure. The Cacciavillani family has
managed the company for four generations.
In the Bergamo headquarters, the research staff and design

experts develop both innovative and reliable products by
taking advantage of the most modern tool and software
systems available in the marketplace.
Making reliable, innovative products and

offering services to meet customers
expectations, continue to be our companys
mission since four generations.
Massimiliano Cacciavillani
Managing Director
Leading-edge manufacturing facilities

LOVATO Electric design and make products with the most
advanced technology.
Highly qualified technical assistance

A team of specialised technicians provide quick and professional
assistance relating to products and applications.
The Technical Assistance office specialises in all pre- and post-sales
activities giving customers all the necessary support for:
- Product selection
- Product designation
- Certifications
- Cross-reference with
competitors products
- Product commissioning
- Assistance in case of malfunction
International presence
LOVATO Electric presence in the major world markets is the result
of the perpetual internationalisation strategy.
LOVATO Electric Italy together with its foreign subsidiary
companies and network of importers represent the reference
point for the global distribution of its products in over 100 countries.
UNITED KINGDOM
LOVATO ELECTRIC LTD
www.Lovato.co.uk
GERMANY
LOVATO ELECTRIC GmbH
www.LovatoElectric.de
SPAIN
LOVATO ELECTRIC S.L.U.
www.LovatoElectric.es
UNITED STATES
OF AMERICA
LOVATO ELECTRIC INC.
www.LovatoUsa.com
CANADA
LOVATO ELECTRIC CORP.
www.Lovato.ca
POLAND
LOVATO ELECTRIC SP. Z O.O.
www.LovatoElectric.pl
ITALY
LOVATO ELECTRIC S.p.A.
www.LovatoElectric.com
CZECH REPUBLIC
LOVATO ELECTRIC S.R.O.
www.LovatoElectric.cz
TURKEY
.
LOVATO ELEKTRIK LTD
www.LovatoElectric.com.tr
UNITED ARAB
EMIRATES
LOVATO ELECTRIC ME FZE
www.LovatoElectric.ae
ROMANIA
LOVATO ELECTRIC SRL
www.LovatoElectric.ro
CHINA
LOVATO ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO LTD
www.LovatoElectric.cn
11
foreign
subsidiaries
90
importers
Present in over
100
countries
Successful products and

solutions
Machine builders
(OEM)
Pumping, irrigation
and piping
Power factor
correction
Lifting systems
Motor protection circuit

breakers

breakers
Contactors

breakers
Contactors
Contactors
Fuse holders
Contactors

Miniature and residual

circuit breakers
Soft starters
Soft starters
Soft starters
AC motor drives
AC motor drives
Metering instruments and

CTs
Pushbuttons and selector

switches

switches
Automatic power factor

controllers

switches
Thyristor modules
Limit, micro and foot

switches
Rotary cam switches
Setup and remote control

software
Limit, micro and foot

switches
Rotary cam switches
Fuse holders

circuit breakers
Fuse holders
Fuse holders
AC motor drives

circuit breakers
Time relays

circuit breakers
Protection relays
Time relays
Protection relays
Time relays
Level control relays and

electrodes
Protection relays
Micro PLCs
Micro PLCs
CTs
Micro PLCs
Photovoltaic
applications
Generating sets
Electric power
distribution
Energy
management
Contactors

breakers

breakers
Soft starters
Fuse holders
Contactors
Micro PLCs
Fuses

switches

circuit breakers

CTs
Rotary cam switches
Changeover switches
Modular contactors

controllers
Fuse holders

CTs

circuit breakers
Time relays
Interface protection relays
Micro PLCs
Protection relays

CTs

circuit breakers
Automatic transfer switch

controllers
CTs
Engine and generator
controllers
Protection relays

controllers
AC motor drives

controllers
Engine and generator
controllers
Quality and certifications
LOVATO Electric S.p.A. was among the first Italian

companies, in 1992, to hold the quality management
system certification, in compliance with the standard
ISO 9001
also maintaining an Environment

Management System, certified
according to the standard
ISO 14001
Our laboratory is authorised to conduct

type testing for the emission of certification
ACAE/LOVAG
It covers an area of
2
subdivided in
diverse specialised sectors
850m
Qualified laboratory
according to standards
EN ISO/IEC 17025
Tests conducted according to
national and
international
standards prescriptions
Main tests:
- Making and breaking capacities
- Short-circuit with comparator system
- Temperature rise
- Thermal protection functionality
- Verification of dielectric properties
- Verification of terminals mechanical properties
- Verification of IK code degree of protection (impact withstand)
- Verification of IP code degree of protection (ingress protection
against water jets)
- Shock and vibration withstand
- Electrical and mechanical durability
- Low current-low voltage contact functionality
- Ambient simulation in climatic chamber
- Glow-wire ignitability of insulating parts
- Immunity to conducted and radiated emission fields
- Immunity to surges, fast transients / bursts and electrostatic
discharges.
International fairs
Dubai, Istanbul, Hanover, Moscow and Nuremberg are
just a few of the exhibition events
LOVATO Electric yearly take part in.
Training courses
- Basic level for entire production
- Advanced level with practical training
- Webinars.
General catalogue
22mm series
Digital measuring instruments
QUALITY TOUCH!
2014
2015
10mm
Order
code
Description
The external actuator bezel has a low profile

and reduced front thickness.
HIGH DEGREE OF PROTECTION

IEC IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL TYPE 4X
The actuators have been tested to ensure a degree of
protetection per IEC IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL type 4X,
appropriate for use even in extreme ambient conditions.
DMG 900T...
QUICK AND EASY ACTUATOR

INSTALLATION
REDUCED DIMENSIONS AND

INTERAXIS
DMG 900 L01
Graphic 128x112 pixel

1
touch-screen LCD,
harmonic analysis,
4 channels, auxiliary supply
100-440VAC/110-250VDC.
Multilanguage: English, Czech,
Polish, German and Russian
0.566

1
touch-screen LCD,
harmonic analysis, auxiliary
supply 12-24-48VDC
0.580
- The mounting adapter and the

actuators each have clearly visible
reference indications making the
snap-on fitting between the two
easy and intuitive.
DMG 900T
Measurement transducer,
1
harmonic analysis,
100-440VAC/110-250VDC,
RS232/RS485 port
0.570
1
harmonic analysis,
12-24-48VDC,
RS232/RS485 port
0.590
Remote display for DMG 900T...

DMG 900RD
Click!
DMG 900RD
22.5
(0.88)
- The new series provides a minimum

30x40mm (1.18x1.57in) pitch
between two actuators on a
mounting surface.
- Minimum pitch between drilled holes
for double and triple touch actuators
is 30x55mm (1.18x1.97in).
- Miniaturised size
- High electric conductivity - 5V 1mA
- Up to 9 contact elements can be
installed, 3 rows of 3 elements
- Screw or faston termination
- Contact operation: double breaking
action, direct opening operation and
self cleaning.
- There is an anti-rotation fastener,

duly sized to avoid actuator rotation
on the mounting surface and to give
an orientation reference point for
users during panel installation and
during contact fitting on the
actuator.
- This anti-rotation fastener collapses
inside the gasket to allow fitting also
when drilled holes are round without
reference index.
- The sealing gasket for the actuator
mounting surface has a gripping
action (suction effect) offering a
surface prefixing property.
- Total depth, from the external

mounting surface to the end of
the first contact element is merely
43mm (1.69in).
Order
code
Graphic 128x112 pixel touch 1

screen LCD, with 3m/9.8ft
long connecting cable
0.396
Description
DMG 900 and DMG 900 T EXPANSION MODULES.

Inputs and outputs.
EXP10 00
HIGH-LUMINOSITY LED
INTEGRATED LAMP HOLDERS
4 digital opto-isolated inputs
EXP10 01
4 static opto-isolated outputs
EXP10 02
2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated
EXP10 03
2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC
EXP10 04
2 analog opto-isolated inputs 0/4-20mA or

PT100 or 0-10V or 0...5V
EXP10 05
2 analog opto-isolated outputs 0/4-20mA or

0-10V or 0...5V
Communication ports.
43mm (1.69in)
- Electrical contacts and LED lamp
holders are snapped onto the
mounting adapter.
0.566
DMG 900T D048
30
(1.18)
- Actuator fixing on the mounting

surface, through a 22mm/0.87in
drilled hole, is obtained using its
threaded ring, easily rotated by
hand or by socket spanner/wrench.
[kg]
DMG 900 D048
CONTACT ELEMENTS
30
(1.18)
Click!
Wt
n
1
touch-screen LCD,
harmonic analysis,
100-440VAC/110-250VDC.
Multilanguage: Italian,
English, French, Spanish
and Portuguese
DMG 900...
CUSTOMISING CAPABILITY
To simplify stock management, the new series allows
quick replacement of the actuator cap or lens of spring
return types since these are also sold as accessories.
Qty
per
pkg
DMG 900
LOW ACTUATOR PROFILE
40 (1.57)
GENERAL
CATALOGUE
Flush mount LCD touchscreen power analyzers,

expandable
40 (1.57)
- Product information
- Overall dimensions
- Wiring diagrams
- Technical characteristics.
- Miniaturised size
- Long electrical life: 100,000h
- Over-voltage protection
- Withstand to vibrations
- Protection against stray currents in
wiring
- Flickering phenomenon reduction
- Steady and flashing light versions
- Supply voltages:
18-30VAC/DC
85-140VAC
185-265VAC.
EXP10 10
Opto-isolated USB interface
EXP10 11
Opto-isolated RS232 interface
EXP10 12
EXP10 13
Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with Web

server function
EXP10 14
Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface
EXP 10...
EXP10 15
GPRS/GSM modem
EXP10 30
Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup

battery for data logging
EXP10 31
Data storage, with Energy Quality (EN 50160),

clock-calendar (RTC) with backup battery for
data logging
General characteristics
DMG 900... expandable digital power analyzers are available
with a flush-mount housing, 96x96mm/3.8x3.8in size. The
wide graphic touch screen display provides extremely simple
interacting between the instrument and the user.
The high performance of the power analyzers gives very
accurate measurements and can control energy distribution
systems, to detect and prevent energy problems which could
compromise quality and supply.
The main features include an extensive power supply voltage
range, high measurement accuracy, expandability up to 4
plug in expansion modules.
There also is available the DMG 900T measurement
transducer which can be used with the DMG 900RD remote
display. The DMG 900T, without display, is arranged for
mounting inside the panel board, on 35mm DIN rail, and is an
ideal solution for installations where the measurements of
various multimeters must be remotely viewed.
The DMG 900RD remote display connected to the DMG 900T
transducer can display the measurements on the panel front
while power connections remain inside the panel.
Main measurements and functions include:
Voltage: phase, line and system values (neutral-earth too)
Supply voltage value for the DC supply type only
Current: phase values
Neutral current calculated and true values
Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total values
P.F.: Power Factor per phase and total
Cos per phase and total
Frequency of measured voltage value
Voltage and current asymmetry
Total harmonic distortion (THD) of voltage and current
Harmonic analysis of voltage and current up to the 63 order
HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions for all measurements
Maximum demand of power and current values
Flow direction of harmonic power values
Energy meters for active, reactive, apparent partial and
total values with programmable tariff functions
Hour counter for programmable total and partial hours
Pulse counter for general use: pulse counting for water,
gas, etc. consumption with expansion module only
Energy quality analysis to EN 50160 with expansion
module only.
Operational characteristics
Auxiliary supply voltage range:
90-484VAC / 93.5-300VDC for DMG 900 and DMG 900T;
9-70VDC for DMG 900 D048 and DMG 900T D048
Voltage measurement range:
20-830VAC phase-to-phase
10-480VAC phase-neutral
Use in medium and high-voltage systems with voltage
transformers
Rated input current: 5A or 1A by CT
Current measurement range: 0.01-10A or 0.002-1.2A
Current measurement range with CT up to 10,000A
Frequency measure range: 45-66Hz / 360-440Hz
True RMS measurements for voltage and current values
Accuracy:
Voltage: 0.2% (50-830VAC)
Current: 0.2% (0.1-1.1In)
Power: 0.5% f.s.
Power factor: 0.5%
Frequency: 0.05%
Active energy: Class 0.5S (IEC/EN 62053-22)
Reactive energy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-23)
Non-volatile memory for data and event (last 100) storage
Communication protocol Modbus-RTU, ASCII and
TCP with communication expansion modules only
Programming and remote control by software with
communication expansion modules only
Housing:
Flush mount 96x96mm/3.8x3.8in for DMG900... and
DMG 900RD
35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) fixing for DMG 900T
IEC protection degree: IP65 on front for DMG 900... and
DMG 900RD; IP20 at terminals for DMG 900... - DMG 900T.
EXP10 series expansion modules and accessories
See pages 22-28 and 29.
Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: GOST and UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices-Multimeter for all.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n14.
7-2
Software and accessories

page 22-29
Expansion modules
page 22-28
Dimensions
page 22-32
Wiring diagrams
page 22-35
Technical characteristics
page 22-42
Other literature
- Brochures and pamphlets
- Technical instructions.
22-15
22
LovatoElectric.com
-
Youtube Channel
New products
- Download:
General catalogue
Videos
Online news
Leaflets and technical
instructions
Fairs
Events and training sessions Software upgrade
Contacts
Drivers and utilities
2D / 3D CAD drawings.
Social Networks
Page 1-2
SM1A
Thermal trip adjustment ranges 9-32A
(5 choices)
IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V:
50kA
Suitable for mounting in consumer
switchboards, minimum 58mm/2.3in deep.
Page 1-2
SM1C
Same characteristics per SM1B breaker
Page 1-3
SM3A
(4 choices)
50kA.
Page 1-2
SM1B
Thermal trip adjustment ranges 0.1-32A
(15 choices)
100kA (ranges 0.1-10A)
25kA (ranges 9-32A)
Page 1-3
SM2A
(3 choices)
50kA.
Page 1-10
LMS25
Thermal trip adjustment ranges 0.1-25A
(13 choices)
100kA (ranges 0.1-6.3A)
6kA (ranges 6.3-10A)
4kA (ranges 10-25A)
MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Wide adjustment range

0.1 to 100A
IEC breaking capacity Icu 50kA
(400V) up to 100A
Suitable for isolation
Comprehensive line of accessories
Front mount contacts
Automatic trip indicators
High reliability and accuracy of
tripping.
Short-circuit tripping indicator, standard supplied

on all circuit breakers, type SM1.
Reset the indicator, as illustrated, to restore the
breaker.
2
3
4
8
10
11
1 - 12
1 - 15
1 - 16
P ROTECTION
Dimensions .................................................................................................................
Wiring diagrams ...........................................................................................................
Technical characteristics .................................................................................................
1
1
1
1
1
1
AND
Breakers SM1A, SM1B and SM1C ......................................................................................................................................

Breakers SM2A and SM3A .................................................................................................................................................
Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1A, SM1B and SM1C ...............................................................................................
Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2A and SM3A ..........................................................................................................
Starters LMS25 .................................................................................................................................................................
Add-on blocks and accessories for LMS25 .........................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
M OTOR C ONTROL

With thermal and magnetic trip releases
1

breakers SM1 up to 32A
Order
code
11 SM1B...
11 SM1C...
Short circuit Qty

breaking
per
capacity
pkg
at 400V
Icu
Ics
Wt
The SM1 is a modern series of circuit breakers with
thermal and magnetic trip releases and high breaking
capacity. Motor control and protection, up to 15kW at
400V/20HP 480V/30HP 600V, are possible by choosing
the suitable adjustment range, 0.1 to 32A.
A magnetic trip indicator integrated on the SM1 breakers
avoids dangerous closing operations during short-circuit
conditions, previously disconnected by the breaker.
The SM1 types are suitable for isolation according to
IEC/EN 60947 standards.
Their high breaking capacity consents to exclude
protection fuses on the majority of the installations.
[A]
[kA] [kA] n
[kg]
IEC breaking capacity Icu 50kA at 400V.
11 SM1A 40
9-14
50
25
5
0.352
11 SM1A 44
13-18
50
25
5
0.352
11 SM1A 48
17-23
50
25
5
0.352
11 SM1A 52
20-25
50
25
5
0.352
11 SM1A 56
24-32
50
25
5
0.352
IEC breaking capacity Icu 100kA (0.1-10A) / 25kA (9-32A) at 400V.
11 SM1B 00
0.1-0.16
100
100 5
0.278
11 SM1B 04
0.16-0.25 100
100 5
0.278
11 SM1B 08
0.25-0.4
100
100 5
0.278
11 SM1B 12
0.4-0.63
100
100 5
0.278
11 SM1B 16
0.63-1
100
100 5
0.278
11 SM1B 20
1-1.6
100
100 5
0.278
11 SM1B 24
1.6-2.5
100
100 5
0.352
11 SM1B 28
2.5-4
100
100 5
0.352
11 SM1B 32
4-6.5
100
100 5
0.352
11 SM1B 36
6.3-10
100
100 5
0.352
11 SM1B 40
9-14
25
12.5 5
0.352
11 SM1B 44
13-18
25
12.5 5
0.352
11 SM1B 48
17-23
25
12.5 5
0.352
11 SM1B 52
20-25
25
12.5 5
0.352
11 SM1B 56
24-32
25
12.5 5
0.352
IEC breaking capacity Icu100kA (0.1-10A) / 25kA (9-32A) at 400V.
Suitable for mounting in modular consumer switchboards .
11 SM1C 00
0.1-0.16
100
100 5
0.278
11 SM1C 04
0.16-0.25 100
100 5
0.278
11 SM1C 08
0.25-0.4
100
100 5
0.278
11 SM1C 12
0.4-0.63
100
100 5
0.278
11 SM1C 16
0.63-1
100
100 5
0.278
11 SM1C 20
1-1.6
100
100 5
0.352
11 SM1C 24
1.6-2.5
100
100 5
0.352
11 SM1C 28
2.5-4
100
100 5
0.352
11 SM1C 32
4-6.5
100
100 5
0.352
11 SM1C 36
6.3-10
100
100 5
0.352
11 SM1C 40
9-14
25
12.5 5
0.352
11 SM1C 44
13-18
25
12.5 5
0.352
11 SM1C 48
17-23
25
12.5 5
0.352
11 SM1C 52
20-25
25
12.5 5
0.352
11 SM1C 56
24-32
25
12.5 5
0.352
11 SM1A...
to
va
Lo
Thermal
trip
adjustment
range
T
TES
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage: 6kV
IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz
Maximum rated current: 32A
Number of adjustment ranges:
SM1A: 5 (9 to 32A)
SM1B: 15 (0.1 to 32A)
SM1C: 15 (0.1 to 32A)
IEC breaking capacity: see page 1-17
Power dissipation: 2.2-9.7W
Magnetic tripping: 12In max
IEC thermal tripping class: 10A
Phase failure / Single phase sensitive
Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles
Electrical life: 100,000 cycles
Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
Mounting position: Any
IEC utilisation category: A
IEC degree of protection: IP20.
Certifications obtained: EAC; and UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93602); CCC for some SM1B types
only (consult Customer Service for details; see contact
details on inside front cover).
See UL/CSA details under NOTE on the bottom left side.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
2.3Nm/20lbin
max
1Nm/9lbin
max
ov
ato
TES
1Nm/9lbin
max
NOTE: When more than one breaker are mounted, side by side, without
leaving space between each to consent free air circulation on the
breaker sides, and have simultaneous operation, the thermal trip
adjuster must be positioned at a value 15% higher than the rated motor
current.
The SM1C version permits mounting in enclosures and modular
consumer switchboards with minimum depth of at least 45mm between

the DIN rail and the opening. See page 1-12 for exact breaker dimensions.
No front-mount auxiliary contacts 11 SMX11... can be used.
Maximum UL/CSA horsepower rating

Type
Thermal
adjustment range
[A]
120V
480V
600V
[A]
SM100
0.1-0.16
0.16
SM104
0.16-0.25
0.25
SM108
0.25-0.4
0.4
SM112
0.4-0.63
0.63
1 Phase [HP]
General use
at 600V (FLA)
3 Phase [HP]
230V 200-208V 230V
SM116
0.63-1
/2
SM120
1-1.6
/4
1.6
NOTE:
All data mentioned is valid for 11SM1A, 11SM1B
and 11SM1C types; UL Listed in USA and Canada
as manual motor controller suitable as motor
disconnect, delivering not more than 5000rms
symmetrical amperes, 600VAC, and use with class J
fuses only. Trip current is 120%.
SM124
1.6-2.5
/6
11/2
2.5
/4
11/2
6.5
SM144
The appropriate thermal trip range of the

controller should be selected on the basis of the
motor nameplate full-load current since the
horsepower ratings given are for indication and
reference purposes only.
Single-phase horsepower ratings are based on
wiring the three poles in series; see wiring
scheme on page 1-15.
1-2
Add-on blocks/Accessories
pages 1-4 to 7
SM128
2.5-4
SM132
4-6.5
SM136
6.3-10
SM140
9-14
/8
/10
/3
/2
/4
/2
/2
/2
11/2
11/2
71/2
10
/4
10
10
14
13-18
10
15
18
SM148
17-23
11/2
71/2
15
20
23
SM152
20-25
71/2
15
20
25
SM156
24-32
10
10
20
30
32
/4
/2
Dimensions
pages 1-12 and 13
Wiring diagrams
pages 1-15 and 16
pages 1-16 and 17

With thermal and magnetic trip releases
breakers SM2A - SM3A
up to 100A
Order
code
Thermal
trip
adjustment
range
Short circuit Qty

breaking
per
capacity (IEC) pkg
at 400V
Icu
Ics
Wt
[A]
[kA]
[kA] n
[kg]
The SM2A and SM3A types are circuit breakers with a
wide adjustment range, 28 to 100A, in only two frame
sizes enabling motor control and protection up to 45kW
at 400V/75HP 480V/100HP 600V.
A magnetic trip indicator and padlockable operating
handle are integrated on the SM2A and SM3A breakers.
Both are suitable for isolation according to IEC/EN 60947
standards.
Their high breaking capacity consents to exclude
protection fuses on the majority of the installations.

11 SM2A 68
28-40
50
25
1.040
11 SM2A 72
36-45
50
25
1.040
11 SM2A 76
40-50
50
25
1.040

11 SM3A 84
45-63
50
25
2.266
11 SM3A 88
57-75
50
25
2.266
11 SM3A 92
70-90
50
25
2.266
11 SM3A 96
80-100
50
25
2.266
Maximum rated current: 50A (SM2A) and 100A (SM3A)
Number of adjustment ranges:
SM2A: 3 (28 to 50A)
SM3A: 4 (45 to 100A)
IEC breaking capacity: See table on page 1-17
Power dissipation:
SM2A: 7.1-20W
SM3A: 10-38W
IEC thermal tripping class: 10
Life (cycles):
Mechanical Electrical (Ie AC3)
SM2A 50,000
25,000
SM3A 50,000
25,000
Mounting:
SM2A - Screw fixing or on 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715)
SM3A - Screw fixing or on DIN rail 35mm
(IEC/EN 60715) or 75mm (IEC/EN 60715)
11 SM2A...

Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E155982); CSA certified (File 73212).
See UL/CSA details under NOTE below bottom table.
IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
11 SM3A...
adjuster must be positioned at a value 15% greater than the rated
motor current.

1 Phase [HP]
(not mentioned
by UL/CSA)
Type
Thermal
adjustment range
FLA
max at
600V
[A]
120V
SM2A 68
28-40A
71/2
SM2A 72
36-45A
71/2
15
15
30
40
45
175
SM2A 76
40-50A
10
15
20
40
50
50
200
SM3A 84
45-63A
15
20
25
50
60
63
250
SM3A 88
57-75A
71/2
15
25
25
60
75
75
300
SM3A 92
70-90A
10
20
30
30
75
100
90
350
SM3A 96
80-100A
10
20
40
40
75
100
100
400
3 Phase [HP]
230V 200-208V 230V

15
15
Max
Fuse /
CB
480V
600V
[A]
[A]
30
40
40
150
NOTE:
For SM2A types: UL Listed for USA and Canada and CSA certified as manual motor controller, short circuit 65kA 480V; 25kA 600V; max fuse / CB (see table).
Suitable for group installation.
CSA: Maximum fuse / CB 350A. UL: SPCD according NEC; suitable as motor disconnect 600Y/347V.
Suitable as tap conductor protection in group installation 65kA 480Y/277V, 25kA 600Y/347V. Maximum fuse / CB 500A. Trip amps 125%.
For SM3A84 and SM3A88 types: UL Listed for USA and Canada and CSA certified as manual motor controller, short circuit 65kA 480V; 30kA 600V; max fuse /
CB (see table). Suitable for group installation.
Suitable as tap conductor protection in group installation 65kA 480Y/277V, 30kA 600Y/347V. Maximum fuse / CB 1200A. Trip amps 125% .
For SM3A92 and SM3A96 types: UL Listed for USA and Canada and CSA certified as manual motor controller, short circuit 65kA 480V; 10kA 600V; max fuse /
CB (see table). Suitable for group installation.
Suitable as tap conductor protection in group installation 65kA 480Y/277V. Maximum fuse / CB 1200A. Trip amps 125%.

pages 1-8 and 9
The appropriate thermal trip range of the controller should be selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current since the horsepower ratings
given are for indication and reference purposes only.
Single-phase horsepower ratings are based on wiring the three poles in series; see wiring scheme on page 1-15.
Dimensions
page 1-14
Wiring diagrams
pages 1-15 and 16
pages 1-16 and 17
1-3

Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1 types
Order code
Characteristics
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Add-on auxiliary contacts.
11 SMX11...
11 SMX12...
11 SMX11 20 Front mount 2NO
10
0.013
11 SMX11 11 Front mount 1NO+1NC
10
0.013
11 SMX12 11
Side mount 1NO+1NC
10
0.045
11 SMX12 02
Side mount 2NC
10
0.045
11 SMX12 20
Side mount 2NO
10
0.045
11 SMX13 11
Side-mount indicator
contacts for thermal and
magnetic tripping
1NO+1NC
10
0.045
Undervoltage trip releases.
11 SMX13 11
11 SMX14 BC
110VAC 50/60Hz
0.125
11 SMX14 CL
230VAC 50/60Hz
0.125
11 SMX14 EA
400VAC 50/60Hz
0.125
11 SMX15 CL
230VAC 50/60Hz
with early-make contacts
0.140
11 SMX15 EA
400VAC 50/60Hz
0.140
11 SMX14...
General and operational characteristics

ADD-ON AUXILIARY BLOCKS
Snap on to the front or the right side of the breaker
Maximum combination: 3 SMX... blocks with
6 auxiliary contacts in total of which 2 on front (SM1C
excluded) and 4 on the side
(2 normal contacts and 2 indicators)
IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith:
6A (2.5A for SMX11...)
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V (250V for
SMX11...)
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
C600 Q600 (C300 R300 for SMX11...)
Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm/9lbin
Conductor cross section minimum-maximum
(1 or 2 wires): 0.75-2.5 mm2 or 18/14 AWG
Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to 0.5
standard DIN 46880 module.
UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP RELEASE
Connectable to the left side of the breaker
Consumption in-rush/holding: 12/3.5VA
Drop-out voltage: 0.35-0.7Us
Pick-up voltage: 0.85-1.1Us
(1 or 2 wires): 0.75-2.5mm2 or 18/14 AWG.
Shunt trip releases.

11 SMX16 AF
24VAC 50/60Hz
0.124
11 SMX16 BC
110VAC 50/60Hz
0.124
11 SMX16 CL
230VAC 50/60Hz
0.124
11 SMX16 EA
400VAC 50/60Hz
0.124
0.049
Padlockable attachment for operating lever.

11 SMX18 10
3 padlocks max 5mm
Adjuster sealing kit.

11 SMX18 12
For all types
0.006
Padlockable door coupling handle.

11 SMX15...
11 SMX16...
11 SMX18 14
3 padlocks maximum
IP65. Red/yellow
0.720
11 SMX18 15
3 padlocks maximum
IP65. Black
0.760
10
0.048
For unused busbar terminals 10
0.005
Terminal block for busbar supply.

11 SMX90 30
For all types
Safety cover.
11 SMX90 31
Three-phase connection busbars 45mm/1.77 spacing.
11 SMX18 10
11 SMX90 30
11 SMX90 3...
11 SMX90 4...
11 SMX90 31
11 SMX90 32
For 2 breakers without

side-mount contacts
10
0.027
11 SMX90 33

side-mount contacts
10
0.050
11 SMX90 34

side-mount contacts
10
0.071
11 SMX90 35

side-mount contacts
10
0.092
SHUNT TRIP RELEASE

Connectable to the left side of the breaker
In-rush consumption: 20VA
Operating limits: 0.7-1.1Us
(1 or 2 wires): 0.75-2.5mm2 or 18/14 AWG.
TERMINAL BLOCK FOR BUSBAR SUPPLY
Imax 63A
Maximum tightening torque: 2.3Nm/20lbin
Conductor cross section minimum-maximum:
4-25mm2 or 10/4 AWG.
THREE-PHASE CONNECTION BUSBAR
Imax 63A
SMX90 3... 45mm/1.77 spacing to reduce the width
to the minimum
SMX90 4... 54mm/2.13 spacing to consent to fit one
side-mount auxiliary contact block on the breaker.
Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed, for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E93602), under motor
controllers, for auxiliary contacts, releases and
padlockable attachment of operating lever; CCC for
SMX12... and SMX13 11 auxiliary contacts.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.

11 SMX90 42
For 2 breakers complete with 10

side-mount contacts
0.031
11 SMX90 43

side-mount contacts
0.056
11 SMX90 44

side-mount contacts
0.081
11 SMX90 45

side-mount contacts
0.081
Not suitable for fixing on SM1C types.

Tripping is indicated by flag indicator on front.
1-4
Dimensions
pages 1-12 and 13
Wiring diagrams
pages 1-15 and 16

Order code
Characteristics
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Rigid SM1 breaker-contactor connections.

11 SMX90 03
SMX31 41
SMX31 42
SMX32 41
11 SMX90 03
For SM1 breaker with BG

mini-contactor.
10
0.025
SMX31 41
For SM1 breaker with

BF09A-BF25A contactor.
Complete with cover
10
0.044
SMX31 42

BF09D-BF25D and
BF09L-BF25L contactor.
Complete with cover
10
0.046
SMX32 41

BF26A-BF38A contactor.
Complete with cover
10
0.050
11 SMX90 10
Adapter plate for

direct-on-line starter (SM1
breaker and BG or
BF09A-BF38A contactors)
0.058
11 SMX90 12
Adapter plate for reversing

contactor assembly (SM1
breaker and BG or
BF09A-BF38A contactors)
0.095
11 SMX90 14
Adapter plate for star-delta

starter (SM1 breaker and
45mm/1.77 wide
contactors BF09A-BF38A)
0.118
11 SMX90 18
35mm DIN rail

(IEC/EN 60715) for cable
bypass of contactor used
with SMX90 14 plate
0.025
11 SMX90 19
35mm DIN rail extension
0.025
Adapter plates.
11 SMX90 10
11 SMX90 12
Surface mount enclosures.

11 SMX17 10
IP40. 100mm/4 wide
0.404
11 SMX17 11 IP40. 85mm/3.3 wide
0.358
0.341
11 SMX17 30 IP65. Grey-black.

For SMX17 10 and
SMX17 20 enclosures
0.110
11 SMX17 35 IP65. Red-yellow.

For SMX17 10 and
SMX17 20 enclosures
0.142
10
0.174
10
0.035
10
0.026
Flush mount enclosure.

11 SMX17 20
11 SMX90 14
IP40. 122mm/4.8 wide,

103x144mm/4.05x5.67
cutout
ACCESSORIES FOR ENCLOSURES.

Padlockable rotary actuator.

SM1 - CONTACTOR CONNECTION
The SMX90 03, SMX31... and SMX32 41 rigid
connections electrically and mechanically fasten
the breaker together with the contactor forming a
single-unit starter for quick installation on 35mm
DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
STARTER ASSEMBLY ADAPTER PLATES

The elements consent to preassemble starters and to
form trim and compact single-unit equipment for quick
and easy installation.
The starter adapter plates install on 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715).
SURFACE MOUNT ENCLOSURE
Top or bottom entry:
PG16 threaded knockouts for SMX17 10
22.5mm/0.88 knockouts for SMX17 11
Rear entry:
22.5mm/0.88 knockouts
Holds a SM1 breaker equipped with one side-mount
contact block, one front-mount block (except for
SM1C) and either one shunt or undervoltage release
Earth/ground terminal included
Operating temperature: -5...+40C
Storage temperature: -50...+80C.
FLUSH MOUNT ENCLOSURE
Use with breaker, complete with 1 front-mount (except
for SM1C) and 1 side-mount blocks and one shunt or
undervoltage release
103x144mm/4.05x5.67 cutout
ENCLOSURE ACCESSORIES
PADLOCKABLE ROTARY ACTUATOR:
Suitable for SMX17 10 or SMX17 20 type only
Raises the degree of protection of the enclosure
to IEC IP65
3 padlocks maximum.
ACTUATOR WITH EMERGENCY PUSH-BUTTON:
Suitable for SMX17 11 only
Raises the degree of protection of the enclosure to
IEC IP65.
Certifications obtained: EAC for all SMX... types and pilot
lights; UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus File E93602), under motor controllers, for SMX90 03,
SMX31 41 and SMX32 41 connections.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Actuator with emergency stop button.

11 SMX17 10
11 SMX17 11
11 SMX17 20
11 SMX17 40 IP65. For SMX17 11

enclosure
IP65 membrane complete with rim.
11 SMX17 45
For SMX17 11 enclosure
Neutral connection.
11 SMX17 50
For SMX17 10 and

SMX17 20 enclosures only
Pilot light.
11 SMX17 35
11 SMX17 40
23 NEONVV
Green
10
0.006
23 NEONRV
Red
10
0.006
50
0.002
Marking elements.
BFX30
Blank label for writing
To obtain IP65 degree of protection, mount the 11 SMX17 45 membrane.

The device obtained with this actuator is not suitable for isolation per
IEC/EN 60947-2 standards.
Complete with required voltage. Available voltages:
AC 50/60Hz 24/110/220-240 (indicate 220)/380-415 (indicate 380) VAC.
11 SMX17 45
Dimensions
pages 1-12 and 13
Wiring diagrams
pages 1-15 and 16
1-5

Combinations
Front-mount contacts
Side-mount contacts
Undervoltage trip release
Shunt trip release
Side-mount contacts
Undervoltage trip release with auxiliary
contacts
TEST
SMX14...
SMX16...
SMX15
SMX1311
SMX12...
SMX1311
SMX12...
SMX11...

Not suitable for use with SM1C type.

Only one add-on block can be fixed on the left side of the breaker.
One of the following combinations can be mounted on the right side of the breaker:
One each of SMX13 11 and SMX12...
or one only SMX13 11
or one only SMX12 ...
Three-phase connection busbars

SMX90 35
SMX90 30
SMX90 31
SMX90 34
ST
TE
SMX90 33
SMX90 32
ST
TE
Three-phase connection busbar,

45mm/1.77 spacing (breakers
without add-on blocks)
T
ES
T
ES
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
SMX90 45
SMX90 31
SMX90 30
SMX90 44
ST
TE
ST
TE
SMX90 43
ST
TE
SMX90 42
ST
TE
S
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
ST
TE
1-6
Dimensions
pages 1-12 and 13
Wiring diagrams
pages 1-15 and 16
Three-phase connection
busbar, 54mm/2.13
spacing (breakers with
add-on blocks)

Combinations
Rigid breaker-contactor connection and protection cover
ST
ST
TE
TE
SM1...
ST
TE
SM1...
SM1...
SMX32 41
SMX31 41
SMX31 42
SMX90 03
BG...
BF09-BF25
Padlockable attachment Adjuster sealing kit

for operating lever
BF26A-BF38A
Padlockable door coupling handle
SMX18 14
SMX18 15
SMX18 12
SMX18 10
Surface mount enclosure SMX17 10 or SMX17 11
Surface mount enclosure SMX17 11 complete with

emergency stop button SMX17 40.

SMX12...
TEST
SMX13 11
SMX17 40
SMX15...
SMX11...
SMX16...
SMX14...
Flush mount enclosure SMX17 20
SMX17 11

For BF09A-BF25A contactors.

For BF09D-BF25D and BF09L-BF25L contactors.
One only add-on block can be mounted on each
side of the breaker.
Dimensions
pages 1-12 and 13
Wiring diagrams
pages 1-15 and 16
1-7

Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2A and SM3A types
Order code
Characteristics
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
10
0.016

11 SMX20 11
11 SMX21 11
11 SMX20 11
Front mount 1 changeover

(SPDT)
11 SMX21 11
Front mount 1NO+1NC
10
0.018
11 SMX22 02
Side mount 2NC
0.046
11 SMX22 11
Side mount 1NO+1NC
0.046
11 SMX22 20
Side mount 2NO
0.046
11 SMX23 11
Side-mount indicator
1
contacts (1NO+1NC) for
thermal trip and (1NO+1NC)
for magnetic trip
0.092
Undervoltage trip releases.
11 SMX22...
11 SMX24 BC
110VAC 50/60Hz
0.136
11 SMX24 CL
230VAC 50/60Hz
0.136
11 SMX24 EA
400VAC 50/60Hz
0.136
11 SMX25 CL
230VAC (50/60Hz)
0.136
11 SMX25 EA
400VAC (50/60Hz)
0.136
Shunt trip releases.
11 SMX23 11
11 SMX26 AF
24VAC 50/60Hz
0.132
11 SMX26 BC
110VAC 50/60Hz
0.132
11 SMX26 CL
230VAC 50/60Hz
0.132
11 SMX26 EA
400VAC 50/60Hz
0.132
11 SMX28 05
IP65. 3 padlocks maximum. 1

Black colour
0.102
11 SMX28 10
IP65. 3 padlocks maximum. 1

Red-yellow colour
0.110
Padlockable door coupling rotary actuator.
See diagram on p. 1-16 for the exact operation.

ADD-ON AUXILIARY BLOCKS
Insert on the top front or snap on the left side of the
breaker
Maximum combination: 4 SMX... blocks with
8 auxiliary contacts in total of which 2 on front and 6
on the sides (2 normal contacts and 4 indicators)
IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith:
10A (2.5A for SMX21 11)
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
690V (250V for SMX20... and SMX21...)
A600 Q300 (C300 R300 for SMX20... and SMX21...)
Maximum tightening torque: 1.2Nm/10.3lbin
(1 or 2 wires): 0.5-2.5mm2 or 18/14 AWG.
UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP RELEASE
Snap on to the right side of the breaker
Consumption inrush/holding: 20.2/7.2 VA; 13/2.4 W
Drop-out voltage: 0.35-0.7Us
Pick-up voltage: 0.85-1.1Us
(1 or 2 wires): 0.5-2.5mm2 or 18/14 AWG.
SHUNT TRIP RELEASE
Snap on to the right side of the breaker
In-rush consumption: 20.2VA; 13W
Operating voltage: 0.7-1.1Us
(1 or 2 wires): 0.5-2.5mm2 or 18/14 AWG.
Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed, for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E93601), and CSA Certified
(File 703212), as Auxiliary Devices, for auxiliary contacts
and releases.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
11 SMX24...
11 SMX25...
11 SMX26...
1-8
Dimensions
page 1-14
Wiring diagrams
pages 1-15 and 16

Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2A and SM3A types
Combinations
SMX24...
SMX25...
SMX26...
LL
ato
ov
SMX23 11
SMX22...
SMX20 11
SMX21 11
Padlockable door coupling rotary actuator SMX28 05 - SMX28 10
max.
max
8mm
8mm
Minimum 75mm distance from door edge

(hinge side) for correct operation of door
shaft mechanism. See page 1-14 for more
details.
Dimensions
page 1-14
Wiring diagrams
pages 1-15 and 16
1-9

Manual motor starters
Manual motor starter

LMS25 up to 25A
Order code
Thermal
trip
adjustment
range
Short circuit Qty

breaking
per
capacity (IEC) pkg
at 400V
Icu
Ics
Wt
[A]
[kA]
[kg]
[kA] n
The LMS25 manual motor starter is particularly suitable for
controlling small operating machines.
Releases and auxiliary contacts make it also suitable for
more complex uses.
The LMS25 manual motor starter is suitable for isolation
according to IEC/EN 60947 standards.
Wall and flush-mount enclosures allow to install the LMS25
starter in the most disparate environmental conditions (dust,
humidity, aggressive environmental agents, etc.).
IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: 100kA (0.1-6.3A) /

6kA (6.3-10A) / 4kA (10-25A).
11 LMS 25...
11 LMS25 016T
0.1 - 0.16
100
100
0.193
11 LMS25 025T
0.16 - 0.25 100
100
0.193
11 LMS25 04T
0.25 - 0.4
100
100
0.193
11 LMS25 063T
0.4 - 0.63
100
100
0.193
11 LMS25 1T
0.63 - 1
100
100
0.193
11 LMS25 1V6T
1 - 1.6
100
100
0.193
11 LMS25 2V5T
1.6 - 2.5
100
100
0.266
11 LMS25 4T
2.5 - 4
100
100
0.266
11 LMS25 6V3T
4 - 6.3
100
100
0.266
11 LMS25 10T
6.3 - 10
0.266
11 LMS25 16T
10 - 16
0.266
11 LMS25 20T
16 - 20
0.266
11 LMS25 25T
20 - 25
0.266
Maximum rated current: 25A
13 adjustment ranges 0.1 to 25A
IEC breaking capacity: see table on page 1-17
Power dissipation: 2-15W
IEC thermal tripping class: 10
Electrical life 25A (IEC AC3): 100,000 cycles
Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or screw
fixing
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed for USA and Canada
(cULus - File E155982). See UL/CSA details under NOTE
below bottom table.
IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
adjuster must be positioned at a value 15% greater than the rated
motor current.

Type
Thermal
adjustment range
[A]
120V
LMS25 016T
0.1-0.16
LMS25 025T
0.16-0.25
LMS25 04T
0.25-0.4
LMS25 063T
0.4-0.63
LMS25 1T
0.63-1
1 Phase [HP]
230V 200-208V 230V

-
600V
[A]
0.16
0.25
0.4
0.63
/4
/4
1.6
2.5
/2
LMS25 2V5T
1.6-2.5
/2
11/2
LMS25 4T
2.5-4
/4
LMS25 6V3T
4-6.3
/2
11/2
11/2
6.3
LMS25 10T
6.3-10
/2
71/2
10
LMS25 16T
10-16
10
10
16
LMS25 20T
16-20
11/2
10
15
20
LMS25 25T
20-25
71/2
15
20
25
/4
/6
/4
/2
480V
1-1.6
/8
LMS25 1V6T
FLA max
at 600V
3 Phase [HP]
NOTE:
UL Listed in USA and Canada as manual motor controller. Fuses only 30A suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5000rms symmetrical
amperes, 600VAC. Trip current is 125%.

1-10
pages 1-11
The appropriate thermal trip range of the controller should be selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current since the horsepower ratings
given are for indication and reference purposes only.
Single-phase horsepower ratings are based on wiring the three poles in series; see wiring scheme on page 1-15.
Dimensions
page 1-15
Wiring diagrams
pages 1-15 and 16
pages 1-16 and 17

Add-on blocks and accessories for LMS25 types
Order code
Characteristics
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Add-on auxiliary contacts. Side mount.
11 LMH...
11 LMU... - 11 LMA...

ADD-ON AUXILIARY CONTACTS
Connectable to right or left side of starter
Maximum combination: 2 LMH... blocks, one on right
and one on left side of starter (4 auxiliary contacts max in
total)
IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 6A
IEC operational current AC15: 3.5A 230V; 2A 400V
IEC protection fuse (gL or gG): 6A maximum
(1 or 2 wires): 0.75-2.5mm2 or 18/14 AWG
Width of the auxiliary contacts LMH... equal to 0.5
standard DIN 43880 modules.
11 LMH 01
1NC
10
0.037
11 LMH 10
1NO
10
0.036
11 LMH 11
1NO + 1NC
10
0.042
11 LMH 20
2NO
10
0.037
To fit inside starter.

For all types
10
0.066
To fit inside starter.

For all types
10
0.064
UNDERVOLTAGE AND SHUNT TRIP RELEASES

Must be fitted inside the motor starter.
For all types
10
0.048
Release range
Operating range
On-load factor
For unused busbar

terminals
10
0.005
Undervoltage trip release.

11 LMU
Shunt trip release.
11 LMA
11 SMX90 32
Terminal block for busbar supply.

11 SMX90 30
Safety cover.
11 SMX90 31

11 SMX90 30
11 SMX90 31
11 SMX90 32

side-mount contacts
10
0.028
11 SMX90 33

side-mount contacts
10
0.050
11 SMX90 34

side-mount contacts
10
0.071
11 SMX90 35

side-mount contacts
10
0.092

11 SMX90 42
For 2 breakers complete 10

with side-mount contacts
0.031
11 SMX90 43

0.056
11 SMX90 44

0.081
11 SMX90 45

0.089
11 LMZ111 - 11 LMZ112
Surface mount enclosures.

11 LMZ 111
IP55. 80mm/3.15 wide
0.260
11 LMZ 112
0.273
Flush mount enclosures.

11 LMZ 113
0.204
11 LMZ 114
0.184
ACCESSORIES FOR ENCLOSURES.

Locking mechanism.
11 LMZ 105
11 LMZ113 - 11 LMZ114
3 padlocks maximum
10
0.091
For LMZ 111, LMZ113

and LMZ 114
0.051
For all types
10
0.010
23 NEONVV
Green
10
0.006
23 NEONRV
Red
10
0.006
Normal stop button. IP55 protection.

11 LMZ 106
Neutral connection.
11 LMN PE
Pilot light.
11 LMZ105
11 LMZ106
Spare rubber membrane complete with rim for enclosures.

11 LMM
For LMZ 111, LMZ113

10
and LMZ 114 enclosures
Undervoltage
Shunt
0.35-0.7Us
0.85-1.1Us
100%
0.7-1.1Us
TERMINAL BLOCK FOR BUSBAR SUPPLY

Imax 63A
Maximum tightening torque: 2.3Nm/20lbin
Conductor cross section minimum-maximum:
4-25mm2 or 10/4 AWG.
THREE-PHASE CONNECTION BUSBAR
Imax 63A
SMX90 3... 45mm/1.77 spacing to reduce the width to
the minimum
SMX90 4... 54mm/2.13 spacing to consent to fit one
side mount auxiliary contact block on the breaker.
SURFACE MOUNT ENCLOSURE
Top or bottom entry:
M25 threaded knockouts
Rear entry:
15.5mm/0.6 knockouts
Up to two auxiliary contact blocks may be mounted
Operating termperature: -5...+40C
Storage termperature: -50...+80C.
FLUSH MOUNT ENCLOSURE
Cutout size 70x115mm/2.76x4.53
Up to two auxiliary contact blocks may be mounted
Storage termperature: -50...+80C.
ACCESSORIES FOR ENCLOSURES
Locking mechanism:
Prevents closing operation: 3 padlocks maximum.
Emergency stop button:
Turn to release
Red push-button 35mm/1.38
NOTE: Once mounted on the enclosure, these accessories
raise the degree of protection from IP41 to IP55.
Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E155982), under motor controllers, for
auxiliary contacts and trip releases.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
0.012
M25 to PG16 entry adapter.

11 LMNPE
11 LM M25 PG16 For LMZ111 and

LMZ112 enclosures
10
0.009
Specify rated voltage. Add suffix 60 if frequency is 60Hz. Available voltages:

AC 50Hz
24/48/110/220-240 (indicate 220)/380-415 (indicate 380)/
440-460 (indicate 440)/480 and 575VAC.
Complete with required voltage. Available voltages:
AC 50/60Hz 24/110/220-240 (indicate 220)/380-415 (indicate 380) VAC.
23 NEON...V
Dimensions
page 1-15
Wiring diagrams
pages 1-15 and 16
1-11

Dimensions [mm (in)]
Breakers SM1A - SM1B
with side-mount auxiliary contacts only
SM1A - SM1B
with front and side-mount auxiliary contacts
44.5
(1.75)
4.8
(0.19)
SMX13 11
SMX12...
91
(3.58)
35.3
(1.39)
44.5
(1.75)
48.3
(1.90)
91
(3.58)
35.3
(1.39)
88
(3.46)
SMX14...
SMX15...
SMX16...
80.5
(3.17)
9
(0.35)
18
(0.71)
44.4
(1.75)
14.3
(0.56)
72.2
(2.84)
82.5
(3.25)
44.5
(1.75)
55.5
(2.18)
SMX12...
88
(3.46)
80.5
(3.17)
9
(0.35)
18
(0.71)
SMX14...
SMX15...
SMX16...
44.5
(1.75)
23.5
(0.92)
44.4
(1.75)
72.2
(2.84)
82.5
(3.25)
4.8
(0.19)
SMX13 11
SMX11...
SMX11 11
SMX11 20
SM1C
with side-mount auxiliary contacts only
91
(3.58)
35.3
(1.39)
44.5
(1.75)
4.8
(0.19)
SMX13 11
44.4
(1.75)
72.2
(2.84)
82.5
(3.25)
Breakers SM1 with SMX90 03 connector

and BG contactors
SM1 with SMX31 41 connector

and BF09A-BF25A contactors
160
(6.30)
44.5
(1.75)
184.2
(7.25)

and BF26A-BF38A contactors
44.5
(1.75)
102.8
(4.05)
44.5
(1.75)
85
(3.35)
44.5
(1.75)
SMX90 03

and BF09D/L-BF25D/L contactors
SMX31 41
SMX31 42
SM1... with SMX18 14 or SMX18 15 door coupling handle
94
(3.70)
82.9
(3.26)
45.1
(1.77)
min. 140 / max. 395

(min 5.51 / max 15.55)
104.5
(4.11)
22.5
(0.88)
36 (1.42)
22
(0.87)
61.8 (2.43)
65
(2.56)
110
(4.33)
90
(3.54)
22
(0.87)
SMX32 41
28...32
(1.10...1.26)
3 (0.12)
.6
(
0.1
SMX18 14
SMX18 15
1-12
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
23
(0.90)
16 (0.63)
28...32
(1.10...1.26)
36 (1.42)
SMX14...
SMX15...
SMX16...
184.2
(7.25)
88
(3.46)
SMX12...
44.5
(1.75)
80.5
(3.17)
9
(0.35)
18
(0.71)
193.2
(7.61)
SMX18 14
SMX18 15

Connection busbars 45mm/1.77 spacing
SMX90 32 - SMX90 33 - SMX90 34
Terminal block for

busbar supply
SMX90 30
Safety cover
SMX90 31
These elements mounted with SM1...

breakers with no auxiliary contacts
45 (1.77)
SMX90 3...
13.5
(0.53)
13.5
(0.53)
29 (1.14)
29 (1.14)
SMX90 30
SMX90 31
1 L1

SMX90 42 - SMX90 43 - SMX90 44
3 L2
5 L3
Terminal block for

busbar supply
SMX90 30
Safety cover
SMX90 31
These elements mounted with SM1...

breakers with auxiliary contacts SMX12... or SMX13 11
54 (2.13)
SMX90 4...
13.5
(0.53)
13.5
(0.53)
29 (1.14)
29 (1.14)
SMX90 30
SMX90 31
1 L1
3 L2
5 L3
Enclosures SMX17 10 with SMX17 30 or SMX17 35 handle
SMX17 11 with SMX17 40 button

85.4 (3.36)
134.4 (5.29)
.5 )
4 .18
(0
173 (6.81)
109 (4.29)
.5 )
4 .18
(0
170 (6.69)
181.2 (7.13)
109 (4.29)
170 (6.69)
181.2 (7.13)
164 (6.46)
100 (3.94)
SMX17 40
42 (1.65)
44.1 (1.74)
22.5
(0.88)
SMX17 3...
SMX17 20 with SMX17 30 or SMX17 35 handle
Cutout
39.4
(1.55)
144 (5.67)
94 (3.70)
164 (6.46)
122 (4.80)
23.1
(0.91)
19.2
(0.75)
PG16
SMX17 3...
14
(0.55)
103 (4.05)
1-13

Breakers SM2A with SMX2... contacts
10 (0.39)
SMX20 11
SMX21 11
SMX22...
17 (0.67) SMX24...
SMX25...
20
SMX26...
(0.79)
Breakers SM3A with SMX2... contacts

121 (4.76)
102 (4.01)
52 (2.05)
SMX20 11
SMX21 11
SMX24...
SMX25...
SMX26...
SMX22...
12
(0.47)
146 (5.75)
138 (5.43)
127 (5)
77 (3.03)
SMX24...
23 (0.90) SMX25...
SMX26...
SMX24...
SMX25...
SMX26...
5
(1.97)
18 (0.71)
45 (1.77)
116 (4.57)
150 (5.90)
165 (6.50)
155 (6.10)
89 (3.50)
125 (4.92)
89 (3.50)
45 (1.77)
85 (3.35)
130 (5.12)
140 (5.51)
SMX20 11
SMX21 11
9
(0.35)
5
(1.97)
SMX22...
SMX23 11
30
(1.18)
55 (2.16)
SMX23 11
18
(0.71)
SMX22...
SMX23 11
8 (0.31)
109 (4.29)
127 (5)
132 (5.20)
144 (5.67)
30
(1.18)
70 (2.75)
SMX23 11
9
(0.35)
18 (0.71)
18
(0.71)
SM2A with SMX28 05 or SMX28 10 door coupling handle

3.2 (0.12)
25
(0.98)
24.3
(0.96)
1...4 (0.04...0.16)
SMX28 05
SMX28 10
5
2.
2 .88
0
(
5
(1.97)
min. 55 / max. 130

(min 2.16 / max 5.12)
33
(1.30)
min. 75
(2.95)
17
(0.67)
132 (5.20)
SMX28 05
SMX28 10
25
(0.98)
3.2 (0.12)
24.3
(0.96)
140 (5.51)
1...4 (0.04...0.16)
2.
2 .88
(0
5
(1.97)
min. 131 / max. 327

(min 5.16 / max 12.87)
16
(0.63)
33
(1.30)
min. 75
(2.95)
17
(0.67)
132 (5.20)
55
(2.16)
Mounting on DIN rail.

SM3A with SMX28 05 or SMX28 10 door coupling handle
3.2 (0.12)
1...4 (0.04...0.16)
SMX28 05
SMX28 10
24.3
(0.96)
25
(0.98)
2.
2 .88
0
(
5
(1.97)
min. 55 / max. 104
(min 2.16 / max 4.09)
33
(1.30)
min. 75
(2.95)
17
(0.67)
158 (6.22)
SMX28 05
SMX28 10
3.2 (0.12)
1...4 (0.04...0.16)
24.3
(0.96)
165 (6.50)
25
(0.98)
2.
2 .88
(0
5
(1.97)
min. 105 / max. 327
(min 4.13 / max 12.87)
16
(0.63)
70
(2.75)
Mounting on DIN rail.
1-14
158 (6.22)
SMX20 11
SMX21 11
33
(1.30)
17
(0.67)
min. 75
(2.95)
8 (0.31)
138 (5.43)
153 (6.02)
169 (6.65)

Enclosures LMZ111 - LMZ112
with LMZ106 emergency stop button
Manual starters LMS25

with side-mount LMH... contacts
9 (0.35)
95.5
(3.76)
80
(3.15)
85
(3.35)
45
(1.77)
80
(3.15)
12.5
(0.49)
55
(2.16)
55
(2.16)
135
(5.31)
129
(5.08)
105
(4.13)
35
(1.37)
80
(3.15)
75
(2.95)
30.8
(1.21)
LMZ113 - LMZ114
with LMZ106 emergency stop button
38
(1.50)
4
(0.16)
LMH...
LMZ106
73.5
(2.89)
83
(3.27)
39
(1.53)
18.5
(0.73)
LMZ106
Cutout
Drilling for
surface fixing
69.5
(2.74)
115
(4.53)
60
(2.36)
55
(2.16)
105 (4.13)
126 (4.96)
M25
M4
M4
70
(2.75)
M4

SMX90 32 - SMX90 33 - SMX90 34
Terminal block for

busbar supply
SMX90 30
Safety cover
SMX90 31
These elements mounted with LMS25...

breakers with no auxiliary contacts
45 (1.77)
SMX90 3...
13.5
(0.53)
13.5
(0.53)
29 (1.14)
29 (1.14)
SMX90 30
SMX90 31
1 L1

SMX90 42 - SMX90 43 - SMX90 44
3 L2
5 L3
Terminal block for

busbar supply
SMX90 30
Safety cover
SMX90 31
These elements mounted with LMS25...

breakers with LMH... auxiliary contacts
54 (2.13)
SMX90 4...
13.5
(0.53)
13.5
(0.53)
29 (1.14)
29 (1.14)
SMX90 30
SMX90 31
1 L1
3 L2
5 L3
Wiring diagrams
MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SM1A. SM1B SM1C and SM2A SM3A and LMS25
Three-phase
LINE
L2
L3
L1
T1
T2
LOAD
T3
Singe phase or DC
LINE
L2
L1
T1
T2
LOAD
1-15

Wiring diagrams
ADD-ON BLOCKS
For SM1 types
Front mount auxiliary contacts
SMX11 11
SMX11 20
13
23
13
21
Side mount auxiliary contacts

SMX12 11
SMX12 20
SMX12 02
33
41
33
43
31
Side mount undervoltage trip releases

SMX14...
SMX15...
SMX13 11
41
57
65
D1
D1
Side mount shunt trip release

SMX16...
O7
C1
O8
C2
U<
U<
14
24
14
34
22
For SM2A and SM3A types

Front mount auxiliary contacts
SMX20 11
SMX21 11
12
14
13
21
42
34
44
32
42
58
Side mount auxiliary contacts

SMX22 11
SMX22 20
SMX22 02
33
41
33
43
31
41
66
57
65
D2
D2
Side mount undervoltage trip releases

SMX24...
SMX25...
SMX23 11
77
85
D1
D1
Side mount shunt trip release

SMX26...
O7
C1
O8
C2
U<
U<
14
11
34
22
42
34
44
32
42
58
66
78
86
D2
D2
Change in event of magnetic and/or thermal tripping.

Change in event of magnetic tripping.
NOTE: During breaker testing, only contacts 57-58 and 65-66 switch.
Side-mount auxiliary contacts

LMH 20
32
34
44
32
LMH 10
11
13
13
21
13
23
LMA...
LMU...
C1
D1
U<
C2
D2
14
22
43
31
14
14
24
43
12
33
31
33
The termination of the LMH...

auxiliary contacts has more than
one numbering due to the fact that
the block can assume various
mounting positions.
The numbering in boldface
indicates when it is mounted on the
left side of the breaker.
LMH 01
Inside-fitted undervoltage trip and shunt trip releases
LMH 11
44
For LMS25 types
34
THERMAL TRIP CHARACTERISTIC (AVERAGE TIME)
Three-phase balanced operation
Two-phase operation (phase failure/single phasing)

Opening time [s]
Opening time [s]
10000
2h
10000
2h
1h
1h
30min
30min
1000
1000
10min
10min
5min
5min
2min
100
2min
100
1min
1min
COLD
COLD
10
10
HOT
HOT
1
0.1
0.1
0.01
0.01
0.001
1.05 1.5 2
1 1.2
4 5 6 7 8 910
20
30 40 50 6070
100 x Ie[A]
0.001
Tripping times can have a 20% deviation with respect to the average tripping curve values above.
1-16
1.15 1.5 2
4 5 6 7 8 910
20
30 40 50 6070
100
x Ie[A]

TYPE
SM1A
SM1B
SM1C
SM2A
SM3A
LMS25
25
CONTACT AND RELEASE CHARACTERISTICS

Rated insulation voltage Ui
690
Rated impulse voltage Uimp
kV
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
Maximum rated current
32
32
32
50
100
Number of adjustment ranges
15
15
13
Power dissipation
2.2-9.7
2.2-9.7
2.2-9.7
7.1-20
10-38
2-15
Magnetic tripping
12 x In
12 x In
12 x In
13 x In
13 x In
12 x In
Mechanical life
cycles
100,000
100,000
100,000
25,000
25,000
100,000
Electrical life (Ie max AC3)
cycles
100,000
100,000
100,000
50,000
50,000
100,000
Nm
2.3
2.3
2.3
4.5
1.8
lbin
20
20
20
40
53
16
Tool
PH2
PH2
PH2
PZ2
Allen 4mm
PZ2
Maximum tightening
torque for terminals
Minimum-maximum conductor
section connectable 1 or 2 wires
AWG
Flexible without lug
16-10
16-10
16-10
18-3
10-1/0
14-8
mm2
1-6
1-6
1-6
0.75-25
10-50
0.75-4
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature Operating
-20...+60
-20...+60
-20...+60
-20...+70
-20...+70
-25...+60
Storage
-50...+80
-50...+80
-50...+80
-50...+80
-50...+80
-25...+70
Compensation
-20...+50
-20...+50
-20...+50
-20...+50
-20...+50
-5...+40
Screw fixing
or 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715)
Screw fixing
or DIN rail 35mm
(IEC/EN 60715)
or 75mm
(IEC/EN 60715)
Screw fixing
or 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715)
Maximum altitude
3000
Mounting position
Any
Mounting
35mm DIN rail

(IEC/EN 60715)
When fitting more than one breaker side by side, without leaving space between each to consent free air circulation on the breaker sides, and have simultaneous operation, the thermal trip adjuster must be
positioned at a value 15% higher than the rated motor current.
N.B. PH = Phillips; PZ = Pozidriv; Allen is metric type.
IEC breaking capacity

Type
IEC rated short-circuit breaking capacity [kA]

230V
Icu
Ics
400V
Icu
Ics
500V
Icu
Ics
690V
Icu
Ics
Protection fuses when I > Icu

(IEC gL or gG fuses)
230V
400V
500V
[A]
[A]
[A]
SM1A 40
100
100
50
25
10
100
80
63
SM1A 44SM1A 56
100
100
50
25
10
125
80
63
SM1B 00SM1B 20
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
SM1B 24SM1B 28
100
100
100
100
100
100
35
690V
[A]
SM1B 32
100
100
100
100
100
100
40
SM1B 36
100
100
100
100
42
21
63
50
SM1B 40
100
100
25
12.5
10
80
63
50
SM1B 44SM1B 56
100
100
25
12.5
100
80
63
SM1C 00SM1C 20
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
SM1C 24SM1C 28
100
100
100
100
100
100
35
SM1C 32
100
100
100
100
100
100
40
SM1C 36
100
100
100
100
42
21
63
50
SM1C 40
100
100
25
12.5
10
80
63
50
SM1C 44SM1C 56
100
100
25
12.5
100
80
63
SM2A 68 - SM2A 72
100
100
50
25
10
160
100
63
SM2A 76
100
100
50
25
10
160
100
80
SM3A 84
100
100
50
25
12
160
100
80
SM3A 88
100
100
50
25
160
125
100
SM3A 92 - SM3A 96
100
100
50
25
160
125
125
LMS25 016T...LMS25 1V6T
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
LMS252V5T
100
100
100
100
2.5
2.5
25
20
LMS25 4T
100
100
100
100
2.5
1.9
35
25
LMS25 6V3T
100
100
100
100
2.2
2.5
1.9
50
35
LMS25 10T
100
100
2.2
2.5
1.9
80
50
35
LMS25 16T
2.5
1.9
1.5
80
80
63
35
LMS25 20T - LMS25 25T
4.5
2.5
1.9
1.5
80
80
63
50
Fuses are used only in those cases when the value of short-circuit current at the breaker installation point exceeds the breaking capacity of the breaker.
Fuse not required.
1-17
Page 2-4
THREE-POLE CONTACTORS
IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at 40C: 16 to 1600A
IEC Ie ratings in AC3 440V duty: 6 to 630A
IEC Power ratings in AC3 400V duty:
2.2 to 335kW
UL/CSA ratings: 3 to 500HP at 480V and 600V
AC, DC and DC low-consumption coil.
Page 2-12
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS
WITH 2NO+2NC MAIN POWER POLES
IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at 40C:
20 to 60A
UL/CSA general use: 20 to 55A
Page 2-8
20 to 1600A
IEC Power ratings in AC1 400V duty:
14 to 950kW
UL/CSA general use: 16 to 1000A
Page 2-13
WITH 4NC MAIN POWER POLES AND FOR
PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS
25 to 40A and UL/CSA general use: 20 to 55A
for 4NC types
IEC 125A operational current in DC1 duty at
55C with 4NO main poles in series for
BFD80 types
Page 2-14
Pag. 2-15
CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR

CORRECTION
With limiting resistors included
IEC Power ratings at 400V: 7.5 to 60kvar
UL/CSA ratings: 9 to 65kvar at 480V;
10 to 70kvar at 600V
AC control coil.
CONTROL RELAYS
AC, DC and DC low-consumption coil
Screw or Faston termination
4, 8 or 11 auxiliary contact composition.
CONTACTORS
Three-pole versions up to 630A

in IEC AC3 duty
Four-pole versions up to 1600A
in IEC AC1 duty
Versions for power factor
correction up to 60kvar at 400VAC
Four-pole versions with 2NO+2NC
or 4NC main poles
Low-consumption versions with
DC control circuit for control relays
and 9-38A contactors in IEC AC3
duty
Versions with AC or DC control
Extensive choice of add-on blocks
and accessories
Certified by primary international
authorities.
Contactors
Three-pole .........................................................................................................................................................................
Four-pole ..........................................................................................................................................................................
Four-pole with 2NO and 2NC poles or 4NC poles ................................................................................................................
Four-pole with 4NO poles for photovoltaic applications ............................................................................................................
For power factor correction ...............................................................................................................................................
Control relays ....................................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
8
13
13
14
15
Add-on blocks and accessories

For BG series mini-contactors ............................................................................................................................................
For BF series contactors ....................................................................................................................................................
For B series contactors ......................................................................................................................................................
2 - 16
2 - 18
2 - 26
Spare parts
28
29
30
31
31
Dimensions .................................................................................................................
Wiring diagrams ...........................................................................................................
2 - 32
2 - 44
2 - 48
Positive (force) guided contacts .........................................................................................................................................
2 - 57
P ROTECTION
AND
2
2
2
2
2
M OTOR C ONTROL
AC coils for BF series contactors ........................................................................................................................................

DC coils for BF series contactors .......................................................................................................................................
AC/DC coils for B series contactors ....................................................................................................................................
Main contacts for BF series contactors ...............................................................................................................................
Main contacts and arc chutes for B series contactors .........................................................................................................
Contactors
BG series
mini-contactors
3 poles
IEC
Ie (AC3)
2
Unique features
Highly conductive auxiliary contacts with four
contact points
AC and DC versions of same size
Quick connect - snap on accessory mounting
Distinct contact status indication
Up to four auxiliary contacts can be mounted
Mechanical interlock only 5mm deep
Positive (force) guided contacts
(mechanically-linked per IEC)
Three-pole mini-contactors, 6 to 12A IEC AC3

duty / 3 to 7.5HP 480V - 3 to 10HP 600V UL/CSA
Four-pole mini-contactors, 20A IEC AC1 duty
Versions with 2NO+2NC main power poles
Highly conductive auxiliary contacts
AC or DC auxiliary supply
Low-consumption DC versions
Screw, faston and rear PCB solder pin
termination.
Coil in
AC DC
BG06
6A
9A
20A
BGF09
9A
20A
BGP09
9A
20A
BG12
12A
3 poles
4 poles
Three-pole contactors, 9 to 110A IEC AC3 duty /

5 to 75HP 480V - 7.5 to 100HP 600V UL/CSA
Four-pole contactors, 25 to 125A in AC1 duty
Power factor correction contactors, 7.5 to 60kvar
at 400V IEC / 9 to 65kvar at 480V UL/CSA
Types with 2NO+2NC or 4NC main power poles
Types for photovoltaic applications
Highly conductive auxiliary contacts
AC or DC auxiliary supply
Low-consumption versions for control relays and
9-38A contactors in IEC AC3 duty.
BF09
9A
25A
BF12
12A
28A
BF18
18A
32A
BF25
25A
BF26
26A
45A
BF32
32A
BF38
38A
56A
BF50
50A
90A
BF65
65A
110A
BF80
80A
125A
BF95
95A
BF110
110A
Low-consumption version.
3 poles
IEC
Ie (AC3)
Three-pole contactors, 110 to 630A IEC AC3 duty

Four-pole contactors, 160 to 1600A IEC AC1 duty
100 to 500HP 600V UL/CSA
Screw termination.
4 poles
Coil both
AC DC
IEC
Ith (AC1)
Coil both
AC DC
B115
110A
160A
B145
150A
250A
B180
185A
275A
B250
265A
350A
B310
320A
450A
B400
420A
550A
B500
520A
700A
B630
630A
800A
B630 1000
1000A
B1250
1250A
B1600
1600A
For AC1 / general use duty only.
General information - IEC contactors

Lovato Electric comprehensive line of contactors can be divided in to three basic configurations as illustrated
above. Each of these have unique features but all are designed for long life and have finger-safe protection.
Lovato Electric facilities, where these contactors are manufactured, work under ISO 9001 quality conditions, per
IQNet certification since 1992 and constantly maintained by passing yearly quality assurance audits. The design
and manufacture of the contactors and accessories have taken into consideration the most demanding
requirements of international standards.
Non-reversing and reversing IEC starters

Contactors can be combined with either manual motor starters of the SM series, providing thermal and magnetic
protection up to 100A, or single or three-pole thermal bimetallic overload relays, with or without single-phase
protection up to 420A, to obtain non-reversing or reversing starters. Equipment can be assembled together or
independently mounted through the use of specifically designed accessories.
Non-reversing starter
2-2
IEC
Coil in
IEC
Coil in
Ie
AC DC DC Ith AC DC DC
(AC3)
(AC1)
B series
contactors
Unique features
3 frame sizes offering 11 different contactors
Coil operates indifferently on AC or DC supply voltage
Coil with low in-rush and holding
Coil removable without disconnecting power wiring
Red indicator when contactor is energised
Unique right-angle magnet design - limits contact
bounce
Safety feature prevents contactor to be energised
without arc chute in place and locked
Convertible auxiliary contact block (2NO + 1NC or
1NO + 2NC), maximum of 4 blocks per contactor
for a total of 12 contacts
Contactor terminals with bolt, washer and nut
Simple horizontal or vertical interlock
IEC
Ith (AC1)
BG09
BF series
contactors
Unique features
Highly conductive auxiliary contacts with four
contact points
Quick connect - snap on accessory mounting
Distinct contact status indication
Up to four auxiliary contacts can be mounted
Mechanical interlock only 5mm deep
4 poles
Coil in
AC DC
Reversing starter
Contactors
Contactors BF00, BF09A ... BF38A
THE
IDEAL SOLUTION!
45mm WIDE CONTACTORS

Ratings up to 38A - 18.5kW IEC AC3 /
30HP UL - merely 45mm wide: exceptional
benefit for electric panel dimensions.
A1
A2
4-TERMINAL COIL
Connecting cables can be coupled to
the coil both on the line and load
ends of the contactor.
A1
A2
BUILT-IN SURGE SUPPRESSOR

The BF00 to BF38 contactors with standard voltage
DC coils include a built-in surge suppressor.
WIDE OPERATING RANGE

BF...D contactors are equipped with a wide
operating range coil and are particularly
useful in applications subject to
considerable voltage variations, such as in
electric traction railway equipment.
SIDE ADD-ON FOURTH

POLE
For the 45A and 56A AC1
ratings, a side-mount
fourth power pole can be
snapped on the three-pole
contactor.
This solution permits to optimise
inventory.
MECHANICAL INTERLOCK
Smaller-size contactors, 9
to 25A in AC3, can be
mechanically and
electrically interlocked with
larger-size contactors, 26 to
38A AC3.
The BFX50 01 mechanical interlock
comprises two built-in NC auxiliary
contacts to make the electrical
interlock as well.
STARTER ASSEMBLY
The assembly and wiring of

electromechanical starters is
extremely fast and reliable. Versatile
electrical and mechanical
connecting systems provide easy
and foolproof assembly of compact
starters.
LOW-CONSUMPTION COILS
The BF...L contactors feature a 2.4W low
consumption.
This characteristic widely allows their direct control
by PLC outputs.
TERMINAL ADAPTABILITY
Terminals are suitable for every type
of cable: flexible, rigid, according to
AWG standards and interlocked with
any type of cable terminal.
Power pole, auxiliary and coil
screws can be tightened using one
single type of screwdriver.
FRONT PROTECTION COVER FOR

BREAKER - CONTACTOR
CONNECTIONS
SNAP-ON INSTALLATION
The front cover, fixed between

breaker and contactor, provide
protection to the connections.
EFFORTLESS THERMAL
OVERLOAD RELAY LINK
IP20 CONNECTION SECURITY

35mm DIN RAIL MOUNTING AND
FIXING
Contactor mounting on and

removal from a 35mm DIN rail are
tool-less operations and are done
by simply applying pressure on the
contactor.
Mounting and removal of the addon auxiliary contacts and

accessories, along with BF09 to
BF38 AC contactor coil replacement
are quick and easy operations and
are done with no tools.
During the connection of the
thermal overload relay to the
contactor, its auxiliary contact is
simultaneously linked to the
contactor coil terminal rigid
connector.
The complete overload relay fixing
is obtained with one single
operation and without other
connections.
RUBBER PAD INSERT FOR NO DIN

RAIL SLIDING
The ease of terminal access and

space is combined with IP20 finger
safety, to prevent touching of live
parts.
A rubber insert prevents the

contactors from sliding on the
35mm DIN rail even when out of
tolerance or mounted vertically.
2-3
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with AC control circuit
2
BG06 A-BG12 A
BF09 A-BF25 A
BF26 A-BF38 A
BF50-BF110
B115-B180
Three-phase motor control in AC3 duty

Order code
B250-B400
UL/CSA details
Maximum IEC power at 55C (AC3)
AC coil
IEC operating current

Ith (AC1)
40C 55C 70C
Maximum UL/CSA horsepower ratings

Ie (AC3)
Single phase
Three phase
440V at 55C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V 120V 240V 200V 240V 480V
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
11 BG06 01 A
16
14
20
600V
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
12
6
(60C)
1.5
2.2
2.4
2.5
/3
11/2
18
15
9
(60C)
2.2
4.3
4.5
/2
11/2
20
18
15
9
(60C)
2.2
4.3
4.5
/2
11/2
20
18
15
9
(60C)
2.2
4.3 4.5 5
/2
11/2
20
18
15
12
(60C)
3.2
5.7
6.2
5.5
/2
11/2
71/2
10
25
20
18
2.2
4.2
4.5
4.8
5.5
7.5
/4
71/2
28
23
20
12
3.2
5.7
6.2
6.2
7.5
10
71/2
10
32
26
23
18
7.5
10
10
10
15
32
26
23
25
12.5
13.4
13.4
15
11
71/2
71/2
15
15
BF26 00 A 12
45
36
32
26
7.3
13
14
14
15.6
18.5
71/2
71/2
15
20
BF32 00 A 12
56
45
40
32
8.8
16
17
17
20
22
71/2
10
10
20
25
BF38 00 A
56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 38
11
18.5
18.5
18.5
20
22
71/2
10
15
30
30
11 BF50 00 12
90
80
65
50
14.3
25
27.2
27.2
33.2
43.5
25
10
10
15
30
40
11 BF65 00 12
110
90
70
65
18.5
33
36
36
45.3
59.7
30
20
25
50
60
11 BF80 00
125
100
80
80
23
41
46
46
56
74
37
25
30
60
75
11 BG06 10 A
11 BG09 01 A
11 BG09 10 A
11 BGF09 01 A
11 BGF09 10 A
11 BGP09 01 A
11 BGP09 10 A
11 BG12 01 A 12
11 BG12 10 A 12
BF09 01 A 12
BF09 10 A 12
BF12 01 A 12
BF12 10 A 12
BF18 01 A 12
BF18 10 A 12
BF25 01 A
BF25 10 A
11 BF95 00
125
100
80
95
27.6
50
55
55
56
74
45
30
30
60
75
11 BF110 00
125
100
80
110
33
61
66
70
59
80
45
30
40
75
100
11 B115 00
160
150
110
110
33
61
66
70
80
100
63
30
40
75
100
11 B145 00
250
235
190
150
46
80
88
93
100
120
75
50
50
100
125
11 B180 00
275
250
200
185
57
100
108
115
123
144
103
60
75
150
150
11 B250 00
350
300
250
265
83
140
155
164
176
212
156
75
100
200
250
11 B310 00
450
370
300
320
100
170
188
200
213
256
180
100
125
250
300
11 B400 00
550
430
360
420
130
225
247
263
271
352
208
125
150
350
400
11 B500 00
700
550
500
520
156
290
306
328
367
416
312
150 11
200 11
400 11
450 11
11 B630 00
800
640
540
630
198
335
368
368
368
440
368
200 11
250 11
500 11
500 11
850
700
For AC1/Resistive duty only, see page 2-8.
11 B630 1000 00 1000

11 B1250 24
1250
1050
880
No UL
11 B1600 24
1600
1360
1120
No UL
Complete order code with coil voltage digit or with voltage digit followed by 60 (if 60Hz).
Standard voltages are as follows:
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz
024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / 575 60 (V).
Example:
11 BG06 10 A230 for mini-contactor BG06, three poles, with one NO contact and
230VAC 50/60Hz coil.
11 BG06 10 A460 60 for mini-contactor BG06 with one NO contact and 460VAC 60Hz
coil.
The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the
digit of the coil voltage. Standard voltages are:
-- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) /
440-480V (indicate 440).
Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts and with
110-125VAC/DC coil.
The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors.
Other voltages available on request.
If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 BSL.00
If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 BL.00 .
2-4
Add-on blocks / Accessories

pages 2-16 to 27
Spare parts
pages 2-28 to 31
Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC. Available voltages are:
AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380
DC
48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220.
Example: 11 B145L 00 110 220 for contactor B145 without auxiliary contacts, with
110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 220-240VAC.
G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted.
Complete the order code with the digit of the coil voltage. For 110-125VAC (50/60Hz) indicate 110 or
220-240VAC (50/60Hz) indicate 220.
Example: 11 B1250 24 110 for contactor B1250, three poles, with 2NO+4NC auxiliary contacts and 110125VAC 50/60Hz coil.
Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V, consult Customer Service for
information; see contact details on inside front cover.
For voltages 024 / 230 / 400VAC 50-60Hz: 10 pieces/package.

For all other voltages: 1 piece/package.
Highly conductive auxiliary contact.
For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used.
11 No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.
12 Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact
details on inside front cover.
Dimensions
pages 2-32 to 38
Wiring diagrams
page 2-44
pages 2-48 to 71
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with AC control circuit

Certifications obtained:
UL
Canada
USA
Type
UL/CSA
General
(purpose) use
UL/CSA
Fuse class
Short circuit
current RMS
sym. 600VAC
[A]
Type/[A]
[kA] UL/CSA
16
K5/30
20
20
K5/30
K5/30
Clamp-screw
Clamp-screw
Faston
E
A
C
C
C
C
BG09 A
BG12 A 12
Incorporated Quantity Weight

auxiliary
per
contacts
pkg
BGF09 A
BF09 A 12
NO
NC
[kg]
BF12 A 12
10
0.180
BF18 A 12
10
0.180
BF25 A
10
0.180
BF26 A 12
10
0.180
BF32 A 12
10
0.180
BF38 A
10
0.180
BF50 12
BF65 12
B1250-B1600
Type of terminal
USA
C
S
A
BG06 A
B500-B630
B630 1000
UL
Register of
shipping
R
L
I
R
N
O
A
S
BGP... A
20
K5/30
Rear PCB solder pin
10
0.197
10
0.197
BF80
20
K5/30
Clamp-screw
10
0.180
BF95
10
0.180
BF110
0.367
B115
0.367
B145
0.367
B180
0.367
B250
0.367
B310
0.367
B400
0.367
B500
0.367
B630
B630 1000
25
28
32
32
RK5/60
RK5/70
RK5/80
RK5/100
Clamp-screw
Clamp-screw
Clamp-screw
Clamp-screw
45
RK5/100
Clamp-screw
0.432
55
RK5/125
Clamp-screw
0.432
B1250
55
RK5/150
Clamp-screw
0.432
B1600
90
RK5/200
Lug-clamp 13
1.350
110
RK5/225
10
Lug-clamp 13
1.350
125
RK5/250
10
Lug-clamp 13
1.360
125
RK5/250
10
Lug-clamp 13
1.360
125
RK5/250
10
Lug-clamp 13
1.360
160
RK5/500
Screw-nut
5.290
250
RK5/500
Screw-nut
5.400
275
RK5/500
10
Screw-nut
5.400
350
L/800
18
Screw-nut
9.575
450
L/800
18
Screw-nut
9.575
550
L/800
18
Screw-nut
9.575
700
L/1200
11
18 11
Screw-nut
18.000
800
L/1500
11
18 11
Screw-nut
18.620
1000
L/1500 11
18 11
Screw-nut
21.400
No UL
Screw-nut
48.000
No UL
Screw-nut
50.000
13
IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal.

pages 2-16 to 27
Spare parts
pages 2-28 to 31
Dimensions
pages 2-32 to 38
Wiring diagrams
page 2-44
Certified products.
UL
CSA
- UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602) for BG

BF110 types indicated, as Motor Controllers Contactors, except for
BGP09 types which are UL Recognized, for USA and Canada
(
File E93602 Component - Products having this type of
marking are intended for use as components of complete
workshop-assembled equipment).
BGP is UL rated up to 300V; for type with rating up to 600V,
consult Customer Service for information see contact details
on inside front cover.
UL Listed for USA only (File E93602) for B115B400 types
indicated, as Motor Controllers Contactors.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172189) for B500...
B630 1000 and B500 SL... B630 SL types as Industrial Control
Switches.
- BF09BF95 and B115B400 contactors are also CSA certified, for
Canada only (File 54332).
In addition, BF12, BF25, BF38 and BF65 types are CSA
certified as Elevator Equipment (File 54332, class 2411).
See technical characteristics on page 2-63 for BF12-BF38 and page
2-65 for BF65.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14 for all types; UL 60947-1,
UL 60947-4-1A, CSA C22.2 n 60947-1, CSA C22.2
n 60947-4-1 for B115... B630 1000 types.
Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN 60335;
for all BF09BF38 versions only, add suffix V260 to the
standard product order code.
Example: BF09 10 A230V260 for BF09, three poles, with one
NO contact and 230V 50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic
materials.
pages 2-48 to 71
2-5
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with DC control circuit
2
BF09 D-BF25 D
BF09 L-BF25 L
BG06 D-BG12 D
BG09 L
BF26 D-BF38 D
BF26 L-BF38 L
BF50 C-BF110 C
B115-B180
UL/CSA details
Three-phase motor control

Order code
DC coil
DC coil

Ith (AC1)
70C
Maximum UL/CSA horsepower ratings

Single phase Three phase
Ie (AC3)
440V
at 55C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V 120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
16
14
12
6
(60C)
1.5
2.2
2.4
2.5
/3
11/2
/2
11/2
/2
11/2
/2
Low consumption 40C

11 BG06 01 D
B250-B400
55C
11 BG06 10 D
11 BG09 01 D
11 BG09 01 L
20
18
4.3
4.5
11 BG09 10 L
15
9
(60C)
2.2
11 BG09 10 D
11 BGF09 01 D
11 BGF09 01 L 20
18
2.2
4.3
4.5
11 BGF09 10 D
11 BGF09 10 L
15
9
(60C)
20
18
15
9
(60C)
2.2
4.3
4.5
5
11/2
20
18
15
12
(60C)
3.2
5.7
6.2
5.5
11/2
71/2
10
25
20
18
2.2
4.2
4.5
4.8
5.5
7.5
/4
71/2
28
23
20
12
3.2
5.7
6.2
6.2
7.5
10
71/2
10
32
26
23
18
7.5
10
10
10
15
32
26
23
25
12.5 13.4 13.4 15
11
71/2
71/2
15
15
11 BGP09 01 D
11 BGP09 10 D
11 BG12 01 D 12
11 BG12 10 D 12
BF09 01 D 12
BF09 01 L 12
BF09 10 D 12
BF09 10 L 12
BF12 01 D 12
BF12 01 L 12
BF12 10 D 12
BF12 10 L 12
/2
BF18 01 D 12
BF18 01 L 12
BF18 10 D 12
BF18 10 L 12
BF25 01 D
BF25 01 L
BF25 10 D
BF25 10 L
BF26 00 D 12
BF26 00 L 12
45
36
32
26
7.3
13
14
14
15.6 18.5
71/2
71/2
15
20
BF32 00 D 12
BF32 00 L 12
56
45
40
32
8.8
16
17
17
20
22
71/2
10
10
20
25
BF38 00 D
BF38 00 L
56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 38
11
18.5 18.5 18.5 20
22
71/2
10
15
30
30
11 BF50 C 00 12
90
80
65
50
14.3 25
27.2 27.2 33.2 43.5 25
10
10
15
30
40
11 BF65 C 00 12
110
90
70
65
18.5 33
36
36
45.3 59.7 30
20
25
50
60
11 BF80 C 00
125
100
80
80
23
41
46
46
56
74
37
25
30
60
75
11 BF95 C 00
125
100
80
95
27.6 50
55
55
56
74
45
30
30
60
75
11 BF110 C 00
125
100
80
110
33
61
66
70
59
80
45
30
40
75
100
11 B115 00
160
150
110
110
33
61
66
70
80
100
63
30
40
75
100
11 B145 00
250
235
190
150
46
80
88
93
100
120
75
50
50
100
125
11 B180 00
275
250
200
185
57
100
108
115
123
144
103
60
75
150
150
11 B250 00
350
300
250
265
83
140
155
164
176
212
156
75
100
200
250
11 B310 00
450
370
300
320
100
170
188
200
213
256
180
100
125
250
300
11 B400 00
550
430
360
420
130
225
247
263
271
352
208
125
150
350
400
11 B500 00
700
550
500
520
156
290
306
328
367
416
312
150 11 200 11 400 11 450 11
11 B630 00
800
640
540
630
198
335
368
368
368
440
368
1000
850
700
For AC1/Resisteve duty only, see page 2-8.
11 B630 1000 00

Complete order code with coil voltage digit.

For BG09D 24VDC version complete with built-in surge suppressor, add suffix V120 to the standard
order code.
The BF09-BF38D types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
DC
012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V.
Example: 11 BG06 10 D012 for mini-contactor BG06, three poles, with one NO contact and 12VDC coil.
11 BG09 10 D024 V120 for mini-contactor BG09, three poles, with one NO contact and 24VDC
coil, complete with built-in TVS (diode) suppressor.
No add-on auxiliary contacts or mechanical interlock can be mounted on BG... type contactors.
The BF09-BF38L types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
DC
024 / 048V.
Example: 11 BG09 01 L024 for mini-contactor BG09, three poles, with one NC contact and 24VDC
low-consumption coil.
Maximum combinations of add-on blocks are given on page 3-19.
digit of the coil voltage.
Standard voltages are:
AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) /
440-480V (indicate 440).
2-6

pages 2-16 to 27
Spare parts
pages 2-28 to 31
200 11 250 11 500 11 500 11
Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts and with
110-125VAC/DC coil.
If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 BSL.00 .
If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 BL.00 .
Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC.
AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V
indicate 380
DC
Example:
11 B145L 00 110 C48 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts, with
110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 48VDC.
Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V, consult Customer Service for
Highly conductive auxiliary contact.
11 No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.
12 Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact
Dimensions
pages 2-32 to 38
Wiring diagrams
page 2-44
pages 2-48 to 71
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with DC control circuit

UL
B500-B630
B630 1000
UL/CSA
General
(purpose) use
UL/CSA
Fuse class
Short circuit
current RMS
sym. 600VAC
[A]
Type/[A]
[kA] UL/CSA
16
K5/30
20
K5/30
Type of terminal
Clamp-screw
Clamp-screw
Incorporated Quantity Weight

auxiliary
per
contacts
pkg
NO
NC
[kg]
10
0.214
10
0.214
10
0.214
10
0.214
10
0.210
20
K5/30
Faston
10
0.210
20
K5/30
Rear PCB solder pin
10
0.240
10
0.240
10
0.214
10
0.214
0.494
0.494
20
25
28
K5/30
RK5/60
RK5/70
5
5
5
Clamp-screw
Clamp-screw
Clamp-screw
32
RK5/80
Clamp-screw
32
RK5/100
Clamp-screw
0.494
0.494
0.494
0.494
0.494
0.494
BG06 D
BG12 D
BGF09 D
BGP09 D
BF18 D - BF18 L
BF25 D - BF25 L
BF26 D - BF26 L
BF32 D - BF32 L
BF38 D - BF38 L
BF50 C
BF65 C
BF80 C
BF95 C
BF110 C

B145
B180

B250
B400

B630 1000
0.559
Clamp-screw
0.559
Certified products.
UL
0.559
Lug-clamp 13
1.885
110
RK5/225
Lug-clamp 13
1.885
125
RK5/250
10
Lug-clamp 13
1.895
125
RK5/250
10
Lug-clamp 13
1.895
125
RK5/250
10
Lug-clamp 13
1.895
160
RK5/500
10
Screw-nut
5.290
250
RK5/500
10
Screw-nut
5.400
275
RK5/500
10
Screw-nut
5.400
350
L/800
18
Screw-nut
9.635
450
L/800
18
Screw-nut
9.635
500
L/800
18
Screw-nut
9.635
700 13
L/1200 11
18 11
Screw-nut
18.060
800 13
L/1500 11
18 11
Screw-nut
18.620
1000 13
L/1500 11
18 11
Screw-nut
21.400
13

pages 2-16 to 27
Spare parts
pages 2-28 to 31
Dimensions
pages 2-32 to 38
Wiring diagrams
page 2-44
B500
B630
Clamp-screw
Clamp-screw
B310
5
5
5
5
B115
RK5/100
RK5/150

BF09 D - BF09 L
RK5/125
RK5/200

BF12 D - BF12 L
45
55
C
S
A
BG09 D
55
90
UL
Canada
USA USA
Type
E
A
C
Register of
shipping
R
L
C
I
R
C
N
O
C
A
S
CSA
- UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus File E93602) for BGBF110
types indicated, as Motor Controllers Contactors, except for
(
File E93602 Component). Products having this type of
workshop-assembled equipment.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172189) for B500...
B630 1000 and B500 SL... B630 SL types as Industrial Control
Switches.
2-65 for BF65.

UL 60947-4-1A, CSA C22.2 n 60947-1, CSA C22.2
n 60947-4-1 for B115... B630 1000 types.
Example: BF09 10 D024 V260 for BF09, three poles, with one
NO contact and 24VDC coil with compliant plastic materials.
pages 2-48 to 71
2-7
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with AC control circuit
2
BG09 T4 A
BF09 A T4A-BF18 T4 A
BF26 T4 A-BF38 T4 A
B115 4-B180 4
BF65 40 - BF80 40
B250 4-B400 4
Resistive load control

Order code
UL/CSA details

Ith (AC1)
40C
55C
70C
230V
400V
415V
440V
500V
690V
[A]
[A]
[A]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[A]
11 BG09 T4 A
20
18
15 (60C)
14
14
15
16
22
20
11 BGF09 T4 A
20
18
15 (60C)
14
14
15
16
22
20
11 BGP09 T4 A
20
18
15 (60C)
14
14
15
16
20
BF09 T4 A
25
20
18
9.5
16
17
18
21
27
25
BF12 T4 A
28
23
20
10
18
19
20
23
32
28
BF18 T4 A
32
26
23
12
21
22
23
26
36
32
BF26 T4 A

45
36
32
17
30
31
33
37
51
45
BF38 T4 A
56 (60)
45 (48)
40 (42)
21
36
38
40
45
62
55
11 BF50 40
90
80
65
34
59
64
65
74
98
90
11 BF65 40
110
90
70
41
72
78
80
95
112
110
11 BF80 40
125
100
80
47
82
90
90
108
128
125
11 B115 4 00
160
150
110
57
98
107
115
129
173
250
160
11 B145 4 00
250
235
190
91
150
162
180
196
270
390
250
11 B180 4 00
275
250
200
95
160
177
200
213
298
430
275
11 B250 4 00
350
300
250
124
214
234
255
282
380
560
350
11 B310 4 00
450
370
300
158
270
293
325
350
488
700
450
11 B400 4 00
550
430
360
200
345
377
400
452
598
870
550
11 B500 4 00
700
550
500
252
438
478
500
575
755
1100
700
11 B630 4 00
800
640
540
288
500
545
580
655
860
1250
800
11 B630 1000 4 00
1000
850
700
350
600
630
725
750
1000
1600
1000
AC coil
1000V
UL/CSA
General
(purpose) use
11 B1250 4 24
1250
1050
880
480
830
900
905
1100
1450
2000
No UL/CSA
11 B1600 4 24
1600
1360
1120
550
950
1000
1160
1200
1650
2500
No UL/CSA

Complete order code with coil voltage digit or voltage digit followed by 60 if 60Hz.
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz
024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / 575 60 (V).
Example:
11 BG09 T4 A230 for mini-contactor BG09, four poles, with 230VAC 50/60Hz coil.
11 BG09 T4 A460 60 for mini-contactor BG09, four poles, with 460VAC 60Hz coil.
digit of the coil voltage. Standard voltages are:
-- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) /
440-480V (indicate 440).
Example: 11 B145 4 00 110 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts and with
110-125VAC/DC coil.
If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B4SL 00 .
If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B4L.00 .
-- AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380
-- DC
Example: 11 B145 4L 00 110 C220 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts, with
110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 220-240VDC.
2-8

pages 2-16 to 27
Spare parts
pages 2-28 to 31


Complete the order code with the digit of the coil voltage. For 110-125VAC 50/60 Hz indicate 110 or
220-240VDC 50/60 Hz indicate 220.
Example: 11 B1250 4 24 110 for contactor B1250, four poles, with 2NO+4NC auxiliary contacts and
110-125VAC/DC 50/60Hz coil.
Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V. Consult Customer Service for
Whenever the BF26 T4 or BF38 T4 types need to be mechanically interlocked with either the BFX50 00 or
BFX50 01, the add-on fourth pole of one of the contactors needs to be removed from the right side and
fitted on the left side.
Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact
Dimensions
pages 2-32 to 38
Wiring diagrams
page 2-45
pages 2-48 to 71
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with AC control circuit
IEC utilisation current with poles in parallel

If the poles of the contactors are arranged in parallel, the
operating current is the one indicated in the table multiplied
by the K factor given below, which account for the unequal
distribution of the current in the various poles.
To limit distribution inequality, it is advisable to use
paralleling links (see pages 2-16, 2-21 and 2-26).
2 POLES in parallel: K = 1.6
B500 4-B630 4
B630 1000 4
Type of terminal
B1250-B1600 4
Incorporated auxiliary
contacts
Quantity Weight
per
pkg
NO

UL/CSA
Fuse
class
Short circuit
current RMS
sym. 600VAC
Type / [A]
[kA] UL/CSA
K5 / 30
Clamp-screw
none
none
10
0.180
Type
K5 / 30
Faston
none
none
10
0.180
BG09 T4 A
K5 / 30
Rear PCB solder pin
none
none
10
0.197
BGF09 T4 A
RK5 / 60
Clamp-screw
none
none
0.367
BGP09 T4 A
RK5 / 70
Clamp-screw
none
none
0.367
BF09 T4 A
RK5 / 80
Clamp-screw
none
none
0.367
BF12 T4 A
RK5 / 100
Clamp-screw
none
none
0.508
RK5 / 150
Clamp-screw
none
none
RK5 / 200
Lug-clamp 11
none
none
RK5 / 225
10
Lug-clamp 11
none
RK5 / 250
10
Lug-clamp 11
none
RK5 / 500
10
Screw-nut
RK5 / 500
10
Screw-nut
UL
UL
C
C
C
BF18 T4 A
0.508
BF26 T4 A
1.554
BF38 T4 A
none
1.554
BF50 40
none
1.570
BF65 40
none
none
6.220
BF80 40
none
none
6.340
B115 4
[kg]
Canada
USA
USA
C
S
A
RK5 / 500
10
Screw-nut
none
none
6.340
B145 4
L/800
18
Screw-nut
none
none
11.195
B180 4
L/800
18
Screw-nut
none
none
11.195
B250 4
L/800
18
Screw-nut
none
none
11.195
B310 4
L/1200 12
18 12
Screw-nut
none
none
20.910
B400 4
L/1500 12
18 12
Screw-nut
none
none
21.880
B500 4
L/1500 12
18 12
Screw-nut
none
none
25.620
B630 4
Screw-nut
57.500
B630 1000 4
Screw-nut
58.400
B1250 4
B1600 4
11

12
R
I
N
A
E
A
C
NC

No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.
Certified products.
UL
CSA
(
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172189) for
B500 4... B630 1000 4 and B500 4SL... B630 4SL types as
Industrial Control Switches.
2-65 for BF65.

UL 60947-4-1A, CSA C22.2 n 60947-1, CSA C22.2
n 60947-4-1 for B115 4... B630 1000 4.
Example: BF09 T4 A230 V260 for BF09, four poles, 230V
50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic materials).

pages 2-16 to 27
Spare parts
pages 2-28 to 31
Dimensions
pages 2-32 to 38
Wiring diagrams
page 2-45
pages 2-48 to 71
2-9
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with DC control circuit
2
BG09 T4 D
B115 4-B180 4
BF09 T4 D-BF18 T4 D
BF09 T4 L-BF18 T4 L
BF26 T4 D-BF38 T4 D
BF26 T4 L-BF38 T4 L
BF50C 40-BF80C 40
B250 4-B400 4
DC coil
Low consumption

Ith (AC1)
40C
55C
70C
230V
400V
415V
440V
500V
690V
[A]
[A]
[A]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[A]
20
18
15 (60C)
14
14
15
16
22
20
UL/CSA details
Resistive load control

Order code
DC coil
11 BG09 T4 D

1000V
UL/CSA
General
(purpose) use
11 BGF09 T4 D
20
18
15 (60C)
14
14
15
16
22
20
11 BGP09 T4 D
20
18
15 (60C)
14
14
15
16
20
BF09 T4 D
BF09 T4 L
25
20
18
9.5
16
17
18
21
27
25
BF18 T4 D
BF18 T4 L
32
26
23
12
21
22
23
26
36
32
BF26 T4 D
BF26 T4 L
45
36
32
17
30
31
33
37
51
45
BF38 T4 D
BF38 T4 L
56 (60)
45 (48)
40 (42)
21
26
38
40
45
62
55
11 BF65C 40
110
90
70
41
72
78
80
95
112
110
11 BF80C 40
125
100
80
47
82
90
90
108
128
125
11 B115 4 00
160
150
110
57
98
107
115
129
173
250
160
11 B145 4 00
250
235
190
91
150
162
180
196
270
390
250
11 B180 4 00
275
250
200
95
160
177
200
213
298
430
275
11 B250 4 00
350
300
250
124
214
234
255
282
380
560
350
11 B310 4 00
450
370
300
158
270
293
325
350
488
700
450
11 B400 4 00
550
430
360
200
345
377
400
452
598
870
550
11 B500 4 00
700
550
500
252
438
478
500
575
755
1100
700
11 B630 4 00
800
640
540
288
500
545
580
655
860
1250
800
11 B630 1000 4 00
1000
850
700
350
600
630
725
750
1000
1600
1000


The BF09-BF38D types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
DC
012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220VDC.
Example: 11 BG09 T4 D012 for mini-contactor BG09, four poles, with 12VDC coil.
Low consumption version. Complete the order code with coil voltage digit.
The BF09-BF38L types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
DC
024 / 048V
Example: BF09 T4 L024 for contactor BF09, four poles, with 24VDC low-consumption coil.
Maximum combinations add-on blocks are page 2-19.
digit of the coil voltage.
-- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415 indicate 380 /
440-480V indicate 440.
Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts and with
110-125VAC/DC coil.
2-10

pages 2-16 to 28
Spare parts
pages 2-28 to 31

If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B4SL 00 .
If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B4L.00 .
AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380
DC
Example:
11 B145L 00 110 C48 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts, with
110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 48VDC.
Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V consult Customer Service for
Dimensions
pages 2-32 to 38
Wiring diagrams
page 2-45
pages 2-48 to 71
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with DC control circuit
IEC utilisation current with poles in parallel

If the poles of the contactors are arranged in parallel, the
operating current is the one indicated in the table multiplied
by the K factor given below, which account for the unequal
distribution of the current in the various poles.
To limit distribution inequality, it is advisable to use
paralleling links (see pages 2-16, 2-21 and 2-26).
B500 4-B630 4
B630 1000 4
Type of terminal
Incorporated auxiliary
contacts
Quantity Weight
per
pkg
NO

UL/CSA Fuse
class
Short circuit
RMS sym.
600VAC
Type / [A]
[kA] UL/CSA
K5 / 30
Clamp-screw
10
0.220
K5 / 30
Faston
10
0.220
BG09 T4 D
K5 / 30
Rear PCB solder pin
10
0.242
BGF09 T4 D
RK5 / 60
Clamp-screw
0.498
BGP09 T4 D
RK5 / 80
Clamp-screw
0.498
BF09 T4 D - BF09 T4 L
RK5 / 100
Clamp-screw
0.665
BF18 T4 D - BF18 T4 L
RK5 / 150
Clamp-screw
0.665
BF26 T4 D - BF26 T4 L
RK5 / 225
Lug-clamp 11
2.035
BF38 T4 D - BF38 T4 L
RK5 / 250
Lug-clamp 11
2.100
BF65 C 40
NC
UL
[kg]
UL
Canada
USA USA
Type
RK5 / 500
10
Screw-nut
6.220
BF80 C 40
RK5 / 500
10
Screw-nut
6.340
B115 4
C
S
A
E
A
C
C
C
C
RK5 / 500
10
Screw-nut
6.340
B145 4
L/800
18
Screw-nut
11.195
B180 4
L/800
18
Screw-nut
11.195
B250 4
L/800
18
Screw-nut
11.195
B310 4
L/1200
18
Screw-nut
20.910
B400 4
L/1200
18
Screw-nut
21.880
B500 4
L/1500
18
Screw-nut
25.600

11
B630 4
B630 1000 4
R
I
N
A
Certified products.
UL
CSA
(
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172185) for
B500 4... B630 1000 4 and B500 4SL... B630 4SL types as
Industrial Control Switches.
2-65 for BF65.

UL 60947-4-1A, CSA C22.2 n 60947-1, CSA C22.2
n 60947-4-1 for B115 4... B630 1000 4.
Example: BF09 T4 D024 V260 for BF09, four poles, 24VDC coil
with compliant plastic materials).

pages 2-16 to 27
Spare parts
pages 2-28 to 31
Dimensions
pages 2-32 to 38
Wiring diagrams
page 2-45
pages 2-48 to 71
2-11
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with control circuit: AC and DC
Mini-contactor
four power poles,
2 NO and 2 NC
BG series
Order code
IEC rated conventional

free air thermal current Ith
40C
55C
60C
[A]
[A]
[A]
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Type
AC COIL.
Terminals: clamp screw.
11 BG09 T2 A 20
18
15
0.170
18
15
0.175
DC COIL.
11 BG09 T2 D 20
NOTE: No coil change or replacement is possible.

11 BG09 T2...
Contactors
four power poles,
2 NO and 2 NC
BF series
Order code

Qty Wt
free air thermal current Ith per
40C 55C 60C pkg
[A]
[A]
[A]
[kg]
[A]
[A]
[mm2]
BG09...T2 20
20
30
0.75-2.5 18-12
[AWG]

Certifications obtained: CCC, EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Motor Controllers Contactors.
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Type
UL/CSA
Protection fuse Conductor
General use IEC gG ULRK5 section
[A]
[A]
[A]
[mm2]
[AWG]
BF09 T2 A
25
20
18
0.340
BF09 T2
25
32
60
1-6
16-10
BF18 T2 A
32
26
23
0.340
BF18 T2
32
40
80
1-6
16-10
BF26 T2 A
45
36
32
0.420
BF26 T2
45
50
100
1.5-10
14-6
BF38 T2 A
56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 1
0.420
BF38 T2
55
80
150
2.5-16
14-6
BF18 T2 D
32
26
23
0.470
BF26 T2 D
45
36
32
0.540
BF38 T2 D
56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 1
0.540
DC COIL. Low consumption (2.4W).

BF18 T2 L
32
26
23
0.470
BF26 T2 L
45
36
32
0.540
BF38 T2 L
56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 1
0.540

2-12
[A]
AC COIL.
DC COIL.
BF09 T2...
UL/CSA
General use IEC gG UL K5 section

pages 2-16 to 25

Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC, RINA; UL Listed for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E93602) and CSA certified for
Canada (File 54332), as Motor Controllers - Contactors.
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Example: BF09 T2 A230 V260 for BF09, 2NO+2NC main
poles, 230V 50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic materials).
Complete with coil voltage digit if 50/60Hz or with voltage digit followed
by 60 if 60Hz. Standard voltages are:
AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 /110 / 230 / 400V
AC 60Hz
024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V).
Example: 11 BG09 T2 A230 for mini-contactor BG09 T2, 2 poles NO and
2 poles NC, with 230VAC 50/60Hz coil.
11 BG09 T2 A460 60 for mini-contactor BG09 T2, 2 poles NO
and 2 poles NC, with 460VAC 60Hz coil.
Complete with coil voltage digit.
The BF18-BF26-BF38 T2D types already have a standard supplied built-in
TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
DC
012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V.
Example: 11 BG09 T2 D012 for mini-contactor BG09 T2, 2 poles NO and
2 poles NC, with 12VDC coil.
Complete the order code with coil voltage digit.
The BF18-BF26-BF38 T2L types already have a standard supplied built-in
TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
DC
024 / 048V.
Example: BF18 T2 L024 for contactor BF18 T2, 2 poles NO and 2 poles
NC, with 24VDC low-consumption coil.
For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork
terminal, must be used.
Spare parts
pages 2-28 to 31
Dimensions
page 2-32 and 33
Wiring diagrams
page 2-45
pages 2-48 to 65
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with control circuit: AC and DC
Contactors
four power poles,
4 NC
BF series
Order code

Qty Wt
free air thermal current Ith per
40C 55C 60C pkg
[A]
[A]
[A]
[kg]
Type
UL/CSA
General use IEC gG ULRK5 section
[A]
[A]
[A]
[mm2]
[AWG]
AC COIL.
BF18 T0 A
32
26
23
0.340
BF18 T0
32
40
80
1-6
16-10
BF26 T0 A
45
36
32
0.420
BF26 T0
45
50
150
1.5-10
14-6
DC COIL.
BF18 T0 D
32
26
23
0.470
BF26 T0 D
45
36
32
0.540
23
0.470

BF18 T0 L
32
26
BF18 T0...

Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC, RINA; UL Listed for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E93602) and CSA certified for
Canada (File 54332), as Motor Controllers - Contactors.
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN
60335; for BF18 and BF26 versions only, add suffix V260
to the standard product order code.
Example: BF18 T0 A230 V260 for BF18, four NC main
poles, 230VAC 50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic
materials).
NOTE: The BF18-BF26 T0D and BF18 T0L types have a
standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage
Suppressor).
Contators
four NO power poles to
connect in series for
photovoltaic applications
BF series
Order
code
IEC rated operational

current in DC1 55C
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[kg]
1.440
1.910
AC COIL.
Terminals: lug clamp (IEC pillar terminal).
11BFD80 40
125
DC COIL.
Terminals: lug clamp (IEC pillar terminal).
11BFD80 C 40

BFD80 40...

125
Complete with coil voltage digit if 50/60Hz or with voltage digit followed
by 60 if 60Hz. Standard voltages are:
AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 /110 / 230 / 400V
AC 60Hz
024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V).
Example: BF18 T0 A230 for contactor BF18 T0, 4 NC power poles, with
230VAC 50/60Hz.
11 BFD80 40 024 for contactor BFD80 40, 4 NO power poles,
with 24VAC 50/60Hz for photovoltaic application.
Complete with coil voltage digit.
DC
012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V.
Example: BF18 T0 D012 for contactor BF18 T0, 4 NC power poles, with
12VDC coil.
DC
024 / 048V.
Example: BF18 T0 L024 for contactor BF18 T0, 4 NC power poles, with
24VDC low-consumption coil.
For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork
terminal, must be used.
The contactors are specifically made with magnetic
elements in the arc extinction chambers to obtain high
DC load operational capabilities. They are used to
disconnect and isolate the load between the photovoltaic
panel and the AC/DC inverter.
For add-on contact blocks, accessories and spare parts,
consider indications of the corresponding standard BF80
types (11BF80 40 and 11 BF80C 40).
Italian Fire Department Directives
These directives provide for an disconnecting device for
all current-carrying elements, that can be operated by
remote control switch, placed in an easily reached and
marked position, in order to safely isolate each part of the
installation within the fire system compartment including
the photovoltaic (PV) generator.
As an alternative, the PV generator must be installed,
either externally of the fire system compartment or
internally but in a dedicated compartment with adequate
fire-resistant features. For such function, specifically
designed contactors for on-load use in IEC DC1 duty up
to 1000VDC are available.
Use in IEC DC1 duty
Type
IEC operational voltage Ue

400V
600V
800V
1000V
IEC max current Ie in DC1 with L/R

1ms with 4 poles in series
BFD80
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
125
125
95
75
Wiring scheme
4 poles

IEC IEC/EN 60947-4-1.

pages 2-18 to 25
Spare parts
pages 2-28 to 31
Dimensions
page 2-32 and 33
Wiring diagrams
page 2-45
pages 2-48 to 67
2-13
Contactors
Contactors for power factor correction with AC control circuit
BFK contactors (including

limiting resistors)
Order code
Maximum IEC operational

power at 50C (AC-6b)
440V
240V 400V 480V 690V
Qty
per
Wt
pkg
[kvar] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] NO n
[kg]
IEC rated
Type
operational
current 440V
IEC - UL/CSA
protection fuse
gG-SC
[A]
[A]
AC COIL.
BFK09 10A
4.5
7.5
10
10
0.413
BFK09
12
16
BFK12 10A
12.5 14
16
10
0.413
BFK12
18
25
BFK18 10A
15
17
20
10
0.413
BFK18
23
40
BFK26 00A
11
20
22
25
10
0.472
BFK26
30
40
BFK32 00A
14
25
27.5 30
10
0.472
BFK32
36
63
BFK38 00A
17
30
33
36
10
0.472
BFK38
43
63
11 BF50K 00
22
38
41
46
1.440
BF50K
58
80
11 BF65K 00
26
45
50
56
1.470
BF65K
70
100
11 BF70K 00
30
50
56
65
1.470
BF70K
75
125
11 BF80K 00
34
60
65
70
1.470
BF80K
90
125
Consult Customer Service (see contact details on inside front cover) for the
BFK...
use of contactors to switch with delta/wye connection.
One NO auxiliary contact (SPST) incorporated.

Complete order code with coil voltage digit or with voltage digit followed by
60 if 60Hz.
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400VAC
-- AC 60Hz
024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V).
Example: BFK09 10 A230 for contactor BFK09 with one NO contact and
230VAC 50/60Hz coil.
BFK09 10 A460 60 for contactor BFK09 with one NO contact
and 460VAC 60Hz coil.
Type
Kits to assemble BFK

contactors
UL/CSA rated
current
240-600VAC
Maximum UL/CSA
operational power at voltage:
240V
480V
600V
[A]
[kvar]
[kvar]
[kvar]
BFK 09
12
4.5
10
BFK 12
18
14
16
BFK 18
23
17
20
BFK 26
30
11
22
27.5
BFK 32
36
14
27.5
32
BFK 38
43
17
33
36
BF50 K
58
22
41
46
BF65 K
68
26
50
56
BF70 K
72
30
60
65
BF80 K
78
34
65
70
Order code
For contactor
Qty Wt
per
pkg
n
[kg]
11 G460
BF09 10A - BF12 10A BF18 10A - BF26 00A BF32 00A - BF38 00A
10
0.072
11 G464
BF50 00 - BF65 00 BF80 00
10
0.080
Ambient operating temperature: 50C. For ambient

temperatures higher than 50C and up to 70C, the
maximum operating power values indicated in the table
must be reduced by a percentage equal to the difference
between the operating ambient temperature and 50C.
E.g.: Using a BFK26 00 contactor at the ambient temperature
of 60C, the maximum operating power (at 400V) of the
contactor will be equal to 20kvar 10% = 18kvar.
Operating cycle: 120 cycles/h
Electrical life: 200,000 cycles.
Add-on auxiliary contacts
The following contact blocks, can be fitted on the BFK
contactors: BFX12..., G418..., G481..., G482... and G218.
Certification obtained: CCC, EAC; UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Motor Controllers Magnetic Capacitive Switches.
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
for BFK versions only, add suffix V260 to the standard
product order code.
Example: BF18K 10 A230 V260 for BF18K contactor having
1 NO auxiliary contact and 230VAC 50/60Hz coil with
compliant plastic materials.
To optimise contactor stock management, a kit is available
to transform normal three-pole contactors into BFK
types for power factor correction. The table to the left
indicates which kits to purchase depending on the standard
contactor in stock.
11 G46...
2-14

pages 2-18 and 25
Spare parts
pages 2-28
Dimensions
page 2-39
Wiring diagrams
page 2-44
pages 2-59 and 65 to 67
Contactors
Control relays with control circuit: AC and DC
Control relays
BG00 type
Order code
Configuration and
number of contacts
(SPST ea)
Quantity
per
package
Wt
NO
[kg]
NC
AC COIL. Terminals: clamp screw.

11 BG00 40 A
0.170
11 BG00 31 A
0.170
11 BG00 22 A
0.170
11 BGF00 40 A 4
0.160
11 BGF00 31 A 3
0.160
11 BGF00 22 A 2
0.160
Terminals: Faston.
11 BG00...
DC COIL. Terminals: clamp screw.

11 BG00 40 D
0.175
11 BG00 31 D
0.175
11 BG00 22 D
0.175
11 BGF00 40 D 4
0.165
11 BGF00 31 D 3
0.165
11 BGF00 22 D 2
0.165
Terminals: Faston.
IEC rated conventional free air thermal current Ith: 10A
BG types: A600-Q600
BF types: A600-P600
Low-consumption version of BG types cannot accept
additional contacts.
NOTE: No coil change or replacement is possible.
Certification obtained: CCC, EAC, UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Motor Controllers Auxiliary contactors for all; RINA for BF00 types.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Plastic materials are compliant with standards
IEC/EN 60335; for BF00 version only, add suffix V260 to
the standard product order code.
Example: BF00 40 A230 V260 for BF00 control relay
having 4 NO auxiliary contacts and 230VAC 50/60Hz coil
with compliant plastic materials.
NOTE: The BF00...D and BF00...L types have a standard
supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
DC COIL. Low-consumption (2.3W).

11 BGF00...
11 BG00 40 L
0.175
11 BG00 31 L
0.175
11 BG00 22 L
0.175
11 BGF00 40 L 4
0.165
11 BGF00 31 L 3
0.165
11 BGF00 22 L 2
0.165
Configuration and
number of contacts
(SPST ea)
Quantity
per
package
Wt
NO
NC
[kg]
Terminals: Faston.
Control relays
BF00 type
Order code
AC COIL.
BF00 40 A
0.340
BF00 31 A
0.340
BF00 22 A
0.340
BF00 04 A
0.340
DC COIL.
BF00... A...
BF00 40 D
0.470
BF00 31 D
0.470
BF00 22 D
0.470
BF00 04 D
0.470

BF00 40 L
0.470
BF00 31 L
0.470
BF00 22 L
0.470
BF00 04 L
0.470
BF00... D...
BF00... L...

pages 2-16 to 25
Complete order code with coil voltage digit or with voltage digit followed by
60 if 60Hz.
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz
024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V).
Example: 11 BG00 40 A230 for control relay BG00 with four NO auxiliary
contacts and 230VAC 50/60Hz coil.
BF00 40 A460 60 for control relay BF00 with four NO auxiliary
contacts and 460VAC 60Hz coil.
-- DC
012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V.
Example: BF00 40 D012 for control relay BF00 with four NO contacts
and 12VDC coil.
DC
024 / 048V.
Example: 11 BG00 40 L024 for control relay BG00 with four NO auxiliary
contacts and 24VDC low-consumption coil.
All contacts are highly conductive.
Dimensions
page 2-32 and 33
Wiring diagrams
page 2-45
pages 2-48 to 61
2-15
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for BG series mini-contactors
Add-on blocks and

accessories
Order code
Characteristics

Max
Qty
qty per per
contactor pkg
Wt
[kg]
Auxiliary contacts. Screw terminals.
11 BGX10... (20-11-02)
11 BGX11 11
11 BGXF...
10
10
0.021
690
10
0.021
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V

voltage Ui
690
1NO + 1NC
11 BGX10 20
2NO
10
0.021
Terminals
11 BGX10 04
4NC
10
0.028
M3
screw
11 BGX10 13
1NO + 3NC
10
0.028
Faston
1x6.3mm
2x2.8mm
11 BGX10 22
2NO + 2NC
10
0.028
6.9
6.9
11 BGX10 31
3NO + 1NC
10
0.028
11 BGX10 40
4NO
10
0.028
Type
Width mm
Tightening torque
Nm
0.8-1
lbin
7-9
Conductor section
maximum with 1 or 2 cables
flexible without lug mm2 2.5
2.5
11 BGX11 11
1NO + 1NC
10
0.021
11 BGX11 22
2NO + 2NC
10
0.028
AWG n
10
0.021
UL/CSA and
AC
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation DC
Auxiliary contacts. Faston terminals.

11 BGXF10 02
2NC
11 BGXF10 11
1NO + 1NC
10
0.021
11 BGXF10 20
2NO
10
0.021
11 BGXF10 04
4NC
10
0.028
11 BGXF10 13
1NO + 3NC
10
0.028
11 BGXF10 22
2NO + 2NC
10
0.028
11 BGXF10 31
3NO + 1NC
10
0.028
11 BGXF10 40
4NO
10
0.028
For all BG...A

and BG...D
10
0.008
Quick connect surge suppressors.
flexible with lug mm2 2.5
Mechanical life
(million)
2.5
14
14
A600
A600
Q600
Q600
cycles 20
20
SM1 breaker - mini-contactor connecting kits

See page 1-5.
See page 2-57.
Type
cULus EAC
CCC
BGX10...

11 BGX77 048
48VAC/DC (Varistor)
10
0.007
BGX11...
11 BGX77 125
48-125VAC/DC (Varistor)
10
0.007
BGXF10...
11 BGX77 240
10
0.007
BGX50 00
11 BGX78 225
225VDC (Diode)
10
0.007
BGX7...
0.007
BGX80 00
G32...
SMX90...
48VAC
(Resistor-Capacitor)
10
48-125VAC
10
11 BGX79 240
125-240VAC
10
0.007
11 BGX79 415
240-415VAC
10
0.007
Raises protection to IEC

IP40 w/consumer boards
20
0.006
11 BGX79 048
11 BGX79 125
11 BGX50 00
0.007
Certified products;
-
Modular shroud.
11 BGX80 00
11 G323
For 2 poles
10
11 G324
11 G325
For 4 poles
11 G326
UL Recognized for USA only (File E197069) as Panel and

Switchboard Accessories - Component.
Products having this type of marking are intended
for use as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
cULus - UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601) as
Auxiliary Devices - Component.
Compliant with standards: UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14,

IEC/EN 60947-1; IEC/EN 60947-5-1 for auxiliary contacts.
Paralleling links. Clamp-screw terminals.

0.009
10
0.009
10
0.014
10
0.014
Rigid connecting kits.

11 SMX90 21
For star-delta starter

composed by 3-contactor
combination of BG types
(line-star-delta)
10
0.040
11 SMX90 22
For reversing contactor

assembly composed by
mini-contactors BG
0.026

2-16
10
2NC
11 BGX50 00
11 SMX90 21
11 SMX90 22
IEC rated conventional free air A

thermal current Ith
11 BGX10 11
Mechanical interlock.
11 BGX77... 11 BGX78 225 11 BGX79...
BGX10... BGXF10...
BGX11...
11 BGX10 02
Auxiliary contacts for reversing and changeover assemblies.

Screw terminals.
11 BGX10... (40-31-22-13-04)
11 BGX11 22
Operational characteristics for add-on auxiliary contacts

Type
Cannot be used with BG...L types.

Cannot be used with BG...D and BG...L types.
Suitable for left-hand mini-contactor only of BGT and BGTP reversing
and BGC changeover assemblies.
The shroud can be used with BG... types with screw termination only and
with no auxiliary contacts, surge suppressor or mechanical interlock
mounted.
It raises the front degree of protection of the mini-contactor when these
are used in consumer switchboards.
Cannot be used with BGX80 00 shroud.
Contactors with one NC auxiliary contact, 01 type, are usually used for
reversing assemblies.
The relay cannot be directly mounted on the contator. Use the RF38 type and
the RFX38 04 independent mounting base.
The SM1 breaker can be directly fitted using the SMX90 03 rigid connector.
All contacts are each SPST.
Dimensions
page 2-39
Wiring diagrams
page 2-46
pages 2-48 to 61
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for BG series mini-contactors
Combinations: Mounting position on BG...A and BG...D mini-contactors
Combinations: Mounting position on BG...L mini-contactors

G326
G326
G325
G325
G324
G324
G323
G323
BGX77...
BGX78 225
BGX79...
BGX77...
BGX78 225
BGX79...
BGX80 00
BGX80 00
BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40
BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31
BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22
BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13
BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04
BG...A
BG...D
BG...L
BGX10 20 - BGXF10 20
BGX10 11 - BGXF10 11
BGX10 02 - BGXF10 02

Suitable for screw-termination contactors without BGX10... auxiliaries, BGX50 00 interlock or BGX7...
surge suppressor.
Not suitable for BG...D types.
Combinations for reversing and changeover contactors assembled with BG...A and BG...D types
BGX77...
BGX78 225
BGX79...
BG...A
BG...D
BGX50 00
BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40
BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31
BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22
BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13
BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04
BGX11 22

BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40
BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31
BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22
BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13
BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04
BGX77...
BGX78 225
BGX79...
BGX10 20 - BGXF10 20
BGX10 11 - BGXF10 11
BGX10 02 - BGXF10 02
BGX10 10 - BGXF10 20
BGX10 11 - BGXF10 11
BGX10 02 - BGXF10 02
BGX11 11
Not suitable for BG...D types.

For left-hand mini-contactor of BGT, BGTP and BGC contactor assemblies only.
See page 4-5.
Connections for reversing contactor assembly
Connections for star-delta assembly

SMX90 21
SMX90 21
SMX90 22
BGX50 00
BG...
BG...A
BG...D
SMX90 21
SMX90 22
Dimensions
page 2-39
Wiring diagrams
page 2-46
pages 2-48 to 61
2-17
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for BF series contactors
Add-on blocks
Order code
Characteristics
Max
Qty Wt
qty per per
contactor pkg
n
[kg]
Operational characteristics for add-on auxiliary contacts

Type
G418 G484 G218 G482

G428 BFX10 G481
G485 BFX12
G486
G487
IEC conventional free A

air thermal current Ith
10
10
10
0.1
690
690
690
690
Auxiliary contacts with front centre mounting.

Screw terminals.
BFX10...
11 G484...
BFX10 02
2NC
0.030
BFX10 11
1NO + 1NC
0.030
BFX10 20
2NO
0.030
IEC rated insulation

voltage Ui
11 G484 03
3NC
0.039
Terminals: Screw
M3
11 G484 12
1NO + 2NC
0.039
Width
mm 7
11 G484 21
2NO + 1NC
0.039
Faston
mm
11 G484 30
3NO
0.039
1x6.35 1x6.35
2x2.8 2x2.8
BFX10 04
4NC
0.048
BFX10 13
1NO + 3NC
0.048
BFX10 22
2NO + 2NC
0.048
BFX10 31
3NO + 1NC
0.048
M3.5
Nm 0.8-1 0.8-1
lbin 7-9
BFX10 40
4NO
0.048
Conductor section
maximum with
1 or 2 cables
flexible w/o lug
BFX10 11 11
1NO+1NC and
1EM+1LB (1 early
make+1 late break)
0,048
flexible c/w lug
mm2 2.5
AWG
Auxiliary contacts for front lateral mounting. Screw terminals.

11 G418 01
1NC
10
0.014
11 G418 01D
1LB (late break)
10
0.014
11 G418 10
1NO
10
0.014
11 G418 10A
1EM (early make)
10
0.014
Auxiliary contacts for front lateral mounting. Faston terminals.

BFX10...
Tightening torque
11 G218
1NO or 1NC reversible 2
10
0.011
11 G481 02
2NC
10
0.013
11 G481 11
1NO + 1NC
10
0.013
11 G481 20
2NO
10
0.013
11 G482
Changeover contact
10
0.013
7-9
mm2 2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
14
Terminal protection
per IEC/EN 60529
14
14
14
IP20

IP20
IP20 IP20
UL/CSA and
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
designation
AC
A600
A600
A600
A600
DC
P600 Q600
P600
P600
Mechanical life
(million)
cycles 10
10
10
10
SM1 breaker - contactor connecting kits

See page 1-5.
Maximum assembly combination of add-on blocks
See pages 2-22 to 2-25.
Positive (force) guided contacts see page 2-57.
Adapter for auxiliary contact side mounting.
11 G418...
11 G218
11 G481...
11 G482
BFX12 02
2NC for BF00,

BF09-BF38
0.044
BFX12 11
1NO+1NC for BF00,

BF09-BF38
0.044
BFX12 20
2NO for BF00,

BF09-BF38
0.044
11 G428 01
1NC
10
0.024

Type
cULus CSA
BFX10...
BFX12...
G218

G418..., G428...

G481...

G482

G484...

G485...

G486...

G487...
11 G428 01D
1LB (late break)
10
0.024
11 G428 10
1NO
10
0.024
11 G428 10A
1EM (early make)
10
0.024
11 G280
for G218
10
0.008
11 G419
for G418
10
0.010
11 G483
for G481 and G482
10
0.010
Auxiliary contacts for side mounting.

Screw terminals.
Delayed auxiliary contacts 1NO + 1NC (pneumatic operation)

on energisation for front centre mounting .
Screw terminals.
11 G428...
BFX12...
11 G485 3
3s
0.040
11 G485 6
6s
0.040
11 G485 15
15 s
0.040
11 G485 30
30 s
0.040
11 G485 60
60 s
0.040
11 G485 120
120 s
0.040
Delayed auxiliary contacts 1NO + 1NC (pneumatic operation)

on de-energisation for front centre mounting .
Screw terminals.
11 G485...
11 G486...
11 G487
2-18
11 G486 3
3s
0.040
11 G486 6
6s
0.040
11 G486 15
15 s
0.040
11 G486 30
30 s
0.040
11 G486 60
60 s
0.040
11 G486 120
120 s
0.040
11 G487
70 ms
0.040
Dimensions
page 2-40
EAC

CCC

Certified products; pending for BFX10 1111

- UL Recognized for USA only (File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices
- Component.
equipment.
Auxiliary Devices.
CSA - CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary Devices for
motor controllers.
Add-on auxiliary contacts are compliant with the following

standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
The contacts can also be fitted on B type contactors using the adapter
G358. See pages 2-26 and 2-27.
Highly conductive contacts.

Gold-plated contacts inside tight casing for use in pollutant environments.
The Ith value refers to 125VAC and 30VDC.

IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with insulated Faston
terminals.
IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with minimum
0.75mm conductor section.
Designation in DC is Q600 for these types.
IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with insulated
Faston terminals.
For particularly severe ambient conditions, consult Customer Service for
IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with minimum
1mm conductor section. Mechanical life is 3 million cycles.
All contacts are each SPST except G482 which is SPDT.
Wiring diagrams
pages 2-46 and 47
pages 2-48 to 65
Contactors
BF00 A,
BF09 A-BF110,
BF50C-BF110C
Maximum assembly combination for alternating-current contactors BF00 A, BF09 A-BF110

Maximum assembly combination for direct-current contactors BF50 C-BF110 C
Front centre mount
Front lateral mount
Side mount
BFX10 02 BFX10 04
G485...
G222...
BFX50 02
BFX10 11 BFX10 13
G486...
G272...
BFX50 03
BFX10 20 BFX10 22
G487
G269 2
G418...
G428...
BFX12 02
G218
G419+
G418...
BFX12 11
G280+
G218
BFX12 20
G483+
G481...
BFX50 00

G483+
G482
BFX50 01

nof blocks
nof blocks
G481...
G482
BFX10 31
1 type
only of:
BFX10 40
G318...
G319 225
G322...
nof blocks
nof blocks
1 type only
nof blocks
Control relay
BF00 A
1
1
1 or 2
1 or 2
1
Three poles
BF09 A-BF25 A
1
1
1 or 2
1 or 2
1
1 or 2
1
Four poles
1
1
1 or 2
1
1 or 2
BF50 C-BF110 C
1
1 or 2
BF09 A-BF25 A
1
1
1 or 2
1 or 2
1
OR
1
1
OR
1
1
OR
1
1
BF26 A-BF38 A
BF50-BF110
OR
Contactors
nof blocks
1 type only
BF26 A-BF38 A
1
1
1
1 or 2
1
BF50-BF80
1
1 or 2
BF65 C-BF80 C
1
1 or 2
Mounting of BFX50 03 interlock is not possible when BFX10... block with 4 contacts and/or G222 latch are mounted.
To fit the mechanical interlock, the add-on fourth pole needs to be mounted on the left side of the one of the contactors.
One only side-mount block can be fitted on each contactor whenever the BFX50 0... interlock is mounted.
One BFX10... or delayed G48... contact block can be mounted on the G222 or G272 mechanical latch.
G222 mechanical latch.
G272 mechanical latch.
BF00 D,
BF09 D-BF38 D,
BF00 L, BF09 L-BF38 L
Maximum assembly combination for direct-current contactors BF00 D, BF09 D-BF38 D

Maximum assembly combination for direct-current contactors BF00 L, BF09 L-BF38 L
Front centre mount
BFX10...
G485...
BFX10...
...02 ...11 ...20 ...04
Front lateral
mount
...13 ...22 ...31 ....40
G222...

G486...
1 type only BFX50...

...02
G487
n of blocks
1 type only
Four poles
...03
...00 ...01
BFX12...

n of blocks
1 type only
BF00 D
BF00 L
BF09 D-BF25 D
BF26 D-BF38 D
BF09 L-BF25 L
BF26 L-BF38 L
BF09 D-BF25 D
BF26 D-BF38 D
BF09 L-BF25 L
BF26 L-BF38 L
1
1
Contactors
Three poles
n of blocks
OR
Control relay
Side mount
Mounting of BFX50 03 interlock is not possible when BFX10... block with 4 contacts and/or G222 latch are mounted.
One only side-mount block can be fitted on each contactor whenever the BFX50 0... interlock is mounted.
One BFX10... or delayed G48... contact block can be mounted on the G222 or G272 mechanical latch.
To fit the mechanical interlock, the add-on fourth pole needs to be mounted on the left side of the one of the contactors.
For other assembly combination, consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
Dimensions
page 2-40
Wiring diagrams
pages 2-46 and 47
pages 2-48 to 67
2-19
Contactors
Add-on blocks
Order code
Characteristics
Max
Qty Wt
qty per per
contactor pkg
n
[kg]
IEC conventinal free air

thermal current Ith
Fourth pole.
BFX42
For BF26 A-BF32 A

and BF38 A
0.100

voltage Ui
BFXD42
For BF26 D-BF32 D

BF38 D-BF26 LBF32 L - BF38L
0.108
Terminals:
BFX50 00
Side mount for

BF00, BF09-BF38
0.039
BFX50 01
Side mount with 2NC 1

contacts for BF00,
BF09-BF38
0.052
Front mount, low

profile for BF00,
BF09-BF38
BFX50 03
Front mount for

BF00, BF09-BF38
BFX89 10
11 G269 2
0.023
Spacer for interlocking 1

BF09-BF38 AC/DC
contactors
10
0.017
Front mount for

BF50-BF110
0.034
For BF00, BF09-BF38 1
0.070
11 G272
For BF50-BF110
0.070
11 G454
For BF00, BF09-BF38 1
0.021
11 G455
For BF50-BF110
0.021
Manual closing mechanism.

1
Quick connect surge suppressors

for BF00A, BF09-BF38A AC contactors.
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
11 G269 2
11 G454
11 G455
690
690
M4
M3
mm
12.5
2.5-3
0.8-1
lbin
21.6-26.4
7-9
2.5
flexible c/w lug
mm2 16
2.5
AWG
Terminal protection
per IEC/EN 60529
14
IP20
IP20
UL/CSA and
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
designation
AC
A600
DC
Q600
Mechanical life (million)
cycles 10
10
G222
G272
Rated control circuit

AC (50/60 Hz) V
voltage
24-415
24-415
DC
12-240
12-240
Power consumption
with control AC
DC
Minimum energising
drop-out
VA
40
40
70
70
ms
10
10
ms
50
100
48VAC/DC (Varistor)
10
0.012
BFX77 125
48-125VAC (Varistor)
10
0.012
BFX77 240
125-240VAC (Varistor)
10
0.012
BFX79 048
48VAC (Resistor-Capacitor)
10
0.012
BFX79 125
48-125VAC (Resistor-Capacitor)
10
0.012
Conductor section
Maximum with
1 or 2 cables
flexible w/o lug
mm2 4
BFX79 240
125-240VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 10
0.012
flexible c/w lug
mm2 2.5
2.5
BFX79 415
0.012
AWG
14...12
11 G318 48
48VAC/DC (Varistor)
10
0.010
11 G318 125
10
0.010
11 G318 240
10
0.010
11 G318 415
10
0.010
11 G319 225
225VDC (Diode)
10
0.010
11 G322 48
48VAC (Resistor-Capacitor)
10
0.010
11 G322 220
0.010
11 G322 380
0.010
11 RE244

11 G318...
11 G319 225
11 G322...
10
BFX77 048
Suppressor mounting adapter for G318-G319-G322.

BFX77...
BFX79...
56
mm2 16
pick-up
Surge suppressor for BF50-BF110 contactors, front mount.

Faston terminals.
11 G222...
11 G272...
BFX50 01
Nm
Type
11 G222
BFX42
BFXD42
Conductor section
Maximum with
1 or 2 cables
flexible w/o lug
0.006
Mechanical latch.
Screw terminals.
BFX50 01
Screw
Width
BFX50 00
BFX50 02
Tightening torque
BFX42
BFXD42
Type
For 35mm DIN rail

(IEC/EN 60715)
10
0.004
Different sized contactors can be interlocked.

Example: BF09-BF25 with BF26-BF38.
BFX50 01 contacts are each SPST.
Replace with the digit of the voltage if 50 or 60Hz and with the letter C
followed by the digit of the voltage if DC.
50/60Hz 24 / 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 /
380-415V indicate 380.
DC
12 / 24 / 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220.
11 RE244
Tightening torque
Nm
0.8-1
0.8-1
lbin
7-9
7-9
14...12
The condition is front IP20 protection.
Maximum assembly combination of add-on blocks

See page 2-19, 2-22 to 2-25.
See page 2-57 for BFX5001.
Type
cULus
CSA
EAC
BFX42 - BFXD42
BFX50...
BFX77...
BFX79...
G269 2
G222...
G272...
Certified products.
- UL Recognized for USA only (File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices
Component.
equipment.
Magnetic motor controllers.
motor controllers.

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
2-20
Dimensions
pages 2-40 and 41
Wiring diagrams
page 2-47
pages 2-48 to 67
Contactors
Accessories for BF series contactors
Accessories
Order code
Characteristics
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
Operational characteristics of enlarged and auxiliary

terminals
[kg]
Type
Rigid connecting kits for three-pole reversing contactor

assembly.
BFX31 01
BFX31...
BFX32...
BFX31 02
BFX32 01
For contactors
BF09 - BF25 side by side
with BFX50 02 or BFX50 03
interlock
0.052
For contactors
with BFX50 00 or BFX50 01
interlock
For contactors
with BFX50... interlock
0.060
G232
G285
G271
G288
Tightening
torque
Nm
1.5-1.8 2.5-3
0.8-1
lbin
13.2-18 7-9
7.9
44.3
Tool
Type PH1
PH1
Metric
Allen 4
PH2
0.054
Rigid connecting kits for star-delta starters.

BFX31 31
For contactors BF09-BF25

(line-star-delta)
0.058
BFX32 31

(line-star-delta)
0.064
BFX32 32

(line-delta) and
BF09-BF25 (star)
0.064
For contactors
BF00, BF09-BF38
10
0.001
BFX 80
G231

Certifications obtained: GOST for all; UL Listed, for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E93602), under Magnetic Motor
Controllers for BFX31 01, BFX31 02, BFX32 01,
BFX31 31, BFX32 31 and BFX32 32 as rigid kits, G271
and G288 as enlarged terminal kits.
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Sealing cover.
BFX80
Screw fixing adapters for contactors.

BFX89 01
BFX89 02
BFX89 01
Universal base to screw fix

BF09-BF38 contactors
0.016
BFX89 02
Screw fixing brackets for

BF09-BF38 contactors
10
0.002
10
0.015
Power terminal shroud.

11 G265
IP20 protection for 3-pole

BF50 to BF110 types
Paralleling links.
11 G265
11 BA135
2 poles for BF09-BF25 types
10
0.001
11 BA235
10
0.003
11 BA435
10
0.030
11 G231
1-6 mm2 for BF09-BF25 types 12
0.009
11 G232
1-16 mm2 for BF26-BF38 types 12
0.014
One-pole enlarged terminals.
Three-pole enlarged terminals.

11 BA135
11 BA235
11 BA435
11 G271
1-50 mm2 for BF50-BF110

types
10
0.142
10
0.194
0.009
Four-pole enlarged terminals.

11 G288
1x50mm2 for contactors

BF50-BF110 types
Auxiliary terminal.
11 G285
For BF50-BF110 types
Marking element for BF00, BF09-BF110 contactors.

11 G231
11 G232
11 G285
BFX30

Blank label for writing
50
0.001
For 3-pole contactors, BF50-BF110 types only.

N.B. Two pieces are required per contactor.
An additional 1-50mm2 conductor can be fitted in the contactor terminal.
11 G271
11 G288
Dimensions
pages 2-40 and 41
Wiring diagrams
page 2-47
page 2-48 to 67
2-21
Contactors
Add-on blocks for

AC contactors
Combinations: Mounting position on BF00 A and BF09 A-BF110 contactors
Table with combinations: See page 2-19.
G454 (for contactors BF00 A, BF09 A-BF38 A)
G222...
G272...
G485...
G486...
G487
G455 (for contactors BF50-BF110)
BFX10...
G484...
BFX10...
G418...
BFX50 00
BFX50 01
BF00 A
BF09 A-BF110
BFX77...
BFX79...
G218
G481...
G482
G419
BFX12...
BFX50 02
(for contactors BF00A, BF09 A-BF38 A)
G280
G483
G418...
BFX50 03
(for contactors BF00 A, BF09 A-BF38 A)
G428...
G218
G269 2
(for contactors BF50-BF110)
G481...
G482
Mounting not possible if front lateral contacts or mechanical interlock BFX50 00 or BFX50 01 are mounted.
If the G222 latch is mounted, no front lateral contacts can be fitted on contactors BF00A and BF09A to BF38A.
No add-on block can be mounted on front when the manual closing mechanism G454 or G455 is fitted.
Combinations: Mounting position on BF00 A and BF09 A-BF38 A
contactors with mechanical latch G222 fitted
G485...
G486...
G487
G485...
G486...
G487
Combinations: Mounting position on BF50-BF110

contactors with mechanical latch G272 fitted
BFX10...
G484...
BFX10...
BFX10...
G484...
BFX10...
BF50-BF110
G418...
BF00 A
BF09 A-BF38 A
27
G218
G
BFX77...
BFX79...
G481...
G482
G2
22
G318...
G319...
G322...
G269 2
G418...
BFX50 00
BFX50 01
BFX12...
G218
Mounting not possible if front lateral
G481...
G482
2-22
Dimensions
pages 2-40 and 41
contacts are fitted.
Wiring diagrams
pages 2-46 and 47
pages 2-48 to 67
Contactors
Add-on blocks for

DC and DC low consumption contactors
Combinations: Mounting position on BF00 and BF09-BF38, D and L versions

G485...
G486...
G487
BFX10...
BFX10...
G222...
G454
BF00 D
BF09 D-BF38 D
BF00 L
BF09 L-BF38 L
BFX50 02
BFX50 00
BFX50 01
BFX12...
BFX50 03
Mounting not possible when the G222 mechanical latch is fitted.

The G222 mechanical latch cannot be fitted on BF26 L - BF38 L four-pole types.
No add-on block can be mounted on front when the G454 manual closing mechanism is fitted.
Combinations: Mounting position on BF50 C - BF110 C contactors
with G272 mechanical latch fitted
G485...
G486...
G487
BFX10...
G484...
BFX10...
G418...
BF50 C-BF110 C
G
27
G218
G481...
G482
G318...
G319...
G322...
G269 2
G418...
G218
G481...
G482
No add-on block can be mounted on front when the G455 manual closing mechanism is fitted.
Mounting not possible if front lateral contacts are fitted.
Dimensions
pages 2-40 and 41
Wiring diagrams
pages 2-46 and 47
pages 2-48 to 67
2-23
Contactors
Accessories for
AC, DC and DC low consumption contactors
Combinations
G271
BA435
G265
G285
BA235
G232
G231
BA135
BF50-BF110
BF26-BF38
BFX80
BF00
BF09-BF25
Plate
2.5x9mm (max)
Cable
6-50mm2
BF50-BF110
2-24
Dimensions
page 2-41
pages 2-48 to 67
Contactors
Accessories for
AC, DC and DC low consumption contactors
Rigid reversing contactor assembly connecting kits for BF09-BF25 contactors with
BFX50 02 or BFX50 03 mechanical interlock
Rigid reversing contactor assembly connecting kits for BF09-BF25 contactors with
BFX50 00 or BFX50 01 mechanical interlock
BFX31 01
BFX31 02
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
BFX31 01
BFX31 02
RF38
BFX50 00
BFX50 01
RF38
Rigid reversing contactor assembly connecting kits for BF26-BF38 contactors

with BFX50 02 or BFX50 03 mechanical interlock
Rigid star-delta starter assembly connecting kits for BF09-BF25 contactors
BFX32 01
BFX50 02
BFX31 31
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
BFX31 31
BFX32 01
BFX50 00
BFX50 01
RF38
RF38
Rigid star-delta starter assembly connecting kits for BF26-BF38 contactors
Rigid star-delta starter assembly connecting kits for BF26-BF38 (line-delta) and
BF09-BF25 (star) contactors
BFX32 31
BFX32 32
BFX32 32
BFX32 31
RF38
RF38
Dimensions
pages 2-40 and 41
Wiring diagrams
page 2-47
pages 2-48 to 67
2-25
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for B series contactors
Add-on blocks
Order code
Characteristics
Max
Qty
qty per per
contactor pkg
Wt
[kg]
Operational characteristics of auxiliary contacts

Type
Faston terminals.
Auxiliary contacts for side mounting.
11 G350
2NO+1NC or 1NO+2NC 4
reversible (SPST ea)
0.082
11 G354
1NO+1NC (SPST ea) 4
0.078
16
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui
690
Terminals
mm
1-6.35
2-2.8
mm2
2.5
11 G358
AWG
To fit auxiliary contacts 4

BFX10, G484, G485,
G486 and G487 types,
on B115-B630 1000
contactors; see page
2-18.
0.050
14
UL/CSA and
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation
AC
A600
DC
P600
Mechanical life (million)
cycles 5
Operational characteristics of mechanical latch

Type
11 G358
Faston
Conductor section maximum

with 1 or 2 cables
flexible c/w lug
Contact block adapter.

11 G350 - 11 G354
G350-G354
IEC conventional free-air thermal

current Ith
G495
11 G355
Side by side
0.026
11 G356 1
One on top of other
0.120
Rated control
circuit voltage
11 G356 2
One on top of other
0.126
Power consumption AC
11 G356 3
One on top of other
0.132
11 G356 4
One on top of other
0.140
11 G356 5
One on top of other
0.146
11 G356 6
One on top of other
0.150
Terminals
0.795
Operational characteristics of terminal adapters
AC (50/60Hz)
DC
48-480
VA
1500
DC
48-480
1100
ms
40
pick-up
ms
300
Faston
mm
1-6.3x0.8
2-2.8x0.8
Minimum energising drop-out
Mechanical latch.
11 G495
For B115-B630
Type
Accessories
Order code
Characteristics
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Power terminal protection.
11 G360 - 11 G361 - 11 G363
Phillips 2
Conductor section
1 or 2 cables
mm
AWG
10
11 G361
For contactors B145-B180
0.026

11 G363
For contactors
B250-B310-B400
0.046
Type
11 G527
For contactor B500
0.238
11 G528
For contactor B500 4
0.265
11 G529
For contactor B630
0.238
11 G530
For contactor B630 4
0.266
For B115-B145-B180
0.065
11 BA1721
For B250-B310-B400
0.140
11 BA1846
For B500-B630
0.341
2 pole bars for parallel arrangement.
GOST
CCC
G354
G355
G356 ...
G360
G361
G362
G363
G370
To transform Faston terminals 10

of auxiliary contacts and coils
into screw terminals
0.003
To transform both coil Faston 5

terminals into screw terminals
0.022

IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14; add-on
auxiliary contacts also comply with IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
11 BA1594
For B115-B145-B180
0.095
For B250-B310-B400
0.149
11 BA1845
For B500-B630
0.322
11 G371
CSA
G350
Certified products.
- UL Recognized for USA only (File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices Component.
equipment.
motor controllers.
11 BA1720
11 G370
Marking elements.
11 BA126 1
Label for alphanumeric symbols 50
11 BA126 2
Label for writing
50
0.001
3958
Set of 100 alphanumeric

symbols
0.010
11 BA126 2
3958...
2-26
Type
0.026
11 G370
11 BA126 1
8.9
Tool
11 BA1595
lbin
For contactor B115
Terminal adapter.
11 G371
Nm
11 G360
3 pole star connecting bars.
11 G527 - 11 G528 - 11 G529

11 G530
G370-G371
Tightening torque
Dimensions
pages 2-42 and 43
0.001
Only one piece can be mounted on B1250 or B1600 type.

Not suitable for B630 1000, B1250, B1600.
For use with three-pole B630 1000, consult Customer Service;
see contact details on inside front cover.
Allowed distances see page 2-70.

To interlock two contactors B1250 or B1600, it is imperative to use two
pieces of type G356 6, one fixed on the left side and the other on the
right.
Replace with the digit of the voltages if 50 or 60 Hz or with the letter C
followed by voltage if DC. The standard voltages are:
AC 50/60Hz 48 - 110/125 indicate 110 - 220/240 indicate 220 380/415 indicate 380
DC
48 - 110/125 indicate 110 - 220/240 indicate 220
It can be mounted only in contactors if predisposed for it.
Except for B310 and B310 4.

Provided for one pole terminal only. Example: For three-pole contactors,
purchase 3 pieces for the upper terminals only or 6 pieces for all upper
and lower terminals.
Replace with the required alphanumeric symbol; each package contains
100 pieces of the same symbol.
Wiring diagrams
page 2-47
pages 2-68 to 71
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for B series contactors
Combinations: Mounting position on B115-B630 contactors
G527 (for B500 00)

G528 (for B500 4 00)
G529 (for B630 00)
G530 (for B630 4 00)
G356...
G370
G371
G363
G355
G350
G354
G360 (for B115)

G361 (for B145-B180)
BA1846
BA1845
B500
B630
BA1720
B250
B310
B400
B115
B145
B180
BA1595
BA1721
BA126 2
BA126 1
BA1594
3958
The add-on auxiliary contact blocks G350 and G354 can be applied to contactors
B115-B630 1000 only up to a maximum of four pieces for each contactor, for a total of
12 contacts.
The contact block G350 provides a 2NO+1NC or 1NO+2NC combination depending on
its mounting position; see the drawing delow. The G354 block consists of 1NO+1NC.
Contact blocks, BFX10 with 2 contacts, G484, G485, G486 and G487 types, can
be mounted using the G358 adapter, refer to page 2-18 for exact types and
order codes of the blocks.
A maximum of four adapters can be possibly used per contactor and each
adapter can hold one BFX10, G484, G485, G486 and G487.
BFX10 20
53
54
73
13
73
74
74
BFX10...
121
121
122
94
34
34
122
33
121
22
114
62
61
42
G354
G350
53
61
G484 03
G484...
71
51
61
71
G485...
G486...
G487
D
54
64
74
54
62
74
54
62
72
52
62
72
G485 ...
G486 ... - G487
57
65
67
55
G371
58
66
68
56
G358
G358
G358
113
41
81
73
or
74
01
53
114
or
82
82
13
G484 12
73
53
93
54
13
61
54
94
02
53
122
121
61
122
113
14
21
82
33
21
14
G484 21
73
62
113
114
62
or
114
22
93
63
22
113
21
61
62
81
21
01
02
or
14
82
52
14
81
54
62
22
13
53
02
41
42
94
61
G354
61
53
54
G350
51
G350
01
G354
BFX10 02
93
64
G484 30
53
BFX10 11
63
G350
Dimensions
pages 2-42 and 43
G354
G358
Wiring diagrams
page 2-47
pages 2-68 to 71
2-27
81
74
73
Contactors
Spare parts for BF series contactors
AC coils
Order code
Rated frequency
and voltage
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[Hz]
[kg]
[V]
Rated voltage at 50/60, 60Hz
For contactors BF00 A-BF09 A-BF12 A-BF18 A-BF25 A

BFX91A 024
50/60
24VAC
0.085
BFX91A 048
48VAC
0.085
BFX91A 110
110VAC
0.085
BFX91A 230
230VAC
0.085
400VAC
0.085
24VAC
0.085
BFX91A 400
BFX91A 024 60
BFX91A...
60
BFX91A 048 60
48VAC
0.085
BFX91A 120 60
120VAC
0.085
BFX91A 220 60
220VAC
0.085
BFX91A 230 60
230VAC
0.085
BFX91A 460 60
460VAC
0.085
BFX91A 575 60
575VAC
0.085
0.088
For contactors BF26 A-BF32 A-BF38 A.

BFX92A 024
50/60
50Hz pick-up % Us 80-110

drop-out % Us 20-55
drop-out % Us 20-55
60Hz coil
powered at

drop-out % Us 20-55
Average coil consumption at 20C

50/60Hz coil
powered at
50Hz
60Hz
60Hz coil
powered at
60Hz
in-rush VA
75
holding VA
in-rush VA
70
holding VA
6.5
in-rush VA
75
holding VA
at 50Hz
48VAC
0.088
110VAC
0.088
BFX92A 230
230VAC
0.088
Operational characteristics for BA705 coil

AC control
400VAC
0.088
Rated voltage at 50/60, 60Hz
24VAC
0.088
Operating voltage limits
60
BFX92A 048 60
48VAC
0.088
BFX92A 120 60
120VAC
0.088
BFX92A 220 60
220VAC
0.088
BFX92A 230 60
230VAC
0.088
BFX92A 460 60
460VAC
0.088
BFX92A 575 60
575VAC
0.088
11 BA705 024
50/60
50/60Hz coil
powered at
0.145
0.145
11 BA705 110
110VAC
0.145
11 BA705 230
230VAC
0.145
400VAC
0.145
60Hz coil
24VAC
0.145
powered at
11 BA705 048 60
48VAC
0.145
11 BA705 120 60
120VAC
0.145
11 BA705 220 60
220VAC
0.145
11 BA705 230 60
230VAC
0.145
11 BA705 460 60
460VAC
0.145
11 BA705 575 60
575VAC
0.145
Four-terminal coil.

drop-out % Us 20-55

drop-out % Us 20-55
24VAC
60
12-600
drop-out % Us 40-55
60Hz coil
powered at
48VAC
11 BA705 024 60
2.5
11 BA705 048
11 BA705 400
12-600
Dissipation
For BF50-BF65-BF80-BF95-BF110 contactors.
2-28
50/60Hz coil
powered at
BFX92A 110
BFX92A 024 60
11 BA705...
BFX92A 048
BFX92A 400
BFX92A...
24VAC
Operational characteristics for BFX91 A or BFX92 A coils

AC control
50/60Hz coil
powered at
50Hz
60Hz
Dissipation
60Hz
in-rush VA
220
holding VA
18
in-rush VA
200
holding VA
15
in-rush VA
220
holding VA
18
at 50Hz
Materials
Class F enamelled copper wire.
Special versions
For coils with non standard voltages, consult Customer
Service for information; see contact details on inside front
cover.
Contactors
Spare parts for BF series contactors
DC coils
Order code
Rated
voltage
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V]
[kg]
Rated voltage
For BF50 C-BF110 C contactors.
11 BA911...
11 BA911 12
12VDC
0.380
11 BA911 24
24VDC
0.380
11 BA911 48
48VDC
0.380
11 BA911 60
60VDC
0.380
11 BA911 110
110VDC
0.380
11 BA911 125
125VDC
0.380
11 BA911 220
220VDC
0.380
NOTE: No coil replacement for contactors BF00 D,

BF09 D-BF38 D, BF00 L, BF09 L-BF38 L, is possible.
Operational characteristics for BA911 coil

DC control
Operating limits
12-600
pick-up
% Us 80-110
drop-out
% Us 10-25
Average dissipation 20C

in-rush/holding
15
Materials
Special versions
cover.
2-29
Contactors
Spare parts for B series contactors
AC/DC coils
Order code
Rated voltage
AC 50/60 Hz and DC
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V]
[kg]
Coil for B115-B145-B180 contactors.
Coil
11 BA11574 24
24VAC/DC
0.800
11 BA11574 48
48VAC/DC
0.800
11 BA11574 60
60VAC/DC
0.800
11 BA11574 110
110-125VAC/DC
0.800
11 BA11574 220
220-240VAC/DC
0.800
11 BA11574 380
380-415VAC/DC
0.800
11 BA11574 440
440-480VAC/DC
0.800
AC and DC control
For contactor type
B115 - B145 - B180
Supply voltage
AC and DC
Rated control voltage
24-480
Operating limits pick-up
% Us
80-110
drop-out % Us
20-60
in-rush
VA/W
300
holding
VA/W
10
10
Consumption
Dissipation
Coil for B250-B310-B400 contactors.
For contactor type
B250 - B310 - B400
11 BA1699 24
24VAC/DC
1.800
Supply voltage
AC and DC
11 BA1699 48
48VAC/DC
1.800
24-480
11 BA1699 60
60VAC/DC
1.800
% Us
80-110
11 BA1699 110
110-125VAC/DC
1.800
11 BA1699 220
220-240VAC/DC
1.800
11 BA1699 380
380-415VAC/DC
1.800
11 BA1699 440
440-480VAC/DC
drop-out % Us
20-60
in-rush
VA/W
300
holding
VA/W
10
10
Consumption
1.800
Dissipation
For contactor type
Coil for B500-B630-B630 1000 contactors.

Bridge rectifier
11 BA1800 48
48VAC/DC
3.400
11 BA1800 60
60VAC/DC
3.400
11 BA1800 110
110-125VAC/DC
3.400
Supply voltage
11 BA1800 220
220-240VAC/DC
3.400
48-480
11 BA1800 380
380-415VAC/DC
3.400
% Us
80-110
11 BA1800 440
440-480VAC/DC
3.400
Consumption
Coil for B1250-B1600 contactors.
Coil protection
drop-out % Us
20-60
in-rush
VA/W
400
holding
VA/W
18
18
110-125VAC
3.400
11 BA1800 220
220-240VAC
3.400
Dissipation
Order code
For contactor
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
For contactor type
B1250 - B1600
Supply voltage
in AC only
[kg]
110-240
% Us
80-110
drop-out % Us
20-60
in-rush
VA/W
800
holding
VA/W
45
40
11 BA1575 1
B115-B145-B180
0.170
11 BA1700 1
B250-B310-B400
0.230
11 BA1799
B500-B630-B630 1000 1
B1250-B1600
0.520
B115-B145-B180
0.042
11 BA1678
B250-B310-B400
0.079
11 BA1803
B500-B630-B630 1000 1
B1250-B1600
0.164
Coil assembly
Comprises the coil, bridge rectifier, fixed core, coil
protection, cross piece and fixing screws.
Special versions
cover.
11 BA1553
Coil assembly (Coil, rectifier and coil protection).

11 BA1546
B115-B145-B180
1.220
11 BA1671
B250-B310-B400
2.290
11 BA1796
B500-B630-B630 1000 1
B1250-B1600
4.650

Consumption
Dissipation
Coil protection
2-30
AC and DC
11 BA1800 110
Bridge rectifier (Faston terminals).
Coil assembly
B500 - B630 B630 1000
Available for AC supply only.

Add the coil voltage digit. Standard voltages are:
AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 /
380-415 indicate 380 / 440-480V indicate 440.
Example: 11 BA1546 110 for B115-B180 contactor coil assembly
suitable for 110-125VAC/DC supply.
Add the coil voltage digit. Standard voltages are:
AC/DC 48 / 60 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 /
380-415 indicate 380 / 440-480V indicate 440.
Example: 11 BA1796 110 for B500-B1600 contactor coil assembly
suitable for 110-125VAC/DC supply.
For B1250 and B1600, add only 110 for 110-125VAC or 220 for
220-240VAC since these are the only standard voltages available.
During coil replacement operations, always reinsert dampers (1 pair for
B115-B180; 2 pairs for B250-B1600) and fixed magnetic core which one
finds in the original coil assembly.
Materials
Contactors
Spare parts for B series contactors
Main contacts
for BF contactors
Order code
For contactor
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Main contacts
3 or 4 pole set complete with screws.
BFX99...
11 G274... - 11 G275... - 11 G276... 11

G475 - 11 G476
Main contacts and arc

chutes for B contactors
BFX99 026T
BF26
0.038
BFX99 026F
BF26 T4
0.051
BFX99 032T
BF32
0.070
BFX99 038T
BF38
0.070
BFX99 038F
BF38 T4
0.093
11 G274
BF50
0.095
11 G274 4
BF50 40
0.127
11 G275
BF65
0.095
11 G275 4
BF65 40
0.127
11 G276
BF80
0.111
11 G276 4
BF80 40
0.148
11 G475
BF95
0.111
11 G476
BF110
0.111
Order code
For contactor
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Special versions
For non standard spare contact configurations, contact
Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
NOTE: For B1250 and B1600 contactor spares, consult
Customer Service for information; see contact details on
inside front cover.
Main contacts
3 or 4 pole set complete with Allen screws and key for
contact replacement.
11 G380... - 11 G381... - 11 G382...

11 G383... - 11 G384... - 11 G385...
11 G525... - 11 G526... - 11 G537...
11 G380
B115
0.440
11 G380 4
B115 4
0.580
11 G381
B145
0.440
11 G381 4
B145 4
0.580
11 G382
B180
0.440
11 G382 4
B180 4
0.580
11 G383
B250
0.770
11 G383 4
B250 4
1.030
11 G385
B310
0.770
11 G385 4
B310 4
1.030
11 G384
B400
0.770
11 G384 4
B400 4
1.030
11 G525
B500
2.520
11 G525 4
B500 4
3.360
11 G526
B630
2.660
11 G526 4
B630 4
3.550
11 G537
B630 1000
2.660
11 G537 4
B630 1000 4
3.550
11 G538
B1250 24
5,040
11 G538 4
B1250 4 24
6,720
11 G539
B1600 24
5,320
11 G539 4
B1600 4 24
7,100
11 BA1588
B115-B145-B180
0.755
11 BA1589
B115 4-B145 4-B180 4 1
1.000
11 BA1713
B250-B310-B400
1.210
11 BA1714
B250 4-B310 4-B400 4 1
1.600
11 BA1838
B500-B630-B630 1000 1
1.910
11 BA1839
B500 4-B630 4B630 1000 4
2.490
Arc chutes.
Arc chute
2-31
Contactors
THREE AND FOUR-POLE BG MINI-CONTACTORS AND CONTROL RELAY WITH AC OR DC COIL
8.5
(0.33)
8.5
(0.33)
8.5
(0.33)
50
(1.97)
94.2
(3.71)
58
(2.28)
34.9
(1.37)
34.9
(1.37)
9.7
(0.38)
3.2
(0.12)
RF...9
89.2
(3.51)
44
(1.73)
BGF...
with Faston terminals
4.4
(0.17)
44
(1.73)
4.4
(0.17)
50
(1.97)
58
(2.28)
53
(2.09)
50
(1.97)
8.5
(0.33)
8.5
(0.33)
8.5
(0.33)
4.4
(0.17)
58 (2.28)
1.4 (0.06)
4.4
(0.17)
44
(1.73)
7.6
(0.30)
(0 4
.16
)
BGP...
with rear PCB solder pins
57
(2.24)
58
(2.28)
44
(1.73)
(0 4
.16
)
BG... mini-contactors with screw terminals and RF...9 thermal relay

57
(2.24)
50
(1.97)
4.4
(0.17)
4.4
(0.17)
57
(2.24)
5.6
(0.22)
9.7
(0.38)
8.5
(0.33)
8.5
(0.33)
8.5
(0.33)
Recommended PCB drillings 1.7-2mm.
9.7
(0.38)
57
(2.24)
34.9
(1.37)
BF CONTACTORS WITH AC COIL
45
(1.77)
10.9
(0.43)
80.7
(3.18)
81
(3.19)
71
(2.79)
81
(3.19)
126
(4.96)
71
(2.79)
6.2
(0.24)
80.7
(3.18)
(0 4.2
.17
)
45
(1.77)
10.9
(0.43)
6.2
(0.24)
BF00A... control relay

BF09T...A - BF12T...A - BF18T...A four poles
(0 4.2
.17
)
BF09A - BF12A - BF18A - BF25A three poles

with RF...38 thermal relay
35
(1.38)
35
(1.38)
RF...38
81.2
(3.20)
14.6
(0.57)
BF26A - BF32A - BF38A three poles

90
(3.54)
7.9
(0.31)
61
(2.40)
14.6
(0.57)
90
(3.54)
134.8
(5.31)
80
(3.15)
90
(3.54)
80
(3.15)
90
(3.54)
(0 4.2
.17
)
45
(1.77)
14.6
(0.57)
7.9
(0.31)
BF26 T...A - BF38 T...A four poles
(0 4.2
.17
)
7.9
(0.31)
35
15.9 (1.38)
(0.62)
35
(1.38)
RF...38
81.5
(3.21)
BF50 00 - BF65 00 - BF80 00 - BF95 00 - BF110 00 three poles

with RF...95 3 thermal relay
23.5
(0.92)
98
(3.86)
124
(4.88)
112
(4.41)
14
(0.55)
110
(4.33)
113.5
(4.47)
(0 6
.24
)
75
(2.95)
23.5
(0.92)
14
(0.55)
BF50 40 - BF65 40 - BF80 40 - BDF80 40 four poles
78
(3.07)
55
(2.16)
RF...95 3
24.6
(0.97)
2-32
16.5
(0.65)
111
(4.37)
107
(4.21)
(0 6
.24
)
14.6
(0.57)
124
(4.88)
7.9
(0.31)
182
(7.16)
44
(1.73)
(0 4
.16
)
BG... mini-contactors or control relay
Contactors
THREE AND FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC

BF00...D and BF00...L control relays
BF09 T... - BF18 T... D and L four poles
BF09... - BF12... - BF18... - BF25...D and L three poles

35
(1.38)
35
(1.38)
RF...38
81.2
(3.20)
BF26... - BF32... - BF38... D and L three poles

7.9
(0.31)
107.5
(4.23)
61
(2.40)
14.6
(0.57)
80
(3.15)
90
(3.54)
107.5
(4.23)
134.8
(5.31)
80
(3.15)
7.9
(0.31)
(0 4.2
.17
)
45
(1.77)
14.6
(0.57)
BF26 T... - BF38 T... D and L four poles
90
(3.54)
14.6
(0.57)
(0 4.2
.17
)
7.9
(0.31)
98.5
(3.88)
(0 4.2
.17
)
126
(4.96)
71
(2.79)
71
(2.79)
81
(3.19)
6.2
(0.24)
45
(1.77)
10.9
(0.43)
81
(3.19)
98.5
(3.88)
(0 4.2
.17
)
45
(1.77)
10.9
(0.43)
6.2
(0.24)
35
15.9 (1.38)
(0.62)
35
(1.38)
RF...38
7.9
(0.31)
81.2
(3.20)
14.6
(0.57)
BF50C 00 - BF65C 00 - BF80C 00 - BF95C 00 - BF110C 00 three poles

with RF...95 3 thermal relay
150.5
(5.92)
182
(7.16)
124
(4.88)
(0 6
.24
)
75
(2.95)
23.5
(0.92)
112
(4.41)
14
(0.55)
55
(2.16)
RF...95 3
24.6
(0.97)
149.5
(5.88)
16.5
(0.65)
BF65C 40 - BF80C 40 - BFD80C 40 four poles

98
(3.86)
144
(5.67)
124
(4.88)
(0 6
.24
)
23.5
(0.92)
110
(4.33)
14
(0.55)
78
(3.07)
2-33
Contactors
B CONTACTORS WITH AC/DC COIL
B115 - B145 - B180 three poles
120
(4.72)
40
40
(1.57)
(1.57)
B
184
(7.24)
4
(0.16)
322
(12.68)
120
(4.72)
150
(5.90)
170
(6.69)
170
(6.69)
(0 7.5
.29
)
150
(5.90)
114
(4.49)
90
(3.54)
M6
M8
20
(0.79)
40
40
(1.57)
(1.57)
127.5
(5.02)
56.5
(2.22)
166.1
(6.54)
CONTACTOR TYPE
B115
M6
15 (0.59)
B145
M8
20 (0.79)
B180
M8
20 (0.79)
B115 4 - B145 4 - B180 4 four poles
114
(4.49)
(0 7.5
.29
)
130
(5.12)
M6
CONTACTOR TYPE
2-34
B115
M6
15 (0.59)
B145
M8
20 (0.79)
B180
M8
20 (0.79)
4
(0.16)
120
(4.72)
150
(5.90)
170
(6.69)
184
(7.24)
40
(1.57)
170
(6.69)
160
(6.30)
40
(1.57)
B
150
(5.90)
40
(1.57)
Contactors
B250 - B310 - B400 three poles

145
(5.71)
47.5
47.5
(1.87)
(1.87)
25
(0.98)
225
(8.86)
M10X35
140
(5.51)
179
(7.05)
204
(8.03)
204
(8.03)
5
(0.20)
370
(14.57)
1
0(
0.3
9
)
180
(7.09)
144
(5.67)
110
(4.33)
M8
25
(0.98)
47.5
(1.87)
56.8
(2.24)
M1
166.1
(6.54)
47.5
(1.87)
145
(5.71)
B250 4 - B310 4 - B400 4 four poles
225
(8.86)
M10X35
204
(8.03)
5
(0.20)
180
(7.09)
144
(5.67)
140
(5.51)
179
(7.05)
204
(8.03)
47.5
(1.87)
(0
.39
192.5
(7.58)
47.5
(1.87)
25
(0.98)
1
0
47.5
(1.87)
M8
157.5
(6.20)
2-35
Contactors
B500 - B630 three poles

194
(7.64)
263
(10.35)
65
(2.56)
177.5
(6.99)
6
(0.24)
1
2(
0.4
7
)
230
(9.05)
270
(10.63)
170
(6.69)
230
(9.05)
C
65
(2.56)
150
(5.90)
M10
CONTACTOR TYPE
B500
M10
35 (1.38)
265 (10.43)
B630
M12
40 (1.57)
270 (10.63)
B500 4 - B630 4 four poles
263
(10.35)
65
(2.56)
177.5
(6.99)
1
2
(0
.47
230
(9.05)
270
(10.63)
215
(8.46)
M10
CONTACTOR TYPE
B500
M10
35 (1.38)
265 (10.43)
B630
M12
40 (1.57)
270 (10.63)
2-36
6
(0.24)
170
(6.69)
230
(9.05)
C
259
(10.20)
65
(2.56)
65
(2.56)
Contactors
B630 1000 three poles

194
(7.64)
60
(2.36)
65
(2.56)
263
(10.35)
65
(2.56)
6
(0.24)
207.6
(8.17)
M12
170
(6.69)
230
(9.05)
270
(10.63)
1
2(
0.4
7
)
230
(9.05)
476
(18.74)
147.2
(5.79)
150
(5.90)
M10
B630 1000 four poles
60
(2.36)
65
(2.56)
259
(10.20)
65
(2.56)
65
(2.56)
263
(10.35)
207.6
(8.17)
M12
6
(0.24)
170
(6.69)
230
(9.05)
270
(10.63)
2(
0.4
230
(9.05)
476
(18.74)
147.2
(5.79)
M10
215
(8.46)
2-37
Contactors
B1250 - B1600 three poles
540
(21.16)
500
(19.68)
80
(3.15)
40
(1.57)
288
(11.34)
M12
10
(0.39)
360
(14.17)
320
(12.60)
130
(5.12)
B1250 - B1600 four poles

670
(26.38)
630
(24.80)
80
(3.15)
40
(1.57)
130
(5.12)
288
(11.34)
10
(0.39)
360
(14.17)
320
(12.60)
M12
B115 - B145 - B180 - B250 - B310 - B400 - B500 - B630 - B630 1000 - B1250 - B1600
10
(0.39)
Minimum safety distance

from metal parts.
Minimum space needed to replace the coil.
A
B
A
B
2-38
B115-B145-B180 B250-B310-B400 B500B630 1000

120 (4.72)
145 (5.71)
170 (6.69)
100 (3.94)
110 (4.33)
160 (6.30)
If dimension B is respected, coil replacement is

possible without removing power wiring.
Contactors
CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
BFK09 10A - BFK12 10A - BFK18 10A
123~
(4.84~)
(0 4.2
.17
)
80
(3.15)
90
(3.54)
113~
(4.45~)
(0 4.2
.17
)
125.5
(4.94)
14.6
(0.57)
7.9
(0.31)
71
(2.79)
81
(3.19)
6.2
(0.24)
BFK26 00A - BFK32 00A - BFK38 00A

116.6
(4.59)
10.9
(0.43)
35
(1.38)
35
(1.38)
45
(1.77)
45
(1.77)
BF50K 00 - BF65K 00 - BF70K 00 - BF80K 00

23.5
(0.92)
148.3
(5.84)
124
(4.88)
112
(4.41)
160~
(6.30~)
(0 6
.24
)
13.9
(0.55)
55
(2.16)
75
(2.95)
ADD-ON BLOCKS WITH BG MINI-CONTACTORS

BGX10... auxiliary contacts
BGX50 00 interlock with BGX10... or BGXF... auxiliary contacts

and BGX77 or BGX78 or BGX79 suppressor
BGX77 or BGX78 or BGX79...

suppressor only
88
(3.46)
BGX50 00
Valid for BGX11... contacts as well when mounted

on left-hand contactor of BGT or BGC assembly
(p. 4-5).
58
(2.28)
23.8
(0.94)
26
(1.02)
BGX77... - BGX78...
BGX79...
G325, G326
G323
G324
10
(0.39)
15
(0.59)
12
(0.47)
23.5
(0.92)
10
(0.39)
37
(1.46)
59
(2.32)
48.5
(1.91)
58
(2.28)
44
(1.73)
56
(2.20)
7.75
(0.30)
BGX10... - BGX77...
BGX78... - BGX79...
BGXF10...
Paralleling links G323 - G324

21
(0.83)
BGX80 00 shroud
44
(1.73)
30
(1.18)
30
(1.18)
26
(1.02)
58
(2.28)
6
(0.24)
26
(1.02)
88
(3.46)
58
(2.28)
82
(3.23)
44
(1.73)
12
(0.47)
G325
37
(1.46)
9
(0.35)
G326
12
(0.47)
16
(0.63)
BGX80 00
2-39
Contactors
ADD-ON BLOCKS WITH BF CONTACTORS

Auxiliary contacts BFX10... w/2 contacts
BFX12...
42.8
(1.68)
29
(1.14)
10
(0.39)
41.4
(1.63)
41.4
(1.63)
36.5
(1.44)
4.3
(0.17)
G484...
G418...
G218
8
(0.31)
8
(0.31)
28.2
(1.11)
27
(1.06)
40.6
(1.60)
46
(1.81)
36
(1.42)
G280 adapter with G218 contact
8
(0.31)
9.5
(0.37)
9.5
(0.37)
52.5
(2.07)
57
(2.24)
10.3
(0.40)
44.2
(1.74)
43
(1.69)
36
(1.42)
G485..., G486..., G487

delayed contacts
G419 adapter c/w G418 contacts, G428 contacts

G483 adapter c/w G481 or G482 contacts
Fourth pole
BFX42
BFXD42
16
(0.63)
28
(1.10)
12.3
(0.48
51
(2.01)
G481..., G482
46.9
(1.85)
28
(1.10)
16
(0.63)
84.8
(3.34)
104
(4.09)
90
(3.54)
90
(3.54)
45.7
(1.80)
44.7
(1.76)
15.9
15.9
(0.62)
Interlocks
BFX50 00, BFX50 01
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
90 (3.54)
10
(0.39)
15
(0.59)
31.9
(1.15)
41
(1.61)
BFX10... w/4 contacts
21.4
(0.84)
BFX50 02
2-40
BFX50 02
Contactors
Interlock
G269 2
Surge suppressors
G318, G319 225, G322
15
(0.59)
8
(0.31)
2
31.9
(1.15)
41
(1.61)
41
(1.61)
23
(0.90)
G222, G272 latch
G454, G455 manual closing
BFX80 sealing cover
35
(1.38)
20
(0.79)
45
(1.77)
45
(1.77)
32.1
(1.26)
4.5
(0.18)
100
(3.94)
92 (3.62)
35
(1.38)
BFX31 01
G232 terminal
1-pole
33.5
(1.32)
17
(0.67)
16.5 (0.65)
13.6 (0.53)
49
(1.93)
66.5
(2.62)
34.5
(1.36)
12
(0.47)
16
(0.63)
10
(0.39)
G271, G288 terminal

3 and 4-pole
28.9
(1.14)
G231 terminal
1-pole
BFX32 01
24.8
(0.98)
35
(1.38)
90
(3.54)
80 (3.15)
90
(3.54)
71 (2.79)
83 (3.27)
90
(3.54)
(0 4.2
.16
)
Rigid connecting kits

BFX32 01
(0 4.2
.16
)

BFX31 01
39.2
(1.54)
40
(1.57)
38.7
(1.52)
29.1
(1.14)
11.3
(0.44)
90mm (3.54) for G288 terminal only.
45
(1.77)
75
(2.95)
45
(1.77)
4.3
(0.17)
31.8
(1.25)
11.6
(0.46)
86
(3.38)
14.5
(0.57)
4.3
(0.17)
10
(0.39)
21
(0.83)
25
(0.98)
21
(0.83)
17.1
(0.67)
11.5
(0.45)
BFX89 02 fixing bracket
BFX89 01 fixing base
9.7
(0.38)
16 (0.63)
G285 auxiliary terminal
4.3
(0.17)
35
(1.38)
3.5
(0.14)
2-41
Contactors
ADD-ON BLOCKS WITH B CONTACTORS
G350, G354 auxiliary contacts
G358 adapter
14.5
(0.57)
111.5
(4.39)
60.6
(2.38)
30
(1.18)
G356 interlocks
G356 interlocks
15
(0.59)
29.8
(1.17)
102
(4.01)
50
(1.97)
68
(2.68)
31.9
(1.25)
Terminal protection G360, G361
For interaxis dimensions, refer to page 2-70.
Terminal protection
G363
2-42
G527, G529
127.5
(5.02)
56.5
(2.22)
185
(7.28)
117
(4.61)
96.7
(3.81)
35.2
(1.38)
167
83
Contactors
G528, G530 terminal protection
83
(3.27)
167
(6.57)
250
(9.84)
117
(4.61)
BA1594, BA1720 2-pole bar
G495 latch
5
(0.20)
E1
PARALLEL POLE BAR

BA1594
BA1720
A
45 (1.77)
53 (2.09)
B
32 (1.26)
50 (1.97)
E2
85
(3.35)
C
14 (0.55)
18 (0.71)
CONTACTOR TYPE
B115 - B145 - B180
221 (8.70)
B250 - B400
255 (8.86)
B500 - B630
300 (11.81)
BA1845 2-pole bar

13 (0.51)
10
(0.39)
65
(2.56)
20
(0.79)
80 (3.15)
40
(1.57)
2-43
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
THREE-POLE CONTACTORS IN AC
BG06 A - BG09 A - BGF09 A - BGP09 A - BG12 A
BF09 A - BF12 A - BF18 A - BF25 A
...10
A1
...01
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
13
A1
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
21
A1
A2
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
14
A2
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
A1
A2
A2
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
13
A1
14
A2
A2
L2
3
L3
5
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
A2
A1
A2
14
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
Auxiliary contact 13-14 is found on
BFK09 A - BFK12 A - BFK18 A types only.
2-44
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
The input electronic circuit

of the contactor coil is
designed and tested
according to IEEEC 62.41
standards and can
withstand a 10kV impulse
voltage (1.2/50s) with 50
Joule energy.
The use of an auxiliary
reduced voltage
transformer is
recommended for higher
values.
A2
...01
22
13
A2
6
T3
A1
L3
5
A1
4
T2
L1
A1
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
BF50C - BF110C
L1
1
L2
3
2
T1
21
CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

BFK09 A - BFK12 A - BFK18 A
BFK26 A - BFK32 A - BFK38 A - BF50K - BF65K - BF70K - BF80K
L1
1
L3
5
...10
L1
1
BF26 D - BF32 D - BF38 D

BF26 L - BF32 L - BF38 L
A1
L2
3
BF09 D - BF12 D - BF18 D - BF25 D

BF09 L - BF12 L - BF18 L - BF25 L
...01
L1
1
L1
1
22
THREE-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC
BG06 D - BG09 D - BGF09 D - BGP09 D - BG12 D
BG06 L - BG09 L - BGF09 L - BGP09 L - BG12 L
...10
B1250 24 - B1600 24...
BF26 A - BF32 A - BF38 A

BF50 - BF110
B115 - B630 1000
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
13
A1
14
A2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
21
22
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN AC
BG09 T4 A - BGF09 T4 A - BGP09 T4 A
BF09 T4 A - BF38 T4 A
BF50 40 - BF65 40 - BF80 40 - BFD80 40
B115 4 - B630 1000 4
A1
A2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
L4
7
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
8
T4
B1250 4 - B1600 4
L1
L2
L3
L4
T1
T2
T3
T4
A1
A2
The input electronic circuit of the contactor coil is designed and tested according to
IEEEC 62.41 standards and can withstand a 10kV impulse voltage (1.2/50s) with
50 Joule energy.
The use of an auxiliary reduced voltage transformer is recommended for higher values.
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC
BG09 T4 D - BGF09 T4 D - BGP09 T4 D
A1
A2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
L4
7
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
8
T4
BF09 T4 D - BF38 T4 D
BF09 T4 L - BF38 T4 L
A1
A2
BF65C 40 - BF80C 40 - BFD80C 40
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
L4
7
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
8
T4
A1
A2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
L4
7
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
8
T4
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN AC WITH 2NO+2NC MAIN POLES

BF09 T2 A - BF18 T2 A - BF26 T2 A - BF38 T2 A
BG09 T2 A
WITH 4NC MAIN POLES

BF18 T0 A - BF26 T0 A
A1
1
NO
R1
NC
R3
NC
3
NO
A1
R1
NC
1
NO
3
NO
R3
NC
A1
R1
NC
R3
NC
R5
NC
R7
NC
A2
R2
R4
A2
R2
R4
A2
R2
R4
R6
R8
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC WITH 2NO+2NC MAIN POLES

BF18 T2 D - BF26 T2 D - BF38 T2 D
BG09 T2 D
BF18 T2 L - BF26 T2 L - BF38 T2 L
WITH 4NC MAIN POLES

BF18 T0 D - BF26 T0 D
BF18 T0 L
A1
1
NO
R1
NC
R3
NC
3
NO
A1
R1
NC
1
NO
3
NO
R3
NC
A1
R1
NC
R3
NC
R5
NC
R7
NC
A2
R2
R4
A2
R2
R4
A2
R2
R4
R6
R8
CONTROL RELAYS IN AC
BG00 40 A - BGF00 40 A
BF00 40 A
BG00 31 A - BGF00 31 A
BF00 31 A
BG00 22 A - BGF00 22 A
BF00 22 A
BF00 04 A
A1
13
23
33
43
A1
13
21
33
43
A1
13
21
31
43
A1
11
21
31
41
A2
14
24
34
44
A2
14
22
34
44
A2
14
22
32
44
A2
12
22
32
42
CONTROL RELAYS IN DC
BG00 40 D - BGF00 40 D
BG00 40 L - BGF00 40 L
BG00 31 D - BGF00 31 D
BG00 31 L - BGF00 31 L
BG00 22 D - BGF00 22 D
BG00 22 L - BGF00 22 L
A1
13
23
33
43
A1
13
21
33
43
A1
13
21
31
43
A2
14
24
34
44
A2
14
22
34
44
A2
14
22
32
44
BF00 40 D
BF00 40 L
BF00 31 D
BF00 31 L
BF00 22 D
BF00 22 L
BF00 04 D
BF00 04 L
A1
13
23
33
43
A1
13
21
33
43
A1
13
21
31
43
A1
11
21
31
41
A2
14
24
34
44
A2
14
22
34
44
A2
14
22
32
44
A2
12
22
32
42
2-45
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
BGX10 04
BGXF10 04
51
61
53
61
53
63
51
61
71
81
53
61
71
81
53
63
71
81
53
63
73
81
53
63
73
83
52
62
54
62
54
64
52
62
72
82
54
62
72
82
54
64
72
82
54
64
74
82
54
64
74
84
Special auxiliary contacts

BGX11 11
BGX11 22
51
51
63
61
BGX10 13
BGXF10 13
Surge suppressor
BGX77...
73
BGX10 22
BGXF10 22
BGX78...
83
BGX10 40
BGXF10 40
BGX10 31
BGXF10 31
BGX79...
--
52
64
52
62
74
84
Rigid connections
SMX90 21
A1
A2
SMX90 22
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
A1
A2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR BF CONTACTORS

Auxiliary contacts
BFX10 11
BFX10 02
A1
A2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
BFX10 20
A1
A2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
G484 30
11
A1
12
A2
G484 21
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
11
12
G484 12
G484 03
51
61
53
61
53
63
53
63
73
53
61
73
53
61
71
51
61
71
52
62
54
62
54
64
54
64
74
54
62
74
54
62
72
52
62
72
BFX10 04
BFX10 13
BFX10 22
BFX10 31
BFX10 40
51
61
71
81
53
61
71
81
53
61
71
83
53
61
73
83
53
63
73
83
52
62
72
82
54
62
72
82
54
62
72
84
54
62
74
84
54
64
74
84
Auxiliary contact
G218
91
91
91
94
03
02
01
92
02
01
93
03
93
92
04
02
94
93
94
03
04
04
92
01
92
93
02
03
91
94
01
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR BG MINI-CONTACTORS

Auxiliary contacts
BGX10 11
BGX10 20
BGX10 02
BGXF10 11
BGXF10 20
BGXF10 02
04
The termination of the G218 auxiliary contact has more than one numbering due to the fact that the block can assume various mounting positions.
See the numbering in boldface for a correct interpretation.
2-46
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
Auxiliary contacts
BFX12 02
G418 10
G428 10
BFX12 20
BFX12 11
G418 10A
G428 10A
G418 01
G428 01
G418 01D
G428 01D
252
262
154
162
154
164
04
08
02
02
281
271
183
171
183
173
93
97
91
91
282
272
184
172
184
174
94
98
92
96
251
261
153
161
153
163
07
01
03
G481 02
Mechanical latch
G222... - G272...
G482
114
NO
124
NO
114
NO
122
NC
112
NC
122
NC
114
111
93
03
93
01
91
01
94
91
04
94
02
92
02
113
123
113
121
111
121
NO
NO
NO
NC
NC
NC
A1
E1
92
A2
E2
112
94
05
G481 11
G481 20
The termination of the BFX12... / G418... / G481... / G482 auxiliary contacts has more than one numbering due to the fact that the block can assume various mounting
positions. See the numbering in boldface when the block is mounted on the left side of the contactor.
Add-on pole
BFX42
BFXD42
Interlock c/w
contacts
BFX50 01
L4
7
131
Delayed auxiliary contacts

G486... - G487
G485...
Surge suppressor
G318... - BFX77...
G319 225
G322... - BFX79...
131
57
65
67
55
--
~
132
132
8
T4
58
66

BFX31 01 - BFX31 02 - BFX32 01
A1
A2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
A1
A2
68
56
BFX31 31 - BFX32 31 - BFX32 32
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
A1
A2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
A1
A2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
A1
A2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR B CONTACTORS

G350 - G354 auxiliary contacts
G354
G350
Mechanical latch
G495
G350
G354
A1
41
73
13
73
42
74
74
53
81
121
121
33
62
94
122
34
34
122
33
121
22
114
61
82
82
02
74
42
13
13
01
73
81
or
04
91
92
113
41
G350
53
81
74
73
G354
03
A2
114
or
93
54
113
14
E2
54
94
21
14
21
or
62
122
22
E1
122
121
61
113
114
62
82
53
93
62
114
22
61
81
22
113
21
82
21
01
02
or
14
61
54
14
54
13
53
G350
G354
2-47
Contactors
MOUNTING POSITION OF CONTACTORS

ON VERTICAL PLANE
The performances given in this catalogue have been established with contactors
mounted on a vertical plane with line terminals facing upwards and load terminals
facing downwards.
All contactors can be mounted with a 30 inclination to the
vertical axis of the contactor without any derating.
For BF series contactors, this inclination can reach 90, that is with the terminals
are facing towards left and right.
For BG mini-contactors:
Position A, with coil terminals A1-A2 facing downwards, is not recommended.
The position with coil terminals A1-A2 facing upwards is not recommended for
mini-contactors with NC contacts.
30
0
A1
A2
Pos. A
ON VERTICAL PLANE WITH 30 INCLINATION

All contactors can be mounted on a plane which varies in respect to the vertical up
to 30 angle.
On the average, a 5% increase of the minimum pick-up voltage in -30 position can
be noted.
ON HORIZONTAL PLANE (FOR BF SERIES CONTACTORS)

Considerable performance variations can be noted.
It is necessary to check the two possible mounting positions:
when the contactor is energised, the movable equipment moves upwards.
when the contactor is energised, the movable equipment moves downwards.
In the first case, it is difficult to close the contactor while in the second, to open it.
Customer Service can provide further information

concerning operational performance of contactors
mounted on a horizontal plane; see contact details on
inside front cover.
DYNAMIC TYPE TESTS

Our contactors have sustained dynamic testing, with contactor mounting position
rotated 22.5 in respect to the three orthogonal axes.
2-48
This inclination is greater than the one prescribed by main naval registers.
The variables which could influence the contactor performance, in addition to the
two mounting positions, are:
type of contactor
type of control
contact configuration
number and type of add-on blocks
permissible tolerance of auxiliary voltage variation
ambient temperature.
NOTE: Position B is not recommendable.
Contactors
IEC UTILISATION CATEGORY AC3

POLE CHARACTERISTICS
Squirrel-cage induction motors; breaking at rated motor current.
UL/CSA DUTY FOR AC MOTOR SWITCHING

MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Three-phase AC induction motors; breaking at
rated motor current.
UL/CSA RATINGS at ambient temperature 55C
MAXIMUM IEC OPERATIONAL POWER at ambient temperature 55C.

Contactor
type
IEC operational
IEC operational power
current
(Ue 440V) 220/230V 380/400V 415V
[A]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
440V
[kW]
500V
[kW]
660/690V
[kW]
1000V
[kW]
Maximum horsepower ratings (60Hz)

Three phase
200-208V 240V
480V
600V
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
BG06
1.5
2.2
2.4
2.5
--
BG09
2.2
4.0
4.3
4.5
--
BG12
12
3.2
5.7
6.2
5.5
--
10
BF09
2.2
4.2
4.5
4.8
5.5
7.5
--
BF12
12
3.2
5.7
6.2
6.2
7.5
10
--
10
BF18
18
7.5
10
10
--
10
15
BF25
25
7.0
12.5
13.4
13.4
15
18
--
15
15
20
BF26
26
7.3
13
14
14
15.6
18.5
--
15
BF32
32
8.8
16
17
17
20
22
--
10
10
20
25
BF38
38
11
18.5
18.5
18.5
20
22
--
10
15
30
30
BF50
50
14.3
25
27.2
27.2
33.2
43.5
25
10
15
30
40
BF65
65
18.5
33
36
36
45.3
59.7
30
20
25
50
60
BF80
80
23
41
46
46
56
74
37
25
30
60
75
BF95
95
27.6
50
55
55
56
74
45
30
30
60
75
BF110
110
33
61
66
70
59
80
45
30
40
75
100
B115
110
33
61
66
70
80
100
63
30
40
75
100
B145
150
46
80
88
93
100
120
75
50
50
100
125
B180
185
57
100
108
115
123
144
103
60
75
150
150
B250
265
83
140
155
164
176
212
156
75
100
200
250
B310
320
100
170
188
200
213
256
180
100
125
250
300
B400
420
130
225
247
263
271
352
208
125
150
350
400
B500
520
156
290
306
328
367
416
312
150
200
400
450
B630
630
198
335
368
368
368
440
368
200
250
500
500
B630
B250
B310
B400
B500
BF65
BF80
BF95
BF110
B115
B145
B180
BF50
BF26
BF32
BF38
BF18
BF25
BF12
BF09
ELECTRICAL IEC LIFE FOR MOTOR CONTROL AC3 440V

Electrical life of contactors
10
12
BG 09
BG 6
0
BG
1
0.5
0.3
1000
400
420 500
520 600
630
65
80
95 100
110
150
185
200
250
300
310
50
38
50
26
32
18
12
20
25
30
10
9
0.1
0.2
MILLION CYCLES
[A]
2-49
Contactors
IEC DC UTILISATION CATEGORY

MAXIMUM OPERATIONAL CURRENT

IEC Voltage
Ue
Contactor
24V
48V
75V
2-50
Type
IEC Maximum current Ie [A] in categories:

DC1 with L/R 1ms
and poles in series
1
2
3
BG06
12
14
BG09
12
15
BG12
12
BF09
15
BF12
17
DC3 - DC5 with L/R 15ms

and poles in series
1
2
--
--
16
16
10
10
15
16
--
10
--
18
20
20
10
13
15
15
20
22
20
12
15
18
15
BF18
17
20
22
22
12
15
18
18
BF25
20
23
23
--
15
18
22
--
BF26
25
28
28
28
18
20
25
30
BF32
30
32
32
--
20
25
30
--
BF38
35
36
36
36
24
28
32
32
BF50
45
60
60
60
30
35
50
55
BF65
50
70
70
70
35
45
55
60
BF80
70
100
100
100
40
60
80
90
BF95
70
100
100
--
40
60
80
--
BF110
70
100
100
--
40
60
80
--
BG06
11
14
--
--
BG09
10
14
16
16
10
10
BG12
10
14
16
--
10
--
BF09
13
18
20
20
11
15
15
BF12
15
20
22
20
11
13
18
15
BF18
15
20
22
22
11
13
18
18
BF25
18
23
23
--
13
18
22
--
BF26
21
28
28
28
15
20
25
30
BF32
26
32
32
--
17
22
28
--
BF38
30
34
34
34
20
25
28
28
BF50
40
60
60
60
25
35
50
55
BF65
50
70
70
70
25
40
50
60
BF80
60
100
100
100
30
50
70
90
BF95
60
100
100
--
30
55
75
--
BF110
60
100
100
--
30
55
75
--
BG06
--
--
BG09
10
10
BG12
10
--
--
BF09
12
17
20
20
10
13
15
BF12
13
18
20
20
10
12
15
15
BF18
15
20
20
20
11
13
16
16
BF25
18
23
23
--
13
16
18
--
BF26
18
25
25
25
13
18
20
25
BF32
22
28
32
--
15
20
28
--
BF38
23
29
33
33
17
22
28
28
BF50
40
60
60
60
22
30
45
55
60
BF65
50
70
70
70
25
40
50
BF80
60
100
100
100
30
50
70
90
BF95
60
100
100
--
30
50
70
--
BF110
60
100
100
--
30
50
70
--
Contactors
IEC Voltage
Ue
110V
160V
220V
300V
Contactor
Type

DC1 with L/R 1ms
and poles in series
1
2
3
BG06
BG09
10

and poles in series
1
2
--
--
10
BG12
10
--
--
BF09
12
15
16
11
12
BF12
13
16
16
12
16
BF18
13
16
18
12
13
BF25
16
18
--
10
15
--
BF26
22
24
24
13
18
20
BF32
25
27
--
2.5
15
20
--
BF38
32
34
34
2.5
18
23
23
BF50
50
55
60
25
30
45
BF65
60
60
70
30
35
50
BF80
80
85
100
40
60
75
BF95
80
85
--
40
60
--
BF110
80
85
--
40
60
--
BG06
--
--
--
--
BG09
--
--
BG12
--
--
--
--
BG06
0.5
BG09
0.8
0.8
BG12
0.8
BF09
10
12
0.75
1.5
BF12
11
12
0.75
1.5
BF18
11
13
0.75
1.5
BF25
12
--
0.75
1.5
--
BF26
12
14
14
0.75
1.5
10
15
BF32
14
16
--
12
--
BF38
20
26
26
15
15
BF50
36
45
50
20
25
BF65
36
50
60
25
30
BF80
40
55
70
35
40
BF95
40
55
--
35
--
BF110
40
55
--
35
--
BF09
--
--
--
10
--
--
--
BF18
--
--
--
11
--
--
--
BF26
--
--
--
16
--
--
--
10
BF38
--
--
--
25
--
--
--
12
BF65
--
--
--
60
--
--
--
25
BF80
--
--
--
70
--
--
--
35
2-51
Contactors
IEC DC UTILISATION CATEGORY


IEC Voltage
Ue
75V
110V
220V
330V
460V
2-52
Contactor
Type

DC1 with L/R 1ms
and poles in series
1
2
3
B115
160
160
160

and poles in series
1
2
160
140
140
140
140
B145
220
220
220
220
160
160
160
160
B180
260
260
260
260
180
180
180
180
280
B250
350
350
350
350
280
280
280
B310
375
375
375
375
310
310
310
310
B400
400
400
400
400
350
350
350
350
B500
650
650
650
650
550
550
550
550
B630
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
B115
100
130
130
130
70
100
120
120
B145
110
150
150
150
80
120
140
140
160
B180
120
170
170
170
90
140
160
B250
160
300
300
300
150
250
280
280
B310
195
350
350
350
170
290
310
310
B400
250
400
400
400
200
350
350
350
B500
320
550
600
600
320
550
550
550
B630
460
800
800
800
460
800
800
800
B115
--
100
130
130
--
80
100
120
B145
--
130
150
150
--
90
120
140
B180
--
150
170
170
--
100
140
160
B250
--
250
300
300
--
200
250
280
B310
--
300
350
350
--
230
290
310
B400
--
350
400
400
--
280
350
350
B500
--
450
600
600
--
450
550
550
B630
--
700
800
800
--
700
800
800
B115
--
--
100
130
--
--
80
120
B145
130
150
--
--
90
140
B180
--
--
150
170
--
--
100
160
B250
--
--
250
300
--
--
200
280
B310
--
--
300
350
--
--
230
310
B400
--
--
350
400
--
--
280
350
B500
--
--
450
600
--
--
450
550
B630
--
--
700
750
--
--
650
700
B115
--
--
--
100
--
--
--
80
B145
--
--
--
130
--
--
--
90
B180
--
--
--
150
--
--
--
100
B250
--
--
--
250
--
--
--
200
B310
--
--
--
300
--
--
--
230
B400
--
--
--
350
--
--
--
280
B500
--
--
--
450
--
--
--
450
B630
--
--
--
700
--
--
--
700
Contactors
IEC UTILISATION CATEGORIES DC1, DC3 AND DC5.

CHOICE CRITERIA
The elements to be considered for the contactor choice are:
-- Rated operational current Ie
-- Rated operational voltage Ue
-- Utilisation category and L/R time constant
-- Eventual verification of electrical life.
POLES IN SERIES
It is important to use contactors with the indicated number of poles in series
depending on operating voltage.
The poles in series can be connected to one single polarity or divided between the
two polarities of the circuit indifferently.
NOTE. For voltages lower than 30V, the diagrams given in figures 3 and 4 are not
recommendable since voltage drops can take place. In these cases, it is better to use
poles in parallel considering the notes given in the following section.
OPERATING CONDITIONS
Indicated current is valid for:
-- Ambient temperature 55C
-- Operating cycles: up to 120 cy/h with 60% on-load factor
up to 250 cy/h with 30% on-load factor.
Examples of poles in series:
1 POLE
Fig. 1
2 POLES
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
POLES IN PARALLEL
It is possible to increase the electrical life by placing poles in series when using
voltages which require 1 or 2 poles in parallel.
Poles in parallel do not increase the maximum operational current given in the
previous pages; that is, if one pole has a maximum operational current in DC5 of 8A,
two poles in parallel, it will always be 8A.
With poles in parallel, it is possible to increase the rated contact capacity (Ith) only if
the contactor opens and closes in no-load conditions or when used as resistance
shunts.
In this case, the contact capacity can be increased.
Examples of poles in parallel:
1 POLE in series and
2 POLES in parallel
Fig. 5

See tables on pages 2-50 to 2-52.
3 POLES
4 POLES
Fig. 4
The value can be obtained by multiplying the rated current of one pole by the K
factor given below; e.g.: if one pole carries 10A, three poles in parallel can carry
10 x 2.2 = 22A.
Therefore, the operating current is the one indicated in the tables, multiplied by the
K factor given below which takes into consideration the unequal current division on
the various poles.
2 POLES in parallel K = 1.6

3 POLES in parallel

4 POLES in parallel

2 POLES in parallel
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
OTHER CONDITIONS
For different operating conditions or voltage not included among those indicated in
the tables, on pages 2-50 to 2-52, consult Customer Service; see contact details on
inside front cover.
2-53
Contactors
IEC SELECTION GUIDE FOR LIGHTING CIRCUIT SWITCHING

GENERAL INFORMATION
The elements which are to be considered for the contactor choice are:
Type of lamp
Power factor (cos)
With or without power factor correction
Value of current when switching on and in running
conditions.
Depending on the number and type of lamps, it is also important to bear in mind the
main discriminating characteristics given below for the contactor choice:
Incandescent lamps
contactor making capacity
Lamps not corrected rated contactor current in AC1
Lamps corrected
rated contactor current in AC3
The table below summarises the major characteristics depending on the more
commonly used type of lamps:
Type of lamps
Switching on
Multiple of In
Switching off
cos Multiple of In
cos
Incandescent
15
Mixed light
1.3
Fluorescent
1.15 - 1.3
0.2
0.3 - 0.5 (not corrected)

1 (corrected)
High-pressure mercury vapour
1.5 - 1.75
0.2
High-pressure sodium vapour
1.3 - 1.5
0.2
Low-pressure sodium vapour
0.2 - 0.5
Metal halide
1.7 - 2.1
0.2
Lamp
features
Lamp
power
INCANDESCENT
220/240V 50/60Hz
MIXED LIGHT
220/240V 50/60Hz
ELECTRONIC BALLAST FLUORESCENT

220/240V 50/60Hz
Single mounting
Dual mounting
STANDARD FLUORESCENT
220/240V 50/60Hz
Not corrected
Single
mounting
Corrected
Single
mounting
DUO circuit
(lead-lag)
Rated
current
Capacitor
capacity
Maximum number [n] of lamps for each contactor pole
[W]
[A]
[F]
BG06 BF09
BF80
BG09 BF12
BF26
BF95
BG12 BF18 BF25 BF32 BF38 BF50 BF65 BF110 B115 B145 B180
60
0.27
30
48
92
118
129
203
240
296
370
425
462
100
0.45
18
28
55
71
77
122
144
177
222
255
277
200
0.91
14
27
35
38
60
71
87
109
126
137
300
1.4
17
22
25
39
46
57
71
82
89
500
2.3
10
13
15
23
28
34
43
50
54
1000
4.6
11
14
17
21
25
27
100
0.45
20
33
57
77
88
122
144
177
244
311
377
160
0.72
12
20
36
48
55
76
90
111
152
194
236
250
1.13
13
23
30
35
48
57
70
97
123
150
500
2.3
11
15
17
23
28
34
47
60
73
1000
4.6
11
14
17
23
30
36
16 / 18
0.1
(6.8)
48
80
160
220
220
400
450
500
750
1050 1200
32 / 36
0.18
(6.8)
27
44
88
122
122
222
250
277
416
583
666
50 / 58
0.27
(10)
17
29
59
82
82
148
166
185
277
388
444
2x16 / 18 0.18
(10)
26
44
88
122
122
222
250
277
416
583
666
2x32 / 36 0.35
(10)
13
22
45
62
62
114
128
142
214
300
342
2x50 / 58 0.52
(22)
15
30
42
42
76
86
96
144
201
230
15
0.35
25
42
74
100
114
157
185
228
314
400
485
20
0.37
24
40
70
94
108
148
175
216
297
378
459
40
0.44
20
34
59
79
90
125
147
181
250
318
386
65
0.7
12
21
37
50
57
78
92
114
157
200
242
115
1.5
10
17
23
26
36
43
53
73
93
113
140
1.5
10
17
23
26
36
43
53
73
93
113
15
0.11
4.5
24
40
62
94
94
200
200
200
533
533
533
20
0.16
4.5
24
40
62
94
94
200
200
200
533
533
533
40
0.24
4.5
24
40
62
94
94
200
200
200
458
500
520
65
0.4
15
25
40
50
57
125
128
128
275
300
312
115
0.7
18
10
15
23
23
50
50
50
133
133
133
140
0.7
18
10
15
23
23
50
50
50
133
133
133
2 x 20
0.26
54
57
100
153
153
211
250
307
423
538
653
2 x 40
0.46
19
32
56
86
86
119
141
173
239
304
369
2 x 65
0.7
12
21
37
57
57
78
92
114
157
200
242
2 x 115
1.3
11
20
30
30
42
50
61
84
107
130
2 x 140
1.5
10
17
26
26
36
43
53
73
93
113
In = Rated lamp current.

For 220/240V circuits, either single-phase (between phase and neutral) or 2-wire (between phase and phase), the maximum number of lamps is as per the table.
For three-phase circuits with neutral 380/415V or 220/240V, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor
is n 3.
For three-phase 380/415V circuits without neutral, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n 3.
Electrical life is 100,000 cycles up to 55C.
Incorporated capacitor.
Total.
3-54
Contactors
Lamp
features
HIGH-PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOUR

220/240V 50/60Hz
Lamp
power
Not corrected
Corrected
380/415V 50/60Hz
HIGH-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR
220/240V 50/60Hz
Not corrected
Corrected
Not corrected
Corrected
LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR

220/240V 50/60Hz
Not corrected
Corrected
METAL HALIDE
220/240V 50/60Hz
Not corrected
Corrected
380/415V 50/60Hz
Not corrected
Corrected
[W]
50
80
125
250
400
700
1000
50
80
125
250
400
700
1000
2000
2000
150
250
400
600
1000
150
250
400
600
1000
35
55
90
135
150
180
35
55
90
135
150
180
35
70
150
250
400
1000
2000
35
70
150
250
400
1000
2000
2000
3500
2000
3500
Rated
current
[A]
0.61
0.8
1.2
2.2
3.4
5.5
8
0.29
0.42
0.7
1.3
2.1
3.6
5.3
8
5.5
1.8
3
4.7
7.1
10.4
0.83
1.5
2.4
3.5
6.3
1.5
1.5
2.4
3.1
3.2
3.3
0.31
0.42
0.63
0.94
1
1.2
0.3
0.5
1
3
3.5
10
17
0.17
0.28
0.6
1.5
2
5.8
11.5
10.3
18
6.6
11.6
Capacitor
capacity
[F]
7
8
10
18
25
40
60
35
20
36
48
68
120
20
20
30
40
40
40
6
12
20
32
35
95
148
60
100
Maximum number [n] of lamps for each contactor pole

BG06
BG09
BG12
10
7
5
3
2
15
13
8
4
2
-
3
2
1
4
4
3
2
2
2
-
BF09
BF12
BF18
16
12
8
4
3
1
1
25
22
14
7
4
2
1
5
3
2
1
9
5
3
2
1
6
6
4
3
3
3
6
6
4
3
3
3
28
16
8
3
2
1
33
20
9
5
4
1
-
BF26
BF25 BF32
26
36
20
27
13
18
7
10
5
6
3
4
2
2
40
60
35
52
22
31
12
16
7
10
4
6
3
4
1
2
1
2
8
12
5
7
3
4
2
3
1
2
14
19
7
10
5
6
3
4
1
2
10
14
10
14
6
9
5
7
5
6
4
6
10
14
10
14
6
9
5
7
5
6
4
6
50
66
28
40
14
20
5
7
4
6
1
2
1
60
65
36
40
17
18
7
8
5
6
1
2
1
1
1
1
-
BF80
BF95
BF38 BF50 BF65 BF110
44
65
73
82
33
50
56
62
22
33
37
41
12
18
20
22
7
11
13
14
4
7
8
9
3
5
5
6
60
128 128 128
53
95
107 112
35
57
64
71
19
30
34
38
11
19
21
23
6
11
12
13
4
7
8
9
2
3
3
4
2
4
5
5
15
22
25
27
9
13
15
16
5
8
9
10
3
5
6
6
2
3
4
4
21
45
45
45
11
25
25
25
7
16
18
18
4
10
12
12
2
6
7
7
18
26
30
33
18
26
30
33
11
16
18
20
8
12
14
16
8
12
14
15
8
12
13
15
18
45
45
45
18
45
45
45
11
30
30
30
8
22
22
22
8
22
22
22
8
22
22
22
80
100 150 167
50
60
90
100
25
30
45
50
9
13
15
16
7
11
12
14
2
4
4
5
1
2
2
2
65
200 240 260
40
120 145 155
18
56
68
74
10
26
28
28
7
20
22
25
2
6
7
8
1
3
3
4
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
3
3
4
2
2
2
B115
122
93
62
34
22
13
9
258
178
107
57
35
20
14
5
8
41
25
15
10
7
90
50
31
20
11
50
50
31
24
23
22
120
120
80
60
60
60
250
150
75
25
21
7
4
400
240
112
46
35
12
6
4
2
6
3
B145
172
131
87
47
30
19
13
342
250
150
80
50
29
19
8
11
58
35
22
15
10
120
66
43
28
16
70
70
43
33
32
31
120
120
80
60
60
60
330
200
100
35
30
10
6
420
255
118
50
37
12
6
6
3
7
3
B180
196
150
100
54
35
21
15
342
285
171
92
57
33
22
9
13
66
40
25
16
11
120
66
50
34
19
80
80
50
38
37
36
120
120
80
60
60
60
400
240
120
40
34
12
7
440
265
120
53
40
13
6
7
4
7
4
For 220/240V circuits, either single-phase (between phase and neutral) or 2-wire (between phase and phase), the maximum number of lamps is as per the table.
For three-phase circuits with neutral 380/415V or 220/240V, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor
is n 3.
For three-phase 380/415V circuits without neutral, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n 3.
Electrical life is 100,000 cycles up to 55C.
3-55
Contactors
CONTACTORS FOR LIGHTING APPLICATIONS FOR NORTH AMERICA

In general, the North American market refers to lighting contactor ratings in
Amperes, without distinction between incandescent or ballast type of load.
Incandescent lamps with tungsten filament have very low Ohmic resistance when
cold. As a result, the closing current is very high but also very short. On the other
Lamp
features
hand, discharge lamps with ballast have highly inductive closing current and its
duration depends on the type of lamp. Thus, ratings are selected for mixed lamp
loads which consider the higher incandescent in-rush given below.
Maximum current [A] per contactor pole

BG09
BG12 BF09A BF12A BF18A BF25A BF26A BF32A BF38A BF50 BF65 BF80 BF95 BF110 B115 B145 B180
INCANDESCENT
120-240VAC 50/60Hz
8.1
15
17
20
27
35
36
42
60
80
90
105
120
130
145
180
9.2
15
17
20
26
30
35
40
55
65
80
85
90
110
140
170
MIXED LIGHT
120-240VAC 50/60Hz
ELECTRONIC BALLAST FLUORESCENT
120-240VAC 50/60Hz
Single mounting
10
12
16
18
22
25
40
45
50
60
70
75
105
120
Double mounting
10
12
16
18
22
25
40
45
50
60
70
75
105
120
Not corrected,
single mounting
15
17
20
26
30
35
40
55
65
80
85
90
110
140
170
Corrected,
single mounting
10
12
14
16
23
23
25
50
50
55
55
60
110
120
125
DUO circuit (lead-lag) 14
15
18
20
26
40
42
45
55
65
80
95
90
110
140
170
120
STANDARD FLUORESCENT
120-240VAC 50/60Hz

120-240VAC 50/60Hz
380-415VAC 50/60Hz
Not corrected
6.8
10
12
15
17
22
25
27
40
45
50
55
60
75
105
Corrected
5.6
10
12
14
16
22
24
25
40
45
50
55
60
75
105
120
Not corrected
12
16
16
24
24
32
32
35
40
65
75
Corrected
5.5
10
12
12
22
28
28
30
30
44
60
72

120-240VAC 50/60Hz
Not corrected
9.4
11
13
15
22
25
27
40
45
50
53
55
75
110
120
Corrected
7.5
10
12
15
16
17
38
44
44
46
48
72
103
120

120-240VAC 50/60Hz
Not corrected
7.2
10
13
15
20
22
27
40
45
50
53
55
75
105
120
Corrected
3.5
3.5
10
20
23
23
25
25
70
72
75
METAL HALIDE
120-240VAC 50/60Hz
380-415VAC 50/60Hz
Not corrected
10
10
15
17
21
27
40
45
50
53
55
75
105
120
Corrected
10
11
12
14
15
40
44
50
53
55
70
75
80
Not corrected
10
11
21
21
30
33
35
40
60
70
Corrected
23
25
25
25
25
40
43
45
Duo mounting or circuit, with power factor improvement, is obtained by matching an inductive circuit to a capacitive circuit.
2-56
Contactors
POSITIVE (FORCE) GUIDED CONTACTS

Positive (force) guided contacts are a requirement in safety circuits to correctly
monitor the status of normally open power contacts. Guided contacts imply that
Normally Open (NO) and Normally Closed (NC) operate together reciprocally but can
never be simultaneously closed, even in the case NO contacts weld. Due to evergrowing importance of safety in all aspects of electrotechnology, a few years ago,
IEC/EN authorities introduced in product standards, details to define the
terminology, requirements, tests, specifics and symbology of auxiliary contacts with
these characteristics as follows:
IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Annex F
Applied to contactors with built-in and add-on auxiliary contacts
This standard includes details about Requirements for auxiliary contact linked with
power contact and has designated them as "mirror contacts". It is applied to
auxiliary contacts mechanically linked with power contacts of a contactor.
A contactor can have more than one mirror contact.
A mirror contact is defined to be a normally-closed auxiliary contact which cannot
be in closed position simultaneously with a normally-open power contact. For this

purpose and to satisfy standard requirements, particular constructional details, such
as minimum gap tolerance through which the mobile contact travels are necessary
and the points of actuation are closer to the actual contact position. All this guarantees
an appropriate clearance between NO and NC contacts in case of failure or malfunction.
In the past, mirror contacts were called positively-guided contacts, forced contacts,
linked contacts or positively-driven contacts.
A typical application of this type of contact is in control circuits of equipment and
machinery where it is important to have a highly reliable monitoring of the contactor
status. Besides, it is recommended to include an automatic control of redundancy
(self-checking function) for the circuit of contacts to guarantee the utmost safety to
the installation.
The symbol of this type of contact is given after the table and identifies mirror
contacts, marked directly on the contactor itself or included in the relative
documentation for types with built-in auxiliary contact.
The following table given the types of contactors and relative connectable auxiliary
contacts that have been tested and certified as mirror contacts.
BFX1201 - BFX1211
BFX50 01
G350 - G354
Built-in
BGX10 02 - BGX1011
BGX1004
BFX1002 - BFX1011 BFX1004 - BFX1013 BFX10222 BFX1031
G484 03 - G48412 G48421
BF26T4 A/D/L

BF3200 A/D/L

BG0901 A/D/L
BF3800 A/D/L

BG0910 A/D/L
BF38T4 A/D/L

BG09 T4 A/D
BF5000 AC/DC
BG1201 A/D/L
BF5040 AC
BG1210 A/D/L
BF6500 AC/DC
BF0901 A/D/L

BF6540 AC/DC
BF0910 A/D/L

BF8000 AC/DC
BF09 T4 A/D/L

BF8040 AC/DC
BF1201 A/D/L

BF9500 AC/DC
BF1210 A/D/L

BF11000 AC/DC
BF12 T4 A

B11500 - B18000
BF1801 A/D/L

B115400 - B180400
BF1810 A/D/L

B25000 - B40000
BF18T4 A/D/L

B250400 - B400400
BF2501 A/D/L

B50000 - B630 1000
BF2510 A/D/L

B500400 - B6301000 4
BF2600 A/D/L

G350 - G354
G481(3 types)+G483
BFX50 01
G48102 - G48111 G481
BFX1201 - BFX1211
G218 + G280
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Annex L

Applied to auxiliary contact elements
These elements are designated to be mechanically linked and can be included in
devices for control circuits where the actuation force is provided internally, for
instance control relays (LOVATO Electric BG00 and BF00).
Though linkage between the auxiliary and main contacts is in no way considered by
this other standard, this does not prevent a given auxiliary contact to comply with
and satisfy both requirements for mirror contact described above and for
mechanically linked contact given below.
Moreover, it is also very important to be aware of the fact that control circuit devices
actuated externally (e.g. push buttons or limit switches) do not have mechanically
linked contact elements. Such devices, in safety applications, generally have
contacts with direct opening action.
In the past, mechanically linked contact elements have been referred to as forced
contacts, positively activated contacts or linked contacts.
Details about "Special requirements for mechanically linked contact elements" are
defined by the standard as:
G481(3 types)+G483
G218
BG0610 A/D/L
G48102 - G48111 G481
G484 03 - G48412 G48421
BG0601 A/D/F
G218 + G280
BFX1002 - BFX1011 BFX1004 - BFX1013 BFX10222 BFX1031
Type of contactor
Type of contactor
G218
BGX10 02 - BGX1011
BGX1004
Type of auxiliary contacts
Built-in
Type of auxiliary contacts
Mechanically linked contacts elements are combinations of n Make contact

element(s) and m Break contact element(s) designed in such a way that they cannot
be in closed position simultaneously. This signifies that:
While any of the n Make contact element(s) is closed, none of the m Break
contact element(s) shall be closed.
While any of the m Break contact element(s) is closed, none of the n Make
contact element(s) shall be closed.
A control circuit device can have more than one group of mechanically-linked
contact elements.
A typical application of mechanically linked contact elements is self-monitoring in
machine control circuits.
This type is characteristic and standard supplied in several types of LOVATO Electric
control relays and auxiliary contact blocks which have at least one NO and one NC
contacts.
The symbol for mechanical linkage is identified in the circuit diagrams by a double
parallel line connecting a filled circle on each of the mechanically linked contacts as
illustrated below:
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
2-57
Contactors
SELECTION GUIDE
Contactor
IEC
rated
current
Maximum
permissible
peak
current
AMBIENT OPERATING CONDITIONS

Ambient temperature: 50 C.
For temperatures higher than 50C up to 70 C, stated maximum operational power
ratings are to be reduced by a percentage equal to the difference between the
ambient temperature and 50C.
Operating cycle: 120 cy/h
IEC
maximum
operational
voltage
Fuse
gG
IEC maximum operational power

at voltages:
220V
230V
380V
415V
240V
400V
440V
500V
660/690V
Type
[A]
[A]
[V]
[A]
[kvar]
[kvar]
[kvar]
[kvar]
BF09 A
12
500
690
16
4.5
7.5
10
BF12 A
16
550
690
25
11
12
14
BF18 A
22
1000
690
32
15
16
18
BF25 A
22
1000
690
32
15
16
18
BF26 A
30
1400
690
40
11
20
22
22
BF32 A
38
1700
690
50
14
25
27
30
BF38 A
42
1900
690
63
16
28
30
34
BF50
60
2500
1000
80
23
40
44
50
BF65
70
2700
1000
100
26
45
50
56
BF80
90
3000
1000
125
34
60
65
70
BF95
90
3000
1000
125
34
60
65
70
BF110
90
3000
1000
125
34
60
65
70
B115
130
3200
1000
200
50
87
93
115
B145
150
3400
1000
200
57
100
108
130
B180
170
3600
1000
250
65
112
122
150
B250
240
5100
1000
315
91
158
172
210
B310
265
5900
1000
315
105
184
200
245
B400
320
7500
1000
400
122
211
230
280
B500
500
9000
1000
630
190
330
360
430
B630
610
11000
1000
800
230
400
432
520
The use of contactors with the above operational powers is allowable only when the
peak current, in the installation point of the power factor correction board, is lower
than the values stated in the table.
If this condition is not verified, it is necessary to use limiting inductances or specific
contactors stated on page 2-14. Consult Customer Service (see contact details on
inside front cover) to obtain detailed information on the correct use of contactors
without limiting inductances.
LIMITING INDUCTANCES
The use of limiting inductances is imperative when the system inductances (line
transformer and cables), upstream of the power factor correction panel, are not
able to maintain the maximum connecting current within the limit value of the
contactor used.
FAST DISCHARGE RESISTANCES OF CAPACITORS
The use of the contactor, according to the wiring diagram given, allows the fast
discharge of the capacitors as well as the instantaneous disconnection of the
capacitors from the mains when the coil is de-energised.
The resistances, indicated in the following table, guarantee the discharge within a
maximum time of 2 seconds.
L1 L2 L3
FU1
0
1
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

CHOICE CRITERIA
The contactor during the closing transition is influenced by electrical currents
having high frequencies and high amplitudes.
The frequencies of these currents range between 1 and 10kHz; the amplitudes must
have values lower than the maximum permissible current peak of the contactor to
be used.
1 3 5 .1 .1
KM1
2 4 6 .2 .2
U V W
Capacitor power
Voltage 220-230V
[kvar]
[]
[W]
[]
2.5-5
3900
12
8200
12
10-15
1800
25
4300
25
20-50
1000
50
2200
50
2-58
Voltage 380-500V
[W]
Contactors
SPECIAL CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
These contactors are equipped with early-make contacts. This special type of
contact has the purpose of connecting for a very brief interval, 2-3ms, during the
contactor closing, resistors which limit the connecting current of the capacitors.
These resistors are then excluded when the closing operation is complete and the
current capacity is conveyed to the main contacts. With this type of circuit, it is
possible to obtain minor wear of all the components of the system especially fuses
and capacitors ensuring a longer life and better reliability.
The contactors are particularly suitable for use in automatic power factor correction
panels since there is no need of limiting inductances and a source of heat has been
eliminated. In this way, these modular electric switchboards can be more compact.
L1
1
L2
3
The BFK version, figure 1, is designed for three-phase switching. The peculiarity of
this type is in the contacts, suitable to connect limiting resistors, which close only
for the time needed to limit any in-rush current peak and then reopen to avoid
eventual flow of residual currents through the resistors.
AMBIENT OPERATING CONDITIONS
Ambient temperature: 50 C
For ambient temperature higher than 50C up to 70C, maximum operational power
ratings, indicated in the table, are to be reduced by a percentage equal to the difference
between the ambient temperature and 50C.
Operating cycles: 120 cy/h.
L3
5
A1
13
14
A2
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
Auxiliary contact 13-14 is found on
BFK09 A - BFK12 A - BFK18 A types only.
CHOICE OF CONTACTORS TYPE BFK/BF...K ACCORDING TO IEC

Contactor
Built-in
IEC rated
IEC fuse
auxiliary
operational current gG
contacts
NO
440V
Maximum IEC power

at 50C (AC6b)
220V
230V
380V
240V
400V
415V
440V
500V
690V
Type
[A]
[A]
[kvar]
[kvar]
[kvar]
[kvar]
BFK09 A
12
16
4.5
7.5
10
BFK12 A
18
25
12.5
14
16
BFK18 A
23
40
15
17
20
BFK26 A
30
40
11
20
22
25
BFK32 A
36
63
14
25
27.5
30
BFK38 A
43
63
17
30
33
36
BF50 K
58
80
22
38
41
46
BF65 K
70
100
26
45
50
56
BF70 K
75
125
30
50
56
65
BF80 K
90
125
34
60
65
70
NOTE: See page 2-12 for order codes.

Consult Customer Service (see contact details on inside front cover) for the use of contactors to switch within delta connection.
CHOICE OF CONTACTORS TYPE BFK/BF..K ACCORDING TO cULus LISTING

Contactor
Built-in
UL/CSA
UL/CSA
auxiliary
rated current
protection fuse
contacts
SC/gG
NO (SPST)
440V
240V
480V
Type
[A]
[A]
[kvar]
[kvar]
[kvar]
BFK 09
12
16
4.5
10
BFK 12
18
25
14
16
BFK 18
23
40
17
20
BFK 26
30
40
11
22
27.5
BFK 32
36
63
14
27.5
32
BFK 38
43
63
17
33
36
BF50 K
58
80
22
41
46
BF65 K
68
100
26
50
56
BF70 K
72
125
30
60
65
BF80 K
78
125
34
65
70
Maximum UL/CSA operational

power at voltage:
600V
NOTE: See page 2-14 for order codes.

Consult Customer Service (see contact details on inside front cover) for information about the use of contactors to switch within delta/wye connection.
2-59
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACHERISTICS BG00 AND BF00

TYPE
BF00 A
BF00 D
Poles
Conventional free air

thermal current Ith (40C)
10
690
Frequency limit
Hz
25-400
UL/CSA and
DC
Q600
BF00 L
P600
7.5
8.3
3.5
Screw
M3
M3.5
A600
AC
Terminals
B
BG00
POLE CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
Quick-connect
Phillips
Faston
1x6.35mm - 2x2.8mm
Tightening torque
for contact terminals min-max
Nm
0.8...1
1.5...1.8
lbft
0.59-0...74
1.03...1.33
Tightening torque
for coil terminals min-max
Nm
0.8...1
lbft
0.59...0.74
Phillips
Conductor section connectable with 1 or 2

wires min...max
AWG stranded
18...12
16...10
Flexible w/o lug
mm2
0.75...2.5
1...6
Flexible c/w boot-lace

ferrule
mm2
2x1.5 or 1x2.5
1...4
Flexible c/w spade lug
mm2
2x1.5 or 1x2.5
1...4
IP20
Terminal protection according to IEC/EN 60529

AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature
-40...+60
-50...+70
Storage temperature
-55...+70
-60...+80
Maximum altitude
Operation position
3000
On vertical plane
Normal
30
Allowable
Screw or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
Fixing

Derating for use at 61-400 Hz. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 0.75mm2 conductor section for BG00 or 1mm2 for BF00.
NO and NC auxiliary contacts are highly conductive; all SPST.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS BASED ON IEC/EN 60947-5-1 UTILIZATION CATEGORIES AND UL508/CSA C22.2 n14
IEC/EN
designation
IEC/EN
utilization
category
Conventional
Rated operational current Ie [A]
enclosed thermal at rated operational voltage Ue
current Ithe
VA rating
UL designation
Thermal
continuous
test current
Maximum Amperes (AC) 60Hz
Maximum
VA
[A]
Make
Break
Make
Break
Make
Break
Make
Break
Make
Break
Make
Break
10
60
30
19
1.9
15
1.5
12
1.2
7200
720
Alternating current
A600
AC-15
Direct current
120VAC
240VAC
380VAC
480VAC
600VAC
Maximum Amperes (DC) Make or Break

250VDC
301VDC
400VDC
500VDC
600VDC
300V or less
P600
DC-13
1.1
0.55
0.2
0.31
0.27
0.2
138
138
Q600
DC-13
2.5
0.55
0.27
0.1
0.15
0.13
0.1
69
69

125VDC
Value at 301V is valid for UL/CSA up to 600VDC; the others are valid for IEC/EN.
Voltage valid for UL/CSA only.
2-60
Contactors
TYPE
BG00
BF00 A
BF00 D
BF00 L
12-575
12-600
% Us
75-115
80-110
AC CONTROL
Rated control voltage at 50/60Hz or 60Hz

50/60Hz coil
powered at
50Hz
60Hz
60Hz coil
powered at
60Hz
pick-up
drop-out
% Us
20-55
20-55
pick-up
% Us
75-115
80-110
drop-out
% Us
20-55
20-55
pick-up
% Us
75-115
80-110
drop-out
% Us
20-55
20-55
in-rush
VA
30
75
holding
VA

50/60Hz coil
powered at
50Hz
60Hz
60Hz coil
powered at
60Hz
in-rush
VA
25
70
holding
VA
6,5
in-rush
VA
30
75
holding
VA
0.95
2.5
Dissipation at holding 20C
50Hz
DC CONTROL
6-250
6-415
6-415
pick-up
% Us
75-115
70-125
80-110
drop-out
% Us
10-20
10-40
10-40
3.2
5.4
2.4
Average consumption at 20C (in-rush/holding)

OPERATING TIMES
Average time for Us
control in
AC
DC
closing NO
ms
12-21
8-24
opening NO
ms
9-18
10-20
closing NC
ms
17-26
17-30
opening NC
ms
7-17
7-18
closing NO
ms
18-25
54-66
75-91
opening NO
ms
2-3
14-17
15-19
closing NC
ms
3-5
24-30
24-30
opening NC
ms
11-17
47-57
67-81
AC control
cycles
20 million
DC control
cycles
20 million
cycles/h
3600
LIFE
Mechanical
MAXIMUM OPERATING RATE
Mechanical operations
2.3W for low-consumption BG00...L version.

NC closing time for BF00 04D is 23-29ms while NC opening time is 40-49 ms.
NC closing time for BF00 04L is 25-31ms while NC opening time is 56-68 ms.
2-61
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS BG06, BG09 AND BG12

TYPE
BG09
BG12
Power poles
3-4
690
690
690
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
kV
Operational frequency
Hz
25-400
25-400
25-400
Operational
current
16
20
20

thermal Ith (40C)
AC3 (440V 55C)
12
AC4 (400V)
3.3
4.0
4.8
96
96
96
gG
16
20
20
aM
10
16
92
92
120
440V
72
72
96
500V
72
72
72
690V
72
72
72
m
10
10
10
Ith
2.6
AC3
0.36
0.81
1.44
7.5
Short-time allowable current

for 10s (IEC/EN 60947-1)
Maximum fuse size
Type 1 or2
Making capacity (RMS value)
Breaking capacity
at voltage
Consumption per
pole and resistance
(average values)
Terminals
B
BG06
7.5
7.5
screw
M3
M3
M3
Phillips
Quick-connect Faston
1x6.35mm or 2x2.8mm
Solder
Tightening torque
for pole and coil terminals min-max
PCB solder pin
Nm
0.8...1
0.8...1
0.8...1
lbft
0.59...0.74
0.59...0.74
0.59...0.74
Phillips
Conductor section connectable

with 1 or 2 wires min...max
AWG stranded
18...12
Flexible w/o lug
mm2
0.75...2.5
Flexible c/w boot-lace

ferrule
mm2
2x1.5 or 1x2.5
Flexible c/w spade lug
mm2
2x1.5 or 1x2.5
Terminal protection to IEC/EN 60529
IP20
AUXILIARY CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS

Type of contact
Thermal current Ith
10
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation
AC
A600
DC
Q600
-40...+60
Storage temperature
-55...+70
Maximum altitude
1-NO or NC based on configuration (SPST)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating
position
Normal
Allowable
Fixing

Rated voltage Ui for BGP... types is 500V and 300V only for UL ratings.
Derating for use at 61-400Hz. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Current values guarantee an electrical life of about 50,000 cycles.
Dimensions and drilling distances are given on page 2-32.
IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 0.75mm2 conductor section.
NO or NC auxiliary is highly conductive.
Other characteristics are the same as the mechanical characteristics of the poles.
2-62
3000
On vertical plane
30
Contactors
TYPE
BG06
BG09
BG12
AC CONTROL
Rated voltage at 50/60Hz, 60Hz
12-575
% Us
75-115

50/60Hz coil
powered at
50Hz
60Hz
60Hz coil
powered at
60Hz
pick-up
drop-out
% Us
20-55
pick-up
% Us
75-115
drop-out
% Us
20-55
pick-up
% Us
75-115
drop-out
% Us
20-55
30

50/60Hz coil
powered at
50Hz
60Hz
60Hz coil
powered at
60Hz
Dissipation at 20C
in-rush
VA
holding
VA
in-rush
VA
25
holding
VA
in-rush
VA
30
holding
VA
0.95
at 50Hz
DC CONTROL
6-250
pick-up
% Us
75-115
drop-out
% Us
Average consumption at 20C (in rush-holding)
10-25
3.2
3.2
3.2
OPERATING TIMES
Average time for Us
control in
AC
closing NO
ms
opening NO
ms
9-18
closing NC
ms
17-26
opening NC
ms
7-17
closing NO
ms
18-25
2-3
12-21
opening NO
ms
closing NC
ms
3-5
opening NC
ms
11-17
AC control
cycles
20 million
DC control
cycles
20 million
cycles
500,000
cy/h
3600
DC
LIFE
Mechanical
Electrical (Ie at 400V AC3)
2.3W for low-consumption type BG09...L.
IEC/EN
designation
IEC/EN
utilization
category
Conventional
current Ithe
VA rating
UL designation
Thermal
continuous
test current
Maximum
VA
[A]
Make
Break
Make
Break
Make
Break
Make
Break
Make
Break
Make
Break
10
60
30
19
1.9
15
1.5
12
1.2
7200
720
Alternating current
A600
AC-15
Direct current
Q600

120VAC
240VAC
380VAC
480VAC
600VAC

DC-13
2.5
125VDC
250VDC
301VDC
400VDC
500VDC
600VDC
300V or less
0.55
0.27
0.1
0.15
0.13
0.1
69
69
2-63
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS BF09-BF38

TYPE
BF12
BF18
3-4
3-4
3-4
BF25
BF26
BF32
BF38
3-4
3-4
45
56
56(60)
Power poles
690
Rated impulse withstand

votage Uimp
kV
Hz
Operational
current

thermal Ith (40C)
25-400
25
28
32
32
AC3 (440V 55C)
12
18
25
26
32
38
AC4 (400V)
4.9
7.9
8.5
10
11.5
13.5
15.5
Short-time allowable current for 10s

(IEC/EN 60947-1)
110
110
130
160
200
320
320
Max fuse size
gG
25
32
32
50
50
63
63
aM
10
12
20
25
32
32
40
90
120
180
250
260
320
380
304

Breaking capacity
440V
72
96
144
200
208
256
at voltage
500V
72
96
120
184
184
240
240
690V
71
94
94
102
168
192
192
Consumption and
resistance per pole
(average values)
m
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
Ith
1.6
2.0
2.6
2.6
4.0
6.0
6.0
AC3
0.2
0.4
0.8
1.6
1.4
2.0
2.9
Terminals
Type
BF09
Clamp-screw
9.5
9.5
9.5
9.5
13
13
13
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
M4
Screw
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M3.5
M4
M4
Phillips
Tightening torque
for pole terminal min-max
Nm
1.5...1.8
1.5...1.8
1.5...1.8
1.5...1.8
2.5...3
2.5...3
2.5...3
Ibft
1.1...1.5
1.1...1.5
1.1...1.5
1.1...1.5
1.8...2.2
1.8...2.2
1.8...2.2
Tightening torque
Nm
0.8-1
0.8-1
0.8-1
0.8-1
0.8-1
0.8-1
0.8-1
lbft
0.59-0.74
0.59-0.74
0.59-0.74
0.59-0.74
0.59-0.74
0.59-0.74
0.59-0.74
Phillips

AWG stranded
16...10
16...10
16...10
16...10
14...6
14...6
14...6
Flexible w/o lug
mm2
1...6
1...6
1...6
1...6
2.5...16
2.5...16
2.5...16
Flexible c/w insulated

boot-lace ferrule
mm2
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-10
1-10
1-10
Flexible c/w insulated

spade lug
mm2
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-10
1-10
1-10
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
Power terminal protection

according to IEC/EN 60529
AUXILIARY CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
Type of contact
1-NO or NC based on configuration (SPST)
Thermal current Ith
10
UL/CSA and
AC
A600
DC
Q600
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-50...+70
Storage temperature
-60...+80
Maximum altitude
Operating
position
3000
Normal
On vertical plane
Allowable
30
Fixing
Derating for use at 61-400Hz. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside

front cover.
IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 1mm2 conductor section.

IP20 protection on front.

For this other current value, use 16mm2 wire with spade cable terminal.
NO or NC auxiliary is highly conductive. Other characteristics are the same as the mechanical
characteristics of the poles.
ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT - Magnetic Motor Controllers per CSA certification File 54332 - Class 2411-03, to requirements of B44.1-04/SME A17.5-2004.
Contactors, three or four poles, open type, operating coil 600VAC or less, 380VDC or less.
Maximum horsepower ratings
Single phase
Three phase
120V
240V
200-208V 240V
480V
600V
CSA
General
use
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[A]
BF12
/2
11/2
71/2
71/2
28
BF25
11/2
71/2
15
15
32
BF38
10
10
20
20
55
Type
2-64
Contactors
TYPE
BF09
BF12
BF18
BF25
BF26
BF32
BF38
AC CONTROL
12-600
% Us
80-110

50/60Hz coil
powered at
50Hz
60Hz
60Hz coil
powered at
60Hz
pick-up
drop-out
% Us
20-55
pick-up
% Us
85-110
drop-out
% Us
20-55
pick-up
% Us
80-110
drop-out
% Us
20-55
75

50/60Hz coil
powered at
50Hz
60Hz
60Hz coil
powered at 60Hz
60Hz
in-rush
VA
holding
VA
in-rush
VA
70
holding
VA
6.5
in-rush
VA
75
holding
VA
2.5
6-415
Dissipation at holding 20C
50Hz
DC CONTROL - normal and low consumption

Operating limits
pick-up
drop-out
three-pole
BF...D
from
% Us
70
to
% Us
125
four-pole
BF...D
from
%Us
70
80
to
%Us
125
125
three and four

pole BF...L
from
% Us
80
to
% Us
110
for all
versions
from
%Us
10
to
%Us
40
BF...D
5.4
BF...L
2.4
Average coil consumption

20C (in rush-holding)
OPERATING TIMES
Average time for
Us control in
AC
closing NO
ms
8-24
8-24
opening NO
ms
10-20
10-20
closing NC
ms
14-28
9-20
opening NC
ms
7-18
9-17
53-65
DC
BF...D
types
closing NO
ms
54-66
opening NO
ms
14-17
14-18
closing NC
ms
24-30
23-28
opening NC
ms
47-57
46-56
DC
BF...L
types
closing NO
ms
75-91
76-92
opening NO
ms
15-19
16-20
closing NC
ms
24-30
25-31
opening NC
ms
67-81
63-77
LIFE
Mechanical
(million)
AC control
cycles
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
DC control
cycles
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
cycles
2.0
2.0
1.6
1.2
1.6
1.6
1.4
Electrical (Ie at 400VAC3) (million)

cy/h
3600
NC closing time for BF...T0A types is 9-25ms while NC opening time is 9-15ms.
NC closing time for BF...T0A types is 11-29ms while NC opening time is 6-14ms.
NC closing time for BF...T0D types is 23-29ms while NC opening time is 40-49ms.
NC closing time for BF...T0L types is 25-31ms while NC opening time is 56-68ms.
IEC/EN
designation
IEC/EN
utilization
category
Conventional
current Ithe
VA rating
UL designation
Thermal
continuous
test current
Maximum
VA
[A]
Make
Break
Make
Break
Make
Break
Make
Break
Make
Break
Make
Break
10
60
30
19
1.9
15
1.5
12
1.2
7200
720
Alternating current
A600
AC-15
Direct current
Q600

120VAC
240VAC
380VAC
480VAC
600VAC

DC-13
2.5
125VDC
250VDC
301VDC
400VDC
500VDC
600VDC
300V or less
0.55
0.27
0.1
0.15
0.13
0.1
69
69
2-65
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS BF50-BF110

TYPE
BF65
3-4
3-4
BF80
BF95
BF110
3-4
Power poles
kV
Hz
25-400
Operational
current
90
110
125
125
125
AC3 (440V 55C)
50
65
80
95
110
AC4 (400V)
28
31
38
43
43

(IEC/EN 60947-1)
390
390
480
760
880
Maximum fuse size
gG
100
125
160
160
160
aM
50
80
80
100
125

thermal Ith (40C)
Breaking capacity
at voltage
Consumption and
resistance per pole
(average values)
1000
800
1090
1200
1200
1200
440V
800
1090
1200
1200
1200
500V
660
830
1050
1050
1050
690V
500
630
800
800
800
m
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.6
Ith
6.5
9.7
9.4
9.4
9.4
AC3
2.0
3.4
3.8
5.4
7.3
12.3
Terminals
Lug clamp
Type
BF50
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
12
12
12
12
12
Screw
Metric
Allen
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
Tightening torque
for pole terminal min-max
Nm
4...5
Ibft
2.95...3.69
Tightening torque
Nm
0.8...1
lbft
0.59...0.74
Phillips

AWG
14...2/0
Flexible w/o lug
mm2
4...50
4...50
6...50
6...50
6...50
Flexible c/w lug
mm2
4...50
4...50
6...50
6...50
6...50
Power terminal protection

IP20
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-50...+70
Storage temperature
-60...+80
Maximum altitude
Operating
position
3000
Normal
On vertical plane
Allowable
30
Screw or DIN rail 35mm and 75mm (IEC/EN 60715)
Fixing

In addition to the main terminal which has dimensions as mentioned above, there is a second terminal entry 12.3x3.8mm (0.5x0.15in) for flexible busbars.
IP20 protection warranted to three-pole contactors only by mounting the G265 protection.
Only three-pole versions can be mounted on 35mm DIN rail.
ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT - Magnetic Motor Controllers per CSA certification File 54332 - Class 2411-03, to requirements of B44.1-04/SME A17.5-2004.
Contactors, three or four poles, open type, operating coil 600VAC or less, 380VDC or less.
Type
BF65
2-66
Maximum horsepower ratings

Single phase
Three phase
120V
240V
200-208V 240V
CSA
General
use
480V
600V
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[HP]
[A]
10
15
15
40
50
110
Contactors
TYPE
BF50
BF65
BF80
BF95
BF110
AC CONTROL
12-600
% Us
80-110

50/60Hz coil
powered at
50Hz
60Hz
60Hz coil
powered at
60Hz
pick-up
drop-out % Us
20-55
pick-up
85-110
% Us
drop-out % Us
40-55
pick-up
% Us
80-110
drop-out % Us
20-55

50/60Hz coil
powered at
50Hz
60Hz
60Hz coil
powered at
60Hz
Dissipation at 20C
50Hz
in-rush
VA
holding
VA
18
in-rush
VA
200
holding
VA
15
in-rush
VA
220
holding
VA
18
220
DC CONTROL
Rated voltage
Operating voltage
limits
12-600
pick-up
% Us
80-110
drop-up
% Us
10-25
15
closing NO
ms
13-28
opening NO
ms
6-19
closing NO
ms
60-90
opening NO
ms
7-12
Average consumption 20C

(in rush-holding)
OPERATING TIMES
Average time
for Us
control in
AC
DC
LIFE
Mechanical
(million)
AC control
cycles
15
15
15
15
DC control
cycles
15
15
15
15
15
Electrical (Ie at 400V in AC3) (million)
cycles
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.2
0.8
15

cy/h
3600
2-67
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS B115-B1600

TYPE
B145
B180
B250
B310
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
B400
B500
B630
B630
1000
B1250
B1600
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
Power poles
Rated impulse withstand votage Uimp
kV
Hz
25-400
Operational
current
160
250
275
350
450
550
700
800
1000
1250
1600
AC3 (440V 55C)
110
150
185
265
320
420
520
630
AC4 (400V)
47
57
65
92
110
133
175
210

(IEC/EN 60947-1)
Maximum fuse size
1100
1300
1500
2200
2900
3600
4050
5040
5600
6500
8300
gG
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1000
1250
1600
aM
125
160
200
250
400
400
500
630
1100
1500
1850
2750
3150
4200
5000
6300
6300
6300
6300
440V
1300
1500
1850
2500
3000
4000
5000
6300
6300
6300
6300
500V
1100
1400
1600
2250
2700
3400
4500
5600
5600
5600
5600
690V
880
1200
1480
2200
2520
3360
4000
5000
5000
5000
5000
1000V
600
800
1000
1500
1700
2300
2700
3400
3400
3400
3400
m
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.07
0.07
Ith
7.7
14.5
20.3
24.5
40.5
52.0
68.6
90
140
110
180
AC3
4.0
6.8
9.7
12.5
20
32
35.0
56
A mm
15
(0.6)
20
(0.8)
20
(0.8)
25
(1)
25
(1)
25
(1)
35
(1.4)
40
(1.6)
60
(2.4)
80
(3.1)
80
(3.1)
B mm
4
(0.16)
4
(0.16)
4
(0.16)
5
(0.2)
5
(0.2)
5
(0.2)
6
(0.23)
6
(0.23)
6
(0.23)
10
(0.39)
10
(0.39)
Screw
+ hex
nut
M6
M8
M8
M10
M10
M10
M10
M12
2-M12
2-M12
2-M12

mm
10
(0.39)
13
(0.51)
13
(0.51)
17
(0.67)
17
(0.67)
17
(0.67)
17
(0.67)
19
(0.75)
19
(0.75)
19
(0.75)
19
(0.75)

Breaking capacity
at voltage
Consumption and
resistance per pole
(average values)
Terminals
1000

thermal Ith (40C)
B115
Quick-connect (coil)
Faston
Coil with G371
Phillips
Pole tightening torque

Coil tightening torque with G371 fitted
Maximum conductor section
1x6.35mm (0.25) or 2x2.8mm (0.11)

2 (7mm/0.3in)
Nm
10
18
18
35
35
35
35
55
55
55
55
lbft
7.4
13.3
13.3
25.8
25.8
25.8
25.8
40.6
40.6
40.6
40.6
Nm
lbft
0.74
mm
1 or 2 bars
20x3
25x3
25x3
30x4
30x5
30x5
50x5
60x5
60x5
100x5
(0.2x0.12) (1x0.12) (1x0.12) (1.2x0.16) (1.2x0.2) (1.2x0.2) (2x0.2) (2.4x0.2) (2.4x0.2) (4x0.2)
N 1 wire
with lug
mm2
70
120
150
240
--
--
--
--
N 2 wire
with lug
mm2
--
--
--
--
150
150
240
240
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-50...+70
Storage temperature
-60...+80
Maximum altitude
Operating
position
Normal
Allowable
Fixing

Spanner/wrench size.
G371: Adapter to transform coil faston terminals into screw type.
2-68
100x5
(4x0.2)
3000
On vertical plane
30
Screw
Contactors
TYPE
B115
B145
B180
B250
B310
B400
B500
B630
B630
1000
B1250
B1600
AC CONTROL
Supply voltage
The electromagnet can operate either in AC or DC
AC only
24-480
24-480
24-480
24-480
24-480
24-480
48-480
48--480
48-480
110-240
110-240
pick-up
% Us
80-110
80-110
80-110
80-110
80-110
80-110
80-110
80-110
80-110
80-110
80-110
drop-out
% Us
20-60
20-60
20-60
20-60
20-60
20-60
20-60
20-60
20-60
20-60
20-60
in-rush
VA/W
300
300
300
300
300
300
400
400
400
800
800
holding
VA/W
10
10
10
10
10
10
18
18
18
45
45
10
10
10
10
10
10
18
18
18
40
40
Making
ms
60-100
60-100
60-100
80-120
80-120
80-120
110-180
110-180
110-180
120-210
300-450
Breaking
ms
25-60
25-60
25-60
30-75
30-75
30-75
60-100
60-100
60-110
70-130
70-130

Operating
voltage limits
Consumption
at 20C
Dissipation at 20C
OPERATING TIMES
Life
Mechanical (million)
Electrical (million) (Ie at 400V in AC3)
AC/DC
cycles
10
10
10
10
10
10
cycles
1.1
1.1
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
cy/h
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200

PARTICULAR CHARACTERISTICS
Indicator
Safety feature
CONTROL CIRCUIT UTILISATION
The input electronic circuit of the contactor coil B115-B1600 is designed and tested
according to IEEEC 62.41 and can withstand a 10 kV impulse voltage (1.2/50s)
with 50 Joule energy.
For higher values, the use of an auxiliary step-down voltage transformer is
recommended.
For contactor open or closed status

Closing operations are prevented without arc chutes
CONTACTORS WITH MECHANICAL LATCH

Technical data of mechanical latch G495 type is stated on page 2-26.
Contactors B115-B630 type, can have mechanical latch included or can be
predisposed, to be completed with mechanical latch.
See pages 2-4 and 2-6 (3-pole version) or 2-8 and 2-10 (4-pole version).
2-69
Contactors
MECHANICAL INTERLOCK BETWEEN CONTACTORS SIDE BY SIDE B115-B630

The G355 type in Fig. 1, can interlock contactors of the same size or of a different
one (e.g.: B115 interlocked to B630).
MECHANICAL INTERLOCK BETWEEN CONTACTORS ONE ON TOP OF THE OTHER B115-B630

It is G356... type, in Fig. 2 to 4, which is provided in six types to allow different
The tables below indicate the interaxis which can be obtained with the various
fixing interaxis of contactors.
interlock types; with terminal protections (INTERAXIS A) and without terminal
Contactors of the same size can be interlocked as well as different sizes.
protection (INTERAXIS B).
INTERAXIS A [mm] - For contactors with terminal protection
KM1
B115-B145-B180
KM2
B115
B145
B180
B250-B310-B400
B250
B310
B400
B500
B630
B500-B630
B115
B145
B180
B250
B310
B400
B500
B630
B115
B145
B180
B250
B310
B400
B500
B630
G356 1
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
G356 2
286-305
(11.26-12)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
G356 3
305-345
(12-13.6)
330-345
(13-13.6)
---
330-345
(13-13.6)
---
---
---
---
---
G356 4
345-385
(13.6-15.15)
345-385
(13.6-15.15)
375-385
(14.8-15.15)
345-385
(13.6-15.15)
372-385
(14.8-15.15)
---
375-385
(14.8-15.15)
---
---
G356 5
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
420-425
(16.5-16.75)
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
420-425
(15.35-16.75)
---
G356 6
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
INTERAXIS B [mm] - For contactors without terminal protection

KM1
B115-B145-B180
KM2
B115
B145
B180
B250
B310
B400
B500
B630
B115
B145
B180
B250-B310-B400
B250
B310
B400
B500
B630
B115
B145
B180
B250
B310
B400
B500
B630
G356 1
225-265
(8.85-10.4)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
G356 2
265-305
(10.4-12)
265-305
(10.4-12)
---
265-305
(10.4-12)
265-305
(10.4-12)
---
---
---
---
G356 3
305-345
(12-13.6)
305-345
(12-13.6)
305-345
(12-13.6)
305-345
(12-13.6)
305-345
(12-13.6)
305-345
(12-13.6)
305-345
(12-13.6)
305-345
(12-13.6)
---
G356 4
345-385
(13.6-15.15)
345-385
(13.6-15.15)
345-385
(13.6-15.15)
345-385
(13.6-15.15)
345-385
(13.6-15.15)
345-385
(13.6-15.15)
345-385
(13.6-15.15)
345-385
(13.6-15.15)
345-385
(13.6-15.15)
G356 5
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
390-425
(15.35-16.75)
G356 6
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
470-500
(18.5-19.7)
To interlock two contactors B630 1000, use type G356 6 only.

To interlock two contactors B1250 or B1600, it is imperative to use two pieces of
type G356 6, one fixed on the left side and the other on the right; refer to Fig. 4.
B500-B630
Interaxis B is 470-500mm (18.5-19.7) for B630 1000, B1250 or B1600.

The B1250 or B1600 cannot be interlocked with the other types of the B series.
KM1
B
B
KM1
G356...
G356 6
G356 6
G356...
This interlock cannot be used with B1250 or B1600 contactor.

Consult Customer Service (see contact details on inside front cover) to interlock
B630 1000 three-pole contactors.
KM2
KM2
Fig.1
2-70
Fig.2
Fig.3
Fig.4
Contactors
CONTACT BLOCKS APPLIABLE TO CONTACTORS WITH MECHANICAL INTERLOCK

Auxiliary contact blocks G350 or G354 can be mounted according to the
combinations below when the mechanical interlock is used (see parts in blue in
Figure 1) or the G358 adapter with the auxiliary blocks as per the combinations
given in Figure 2.
Technical characteristics are given on page 2-26.
Fig. 1
B115-B630
B115-B180
B250-B400
B500-B630 1000
Fig. 2
B115-B630
B115-B180
B250-B400
B500-B630 1000
2-71
Page 3-2
Page 3-4
Page 3-6
FOR BG SERIES MINI-CONTACTORS
FOR BF SERIES CONTACTORS
FOR B SERIES CONTACTORS
Type RF9, phase failure sensitive,

manual resetting
Type RFA9, phase failure sensitive,
automatic resetting
Type RFN9, non-phase failure sensitive,
manual resetting
Type RFNA9, non-phase failure sensitive,
automatic resetting.

manual or automatic resetting
Type RFN38, non phase failure sensitive,
manual or automatic resetting
manual resetting
Type RFA95, phase failure sensitive,
automatic resetting
Type RFN95, non phase failure sensitive,
manual resetting
Type RFNA95, non phase failure sensitive,
automatic resetting.
Type RF200 and RF420, phase failure

sensitive, manual or automatic resetting
Type RFN200 and RFN420, non phase
failure sensitive, manual or automatic
resetting.
TYPE OF THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY

Type of contactor
BG06...BG12
Phase failure/single phase sensitive

Manual/hand
reset
Automatic
reset
Manual/hand
reset
Automatic
reset
RF9
RFA9
RFN9
RFNA9
BF09...BF38
BF50...BF110
Non phase failure /

non single phase sensitive
RF38
RF95
RFN38
RFA95
RFN95
RFNA95
B115...B180
RF200
RFN200
B250...B400
RF400
RFN400
Page
3-2 and 3
3-4 and 5
3-6 and 7
Page 3-9
THERMISTOR PROTECTION RELAY
24VDC and 24 to 240VAC supply types.
RF38 features
FRONT PROTECTION COVER OF

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
A sealable protection cover is
available. When fitted on to the
relay front, it precludes all possible
adjuster tampering and involuntary
activation of the Reset and
Stop buttons of the thermal
overload relay.
CLEAR IDENTIFICATION OF THERMAL OVERLOAD

RELAY MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING
The RF38 thermal
overload relay is supplied
configured for manual
resetting. Breaking the
plate below the Reset
button allows for the automatic
resetting configuration.
FIXING EASE OF THE THERMAL

OVERLOAD RELAY
While the thermal overload relay
is being linked to the contactor,
its auxiliary contact fits on and
connects to the coil terminal by
rigid terminal.
Complete relay fixing is done in
a single operation, with no need
of other connections.
SEALABLE RELAY COVER

A handy closing flap
feature excludes any
tampering of the thermal
overload relay adjuster.
MOTOR PROTECTION RELAYS
Thermal overload relays for currents

between 0.09 and 420A
Phase failure sensitive and non
phase failure sensitive versions
Automatic and/or manual resetting
Independent or direct mounting on
contactor
Thermistor protection relay.
Thermal overload relays

For BG series mini-contactors ............................................................................................................................................
For BF series contactors ....................................................................................................................................................
For B series contactors ......................................................................................................................................................
Accessories ......................................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
3
3
3
3
2
4
6
8
Dimensions .................................................................................................................
Wiring diagrams ...........................................................................................................
3 - 10
3 - 11
3 - 12
AND
3 - 9
M OTOR C ONTROL
Thermistor protection relay ...............................................................................................................................................
P ROTECTION
Electronic relay

for BG series mini-contactors
Phase failure /
single phase sensitive
Three poles (three phase)
Order code
Adjustment Protection fuses Qty Wt

range
IEC
UL per
aM gG K5 pkg
Three-phase IEC motor powers

230V
400V
415V
440V
500V
690V
[A]
[kg]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[A]
[A]
[A]
MANUAL RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BG06, BG09, BG12 mini-contactors.
11 RF9...
11 RF9 015
0.09 - 0.15 0.25
0.116
11 RF9 023
0.14 - 0.23 0.5
0.116
11 RF9 033
0.2 - 0.33
0.5
0.116
11 RF9 05
0.3 - 0.5
0.116
11 RF9 075
0.45 - 0.75 1
0.116
0.37
11 RF9 1
0.6 - 1
0.116
0.37
0.37
0.55
11 RF9 1V5
0.9 - 1.5
0.116
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.75
11 RF9 2V3
1.4 - 2.3
10
0.116
0.37
0.55-0.75 0.75
0.75
1.1
1.1-1.5
11 RF9 33
2 - 3.3
10
10
0.116
0.55
1.1
1.1-1.5
1.5
2.2
11 RF9 5
3-5
16
15
0.116
0.75-1.1 1.5
1.5-2.2
2.2
2.2
3-3.7
11 RF9 75
4.5 - 7.5
20
25
0.116
1.5
2.2-3
3-3.7
3-3.7
3-3.7
11 RF9 10
6 - 10
10
32
30
0.116
2.2
3.7-4
3.7-4
4-5.5
11 RF9 15
9 - 15
16
40
45
0.116
3.2
5.5
5.5-7.5
5.5
1.1
AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
11 RFA9...
11 RFA9 015
0.09 - 0.15 0.25
0.116
11 RFA9 023
0.14 - 0.23 0.5
0.116
11 RFA9 033
0.2 - 0.33
0.5
0.116
11 RFA9 05
0.3 - 0.5
0.116
11 RFA9 075
0.45 - 0.75 1
0.116
0.37
11 RFA9 1
0.6 - 1
0.116
0.37
0.37
0.55
11 RFA9 1V5
0.9 - 1.5
0.116
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.75
11 RFA9 2V3
1.4 - 2.3
10
0.116
0.37
0.55-0.75 0.75
0.75
1.1
1.1-1.5
11 RFA9 33
2 - 3.3
10
10
0.116
0.55
1.1
1.1-1.5
1.5
2.2
11 RFA9 5
3-5
16
15
0.116
0.75-1.1 1.5
1.5-2.2
2.2
2.2
3-3.7
11 RFA9 75
4.5 - 7.5
20
25
0.116
1.5
2.2-3
3-3.7
3-3.7
3-3.7
11 RFA9 10
6 - 10
10
32
30
0.116
2.2
3.7-4
3.7-4
4-5.5
11 RFA9 15
9 - 15
16
40
45
0.116
3.2
5.5
5.5-7.5
5.5
NOTE: Two-pole (single phase) versions are available on request.

Add the letter S in the order code e.g. 11RF9015 is three pole;
11RFS9015 two pole.
The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be selected on
the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, across the line
starting is considered.

1.1
The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always

check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
range.
No standard power ratings exist; select relay according to current
consumption.
NOTE: To facilitate connection between the auxiliary NC

contact of the RF...9 thermal relay and terminal A2 of the
contactor, insert the conductor into the appropriate conduit
as shown.
RF9...
RFA9...

Type
c
U
L
u
s
C
S
A
E
A
C
C
C
C
RF9... - RFA9...
Certified products.
cULus UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601)
as Auxiliary Devices Thermal Overload Relays, 600VAC, open
type, ambient compensated, 5000 Amps RMS symmetrical
short circuit rating; the trip current is 120% FLA.
CSA CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary
Devices for use with magnetic contactors.
UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
3-2
Accessories
page 3-8
Dimensions
page 2-32
Wiring diagrams
page 3-11
pages 3-12 and 13

for BG series mini-contactors
Non phase failure /
Order code

range
IEC
UL per
aM gG K5 pkg

230V
400V
415V
440V
500V
690V
[A]
[kg]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[A]
[A]
[A]
MANUAL RESETTING.
11 RFN9...
11 RFN9 015
0.09 - 0.15 0.25
0.123
11 RFN9 023
0.14 - 0.23 0.5
0.123
11 RFN9 033
0.2 - 0.33
0.5
0.123
11 RFN9 05
0.3 - 0.5
0.123
11 RFN9 075
0.45 - 0.75 1
0.123
0.37
11 RFN9 1
0.6 - 1
0.123
0.37
0.37
0.55
11 RFN9 1V5
0.9 - 1.5
0.123
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.75
11 RFN9 2V3
1.4 - 2.3
10
0.123
0.37
0.55-0.75 0.75
0.75
1.1
1.1-1.5
11 RFN9 33
2 - 3.3
10
10
0.123
0.55
1.1
1.1
1.1-1.5
1.5
2.2
11 RFN9 5
3-5
16
15
0.123
0.75-1.1 1.5
1.5-2.2
2.2
2.2
3-3.7
11 RFN9 75
4.5 - 7.5
20
25
0.123
1.5
2.2-3
3-3.7
3-3.7
3-3.7
11 RFN9 10
6 - 10
10
32
30
0.123
2.2
3.7-4
3.7-4
4-5.5
11 RFN9 15
9 - 15
16
40
45
0.123
3.2
5.5
5.5-7.5
5.5
11 RFNA9...
11 RFNA9 015
0.09 - 0.15 0.25
0.123
11 RFNA9 023
0.14 - 0.23 0.5
0.123
11 RFNA9 033
0.2 - 0.33
0.5
0.123
11 RFNA9 05
0.3 - 0.5
0.123
11 RFNA9 075
0.45 - 0.75 1
0.123
0.37
11 RFNA9 1
0.6 - 1
0.123
0.37
0.37
0.55
11 RFNA9 1V5
0.9 - 1.5
0.123
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.75
11 RFNA9 2V3
1.4 - 2.3
10
0.123
0.37
0.55-0.75 0.75
0.75
1.1
1.1-1.5
11 RFNA9 33
2 - 3.3
10
10
0.123
0.55
1.1
1.1
1.1-1.5
1.5
2.2
11 RFNA9 5
3-5
16
15
0.123
0.75-1.1 1.5
1.5-2.2
2.2
2.2
3-3.7
11 RFNA9 75
4.5 - 7.5
20
25
0.123
1.5
2.2-3
3-3.7
3-3.7
3-3.7
11 RFNA9 10
6 - 10
10
32
30
0.123
2.2
3.7-4
3.7-4
4-5.5
11 RFNA9 15
9 - 15
16
40
45
0.123
3.2
5.5
5.5-7.5
5.5
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be

selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct,
across the line starting is considered.


range.
consumption.
NOTE: To facilitate connection between the auxiliary NC

contact of the RFN...9 thermal relay and terminal A2 of the
contactor, insert the conductor into the appropriate conduit
as shown.
RFN9...
RFNA9...

Type
c
U
L
u
s
C
S
A
E
A
C
C
C
C
RFN9... - RFNA9...
Certified products.
short circuit rating; the trip current is 120% FLA.
UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Accessories
page 3-8
Dimensions
page 2-32
Wiring diagrams
page 3-11
page 3-12 and 13
3-3

for BF series contactors
Phase failure /
Order code

range
IEC
UL per
aM gG
pkg
[A]
[A]
[A]
230V
400V
415V
440V
500V
690V
[A]
[kg]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
0.06
MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING.

Direct mounting on BF09 - BF38 contactors.
Independent mounting with RFX38 04 base.
RF38...
RF38 0016
0.1-0.16
0.25
0.160
RF38 0025
0.16-0.25
0.5
0.160
0.06
0.06
0.06-0.09 0.06-0.09 0.09-0.12
RF38 0040
0.25-0.4
0.5
0.160
0.06
0.09
0.09
0.12
0.12
0.18
RF38 0063
0.4-0.63
0.160
0.09
0.12-0.18 0.12-0.18 0.18
0.18
0.25
RF38 0100
0.63-1
0.160
0.12
0.25
0.25-0.37 0.37-0.55
RF38 0160
1-1.6
0.160
0.18-0.25 0.37-0.55 0.37-0.55 0.55
RF38 0250
1.6-2.5
10
0.160
0.37
RF38 0400
2.5-4
15
0.160
RF38 0650
4-6.5
16
25
RF38 1000
6.3-10
10
20
40
RF38 1400
9-14
16
32
50
RF38 1800
13-18
25
40
RF38 2300
17-23
25
50
RF38 2500
20-25
32
RF38 3200
24-32
RF38 3800
32-38
0.25
0.37
0.55-0.75 0.75
0.75
0.75-1.1
1.1
1.1-1.5
0.55-0.75 1.1-1.5
1.1-1.5
1.1
1.5-2.2
2.2-3
0.160
1.1-1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2-3
0.160
1.5-2.2
3-4
4-5.5
5.5-7.5
0.160
5.5
5.5
5.5-7.5
5.5-7.5
11
70
0.160
7.5
7.5-9
11
15
90
0.160
5.5
11
9-11
11
11
18.5
50
100 5
0.160
5.5
11
11
11
15
22
40
63
120 1
0.160
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
30
40
63
150 1
0.160
11
18.5
18.5
18.5
22
30
22-25
0.75
MANUAL RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BF50-BF110 contactors.
Complete with G261 links.
Independent mounting with G270 base.
11 RF95 3...
11 RF95 3 33
20 - 33
40
63
110 1
0.365
7.5
11-15
11-15
15-18.5
15-18.5
11 RF95 3 42
28 - 42
50
80
150 1
0.365
9-10
15-18.5
18.5-22
18.5-22
22-25
30-33
11 RF95 3 50
35 - 50
50
100 175 1
0.365
10-11
22
25
25
30
37-40
11 RF95 3 65
46 - 65
80
125 200 1
0.365
15-18.5
25-30
30-33
30-33
33-40
45-55
11 RF95 3 82
60 - 82
100 200 250 1
0.365
22
33-40
37-45
37-45
45-55
59-75
11 RF95 3 95
70 - 95
100 200 350 1
0.365
22-25
40-45
45-51
45-55
55-63
75-80
11 RF95 3 110
90 - 110
125 200 350 1
0.365
30
55
55
55
75
90
22-25
11 RFA95 3...
11 RFA95 3 33
20 - 33
40
63
110 1
0.365
7.5
11-15
11-15
15-18.5
15-18.5
11 RFA95 3 42
28 - 42
50
80
150 1
0.365
9-10
15-18.5
18.5-22
18.5-22
22-25
30-33
11 RFA95 3 50
35 - 50
50
100 175 1
0.365
10-11
22
25
25
30
37-40
11 RFA95 3 65
46 - 65
80
125 200 1
0.365
15-18.5
25-30
30-33
30-33
33-40
45-55
11 RFA95 3 82
60 - 82
100 200 250 1
0.365
22
33-40
37-45
37-45
45-55
59-75
11 RFA95 3 95
70 - 95
100 200 350 1
0.365
22-25
40-45
45-51
45-55
55-63
75-80
11 RFA95 3 110
90 - 110
125 200 350 1
0.365
30
55
55
55
75
90
UL RK5 fuse class for RF38 types and UL K5 fuse class for RF95 types.
NOTE: Two pole (single phase) versions are available on request.

Add the letter S in the order code e.g. RF381000 is three pole; RFS381000 two
pole.
The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be selected on
the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, across the line
starting is considered.
No standard powers ratings exist; select relay according to current

consumption.
range.

Tipo
c
U
L
u
s
C
S
A
E
A
C
C
C
C
Register of
shipping
L
R
O
S
RF38
RF95
RFA95
Certified products.
short circuit rating up to 82A FLA range and 10000 Amps RMS
for 95A and 110A FLA range; the trip current is 120% FLA.
UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
3-4
Accessories
page 3-8
Dimensions
pages 2-32 and 2-33
Wiring diagrams
page 3-11
pages 3-12 and 13

for BF series contactors
Non phase failure /
Order code

range
IEC
UL per
aM gG
pkg
[A]
[A]
[A]
230V
400V
415V
440V
550V
690V
[A]
[kg]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
0.06

Direct mounting on BF09 - BF38 contactors.
Independent mounting with RFX38 04 base.
RFN38...
RFN38 0016
0.1-0.16
0.25
0.160
RFN38 0025
0.16-0.25
0.5
0.160
0.06
0.06
0.06-0.09 0.06-0.09 0.09-0.12
RFN38 0040
0.25-0.4
0.5
0.160
0.06
0.09
0.09
0.12
0.12
0.18
RFN38 0063
0.4-0.63
0.160
0.09
0.12-0.18 0.12-0.18 0.18
0.18
0.25
RFN38 0100
0.63-1
0.160
0.12
0.25
0.25-0.37 0.37-0.55
RFN38 0160
1-1.6
0.160
0.18-0.25 0.37-0.55 0.37-0.55 0.55
RFN38 0250
1.6-2.5
10
0.160
0.37
RFN38 0400
2.5-4
15
0.160
RFN38 0650
4-6.5
16
25
RFN38 1000
6.3-10
10
20
40
RFN38 1400
9-14
16
32
RFN38 1800
13-18
25
40
RFN38 2300
17-23
25
RFN38 2500
20-25
32
RFN38 3200
24-32
RFN38 3800
32-38
0.75
0.25
0.37
0.55-0.75 0.75
0.75
0.75-1.1 1.1
1.1-1.5
0.55-0.75 1.1-1.5
1.1-1.5
1.1
1.5-2.2
2.2-3
0.160
1.1-1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2-3
0.160
1.5-2.2
3-4
4-5.5
5.5-7.5
50
0.160
5.5
5.5
5.5-7.5
5.5-7.5
11
70
0.160
7.5
7.5-9
11
15
50
90
0.160
5.5
11
9-11
11
11
18.5
50
100 1
0.160
5.5
11
11
11
15
22
40
63
125 1
0.160
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
30
40
63
150 1
0.160
11
18.5
18.5
18.5
22
30
MANUAL RESETTING.
11 RFN95 3...
11 RFNA95 3...
11 RFN95 3 42
28 - 42
50
80
150 1
0.365
9-10
15-18.5
18.5-22
18.5-22
22-25
30-33
11 RFN95 3 50
35 - 50
50
100 175 1
0.365
10-11
22
25
25
30
37-40
11 RFN95 3 65
46 - 65
80
125 200 1
0.365
15-18.5
25-30
30-33
30-33
33-40
45-55
11 RFN95 3 82
60 - 82
100 200 250 1
0.365
22
33-40
37-45
37-45
45-55
59-75
11 RFN95 3 95
70 - 95
100 200 350 1
0.365
22-25
40-45
45-51
45-55
55-63
75-80
11 RFN95 3 110
90 - 110
125 200 350 1
0.365
30
55
55
55
75
90
11 RFNA95 3 42
28 - 42
50
80
150 1
0.365
9-10
15-18.5
18.5-22
18.5-22
22-25
30-33
11 RFNA95 3 50
35 - 50
50
100 175 1
0.365
10-11
22
25
25
30
37-40
11 RFNA95 3 65
46 - 65
80
125 200 1
0.365
15-18.5
25-30
30-33
30-33
33-40
45-55
11 RFNA95 3 82
60 - 82
100 200 250 1
0.365
22
33-40
37-45
37-45
45-55
59-75
11 RFNA95 3 95
70 - 95
100 200 350 1
0.365
22-25
40-45
45-51
45-55
55-63
75-80
11 RFNA95 3 110
90 - 110
125 200 350 1
0.365
30
55
55
55
75
90
UL RK5 fuse class for RFN38 types and UL K5 fuse class for RF95 types.



consumption.
range.

c
U
L
u
Type
s
C
S
A
E
A
C
C
C
C
RFN38
RFN95
RFNA95
Certified products.
short circuit rating up to 82A FLA range and 10000 Amps RMS
for 95A and 110A FLA range; the trip current is 120% FLA.
UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Accessories
page 3-8
Dimensions
pages 2-32 and 2-33
Wiring diagrams
page 3-11
page 3-12 and 13
3-5

for B series contactors
Phase failure /
Order code

range
IEC
UL per
aM gG K5 pkg

230V
400V
415V
440V
550V
690V
[A]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
59-92
[A]
[A]
[A]
[kg]

Independent screw fixing or direct mounting on contactors:
B115-B145-B180 using G372 links
RF200 100
60-100
100 160 500 1
2.150
18.5-25 33-51
37-55
37-59
45-63
RF200 125
75-125
125 200 500 1
2.150
22-37
40-63
45-63
51-75
55-80
75-110
RF200 150
90-150
160 250 500 1
2.150
25-45
51-80
55-80
55-92
63-100
92-140
RF200 200
120-200
200 315 500 1
2.150
37-59
75-100
75-100
75-110
92-140
129-184
92-147
100-150 110-162 140-220

B145-B180 using G375 links
RF420 250
150-250
250 400 800 1
2.460
45-75
92-132
RF420 300
180-300
315 500 800 1
2.460
55-92
100-162 110-162 129-184 129-198 180-280
RF420 420
250-420
500 630 800 1
2.460
75-110
129-198 147-220 150-220 180-280 250-368

RF200... - RF420...
NOTE: For 1000V powers, consult Customer Service for information;


range.
RELAYS FOR B500 AND B630 CONTACTORS

B115-B400

Consult Customer Service for the relative order codes and
detailed information; see contact details on inside front cover.

Type
c
U
L
u
s
E
A
C
RF200
RF420
Certified products.
short circuit rating up to 150A FLA range, 10000 Amps RMS
for 200A up to 300A FLA range and 18000 Amps for the 420A;
the trip current is 120% FLA.
G372
G373
G375
G376

UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
RF200
RF420
3-6
Accessories
page 3-8
Dimensions
pages 2-34, 35 and 3-10
Wiring diagrams
page 3-11
pages 3-12 and 13

for B series contactors
Non phase failure /
Order code

range
IEC
UL per
aM gG K5 pkg

230V
400V
415V
440V
550V
690V
[A]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
59-92
[A]
[A]
[A]
[kg]

RFN200 100
60-100
100 160 500 1
2.150
18.5-25 33-51
37-55
37-59
45-63
RFN200 125
75-125
125 200 500 1
2.150
22-37
40-63
45-63
51-75
55-80
75-110
RFN200 150
90-150
160 250 500 1
2.150
25-45
51-80
55-80
55-92
63-100
92-140
RFN200 200
120-200
200 315 500 1
2.150
37-59
75-100
75-100
75-110
92-140
129-184
92-147
100-150 110-162 140-220

B145-B180 using G375 links
RFN420 250
150-250
250 400 800 1
2.460
45-75
92-132
RFN420 300
180-300
315 500 800 1
2.460
55-92
100-162 110-162 129-184 129-198 180-280
RFN420 420
250-420
500 630 800 1
2.460
75-110
129-198 147-220 150-220 180-280 250-368

RFN200... - RFN420...
NOTE: For 1000V powers, consult Customer Service for information;


range.
RELAYS FOR B500 AND B630 CONTACTORS.

B115-B400

Consult Customer Service for the relative order codes and
detailed information; see contact details on inside front cover.

Type
c
U
L
u
s
E
A
C
RFN200
RFN420
Certified products.
short circuit rating up to 150A FLA range, 10000 Amps RMS
for 200A up to 300A FLA range and 18000 Amps for the 420A;
the trip current is 120% FLA.
G372
G373
G375
G376

UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
RFN200
RFN420
Accessories
page 3-8
Dimensions
pages 2-34 and 3-10
Wiring diagrams
page 3-11
pages 3-12 and 13
3-7

Add-on blocks and accessories for thermal overload relays
Order code
For relay
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
ELECTRICAL RESET G228
[kg]
Set of links for direct contactor mounting.

11 G372
RF...200 on
contactor
11 G373
11 G375
RFX38 02
RF...420 on
contactor
11 G376
12 - 550
Power consumption in AC
VA
300
B115-B145-B180
0.250
Minimum reset time
ms
20
B250-B310-B400
0.360
Terminals
Faston
6.3x0.8
NOTE: Coils can remain supplied for a maximum interval of

500ms; 3 consecutive operations are allowed, followed by a
5 minute interval. Reset only if at least 1min has passed
from overload tripping.
It is recommended to use the wiring diagram on page 3-11.
B145-B180
0.313
B250-B310-B400
0.500
Protection cover for thermal overload relay-contactor assembly.

RFX38 02
RF38 on contactor BF09 BF12 - BF18 - BF25
10
0.014
RFX38 03
RF38 on contactor BF26BF32 - BF38
10
0.014
Protection shrouds for power terminals.
RFX38 03
Control circuit voltage

AC (50/60Hz)
11 G262
RF...95...3
10
0.003
11 G361
RF...200
0.026
11 G363
RF...420
0.046
INDIPENDENT MOUNTING
Conductor cross section with one cable:
6...10mm2 / AWG 8 for RFX38 04
35mm2 / AWG 2 for G270
Tightening torque:
2...2.5Nm / 1.5...1.8 lbft for RFX38 04
3.9Nm/2.88 lbft for G270.
Independent mounting.
Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting.
Tipo
c
U
L
u
s
C
S
A
E
A
C
Sealing device.
G361
RFX38 01
0.002
G363
0.006
G372
G373
10
0.011
G375
Marking element.
G376
11 RB6
G270
Set of 100 alphanumeric symbol.
RFX38 04
3958
RFX38 04
RF...38
0.082
11 G270
RF...95
10
0.148
RF...9 - RF...95
0.072
Electrical reset.
11 G228
11 G262
RF...38 - RF...200 - RF...420
11 G233
RF...9 - RF...95
10
Electric button NO.

11 G244

RFX38 04
RF...9 - RF...95
RF...9 - RF...95
100
RF...9 - RF...95
0.003
0.002
Front IP20 protection is warranted to contactor-thermal relay connections.

Independent mounting base for any RF95 relay.
Remove the links fixed on RF...95 and use those supplied with the base.
Replace with voltage digit.
AC 50/60Hz 24V / 48V / 110-125V / 220-240V / 380-415V.
Replace with the required alphanumeric symbol.
Each package contains 100 pieces of the same symbol.
Certified products.

as Auxiliary Devices for thermal overload relays.
CSA CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Kits for
industrial control equipment.
UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Combinations
11 G228
G372
G373
G375
G376
11 G244
G262
(per RF...95 3)
G270
G361
G363
RF...200
RF...420
RFX38 01
G233
RF...95 3
RFX38 04
G228
RF...9
3958...
G244
RB6
RF...38
3-8
RFX38 01
Dimensions
page 3-10
Wiring diagrams
page 3-11
pages 3-12 and 13

Add-on blocks and accessories for thermal overload relays.
Electronic relay and accessory
Protection cover for thermal overload relay-contactor assembly
BF26-BF38
BF09-BF25
RFX38 02
RFX38 03
RF...38
RF...38
Thermistor protection relay
Order code
Rated auxiliary
supply voltage
Qty
per
pkg
Wt.
[V]
[kg]
DC supply (version for 35 mm DIN rail IEC/EN 60715).

31 DRPTC 24
24VDC
0.269
AC supply (version for 35 mm DIN rail IEC/EN 60715).

31 DRPT 24
24VAC
0.269
31 DRPT 110
110VAC
0.269
31 DRPT 220
220-240VAC
0.269
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
31 CE106
Adapter for screw

fixing of DRPT relay
on mounting plate.
10
0.008
ACCESSORY
31 DRPT...
Galvanic isolation between supply and measuring circuits does not exist.
The DRPT is a thermal protection relay for motors
equipped with thermistor PTC sensors immersed in the
winding heads. The maximum number of thermistors to
be used is limited by the resistance of all the sensors
connected in series; total ohmic value is not to exceed
1.5k at 25C.
The DRPT type has fail-safe operation: the protective
feature trips even in the case the PTC circuit is
disconnected or there is a lack of voltage.
Resetting is manual or automatic.
Supply circuit
Rated frequency: 50-60Hz for AC types only
Operational limits: 0.85-1.1 Us
Maximum dissipation: 2.5W
Connection: permanent.
Measuring circuit
Type of connectable PTC sensor: According to
DIN 44081
Total PTC resistance at 25C: 1.5k
Tripping resistance: 2.7-3.1k
Resetting resistance: 1.5-1.8k
Voltage at PTC terminals: 2.5VDC.
Remote resetting
Control: NC contact opening
Contact voltage: 5VDC
Current consumption: about 1mA.
Relay output
Arrangement: 1 relay with 2 changeover contacts
Rated operational voltage Ue: 250VAC
Conventional free air thermal current Ith: 5A
Designation to IEC/EN 60947-5-1: B300
Mechanical life: 50x106 cycles
Electrical life (with rated load): 2x105 cycles.
Indications
Green LED indicator for power ON
Red LED indicator for relay state TRIP
Connections
Conductor section 2x1.5mm2 with ferrule (max)
Tightening torque: 0.8-1.2Nm.
Ambient conditions
Housing
Snap on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
For screw fixing, use CE106 adapter
Degree of protection
IP40 housing
IP20 terminals.
Certifications obtained: EAC.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5.
Dimensions
page 3-10
Wiring diagrams
page 3-11
3-9

G270 base c/w RF...95 thermal relay
.2
4 16)
(0.
55
(2.16)
16.5
(0.65)
9.7
(0.38)
43
(1.69)
79
(3.11)
14.6
(0.57)
88.4
(3.48)
83
(3.27)
73.5
(2.89)
7.9
(0.31)
34
(1.34)
70.3
(2.77)
7.9
(0.31)
45
(1.77)
14.6
(0.57)
11
(0.43)
102
(4.01)
95.4
(3.75)
.2
4 16)
(0.
85
(3.35)
RFX38 04 base c/w RF...38 thermal relay
16.5
(0.65)
RF...200 thermal relay with links G372 and G373

127.5
(5.02)
40
(1.57)
23.8
(0.94)
166.1
(6.54)
122
(4.80)
40
(1.57)
38.6
(1.52)
G372
G373
113.4
(4.46)
74
(2.91)
172
(6.77)
.4
5 21)
(0.
20
(0.79)
40
(1.57)
M8
56.5
(2.22)
40
(1.57)
RF...420 thermal relay with links G375 and G376

145
(5.71)
25
(0.98)
165.4
(6.51)
153.3
(6.03)
47.5
(1.57)
47.5
(1.57)
44.8
(1.76)
G375
G376
74
(2.91)
121.2
(4.77)
189.6
(7.46)
.4
5 21)
(0.
25
(0.98)
47.5
(1.57)
M1
56.8
(2.24)
47.5
(1.57)
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS RF...9 and RF...95

G228... reset
G244 button
CE106 adapter
22.5
(0.88)
94
(3.70)
79
(3.11)
100
(3.94)
4.5
(0.18)
3-10
10
(0.39)
35.8
(1.41)

DRPT relay
45
(1.77)
54.5
(2.14)
13.3
(0.52)
26.7
(1.05)
89.7
(3.53)
84
(3.30)
19
(0.75)
35.8
(1.41)
63
(2.48)
10
(0.39)

Wiring diagrams
98
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
RFA9 - RFNA9
96
97
RESET
95
TEST
STOP
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR BF CONTACTORS

RF38 - RFN38
98
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
97
97
96
98
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
3
RFA95 - RFNA95
RF95 - RFN95
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
RESET
95
TEST
STOP
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR B CONTACTORS

RF200 - RFN200
RF420 - RFN420
L1
L2
95
95
97
96
98
RESET
96
L1
1
TEST
97
RESET
95
TEST
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR BG MINI-CONTACTORS

RF9 - RFN9
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
95
97
96
98
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
98
96
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS RF9 - RF95

L1
L2
L3
Electric reset
G228
A1
BF...
TEST
E1
G228...
E2
95
97
96
98
RESET
A2
RF...
L
L1
T1
T2
T3

DRPT
24VDC
24VAC
110VAC
220...240VAC
L1
Automatic
Reset
Manual
Reset
Remote
Reset
Set point
Hysteresis
Remote
reset
L2
L3
F2
A1
A2
S1
F1
TEST
K1
A1
T1 T2 S1
11
21
RESET
T2
S1
K1
2
A2
DRPT
12
14
22
24
ON
S2
TRIP
M1
S3
K1
12
11
14
Rmax =1.5k (25C)

K1
22
21
24
3-11

Phase failure/single phase sensitive hand reset

Phase failure sensitive automatic reset
Non phase failure/non single phase sensitive hand reset
Non phase failure/non single phase sensitive automatic reset
RF9
RFA9
RFN9
RFNA9
RF38
RFN38
RF95
RFA95
RFN95
RFNA95
RF200
RFN200
RF420
RFN420
1000
POWER CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
690
690
690
1000
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
kV
Frequency limit
Hz
0-400
0-400
0-400
50-60
50-60
from
0.09
0.1
14
60
150
to
15
38
110
200
420
Operational range
Tripping class
10A
Particular characteristics
Test button - Trip indicator
Connection
With current
transformers
Direct
Terminals
Type
Screw
Terminal width
Phillips
Tightening torque
for power terminals
Yoke
clamp
Screw and washer
Screw and flat washer
M4
M4
M5
M8
mm
9.8
12.6
20
M10
25
13mm
18mm
Nm
2.3
2...2.5
3.9
18
35
lbft
1.7
1.5...1.8
2.88
13.3
25.9
--
Maximum conductor section connectable

N
10
--
Flexible w/o lug
AWG
mm2
10
35
--
--
Flexible c/w lug
mm2
10
--
150
2 x 150
Bar
mm
--
--
--
25 x 3
30 x 5
0.7-2.4
0.7-2.4
2.0-4.2
0.7-2.4
0.7-2.4
Dissipation per phase

AUXILIARY CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
Available
contacts
NO
NC
IEC rated insulation voltage
690
IEC conventional free air

thermal current Ith
10
Terminals with
screw and washer
Screw
Terminal width
Phillips
M3.5
mm
n
Maximum conductor section connectable

Flexible w/o lug
mm2
Flexible c/w lug
mm2
Tightening torque
for auxiliary terminals
8
1
1
2.5
2.5
Nm
0.8...1
0.8...1
0.8...1
lbft
0.74
0.59...0.74
0.74
0.59...0.74
0.59...0.74
B600 - P600

B600-R300
B600-P600

B600-R300
B600-R300

AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperatureo
-20...+55
-25...+60
-20...+55
-25...+60
-25...+60
Storage temperature
-55...+70
-50...+70
-55...+70
-50...+70
-50...+70
Compensation temperature
-15...+55
-20...+60
-15...+55
-20...+60
-20...+60
Maximum altitude
Operation position
Normal
Allowable
Mounting
With manual and automatic resetting.
For currents higher than 420A, consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Standard supplied.
Metric wrench/spanner.
C600-R300 for automatic reset type.
3-12
3000
On vertical plane
30
On contactor or separately

TRIP CHARACTERISTIC FOR RF THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS (AVERAGE TIME)

Three-phase balanced operation
RF9
RFA9
RFN9
RFNA9
RF38
RFN38
Two-phase operation (phase failure/single phase)
RF95
RFA95
RFN95
RFNA95
RF9
RFA9
RF38
RF95
RFA95
Opening time [s]
Opening time [s]

10000
10000
2h
2h
1h
1h
30min
30min
1000
1000
10min
10min
5min
5min
2min
100
2min
100
1min
1min
COLD
COLD
HOT
RF200
RFN200
1.05 1.2
1
HOT
10
10
1.5
x Ie [A]
10
RF420
RFN420
RF200
1.15
1.5
x Ie [A]
10
RF420
Opening time [s]
Opening time [s]

10000
10000
2h
2h
1h
1h
30min
30min
1000
1000
10min
10min
5min
5min
2min
100
2min
100
COLD
1min
1min
COLD
HOT
HOT
10
10
1
1.05 1.2
1
1.5
x Ie [A]
10
1.15
1.5
10
x Ie [A]
Tripping times can have a 20% deviation with respect to the average tripping curve values above.
3-13
Page 4-2
DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS WITH AND WITHOUT
THERMAL RELAY
Motor ratings up to 95A 440V in IEC AC3 duty
General use up to 65A / motor rating up to
52A 600V per UL/CSA
Versions with Start-Stop/Reset buttons or Reset
button.
Page 4-5
CHANGEOVER CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
For 20A loads at 40C in IEC AC1 duty
For 20A general use per UL/CSA
With built-in mechanical interlock.
Page 4-7
STAR-DELTA STARTERS IN NON-METALLIC
ENCLOSURE
Suitable for three-phase motor control, 16-60A
440V / 7,5kW-30kW 400V ratings in IEC AC3
duty.
Page 4-5
REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
For three-phase motor control 9-25A 440V /
4-12.5kW 400V, in IEC AC3 duty and up to
15HP 600V per UL/CSA
Versions with built-in or external
mechanical interlock
Complete with rigid connections
PCB version 9A 440V / 4kW 400V in IEC
AC3 duty; 5HP 300V per UL/CSA.
Page 4-6
STAR-DELTA STARTERS OPEN FRAME
Suitable for three-phase motor control,
16A-690A 440V / 7.5kW-375kW 400V
ratings in IEC AC3 duty.
Page 4-8
EMPTY NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES
Versions without pushbuttons, with Reset
button only or Start-Stop/Reset buttons
For starters, with pushbuttons and metal
plate
Suitable to contain BG mini-contactor or
BF09A to BF110 contactors, up to 110A
440V rating in IEC AC3 duty; up to 52A at
600V for UL/CSA.
ELECTROMECHANICAL STARTERS
Direct-on-line starters in
non-metallic enclosure complete
with or without thermal relay
Versions with RESET or
START/STOP pushbuttons
Non-metallic enclosures for
customer-assembled starters
Reversing and changeover
contactor assemblies
Star-delta starters, open frame and
in non-metallic enclosure versions.
Direct-on-line starters - Full voltage across the line - Non reversing

Enclosed with thermal relay ...............................................................................................................................................
Enclosed without thermal relay ..........................................................................................................................................
Combinations ....................................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
4 - 2
4 - 3
4 - 10
Reversing contactor assemblies

With BG series mini-contactors .......................................................................................................................................
With BF series contactors ................................................................................................................................................
4 - 5
4 - 5
Changeover contactor assemblies

With BG series mini-contactors .......................................................................................................................................
4 - 5
Star-delta starters
Open frame .......................................................................................................................................................................
Enclosed ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Non-metallic enclosure for starters ....................................................................................................................................
4 - 6
4 - 7
4 - 7
Dimensions .................................................................................................................
Wiring diagrams ...........................................................................................................
4 - 16
4 - 20
AND
4 - 8
4 - 8
4 - 9
M OTOR C ONTROL
Enclosures ........................................................................................................................................................................
Accessories and spare parts ..............................................................................................................................................
Combinations ....................................................................................................................................................................
P ROTECTION
Empty non-metallic enclosures
Direct-on-line starters - Full voltage across the line.
Non reversing three phase
Enclosed with thermal
overload relay
Order code
Relay
adj
range
IEC technical
characteristics
(440V)
Ie kW
Qty Wt
per
pkg
[A]
[A] [kW]
Components
Starter enclosure
Contactor
Thermal
relay
Auxiliary
contact
block
[kg]
Starters with Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons .
4
M0 P...12
M1 P...12
M2 P...12
M0 R...12
M1 R...12
M2 R...12
M0 P009 121
0.6-1
M0 P009 121V5
0.9-1.5 1.5 0.37
0.18-0.25 1
0.760
M0 PA
BG09 10A RF9 1
0.760
M0 PA
BG09 10A RF9 1V5
M0 P009 122V3
M0 P009 1233
1.4-2.3 2.3 0.55-0.75 1
0.760
M0 PA
BG09 10A RF9 2V3
2-3.3
3.3 1.1
0.760
M0 PA
BG09 10A RF9 33
M0 P009 125
3-5
0.760
M0 PA
BG09 10A RF9 5
M0 P009 1275
4.5-7.5 7.5 2.2-3
0.760
M0 PA
BG09 10A RF9 75
M0 P009 1210
6-10
10
3-4
0.760
M0 PA
BG09 10A RF9 10
M0 P012 1215
9-15
12
5.5
0.760
M0 PA
BG12 10A RF9 15
M1 P009 12A4
0.63-1 1
0.25
1.040
M1 PA
BF09 10A
RF38 0100
M1 P009 12A5
1-1.6
1.040
M1 PA
BF09 10A
RF38 0160
M1 P009 12A6
1.6-2.5 2.5 0.75
1.040
M1 PA
BF09 10A
RF38 0250
M1 P009 12A7
2.5-4
1.040
M1 PA
BF09 10A
RF38 0400
M1 P009 12A8
4-6.5
6.5 2.2-3
1.040
M1 PA
BF09 10A
RF38 0650
M1 P009 12A9
6.3-10 10
3-4
1.040
M1 PA
BF09 10A
RF38 1000
M1 P009 12B0
9-14
13
5.5
1.040
M1 PA
BF09 10A
RF38 1400
M1 P018 12B1
13-18
18
7.5
1.040
M1 PA
BF18 10A
RF38 1800
M2 P025 12B2
17-23
23
11
1.220
M2 PA
BF25 10A
RF38 2300
M2 P025 12B3
20-25
25
11
1.220
M2 PA
BF25 10A
RF38 2500
M2 P032 12B4
24-32
32
15
1.300
M2 PA
BF32 00A
RF38 3200
G418 10
M25 P038 12B5
32-38
38
18.5
2.880
M25 PA
BF38 00A
RF38 3800
G418 10
M3 P050 12B6
35-50
50
18.5-22
3.760
M3 PA
BF50 00
RF95 3 50
G418 10
M3 P065 12B7
45-65
65
30
3.760
M3 PA
BF65 00
RF95 3 65
G418 10
M3 P080 12B8
60-82
80
37-45
3.760
M3 PA
BF80 00
RF95 3 82
G418 10
M3 P095 12B9
70-95
95
45
3.760
M3 PA
BF95 00
RF95 3 95
G418 10
1.5-2.2
1.6 0.37-0.55 1
1.1-1.5
Starters with Reset pushbuttons .
M25 P038 12
M25 R038 12
M3 P...12
M0 R009 121
0.6-1
0.720
M0 RA
BG09 10A RF9 1
M0 R009 121V5
0.9-1.5 1.5 0.37
0.18-0.25 1
1
0.720
M0 RA
BG09 10A RF9 1V5
M0 R009 122V3
1.4-2.3 2.3 0.55-0.75 1
0.720
M0 RA
BG09 10A RF9 2V3
M0 R009 1233
2-3.3
3.3 1.1
0.720
M0 RA
BG09 10A RF9 33
M0 R009 125
3-5
0.720
M0 RA
BG09 10A RF9 5
M0 R009 1275
4.5-7.5 7.5 2.2-3
0.720
M0 RA
BG09 10A RF9 75
M0 R009 1210
6-10
10
3-4
0.720
M0 RA
BG09 10A RF9 10
M0 R012 1215
9-15
12
5.5
0.720
M0 RA
BG12 10A RF9 15
M1 R009 12A4
0.63-1 1
0.25
0.995
M1 RA
BF09 10A
RF38 0100
M1 R009 12A5
1-1.6
1.6 0.37-0.55 1
0.995
M1 RA
BF09 10A
RF38 0160
M1 R009 12A6
1.6-2.5 2.5 0.75
0.995
M1 RA
BF09 10A
RF38 0250
M1 R009 12A7
2.5-4
0.995
M1 RA
BF09 10A
RF38 0400
M1 R009 12A8
4-6.5
6.5 2.2-3
0.995
M1 RA
BF09 10A
RF38 0650
M1 R009 12A9
6.3-10 10
3-4
0.995
M1 RA
BF09 10A
RF38 1000
M1 R009 12B0
9-14
13
5.5
0.995
M1 RA
BF09 10A
RF38 1400
M1 R018 12B1
13-18
18
7.5
0.995
M1 RA
BF18 10A
RF38 1800
M2 R025 12B2
17-23
23
11
1.165
M2 RA
BF25 10A
RF38 2300
M2 R025 12B3
20-25
25
11
1.165
M2 RA
BF25 10A
RF38 2500
M2 R032 12B4
24-32
32
15
1.260
M2 RA
BF32 00A
RF38 3200
G418 10
M25 R038 12B5
32-38
38
18.5
2.600
M25 RA
BF38 00A
RF38 3800
G418 10
M3 R050 12B6
35-50
50
18.5-22
3.410
M3 RA
BF50 00
RF95 3 50
G418 10
M3 R065 12B7
46-65
65
30
3.410
M3 RA
BF65 00
RF95 3 65
G418 10
M3 R080 12B8
60-82
80
37-45
3.410
M3 RA
BF80 00
RF95 3 82
G418 10
M3 R095 12B9
70-95
95
45
3.410
M3 RA
BF95 00
RF95 3 95
G418 10
1.5-2.2
1.1-1.5
Complete order code with coil voltage digit
(if 50/60Hz) or with voltage digit followed by 60

(if 60Hz).
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz
024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V).
Example: M0 R009 12 024 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type
enclosure with Reset button, 9A/AC3 contactor with 24VAC
50/60Hz coil and 0.6-1A thermal overload relay.
M0 P009 12 024 60 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type
enclosure with Start and Stop/Reset buttons , 9A /AC3
contactor with 24VAC 60Hz coil and
0.6-1A thermal overload relay.
Protection fuses are to be mounted externally by the user.
Refer to page 4-3 for details.
Special M3... versions
UL/CSA HP ratings
See page 4-4
M3 R...12
4-2
Combinations
pages 4-10 to 15
Dimensions
pages 4-16 and 17
Wiring diagrams
page 4-20
Enclosed without thermal
overload relay
Order code
Maximum operating
current (440V)
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
Components
[A]
[kg]
Starter enclosure
standard
supplied
Contactor
standard
supplied
Starters with Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons .
M0 P...10
M1 P...10
M0 R...10
M1 R...10
Thermal
relay to
purchase
separately
Auxiliary
contact
standard
supplied
M0 P009 10
10
0.667
M0 PA
BG09 10A RF9
M0 P012 10
12
0.667
M0 PA
BG12 10A RF9
M1 P009 10
13
0.910
M1 PA
BF09 10A RF38
M1 P018 10
18
0.910
M1 PA
BF18 10A RF38
M2 P025 10
25
1.060
M2 PA
BF25 10A RF38
M2 P032 10
32
1.162
M2 PA
BF32 00A RF38
G418 10
M25 P038 10
38
2.360
M25 PA
BF38 00A RF38
G418 10
M3 P050 10
50
3.110
M3 PA
BF50 00
RF95 3
G418 10
M3 P065 10
65
3.110
M3 PA
BF65 00
RF95 3
G418 10
M3 P080 10
80
3.110
M3 PA
BF80 00
RF95 3
G418 10
M3 P095 10
95
3.110
M3 PA
BF95 00
RF95 3
G418 10
Starters with Reset pushbutton .
M2 P...10
M25 P038 10
M0 R009 10
10
0.627
M0 RA
BG09 10A RF9
M0 R012 10
12
0.627
M0 RA
BG12 10A RF9
M1 R009 10
13
0.867
M1 RA
BF09 10A RF38
M1 R018 10
18
0.867
M1 RA
BF18 10A RF38
M2 R025 10
25
1.020
M2 RA
BF25 10A RF38
M2 R032 10
32
1.110
M2 RA
BF32 00A RF38
G418 10
M25 R038 10
38
2.320
M25 RA
BF38 00A RF38
G418 10
M3 R050 10
50
3.070
M3 RA
BF50 00
RF95 3
G418 10
M3 R065 10
65
3.070
M3 RA
BF65 00
RF95 3
G418 10
M3 R080 10
80
3.070
M3 RA
BF80 00
RF95 3
G418 10
M3 R095 10
95
3.070
M3 RA
BF95 00 RF95 3
G418 10
For thermal overload relay selection, refer to pages 3-2 or 3-3.
For thermal overload relay selection, refer to pages 3-4.
For thermal overload relay selection, refer to pages 3-4 or 3-5.
M2 R...10
Complete order code with coil voltage digit if 50/60Hz or with voltage digit
M25 R038 10
followed by 60 if 60Hz.
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz
024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V).
Example: M0 R009 10 024 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type
enclosure with Reset button, 9A /AC3 contactor with 24VAC
50/60Hz coil.
M0 P009 10 024 60 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type
enclosure with Start and Stop/Reset buttons , 9A /AC3
contactor with 24VAC 60Hz coil.
Protection fuses are to be mounted externally by the user.
Cable entry:
M0/M1//M2 - 2 knockouts PG13.5/M20 on
enclosure top and bottom
M25 - 2 knockouts PG16/M25-PG29/M32 on
M3 - Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by customer
Ambient conditions:
Storage temperature: -40...+70C
Degree of protection: IP65 for all; type 4/4X industrial
control environment for M1 / M2 / M25... and M3... UL
versions.
In addition to standard-indicated versions, cULus
certified starters are available up to 52A motor control or
65A general use rating max.
Add suffix UL to the order code,
e.g. M3 P050 10 024UL.
M3 P...10
UL/CSA HP ratings
See page 4-4
Canada (cULus File E93602) and CSA certified for
Canada and USA (cCSAus File 94157) as Magnetic
Motor Controllers, enclosed type, for all M0-M1M2P/R starters and M3P/R50-65UL types as
indicated in Special M3 above.
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
M3 R...10
Combinations
pages 4-9 to 15
Dimensions
pages 4-16 and 17
Wiring diagrams
page 4-20
4-3
Direct-on-line starters Full voltage across the line.
Non reversing
CONFIGURATIONS FOR USA AND CANADA.
M0P0092V3
1.4 - 2.3
M0P00933
2 - 3.3
M0P0095
3-5
M0P00975
4.5 - 7.5
M0P00910
6 - 10
NOTE: The HP / FLA values vary from one motor

to another; if possible, always verify the HP and
FLA (or rated current) on the motor nameplate.
Enclosure UL Type 1, 12, 4 and 4X industrial
control environment for M1, M2, M25 and
M3UL versions; designation of control units
can be:
N without push buttons
R with reset button only
P per table, with start-stop push buttons
S with start selector and stop push button.
Consult Customer Service for any other
combination required (e.g. with other type of
contactors, contactor assemblies or definitepurpose version, different overload version or
range, additional pilot lights, extra electrical or
electronic elements); see contact details on inside
front cover. Refer to below for specified
standard configurations.
M0P01215
9 - 15
10
Complete the order code by indicating:
M1P009A4
0.63 - 1
M1P009A5
1 - 1.6
M1P009A6
1.6 - 2.5
M1P009A7
2.5 - 4
Order code
for magnetic motor starters
in non-metallic enclosure
with 2 push buttons
T/O
RELAY
ADJ
RANGE
MAX UL/CSA HP RATINGS INDICATED ON STARTER

(based on t/o relay adj range)
[A]
120V
240V
200V
240V
480V
M0P0091
0.6 - 1
M0P0091V5
0.9 - 1.5
Single phase
Three phase
600V
M1P009A8
4 - 6.5
M1P009A9
6.3 - 10
M1P009B0
9 - 14
M1P012B0
9 - 14
10
M1P018B1
13 - 18
10
15
M2P025B2
17 - 23
15
15
M2P025B3
20 - 25
15
15
M2P026B2
17 - 23
15
20
M2P026B3
20 - 25
15
20
M2P026B4
24 - 32
15
20
M2P032B4
24 - 32
10
10
20
25
M25P038B5
32 - 38
10
15
30
30
M3P050B6UL
35 - 50
10
10
15
30
40
M3P065B7UL
46 - 65
15
15
40
50
M3P080B8
60 - 82
25
30
60
75
M3P095B9
70 - 95
30
30
60
75
10 if required without thermal overload

relay
12 if required with three-phase overload
relay
13 if required with single-phase overload
relay
15 if required with automatic reset of
overload relay for M0 types
17 if required with disconnect switch for
M2 and M3 types
42 if required with reversing contactor
combination for M2 and M3 types.
Complete the order code by indicating coil
voltage required:
02460 for 24V 60Hz
04860 for 48V 60Hz / 42V 50Hz
12060 for 120V 60Hz / 110V 50Hz
22060 for 220V 60Hz / 200V 50/60Hz
23060 for 230V 60Hz / 220V 50Hz
46060 for 460V 60Hz / 400V 50Hz
57560 for 575V 60Hz.
Maximum HP ratings per UL and CSA can be
different when definite-purpose contactors are
considered. Consult with Customer Service for
further information; see contact details on
inside front cover.
Short circuit protective device This enclosed
starter is suitable for use on a circuit capable of
delivering not more than 5,000 rms
symmetrical amperes, 600V max, when
protected with Class RK5 type, Fuse size 200A.
Maximum UL ratings is 52A for motor control
and 65A for general use.
Short circuit protective device This enclosed
starter is suitable for use on a circuit capable of
delivering not more than 10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes, 600V max, when
protected with Class RK5 type, Fuse size 225A.
No CSA or UL certification. Indicated values
correspond to UL/CSA magnetic contactor
ratings and for indication and reference
purposes only.
UL/CSA data for M25 types not available at the
time of catalogue printing so for indication and
CSA certified for Canada and USA (cCSAus File 94157) as Magnetic Motor Controllers at
max 600VAC, max 15HP per single phase,
max 60HP three phase, max 125A with
general purpose enclosure.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File
E93602) as Magnetic Motor Controllers
Enclosed.
Markings:
Line (voltage and frequency value)
Amps (overload adjustment range)
Max HP (horsepower value)
Control (coil and frequency value)
Caution: Bonding between conduits must be
provided.
4-4
Combinations
pages 4-9 to 15
Dimensions
pages 4-16 and 17
Wiring diagrams
page 4-20
Reversing and changeover contactor assemblies
Reversing contactor
assemblies
Order code
IEC
Ie (AC3)
440V
55C
Max. IEC Built-in

power
auxiliary
AC3
contacts
400V at
55C
[A]
[kW]
NO
Qty
per
pkg
NC n
Wt
[kg]
AC COIL.
External interlock with power and auxiliary wiring.
11 BGR...
11 BGR09 01 A 9
1 1
0.394
11 BGR12 01 A 12
5.7
1 1
0.394
BFA009 42
4.2
1 1
0.760
BFA012 42
12
5.7
1 1
0.760
BFA018 42
18
7.5
1 1
0.760
BFA025 42
25
12.5
1 1
0.760
Built-in interlock with power wiring only.

11 BGT09 10 A
1 0
0.380
11 BGT12 10 A
12
5.7
1 0
0.380
4
Type
0
1 1
0.400
DC COIL.
External interlock with power and auxiliary wiring.
BFA...
11 BGR09 01 D 9
1 1
0.460
11 BGR12 01 D 12
5.7
1 1
0.460
Built-in interlock with power wiring only.

11 BGT09 10 D 9
1 0
0.445
11 BGT12 10 D 12
5.7
1 0
0.445
1 1
0.460
Rear terminals: PCB solder pins.

Built-in interlock only.
11 BGT...
11 BGTP09 01 D 9
4

Supplied complete, ready for quick mounting as follows:
BGC09 T4Four-pole contactors with built-in mechanical
interlock. No power or auxiliary wiring included.
Rear terminals: PCB solder pins.

11 BGTP09 01 A 9
Supplied complete, ready for quick mounting.
The various versions are composed as follows:
BGR... Screw termination, external mechanical
interlock BGX50 00, power and auxiliary wiring.
BGT... Screw termination, built-in mechanical interlock
and power wiring only.
BGTP... Rear PCB solder pin termination, built-in
mechanical interlock only.
No thermal overload relay can be directly mounted to
BG... reversing contactor assemblies.
BFA...
Screw termination, mechanical interlock
BFX50 02 and power wiring.
The thermal overload relay RF38... can be directly
mounted to BFA... reversing contactor assemblies; for
selection, refer to section 3.
BGR09
BGT09
BGTP09
BGR12
BGT12
BFA009
BFA012
BFA018
BFA025
BGC09 T4
11 BGTP...
Changeover contactor
assemblies
Order code
IEC Operating
current (AC1)
40C 55C 60C
[A]
UL/CSA Qty
General per
Use
pkg
Wt
[A]
[A]
[A]
[kg]
18
15
20
0.365
18
15
20
0.450
AC COIL.
11 BGC09 T4 A 20
11 BGC09 ...
DC COIL.
11 BGC09 T4 D 20

Add-on blocks
pages 2-16 and 2-17
Complete order code with coil voltage digit or with voltage digit followed
by 60 if 60Hz.
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz
024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V).
Example: 11 BGR09 01 A024 for reversing contactor assembly with
2 mini-contactors BG09 having 1 NC auxiliary contact each
and 24VAC 50/60Hz coil.
11 BGR09 01 A024 60 for reversing contactor assembly with
2 mini-contactors BG09 having 1 NC auxiliary contact each
and 24VAC 60Hz coil.
-- DC
012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V.
Example: 11BGC09 T4 D012 is a changeover contactor assembly with
2 mini-contactors BG09 having 4 main poles each and 12VDC
coil.
One auxiliary contact for each contactor.
Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V,
consult Customer Service; see contact details on front inside cover.
Combinations
pages 4-13 to 15
Dimensions
page 4-18
Wiring diagrams
page 4-20
BGR09
BGT09
BGTP09
BGR12
BGT12
BFA009
BFA012
BFA018
BFA025
Maximum IEC operational power

at 55C (AC3)
230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
[kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
2.2
4
4.3
4.5
5
5
2.2
4
4.3
4.5
5
5
2.2
4
4.3
4.5
5
3.2
5.7
6.2
5.5
5
5
3.2
5.7
6.2
5.5
5
5
2.2
4.2
4.5
4.8
5.5
7.2
3.2
5.7
6.2
6.2
7.5
10
4
7.5
9
9
10
10
7
12.5 13.4 13.4 15
11
at 40C (AC1)
8
14
14
15
16
22
Single phase Three phase
120V 240V 208V 240V 480V 600V
[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP]
1
2
3
5
5
1
2
3
5
5
1
2
3
5
-
1
3
3
7
10
1
3
3
7
10
2
3
3
5
7
1
2
5
5
7
10
1
3
5
5
10
15
2
3
7
7
15
15
NOTE: BGR09, BGT09, BGR12, BGT12 types are UL Listed for USA
and Canada as Magnetic Motor Controller Reversing Contactors. All
these are rated 20A general (purpose) use and suitable for use on a
circuit capable of delivering more than 5kA symmetrical. Amps at 600V
max when protected by fuses class K5 rated no more than 30A.
BGTP09 type is UL Recognized for USA and Canada as Magnetic
Motor Controller Component reversing contactors. Max HP
rating up to 300VAC only; rated 20A general (purpose) use.
BGC types are UL Listed for USA and Canada as Magnetic Motor
Controller Changeover contactor.
No coil change or replacement is possible for any BG types.
Add-on blocks
Refer to section 2, pages 2-16 and 2-18.
Special add-on auxiliary contacts 11 BGX11 11 or
11 BGX11 12 must be used on the left-side contactor of
the BGT reversing assemblies.
For the right-side contactor, normal 11 BGX10... types of
auxiliary contacts can be used instead.
Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
(File E93602) for BGR09, BGT09, BGR12, BGT12, BFA...
and BGC... (see NOTE above).
UL Recognized, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602
Component), for BGTP09; products having this type of
Compliant with standards IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
pages 2-48 to 2-67
4-5
Star-delta starters
Open frame
Order code
Three-phase
Qty
motor control.
per
Max IEC operating pkg
current (440V)
Wt
[A]
[kg]
IEC standard motor powers
230V
400V
440V
500V
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
Complete star-delta starters, open frame, for starting

time up to 12 seconds and a maximum of 30 operations/hour.
BFA...
BFA009 70
16
1.700
7.5
7.5
7.5
BFA012 70
22
1.700
5.5
11
11
11
BFA018 70
28
1.700
7.5
15
11
11
BFA025 70
35
1.800
11
18.5
18.5
22
BFA026 70
43
1.800
11
22
22
25
BFA032 70
50
1.900
15
25
25
25
BFA038 70
60
1.900
15
30
30
30
21 DYF50 E
85
5.200
25
45
45
59
21 DYF65 E
110
5.200
30
59
63
75
21 DYF80 E
140
6.265
40
75
80
100
21 DYF95 E
145
6.265
40
75
80
100
21 NYF115
220
19.000
63
110
129
147
21 NYF145
260
19.000
80
132
162
185
21 NYF180
310
19.000
92
160
185
210
21 NYF250
480
22.650
145
250
280
315
21 NYF310
530
22.650
160
295
335
368
21 NYF400
690
25.000
220
375
425
450
Thermal relay adjustment range

Choose the thermal relay adjustment range considering a value
equal to 58% of rated motor current (Ie).
Example: Ie=100A; 58% Ie=58A.
The suitable relay range is 46-65A.
During the setup, the relay is to be regulated at 58A.
For NYF... type
For DYF... type

Complete order code with the coil voltage digit or

the coil voltage digit followed by 60 if 60Hz.
Standard voltage are as follows:
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz
024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 /
230 60 (V).
Example: BFA009 70 024 for BFA009 star-delta
starter with 24VAC 50/60Hz power
supply.
BFA009 70 024 60 for BFA009 star-delta
starter with 24VAC 60Hz power supply.
The thermal overload relay is not included and
must be purchased separately.
Refer to the example given under Thermal relay
adjustment range, for a correct choice and then to
page 3-4 for the order code.
The thermal overload relay is included. Replace with
digit of thermal relay; see tables above, under
Thermal relay adjustment range.
To be mounted by the customer.
Fuses for type 1 co-ordination. For type 2
co-ordination, consult Customer Service; see
contact details on inside front cover.
TM ST with auxiliary supply 24...240VAC.
TM ST A440 with auxiliary supply 380...440VAC.
NOTE: For higher powers and voltages, or

suitable for heavy-duty starting (centrifugal
fans, mills, crushers) that is with starting
time exceeding 12s, consult Customer
Service; see contact details on inside front
cover.
Digit defining Relay

thermal
adj
relay range
range A
IEC aM DYF
fuses starters
A 50
65
Digit defining Relay

thermal
adj
relay range range A
IEC aM NYF
fuses starters
A 115 145 180 250 310 400
42
28-42
80
50
100
60-100
200
35-50
100
125
75-125
250
65
46-65
125
150
90-150
315
82
60-82
160
200
120-200
400
95
70-95
200
250
150-250
500
300
180-300
630
420
250-420
800
80
95
Components
Starter
Contactors
Thermal Time relay

overload
relay
Auxiliary contacts fitted

on contactor:
Line
Delta
Star
Line
Delta
Star
BFA009 70
BF09 10A
BF09 01A
BF09 10A (RF38) TM ST
BFX10 20
BFX10 11 BFX31 31
BFA012 70
BF12 10A
BF12 01A
BFX10 20
BFX10 11 BFX31 31
BFA018 70
BF18 10A
BF18 01A
BFX10 20
BFX10 11 BFX31 31
BFA025 70
BF25 10A
BF25 01A
BFX10 20
BFX10 11 BFX31 31
BFA026 70
BF26 00A
BF26 00A
BFX10 20
BFX10 11
BFX10 11 BFX32 32
BFA032 70
BF32 00A
BF32 00A
BFX10 20
BFX10 11
BFX10 11 BFX32 32
BFA038 70
BF38 00A
BF38 00A
BFX10 20
BFX10 11
BFX10 11 BFX32 32
DYF50 E
BF50 00
BF50 00
BF32 00
RF95 3
TM ST
BFX10 20
BFX10 11
BFX10 11
DYF65 E
BF65 00
BF65 00
BF32 00
RF95 3
TM ST
BFX10 20
BFX10 11
BFX10 11
DYF80 E
BF80 00
BF80 00
BF50 00
RF95 3
TM ST
BFX10 20
BFX10 11
BFX10 11
DYF95 E
BF95 00
BF95 00
BF50 00
RF95 3
TM ST
BFX10 20
BFX10 11
BFX10 11
NYF115
B115 00
B115 00
BF65 00
RF200
TM ST
G350
G354
BFX10 11
NYF145
B145 00
B145 00
BF80 00
RF200
TM ST
G350
G354
BFX10 11
NYF180
B180 00
B180 00
B115 00
RF200
TM ST
G350
G354
G354
NYF250
B250 00
B250 00
B145 00
RF420
TM ST
G350
G354
G354
NYF310
B310 00
B310 00
B180 00
RF420
TM ST
G350
G354
G354
NYF400
B400 00
B400 00
B250 00
RF420
TM ST
G350
G354
G354
Reference stardards
Compliant with stardards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-9.
4-6
Rigid
connections
Dimensions
page 4-18
Wiring diagrams
pages 4-21 to 23
Star-delta starters.
Non-metallic enclosure for starters
Enclosed starters
Order
Three-phase motor
control.
Max IEC operating
current (440V)
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
IEC standard motor powers
[A]
[kg]
230V
400V
440V
500V
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
[kW]
Star-delta starters in enclosure with Start and Stop/Reset

buttons. Starting time up to 12 seconds and a maximum of
30 operations/hour.
M3 P...70... - M3 PA70
M3 P009 70
16
3.540
7.5
7.5
7.5
M3 P012 70
22
3.540
5.5
11
11
11
M3 P018 70
28
3.540
7.5
15
11
11
M3 P025 70
35
3.650
11
18.5
18.5
22
M3 P026 70
43
3.650
11
22
22
25
M3 P032 70
50
3.800
15
25
25
25
M3 P038 70
60
3.800
15
30
30
30
With switch disconnector, rotary door-coupling handle

GAX61 and Start and Stop/Reset buttons.

Complete order code with the coil voltage digit

or the coil voltage digit followed by 60 if 60Hz.
Standard voltage are as follows:
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz
024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60
/ 230 60 (V).
Example: M3P009 70 024 for M3P009 stardelta starter with 24VAC 50/60Hz
power supply.
M3P009 70 02460 for M3P009
star-delta starter with 24VAC 60Hz
power supply.
The thermal overload relay is not included and
must be purchased separately.
Choose the thermal relay adjustment range
considering a value equal to 58% of rated motor
current (Ie).
Example: Ie=10A; 58% Ie = 5.8A. The suitable
relay range is 4-6.5A, set at 5.8A, so the order
code to select is RF380650).
Refer to page 3-4 for the order codes available.
Suitable for BFA...70 starters.
TM ST with auxiliary supply 24...240VAC;
TM ST A440 with auxiliary supply 380...400VAC.
M3 P009 73
16
3,700
M3 P012 73
22
3,700
M3 P018 73
28
3,700
M3 P025 73
35
3,800
M3 P026 73
43
3,800
M3 P032 73
50
4,300
M3 P038 73
60
4,300
Enclosure for star-delta starter, complete with Start and

Stop/Reset buttons, metal plate fixed with piece of
35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail.
M3 PA70
2.240
Cable entry: Smooth surface; can be drilled by

customer
Ambient conditions:
Degree of protection: IEC IP65 for M3P; UL Type 1,
12, 4/4X for M3UL versions.
certified starters are available up to 52A motor control
rating max. This is also valid for the enclosure with
general use rating of 65A.
Add suffix UL to the order code, e.g. M3 PA70UL.
Certifications obtained: UL Listed, for USA and Canada
(File E93602), as Magnetic Motor Controllers - Enclosed
(starters) and - Enclosures for M3...PUL types.
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14 for starters;
UL 508A for M3P A70UL.
Maximum available space inside M3P... star-delta starters and M3 PA70 enclosure
NOTE: For higher powers and voltage

ratings or suitable for heavy-duty starting
(centrifugal fans, mills, crushers) that is
with starting time exceeding 12s, consult
Customer Service; see contact details on
inside front cover.
146
80.5
73.5
66.5
125.5
Components
Type
Enclosure
Contactors
Time
relay
Star
T/o
relay
Auxiliary contacts fitted

on contactor:
Line
Delta
Line
Delta
M3P009 70
M3 PA70
BF09 10A
BF09 01A
M3P012 70
M3 PA70
BF12 10A
M3P018 70
M3 PA70
M3P025 70
BF09 10A
(RF38)
TM ST
BFX10 20
BF12 01A
BF09 10A
(RF38)
TM ST
BFX10 20
BF18 10A
BF18 01A
BF12 10A
(RF38)
TM ST
M3 PA70
BF25 10A
BF25 01A
BF18 10A
(RF38)
M3P026 70
M3 PA70
BF26 00A
BF26 00A
BF18 10A
M3P032 70
M3 PA70
BF32 00A
BF32 00A
M3P038 70
M3 PA70
BF38 00A
BF38 00A
Combinations
page 4-15
Switch
disconnector
Star
Rigid
connections
BFX10 11
BFX31 31
GA016 A
BFX10 11
BFX31 31
GA025 A
BFX10 20
BFX10 11
BFX31 31
GA032 A
TM ST
BFX10 20
BFX10 11
BFX31 31
GA040 A
(RF38)
TM ST
BFX10 20
BFX10 11
BFX10 11
BFX32 32
GA063 SA
BF25 10A
(RF38)
TM ST
BFX10 20
BFX10 11
BFX10 11
BFX32 32
GA063 SA
BF25 10A
(RF38)
TM ST
BFX10 20
BFX10 11
BFX10 11
BFX32 32
GA063 SA
Dimensions
page 4-19
Wiring diagrams
page 4-21
4-7
Accessories and spare parts
Order code Contactor type
Thermal Degree Qty Wt

of
per
relay
protect. pkg

n
[kg]
Enclosures with Start-Stop/Reset pushbuttons.

M0PA
0.490
38
M25...
38
110
BF09A, BF12A,
BF18A
RF38
IP65
0.545
M2PA
BF25A, BF26A
BF32A
RF38
IP65
0.715
M3...
M25PA BF38A
RF38
IP65
0.990
Enclosures are supplied with the following accessories:
M3PA
RF95 3 IP65
1.900
Accessory
0.445
M2RA
BF25A, BF26A
BF32A
IP65
0.500
IP65
0.670
M25RA BF38A
RF38
IP65
0.970
M3RA
RF95 3 IP65
1.850
BF50, BF65,
BF80, BF95,
BF110
Enclosures without external pushbuttons.
Type
Contact
holder
MX 20P
Buttons:
- Start/Reset
- Start
LPC B1176
Contact for
Start button
MX 21P
LPC B2104
LPC B1113
LPX C10
Stop/Reset
button
extension
MX 10P
MX 01
MX 11P
MX 12P
M25 RA
RF38
Description
M2 RA
BF09A, BF12A,
BF18A
IP65
M1 RA
RF9
M0 RA
BG06, BG09,
BG12
Type of enclosure
M25 PA
BF50, BF65,
BF80, BF95,
BF110
RF38
M...RA
1
1
1
1
M0N
BG06, BG09,
BG12
RFA9
IP65
0.405
Unused hole
threaded plug
M1N
BF09A, BF12A,
BF18A
RF38
IP65
0.460
M2N
BF25A, BF26A
BF32A
RF38
IP65
0.640
M24N BG.../

BF09A...BF25A
IP65
0.625
M3 PA enclosure: 2 Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons,

2 G285 auxiliary terminals and 1 MX30 mounting plate
M3 RA enclosure: 1 Reset pushbutton,
2 G285 auxiliary terminals and 1 MX30 mounting plate
M3N enclosure: Supplied without accessories to be
purchased separately including MX 30 mounting plate.
M25N
BF38A
RF38
IP65
0.940
M3N
BF50, BF65,
BF80, BF95,
BF110
RF95 3 IP65
1.800
To be purchased separately; refer to page 2-4 for contactor choice.

To be purchased separately.
Refer to pages 3-2 to -6 for thermal overload relay choice.

For use of the overload relay in the M24N, consult Customer Service; see
Reversing contactor assemblies BGR, BGT, BFA42 and changeover
types BGC can also be fitted in M24N and M25 types. See pages 4-4,
4-13 and 4-15.
MX 31 metal mounting plate included.
MX 30 metal mounting plate included.
To install eventual pushbuttons, selectors and/or other control
accessories, use the
series and mount the relay contact
elements on the cover using the LPX AU120 mounting adapter. See
section 7.
Order code Description
Qty Wt
per
pkg
n
MX 01
Threaded plug for unused holes, 10
[kg]
0.007
grey RAL7035
MX 10P
MX 11P
MX 12P
MX 20P
MX 21P
4-8
32
M24N
M1PA
M1RA
MX 20P
MX 21P
18
M2...
RF9
M0RA
Accessories and
spare parts
12
M1...
BG06, BG09,
BG12
Enclosures with Reset pushbutton.
M...N
A
M0...
M2 PA
M...PA
Maximum operating current

(440V)
M1 PA
IP65
Enclosure
type
M0 PA
Empty enclosures
Stop/Reset button extension

rod for M0 enclosure
Mounting base for LPX C...
contact on M0 enclosure
Mounting base for LPX C...
contact on M1, M2, M25
enclosure
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.014
0.014
MX 30
Metal mounting plate for M3N
0.500
MX 31
Metal mounting plate for M24N

and M25 enclosures
0.400
Combinations
pages 4-9 to 15
Dimensions
pages 4-16 and 17
Enclosures can house the following devices:

M0 = BG with/without RF9
M1 = BF09A-BF12A-BF18A with/without RF38
M2 = BF25A-BF26A-BF32A, assemblies BFA42
with/without RF38
M24N = BF25A-BF26A-BF32A, assemblies BGR/BGT/BGC
and BFA42 without overload
M25 = BF26BF38A, assemblies BGR/BGT/BGC and
BFA42 with/without overload
M3 = BF50BF110 and all assemblies with/without
overload.
Operational characteristics:
Cable entry:
M0/M1//M2 - 2 knockouts PG13.5/M20 on
M24N/M25 - 2 knockouts PG16/M25-PG29/M32
on enclosure top and bottom
M3 - Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by customer
Ambient conditions:
Degree of protection: IEC IP65 for all; UL Type 1, 12,
4/4X for M0/M1/M2/M24N/M25 types and M3UL
versions.
Special M3 versions
certified starters and enclosures are available up to 52A motor control and 65A general use rating max (MX30
plate, earth/ground and neutral terminal plates are always
included in this case).
Add suffix UL to the order code of enclosures
e.g. M3N UL.
Certifications obtained: EAC for all; for M3NUL type, UL
Listed for USA and Canada (cULus File E300050) as
Industrial control panels; for M0/M1/M2PA/RA/N and
other M3UL types, UL Listed for USA and Canada
(cULus File E93602) under magnetic motor controllers
as Polymeric enclosures - and CSA certified for Canada
and USA (cCSAus File 94157) as Non-metallic
enclosures. UL/CSA pending for M24N and M25 types.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN
60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA CS22.2 n14; UL 508A and CSA
C22.1 for M3NUL type.
Wiring diagrams
page 4-20
M...PA EMPTY ENCLOSURES

M0PA
M1PA
M25PA
M2PA
M3PA
M3PA
M...RA EMPTY ENCLOSURES

M1RA
M0RA
M25RA
M2RA
M3RA
M3RA
M...N EMPTY ENCLOSURES

M0N
M1N
M2N
M24N
M25N
M3N
Metal mounting
plate MX31
(standard supplied)
Metal mounting
plate MX31
(standard supplied)
Dimensions
pages 4-16 and 17
Wiring diagrams
page 4-20
Metal mounting plate

MX 30
(to purchase separately)
4-9
M...P... STARTERS, ENCLOSED
M0 P009 12...
M0 P012 12...
M0 P009 10...
M0 P012 10...
M1 P009 12... M1 P009 10...

M1 P018 12... M1 P018 10...
M2 P025 12...
M2 P032 12...
M2 P025 10...
M2 P032 10...
M1 R009 12... M1 R009 10...

M1 R018 12... M1 R018 10...
M2 R025 12...
M2 R032 12...
M2 R025 10...
M2 R032 10...
M...R... STARTERS, ENCLOSED

M0 R009 12... M0 R009 10...
M0 R012 12... M0 R012 10...
M25... STARTERS, ENCLOSED

M25 P03812... M25 P03810...
M25 R03812... M25 R03810...
M3... STARTERS, ENCLOSED

M3 P050 12... to
M3 P095 12...
4-10
M3 R050 12... to
M3 R095 12...
M3 P050 10... to
M3 P095 10...
Dimensions
pages 4-16 and 17
Wiring diagrams
page 4-20
M3 R050 10... to
M3 R095 10...
Maximum combinations for M0... and M1... starters in
enclosure
For the fitting of add-on blocks and electronic relays in
the starters, consult our Customer Service; see contact
The enclosure cover can be equipped with various types
of actuators and pilot lights, per following details:
1) Upper position 1
The cover must be drilled in this position, with a
22.5mm hole, by the user and LPL... or 8 LP2T ILP
pilot light can be fitted.
To fit the LPL... (not type 8 LP2T ILP) pilot light
head, the mounting base, type MX 20P for M0
enclosure or type MX 21P for M1 enclosure, must
also be purchased. The LED element is snapped onto
this mounting base.
No adapter or base is needed for 8 LP2T IL...P
and 8 LP2T Z...
2) Middle position 2
Based on the enclosure type, in this position, the
user finds either the Start button or threaded plug.
Various
actuators can be fitted in this
position, such as flush or extended buttons,
selectors or pilot lights, as illustrated below.
To fit the actuators (not required for 8 LP2T ILP
pilot lights), the mounting base, type MX 20 for M0
enclosure, or type MX 21P for M1 enclosure, must
also be purchased. The contact or LED elements are
snapped onto this mounting base.
No adapter or base is needed for 8 LP2T IL...P and
8 LP2T Z...
3) Lower position 3
The STOP/RESET button is mounted in this position,
except for the enclosure without buttons.
This button activates the thermal overload relay via a
mechanical actuator.
In eventual applications without thermal overload
relay, this button can be removed and the hole
closed up by the threaded plug MX 01.
m
.5m
17 1 x
LPX LP...
LPX LE...
LPX LPS...
Time relay TM...

Protection relay PMV10 A440
Level control relay LVM25 240
Priority change relay LVMP 05
(one only relay on the left
of the contactor)
LPX C0...
LPX C1...
LPX CS...
LPX C0...
LPX C1...
LPX CS...
MX 20P (M0)
MX 21P (M1)
LPL...
8 LP2T IL...P
8 LP2T Z...
MX 01
LPC BL...
LPC QL...
LPC B...
LPC Q...
LPC S3...
MO...
M1...
LPC S...
LPC SL1...
BF09A
BF12A
BF18A
LPC B7...
LPC BL7...
BG...
LPC B73...
RF9
RF38
Dimensions
pages 4-16 and 17
Wiring diagrams
page 4-20
4-11
This button activates the thermal overload relay via a
mechanical actuator. In eventual applications without
thermal overload relay, this button can be removed
and the hole closed up by the threaded plug MX 01.
Various
selectors or pilot lights, as illustrated in the drawing
below. To fit the actuators (not required for
8 LP2T ILP pilot light), the mounting base type
MX 21P must also be purchased. The contact or LED
elements are snapped onto this mounting base.
8 LP2T Z...
4) Upper position 4
The cover must be drilled in this position
with a 22.5mm hole by the user whenever an
external handle is needed for a switch
disconnector fitted in the enclosure.
2) Middle position 2
Based on the enclosure type, in this position,
the user finds either the Start button or threaded
plug.
Various
selectors or pilot lights, as illustrated in the side
figure.
To fit the actuators (not required for 8 LP2T ILP
pilot light), the mounting base type MX 21P must
also be purchased.
The contact or LED elements are snapped onto this
mounting base.
8 LP2T Z...
3) Lower position 3
The STOP/RESET button is mounted in this position,
except for the enclosure without buttons.
mm
35
x1
or
m
.5m
17
2 xx
ma
PMV20/30/40/50/55/60/70... protection relay

PMF20 A... protection relay
PMA20/30... protection relay
LMV20... level control relay
(one relay only on right side of the contactor)
LPX LP...
LPX LE...
LPX LPS...
Time relay TM...

Protection relay PMV10 A440
Level control relay LVM25 240
Priority change relay LVMP 05
(two relays or one only on left
and one on right side
of the contactor)
LPL...
LPX C0...
LPX C1...
LPX CS...
LPX C0...
LPX C1...
LPX CS...
GAX63
GAX63 B
8 LP2T IL...P
8 LP2T Z...
MX 21P
MX 01
LPC BL...
LPC QL...
2
LPC B...
LPC Q...
3
MX 21P
M2...
M2...
BF25A
BF26A
BF32A
n2 BF09A
n2 BF12A
LPC S3...
M2...
n2 BF18A
n2 BF25A
BF09A
BF12A
BF18A
BF25A
BF26A
BF32A
LPC S...
LPC SL1...
LPC B7...
LPC BL7...
ON
GAX7 090
OFF
Maximum combinations for M2... starters in enclosure

For the fitting of add-on blocks and electronic relays in
the starters, consult our Customer Service; see contact
The enclosure covers can be equipped with various
types of actuators and pilot lights, per following details:
1) Upper position 1
The cover must be drilled in this position with a
22.5mm hole by the user; LPL... or 8 LP2T ILP
pilot light can be fitted.
To fit the LPL... pilot light, the mounting base type
MX 21P must also be purchased. The LED element is
snapped onto this mounting base.
8 LP2T Z...
LPC B73...
BFX50 02
RF38
4-12
RF38
RF38
Dimensions
pages 4-16 and 17
GA016 A
GA025 A
GA032 A
LPC B6...
Wiring diagrams
page 4-20
Maximum combinations for starters in M24N enclosure
In addition to a direct-on-line, full voltage across the line, starter or reversing contactor assembly, various other electromechanical devices can be fitted. The cover of the
M24N enclosure can be used across the entire surface to mount pushbuttons, measuring instruments, switch disconnectors GA016AGA032A type. No contact blocks or
other additional accessories can be mounted on the contactor face of AC BF series; they can only be fitted on the contactor side since the cover is shallow.
Eventually pushbuttons, selector switches and/or other control accessories of the
series can be used and contact or LED elements can be mounted directly
inside on the cover with the LPX AU120 mounting adapter; refer to section 7.
MX 31 internal metal mounting plate is standard-supplied.
The wall fixing holes and the cover closing

captive screws are positioned outwards with
respect to the sealing gasket. This guarantees the
protection degree of the enclosure against
infiltrations liquid (IEC IPX5 / UL Type 4X).
The base has ribbing which facilitates the
fixing of DIN rails, metal mounting plates and
electronic printed boards.
Grid references, marked by letters and numbers,
are engraved on the interior surface of the cover.
This grid allows to quickly identify the exact
drilling points where pushbuttons, handles or
pilot lights will be mounted.
A safety sealing system keeps the cover and
base together to avoid inopportune opening and
tampering.
Available space for fitting other electrical or electronic devices
82,6
156
103
M24N
M24N
M24N
M24N
BG06
BG09
BG12
without overload
BF09A...BF25A
without overload
BGR... - BGT... - BGC... without overload

n 2 BF09A n 2 BF12A
n 2 BF18A n 2 BF25A
All without overload
BFA...42 without overload
BF09A BF12A
BF18A BF25A
with GA016A...GA032A
BFX50 02
I
OFF
ON
BFX50 01
Dimensions
pages 4-16 and 17
Wiring diagrams
page 4-20
4-13
Maximum combinations for starters in M25 enclosure
In addition to a direct-on-line, full voltage across the line, starter or reversing contactor assembly, various other electromechanical devices can be fitted. The cover of the
M25 enclosure can be used across the entire surface to mount pushbuttons, measuring instruments, switch disconnectors GA016AGA040A type. Possible contact
blocks or other additional accessories can be mounted on the contactor face of AC or DC BF series or on the contactor side since the cover is deep.
Eventually pushbuttons, selector switches and/or other control accessories of the
series can be used and contact or LED elements can be mounted directly
inside on the cover with the LPX AU120 mounting adapter; refer to section 7.
MX 31 internal metal mounting plate is standard-supplied.

Grid references, marked by letters and numbers,
are engraved on the interior surface of the cover.
This grid allows to quickly identify the exact
drilling points where pushbuttons, handles or
pilot lights will be mounted.
base together to avoid inopportune opening and
tampering.
156
156
103
148
37,5
M25...038...
M25...
M25...
M25...
BF38
with or without
overload
BF26 - BF32
with or without
overload
BGR... - BGT... - BGC with or without overload RF9

n 2 BF26 - n 2 BF32 - n 2 BF38 with or without
overload RF38
BFA...42 with or without overload RF38
BF09 BF12 BF18

BF26 BF32 BF38
with GA016A...GA040A
BFX50 02
ON
OFF
The wall fixing holes and the cover closing

captive screws are positioned outwards with
respect to the sealing gasket. This guarantees the
protection degree of the enclosure against liquid
infiltrations (IEC IPX5 / UL Type 4X).
RF38...
RF38...
RF38...
BF09A...BF38A with
BFX50 01
4-14
Dimensions
pages 4-16 and 17
Wiring diagrams
page 4-20
Direct-on-line starters
Maximum combinations for starters in M3 enclosure

In addition to a direct-on-line, full voltage across the line, starter or reversing contactor assembly, star-delta starters can be installed as illustrated at the lower right as well as
various other electromechanical devices. The cover of the M3 enclosure can be used across the entire surface to mount pushbuttons, measuring instruments or switch
disconnectors GA016AGA125A, etc.
MX 30 internal metal mounting plate is standard supplied with M3P and M3R types; not included with the M3N, it can be purchased separately.
With the specifically designed hinges, the cover
remains attached to the base, fully open, while
the wiring work is being carried out. By
applying slight pressure on the hinges, the
cover can be released from the base.
4
M3...
The cover closing captive screws and the wall

fixing holes are positioned outwards with
respect to the sealing gasket. This guarantees
the protection degree of the enclosure against
liquids infiltrations (IEC IPX5 / UL Type 4X).
M3 P050 12...
M3 P095 12...

base together to avoid inopportune opening
and tampering.
Grid references, marked by letters and

numbers, are engraved on the interior surface
of the cover. This grid allows to quickly
identify the exact drilling points where
pushbuttons, handle or pilot lights will be
mounted.
A properly predrilled metal mounting plate
(MX 30 standard supplied except for M3N)
permits to quickly and precisely fix equipment
in place.

92.7
92.7
185
125.5
73.5
66.5
89
89
89
185
146
244
244
80.5
M3...
M3...
n 1 BF50 n 1 BF95
n 1 BF65 n 1 BF110
n 1 BF80
n 2 BF50
n 2 BF65
n 2 BF80
n 2 BF95
n 2 BF110
M3...
M3P...70
n 1 BF50 n 1 BF65 n 1 BF95

+ n 1 GA...
n 1 BF80 n 1 BF110
Star-delta combinations with t/o relay RF38,

TM ST timer and contactors:
BF09A BF12A BF18A
BF25A BF26A BF38A
20.2
CN
RF95
RF38
Dimensions
pages 4-16 and 17
Wiring diagrams
page 4-20
4-15
DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS - EMPTY ENCLOSURES
M0
M1
44
(1.73)
140.4
(5.53)
133.3
(5.25)
119.5
(4.70)
88
(3.46)
4.5
(0.18)
44
(1.73)
155.4
(6.12)
148.3
(5.84)
134.5
(5.29)
88
(3.46)
4.5
(0.18)
202
(7.95)
193
(7.60)
184
(7.24)
175
(6.89)
19.4
(0.76)
49
(1.93)
19.4
(0.76)
49
(1.93)
PG13.5 / M20 knockouts

on top and bottom
PG13.5 / M20 knockouts
on top and bottom
M24N
M2
162.3 (6.39)
169.4 (6.70)
148.5 (5.85)
110 (4.33)
55 (2.16)
175 (6.89)
98.5 (3.88)
210 (8.27)
225 (8.86)
234 (9.21)
4.5 (0.18)
52 (2.05)
Drilling for surface fixing
60 (2.36)
22.8
(0.90)
28
(1.10)
153.5 (6.04)
PG16 / M25
PG29 / M32
knockouts on top
and bottom
184 (7.24)
PG13.5 / M20
PG16/M25
knockouts on top and bottom
4.5 (0.18)
4-16
M25
165 (6.50)
158,5 (6.24)
175 (6.89)
4.5 (0.18)
153.5 (6.04)
210 8.27)
184 (7.24)
148,5 (5.85)
28
(1.10)
52 (2.05)
148,5 (5.85)
PG16 / M25
PG29 / M32
knockouts on top
and bottom
M3

190.9 (7.51)
6.2 (0.24)
178 (7.01)
183.8 (7.24)
13
(0.51)
170 (6.69)
280 (11.02)
238 (9.37)
220 (8.66)

BGR... with external interlock
56
(2.20)
34.9
(1.37)
9.7
(0.38)
8.5
(0.33)
8.5
(0.33)
8.5
(0.33)
50
(1.97)
56
(2.20)
34.9
(1.37)
90
(3.54)
90
(3.54)
83
(3.27)
1.4
(0.05)
53
(2.09)
58
(2.28)
4.4
(0.17)
50
(1.97)
4.4
(0.17)
8.5
(0.33)
BFA...42 with external interlock
BGTP... with rear PCB solder pins and internal interlock

88
(3.46)
9.7
(0.38)
8.5
(0.33)
8.5
(0.33)
71
(2.79)
9.7
(0.38)
88
(3.46)
4.4
(0.17)
(0 4.2
.16
)
8.5
0.33)
8.5
(0.33)
8.5
(0.33)
4.4
(0.17)
58
(2.28)
58
(2.28)
50
(1.97)
6
(0.24)
(0 4
.16
)
BGT... with internal interlock
(0 4
.16
)
88
(3.46)
4.4
4.4
(0.17)
(0.17)
56
(2.20)
5.6
(0.22)
Recommended PCB drillings 1.7-2mm (0.07-0.08).
35
(1.38)
4-17
BGC09 T4... with internal interlock
(0 4
.16
)
88
(3.46)
4.4
(0.17)
56
(2.20)
34.9
(1.37)
8.5
(0.33)
9.7
(0.38)
8.5
(0.33)
8.5
(0.33)
STAR-DELTA STARTERS OPEN FRAME

BFA... 70... on 35mm DIN rail, without thermal overload relay
197.5
(7.77)
152.5
(6.00)
11
(0.43)
STARTER TYPE
90
(3.54)
10
(0.39)
DYF... on mounting plate, with thermal overload relay

250
(9.84)
16.1
(0.63)
141
(5.55)
15 (0.59)
49.4
(1.94)
158
(6.22)
141
(5.55)
15 (0.59)
NYF... on mounting plate, with thermal overload relay

A
50
(1.97)
58
(2.28)
4.4
(0.17)
STARTER TYPE
4-18
NYF115
340 (13.38)
870 (34.25)
195 (7.68)
NYF145
340 (13.38)
870 (34.25)
195 (7.68)
NYF180
340 (13.38)
870 (34.25)
195 (7.68)
NYF250
440 (17.32) 1000 (39.37)
235 (9.25)
NYF310
440 (17.32) 1000 (39.37)
235 (9.25)
NYF400
440 (17.32) 1000 (39.37)
235 (9.25)
BFA009 70
130.5 (5.14) 109.5 (4.31)
BFA012 70
130.5 (5.14) 109.5 (4.31)
BFA018 70
130.5 (5.14) 109.5 (4.31)
BFA025 70
130.5 (5.14) 109.5 (4.31)
BFA026 70
135 (5.14)
119 (4.68)
BFA032 70
135 (5.14)
119 (4.68)
BFA038 70
135 (5.14)
119 (4.68)
STAR-DELTA STARTERS IN ENCLOSURE - EMPTY ENCLOSURE FOR STAR-DELTA STARTERS
M3P...70 - M3 PA70
280
(11.02)
190.9
(7.51)
183.8
(7.24)
170
(6.69)
13
(0.51)
220
(8.66)
185
(7.28)
146
(5.75)
205
(8.07)
244
(9.61)
4-19
Wiring diagrams
DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS IN ENCLOSURE
M...P
M...R
LINE
LINE
DIAGRAM 2
Connect the eventual two-wire
control (e.g. automatism) between
terminal .3 of the contactor and
terminal 96 of the thermal overload
relay.
LINE
A1
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
13 (53)
A1
14 (54)
A2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
13 (53)
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
IMPORTANT
-- Remove jumpers 5 and 6 and
connect the auxiliary line to
terminals A1 and .3 for a control
circuit with a voltage value
different than the supply.
-- Remove jumper 5 and connect
the neutral to terminal A1 for a
control circuit between phase
and neutral.
-- SINGLE-PHASE SUPPLY
The main circuit must be
configured according to Diagram
3 in the case of a single-phase
line or motor.
-- FUSES
A set of three fuses must be
connected upstream of the
starter in the event no
appropriate protection is
included in the system.
I
A2
14 (54)
1
4
97
95
R
95
97
96
98
R
98
96
2
I
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
LOAD
LOAD
Diagram 1 - Incorporated button control
Diagram 2 - External button control
REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLY

BGR...
A1
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
21
A1
22
A2
KM1
A2
LOAD
Diagram 3 - Power connection
for 1-phase motors
BGT...
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
A1
21
KM2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
13
13
14
14
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
KM2
KM1
22
A2
BFA...42
A1
L2
3
L3
5
21
A1
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
21
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
22
A2
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
L4
7
L1
1
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
L2
3
L3
5
L4
7
22
4-20
A1
KM2
KM1
A2
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
8
T4
2
T1
A1
21
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
21
KM1
KM2
CHANGEOVER CONTACTOR ASSEMBLY

BGC09...
A1
A2
BGTP09...
L1
1
KM1
A2
A1
4
T2
6
T3
8
T4
A2
A2
A1
KM2
22
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
22
A2
Wiring diagrams
STAR-DELTA STARTERS, OPEN FRAME AND ENCLOSED
BFA009...039 - M3P009...038 70
LINE
...V - ...Hz
L1
L2
L3
KM2
KM3
KM1
FR1
U2
V2
W2
U1
M
3~
U2
V2
W2
BFA009 70... BFA025 70

M3P009 70...M3P025 70
V1
W1
U1
M
3~
V1
W1
BFA26 70 - BFA038 70
M3P026 70...M3P038 70
21
21
S1
S1
22
13
S2
14
22
13
53
KM2
54
S2
14
53
KM2
54
1
17
KT1
(TM ST)
96
96
95
FR1 KT1 A1
(TM ST)
95
A2
2
17
18
22
KM3
21
63
13
63
13
KM2
64
KM1
14
KM2
64
KM1
14
17
KT1
(TM ST)
28
4
A1
KM1
A2
62
KM1
61
96
96
A1
KM3
A2
A1
KM2
A2
95
FR1 KT1 A1
(TM ST)
95
A2
2
17
18
62
KM3
61
28
4
3
A1
KM1
A2
5
A1
KM3
A2
A1
KM2
A2
62
KM1
61
4-21
Wiring diagrams
STAR-DELTA STARTERS, OPEN FRAME
DYF50... DYF95
LINE
...V - ...Hz
L1
L2
L3
KM2
KM3
2
FR1
U2
V2
W2
U1
M
3~
V1
W1
U2
V2
W2
U1
M
3~
V1
W1
95
95
FR1
96
96
21
S1
22
13
S2
14
53
KM2
54
17
KT1
(TM ST)
KT1 A1
(TM ST)
A2
4-22
17
18
28
62
KM3
61
62
KM1
61
A1
KM1
A2
KM1
A1
KM3
A2
63
53
KM2
64
KM1
54
A1
KM2
A2
Wiring diagrams
STAR-DELTA STARTERS, OPEN FRAME
NYF...
KM1
4
KM3
KM2
L1
L2
L3
LINE
...V - ...Hz
FR1
U2
V2
W2
U1
M
3~
V1
W1
U2
V2
W2
U1
M
3~
V1
W1
95
95
FR1
96
96
21
S1
22
13
S2
14
33
KM2
34
17
KT1
(TM ST)
KT1 A1
(TM ST)
A2
17
18
28
62
KM3
61
62
KM1
61
A1
KM1
A2
A1
KM3
A2
13
53
KM2
14
KM1
54
A1
KM2
A2
4-23
Page 5-3
Page 5-2
ADXC
Two phase control
IEC rated starter current Ie 12 to 45A
IEC rated motor power 5.5-22kW at 400VAC and
9-37kW at 600VAC
UL/CSA ratings 3 to 25HP at 400VAC and
10 to 40HP at 600VAC
Built-in bypass relay
Total protection against over temperature and
wrong phase sequence
Initial voltage, ramp up and ramp down time
adjustable on front
LED indication for starter status
DIN rail and mount only 45mm wide.
ADX...BP
Three phase control
For standard duty, IEC starting current
3.5Ie
ratings
IEC rated motor power 9.2 to 110kW at
380/415VAC
Reduced voltage soft starter with torque
control and built-in bypass contactor
Maximum starting current limitation
PC remote control supervision
Modbus-RTU and property ASCII
communication protocols
LCD backlit screen.
Page 5-3
ADX...B
Three phase control
For severe duty, IEC starting current 5Ie
ratings
IEC rated motor power 7.5 to 132kW at
380/415VAC
control and built-in bypass contactor
LCD backlit screen.
Wide input
voltage range:
208-500VAC
50/60Hz
No jumpers or dip
switches
Page 5-3
ADX
Three phase control
For severe duty, IEC starting current 5Ie
IEC rated starter current Ie 310A to1200A
ratings
IEC rated motor power 160kW to 630kW at
380/415VAC
control, predisposed for external bypass
contactor
LCD backlit screen.
Alarm and
event log
Torque
control
LCD screen and

user-friendly
keypad for control
parameters and
programming in
multilanguage
Standard
supplied RS232
and RS485
serial ports
Internal bypass
contactor up to
245A rating
Programmable
inputs and outputs
SOFT STARTERS
12A to 1200A starter ratings

Standard and severe duty types
Internal bypass contactor up to 245A
rating
Torque ramp starting
Total motor protection incorporated
Clock calendar
Digital control and adjustment
RS232 and RS485 serial ports for
remote supervision and control
Modbus-RTU and proprietary
ASCII communication protocols.
2
3
3
3
4
5
5 - 6
5 - 7
5 - 8
P ROTECTION
Dimensions .................................................................................................................
Wiring diagrams ...........................................................................................................
Technnical characteristics ...............................................................................................
5
5
5
5
5
5
CONTROL AND
ADXC type with integrated bypass relay .............................................................................................................................

ADX...BP type for standard duty with integrated bypass contactor ......................................................................................
ADX...B type for severe duty with integrated bypass contactor ............................................................................................
ADX... type for severe duty predisposed for external bypass contactor ...............................................................................
Remote keypad and accessories ........................................................................................................................................
Remote control software ...................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAG.
M OTOR
Soft starters
Soft starters
Two phase control
ADXC type
Order code
IEC rated
starter
current
Ie
Rated motor
Qty
power
per
pkg
40C
IEC UL/CSA
Wt
[A]
[kW] [HP]
[kg]
With built-in bypass relay. Three-phase 400VAC motor control.

Auxiliary supply: starter 110400VAC (L1-L2-L3 inputs); start
command 110-400VAC (A1-A2 terminals).
ADXC 012 400
12
5.5
0.500
ADXC 016 400
16
7.5
7.5
0.500
ADXC 025 400
25
11
10
0.500
ADXC 032 400
32
15
15
0.500
ADXC 037 400
37
18.5 20
0.700
ADXC 045 400
45
22
0.700
25

Auxiliary supply: starter 110400VAC (L1-L2-L3 inputs); start
command 24VAC/DC (A1-A2 terminals).
ADXC 012...
ADXC 032...
ADXC 012 400 24
12
5.5
0.500
ADXC 016 400 24
16
7.5
7.5
0.500
ADXC 025 400 24
25
11
10
0.500
ADXC 032 400 24
32
15
15
0.500
ADXC 037 400 24
37
18.5 20
0.700
ADXC 045 400 24
45
22
0.700
25

Auxiliary supply: starter 100240VAC (A1-A2 separate
1-phase); start command 100-240VAC (ST terminals).
With 2 relay outputs.
ADXC 037...
ADXC 045...
ADXC 012 600 R2
12
10
0.500
ADXC 016 600 R2
16
11
15
0.500
ADXC 025 600 R2
25
20
20
0.500
ADXC 032 600 R2
32
22
30
0.500
ADXC 037 600 R2
37
30
30
0.700
ADXC 045 600 R2
45
37
40
0.700
Current control
ADXC gradually increases the current
limit at 75% ramp-up time if the motor
speed has yet to reach rated value, to
avoid locked rotor state before time
elapsing.
For operating temperature higher than 40C, derate starter power; see
values given in the technical characteristics on page 5-8, in Rated current
In per IEC/FLA current per UL.
Starting
current
Time [s]
ts
At 75% ramp-up time setting
Typical settings
The following settings are standard ones for the
different applications; they are for indication and
After the installation, it is recommended to always
parameterise the soft starter with the motor
connected to find the best settings and then test it.
Initial voltage adjustment is the first operation
followed by the ramp-up time setting and the rampdown time is last, if any is required.
ADXC adjustments
A
B
C
5-2
Type of
application
Initial
voltage
Time setting
Ramp up Ramp down
[%]
[s]
[s]
Hydraulic lift
40
Piston compressor
40
Screw compressor
50
10
Scroll compressor
40
Low inertia fan
40
10
High inertia fan
40
15-20
Pump
40
10
10
Centrifugal blower
40
Conveyor
50
ADXC is a compact type of soft starter, 45mm wide
and easy to use, for three phase squirrel-cage induction
motors; soft starts and soft stops rated motor load
currents up to 45A.
It is based on a current limiting starting methodology to
limit the maximum starting current. ADXC reduces the
mechanical load on motor shafts, gearboxes and drive
belts.
Ramp up, ramp down and initial voltage time settings can
be independently adjusted by built-in potentiometers.
Main features are:
For three phase induction motors up to 22kW / 25HP
at 400VAC and 37kW / 40HP at 600VAC
Maximum input voltage: 400VAC 50/60Hz for ADX
400; 600VAC 50/60Hz for ADXC600
Built-in bypass relay
Wrong phase sequence and over temperature
protection
Alarm for wrong phase sequence; line voltage and/or
frequency out of limits (over and undervoltage);
overcurrent, over temperature, irregular ramp up and
current flow during bypass; motor voltage unbalance
Simple setting and installation
2 relay outputs for alarms (NC) and bypass closing
(NO) for ADXC600 R2
35mm DIN rail mounting (IEC/EN 60715)
Ideal for hydraulic lifts, conveyor belts, compressors,
pumps, hoisting devices, blowers, fans, mixers.
Number of controlled phases: 2
Input voltage L1-L2-L3:
220-400VAC -15%...+10% for ADXC400 and
ADXC400 24
220-600VAC -15%+10% for ADXC600 R2
Frequency range: 50/60Hz 10% self-configurable
Self powered for ADXC400 types
Separate single phase auxiliary power supply A1-A2:
100-240VAC -15%...+10% for ADXC600 R2
Start command:
A1-A2 24VAC/DC 10% (ADXC400 24)
A1-A2 110400VAC -15%...+10% (ADXC400)
ST
100240VAC -15%...+10% (ADXC600 R2)
Ramp up time: 1-20 seconds
Ramp down time: 0-20 seconds
Initial voltage: 0-85%
3 indication LEDs alarm (red alarm conditions with
diverse number of flashes), ramp/bypass (yellow
flashing in ramp phase / constantly on with bypass relay
connected) and supply (green constantly on with
power supply flow)
Degree of protection: IEC IP20.
(cULus File E223223) under Solid State Motor
Controllers as reduced voltage starters; EAC and CCC
pending completion at time of catalogue printing.
IEC/EN 60947-4-2, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n14.
A Initial voltage: 0-85% of the motor control power.

B Ramp up time: 1-20 seconds. Initial to maximum load voltage time.
C Ramp down time: 0-20 seconds. Maximum to no load voltage time.
Dimensions
page 5-6
Wiring diagrams
page 5-7
page 5-8
Soft starters
Three phase control
ADX type
Order code
IEC rated IEC rated

starter
motor power
current Ie (380/415V)
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[kg]
[kW]
For standard duty (starting current 3.5Ie).

With integrated bypass contactor.
Auxiliary supply: starter Us 208-240VAC;
start command 24VDC.
51 ADX 0022BP - 51 ADX 0048BP

51 ADX 0017B - 51 ADX 0045B
51 ADX 0022BP 22
9.2
7.900
51 ADX 0034BP 34
15
8.000
51 ADX 0048BP 48
22
8.300
51 ADX 0058BP 58
26
14.900
51 ADX 0068BP 68
30
14.900
51 ADX 0082BP 82
37
14.900
51 ADX 0092BP 92
45
15.700
51 ADX 0114BP 114
55
15.700
51 ADX 0126BP 126
63
28.000
51 ADX 0150BP 150
75
36.000
51 ADX 0196BP 196
92
36.000
51 ADX 0231BP 231
110
36.000
For severe duty (starting current 5Ie).

With integrated bypass contactor.
51 ADX 0058BP - 51 ADX 0092BP

51 ADX 0060B - 51 ADX 0085B
51 ADX 0017B
17
7.5
7.900
51 ADX 0030B
30
15
8.000
51 ADX 0045B
45
22
8.300
51 ADX 0060B
60
30
14.900
51 ADX 0075B
75
37
14.900
51 ADX 0085B
85
45
14.900
51 ADX 0110B
110
55
15.700
51 ADX 0125B
125
59
15.700
51 ADX 0142B
142
75
34.000
51 ADX 0190B
190
90
37.000
51 ADX 0245B
245
132
37.000
For severe duty (starting current 5Ie).

Predisposed for external bypass contactor.
51 ADX 0310
310
160
50.000
51 ADX 0365
365
200
50.000
51 ADX 0470
470
250
90.000
51 ADX 0568
568
315
90.000
51 ADX 0640
640
355
110.000
51 ADX 0820
820
440
170.000
51 ADX 1200
1200
630
185.000
51 ADX 0114BP - 51 ADX 0126BP

51 ADX 0110B - 51 ADX 0125B
ADX is a reduced voltage soft starter with torque control
and maximum starting current limit. It is used for the
progressive starting and stopping of asynchronous threephase squirrel-cage motors.
The integrated bypass contactor ADX...BP or ADX...B
types, drastically limits dissipation, as a result,
equipment for electric panel cooling ventilation can be
eliminated and the enclosure size can be reduced as well.
CONTROL
During starting: Torque control acceleration, current limit
control and booster.
During stopping: Torque control deceleration, dynamic
braking and free-wheel.
In emergency conditions: Starting without protection
direct-on-line starting using integrated bypass contactor.
Remote control: PC supervision by connection with
RS232/RS485 converter, modem or GSM modem.
Automatic call function (Autocall) in case of alarm
conditions by sending a message to a cellular phone
(SMS-Short Message Service) and/or to a mailbox.
Property ASCII and Modbus-RTU communication
protocols.
KEYPAD OPERATIONS
Liquid-crystal backlit 2-line 16-character display
Multilanguage capability (Italian, English, French,
Spanish)
Basic, advanced and function programming menus
Keypad stop and start
Motor and mains parameter readings:
line voltage values (L-L)
phase current
active and apparent power values per phase
power factor per phase
kWh
Time sequential events log
Clock calendar with backup battery.
PARTICULAR FUNCTIONS
Digital inputs and programmable relay outputs. Analog
input (0...10V, 0...20mA or 4...20mA) for ramp
acceleration and/or deceleration, motor start and stop
control thresholds, programmable relay enable and
disable control thresholds. Analog output
(0...10V, 0...20mA or 4...20mA) for current, torque,
motor thermal status and power factor readings.
Input programming for second motor.
PROTECTION
Motor: Dual thermal protection class (one during
starting phase and the other during running) or by
PTC sensor, locked rotor, current asymmetry,
minimum torque and starting time too long
Auxiliary voltage: Voltage value too low
Power voltage: Phase failure, phase sequence and
frequency out of limits
Control inputs and analog output: Static 24VDC
short-circuit protection with automatic resetting.
Starter: Overcurrent, high temperature, SCR and
by-pass contactor malfunction.
Number of phases controlled: 3
Input voltage:
208-500VAC 10% for ADX...BP and ADX...B
208-415VAC 10% for ADX...
Mains frequency: 50-60Hz 5%
Auxiliary supply voltage: 208-240VAC 10%
Auxiliary consumption: 20VA
Rated starter current Ie:
22-231A for ADX...BP
17-245A for ADX...B
310-1200A for ADX...
Motor current: 0.5-1 Ie
Overload current:
105% Ie continuous for ADX...BP and ADX...B
115% Ie continuous for ADX...
Certifications obtained: EAC for all; CCC for ADX 0110B
and ADX 0125B types only.
Compliant with standard: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-4-2.
208-600VAC 10% on request.
Voltages on request: higher than 415V to 690V maximum.
Accessories
pages 5-4 and 5
Dimensions
pages 5-6 and 7
page 5-9
5-3
Soft starters
Remote keypad and accessories for ADX... types
Remote keypad
for ADX... types
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
51 ADX TAST
Remote keypad
1
96x96mm, 2x16 backlit
LCD, 208-240VAC supply
c/w 3m/10ft long
connecting cable
0.350
51 C2
PC ADX connecting
cable, 1.8m/6ft long
0.090
51 C3
PC GSM modem
connecting cable,
1.8m/6ft long
0.210
51 C4
PC 4 PX1
converter drive
connecting cable,
1.8m/6ft long
0.147
51 C5
ADX Analog modem

connecting cable,
1.8m/6ft long
0.111
51 C6
ADX 4 PX1
converter drive
connecting cable,
1.8m/6ft long
0.102
51 C7
ADX GSM modem

FUNK-ANLAGEN
connecting cable,
1.8m/6ft long
0.101
51 C8
ADX remote keypad

connecting cable,
3m/10ft long
0.081
4 PX1
RS232/RS485 converter
drive, opto-isolated,
220-240VAC
0.600
31 PA 96X96
Protective cover (IP54)
0.077
51 ADX TAST
Accessories
for ADX... types
51C4
4PX1
Wt
[kg]
Consult Customer Service for modem details; see contact details on

inside front cover.
RS232/RS485 opto-isolated converter drive, 38,400 Baud-rate maximum,

automatic or manual TRANSMIT line supervision, 220-240VAC 10%
supply (110-120VAC available on request).
The flush-mount ADX TAST remote keypad is identical to
the one on board the soft starter except for the start and
stop controls of the motor, which are permanently
disabled. With this keypad, starter setup can be
conducted, motor readings and operating data displayed
and data and parameter transfer (ADX remote keypad)
made as well.
A backup copy of the starter data and parameter setup is
obtainable with the transfer functions. As a result quick
and easy setup operations can be done especially with
machines assembled in series.
The baud transmission rate, the contrast and backlight
can also be adjusted by this keypad.
It is supplied standard with a 3m long cable and suitable
connectors to complete the link to the ADX
RS485 port. The three terminals of the keypad supply are
removable.
For longer distances, this keypad can be connected to the
ADX RS232 port via RS232/RS485 converter.
Advantages
Flush mount
Messages in selectable language
Readings display
Parameter setup
Two-way data and parameter transfer.
Auxiliary supply voltage: 208-240VAC 10%
Power consumption: 6.9VA
Dissipation: 3.2W
Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
RS485 port: RJ44 connector
Supply: Removable 3-pole 2.5 mm2 terminal block.
Display: 2 line, 16 character backlit LCD
LED indication (3): POWER, RUN and FAULT
Keys (6) ENTER/START, RESET/STOP,
PREVIOUS, NEXT, and
Ambient conditions
Flush mount enclosure
Degree of protection on front: IP41; IP54 with
protective cover.
Compliant to standards: IEC/EN 61000-6-1 and
IEC/EN 61000-6-3 for 4 PX1 types.
5-4
Dimensions
page 5-7
Soft starters
Remote control software
Remote control software
for ADX... types
51 ADX SW
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
51 ADX SW
PC-ADX remote control 1

software with proprietary
ASCII and Modbus RTU
protocols and a set of
connecting cables 51 C2,
51 C3, 51 C5, 51 C7 for
communications via
RS232 port, analog
or GSM modem
[kg]
0.550
The remote control software consents to the PC supervision

of all ADX soft starter functions, including: parameter setup,
real-time readout display, graphics of monitored parameter
data during operation and starter events log display, each
with time and date entry.
The PC-ADX connection is made by cable via the RS232 port,
RS232/RS485 converter, analog or GSM modem.
The RS232 port is not suitable for permanent connections.
The connection via modem permits the ADX starter to advise
alarm conditions, that is an automatic link to the remote PC.
GSM modem represents the ultimate solution for unmanned
applications or where there are no telephone lines.
Interesting communication features are available with this
type of modem, such as:
SMS (Short Message Service): At alarm conditions, the
ADX can send its ID and alarm code, with time and date
entry. The advantage is the possibility of reaching service
people, without delay, wherever they are located.
Email (via Internet): a message with the same structure as
mentioned above can be transmitted to a specified
mailbox. The advantages of this type of message with
respect to the SMS are that any communication, received
through Internet mail server, is permanent and a vast
number of these can be received and reviewed at any
time.
Display of all the monitored data by the ADX starter
Virtual ADX keypad with access to all functions
Parameter adjustment, only accessible with password,
saving on disc and subsequent reloading on ADX
starter
Display of starter events log showing time and date
entry
Graphic display of monitored data during operation
Connection through RS232/RS485 converter or
modem
GSM-modem management with SMS or e-mail
transmission
AUTOCALL function for automatic PC call
Program configuration in 4 languages (Italian, English,
Spanish and French)
Easy installation and setup.
Advantages
GSM network management for inaccessible
applications where there are no telephone lines
Call management during alarm conditions for SMS or
email transmission
No limit for remote control distance
Possibility of remote motor starting
Reduction of service time
Reduction of maintenance and downtime.
Minimum hardware requirements of the personal
computer:
Windows 95/98 operating system
Minimum Pentium 100MHz or processor
Minimum 16MB of free RAM
About 4MB of free hard disk memory
Graphic card having at least 800x600 resolution
One free serial interface port
CD-ROM drive.
Example of main window frame using 51 ADX SW remote control software
5-5
Soft starters
Soft Starters
ADXC012...ADXC032...
ADXC037...ADXC045...
36
(1.42)
153.8 (6.05)
45 (1.77)
5.2 (0.20)
109.8 (4.32)
45 (1.77)
5.2 (0.20)
4.8 (0.19)
F1
ALARM
t
0
RAMP / BYPASS
20s
35mm
DIN rail
IEC/EN
60715
SUPPLY
12
F2
10
11/21
24
F1
F2
6.46 (0.25)
20s
t
20s
ST
2 x M5
106 (4.17)
E
B
TYPE
ADX 0022BP
ADX 0034BP
ADX 0048BP
ADX 0058BP
ADX 0068BP
ADX 0082BP
ADX 0092BP
ADX 0114BP
ADX 0126BP
ADX 0017B
ADX 0030B
ADX 0045B
ADX 0060B
ADX 0075B
ADX 0085B
ADX 0110B
ADX 0125B
A
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
157 (6.18)
B
372 (14.64)
372 (14.64)
372 (14.64)
534 (21.02)
534 (21.02)
534 (21.02)
534 (21.02)
584 (22.99)
584 (22.99)
372 (14.64)
372 (14.64)
372 (14.64)
534 (21.02)
534 (21.02)
534 (21.02)
584 (22.99)
584 (22.99)
C
223 (8.78)
223 (8.78)
223 (8.78)
250 (9.84)
250 (9.84)
250 (9.84)
250 (9.84)
250 (9.84)
250 (9.84)
223 (8.78)
223 (8.78)
223 (8.78)
250 (9.84)
250 (9.84)
250 (9.84)
250 (9.84)
250 (9.84)
D
131 (5.16)
131 (5.16)
131 (5.16)
132 (5.20)
132 (5.20)
132 (5.20)
132 (5.20)
132 (5.20)
132 (5.20)
131 (5.16)
131 (5.16)
131 (5.16)
132 (5.20)
132 (5.20)
132 (5.20)
132 (5.20)
132 (5.20)
E
357 (14.05)
357 (14.05)
357 (14.05)
517 (20.35)
517 (20.35)
517 (20.35)
517 (20.35)
567 (22.32)
567 (22.32)
357 (14.05)
357 (14.05)
357 (14.05)
517 (20.35)
517 (20.35)
517 (20.35)
567 (22.32)
567 (22.32)
ADX 0150BP - ADX 0231BP

ADX 0142B - ADX 0245B
A
E
B
TYPE
ADX 0150BP
ADX 0196BP
ADX 0231BP
ADX 0142B
ADX 0190B
ADX 0245B
5-6
A
273 (10.75)
273 (10.75)
273 (10.75)
273 (10.75)
273 (10.75)
273 (10.75)
B
600 (23.62)
680 (26.77)
680 (26.77)
600 (23.62)
680 (26.77)
680 (26.77)
C
285 (11.22)
310 (12.20)
310 (12.20)
285 (11.22)
310 (12.20)
310 (12.20)
D
230 (9.05)
230 (9.05)
230 (9.05)
230 (9.05)
230 (9.05)
230 (9.05)
2 x M5
150 (5.90)
ADX 0022BP - ADX 0126BP

ADX 0017B - ADX 0125B
A
123 (4.84)
t
0
SUPPLY
10
105 (4.13)
ALARM
RAMP / BYPASS
85%
125 (4.92)
10
60
132 (5.20)
t
20s
115 (4.53)
10
30
35mm
DIN rail
IEC/EN
60715
U
85%
121 (4.76)
ADXC
60
30
105 (4.13)
125 (4.92)
ADXC
E
640 (25.20)
640 (25.20)
640 (25.20)
560 (25.20)
640 (25.20)
640 (25.20)
Soft starters
Soft Starters
ADX 0310 - ADX 1200
A
TYPE
A
B
C
D
ADX 0310
640 (25.20) 600 (23.62) 380 (14.96) 620 (24.41)
ADX 0365
640 (25.20) 600 (23.62) 380 (14.96) 620 (24.41)
ADX 0470
790 (31.10) 650 (25.59) 430 (16.93) 770 (30.31)
ADX 0568
790 (31.10) 650 (25.59) 430 (16.93) 770 (30.31)
ADX 0640
790 (31.10) 650 (25.59) 430 (16.93) 770 (30.31)
ADX 0820
910 (35.83) 950 (37.40) 442 (17.40) 830 (32.68)
ADX 1200
910 (35.83) 950 (37.40) 442 (17.40) 830 (32.68)
Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
E
400 (15.75)
400 (15.75)
450 (17.72)
450 (17.72)
450 (17.72)
920 (36.22)
920 (36.22)
Remote keypad
ADX TAST
Cutout
31
(1.22)
92
(3.62)
92
(3.62)
9
(0.35)
96
(3.78)
63
(2.48)
PA96X96
10
(0.39)
90
(3.54)
96
(3.78)
F
100 (3.94)
100 (3.94)
100 (3.94)
100 (3.94)
100 (3.94)
Wiring diagrams
ADXC...400
ADXC...400 24
ADXC...600 R2
5-7
Soft starters
TYPE
ADXC012
ADXC016
ADXC025
ADXC032
With built-in bypass relay

Motor
Type
Asynchronous three phase
Power (40C) at 220240VAC
ADXC045
3kW / 3HP
4kW / 5HP
5.5kW / 7.5HP
9kW / 10HP
9kW /10HP
at 380415VAC
5.5kW / 5HP
7.5kW / 7.5HP
11kW / 10HP
15kW / 15HP
18.5kW /20HP
22kW / 25HP
at 440480VAC
5.5kW 7.5HP
9kW / 10HP
11kW / 15HP
18.5kW / 20HP
22kW / 25HP
22kW / 30HP
at 550600VAC
9kW / 10HP
11kW /15HP
20kW / 20HP
22kW / 30HP
30kW / 30HP
37kW / 40HP
Supply voltage Input voltage Ue (L1-L2-L3)
ADXC037
With built-in bypass relay
11kW / 15HP
220400VAC -15+10% (ADXC400); 220600VAC -15+10% (ADXC600R2)
Start command Uc
A1-A2: 24VAC/DC 10% (ADXC40024);

A1-A2: 110400VAC -15+10% (ADXC400);
ST: 100240VAC -15+10% (ADXC600R2)
Auxiliary power Us
Self powered for ADXC400; A1-A2: 100240VAC -15%...+10% separate single phase for ADXC600R2
Frequency
50/60Hz 10% self-configurable
Undervoltage recovery
174VAC (for all)
Overvoltage recovery
466VAC (ADXC400); 700VAC (ADXC600R2)
Control input current
0.41mA (ADXC40024); 0.55mA (ADXC400); 0,43mA (ADXC600R2)
Starting / stopping method
Voltage control
Number of controlled phases
Number of starts/hour at 40C
20
(Overload cycle: AC53B: 3-5:175)
Minimum load current

Rated current In
according to IEC test results)
FLA current
(based on UL test results)
at 40C IEC
10
(Overload cycle: AC53B: 4-6: 354)
10
(Overload cycle:
AC53B: 3.5-5: 335)
1A
1A
5A
5A
5A
5A
12A
16A
25A
32A
37A
45A
at 50C IEC
11A
15A
23A
28A
34A
40A
at 60C IEC
10A
13,5A
21A
24A
31A
34A
41A
at 40C UL
12A
17A
25A
32A
32A
at 50C UL
11A
15A
23A
28A
at 60C UL
10A
14A
21A
24,3A
Max size
20A
20A
25A
35A
50A
50A
Class RK5 fuse at 400V/600VAC

UL/CSA short circuit symmetrical
Suitable for use on circuit delivering no more than 5000A rms when protected by RK5 class fuse
Motor protection
Wrong phase sequence
Cooling system
Natural
Status indication LEDs
1 red ALARM; 1 yellow RAMP/BYPASS; 1 green SUPPLY
RELAY OUTPUTS (ADXC600R2 only)

NC alarm contact (11, 12)
3A 250VAC / 3A 30VDC
NO bypass contact (21, 24)
3A 250VAC / 3A 30VDC
INPUT POWER CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS (L1, L2, L3, T1, T2, T3)
Number and type of terminals
Conductor cross section (minmax)
6 fixed M4 screw
2.510mm (AWG 2x102x14)
Tightening torque /Tool
2.5Nm (22lbin) / Pozidriv bit 2
Cable stripping length
8mm / 0.31
AUXILIARY SUPPLY CONNECTIONS (A1, A2)

Number and type of terminals
Tightening torque / Tool
9 fixed M3 screw
0.51.5mm (AWG 1018)
0.65Nm (5.3lbin) / Pozidriv bit 0
6mm / 0.24
AUXILIARY CONNNECTIONS (11, 12, 21, 24, ST, F1, F2)

Type of terminals
Tightening torque / Tool
M3 screw
0.051.5mm (with cable terminal) (AWG 1412)
0.45Nm (4lbin) / Pozidriv bit 0
6mm / 0.24
INSULATION
IEC Power frequency withstand voltage
630VAC (ADX400); 690VAC (ADXC600R2)

2.5kV
2kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
-20C+40C with no derating; >40C+60C with derating (see IEC/UL rated current values given above)
-40C+80C
<95% non condensing at 40C
Maximum pollution degree
Installation category
III
Maximum altitude
1000m
HOUSING
Mounting
IEC degree of protection
Valid for ADXC...600R2 types.
5-8
Screw fixing on mounting plate or on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)

IP20
Soft starters
TYPE
Motor
ADX...BP - ADX...B
(with integrated by-pass
contactor)
Type
Power
Supply voltage
ADX...
(prearranged for external
by-pass contactor)
9.2-110kW (ADX...BP)
7.5-132kW (ADX...B)
160-630kW
Rated current
22-231 (ADX...BP)
17-245A (ADX...B)
310-1200A
Power circuit
208 - 500VAC 10% standard

(208-600VAC 10% on request)
208 - 415VAC 10% standard

Other voltages up to 690VAC
maximum on request)
208 - 240VAC 10%
208 - 240VAC 10%
Rated supply voltage

Frequency
Starting
Torque ramp with maximum current control
Stopping
Free wheel or torque ramp deceleration
Braking
Protection
DC dynamic by external contactor

Auxiliary supply
Voltage too low
Power supply
Phase failure, frequency out of limits, minimum and maximum

voltage and phase sequence, 24VDC static short circuit
Motor
Overload at starting (trip class 2, 10A, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35
and 40), overload during running (trip class 2, 10A, 10, 15, 20
25 and 30), locked rotor, current asymmetry, minimum torque
and maximum starting time
Starter
Overcurrent and high temperature
Analog inputs and outputs

Functions
Clock calendar (RTC)

Event log
Multilanguage capability
Setup configuration
Display and LED indicators
LCD, 2 line x 16 character, backlight, POWER, RUN, FAULT

ENTER/START, RESET/STOP, PREVIOUS, NEXT, and
Readings display
Voltage, current, power factor (cos), torque,

power (kVA, kW, kvar) and energy usage
Current and torque
Display
Operating status, events, alarms, event log, data
Voltage
24VDC (no need for external feeder)

2 for starting and stopping/reset
Multifunction input
(digital functions)
Free-wheel stopping, external alarm, motor preheat,

on board control, alarm inhibition, thermal protection
manual reset, cascade starting and keypad lock
Multifunction input
(analog functions)
Motor protection via PTC probes, acceleration and/or

deceleration ramp via analog input, analog input thresholds for
motor starting and stopping, analog input thresholds for
programmable relay enable and disable, PT100 input thresholds
for motor starting and stopping and PT100 input thresholds for
programmable relay enable and disable
Voltage and capacity

Fixed functions
250VAC 5A (AC1)
1 with 1 NO + 1NC (2 SPST) contacts for overall alarm
Programmable functions
Format configuration
Associated source
Communications interface
Italian / English / Spanish / French
Adjustment menus: basic, advanced, functions, clock and controls
Fixed functions
Analog output
Hour counter, one each for energy usage, number of

startings, motor running and maintenance expiry
Setup parameters
Graphic display
Relay outputs
With back-up battery
By incorporated or remote keypad or PC

Membrane keys
Control inputs
24VDC static short circuit

20 event registrations in date and time sequential order
Operating data mermory
Keyboard
3 each with 1 NO (SPST) contact for running motor, motor starting,

braking, current tripping threshold, maintenance expiry, etc.
0-20mA, 4-20mA or 0-10V
Current, torque, motor thermal status and power factor
RS232 port
Setup and remote control
RS485 port
Used for remote keypad only

Cooling system
50 or 60Hz 5% self-configurable
IP00
Natural
Types ADX0022BP-48BP and ADX0017B-45B
Forced
Types ADX0058BP-231BP and ADX0060B-245B
All types
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Storage temperature
Maximum altitude
Operating position
-10...+45C (higher up to maximum 55C with derating)

-30...+70C
1000m (higher up with derating)
3
Vertical 15
IEC IP20 for ADX0022BP to ADX0126BP and ADX0017B to ADX0125B only.
5-9
Page 6-4
Page 6-2
VE1 AND VFNC3 TYPES
Single-phase 200-240VAC supply
Three-phase motor power, 0.2 to 2.2kW /
0.25 to 3HP ratings at 230VAC
Compliant with IEC/EN 61800-3 standards,
first environment, without external suppressors
Optional three-phase motor inductances for VFN3.
VFS15 TYPE
Three-phase 380-500VAC supply
Three-phase motor power, 0.4 to 15kW /
0.5 to 20HP ratings at 400VAC
first environment cat C2 or second
environment cat. C3, without external
suppressors
Integrated dynamic braking circuit
Optional three-phase motor inductances
Optional braking resistors.
Description
Page 6-5
VFPS1 TYPE
Three-phase 380-480VAC supply
Three-phase motor power 18.5 to 630kW /
25 to 1000HP ratings at 400VAC
first environment cat. C2 or second
environment cat. C3, without external
suppressors
Integrated dynamic braking circuit up to
220kW
Optional three-phase motor inductances
Optional braking resistors.
VE1
VFNC3
VFS15
VFPS1
1-phase
1-phase
3-phase
3-phase
Method of control
Constant torque V/f
Sensorless vector
Automatic torque boost
Variable torque (for pump and fan)
Energy saving
Vector with encoder feedback
Maximum output frequency

Overload
Serial communications RS485
650Hz
400Hz
500Hz
500Hz
150% for 60s
150% for 60s
150% for 60s
120% for 60s
n 1
n 1
n 1
n 2
Modbus-RTU,
Modbus-ASCII
Modbus-RTU,
Toshiba
Modbus-RTU,
PROFIBUS, Toshiba
Modbus-RTU,
PROFIBUS, Toshiba
Digital inputs (inputs marked with can be configured as analog or digital)
4+1
6+2
6+1
Digital outputs
Analog inputs (inputs marked with can be configured as analog or digital)
2+1
2+1
Protocols
Analog outputs
Sequencer (frequency/time cycles)
Onboard potentiometer
Auto-tuning
PID adjustment
SLEEP function
WAKE-UP function
FIRE function
Frequency potentiometer
3-wire motor running
DC braking
Built-in braking circuit
Preset speed frequency
15
15
15
Pump and fan functions
Auto-speed adjustment
Motor PTC thermistor input
Safety stop per EN ISO 13849-1 cat. 3
AC MOTOR DRIVES
Versions for single-phase up to

2.2kW / 3HP and three-phase up to
630kW / 1000HP
Special function for pump and fan
control using PID algorithm
Active earth leakage protection
EMC suppressor built-in all
versions
Selectable motor control mode:
V/f, vector, energy saving
Selectable digital and analog input
and output functions
IEC IP55 version available on
request
HVAC version, compliant with
IEC/EN 61000-3-12 standards,
available on request.
Motor drives
VE1 single-phase type .......................................................................................................................................................
VFNC3 single-phase type ...................................................................................................................................................
VFS15 three-phase type .....................................................................................................................................................
VFPS1 three-phase type ....................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
6
6
6
6
2
3
4
5
Dimensions .................................................................................................................
6 - 8
AND
6 - 6
6 - 6
6 - 7
M OTOR C ONTROL
Three-phase inductances ...................................................................................................................................................

Braking resistors ...............................................................................................................................................................
Other accessories ..............................................................................................................................................................
P ROTECTION
Accessories
AC motor drives
Single phase
VE1 type
Order code
Output 3-phase
Qty
current motor power per
at 230V
pkg
Weight
[A]
[kg]
[kW]
[HP]
VE1 is a very compact motor drive with high
performance, V/f and boost torque control along with
advanced features such as PID and sequential control. It
is versatile, easy to install and program and can be used
in numerous applications. It has a digital display to
simplify parameterising which can also be done remotely
using the RS485 port. Motor speed can be adjusted with
the front potentiometer or by using one of the preset V/f
curves, each provided with dedicated acceleration and
deceleration ramps.
It can be used in general applications such as automatic
door controls, on conveyor belts, assembly, packaging
and packing machinery, or for pump and fan control.
Single-phase supply 200-240VAC 50/60Hz.

Three-phase motor output 240VAC max.
Built-in EMC suppressor (for 1 environment cat. C2).
VE1 02 A240
1.8
0.2
0.25
VE1 04 A240
2.6
0.4
0.5
1.200
VE1 07 A240
4.3
0.75
1.200
VE1 15 A240
7.5
1.5
1.800
VE1 22 A240
10.5
2.2
1.800
1.200
SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS

Reference signals for speed adjustment are obtained by:
Front potentiometer
Voltage signals: 0-10V
Current signals: 4-20mA
8 preset speeds
RS485 serial signals.
VE1...
VE1...
V/f CURVE PROGRAMMING

VE1 can handle 3 V/f preset curves and one
programmed by the user.
3 V/f preset curves
I General use
(V)%
100
B=10%, C=8%
Conveyor belts and
assembly machinery
B
C
1 2.5
(3.0)
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
5 digital multifunction inputs
PNP 12VDC connection; 24VDC on request.
Sequencer
The user can program frequency-time cycles made up
of a maximum of 8 steps, each characterised by motor
speed, rotation direction and step duration.
The sequence cycle can be carried out in diverse
modes:
One single cycle with final motor stopping
One single cycle with final motor running at last
speed set
Repeat cycles with no pause.
The sequence cycle can be stopped at any moment.
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
1 programmable relay
1 analog 0-10V.
PROTECTION
Overload
Overvoltage
Minimum voltage
Output short circuit
Earth/ground leakage dispersion
Over-temperature
Restart after momentary power loss, with
programmable number of attempts.
Hz
50 650 Hz
(60)
F3
F2
II High initial torque

F1
(V)%
100
B=15%, C=10.5%
Hoisting/lifting, grinders/
mills and agitators
B
C
1 2.5
(3.0)
50 650 Hz
(60)
III Variable curve

(V)%
B=25%, C=7.7%
100
Pumps and fans

B
C
1
2.5
(3.0)
50 650 Hz
(60)
BOOST
Torque boost can be applied on all preset curves with
up to 10%
Voltage to overcome very high inertia load conditions.
t1
t2
t3
t4
-F4
PID control
In some applications, such as pumps or fans, the
output frequency of the drive is defined by the target to
keep pressure or flow constant. Typically, by using the
analog input, feedback is monitored and, with the PID
offset control, the motor drive sets motor speed to
obtain the target set-point.
VE1 PID control also includes the following functions:
Sleep: When the PID output frequency is lower than
a programmed limit, that is the motor speed is close
to the allowable minimum when propulsion is not
needed, the motor drive completely stops the motor
for energy saving.
Wake-up: During sleep phase, when the PID output
frequency is higher than the programmed limit, the
motor drive picks up motor control again at a
suitable speed to reach the target set-point without
a manual starting.
Input voltage: 200-240VAC single phase
Output voltage: 0-240VAC three phase
Rated operational current: 1.8-10.5A
Output frequency: 0-650Hz
Current voltage: 150% for 60s
IEC degree of protection: IP20
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature: -10+40C (up to 50C
with forced ventilation or 20% output current
derating)
Maximum altitude: 1000m
Relative humidity: 95%.
PID calculated frequency
(V)%

(cULus File E360929) as Power Conversion Equipment.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61800-5-1,
IEC/EN 61800-3 first environment cat. C2,
IEC/EN 60721-3-3, UL 508 C, CSA C22.2 n14.
Generated frequency
100
Each function also has a programmable delay time to

avoid inopportune and repetitive start-stop motor
cycles.
01-10
B
C
Hz
2.5
(3.0)
50
(60)
Hz
1 Programmable V/f curve

The user can customise a curve by defining 4 voltage /
frequency points.
Wake up
delay
delay
Sleep
(V)%
V4 (Vmax)
V3 (Vmid2)
V2 (Vmid1)
V1 (Vmin)
F1
6-2
F2
F3
F4
Hz
650.00
Accessories
page 6-6 and 7
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
PID adjustment with sleep and wake-up functions
Sequencer (work cycles)
Motor control: V/f constant torque, variable
torque, programmable motor start and stop curves
(1 programmable by user)
Hour counter: Motor running hours and power supply
on hours.
Dimensions
page 6-8
AC motor drives
Single phase
VFNC3 type
Order code
Output 3-phase
Qty

at 230V
pkg
Weight
[A]
[kg]
[kW]
[HP]
Single-phase supply 200-240VAC 50/60Hz.

VFNC3S 2002 PLW
1.4
0.2
0.25
VFNC3S 2004 PLW
2.4
0.4
0.54
0.900
1.000
VFNC3S 2007 PLW
4.2
0.75
1.300
VFNC3S 2015 PLW
7.5
1.5
2.000
VFNC3S 2022 PLW
10
2.2
2.000
Operation up to 50C without derating.
VFNC3...
VFNC3...
VFNC3 is an ultra-compact motor drive with high
performance and extremely reliable (printed circuit
surface protection per IEC/EN 60721-3-3).
Easily installed, VFNC3 is equipped with a front display
and innovative jog dial control, which simplifies the
programming and control pocesses of the drive and
motor. The on-board RS485 interface permits an overall
remote control (supervision and communication
protocols). VFNC3 can be used in simple applications
such as extractor fans, ventilators, conveyor belts,
machine tools, car washes, fitness equipment, but also in
applications of intermediate complexity, such as pumps,
waterworks.
The vector control and the possibility to enable the motor
auto-tuning warrants efficiency and high torques even
with very low operating frequencies.
Front jog dial control (potentiometer)
External potentiometer: 1-10k
Voltage signal: 0-10V
Current signal: 4-20mA
Remote keypad option
15 preset speeds via digital inputs
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
Selectable PNP or NPN I/O logic
1 digital configurable as analog input.
Side by Side
installation
Multiple units can be
installed without side
clearance for space saving.
Traditional models need

side space between
units for sufficient
cooling air circulation.
1 relay with changeover contact
1 static configurable as analog 0-10V/4-20mA.
PROTECTION
Overcurrent and overvoltage
Input phase loss
Output phase loss
Motor drive overload
Motor overload
Output short circuit
Motor stall.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
PID function for pump and fan application
Dual set of independent parameters and ramps for two
different motor controls
Automatic restarting and instantaneous speed tuning
15 viewable frequency values
Start-up DC injection
DC injection braking
Motor control: constant torque V/f, sensorless vector,
variable torque.
Input voltage: 200-240VAC single-phase
Output voltage: input voltage
Rated operational current: 1.4-10A
Output frequency: 0.1-400Hz
Frequency modulation: 2-16kHz
Current overload: 150% for 60s; 200% for 0.5s
Ambient conditions
Maximum altitude: 3000m (with derating)
Relative humidity: 5-95% (with no condensing).
(File E204788) as Power Conversion Equipment;
CSA certified for Canada (File 231252) as Motor
Controllers - Miscellaneous.
IEC/EN 61800-3 - first environment cat. C1,
IEC/EN 60721-3-3, UL508 C, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Accessories
page 6-6 and 7
Dimensions
page 6-8
6-3
AC motor drives
Three phase
VFS15 type
Order code
Output 3-phase
current motor power

at 400V
Heavy load
Qty
per
pkg
Weight
[A]
[kg]
[kW]
[HP]
Three-phase supply 380-500VAC 50/60Hz .

6
VFS15...
VFS15 4004 PLW
1.5
0.4
0.5
1.800
VFS15 4007 PLW
2.3
0.75
1.800
VFS15 4015 PLW
4.1
1.5
1.800
VFS15 4022 PLW
5.5
2.2
3.200
VFS15 4037 PLW
9.5
3.200
VFS15 4055 PLW
14.3
5.5
7.5
5.500
VFS15 4075 PLW
17
7.5
10
5.500
VFS15 4110 PLW
27.7
11
15
8.400
VFS15 4150 PLW
33
15
20
8.400
Operational chacteristics for normal load conditions

Type
Current
3-phase motor power

at 400VAC
VFS15 4004 PLW
2.1A
0.75kW
1HP
VFS15 4007 PLW
3A
1.1kW
1.5HP
VFS15 4015 PLW
5.4A
2.2kW
3HP
VFS15 4022 PLW
6.9A
3kW
4HP
VFS15 4037 PLW
11.1A
5.5kW
7.5HP
VFS15 4055 PLW
17A
7.5kW
10HP
VFS15 4075 PLW
23A
11kW
15HP
VFS15 4110 PLW
31A
15kW
20HP
VFS15 4150 PLW

38A
18.5kW
25HP
150% overload for 60 seconds.
200-240VAC three-phase version available on request; consult Customer

Service for details; see contact details on inside front cover.

120% overload for 60 seconds.
VFS15...
Side by Side
installation
Multiple units can be
installed without side
clearance for space saving.
Traditional models need

side space between
units for sufficient
cooling air circulation.
The numerous functions available together with the
constructive features consent the VFS15 speed control to
be used in a host of industrial and civil sectors, such as:
waterworks and methane piping ducts, cement, paper,
chemical and petrochemical industries.
The EASY function key allows direct switching to a
customised menu with typical programming parameters
for a dedicated application in order to quickly reach them
for eventual consultation or changes.
Front potentiometer
Voltage signal: 0-10V
Current signal: 4-20mA
Keypad on front
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
1 relay with changeover contact and 1 relay with NO
contact; 1 transistor and 1 analog configurable as
0-10VDC or 4-20mA.
PROTECTION
Input and output phase loss
Drive, motor and braking resistor overload
Drive overtemperature and excessive torque
Earth/ground fault.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
DC-Bus access for DC power supply
Capacitor pre-charge circuit
Integrated dynamic braking circuit; optional external
braking resistor
Motor control: constant torque V/f, variable torque,
sensorless vector
Automatic motor torque boost control
Logic Myfunction mode permits to combine among
each other inputs, outputs and drive states including
ON/OFF delay timing, to elaborate more complex
functions and comparators
DC injection braking
Auto-tuning
Frequency potentiometer (speed adjustment via 2
external pushbuttons)
Quick parameter search and programming
Sequential starting control for sets of motors
SLEEP function: automatic motor stopping after
continuous running at minimum frequency
Start-up DC injection
OVERRIDE function for summing analog VIA-VIB inputs.
Input voltage: 380-500VAC three-phase
Rated operational current: 1.5-38A three-phase
Output frequency: 0-500Hz
Current overload for 60s: 120% for normal load;
150% for heavy load
Low speed torque: 200% 0.3Hz
IEC degree of protection: IP20; IP54 on request
Ambient conditions
Maximum altitude: 1000m
Certifications and complience
Controllers - Miscellaneous; AS C-tick.
Compliant with standards: EN 50178, IEC/EN 61800-3 first environment cat. C2 or second environment cat. C3,
UL508 C, CSA C22.2 n 14.
6-4
Accessories
pages 6-6 and 7
Dimensions
pages 6-8 and 9
AC motor drives
Three phase
VFPS1 type
Order code
Output 3-phase
Qty Weight

at 400V
pkg
[A]
[kW]
[HP] n
[kg]
Three-phase supply 380-480VAC 50/60Hz.

VFPS1 4185 PLWP
41
18.5
25
22.200
VFPS1 4220 PLWP
48
22
30
23.700
VFPS1 4300 PLWP
66
30
40
32.500
VFPS1 4370 PLWP
79
37
50
32.800
VFPS1 4450 PLWP
94
45
60
54.000
VFPS1 4550 PLWP
116
55
75
54.000
VFPS1 4750 PLWP
160
75
100
54.000
VFPS1 4900 PCWP
179
90
125
100.000
110
150
100.000
VFPS1 4110 KPCWP 215

VFPS1...
Three-phase supply 380-440VAC 50Hz/380-480VAC 60Hz.

Three-phase motor output 440/480VAC max.
132
200
108.000
160
250
118.000
220
350
161.000
250
400
194.000
280
450
204.000
315
500
204.000
400
600
302.000
500
700
320.000
630
1000 1
462.000


Consult Customer Service for details regarding the following; see contact
details on inside front cover:
240VAC three-phase available on request except for VPS1 4110 KPCWP
type.
600VAC three-phase available on request.
Indicated ratings are for normal load; available on request for heavy load
conditions.
VFPS1...
VFPS1 is a motor drive combining the most advanced and
optimised mode for energy saving with a compact and
complete line as well as a function software dedicated to
pump and fan applications.
The on-board EMC surge suppressor and standardsupplied (up to 315kW type) DC inductance consent to
radically reduce harmonic distortions and noise
disturbances generated by the motor drive and to limit the
input current to a maximum value of 1.1 times output
current.
QUICK mode provides for a customised menu of 32
specific parameters for a single application, inhibiting
access to all the other parameters.
Voltage signal: 0 to 10V or -10 to +10V
Current signal: 4-20mA or 0-20mA
Keypad on front
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
1 relay with changeover contact
2 static usable as pulse train
2 analog configurable as 0-10VDC, 0-20mA or 4-20mA.
PROTECTION
Output short circuit and earth/ground leakage
Drive, motor and braking resistor overload
Drive overtemperature
Motor stall
Too low torque.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
DC-Bus access for DC power supply
Built-in DC reactor for reduced harmonic content at
input
DC braking board standard-supplied up to
220kW/350HP rating; optional external braking
resistors
DC injection at starting
Motor control: constant torque V/f, variable torque,
torque boost with automatic starting, sensorless
vector, vector control in closed-loop conditions
Auto-tuning
Frequency potentiometer; speed adjustment via
2 external push buttons
SLEEP function: automatic motor stopping after
continuous running at minimum frequency
FIRE control function: specified speed maintained even
in alarm conditions
Built-in PTC thermistor input.
Rated operational current: 41-1181A
Mains frequency: 50/60Hz 5%
Output frequency: 0.5-500Hz
Current overload: 120% for 60s, 135% for 2s
IEC degree of protection: IP00 for all except
VFPS1 4185 PLWP with IP20; IP55 on request
Ambient conditions:
Maximum altitude: 1000m without derating; up to
3000m with derating
Controllers - Miscellaneous; AS C-tick.
IEC/EN 61800-3 - first environment cat. C2 or second
environment cat. C3, UL508 C, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Accessories
pages 6-6 and 7
Dimensions
pages 6-9 and 10
6-5
AC motor drives
Accessories
Three-phase inductances
Order code
Ie
mH
For motor
Qty
drive rating per
pkg
IND2020
[kW]
[kg]
12
0.75...4
1.850
IND2030
25
0.6
5.5...11
2.670
IND3040
50
0.2
15...22
7.220
IND4040
100 0.15
30...45
14.410
IND4075
150 0.08
55...75
21.680
IND4090
300 0.04
90...110
27.000
IND5060
400 0.03
132...160
37.600
IND5080
600 0.02
220...250
45.000
IND7070
800 0.016 280...315
62.000
[A]
IND...
Weight
For other drive ratings, consult Customer Service; see contact details on
inside front cover.
The three-phase inductances, IND type, can be connected
to the drives type VFNC3..., VFS11... and VFPS1... in the
following ways:
On the motor drive input to reduce the harmonic
content upstream, with the subsequent reduction of
input current consumption of the drive itself.
On the motor drive output to limit peak voltages
generated by drives on the motor or in case there are
more motors connected in parallel, controlled
simultaneously by the drive itself.
The inductances can be used at the motor drive input
having single-phase power supply.
For the correct choice, select the inductance with Ie
current rating equal to or greater than the rated current of
the drive they will be used with.
Class: H
Current: 12-800A
Ambient conditions:
Operating temperature: -25...+100C.
Reference standards
Braking resistors
ROF...
ROPPE...
Order code
Power
[W]
[]
[kg]
ROF20100
200
100
0.210
ROF20150
200
150
0.220
ROF35060
350
60
0.610
ROF50035
500
35
0.773
ROF80030
800
30
1.570
ROPPE11430
1300
30
3.856
ROPPE12515
2200
15
5.200
ROPPE14008
4000
6.780
ROPPE24003
8000
11.000
Drive type
ROF20150
Capacity
Qty
per
pkg
Resistor type
VFS15 4004 PLW
VFS15 4007 PLW
ROF20100
VFS15 4015 PLW

VFS15 4022 PLW
ROF35060
VFS15 4037 PLW

VFS15 4055 PLW
ROF50035
ROF80030
VFS15 4075 PLW

VFS15 4110 PLW
VFS15 4150 PLW
ROPPE11430
ROPPE12515
VFPS1 4185 PLWP

VFPS1 4220 PLWP
VFPS1 4300 PLWP
ROPPE14008
VFPS1 4370 PLWP

VFPS1 4450 PLWP
VFPS1 4550 PLWP
VFPS1 4750 PLWP
ROPPE24003
VFPS1 4900 PLWP

VFPS1 4110 KPCWP
VFPS1 4132 KPCWP
VFPS1 4160 KPCWP
VFPS1 4220 KPCWP
6-6
VFPS1 4250 KPCWP
VFPS1 4280 KPCWP
VFPS1 4315 KPCWP
VFPS1 4400 KPCWP
VFPS1 4500 KPCWP
VFPS1 4630 KPCWP
For details and choice on braking resistors, consult Customer

Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
Dimensions
page 6-11
Weight
The braking resistors can be connected to motor drives
VFS15 and VFPS1; see the table below the order
codes.
Operational characteristics for ROF... and ROPPE...
Maximum applicable voltage: 1000V
Connection: With 250mm cable for ROF; directly on
the resistor terminal for ROPPE
Degree of protection: IP54 for R0F; IP20 for ROPPE.
Reference standards
IEC/EN 60664-1.
AC motor drives
Accessories
Others
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Weight
[kg]
0,080
Remote control panel with 1

functions: motor running,
inverse rotation, speed
adjustment and quantities
control. IP65.
16 character-2 line display.
Cable excluded
0.200
MITOSVT6ECO Remote control panel for

1
quantities retention and
control of a system (PID:
pressure, temperature, etc).
IP65.
16 character-2 line display.
Cable excluded
0.200
RJ45SH05000
Connecting cable RJ45 for 1

MITOS..., RKP002Z or
USB001Z to motor drive.
5m long
0.140
RKP002Z
Remote control panel

1
with functions: motor
running, speed adjustment,
quantities control and
parameter setting. IP20.
4 character-7 segment
display.
Cable excluded
0.280
USB001Z
Motor drive programming

module
0.260
51 PT25H101K 1kOhm potentiometer

10 turns, complete with
operating knob
0.100
51 PT35H11K
0.052
Reference standards
Compliant with standards: EN 50178, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
IEC/EN 61000-6-3 for MITOS and RKP types.
For VE1 type motor drives.

VEX C00
Connecting cable for VE1

RS485 port with PC USB
port, 1.8m long
For VFNC3-VFS15-VFPS1 type motor drives.

MITOSVT6
VEX C00
MITOS

1kOhm potentiometer
1 turn, complete with
operating knob
The VE1 programming software is standard supplied with the cable.

RJ45 cable to be purchased separately; order code RJ45SH05000.
For USB001Z module PC USB port connection, use a normal USB
cable, USB1.1/2.0 compatible, type A-B connection, maximum
recommendable length 1m only.
Ask Customer Service for the motor drive remote control software; see
contact details on the inside front cover.
Dimensions
page 6-11
6-7
AC motor drives
SINGLE PHASE MOTOR DRIVES
VE1 02 A240 - VE1 04 A240 - VE1 07 A240
VE1 15 A240 - VE1 22 A240
139.2 (5.48)
61 (2.40)
72 (2.83)
136 (3.35)
108 (4.25)
118 (4.64)
144.2 (5.68)
In a control panel when more than one VE1 is installed side by side, provide sufficient air circulation space, of at least 5cm / 2 between each, in order to ensure proper cooling effect.
VFNC3S 2002 PLW...VFNC3S 2007 PLW
VFNC3S 2015 PLW - VFNC3S 2022 PLW
72 (2.83)
60 (2.36)
105 (4.13)
93 (3.66)
5
(0.20)
143 (5.63)
118 (4.64)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
TYPE
VFNC3S 2002PL W
VFNC3S 2004PL W
VFNC3S 2007PL W
5
(0.20)
A
102 (4.01)
121 (4.76)
131 (5.16)
B
131 (5.16)
118 (4.64)
118 (4.64)
107 (4.21)
(0.20
THREE PHASE MOTOR DRIVES

VFS15 4004 PLW - VFS15 4007 PLW - VFS15 4015 PLW
5
153 (6.02)
(0.20)
7.5
(0.29)
STATUS
RUN
PRG
MON
Hz
RUN
STOP
130 (5.12)
121.5 (4.78)
EASY MODE
.5
13 (0.51)
R2
93 (3.66)
2-R2.5
7
(0.27)
6-8
126 (4.96)
160 (6.30)
170 (6.69)
157 (6.18)
140 (5.51)
14
(0.55)
2 - 5
6.5
(0.25)
VFS15 4022 PLW...VFS15 4037 PLW

(0.20)
156 (6.14)
7.5
(0.29)
142 (5.59)
141 (5.55)
131 (5.16)
121 (4.76)
122 (4.80)
147.3 (5.80)
108 (4.25)
141 (5.55)
131 (5.16)
63 (2.48)
AC motor drives
VFS15 4055 PLW - VFS15 4075 PLW
(0 11
.43
)
.5
8
(0.31)
R2
150 (5.90)
5
(0.20)
170 (6.69)
7.5
(0.29)
STATUS
RUN
PRG
STOP
210 (8.27)
RUN
EASY MODE
220 (8.66)
Hz
MON
2-R2.5
10
(0.39)
12
(0.47)
130 (5.12)
VFS15 4110 PLW - VFS15 4150 PLW

R3
Hz
RUN
310 (12.20)
RUN
PRG
MON
STOP
EASY MODE
7.5
(0.29)
20
(0.79)
295 (11.61)
STATUS
2-R3
160 (6.30)
THREE PHASE MOTOR DRIVES

VFPS1 4185 PLWP
VFPS1 4220 PLWP...VFPS1 4370 PLWP
11.5
(0.45)
9
(0.35)
10
(0.39)
190 (7.48)
7
(0.27)
180 (7.09)
9
(0.35)
(0 14
.55
)
Fig. 1
D
TYPE
VFPS1 4185 PLWP
VFPS1 4220 PLWP
VFPS1 4300 PLWP
VFPS1 4370 PLWP
Fig.
1
2
2
2
A
230 (9.05)
240 (9.45)
240 (9.45)
240 (9.45)
B
409 (16.10)
420 (16.53)
550 (21.65)
550 (21.65)
C
191 (7.52)
212 (8.35)
242 (9.53)
242 (9.53)
D
210 (8.27)
206 (8.11)
206 (8.11)
206 (8.11)
E
386 (15.20)
403 (15.87)
529 (20.83)
529 (20.83)
Fig. 2
F
16 (0.63)
6-9
AC motor drives
VFPS1 4450 PLWP...VFPS1 4750 PLWP
A
9
(0.35)
Fig. 3
VFPS1 4900 PCWP

VFPS1 4110 KPCWP...VFPS1 4630 KPCWP
A
11.5
(0.45)
Fig. 4
TYPE
VFPS1 4450 PLWP
VFPS1 4550 PLWP
VFPS1 4750 PLWP
VFPS1 4900 PCWP
VFPS1 4110 KPCWP
VFPS1 4132 KPCWP
VFPS1 4160 KPCWP
VFPS1 4220 KPCWP
VFPS1 4250 KPCWP
VFPS1 4280 KPCWP
VFPS1 4315 KPCWP
VFPS1 4400 KPCWP
VFPS1 4500 KPCWP
VFPS1 4630 KPCWP
6-10
Fig.
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
A
320 (12.60)
320 (12.60)
320 (12.60)
310 (12.20)
310 (12.20)
350 (13.78)
330 (12.99)
430 (16.93)
585 (23.03)
585 (23.03)
585 (23.03)
880 (34.64)
880 (34.64)
1108 (43.62)
B
630 (24.80)
630 (24.80)
630 (24.80)
680 (26.77)
680 (26.77)
782 (30.79)
950 (37.40)
950 (37.40)
950 (37.40)
950 (37.40)
950 (37.40)
1150 (45.27)
1150 (45.27)
1150 (45.27)
C
290 (11.42)
290 (11.42)
290 (11.42)
375 (14.76)
375 (14.76)
375 (14.76)
377 (14.84)
377 (14.84)
377 (14.84)
377 (14.84)
377 (14.84)
377 (14.84)
377 (14.84)
377 (14.84)
D
280 (11.02)
280 (11.02)
280 (11.02)
250 (9.84)
250 (9.84)
298 (11.73)
285 (11.22)
350 (13.78)
540 (21.26)
540 (21.26)
540 (21.26)
831 (32.71)
831 (32.71)
1065 (41.93)
E
605 (23.82)
605 (23.82)
605 (23.82)
650 (25.59)
650 (25.59)
758 (29.84)
920 (36.22)
920 (36.22)
920 (36.22)
920 (36.22)
920 (36.22)
1120 (44.09)
1120 (44.09)
1120 (44.09)
AC motor drives
ACCESSORIES
Three-phase inductances
IND...
F
D
E
B
Type
IND2020
115 (4.53)
80 (3.15)
125 (4.92)
78 (3.07)
55 (2.16)
5.5 (0.22)
IND2030
115 (4.53)
90 (3.54)
125 (4.92)
78 (3.07)
65(2.56)
5.5 (0.22)
IND3040
170 (6.69)
115 (4.53)
190 (7.48)
115 (4.53)
85 (3.35)
6.5 (0.25)
IND4040
240 (9.45)
135 (5.31)
230 (9.05)
146 (5.75)
80 (3.15)
8.5 (0.33)
IND4075
240 (9.45)
170 (6.69)
220 (8.66)
146 (5.75)
105 (4.13)
8.5 (0.33)
IND4090
240 (9.45)
195 (7.68)
220 (8.66)
146 (5.75)
120 (4.72)
8.5 (0.33)
IND5060
350 (13.78)
170 (6.69)
325 (12.79)
240 (9.45)
105 (4.13)
12.5 (0.49)
IND5080
350 (13.78)
190 (7.48)
325 (12.79)
240 (9.45)
125 (4.92)
12.5 (0.49)
IND7070
440 (17.32)
200 (7.87)
420 (16.53)
245 (9.64)
120 (4.72)
12.5 (0.49)

MITOS...
Braking resistors
ROF...
B
E
55 (2.16)
65 (2.56)
31
(1.22)
120 (4.72)
36
(1.42)
Cutout
56 (2.20)
107 (4.21)
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Type
ROF 20
ROF 35
ROF 50
Fig.
192 (7.56)
169 (6.65)
299 (11.77)
240 (9.45)
80 (3.15)
Fig. 3
ROF 80
30 (1.18)
80 (3.15)
80 (3.15)
180 (7.09)
140 (5.51)
180 (7.09)
254 (10)
25 (0.98)
20 (0.79)
20 (0.79)
52 (2.05)
45 (1.77)
45 (1.77)
275 (10.83)
5 (0.20)
5 (0.20)
5 (0.20)
6 (0.24)

RKP002Z
80 (3.15)
Braking resistors
ROPPE...
9.2
(0.36
16.2
(0.64)
115 (4.53)
6.5
(0.25)
ROPPE 125
ROPPE 140
ROPPE 240
386 (15.20)
506 (19.92)
626 (24.64)
626 (24.64)
107 (4.21)
107 (4.21)
107 (4.21)
197 (7.75)
260 (10.24)
260 (10.24)
260 (10.24)
260 (10.24)
80 (3.15)
80 (3.15)
80 (3.15)
160 (6.30)
366 (14.41)
486 (19.13)
606 (23.86)
606 (23.86)
35.9
(1.41)
63 (2.48)
ROPPE 114
16.4
(0.64)
Type
Cutout
10.4
(0.41)
D
B
E
A
4.6
(0.18)
98 (3.86)
6-11
Page 7-4 to 7 and 10

7-26 to 28 and 31
BUTTON ACTUATORS 22mm

Spring return flush, extended and shrouded
Push-push flush and extended
Mushroom-head
Mechanical reset
Illuminated.
Page 7-12 and 13

PILOT LIGHTS 22mm
Monoblock LED
MONOBLOCK BUZZERS 22mm
Pulse-tone.
COMMUNICATION INTERFACES 22mm
USB
RJ45.
Page 7-34
METAL POTENTIOMETER DRIVES 22mm
Graduated scale
Variable index.
Page 7-8 and 11

7-29 and 32
DOUBLE AND TRIPLE TOUCH

ACTUATORS 22mm
Double touch with or without indicator
Triple touch.
Page 7-14 to 23
7-36 to 41
ADD-ON ELEMENTS,
ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS FOR
PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
Mounting adapter
Contact elements
LED integrated elements
Lamp holders
Labelling and label holders
Bulbs.
Page 7-35
METAL JOYSTICKS 22mm
2 directions
4 directions
2 directions with mechanical interlock
4 directions with mechanical interlock
Complete with contact elements.
SELECTOR SWITCH
ACTUATORS 22mm
Knob
Lever
Key
Illuminated.
Page 7-9 and 11

7-30 and 33
Page 7-23
CONTROL STATIONS
1 to 6 way option without actuators
Complete units with 1 button.
PUSHBUTTONS
AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
Simple and snap on installation

Highly conductive contacts
Robust for severe ambient
conditions
Contact operation: double breaking
action, direct opening operation
and self cleaning.
Pushbutton actuators, spring return ................................................................................................................................

Push-push button actuators ............................................................................................................................................
Mechanical reset button, spring return ............................................................................................................................
Pushbutton actuators with symbol, spring return ...........................................................................................................
Mushroom-head pushbutton actuators ...........................................................................................................................
Double and triple-touch button actuators, spring return .................................................................................................
Selector switch actuators ...............................................................................................................................................
Illuminated button actuators, spring return ....................................................................................................................
Illuminated push-push actuators ...................................................................................................................................
Illuminated mushroom-head actuators ..........................................................................................................................
Double-touch button actuators, spring return, with indicator ........................................................................................
Illuminated selector actuators ........................................................................................................................................
Pilot light heads ..............................................................................................................................................................
Potentiometers drives .....................................................................................................................................................
Joysticks .........................................................................................................................................................................
Accessories, spare parts and labels .................................................................................................................................
Mounting adapter and contact - lamp holder - test elements ..........................................................................................
Dimensions .................................................................................................................
Wiring diagrams ...........................................................................................................
4
4
5
5
7
8
9
10
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
7 - 23
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
26
26
27
27
28
29
30
31
31
32
32
33
34
34
35
36
39
7 - 44
7 - 49
S IGNALLING
series control stations .....................................................................................

8 LM2T 22mm metal series
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
AND
Pushbutton actuators, spring return ................................................................................................................................

Push-push button actuators ............................................................................................................................................
Mechanical reset button, spring return ............................................................................................................................
Pushbutton actuators with symbol, spring return ...........................................................................................................
Mushroom-head pushbutton actuators ...........................................................................................................................
Double and triple-touch button actuators, spring return .................................................................................................
Selector switch actuators ...............................................................................................................................................
Illuminated button actuators, spring return ....................................................................................................................
Illuminated push-push button actuators .........................................................................................................................
Illuminated mushroom-head actuators ..........................................................................................................................
Double-touch button actuators, spring return, with indicator ........................................................................................
Illuminated selector actuators ..........................................................................................................................................
Pilot light heads ..............................................................................................................................................................
Monoblock LED pilot lights, steady light ........................................................................................................................
Monoblock buzzers .........................................................................................................................................................
USB-RJ45 communication interfaces ..............................................................................................................................
Accessories, spare parts and labels ................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
C ONTROL
22mm series

22mm series
QUALITY TOUCH!
10mm
LOW ACTUATOR PROFILE

The external actuator bezel has a low profile
and reduced front thickness.
7
CUSTOMISING CAPABILITY
To simplify stock management, the series includes
actuators without cap or lens and separate caps and
lenses for quick installation or replacement on spring
return and push-push types; all these are sold as
accessories.
HIGH DEGREE OF PROTECTION

The actuators have been tested to guarantee a degree of
protetection per IEC/EN IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X,
appropriate for use even in extreme ambient conditions.
QUICK AND EASY ACTUATOR

INSTALLATION
REDUCED DIMENSIONS AND

INTERAXIS
CONTACT ELEMENTS
30
(1.18)
Click!
40 (1.57)
- Actuator fixing on the mounting

surface, through a 22mm/0.87
drilled hole, is obtained using its
threaded ring, easily rotated by
hand or by socket spanner/wrench.
- The mounting adapter and the

actuators each have clearly visible
reference indications making the
snap-on fitting between the two
easy and intuitive.
Click!
40 (1.57)
30
(1.18)
22.3
(0.88)
Minimum pitch:
- 30x40mm (1.18x1.57) between
drillings for two actuators on a
mounting surface
- 30x55mm (1.18x1.97) between
drillings for two double and tripletouch actuators or when spring
clamp contacts are used.
- Miniaturised size
- High electric conductivity - 5V 1mA
installed, 3 rows of 3 elements
- Available versions: Front and base
mount with screw terminals while
front-mount only with faston and
spring-clamp terminals
- Contact operation: double breaking
action, direct (positive) action
operation and wiping effect.
HIGH-LUMINOSITY LED ELEMENTS
43mm (1.69)
- There is an anti-rotation fastener,

duly sized to avoid actuator rotation
on the mounting surface and to give
an orientation reference point for
users during panel installation and
during contact fitting on the
actuator.
- This anti-rotation fastener collapses
inside the gasket to allow fitting also
when drilled holes are round without
reference index.
- The sealing gasket for the actuator
mounting surface has a gripping
action (suction effect) offering
additional adhesion properties.
7-2
- Electrical contacts and LED elements

are snapped onto the mounting
adapter.
- The activation of the middle contacts
is standard supplied on all nonilluminated spring return and
push-push button or selector
switch actuators.
- Total depth, from the external

mounting surface to the end of
the first contact element is just
43mm (1.69).
- Miniaturised size
- Long electrical life: 100,000h
- Versions for base mounting and with
screw or spring-clamp terminals
- Overvoltage protection
- Withstand vibrations
- Protection against stray currents in
wiring
- Flickering phenomenon reduction
- Steady and flashing light versions
- Supply voltages:
12-30VAC/DC
85-140VAC
185-265VAC
- Test elements installed beside and
connected with the relative LED
element allow checking if all LED
elements of the installation are
working properly.

22mm series
ELEGANT STYLE AND ERGONOMIC DESIGN

All the series elements have an ergonomic design and, at the same time,
particular care has been given to minimum detail aesthetics.
LONG ACTUATOR MECHANICAL LIFE

High performance characteristics assure 5,000,000 cycle mechanical life for
spring-return actuators, 1,000,000 for double and triple touch units and
300,000 for emergency-stop types.
MATERIALS RESISTANT TO OILS, SOLVENTS AND

HYDROCARBONS
USAGE AT EXTREME TEMPERATURE

CONDITIONS
Operation temperature range between -25 and +70C.
UL LISTING FOR USA AND CANADA ALONG
WITH EAC AND CCC CERTIFICATIONS.
DOUBLE AND TRIPLE TOUCH

ACTUATORS
EMERGENCY STOP ACTUATORS
SELECTOR SWITCH ACTUATORS
- Knob design assures excellent grip
- IEC IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X

degree of protection
- Double touch button actuators, with
2 flush or 1 flush and 1 extended
buttons
- Triple touch button actuators with
2 flush and middle extended butons
- Versions with or without indicator.
MECHANICAL RESET BUTTONS
- Actuator structure suitable to

warrant direct opening operation
with mechanical latching for
emergency stopping per ISO 13850
and IEC/EN 60947-5-5.
- Auto-monitor contact elements are
available with functions to:
Constantly control the correct
installation (mounting adapter and
NC contact with the actuator) and
proper operation of the NC contact
Open the circuit in the case of
malfunctions (e.g. the contact
detaches from the mounting
adapter due to strong vibrations or
shock).
EXTENSIVE CHOICE OF ACCESSORIES
- Pilot light heads and monoblock

LED-integrated pilot lights (IP65).
- Monoblock buzzers (IP40).

- High visibility on front or side and
actuator inscription shows exact
switch position
- Communication interfaces (IP65)
USB and RJ45 types for Ethernet and
data transmission in both directions
with equipment.
CONTROL STATIONS
- Use of Ronis keys
- Rod adjustment directly on acutator

front (1...4mm / 0.04...0.16)

mounted.
- There is a green line around the

actuator body to spot when the
emergency stop is at rest or
activated.
- Use of Ronis keys
- Various accessories available (e.g.
yellow E-stop disks, padlockable
protection and rubber actuator
boots).
- Activation of the middle contacts is

standard supplied on 2 and 3
position selector switches.
- IEC/EN IP66, IP67 and IP69K and UL

Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X and 12K
protection degrees
- Empty pushbutton stations with 1 to
6 way option and complete control
stations with various mushroomhead stop buttons
- Quick installation and wiring ease
with the relative base-mount contact
and LED elements, snap in place on
the base
- Installation of screw and springclamp terminal contact and LED
elements also on the internal cover
surface.
7-3

22mm series
Pushbutton actuators,
spring return
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Flush (without mounting adapter). Spring return.
LPC B10...
LPC B102
Black
10
LPC B103
Green
10
0.025
0.025
LPC B104
Red
10
0.025
LPC B105
Yellow
10
0.025
LPC B106
Blue
10
0.025
LPC B108
White
10
0.025
Extended (without mounting adapter). Spring return.
LPC B20...
LPC B202
Black
10
LPC B203
Green
10
0.027
0.027
LPC B204
Red
10
0.027
LPC B205
Yellow
0.027
LPC B206
Blue
0.027
LPC B208
White
0.027
Shrouded (without mounting adapter). Spring return.
LPC B30...
Push-push button
actuators
LPC B302
Black
10
LPC B303
Green
10
0.027
0.027
LPC B304
Red
10
0.027
LPC B305
Yellow
0.027
LPC B306
Blue
0.027
LPC B308
White
0.027
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Any mounting position allowed
Ambient conditions:
Degree of protection:
Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
Materials
Polyamide.
Mechanical endurance
Operating force: <0.5kg / 1.1lb (actuator).
Mechanical life:
- Spring return actuators: 5,000,000 cycles
- Push-push actuators: 500,000 cycles.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-18.
Type: LPX AU120.
Actuators are installed through a 22mm/0.89 drilling
with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm / 1.69lbft) also
on the cover of LPZ control stations.
The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
Contact elements for spring-return button actuators
See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
Type
1NO
Flush (without mounting adapter).

Push on-push off.
LPC Q10...
10
0.025
1EM
10
0.025
1NC
10
0.025
LPX C10
Screw
LPX CF10
Faston
LPXCS10
Spring clamp
LPX C10A
Screw
LPC Q102
Black
LPC Q103
Green
LPC Q104
Red
LPC Q105
Yellow
0.025
LPC Q106
Blue
0.025
1LB
LPC Q108
White
0.025
Base mount types snap into LPZ control station base.

See example on page 7-25.
Up to 3 contacts can be fitted per control station actuator.
Extended (without mounting adapter).

Push on-push off.
LPC Q20...
Termination
Front-mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting

adapter (to purchase separately).
Up to 9 contacts can be fitted: 3 each on the left, middle
and right, one behind the other.
They can also be fitted internally on the cover surface of
LPZ control stations, up to 3 elements per actuator.
LPX C01
Screw
LPX CF01
Faston
LPX CS01
Spring clamp
LPX C01D
Screw
LPC Q202
Black
10
0.027
1NO
LPX CB10
Screw
LPC Q203
Green
10
0.027
1NC
LPX CB01
Screw
LPC Q204
Red
10
0.027
LPC Q205
Yellow
0.027
LPC Q206
Blue
0.027
LPC Q208
White
1
Use contact elements LPX C10A (EM) and LPXC01 (NC) only.
0.027
Contact elements LPX C10 (NO) and LPX C01D (LB) cannot be fitted on
these actuators.
Contact elements for push-push button actuators

See page 7-18.
Type:
LPX C10A (1EM early make, screw terminals)
LPX C01 (1NC, screw terminals)
Contacts snap onto LPX AU120 adapter and also
internally on the cover surface of LPZ control stations.
and right, one behind of the other; up to 3 elements per
control station actuator.
All these actuators are standard supplied with action plug
for middle contacts.
Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada,
(cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC.
Pending at time of catalogue printing: RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14
7-4
Add-on blocks
pages 7-18 and 22

pages 7-14 to 17
Dimensions
page 7-44

22mm series
Mechanical reset buttons,
complete unit,
spring return
LPC R1196
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Flush (5.2mm/0.2 stroke). Adjustable length 0-150mm/5.9.

Complete with shaft (without mounting adapter). Spring return.
LPC R1002
Black
10
LPC R1003
Green
10
0.038
0.038
LPC R1004
Red
10
0.038
LPC R1006
Blue
10
0.038
LPC R1196
Blue (RESET)
10
0.038
Extended (5.2mm/0.2 stroke). Adjustable length 0-150mm/5.9.

Complete with shaft (without mounting adapter). Spring return.
LPC R2004
Red
N.B. Not suitable for LPZ control stations.
Order code
Symbol
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]

LPC B1102
LPC B1104
LPC B1113
LPC B1118
LPC B1123
LPC B11...
II
LPC B1128
LPC B1132
STOP
LPC B1134
LPC B1142
LPC B1148
LPC B1152
LPC B1158
LPC B1163
START
LPC B1168
LPC B21...
LPC B1176
LPC B1178
LPC B1196
RESET
Mechanical life: 5,000,000 cycles.
0.040
With RESET caption on actuator.
spring return, with symbol
Fine rod adjustment (1-4mm/0.04-0.16) on front with
screwdriver by removing actuator cap for mechanical
reset buttons
Ambient conditions:
Black
10
0.025
Red
10
0.025
Green
10
0.025
White
10
0.025
Green
0.025
White
0.025
Black
0.025
Red
10
0.025
Black
10
0.025
White
10
0.025
Black
10
0.025
White
10
0.025
Green
10
0.025
White
0.025
Blue
0.025
White
0.025
Blue
10
0.025
LPC B1502
Black
10
0.025
LPC B1512
Black
10
0.025
Mounting adapter
See page 7-12.
Type: LPX AU120.
on the cover of LPZ control stations except for LPC R
types.
The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator;
necessary for LPC R types only when contact elements
are fitted.
Contact elements for mechanical reset buttons
See page 7-18 or 7-21.
Type
Termination
Front mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting

adapter (to purchase separately), if any contacts are
needed.
Up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 3 each on the left and
right, one behind the other.
1NO
LPX C10
Screw
LPX CF10
Faston
LPX CS10
Spring clamp
1EM
LPX C10A
Screw
1NC
LPX C01
Screw
LPX CF01
Faston
1LB
LPX CS01
Spring clamp
LPX C01D
Screw
Contact elements for spring-return button actuators

See pages 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
Type
LPC B2102

and right; one behind the other.
control stations LPZ, up to 3 elements per actuator.
LPC B2104
LPC B2132
STOP
Black
10
0.027
Red
10
0.027
Black
LPC B2134
Red
10
Arrow symbol can be used to indicate right or left.
Arrow symbol can be used to indicate up or down.
0.027
0.027
1NO
Termination
LPX C10
Screw
LPX CF10
Faston
LPX CS10
Spring clamp
1EM
LPX C10A
Screw
1NC
LPX C01
Screw
LPX CF01
Faston
1LB
LPX CS01
Spring clamp
LPX C01D
Screw
Base-mount types snap into LPZ control station base.

1NO
LPX CB10
Screw
1NC
LPX CB01
Screw
The LPC B actuators are standard supplied with action

plug for middle contacts.
Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14
Add-on blocks
pages 7-18 and 22

pages 7-14 to 17
Dimensions
page 7-44
7-5

22mm series
Order code

Symbol
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Spring return (without mounting adapter).

50
0.027
LPCB22
50
0.027
LPCB23
50
0.027
LPCB18
LPC B1253
LPCB25
50
0.027
LPCB26
50
0.027
LPCB27
50
0.027
LPCB28
50
0.027
LPCB29
50
0.027
LPCB30
ALTO
50
0.027
LPCB31
BASSO
50
0.027
LPCB32
SX
50
0.027
LPCB33
DX
50
0.027
Mounting adapter
See page 7-18.
Type: LPX AU120.
MAN
50
0.027
LPCB35
AUTO
50
0.027
Contact elements
See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
LPCB38
TRIP
50
0.027
Type
LPCB39
TEST
50
0.027
LPCB40
50
0.027
LPCB41
50
0.027
LPCB42
50
0.027
LPCB43

50
0.027
LPCB44
50
0.027
LPCB45
50
0.027
LPCB46
50
0.027
1EM
LPCB47
50
0.027
1NC
LPCB48
50
0.027
LPCB49
50
0.027
LPCB52
50
0.027
LPCB53
50
0.027
LPCB54
50
0.027
LPCB55
50
0.027
LPCB56
START
STOP
50
0.027
LPCB57
III
50
0.027
LPCB58
IV
50
0.027
LPCB59
50
0.027
LPCB60
50
0.027
LPCB61
50
0.027
LPCB62
50
0.027
LPCB63
50
0.027
LPCB64
50
0.027
LPCB65
50
0.027
LPCB66
50
0.027
LPCB67
50
0.027
LPCB68
50
0.027
LPCB69
50
0.027
Add letter L if illuminated type is required.

For the type of actuator, add: 1 for flush or 2 for extended.
Add the actuator colour: 2 black only for non-illuminated type;
3 green, 4 red, 5 yellow, 6 blue, 8 white or 7 transparent for illuminated
version.
Products available on specific request for a minimum multiple quantity of
50 pieces per type.
Consult Customer Service for assistance; see contact details on inside
front cover.
Symbol indicating dangerous voltage /IEC 60417 5036-a).
Examples of complete order codes:
LPC B2 25 8 extended non-illuminated white pushbutton with symbol
LPC BL1 68 5 flush illuminated yellow pushbutton actuator with
symbol.
Add-on blocks
pages 7-18 and 22
Materials
Polyamide.
LPCB34

7-6
Ambient conditions:

pages 7-14 to 17
Dimensions
page 7-44
1NO
1LB
Termination
LPX C10
Screw
LPX CF10
Faston
LPX CS10
Spring clamp
LPX C10A
Screw
LPX C01
Screw
LPX CF01
Faston
LPX CS01
Spring clamp
LPX C01D
Screw

1NO
LPX CB10
Screw
1NC
LPX CB01
Screw
All these actuators are standard supplied with action plug

Compliant with standards, IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n14.

22mm series
Mushroom head
pushbutton actuators
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
SPRING RETURN.
40mm/1.6 (without mounting adapter).
LPC B614...
LPC B6142
Black
10
LPC B6143
Green
10
0.033
0.033
LPC B6144
Red
10
0.033
LPC B6145
Yellow
10
0.033
LPC B6146
Blue
10
0.033
SPRING RETURN.
LPC B616...
LPC B6162
Black
10
LPC B6163
Green
10
0.038
0.038
LPC B6164
Red
10
0.038
LPC B6165
Yellow
10
0.038
LPC B6166
Blue
10
0.038
LATCH, PULL TO RELEASE

For normal stopping.
LPC B6742
Black
10
0.097
For emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant.

LPC B6744
LPC B674...
Red
10
Black
10
0.046
Red
10
0.046

10
Mounting adapter
See page 7-18.
Type: LPX AU120.
Contact elements for mushroom-head spring return and
latch button actuators
See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
For SPRING-RETURN types, up to 9 contacts can be fitted:
3 each on the left, middle and right, one behind the other.
For LATCH types, up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 2 each
on the left, middle and right, one behind the other.
LPC B6344
Red
Mechanical life:
Mushroom head spring return buttons: 5,000,000 cycles
Mushroom head latch buttons: 300,000 cycles.
Type
LPC B6342
LPC B6634
Materials
Polyamide.
0.097
LATCH, TURN TO RELEASE

LPC B6634
Ambient conditions:
0.079
1NO

LPC B6644
Red
10
0.079
LATCH, TURN KEY TO RELEASE

40mm/1.6 (without mounting adapter). Key code n 455.
LPC B6644
LPC B6842
Black
LPC B6842R
Black
10
1
0.083
LPC B6844
Red
10
0.083
LPC B6844R
Red
0.083
Versions with different key codes.
Complete with the numeric code of the key.

The following versions are available: 421E, 458A, 520E, 3131A, 3433E.
Example of complete code: LPC B6844R 421E.
LPC B684...
Normal operation of auto-monitor contact

mounted on surface or on cover of control
stations
In case of detachment of only the contact element

and/or of the mounting adapter with contact
element
.3 .1
.4 .2
.3 .1
.4 .2
If the contact LPX C01SM detaches from the actuator

due to strong vibrations or shock, the equipment can
be restored to operating state only when proper
mounting of the contact with the actuator is reestablished resulting in contact .3-.4 closing.
.4 .2 .2
.3 .1 .1
.4 .2 .2
Contact .3-.4 closes when the

LPX AU120 mounting adapter and
LPXSM contact are fitted
correctly on the mushroom-head
latch actuator.
Both contacts .1-.2 in series do
not change state.
Spring clamp
Screw
1NC
LPX C01
Screw
LPX CF01
Faston
1LB
.3 .1
.4 .2
.4 .2
If the contact LPX C012SM detaches from the

actuator due to strong vibrations or shock, the
equipment can be restored to operating state only
when proper mounting of the contact with the
actuator is
re-established resulting in contact .3-.4 closing.
When the button is fully pressed,

both contacts .1-.2 open and
remain in this state until the button
is released.
Contact .3-.4 in series does not
change state.
.3 .1 .1

pages 7-14 to 17
Dimensions
page 7-44
LPX CS01
Spring clamp
LPX C01D
Screw

1NO
LPX CB10
Screw
1NC
LPX CB01
Screw
AUTO-MONITOR CONTACT with MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH

TYPES only: 2 elements max of this type can be mounted.
Extra two contacts can be fitted on the right.
Two elements per actuator can be fixed internally on the
cover surface of LPZ control stations of which one automonitor type. No LED element can be installed.
1NO
.3 .1
.4 .2 .2
Add-on blocks
pages 7-18 and 22
LPXCS10
or
With contact type LPX C02SM

.3 .1 .1
Faston
LPX C10A
1NC
When the button is fully pressed,

contact .1-.2 opens and remains in
this state until the button is
released.
change state.
Screw
LPX CF10
Auto-monitor LPX C01SM Screw (2 stacked in the

1NC
middle - LPX AU120
pos.1/3-4/6)
With contact type LPX C01SM

Contact .3-.4 closes when the
LPX AU120 mounting adapter and
LPXSM contact are fitted
correctly on the mushroom-head
latch actuator.
change state.
LPX C10
1EM
0.083
Termination
LPX C10
Screw (2 stacked on the right)
LPX CF10
Faston (2 stacked on the right)
LPX C01
Screw (2 stacked on the right)
LPX CF01
Faston (2 stacked on the right)
AUTO-MONITOR CONTACT with MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH

TYPES only: 2 elements max of this type can be mounted.
Only one of this type per actuator can be fixed internally on
the cover surface of LPZ control stations. No LED element
can be installed.
Auto-monitor LPX C02SM Screw (2 stacked )
2NC
or
.3 .1 .1
.4 .2 .2
All these actuators are standard-supplied with action plug

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n14.
7-7

22mm series
Double-touch actuators,
spring return
Order code
Colour
Symbols Qty
per pkg
n
Wt
[kg]
Two flush pushbuttons (without mounting adapter).

Both spring return.
LPC B71...
LPC B7112
Black/Red
LPC B7113
Green/Red
0.030
0.030
LPC B7114
White/Black
0.030
LPC B7122
Black/Red
I-O
0.030
LPC B7123
Green/Red
I-O
0.030
LPC B7124
White/Black
I-O
0.030
LPC B7133
Green/Red
Start/Stop 5
0.030
One extended and one flush pushbuttons (without mounting

adapter). Both spring return.
7
LPC B72...
Triple-touch actuators,
spring return
LPC B7212
Black/Red
LPC B7213
Green/Red
0.030
LPC B7214
White/Black
0.030
LPC B7222
Black/Red
I-O
0.030
LPC B7223
Green/Red
I-O
0.030
LPC B7224
White/Black
I-O
0.030
LPC B7233
Green/Red
Start/Stop 5
0.030
Order code
Symbols
0.030
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Two external flush and one middle extended buttons

(without mounting adapter). Spring return.
LPC B7345
0.030
Ambient conditions:
Materials
Polyamide.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-18.
Type: LPX AU120.
Contact elements
See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
Type
1NO
STOP
1EM
LPC B73...
LPC B7355
0.030
1NC
STOP
1LB
LPC B7365
0.030
0.030
STOP
LPC B7375
Add-on blocks
pages 7-18 to 22

pages 7-14 to 17
LPX C10
Screw
LPX CF10
Faston
LPXCS10
Spring clamp
LPX C10A
Screw
LPX C01
Screw
LPX CF01
Faston
LPX CS01
Spring clamp
LPX C01D
Screw

For DOUBLE-TOUCH actuators, 2 contacts need to be
fitted, one on the left and one on the right.
For TRIPLE-TOUCH actuators, 3 contacts need to be
fitted: one each on the left, middle and right.
1NO
LPX CB10
Screw
1NC
LPX CB01
Screw

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
STOP
7-8
Termination

For DOUBLE-TOUCH actuators, up to 6 contacts can be
fitted: 2 each on the left, middle and right, one behind the
other.
For TRIPLE-TOUCH actuators, up to 9 contacts can be
fitted: 3 each on the left, middle and right, one behind the
other.
Dimensions
page 7-45

22mm series
Selector switch actuators
knob
Order code
Type of
positions
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
LPC S120
10
0.037
LPC S121
10
0.037
LPC S130
10
0.037
LPC S131
10
0.037
LPC S132
10
0.037
LPC S133
10
0.037
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
LPC S220
10
0.040
LPC S221
10
0.040
Contact elements
See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
LPC S230
10
0.040
Type
LPC S231
10
0.040
LPC S232
10
0.040
LPC S233
10
0.040
Qty
per pkg
Wt

adapter (to purchase separately). Up to 6 contacts can be
fitted: 2 each on the left, middle and right or 3 each on
the left and right, one behind the other.
2 position (without mounting adapter).

LPC S1...

lever
Order code
Type of
positions
LPC S2...

key
Order code
Type of
position
Standard key types supplied with key code n 455
Ambient conditions:
Materials
Polyamide.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-18.
Type: LPX AU120.
1NO
[kg]
LPC S3...
LPC S320
10
0.060
LPC S320R
0.060
LPC S321
10
0.060
LPC S321R
0.060
LPC S340
10
0.060
LPC S340R
0.060
Add-on blocks
pages 7-18 to 22
LPX C01
Screw
LPX CF01
Faston
LPX CS01
Spring clamp
LPX C01D
Screw

0.060
1NO
LPX CB10
Screw
0.060
1NC
LPX CB01
Screw
LPC S331
10
0.060
LPC S331R
0.060
LPC S332
10
0.060
0.060
Activation of the middle contacts is coupled to the side

contacts; the relative mechanism pins are standard supplied.
LPC S332R
LPC S333
10
0.060
LPC S333R
0.060
LPC S350
10
0.060
LPC S350R
0.060
LPC S360
10
0.060
LPC S360R
0.060
The middle contact activation, with respect to the right

and left side contact, can be changed by the user, if
required, by removing one or both mechanism pins.
Consult the relative instructions available online in the
Downloads section in www.LovatoElectric.com.
Type of position
LPC S370
10
0.060
LPC S370R
0.060
Maintained position.
LPC S380
10
0.060
Spring return position.
LPC S380R
0.060
LPC S390
10
0.060
0.060
Complete with the numeric code of the key.

The following versions are available: 421E, 458A, 520E, 3131A, 3433E.
Example of complete code: LPC S320R 421E.
Available only on specific request.
Spring clamp
Screw

pages 7-14 to 17
3
Contacts
Dimensions
page 7-45
Key extraction position.

Rotation angles
2 position
90
3 position
45
45
Special versions
Versions with coloured keys are available upon request.
Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside
front cover.
Contact activiation of 3-position selector switch
LPXCS10
LPX C10A
10
3
Contacts
1LB
Screw
Faston
LPC S330R
1NC
LPX C10
LPX CF10
LPC S330
LPC S390R
Contact activation of 2-position selector switch
1EM
Termination

Pending at time of catalogue printing: RINA for all;
cULus, EAC, CCC for LPC S2... types.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
7-9

22mm series
Illuminated button
actuators, spring return
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]

Spring return.
LPC BL10...
LPC BL103
Green
10
0.025
LPC BL104
Red
10
0.025
LPC BL105
Yellow
10
0.025
LPC BL106
Blue
10
0.025
LPC BL107
Transparent
10
0.025
LPC BL20...
Illuminated push-push
button actuators
LPC BL203
Green
10
0.027
LPC BL204
Red
10
0.027
LPC BL205
Yellow
10
0.027
LPC BL206
Blue
10
0.027
LPC BL207
Transparent
10
0.027
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
10
0.025

Push on-push off.
LPC QL10...
LPC QL103
Green
LPC QL104
Red
10
0.025
LPC QL105
Yellow
10
0.025
LPC QL106
Blue
10
0.025
LPC QL107
Transparent
10
0.025

Push on-push off.
LPC QL20...
LPC QL203
Green
10
0.027
LPC QL204
Red
10
0.027
LPC QL205
Yellow
10
0.027
LPC QL206
Blue
10
0.027
LPC QL207
Transparent
10
0.027
Use contact elements LPX C10A (EM) and LPXC01 (NC) only.
Contact elements LPX C10 (NO) and LPX C01D (LB) cannot be fitted on
these actuators.
Ambient conditions:
Materials
Polyamide.
Mechanical life:
Spring-return actuators (flush, extended, mushroom
head): 5,000,000 cycles
Push-push actuators: 500,000 cycles
- Latch mushroom-head actuators: 300,000 cycles.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-18.
Type: LPX AU120.
Contact elements for illuminated spring-return and
mushroom-head latch actuators
See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
Type
1NO
1EM
1NC
Illuminated mushroom
head button actuators
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
1LB
LPX C10
Screw
LPX CF10
Faston
LPXCS10
Spring clamp
LPX C10A
Screw
LPX C01
Screw
LPX CF01
Faston
LPX CS01
Spring clamp
LPX C01D
Screw
LPC BL6143
Green
10
0.035

Up to 2 contacts can be fitted per control station actuator
in addition to the LED element in the middle position.
LPC BL6144
Red
10
0.035
1NO
LPX CB10
Screw
LPC BL6145
Yellow
10
0.035
1NC
LPX CB01
Screw
LPC BL6146
Blue
10
0.035
LPC BL6148
White
0.035
SPRING RETURN.
40mm/1.6in (without mounting adapter).
LPC BL614...
Termination

For TYPES LPC BL1/BL2/BL61up to 6 contacts can be
fitted: 3 each on the left and right, one behind the other.
For TYPES LPC BL66up to 4 contacts can be fitted: 2
each on the left and right, one behind the other of which
3 NO contacts max only.
LPZ control stations, up to 2 elements per actuator in
addition to the LED element in the middle position.
LATCH, TURN TO RELEASE.

LPC BL6643
Green
0.040
LPC BL6645
Yellow
0.040
LPC BL6646
Blue
0.040

LPC BL6644
Red
10
0.040
Contact elements for illuminated push-push button

actuators
See page 7-18.
Type:
LPX C10A (1EM early make, screw terminals)
LPX C01 (1NC, screw terminals)
Contacts snap onto LPX AU120 adapter and also
internally on the cover surface of LPZ control stations.
right, one behind the other; up to 2 elements per control
station actuator in addition to the LED element in the
middle position.
LED light elements
See pages 7-20 to 22.
LPC BL664...

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
7-10
Add-on blocks
pages 7-18 and 22

pages 7-14 to 17
Dimensions
page 7-44

22mm series
spring return,
white indicator
Order code
Colour
Symbol
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]

Both spring return.
LPC BL71...
LPC BL7112
Black/Red
LPC BL7113
Green/Red
0.030
0.030
LPC BL7114
White/Black
0.030
LPC BL7122
Black/Red
I-O
0.030
LPC BL7123
Green/Red
I-O
0.030
LPC BL7124
White/Black
I-O
0.030
LPC BL7133
Green/Red
Start/Stop 5
0.030
One extended and one flush pushbuttons (without mounting

adapter). Both spring return.
LPC BL72...
Illuminated selector
switch actuators
LPC BL7212
Black/Red
LPC BL7213
Green/Red
0.030
0.030
LPC BL7214
White/Black
0.030
0.030
I-O
Green/Red
I-O
0.030
LPC BL7224
White/Black
I-O
0.030
Contact elements
See page 7-18, 7-21 or 7-22.
LPC BL7233
Green/Red
Start/Stop 5
0.030
Type
LPC SL1203
Green
10
0.025
LPC SL1204
Red
10
0.025
LPC SL1205
Yellow
10
0.025
1NO
LPC SL1206
Blue
10
0.025
LPC SL1208
White
10
0.025
LPX CS10
Spring clamp
LPC SL1213
Green
10
0.025
1EM
LPX C10A
Screw
LPC SL1214
Red
0.025
1NC
LPX C01
Screw
LPC SL1215
Yellow
0.025
LPX CF01
Faston
LPC SL1216
Blue
0.025
LPC SL1218
White
10
0.025
10
0.025
Colour
Type of
Qty
positions per pkg
Wt
[kg]
LPC SL1303
Green
LPC SL1304
Red
10
0.025
LPC SL1305
Yellow
10
0.025
LPC SL1306
Blue
10
0.025
LPC SL1308
White
10
0.025
LPC SL1313
Green
10
0.025
LPC SL1314
Red
0.025
LPC SL1315
Yellow
0.025
LPC SL1316
Blue
0.025
LPC SL1318
White
10
0.025
LPC SL1323
Green
10
0.025
LPC SL1324
Red
0.025
LPC SL1325
Yellow
0.025
LPC SL1326
Blue
0.025
LPC SL1328
White
10
0.025
LPC SL1333
Green
10
0.025
LPC SL1334
Red
0.025
LPC SL1335
Yellow
0.025
LPC SL1336
Blue
0.025
White
10
0.025
LPC SL1338
Add-on blocks
pages 7-18 to 22
Termination

For DOUBLE-TOUCH TYPES, up to 6 contacts can be
fitted: 3 each on the left and right, one behind the other.
For SELECTOR SWITCHES, up to 4 contacts can be fitted:
2 each on the left and right, one behind the other.
LPZ control stations, up to 2 elements per actuator in
addition to the LED element in the middle position.
2
Contacts
Mounting adapter
See page 7-18.
Type: LPX AU120.
Black/Red
LPC BL7222
Materials
Polyamide.
LPC BL7223
Order code
LPC SL1...
Ambient conditions:
Screw
LPX CF10
Faston
LPX CS01
Spring clamp
LPX C01D
Screw

Up to 2 contacts can be fitted per control station actuator
in addition to the LED element in the middle position.
1NO
LPX CB10
Screw
1NC
LPX CB01
Screw
Selector switch type of positions

Selector switch rotation angles
2 position
3 position
90
45
45
LED light elements

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Contacts

pages 7-14 to 17
1LB
LPX C10
Dimensions
page 7-45
7-11
Push buttons and selectors

22mm series
Pilot light heads
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.024
Without mounting adapter.
LPL...
LPL 3
Green
10
LPL 4
Red
10
0.024
LPL 5
Yellow
10
0.024
LPL 6
Blue
10
0.024
LPL 7
Transparent
LPL 1187
Transparent
10
0.024
10
0.024
With symbol indicating dangerous voltage (IEC/EN 60417 5036-a).
Ambient conditions:
Materials
Polyamide.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-18.
Type: LPX AU120.
Pilot light heads are installed through a 22mm/0.89
drilling with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm /
1.69lbft) also on the cover of LPZ control stations.
LED light elements
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
LED integrated
monoblock pilot lights
steady light
8 LP2T IL...P
7-12
Add-on blocks
pages 7-18 to 22
Order code
Rated auxi- LED

liary supply colour
voltage
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
8 LP2T IL A3P 12VAC/DC
Green
10
0.021
8 LP2T IL A4P
Red
10
0.021
8 LP2T IL A5P
Yellow
10
0.021
8 LP2T IL A6P
Blue
10
0.021
8 LP2T IL A8P
White
10
0.021
8 LP2T IL B3P 24VAC/DC
Green
10
0.021
8 LP2T IL B4P
Red
10
0.021
8 LP2T IL B5P
Yellow
10
0.021
8 LP2T IL B6P
Blue
10
0.021
8 LP2T IL B8P
White
10
0.021
8 LP2T IL E3P 110VAC
Green
10
0.024
8 LP2T IL E4P
Red
10
0.024
8 LP2T IL E5P
Yellow
10
0.024
8 LP2T IL E6P
Blue
10
0.024
8 LP2T IL E8P
White
10
0.024
8 LP2T IL M3P 230VAC
Green
10
0.024
8 LP2T IL M4P
Red
10
0.024
8 LP2T IL M5P
Yellow
10
0.024
8 LP2T IL M6P
Blue
10
0.024
8 LP2T IL M8P
White
10
0.024

pages 7-14 to 17
Dimensions
page 7-45
Rated auxiliary supply voltage: 12VAC/DC, 24VAC/DC,
110VAC, 230VAC (-15% to +10%)
Consumption: 20mA
Installed through a 22mm/0.89 drilling with a
threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm / 1.69lbft) also on
cover of LPZ control stations
Electrical life: >30,000 hours
Screw termination
Maximum tightening torque: 0.8Nm / 0.59lbft
Side cable entry
Ambient conditions:
Degree of protection per IEC/EN:
IP65 on front
IP20 at rear.
Materials
Polyamide and polycarbonate.
Maximum conductor cross section
1 or 2 1.5mm2 or AWG16 cables.
Wiring diagram
X2
X1

(cULus - File E93602), as Motor Controllers - Accessory,
indicator; EAC, CCC.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.

22mm series
Monoblock buzzers
Order code
Voltage
Sound
intensity
at 2500Hz
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[V]
[dB]
n.
[kg]
80dB
10
0.020
Pulse-tone.
8 LP2T ZG...
8 LP2T ZGB
24VAC/DC
8 LP2T ZGE
110VAC/DC
10
0.020
8 LP2T ZGM
230VAC
10
0.020
Value measured at a distance of 10cm (3.94in).

Pulse-tone sound graph
Hz
3500
3000
0.6s
2500
0.2s
0.6s
0.2s
0.6s
2000
1500
1000
Monoblock buzzers are used as sound indicators in
automation systems and on-board machinery in the
production processes,
Long life, low consumption values and compact size are
the main features of this product.
Rated auxiliary supply voltage:
24VAC/DC; 110VAC/DC; 230VAC (10%)
Rated frequency: 50-60Hz
Consumption: <20mA
the cover of LPZ control stations
Service life: 30,000 hours (permanently powered)
Screw termination
Maximum tightening torque: 0.8Nm / 0.59lbft
Side cable entry
Ambient conditions:
Operational temperature: -25...+55C
IP40 on front
IP20 at rear.
500
s
0
0.8
0
0.6
1.4
1
2
1.6
Materials
2.2

Wiring diagram
X1
X2

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
USB and RJ45

communication interfaces
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkh
Wt
LPX S00
USB interface,
A-A connection type
[kg]
0,018
LPX S01
USB interface,
A-B connection type
0,018
LPX S02
RJ45 interface,
Ethernet connection type
0,026
LPX S00
LPX S01
USB and RJ45 communication interface connectors are
used in industrial environments, which in recent years
have seen an increase in the number of connections
between machines, production lines, equipment and
measuring instruments. These interfaces provide the
transmission of data in both directions between the
various devices.
Transmission characteristics:
USB: Universal Serial Bus Spec. Rev. 2.0 25-40Mb/s
RJ45: 10 Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3an-2006.
the cover of LPZ control stations
Ambient conditions:
Degree of protection IEC/EN:
IP65 with cap mounted
IP20 without cap.
Materials
Compliant with standards: IEC 61076-3-107 (USB),
IEC 60603-7-51 (RJ45).
LPX S02
Dimensions
page 7-38
Wiring diagrams
pag. 7-43
7-13

22mm series
Accessories and
spare parts
Order code
Description
LPX A127
Transparent diffuser for

double-touch buttons
[kg]
10
0.001
LPX A130
Threaded plug for

10
unused drilled holes (grey)
0.007
LPX A140
Action plug for centre

contact
50
0.001
LPX A150
Rod for mechanical reset

button (l =150mm/5.91in)
10
0.006
LPX A170
Spare standard key set

for selector switches or
mushroom-head buttons,
key code n 455
10
0.008
LPX A170R
Spare key set for selector

switches or mushroom
head buttons, LPC.. R type
0.008
LPX AU00
Threaded ring for actuator

fixing
20
0.002
LPX P01
M20 cable gland with

threaded ring for LPZ
control stations
50
0.012
LPX B0
Flush-extended spring
return actuator
with no cap or lens
10
0.013
LPX B3
Shrouded spring return

actuator with no cap or lens
10
0.014
LPX Q0
Flush-extended push-push 10
actuator with no cap
0.013
LPX QL0
Illuminated flush-extended 10
push-push actuator with
no lens
0.013
LPX A130
LPX A140
LPX AU00
LPX P01
Qty
Wt
per pkg
Flush cap for spring-return actuators.
LPX B0
LPX B104
LPX B102
Black
10
LPX B103
Green
10
0.002
0.002
LPX B104
Red
10
0.002
LPX B105
Yellow
10
0.002
LPX B106
Blue
10
0.002
LPX B108
White
10
0.002
0.003
Extended cap for spring-return actuators.
LPX B203
LPX B202
Black
10
LPX B203
Green
10
0.003
LPX B204
Red
10
0.003
LPX B205
Yellow
10
0.003
LPX B206
Blue
10
0.003
LPX B208
White
10
0.003
Flush lens for illuminated spring-return actuators.

LPX BL103
Green
10
0.002
LPX BL104
Red
10
0.002
LPX BL105
Yellow
10
0.002
LPX BL106
Blue
10
0.002
LPX BL107
Transparent
10
0.002
Extended lens for illuminated spring-return actuators.

LPX BL105
LPX BL206
LPX BL203
Green
10
0.003
LPX BL204
Red
10
0.003
LPX BL205
Yellow
10
0.003
LPX BL206
Blue
10
0.003
LPX BL207
Transparent
10
0.003
7-14
Versions with different key code. Complete with the numeric code of the
key. The following versions are available: 421E, 458A, 520E, 3131A, 3433E.
Example of complete code: LPX A170R421E.
Dimensions
page 7-45

22mm series
Order code
Description
[kg]
LPX AU100
Label holder for blank or

engraved plastic
LPX AU109 label
50
0.001
LPX AU109
Engravable silver plastic

label to use with
LPX AU100 holder
50
0.002
LPX AU105
Label holder for blank or

engraved LPX AU108
label
50
0.003
LPX AU108
Engravable silver plastic

label to use with
LPX AU105 holder
50
0.002
LPX AU13
Rubber boot for flush

button LPC B1/BL1/R1...
10
0.006
LPX AU14
Rubber boot for buttons

LPC B2/B3/BL2/R2...
10
0.009
LPX AU157
Rubber boot for double

and triple-touch buttons,
transparent
10
0.007
LPX AU167 Rubber boot for mush10

room head buttons,
LPC B63/B66/B67/BL66...
transparent
0.012
LPX AU158 Padlockable protection,

10
5-8mm/0.2-0.31
locks for buttons
LPC B66/B67/B68/BL66...;
for LPC B34... 5-6mm/
0.2-0.24 locks only
0.005
LPX AU100
LPX AU105
LPX AU108
LPX AU109
Qty
Wt
per pkg
Other accessories.
LPX AU158
8 LM2T A161
30mm/1.2 hole size

adapter set for 22mm/
0.87 (use 2 per hole)
10
0.002
8 LM2T A185
Selector protection
shroud for knob type only
10
0.004
8 LM2T A200
Socket spanner/wrench
1
for fixing ring fitting, metal

0.184
For flush and extended push buttons, comple the order code by adding the
digit of the required colour:
2 (black); 3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow); 6 (blue); 7 (transparent); 8 (white).
For illuminated push buttons, add only digit 7 (transparent).
Cannot be used when LPX AU100 or LPX AU105 is fitted.
Cannot be used when LPX AU158 is fitted.
Cannot be used when LPX AU167 is fitted.
8 LM2T A185
Dimensions
page 7-38
7-15

22mm series
Labels with text for
LPX AU100 legend holder
Ordering code
Text
Qty
Wt
per pkg
n
[kg]
50
0.001
1
0.005
1
0.005
General use.
8 LM2T AU206
Blank for writing
8 LM2T AU207
8 LM2T AGB230
Sheet with 108 labels

for laser printing
8 LM2T AU208 Sheet with 108
laser-printed labels
8 LM2T AGB216
CLOSE
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB220
EMERGENCY
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB231
FAST
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB263
FAULT
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB215
FORWARD
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB228
LEFT
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB218
LOWER
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB221
OFF
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB223
ON
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB211
OPEN
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB229
POWER ON
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB227
RAISE
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB226
RESET
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB222
REVERSE
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB217
RIGHT
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB241
RUNNING
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB224
SLOW
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB225
START
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB230
STOP
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB214
STOP RESET
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB240
THERMAL FAULT
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB237
TRIP
50
0.001
For selector switches.

8 LM2T AI233
AUTO-MAN
50
0.001
8 LM2T AI234
AUTO-O-MAN
50
0.001
8 LM2T AI241
MAN-AUTO
50
0.001
8 LM2T AI242
MAN-O-AUTO
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB235
FWD-O-REV
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB236
OFF-ON
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB232
STOP-START
50
0.001
International labels for push-buttons.

8 LM2T AU200
50
0.001
8 LM2T AU201
50
0.001
8 LM2T AU202
II
50
0.001
International labels for selector switches.

8 LM2T AU203
O-I
50
0.001
8 LM2T AU204
I-II
50
0.001
8 LM2T AU205
I-O-II
50
0.001
Recommended use with LPX AU109 blank label.

Sheet with 108 adhesive labels.
Complete code with required label text.
7-16
Dimensions
page 7-45
The labels have indelible scratch-proof black lettering on
metalised grey polycarbonate background (adhesive).
Special versions
Labels in different languages are available.
front cover.

22mm series
Plastic disk for mushroom
head pushbuttons
LPX AU113
Order code
Text
Qty
Wt
per pkg
n
[kg]
LPX AU113
EMERGENCY/STOP
90mm / 3.5
10
0.005
LPX AU115
EMERGENCY/STOP
60mm / 2.4
10
0.003
LPX AU118
ARRET DURGENCE /
NOT-AUS/
PARO EMERGENCIA
60mm / 2.4
10
0.003
LPX AU110
EMERGENCY STOP
adhesive label, size
34.5x65mm/1.36x2.56
12
0.001
The disks are made of non-adhesive plastic except
LPX AU110.
Plastic disks cannot be used with LPX AU158
padlockable protection.
7
LPX AU115
LPX AU110
Dimensions
page 7-45
7-17

22mm series
Mounting adapter
Order code
Description
Qty
Wt
per pkg
LPX AU120
Mounting adapter
[kg]
10
0.019
Rear view
(reference for element installation)
LPX AU120
1
4
7
Contact elements
2
5
8
1 row
2 row
3 row
Order code
Function
Qty
Wt
per pkg
All SPST
[kg]
10
0.011
10
0.011
10
0.011
10
0.011
Screw termination.
.3
LPX C10
NO
.4
.7
LPX C10A
LPX C...
EM
.8
.1
LPX C01
NC
.2
.5
LPX C01D
LB
.6
Screw termination. Without mounting adapter.

Auto-monitor contact elements for non-illuminated latch
mushroom-head pushbuttons.
LPX C01SM
.3 .1
0.022
0.033
1NC
.4 .2
LPX C02SM
.3 .1 .1
LPX C01SM
LPX C02SM
2NC
Screw termination.
With mounting adapter.
.3
LPX E10
10
LPX E01
0.029
NO
.4
.1
10
0.029
10
0.012
10
0.012
NC
.2
Faston termination.
LPX E...
.3
LPX CF10
NO
.4
.1
LPX CF01
[V] 12
24
48
[A] 6
120 240 400

6
480
500
600
1.9
1.5
1.4
1.2
250
440
IEC operational power in DC13:

[V]
12
24
48
125
500
600
[A]
1.5
0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13
0.1
Short-circuit protection fuse: max calibre 10A gG/SC.

Contact resistance: 20m.
Terminals: Clamp screw with washer
Faston 1-6.35mm(0.25) or 2-2.8mm (0.11).
Stroke of contact elements
EM
NO
NC
LB
NC
.2
General characteristics of contact elements

Wiping effect, dual scraping-oscillating action
IEC rated insulation voltage: 690V
IEC rated thermal current Ith: 10A
Conductivity: 5V 1mA
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A600 Q600.
IEC operational power in AC15:
.4 .2 .2
Use LPX C10A (EM) or LPX C01 (NC) type only with push-push
actuators. Not suitable for push-push actuators.
Normally open contact with early make operation.

Direct (positive) opening action in accordance with IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Normally closed contact with late break operation.
1
(0.04)
2 (0.08) 3 (0.35) 4
(0.16)
1.8
2.8
(0.07) (0.11)
Closed contact
4.8mm
(0.19)
Open contact
Drillings - Minimum recommended distances

Maximum conductor cross section for screw terminals
30
(1.18)
LPX CF10
30
(1.18)
40 (1.57)
LPX CF01
Mechanical and electrical endurance

Operating force: 0.5kg / 1.1lb (auxiliary contacts).
Electrical life: 1,000,000 cycles for LPXC10/01/E10/E01,
LPXC01SM/C02SM, LPXCF10/01; 600,000 cycles for
LPXC10A/01D.
40
(1.57)
3
6
9
Any mounting position allowed.
LPX AU120 adapter directly snaps onto the actuator
fixed on the mounting surface.
All LPX C types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
adapter:
See the combinations given under Contact
elements in the right-hand column for each type of
pushbutton and selector switch.
A maximum of 3 contacts or 2 contacts and 1 LED
element (LPX L mounted in the middle position)
can be fixed internally on the cover surface of LPZ
control stations.
A maximum of 2 LPX CSM contacts can be installed
on LPX AU120 adapter exclusively on non-illuminated
mushroom-head latch actuators:
In pos. 1-3 (on the left side only of LPX AU120; refer
to REAR VIEW drawing), one only LPX C01SM or
LPX C02SM element can be fitted.
One extra LPXSM can be installed in pos. 4-6
(stacked behind the first on the LPX AU120).
With LPX C01SM, a maximum of two contacts LPX
C0 or LPX C1 can be fitted on the right side in
LPX AU120 pos. 2 and 5, one behind the other.
On the internal surface of LPZ control station
covers, one only LPX C01SM or LPX C02SM contact
can be mounted on LPX AU120 pos. 1 (on the left).
With LPX C01SM, one extra element LPX C0 or
LPX C1 can be fitted on the right (LPX AU120
pos. 2).
No LED element can be used with LPXSM types.
Maximum tightening torque for screw terminals:
1Nm / 0.74lbft.
Ambient conditions:
Operating temperature: -25+70C
Storage temperature: -40+85C.
IP20 for screw termination
IP00 for Faston termination.

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
22.3 (+0.4, -0)

(0.88)
7-18
When using Faston, pitch is 85mm / 3.35 minimum.
Dimensions
page 7-44
Wiring diagrams
page 7-49

22mm series
Test elements for
steady-light LED elements
LPX T...
Order code
Description
LPX T100
Use with LED elements

in AC/DC, types LPX LE
(all), LPX LFB, LPX LPB
and LPSB
LPX T101

at 85-140VAC for types
LPX LFE LPX LPE and
LPX LPSE
LPX T102

Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
10
0.011
10
0.011

10
at 185-265VAC for types
LPX LFM, LPX LPM and
e LPX LPSM
0.011
Whenever test circuits include illuminated actuators connected with

paralleled load, use two LPX T100 for each LED element.
Refer to the wiring diagram below or online in the Downloads section at
www.LovatoElectric.com
With DC supply only for LPX T100 type, the LED element works at full
voltage and brightness while with AC supply for all LPX T types, the
LED element works at half voltage so with reduced brightness level.
For LPX T100 test element
Supply voltage:
LPX T100 test element:
12...30VAC/DC for LPX LEB/LFB/LPB/LPSB...
85...140VAC/DC for LPX LEE...
185...265VAC/DC for LPX LEM...
LPX T101 test element: 85-120VAC
LPX T102 test element: 185-265VAC
For use with LED elements LPX LPBB/LPBE/LPBM
types, consult Customer Service; see contact details
on inside front cover
Electrical life: 100,000 hours
Snap onto LPX AU120 mounting adapter beside the
LED element or stacked behind contact elements; also
internally on the LPZ control station cover
Maximum tightening torque for screw terminals:
1Nm / 0.74lbft
Ambient conditions:
Storage temperature: -40+85C
Degree of protection: IEC/EN IP20; UL/CSA Type 1.
Mounting adapter
See page 7.18.
Type: LPX AU120.
The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator
fixed to the mounting surface.
(AC) ~ ( DC)

1 or 2 2.5mm or AWG 12 cables.
Wiring Diargram
LPX T00 test element
TEST
X1
X5
X5
LPX T101 LPX T102 test elements
LPXT100
X1
X1
X5

(cULus File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices, EAC; pending
for CCC and RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 N14.
X1
LPX LE...
LPX LPB...
LPX LPSB...
LPX LFB...
X2
(AC) ~ (+ DC)
For LPX T101 and LPX T102 test elements

(AC) ~
TEST
LPXT101
LPXT102
X1
LPXT101
LPXT102
X5
X1
X1
LPX LPE...
LPX LPM...
LPX LPSE...
LPX LPSM...
LPX LFE...
LPX LFM...
(AC) ~

X1
LPX LPE...
LPX LPM...
LPX LPSE...
LPX LPSM...
LPX LFE...
LPX LFM...
X2
X5
X1
X1
X5
LPXT101
LPXT102
LPX LPE...
LPX LPM...
LPX LPSE...
LPX LPSM...
LPX LFE...
LPX LFM...
X2
X2
Use with LPX LFE.., LPX LPE or LPX LPSE type.

Use with LPX LFM, LPX LPM or LPX LPSM type.
Accessories
page 7-18
Dimensions
page 7-44
Wiring diagrams
page 7-49
7-19

22mm series
LED elements
steady light
Order code
Rated auxiliary supply

voltage
LED
colour
[V]
Qty Wt
per
pkg
n
[kg]
Steady light, screw termination.

Supplied without mounting adapter.
LPX LP B3
Green
10
0.016
Red
10
0.016
LPX LP B5
Yellow
10
0.016
LPX LP B6
Blue
10
0.016
LPX LP B8
White
10
0.016
Green
10
0.016
LPX LP E4
Red
10
0.016
LPX LP E5
Yellow
10
0.016
LPX LP E6
Blue
10
0.016
LPX LP E8
White
10
0.016
LPX LP M3
185-265VAC Green
10
0.016
Red
10
0.016
LPX LP M5
Yellow
10
0.016
LPX LP M6
Blue
10
0.016
LPX LP M8
White
10
0.016
LED
colour
Qty Wt
per
pkg
LPX LP B4
LPX LP...
LPX LP E3
7
Total protection against overvoltages
and stray currents in wiring, to
reduce of flickering phenomenon
and withstand vibrations.
12-30V
AC/DC
85-140VAC
LPX LP M4
Order code

voltage
[V]
[kg]
Steady light, screw termination.

LPX LE B3
LPX LE B4
12-30V
AC/DC
Yellow
10
0.016
Blue
10
0.016
LPX LE B8
White
10
0.016
Green
10
0.016
85-140V
AC/DC
Red
10
0.016
Yellow
10
0.016
LPX LE E6
Blue
10
0.016
LPX LE E8
White
10
0.016
LPX LE E5
LED elements
flashing light
0.016
0.016
LPX LE B5
LPX LE E4
Simple protection
against overvoltages
and to withstand
vibrations.
10
10
LPX LE B6
LPX LE E3
LPX LE...
Green
Red
LPX LE M3
LPX LE M4
185-265V
AC/DC
Green
10
0.016
Red
10
0.016
LPX LE M5
Yellow
10
0.016
LPX LE M6
Blue
10
0.016
LPX LE M8
White
10
0.016
LED
colour
Qty Wt
per
pkg
Order code

voltage
[V]
Auxiliary supply voltage:
LPX LP with steady light
12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 180-265VAC
LPX LE with steady light
12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC/DC; 180-265VAC/DC
LPX LF flashing light
18-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 180-265VAC
Maximum consumption for:
LPX LP steady light and LPX LF flashing light:
17mA (12/18-30VAC/DC); 20mA (85-140VAC);
17mA (185-265VAC)
LPX LE steady light:
11mA (12-30VAC/DC); 5mA (85-140VAC/DC);
3mA (185-265VAC/DC)
Total protection for LPX LP and LPX LF types:
Against overvoltages
Against stray currents in wiring
To reduce flickering phenomenon
To withstand vibrations
Simple protection for LPX LE types:
Snap onto LPX AU120 mounting adapter in the middle
position for each illuminated actuator, also internally on
the LPZ control station cover
No other element can be stacked behind LED elements
Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 0.74lbft
Ambient conditions:
(-25...+60C for LPX LE...)
Degree of protection per IEC/EN: IP20.
Mounting adapter
See page 7.18.
Type: LPX AU120.
1 o 2 2.5mm2 or AWG12 cables.
Wiring diagram
X2

Certifications obtained: UL listed for USA and Canada
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
[kg]
Flashing light, screw termination.

LPX LF B3
Green
10
0.016
Red
10
0.016
LPX LF B5
Yellow
10
0.016
LPX LF B6
Blue
10
0.016
LPX LF B8
White
10
0.016
Green
10
0.016
LPX LF E4
Red
10
0.016
LPX LF E5
Yellow
10
0.016
LPX LF E6
Blue
10
0.016
LPX LF E8
White
10
0.016
LPX LF M3
185-265VAC Green
10
0.016
Red
10
0.016
LPX LF M5
Yellow
10
0.016
LPX LF M6
Blue
10
0.016
LPX LF M8
White
10
0.016
LPX LF B4
LPX LF...
LPX LF E3
Total protection against overvoltages

and stray currents in wiring, to
reduce of flickering phenomenon
and withstand vibrations.
7-20
LPX LF M4
Accessories
page 7-18
18-30V
AC/DC
85-140VAC
Dimensions
page 7-44
X1
Wiring diagrams
page 7-49

22mm series
Contact elements with
Order code
Function
Q.ty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
10
0.010
10
0.010
Spring-clamp termination.
.3
LPX CS10
NO
.4
.1
LPX CS01
LPX CS01
.2
LPX CS10

LED elements
steady light with
NC
Not suitable for push-push actuators.

Direct (positive) opening action
in accordance with IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Order code

voltage
LED
colour
[V]
Q.ty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
10
0.015
Steady light, with screw-clamp termination.

LPX LPS B4
Red
10
0.015
LPX LPS B5
Yellow
10
0.015
LPX LPS B6
Blue
10
0.015
LPX LPS B8
White
10
0.015
Green
10
0,015
IEC/EN operational characteristics in AC15 category:
LPX LPS E4
Red
10
0.015
[V] 12
24
48
LPX LPS E5
Yellow
10
0.015
[A] 6
LPX LPS E6
Blue
10
0.015
IEC/EN operational characteristics in DC13 category:
White
10
0.015
[V]
12
24
48
125
500
600
Green
10
0.015
[A]
1.5
0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13
0.1
Red
10
0.015
12-30VAC/DC
LPX LPS E3
85-140VAC
LPX LPS E8
LPX LPS M3
Total protection against

overvoltages and stray currents
in wiring, to reduce flickering
phenomenon and withstand
vibrations.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-18.
Type: LPX AU120.
CONTACT ELEMENTS
Wiping action and dual scaping-oscillating effect
Conductivity: 1mA 5V
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A600 Q600
LPX LPS B3
LPX LPS...
Elements snap onto LPX AU120 adapter, also
internally on LPZ control station cover with maximum
of 3 LPX CS contact or 2 LPX CS contact and
1 LPX LPS LED elements (in middle position) per
actuator
Suitable for applications with vibration and/or impact
work conditions; cable retaining force guaranteed over
time in these conditions
Wiring also possible after installation with stacked
contacts
Ambient conditions:
Degree of protection IEC/EN: IP20.
185-265VAC
LPX LPS M4
Green
120 240 400

6
1.9
250
480
500
600
1.5
1.4
1.2
440
LPX LPS M5
Yellow
10
0.015
LPX LPS M6
Blue
10
0.015
Short circuit protection fuse: max calibre 10A gG/SC

Contact resistance: 20m
Terminals: Spring clamps.
LPX LPS M8
White
10
0.015

NO
NC

1
1.8
(0.03) (0.07)
30
(1.18)
Closed contact
3
(0.11)
4
(0.16)
4.8mm
(0.19)
Open contact
Mechanical and electrical endurance of contact

elements
Opening force: 0.5kg / 1.1lb
Electrical life: 1.000.000 cycles for LPX CS10/CS01.
55 (2.16)
55 (2.16)
30
(1.18)
22.3 (+0.4, -0)

0.88 (+0.01, -0)
Push-in wiring technology for rigid cables or with ferrules only - no screwdriver needed
Cable retaining force guaranteed over time even in presence of vibrations and/or impacts
Push-in
technology
LED ELEMENTS
Supply voltage:
12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 185-265VAC
Maximum consumption: 17mA (12-30VAC/DC); 20mA
(85-140VAC); 17mA (185-265VAC)
Total protection:
Electrical life: 100,000 hours.
Wiring diagram for LED elements
X2
Wiring with flat-blade screwdriver

(for flexible bare cable without terminal)
Cable removal
(always using flat-blade screwdriver)
X1

1 or 2 2.5mm or AWG14 cables.
For 2.5mm section, use rounded cable terminal with
metal end at least 10mm / 0.39in long.
(cULus File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC,CCC;
pending for RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n14.
4
Accessories
page 7-18
Dimensions
page 7-44
Wiring diagrams
pag. 7-49
7-21

22mm series
Contact elements, base
mount on LPZ control
stations
Order code
Function
Q.ty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Screw termination.
Direct snap-in mounting on LPZ control station base.
.3
LPX CB10
10
0.012
10
0.012
NO
.4
.1
LPX CB01
NC
.2
LPX CB...
LED elements, steady light

base mount on LPZ control
stations

Not suitable for push-push actuators.

Direct opening operation
Order code

voltage
LED
colour
[V]
Q.ty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
CONTACT ELEMENTS
Wiping action and dual scaping-oscillating effect
Conductivity: 1mA 5V
Screw termination.
Steady light.
Direct snap-on mounting on LPZ control station base.
LPX LPB B3
LPX LPB...
12-30VAC/DC
Green
10
0.016
LPX LPB B4
Red
10
0.016
LPX LPB B5
Yellow
10
0.016
LPX LPB B6
Blue
10
0.016
LPX LPB B8
White
10
0.016
Green
10
0.016
LPX LPB E3
Total protection against

overvoltages and stray currents in
wiring, to reduce flickering
phenomenon and withstand
vibrations.
85-140VAC
LPX LPB E4
Red
10
0.016
LPX LPB E5
Yellow
10
0.016
LPX LPB E6
Blue
10
0.016
LPX LPB E8
White
10
0.016
Green
10
0.016
LPX LPB M3
185-265VAC
Snap mount into fixing structures of LPZ control
station base
Maximum of 3 LPX CB contact or 2 LPX CB
contact and 1 LPX LPB LED elements (in middle
pos. 3) for each actuator of LPZ control stations
Wiring done directly in the base, so there is none with
or directly in the cover
Tightening torque Tmax: 1Nm/9lbin
Ambient conditions:
Degree of protection IEC/EN IP20.
LPX LPB M4
Red
10
0.016
LPX LPB M5
Yellow
10
0.016
LPX LPB M6
Blue
10
0.016
LPX LPB M8
White
10
0.016
IEC/EN operational characteristics in AC15 category:

[V] 12
24
48
[A] 6
120 240 400

6
1.9
480
500
600
1.5
1.4
1.2
IEC/EN operational characteristics in DC13 category:

[V]
12
24
48
125
500
600
[A]
1.5
0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13
250
440
0.1

Terminals: Clamp screw and washer.
NO
NC
1
1.8
(0.03) (0.07)
Closed contact
3
(0.11)
4
(0.16)
4.8mm
(0.19)
Open contact
Mechanical and electrical endurance of contact

elements
Opening force: 0.5kg / 1.1lb
Electrical life: 1,000,000 cycles for LPX CB10/CB01.
Mounting position on the LPZ control station base

LPX LPB...
Fixing structures
always mounted in
middle pos.3
LPX CB...
3 pieces
max/actuator
LED ELEMENTS
Supply voltage:
12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 185-265VAC
Maximum consumption: 17mA (12-30VAC/DC);
20mA (85-140VAC); 17mA (185-265VAC)
Total protection:
Electrical life: 100,000 hours.
Wiring diagram for LED elements
X2
X1

1 or 2 2.5mm or AWG14 cables.
7-22
1B

(cULus File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices.; EAC, CCC;
pending: RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n14.
Wiring diagrams
page 7-49

22mm series
Without actuators
LPZ P1 A5
Order code
Description
Cover
colour
Q.ty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
LPZ P1 A5
For 1 actuator
Yellow
0.107
LPZ P1 A8
For 1 actuator
Grey
0.107
LPZ P2 A8
For 2 actuators
Grey
0.152
LPZ P3 A8
For 3 actuators
Grey
0.187
LPZ P4 A8
For 4 actuators
Grey
0.200
LPZ P5 A8
For 5 actuators
Grey
0.240
LPZ P6 A8
For 6 actuators
Grey
0.290
CONTROL STATIONS WITHOUT ACTUATOR
1 to 6 ways
Compact dimensions
Easy wiring for base-mount contact and LED
elements; possible use of screw and spring-clamp
terminal contact or LED elements on the inside
surface of the cover using LPX AU120 mounting
adapter
Numerous cable entries.
CONTROL STATIONS WITH ACTUATOR
Standard supplied with actuator, label holder and STOP
legend label excluding types with yellow cover, and one
base-mount NC contact.
Control station base

Fixing structures for contact and/or LED elements
For each actuator: Maximum of 3 contacts or 2 contacts and 1 LED
LPZ P3 A8
1
1B
Easy identification reference
Control station cover

(inside view)
For actuator and corresponding contact

and/or LED elements
Cable entry:
LPZ P1 knockouts:
M16/PG11 (1 at rear and 1 on left side)
M20/M25/PG13.5/M20 (1 each on top and
bottom)
LPZ P2 A8 knockouts:
M16/PG11 (2 at rear)
M20/PG13.5 (1 on each side)
bottom)
LPZ P3/P4/P5/P6 A8 knockouts:
M16/PG11 (2 at rear)
M20/PG13.5 (2 on each side)
bottom)
Tightening torque of cover screws Tmax: 1.8Nm/16lbin
Ambient conditions:
Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4 4X, 12, 12K.
Materials
Polycarbonate.
Anti-loosening action
Anti-rotation indents to extend
fixing ring gripping over time
With one actuator

Certifications obtained: EAC,CCC; UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices;
pending at time of catalogue printing: cULus for
LPZP6A8 and RINA for all types.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508A for types without actuators /
UL508 for types complete with actuator, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Order code
Control
Actuator
station
description
description
Q.ty
per
pkg
LPZ P1 B8 01
Grey,
1 way
LPZ P1 A8
Mushroom-head 1
button
LPC B6744 with
STOP legend
0.150
LPZ P1 B8 02
Grey,
1 way
LPZ P1 A8
Mushroom-head 1
button
LPC B6344 with
STOP legend
0.135
LPZ P1 B5 02
Yellow,
1 way
LPZ P1 A5
Emergency stop 1
button
LPC B6344
0.135
LPZ P1 B5 03 Yellow,

1 way
LPZ P1 A5
Emergency stop 1
button
LPC B6644
0.150
LPZ P1 B8 02
Wt
[kg]
Version with red emergency stop, turn to release and yellow cover
compliant with ISO 13840.
LPZ P1 B5 03
7-23

22mm series
COMBINATIONS FOR PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
SPRING-RETURN BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPC B10...
LPC B11...
LPC B20...
LPC B21...
LPX AU120
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPC B30...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX AU...
LPX AU...
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS
LPX AU120
LPX C10A
LPX C01
LPC Q10...
LPX AU...
LPC Q20...
LPX C10A
LPX C01
MUSHROOM-HEAD SPRING-RETURN BUTTONS

LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPC B614...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPC B616...
LPX AU...
MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH BUTTONS
LPX C02SM
LPX C01SM
LPX C01SM
LPX C02SM
LPX AU120
LPX AU120
LPX AU120
LPC B6634
LPC B634...
LPC B664...
LPC B674...
LPC B684...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX E...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX AU...
LPX AU...
LPX AU...
DOUBLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPC B71...
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPC B72...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
TRIPLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPC B73...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
SELECTOR SWITCHES
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX AU120
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPC S1... - LPC S2...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPC S3...
LPX AU...
MECHANICAL SPRING-RETURN RESET BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPC R1...
7-24
LPC R2...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX AU...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX AU...

22mm series
COMBINATIONS FOR ILLUMINATED PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T...
LPC BL10...
LPX L...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T...
LPC BL20...
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
LPX AU...
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS
LPX L...
LPX C10A
LPX C01
LPX T...
LPX AU120
LPC QL10...
LPX C10A
LPX C01
LPX E01
LPX T...
LPC QL20...
LPX AU...
MUSHROOM-HEAD SPRING-RETURN BUTTON

LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T...
LPX L...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T...
LPC BL614...
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
LPX AU...
MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH BUTTON

LPX L...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T...
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
LPC BL664...
LPX AU...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T...
LPC BL71...
LPX L...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T...
LPC BL72...
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
2 AND 3 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCHES

LPX L...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T...
LPC SL12...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
LPC SL13...
CONTROL STATIONS
LPX AU120
LPX AU...
Example of 2 way control station equipped with selector switch, label holder and label along with pilot light
LPX LPB...
LPX CB...
always fitted in middle pos. n3
1 0 2
1B
7-25

spring return
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
8 LM2T B10...
8 LM2T B102
Black
10
8 LM2T B103
Green
10
0.033
0.033
8 LM2T B104
Red
10
0.033
8 LM2T B105
Yellow
10
0.033
8 LM2T B106
Blue
10
0.033
8 LM2T B108
White
10
0.033
Ambient conditions:
Per IEC/EN: IP65
Materials
An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
polycarbonate.
8 LM2T B20...
8 LM2T B202
Black
10
0.035
8 LM2T B203
Green
10
0.035
8 LM2T B204
Red
10
0.035
8 LM2T B205
Yellow
10
0.035
8 LM2T B206
Blue
10
0.035
8 LM2T B208
White
10
0.035
Shrouded (without mounting adapter). Spring return.
8 LM2T B30...
Push-push button
actuators
8 LM2T B302
Black
10
8 LM2T B303
Green
10
0.035
0.035
8 LM2T B304
Red
10
0.035
8 LM2T B305
Yellow
10
0.035
8 LM2T B306
Blue
10
0.035
8 LM2T B308
White
10
0.035
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Flush (without mounting adapter). Push on-push off.
8 LM2T Q10...
8 LM2T Q102
Black
10
8 LM2T Q103
Green
10
0.033
0.033
8 LM2T Q104
Red
10
0.033
8 LM2T Q105
Yellow
10
0.033
8 LM2T Q106
Blue
10
0.033
8 LM2T Q108
White
10
0.033

Push on-push off.
8 LM2T Q20...
8 LM2T Q202
Black
10
8 LM2T Q203
Green
10
0.035
8 LM2T Q204
Red
10
0.035
8 LM2T Q205
Yellow
10
0.035
8 LM2T Q206
Blue
10
0.035
8 LM2T Q208
White
10
0.035
7-26
Add-on blocks
pages 7-39 to 41
0.035
Use contact elements EM (8 LM2T C10A) and NC (8LM2T C01) only.

Contact elements NO (8LM2T C10) and LB (8LM2T C01D) cannot be
fitted on these actuators. For the number of contact elements, refer to
indications in the right-hand column.

pages 7-36 to 38
Dimensions
page 7-47
Operating force: 0.8kg / 1.7lb (actuator).
Mechanical life:
Spring-return actuators: 1,000,000 cycles
Push-push actuators: 500,000 cycles.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T AU120.
The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of
incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm /0.59lbft ).
Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
rotation through a 22mm/0.89 drilling also on the
cover of LPZ control stations.
Contact elements for spring-return actuators
See page 39.
Type:
LM2T C10 (1NO)
LM2T CF10 (1NO Faston)
LM2T C10A (1EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
LM2T C01D (1LB)
Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
Up to 2 contacts per actuator in addition to the LED
element in the middle position can be internally fitted on
the cover surface of LPZ control stations.
To use contact elements in the middle position, install the
action plug LM2T A140 on the actuator; see page 7-36.
Contact elements for push-push button actuators
See page 7-39.
Type:
LM2T C10A (1EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
Up to 2 contacts can be fitted: 1 each on the right and left.
Up to 2 contacts per actuator in addition to the LED
element in the middle position can be internally fitted on
Certifications obtained: RINA, LROS, EAC, CCC,
UL Listed, for USA and Canada (File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.

Mechanical reset button,
complete unit, spring return
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Flush (5.2mm/0.2 stroke). Adjustable length 0-140mm/5.5.

Spring return (complete with shaft and mounting adapter).
8 LM2T R1002
Black
10
8 LM2T R1003
Green
10
0.065
0.065
8 LM2T R1004
Red
10
0.065
8 LM2T R1006
Blue
10
0.065
8 LM2T R1196
Blue (RESET) 10
0.065
Extended (5.2mm/0.2 stroke). Adjustable length 0-140mm/

Spring return (complete with shaft and mounting adapter).
8 LM2T R1196
8 LM2T R2004

Red
10
0.067
With RESETcaption on actuator.

No contact elements can be fitted. Not suitable for use with LPZ control
stations.
Order code
Symbol
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Ambient conditions:
Per IEC/EN: IP65
Materials
polycarbonate.
Operating force: 0.8kg / 1.7lb (actuator)
Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T AU120.
incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
rotation.

8 LM2T B1102
8 LM2T B1104
8 LM2T B1113
8 LM2T B1118
8 LM2T B1123
8 LM2T B11...
II
8 LM2T B1128
8 LM2T B1132
STOP
8 LM2T B1134
8 LM2T B1142
10
0.033
Red
10
0.033
Green
10
0.033
White
10
0.033
Green
10
0.033
White
10
0.033
Black
10
0.033
Red
10
0.033
0.033
Black
10
White
10
0.033
Black
10
0.033
White
10
0.033
Green
10
0.033
White
10
0.033
Blue
10
0.033
White
10
0.033
Blue
10
0.033
8 LM2T B1502
Black
10
0.033
8 LM2T B1512
Black
10
0.033
8 LM2T B1148
8 LM2T B1152
8 LM2T B1158
8 LM2T B1163
8 LM2T B21...
Black
START
8 LM2T B1168
8 LM2T B1176
8 LM2T B1178
8 LM2T B1196
RESET
Contact elements for spring-return actuators

See page 7-39.
Type:
LM2T C10 (1NO)
LM2T C10A (1EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
LM2T C01D (1LB)
Up to 3 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted on
To use contact elements in the middle position, install the
action plug LM2T A140 on the actuator; see page 7-36.
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.

8 LM2T B2102
Black
10
0.035
Red
10
0.035
Black
10
0.035
8 LM2T B2134
Red
10
Arrow symbol can be used to indicate right or left.
Arrow symbol can be used to indicate up or down.
0.035
8 LM2T B2104
8 LM2T B2132
Add-on blocks
pages 7-39 to 41

pages 7-36 to 38
STOP
Dimensions
page 7-47
7-27

Mushroom head
pushbutton actuators
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
SPRING RETURN.
8 LM2T B614...
8 LM2T B6142
Black
10
8 LM2T B6143
Green
10
0.037
0.037
8 LM2T B6144
Red
10
0.037
8 LM2T B6145
Yellow
10
0.037
8 LM2T B6146
Blue
10
0.037
SPRING RETURN.
8 LM2T B616...
8 LM2T B6162
Black
10
0.043
8 LM2T B6163
Green
10
0.043
8 LM2T B6164
Red
10
0.043
8 LM2T B6165
Yellow
10
0.043
8 LM2T B6166
Blue
10
0.043
LATCH, PULL TO RELEASE.

8 LM2T B6242
Black
10
0.105
8 LM2T B6244
Red
10
0.105

8 LM2T B624...
8 LM2T B6342
Black
10
0.054
8 LM2T B6344
Red
10
0.054

8 LM2T B634...
8 LM2T B6644
Red
10
0.087
LATCH, TURN KEY TO RELEASE.

8 LM2T B6542
Black
8 LM2T B6542G
8 LM2T B6544
8 LM2T B6644
Red
8 LM2T B6544G
10
0.091
0.091
10
0.091
0.091
Complete with the numeric code of the key. The following versions are
available: 501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510.
Example of complete code: 8 LM2T B6542G505.
8 LM2T B654...
Ambient conditions:
Per IEC/EN: IP65 for push-push and LM2T B654
actuators; IP66 for others.
Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K except for
8 LM2T B616 which is Type 1, 2, 3R, 12, 12K.
Materials
polycarbonate.
Mechanical life:
Mushroom head spring return buttons: 1,000,000
cycles
Mushroom head latch buttons: 300,000 cycles.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T AU120.
Contact elements
See page 7-39.
Type:
LM2T C10 (1NO)
LM2T C10A (1EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
LM2T C01D (1LB)
FOR SPRING-RETURN MUSHROOM-HEAD BUTTONS
Up to 3 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted the
cover surface of LPZ control stations.
To use contact elements in the middle position, install on
the action plug LM2T A140 on the actuator; see page 7-36.
FOR LATCH MUSHROOM-HEAD BUTTONS
For LM2T B624 and LM2T B6644 types, up to 4
contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left and right, one
behind the other.
the cover surface of LPZ control stations, 1 each on the
left and right.
For all others, up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on
the left, middle and right, one behind the other.
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
7-28
Add-on blocks
pages 7-39 to 41

pages 7-36 to 38
Dimensions
pages 7-47

spring return
Order code
Colour
Symbols Qty
per pkg
n
Wt
[kg]
Two flush push-buttons (without mounting adapter).

Both spring return.
8 LM2T B71...
8 LM2T B7112 Black/Red
none
8 LM2T B7113 Green/Red
none
0.044
0.044
8 LM2T B7114 White/Black
none
0:044
I-O
0.044
Triple-touch actuators,
spring return
I-O
0.044
I-O
0.044
Start/Stop 5
0.044
Operating force: 0.8kg / 1.7lb (actuator)
Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T AU120.
none
0.044
none
0.044
none
0.044
I-O
0.044
I-O
0.044
I-O
0.044
Start/Stop 5
0.044
Order code
Symbols
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Two external flush and one middle extended buttons

(without mounting adapter). All spring return.
8 LM2T B7345
0.044
STOP
8 LM2T B73...
Materials
polycarbonate.
One extended and one flush push-buttons (without

mounting adapter). Both spring return.
8 LM2T B72...
Ambient conditions:
Per IEC/EN: IP40.
Per UL/CSA: Type 1.
8 LM2T B7355
0.044
STOP
8 LM2T B7365
0.044
STOP
8 LM2T B7375
0.044
Contact elements
See page 7-39.
Type:
LM2T C10 (1NO)
LM2T C10A (EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
LM2T C01D (LB)
FOR DOUBLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
right, one behind the other.
the cover surface of LPZ control stations, 1 on the left
and right.
FOR TRIPLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
STOP
Add-on blocks
pages 7-39 to 41

pages 7-36 to 38
Dimensions
page 7-47
7-29

knob
Order code
Type of
position
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Ambient conditions:
Per IEC/EN: IP65

8 LM2T S120
10
0.049
8 LM2T S121
10
0.049

8 LM2T S130
8 LM2T S1...

lever
10
8 LM2T S131
10
0.049
8 LM2T S132
10
0.049
8 LM2T S133
10
0.049
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Order code
Type of
position
Materials
polycarbonate.
0.049
Mechanical life: 300,000 cycles.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T AU120.
incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm / 0.59in).

8 LM2T S220
10
0.050
8 LM2T S221
10
0.050
8 LM2T S2...

key
8 LM2T S320
10
0.079
8 LM2T S320G
0.079
8 LM2T S321
10
0.079
Contact elements
See page 7-39.
Type:
LM2T C10 (1NO)
LM2T C10A (1EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
LM2T C01D (1LB)
right, one behind the other. For more, consult Customer
Service for advice; see contact details on inide front
cover.
the cover surface of LPZ control stations, 1 on the left
and right.
8 LM2T S321G
0.079
Type of positions
8 LM2T S340
10
0.079
8 LM2T S340G
0.079
8 LM2T S230
10
0.050
8 LM2T S231
10
0.050
8 LM2T S232
10
0.050
8 LM2T S233
10
0.050
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Order code
Type of
position
8 LM2T S3...

8 LM2T S330
10
0.080
8 LM2T S330G
0.080
8 LM2T S331
10
0.080
8 LM2T S331G
0.080
8 LM2T S332
10
0.080
8 LM2T S332G
0.080
8 LM2T S333
10
0.080
8 LM2T S333G
0.080
8 LM2T S350
10
0.080
8 LM2T S350G
0.080
8 LM2T S360
10
0.080
8 LM2T S360G
0.080
8 LM2T S370
10
0.080
8 LM2T S370G
0.080
8 LM2T S380
10
0.080
8 LM2T S380G
0.080
8 LM2T S390
10
0.080
8 LM2T S390G
0.080
Contact activation for 2-position selector switch
Rotation angles
2 position
90
Contacts

Contacts
Add-on blocks
pages 7-39 to 41

pages 7-36 to 38
Dimensions
pages 7-48
45
45

UL Listed for USA and Canada )(cULus - File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
3 position
Special versions
Versions with coloured keys are available upon request.
Consult our Customer Service; see contact details on inside
front cover.
7-30
Key extraction position.

Complete with the numeric code of the key. The following versions are
available: 501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510.
Example of complete code: 8 LM2T S320G505.
Available only on specific request.

Illuminated button
actuators, spring return
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Flush with side visibility (without mounting adapter).

Spring return.
8 LM2T BL10...
8 LM2T BL103
Green
10
0.033
8 LM2T BL104
Red
10
0.033
8 LM2T BL105
Yellow
10
0.033
8 LM2T BL106
Blue
10
0.033
8 LM2T BL107
Transparent
10
0.033
8 LM2T BL20...
Push-push button
actuators
8 LM2T BL203
Green
10
0.035
8 LM2T BL204
Red
10
0.035
8 LM2T BL205
Yellow
10
0.035
8 LM2T BL206
Blue
10
0.035
8 LM2T BL207
Transparent
10
0.035
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Flush with side visibility (without mounting adapter).

Push on-push off.
8 LM2T QL10...
8 LM2T QL103 Green
10
0.033
8 LM2T QL104 Red
10
0.033
8 LM2T QL105 Yellow
10
0.033
8 LM2T QL106 Blue
10
0.033
8 LM2T QL107 Transparent
10
0.033

Push on-push off.
8 LM2T QL20...
8 LM2T QL203 Green
10
0.035
8 LM2T QL204 Red
10
0.035
8 LM2T QL205 Yellow
10
0.035
8 LM2T QL206 Blue
10
0.035
8 LM2T QL207 Transparent
10
0.035
Use contact elements EM (8LM2T C10A early make) and NC

(8LM2T C01) only.
Contact elements NO (8LM2T C10) and LB (8LM2T C01D late break)
cannot be used with these actuators. For the number of contact
elements, refer to the right-hand column.
Ambient conditions:
Per IEC/EN: IP65
Materials
polycarbonate.
Mechanical life:
Spring return buttons: 1,000,000 cycles
Push-push buttons: 500,000 cycles.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T AU120.
Contact elements for illuminated spring-return buttons
See page 39.
Type:
LM2T C10 (1NO)
LM2T C10A (EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
LM2T C01D (LB)
Up to 4 contacts can be fitted, 2 each on the left and right
one behind the other, when one of the lamp-holders type
LM2T DL400, LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230,
LM2T L or LM2T M is used in the middle position.
Instead when using lamp-holder LM2T XL, LM2T YL,
LM2TFL or LM2T GL, up to 2 contacts only can be
fitted one behind the other.
On the cover of LPZ control stations, up to 2 contacts per
actuator can be internally fitted, 1 each on the right
and/or left, when one of the lamp-holders type
Contact elements for illuminated push-push buttons
See page 7-39.
Type:
LM2T C10A (EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
Up to 2 contact elements can be fitted 1 each on the left
and right along with one of the lamp-holders type
LM2T L or LM2T M in the middle position; also
internally on LPZ control station covers for each actuator.
Lamp-holder elements
See page 7-40 and 41.
Lamps
Maximum recommended power: 1.2W.
See page 7-36.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Add-on blocks
pages 7-39 to 41

pages 7-36 to 38
Dimensions
page 7-47
7-31

Illuminated mushroom
head button actuators
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
SPRING RETURN.
40mm (without mounting adapter).
8 LM2T BL614...
8 LM2T BL6143 Green
10
0.043
8 LM2T BL6144 Red
10
0.043
8 LM2T BL6145 Yellow
10
0.043
8 LM2T BL6146 Blue
10
0.043
8 LM2T BL6148 White
10
0.043
LATCH, PULL TO RELEASE.

40mm (without mounting adapter).
8 LM2T BL624...
Double touch actuators,

spring return, white
indicator
8 LM2T BL71...
8 LM2T BL6243 Green
10
0.105
8 LM2T BL6244 Red
10
0.105
8 LM2T BL6245 Yellow
10
0.105
8 LM2T BL6246 Blue
10
0.105
8 LM2T BL6248 White
10
0.105
Order code
Colour
Symbol
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]

Both spring return.
8 LM2T BL7112
Black/Red
none
8 LM2T BL7113
Green/Red
none
0.044
0.044
8 LM2T BL7114
White/Black
none
0.044
8 LM2T BL7122
Black/Red
I-O
0.044
8 LM2T BL7123
Green/Red
I-O
0.044
8 LM2T BL7124
White/Black
I-O
0.044
8 LM2T BL7133
Green/Red
Start/Stop 5
0.044
One extended and one flush pushbuttons (without

mounting adapter). Both spring return.
8 LM2T BL72...
8 LM2T BL7212 Black/Red
8 LM2T BL7213 Green/Red
0.044
0.044
8 LM2T BL7214 White/Black
0.044
8 LM2T BL7222 Black/Red
I-O
0.044
I-O
0.044
8 LM2T BL7224 White/Black
I-O
0.044
Start/Stop 5
0.044
Ambient conditions:
Per IEC/EN: IP65 for mushroom-head actuators;
IP40 for double-touch actuators.
Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K except for
8 LM2T BL7... which are Type 1.
Materials
polycarbonate.
Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles for spring return types
while for latch, 300,000 cycles only.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T AU120.
rotation through a 22mm/0.89 drilling also on the cover
of LPZ control stations.
Contact elements
See page 7-39.
Type:
LM2T C10 (1NO)
LM2T C10A (1EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
LM2T C01D (1LB)
MUSHROOM-HEAD BUTTONS
On LM2T BL61 actuators, the following can be fitted:
Up to 4 contacts, 2 each on the left and right, one behind
the other, when one of the lamp-holders type LM2T
DL400, LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230,
On the cover of LPZ control station, up to 2 contacts per
On LM2T BL62 actuators, the following can be fitted:
Up to 2 contacts, 1 each on the left and right, when one
of the lamp-holders type LM2T DL400, LM2T VL230,
LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230,
LM2TFL or LM2T GL, up to 2 contacts can be fitted
one behind the other.
On the cover of LPZ control stations, up to 2 contacts per
Up to 4 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left and right,
one behind the other, when one of the lamp-holders type
Up to 2 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted on the
cover of LPZ control stations, 1 each on the right and/or left
when one of the lamp-holders type LM2T DL400,
LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L or
LM2T M is used in the middle position.
Lamps
See page 7-36.
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
7-32
Add-on blocks
pages 7-39 to 41

pages 7-36 to 38
Dimensions
page 7-47

Illuminated selector
switch actuators
Order code
Colour
Type of Qty
positions per pkg
n
Wt
[kg]
8 LM2T SL1...
8 LM2T SL1203 Green
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1204 Red
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1205 Yellow
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1206 Blue
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1208 White
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1213 Green
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1214 Red
10
0.025
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1216 Blue
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1218 White
10
0.025

8 LM2T SL1303 Green
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1304 Red
10
0.025
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1306 Blue
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1308 White
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1313 Green
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1314 Red
10
0.025
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1316 Blue
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1318 White
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1323 Green
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1324 Red
10
0.025
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1326 Blue
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1328 White
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1333 Green
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1334 Red
10
0.025
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1336 Blue
10
0.025
8 LM2T SL1338 White
10
0.025
Contact activiation of 2-position selector switch
Contacts
Contacts
Ambient conditions:
Per IEC/EN: IP65
IP40 for double-touch actuators.
Materials
polycarbonate.
Operating force: 0.8kg / 1.7lb (double touch actuator).
Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Type: LM2T AU120.
of LPZ control stations.
Contact elements
See page 7-39.
Type:
LM2T C10 (1NO)
LM2T C10A (1EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
LM2T C01D (1LB)
the other, when one of the lamp-holders type
On the cover of LPZ control station, up to 2 contacts per
On 3-position selector versions, the following can be fitted:
the other, when one of the lamp-holders type
the cover of LPZ control stations, 1 each on the right
and/or left when one of the lamp-holders type
LM2T L or LM2T M is used in the middle position
NOTE: No lamp-holder type LM2T XL, LM2T YL,
LM2T FL or LM2T GL can be used with 3-position
versions.
Selector switch type of positions
Selector switch rotation angles
2 position
3 position
90
45
45
Lamps
See page 7-36.
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Add-on blocks
pages 7-39 to 41

pages 7-36 to 38
Dimensions
page 7-48
7-33

Pilot light heads
Order code
Colour
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
8 LM2T IL10...
8 LM2T IL103
Green
10
0.024
8 LM2T IL104
Red
10
0.024
8 LM2T IL105
Yellow
10
0.024
8 LM2T IL106
Blue
10
0.024
8 LM2T IL107
Transparent
8 LM2T IL1187
Transparent
10
0.024
10
0.024
With symbol indicating dangerous voltage (IEC/EN 60417 5036-a).

LM2T AU120
LM2T AL...
LM2T AU160
LM2T A160
7
LM2T DL400
LM2T FL...
LM2T GL...
LM2T EL400
LM2T VL230
LM2T ZL230
LM2T T100
LM2T YL...
LM2T XL...
LM2T L...
LM2T M...

Potentiometer drives
LM2T A190
Materials
polycarbonate.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-28.
Type: LM2T AU120.
Pilot light heads latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
of LPZ control stations and exclusively with one of the
following lamp-holders, internally mounted in the middle
position: LM2T DL400, LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400,
LM2T ZL230, LM2T L... or LMQT M... for each light head.
LM2T AT...
Lamps
See page 7-36.
The mounting adapter is standard supplied so there is no need to

purchase it as a separate accessory.
Can be purchased separately. Refer to page 7-37.
Order code
Ambient conditions:
Per IEC/EN: IP65
Characteristics
Qty
per pkg
Wt
[kg]
Complete with mounting adapter.

8 LM2T P100
With graduated scale 10
0.070
8 LM2T P110
With variable index
0.070
10
Potenziometro non fornito.

8 LM2T P100

Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Suitable for potentiometers with 6-6.3mm/0.24-0.25
diameter shaft
Minimum 40mm/1.6in shaft length
Ambient conditions:
Degree of protection: IP65 (warranted by potentiometers
with a cylindrical shaft).
Materials
polycarbonate.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Standard supply with actuator.
The potentiometer drives latch onto the mounting adapter
by simple rotation through a 22mm/0.89 drilling; not
suitable for LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T P110

Certifications obtained: CCC, EAC.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
7-34
Add-on blocks
pages 7-39 to 41

pages 7-36 to 38
Dimensions
page 7-48

Joysticks
Order code
Type of
positions
N contact Qty
elements per
pkg
Wt
NO
[kg]
LM2T J2... types can be used with LPZ control stations
Ambient conditions:
IEC IP20 / UL/CSA Type 1 for contact elements
On front:
Per IEC/EN: IP65
Per UL/CSA Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
Without mechanical interlock. Label holder excluded.

Complete with contact elements.
8 LM2T J...
(without mechanical interlock)
8 LM2T J200
0.082
8 LM2T J201
0.082
8 LM2T J400
0.104
8 LM2T J401
0.104
Materials
parts whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
polycarbonate.
The sealing boot is made of NBR rubber.
With mechanical interlock in centre position.

Label holder excluded. Complete with contact elements.
8 LM2T J210
8 LM2T J211
0.082
0.082
8 LM2T J410
0.104
8 LM2T J411
0.104
Order code
Description
8 LM2T AU101
2-4 directional holder

for adhesive legends
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
10
0.004
[V]
12
24
48
120
240
[A]

[V]
12
24
48
125
250
[A]
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.27

Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 0.74lbft.
Mounting adapter and contact elements
The joystick is standard supplied with the mounting
adapter and contact elements.
The joystick latches onto the mounting adapter by simple
cover of LPZ control stations. The mounting adapter and
contact elements of LM2T J2 types can be internally
mounted on LPZ control stations covers.
Two LM2T CJ... contacts are mounted with LM2T J2...
types while four with LM2T J4... versions.
8 LM2T J...
(with mechanical interlock)
Accessories

Wiping action and dual scraping-oscillating effect

Certifications obtained: CCC, EAC, UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
8 LM2T AU101
Drillings - Minimum recommended

distances
4
3
2
65 (2.56)
for LM2T J4...
50 (1.97)
for LM2T J2...
42.4 (1.67)
95
(3.74)
30
(1.18)
C
B
Joystick positions and contact activation

22.3
(0.88)
2 instable
2 stable
4 instable
4 stable

pages 7-36 to 38
Dimensions
page 7-48
LM2TCJ10
LM2TCJ01
LM2TCJ10
LM2TCJ01
1
2
3
4
A

N
LM2TCJ10
1
2
A

7-35

Accessories and
spare parts
8 LM2T A130
Order code
Description
[kg]
8 LM2T A12
Coloured diffuser for

double touch buttons
10
0.001
8 LM2T A130
Threaded plug for

unused drilled holes
10
0.007
8 LM2T A140
Action plug for centre

contact
50
0.001
8 LM2T A150
Rod for mechanical

reset button
(l=140mm/5.5in max)
10
0.006
8 LM2T A160
BA9s bulb extractor
10
0.004
8 LM2T A161
30mm/1.2in hole size

adapter set for 22mm/
0.87in (use 2 per hole)
10
0.002
8 LM2T A170
Spare key set for

selector or mushroom
head button
0.008
8 LM2T A170G Spare key set for

1
G series selector or
mushroom-head button
0.008
8 LM2T A185
Selector protection
shroud for knob
types only
0.004
8 LM2T A190
Diffuser for pilot light
10
0.003
8 LM2T ALA024
Filament bulb BA9s

24VAC/DC 1.2W, size
10x28mm/0.4x1.1in
50
0.002
8 LM2T ALB024
Filament bulb BA9s

24VAC/DC 2W, size
10x28mm/0.4x1.1in
50
0.003
8 LM2T ALB048
Filament bulb BA9s

48VAC/DC 2W, size
10x28mm/0.4x1.1in
50
0.003
8 LM2T ALB130
Filament bulb BA9s

130VAC/DC 2W, size
10x28mm/0.4x1.1in
50
0.003
8 LM2T ALL006 MultiLED bulb BA9s

6VAC/DC 10x28mm
10
0.003

24VAC/DC 10x28mm
10
0.003

48VAC/DC 10x28mm
10
0.003
8 LM2T ALN130 Neon bulb BA9s

110/125VAC 10x28mm
50
0.003
8 LM2T ALN250 Neon bulb BA9s

220/250VAC 10x28mm
50
0.003
8 LM2T ALP130 Neon bulb BA9s

110/125VAC 10x28mm
50
0.003
8 LM2T ALP250 Neon bulb BA9s

220/250VAC 10x28mm
50
0.003
8 LM2T A140
8 LM2T A185
8 LM2T AL...
Qty per Wt
pkg
10
Complete the order coide by adding the digit of the selected colour:

7-36
3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow); 6 (blue); 7 (transparent); 8 (white).

Versions with different key code. Complete with the numeric code of the key.
The following versions are available: 501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508,
509, 510.
Example of complete code: 8 LM2T A170G505.
Coloured key versions are available on request; consult Customer Service;
Add the digit of the selected colour: 3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow).
Bulb size: 0.4x1.1in.
It is advisable to use the same colour of bulb as of the actuator to obtain
adequate light emission.
Not suitable for resistor-diode lamp holders.
Neon bulbs emit an amber light and may not be suitable for use with green
or blue pilot lights and illuminated actuators. Bulb size: 0.4x1.1in.
Glass with diffuser lens.
Plastic neon bulb.
Dimensions
page 7-48

Accessories and
spare parts
8 LM2T AT...
8 LM2T AU100
Order code
Description
8 LM2T AT...
Printed label to be
inserted in pilot lights
and illuminated
pushbuttons
8 LM2T AU100 Legend holder
8 LM2T AU105
Qty
Wt
per pkg
n
[kg]
50
0.001
50
0.001
8 LM2T AU105 Legend holder (for

50
8 LM2T AU106 paper or
8 LM2T AU108 plastic
labels)
0.003
8 LM2T AU106
Blank paper label for

writing
(for LM2T AU105)
50
0.002
8 LM2T AU107
Transparent protection
for LM2T AU106 label
50
0.001
8 LM2T AU108
Blank plastic label for

engraving
(for LM2T AU105)
50
0.002
8 LM2T AU13
IP66 boot for

pushbuttons
LM2T B1/BL1/R1...
10
0.006
8 LM2T AU14
IP66 boot for extended

pushbuttons
LM2T B2/BL2/B3/R2...
10
0.009
8 LM2T AU157
IP66 boot for double

and triple buttons
(transparent)
10
0.007
8 LM2T AU167
IP66 protective boot

for mushroom head
buttons LM2T B624...
and LM2T B634...
(transparent)
10
0.012
8 LM2T AU170
Actuator gasket
10
0.006
8 LM2T AU108
8 LM2T AU106
8 LM2T AU170

Available only on specific request, consult Customer Service; see contact

To preserve actuators degree of protection (IEC IP65 / UL Type 4X),
place their gasket between legend holder and mounting surface.
For flush and extended push-buttons, complete the order code by adding the
digit of the required colour:
2 (black); 3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow); 6 (blue); 7 (transparent); 8 (white).
For illuminated push-buttons, add only digit 7 (transparent).
Dimensions
page 7-48
7-37

Labels with text for
LM2T AU100 legend holder
Order code
Text
Qty per Wt
pkg
n
[kg]
50
0.001
Sheet with 108 labels

for laser printing
8 LM2T AU208 Sheet with 108
laser-printed labels
1
0.005
1
0.005
8 LM2T AGB216
CLOSE
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB220
EMERGENCY
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB231
FAST
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB263
FAULT
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB215
FORWARD
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB228
LEFT
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB218
LOWER
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB221
OFF
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB223
ON
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB211
OPEN
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB229
POWER ON
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB227
RAISE
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB226
RESET
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB222
REVERSE
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB217
RIGHT
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB241
RUNNING
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB224
SLOW
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB225
START
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB230
STOP
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB214
STOP RESET
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB240
THERMAL FAULT
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB237
TRIP
50
0.001
General use.
8 LM2T AU206
Blank for writing
8 LM2T AU207
8 LM2T AGB230
The labels have indelible scratch-proof black lettering on
metalised grey polycarbonate background (adhesive).
Special versions
Labels in different languages are available.
front cover.
For selector switches.

8 LM2T AI233
AUTO-MAN
50
0.001
8 LM2T AI234
AUTO-O-MAN
50
0.001
8 LM2T AI241
MAN-AUTO
50
0.001
8 LM2T AI242
MAN-O-AUTO
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB235
FWD-O-REV
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB236
OFF-ON
50
0.001
8 LM2T AGB232
STOP-START
50
0.001
International labels for pushbuttons.

8 LM2T AU200
50
0.001
8 LM2T AU201
50
0.001
8 LM2T AU202
II
50
0.001
International labels for selector switches.

8 LM2T AU203
O-I
50
0.001
8 LM2T AU204
I-II
50
0.001
8 LM2T AU205
I-O-II
50
0.001
Recommended use with LM2T AU206 blank label.

Sheet with 108 adhesive labels.
Complete code with label text required.
Plastic disk for mushroom

head pushbuttons
ERGENCY
EM
Ordering code
Text
Qty per Wt
pkg
n
[kg]
8 LM2T AU113
EMERGENCY STOP
90mm / 3.5in
10
0.005
8 LM2T AU115
EMERGENCY STOP
60mm / 2.4in
10
0.005
8 LM2T AU118
NOT AUS /
ARRET DURGENCE /
PARO EMERGENCIA
60mm / 2.4in
10
0.005
STOP
7-38
Dimensions
page 7-48
The disks are made of non-adhesive plastic.
There is a 2x2mm / 0.08x0.08in index.
Special versions
The disk text in different languages is available.
front cover.

Mounting adapter
Order code
Description
Qty
Wt
per pkg
n
[kg]
10
0.019
Only for metal series actuators.

8 LM2T AU120
Mounting adapter
8 LM2T AU120
Contact elements
Order code
Qty
Wt
per pkg
All SPST
[kg]
10
0.011
10
0.011
[V]
12
24
48
125
10
0.011
[A]
1.5
0.011
Short-circuit protection fuse: max. calibre 10A gG/SC

Faston 1-6.35mm/0.25 or 2-2.8mm/0.11.
8 LM2T C10
.3
8 LM2T C10A
.7
NO
EM
.8
.1
NC
.2
8 LM2T C01D
.5
10
LB
.6
Screw termination.
With mounting adapter for metal series LM2T actuators.
8 LM2T E10
8 LM2T E01
8 LM2T E...
.3
10
0.029
10
0.029
.4
.1
NC
.3

48
[A] 6
120 240 400
480
500
600
1.9
1.5
1.4
1.2
250
440
500
600
0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13
0.1

EM
NO
NC
LB
10
0.012
10
0.012
2 (0.08) 3 (0.35) 4
(0.16)
1.8
2.8
(0.07) (0.11)
Closed contact
4.8mm
(0.19)
Open contact
NO
.4
.1
NC
.2
24
1
(0.04)
Faston termination
8 LM2T CF01
[V] 12
NO
.2
8 LM2T CF10
.4
8 LM2T C01

Wiping action and dual scraping and oscillating effect,
Conductivity: 5V 10mA.
Function
Screw termination.
8 LM2T C...
The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means
of incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft) also
internally on LPZ control stations covers
Contact elements snap onto the adapter
Tightening torque: 1Nm/1.57lbft max (except Faston)
Ambient conditions:
IP20 for contacts elements with screw termination
IP00 for contact elements with Faston termination
Not suitable for push-push actuators. Use LM2T C10A (EM) or

LM2T C01 (NC) type only with push-push actuators.
Normally open contact with early make operation.
Normally closed contact with late break operation.
8 LM2T CF01

50 (1.97)
Mechanical and electric endurance

Operating force: 0.5kg / 1.1lb (contact elements).
Electrical life:
LM2T C10
1,000,000 cycles
LM2T CF10
1,000,000 cycles
LM2T C01
1,000,000 cycles
LM2T CF01
1,000,000 cycles
LM2T C10A
600,000 cycles
LM2T C01D
600,000 cycles.
UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
65
(2.56)
42.4 (1.67)
30
(1.18)
Maximum conductor cross section for screw terminals

8 LM2T CF10
22.3
(0.88)
When using Faston, pitch is 90mm/3.5 minimum.
Dimensions
page 7-47
Wiring diagrams
page 7-49
7-39

Lamp-holders elements
without mounting adapter
Order code
Rated
Type of
auxiliary
bulb
supply voltage supplied
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V] 50/60Hz
[kg]
415VAC/DC No
10
0.011
10
0.015
Direct supply.
8 LM2T EL400
With resistor and diode.

8 LM2T ZL230
8 LM2T EL400
8 LM2T ZL230
8 LM2T YL...
8 LM2T GL...
230VAC
Yes
130V, 2W
With transformer.
8 LM2T YL110
110-120VAC Yes
24V, 1.2W
0.086
8 LM2T YL230
220-240VAC Yes
24V, 1.2W
0.084
8 LM2T YL400
380-415VAC Yes
24V, 1.2W
0.087
Flashing.
Lamp-holders elements
with mounting adapter
8 LM2T GL048 24-48VAC
No
0.027
8 LM2T GL230 110-230VAC
No
0.027
Rated
Type of
auxiliary
bulb
supply voltage supplied
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V] 50/60Hz
[kg]
Order code
415VAC/DC No
230VAC
Yes
130V, 2W
Wiring diagrams
Direct supply
LM2T EL400
LM2T DL400
10
0.032
8 LM2T XL110
110-120VAC Yes
24V, 1.2W
0.105
8 LM2T XL230
220-240VAC Yes
24V, 1.2W
0.103
8 LM2T XL400
380-415VAC Yes
24V, 1.2W
0.106
Test element
for lamp-holders without
mounting adapter
8 LM2T FL048 24-48VAC
No
0.046
8 LM2T FL230 110-230VAC
No
0.046
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
10
0.011
Order code
Description
Test element
Filament bulb, BA9s U130VAC/DC max 2.6W (not supplied); maximum

dimensions 11x28 mm (0.4x1.1). For higher voltages, use neon bulbs.
Not suitable for 3-position selectors.

Filament bulb, BA9s (not supplied); maximum dimensions 11x28mm
8 LM2T T100
7-40
(0.4x1.1). Suitable for AC duty only.

Use bulbs with rated voltage equal to that of the power supply.
E.g.: With LM2T FL230, use 110VAC bulbs if power supply is 110VAC and
230VAC bulbs if power supply 230VAC. 2.6W max bulb rating.
MultiLED bulbs must not be fitted.
In case of test circuits for lamp-holders having load in parallel, two
LM2T T100 elements are required for each bulb.
Refer to the wiring diagram attached to the product or consult Customer
Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
In case of neon bulbs, consult Customer Service; see contact details on
inside front cover.
Only use with lamp-holder elements:
With direct supply
With resistor and diode
LED LM2T LB and LM2T MB types.
Not suitable for use with test element.
Dimensions
page 7-47 and 48
X2
X1
X2
X1
X5
TEST

Certifications obtained: RINA, LROS, GOST, CCC,
Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Test element for lamp-holders.

8 LM2T T100
With resistor and diode

X1
LM2T ZL230
LM2T VL230
Flashing
LM2T GL...
LM2T FL...
X2
Flashing.
8 LM2T XL... - 8 LM2T FL...
X1
X2
Test element
LM2T T100
With transformer.
8 LM2T DL400 - 8 LM2T VL230

1 o 2 2.5mm2 or AWG 12 cables.
0.029
10
With resistor and diode.

8 LM2T VL230
Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Type: 8 LM2T AU120.
The adapter is fixed on the mounting surface by means of
incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft) also
internally on LPZ control station covers.
With transformer
LM2T YL... X1
LM2T XL...
Direct supply.
8 LM2T DL400
Operating supply voltage limits for all types:
-15+10% Ue
Lamp-holder elements snap onto the adapter
Only lamp-holder elements LM2T DL400,
LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400 and LM2T ZL230 can be
used with LPZ control stations
Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm/1.57lbft
Ambient conditions:
Degree of protection per IEC/EN: IP20.
Wiring diagrams
page 7-49

LED elements steady light
Order code
Supply voltage
LED
colour
[V]
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Screw termination.
8 LM2T L...
8 LM2T LB3 18-30VAC/DC
Green
10
0.016
8 LM2T LB4
Red
10
0.016
8 LM2T LB5
Yellow
10
0.016
8 LM2T LB6
Blue
10
0.016
8 LM2T LB8
White
10
0.016
Green
10
0.016
8 LM2T LE3
85-140VAC
8 LM2T LE4
Red
10
0.016
8 LM2T LE5
Yellow
10
0.016
8 LM2T LE6
Blue
10
0.016
8 LM2T LE8
White
10
0.016
Green
10
0.016
8 LM2T LM3
187-265VAC
8 LM2T LM4
Red
10
0.016
8 LM2T LM5
Yellow
10
0.016
8 LM2T LM6
Blue
10
0.016
8 LM2T LM8
White
10
0.016
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
Mounting adapter
See page 7-39.
Type: 8 LM2T AU120.
The adapter is fixed on the mounting surface by means of
incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft) also
internally on LPZ control station covers.
[kg]

Only LM2T LB type is suitable for use with LM2T T100 test element.
LED elements flashing light
Order code
Supply voltage
LED
colour
[V]
Wiring diagram
Screw termination.
8 LM2T MB3 18-30VAC/DC
8 LM2T M...
Green
10
0.016
8 LM2T MB4
Red
10
0.016
8 LM2T MB5
Yellow
10
0.016
8 LM2T MB6
Blue
10
0.016
8 LM2T MB8
White
10
0.016
Green
10
0.016
8 LM2T ME3
85-140VAC
8 LM2T ME4
Red
10
0.016
8 LM2T ME5
Yellow
10
0.016
8 LM2T ME6
Blue
10
0.016
8 LM2T ME8
White
10
0.016
Green
10
0.016
8 LM2T MM3
187-265VAC
Supply voltage:
8 LM2T L types:
12-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 187-265VAC
8 LM2T M types:
18-30VAC/DC; 85-140VAC; 187-265VAC
Maximum consumption:
17mA (12-30 / 18-30VAC/DC); 20mA (85-140VAC);
17mA (185-265VAC)
Protection:
Snap onto LPX AU120 mounting adapter in the middle
position for each illuminated actuator, also internally
on the LPZ control station cover
No other element can be stacked behind LED elements
Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm/1.57lbft
Ambient conditions:
Degree of protection: IP20.
8 LM2T MM4
Red
10
0.016
8 LM2T MM5
Yellow
10
0.016
8 LM2T MM6
Blue
10
0.016
8 LM2T MM8
White
10
0.016
X2
X1

Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC, UL Listed for USA and
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14-95.
Only LM2T MB type is suitable for use with LM2T T100 test element.
Dimensions
page 7-47 and 48
Wiring diagrams
pag. 7-49
7-41

COMBINATIONS FOR METAL SERIES PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T AU...
LM2T B10...
LM2T B11...
LM2T B20...
LM2T B21...
LM2T B30...
LM2T AU170
LM2T AU170
LM2T AU140
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS
LM2T C10A
LM2T C01
LM2T Q10...
LM2T Q20...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T AU170
NORMAL STOPPING MUSHROOM-HEAD BUTTONS

LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T B614..
LM2T B616...
LM2T B634...
LM2T B654...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU170
LM2T AU...
LM2T AU170
LM2T AU140
MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH BUTTONS

LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T B624...
LM2T B6644
LM2T AU170
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T B71...
LM2T B72...
TRIPLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T B73...
SELECTOR SWITCHES
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T S1...
7-42
LM2T S2...
LM2T S3...
LM2T AU170

COMBINATION FOR METAL SERIES ILLUMINATED PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T L... - LM2T M...

LM2T DL400 - LM2T EL400
LM2T VL230 - LM2T ZL230
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T BL10...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T BL20...
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS
LM2T AU170
LM2T AU...
LM2T YL...
LM2T GL...
LM2T XL...
LM2T FL...
LM2T L...
LM2T M...
LM2T EL400
LM2T ZL230
LM2T AU170
LM2T C10A
LM2T C01
LM2T C10A
LM2T C01
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU120
LM2T QL10...
LM2T YL...
LM2T GL...
LM2T XL...
LM2T FL...
LM2T AU170
LM2T QL20...
MUSHROOM-HEAD SPRING-RETURN BUTTON
LM2T AU170
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T L... - LM2T M...

LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T BL614...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU170
LM2T AU...
LM2T YL...
LM2T GL...
LM2T XL...
LM2T FL...
MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH BUTTON
LM2T AU170
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T L... - LM2T M...

LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T BL624...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU...
LM2T AU...
LM2T AU...
LM2T YL...
LM2T GL...
LM2T XL...
LM2T FL...
LM2T AU170
LM2T AU170
LM2T L... - LM2T M...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T AU120
LM2T BL71...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T BL72...
2-POSITION SELECTOR SWITCHES
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T L... - LM2T M...

LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T AU...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T SL12...
LM2T AU170
LM2T YL...
LM2T GL...
LM2T XL...
LM2T FL...
LM2T AU170
3-POSITION SELECTOR SWITCHES

LM2T L... - LM2T M...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T SL13...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T AU170
7-43

series dimensions [mm (in)]
PLATINUM SERIES PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
30
(1.18)
20.1
(0.79)
30
(1.18)
10
(0.39)
40 (1.57)
29.5
(1.16)
62.8 (2.47)
35
(1.38)
1-6 max
(0.04-0.24 max)
n1 LPX AU120
ADD-ON
ELEMENTS
n1 LPX AU120
n1 LPX CF...
24.1 (+0.4, -0)

0,95 (0.02, -0)
67.5 (2.66)
40 (1.57)
ADD-ON
ELEMENTS
(possible LPX T...)
43
(1.69)
10
(0.39)
29.5
(1.16)
35
(1.38)
30
(1.18)
1-6 max
(0.04-0.24 max)
10
(0.39)
20.1
(0.79)
67.5 (2.66)
Flush pushbutton with Faston contact elements
30
(1.18)
10
(0.39)
Flush pushbutton with screw terminal contact or LED or test

elements
n1 LPX C...
n1 LPX... in middle
pos. on LPX AU120 adapter
3.2 (+0.2, -0)
22.3 (+0.4, -0)
0.12(+0.01, -0)
0.88(+0.02, -0)
When Faston contacts are used, the vertical

pitch must be 85mm(3.35) minimum.
Mushroom-head pushbutton with auto-monitor contacts

LPX C02SM
43
(1.69)
LPX C01SM
43
(1.69)
LPX AU120
Flush pushbutton with test element and spring-clamp terminal

contact or LED elements LPX CS... - LPX LPS...
24.1 (+0.4, -0)

0,95 (0.02, -0)
29.5
(1.16)
41.5
(1.63)
LPX AU120
30
(1.18)
55
(2.16)
55
(2.16)
10
(0.39)
LPX C02SM
30
(1.18)
10
(0.39)
ADD-ON
ELEMENTS
(possible LPX T)
43
(1.69)
41
(1.61)
Drillings Minimum recommended distances with

spring-clamp terminal contact or LED elements
20.1
(0.79)
67.5 (2.66)
1-6 max
(0.04-0.24 max)
20.1
(0.79)
41
(1.61)
30
(1.18)
30
(1.18)
30
(1.18)
1-6max
(0.04-0.24max)
50
(1.97)
37
(1.46)
35
(1.38)
41
(1.61)
30
(1.18)
45.6
(1.79)
41
(1.61)
30
(1.18)
20.1
(0.79)
50
(1.97)
37
(1.46)
35
(1.38)
1-6max
(0.04-0.24max)
30
(1.18)
20
(0.79)
LPX C01SM
30
(1.18)
n1 LPX AU120
n1 LPX CS...
n1 LPX LPS... in middle pos.
of LPX AU120 adapter
3.2 (+0.2, -0)
22.3 (+0.4, -0)
0.12(+0.01, -0)
0.88(+0.02, -0)
Pushbutton actuators
10
(0.39)
14.5
(0.57)
29.5
(1.16)
29.5
(1.16)
29.5
(1.16)
16.7
(0.66)
Flush
Push-push
Extended
Push-push
Shrouded
LPC B1...
LPC Q1...
LPX Q0
LPC B2...
LPC Q2...
LPC B30...
LPX B3
Illuminated extended Illuminated push-push
LPC BL2...
LPC QL2...
LPX QL0
LPC QL1...
Reset button (complete unit)
Mushroom-head button actuators
22.8
(0.90)
29.5
(1.16)
150 (5.90)
24.1
(0.95)
24.1
(0.95)
16.9
(0.66)
10.2
(0.40)
60
(2.36)
LPC BL1...
LPX B0
Complete with cap or lens.
40
(1.57)
Illuminated flush
150 (5.90)
Flush
Extended
LPC R1...
LPC R2004
Spring return
Spring return
LPC B614...
LPC B616...
Illuminated spring return
LPC BL614...
Mushroom-head latch button actuators
Turn to release
Push-pull
Turn to release
Turn key to release
LPC B674...
LPC B634...
LPC B684...
41
(1.61)
41
(1.61)
24
(0.94)
LPC B6634
40
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
41
(1.61)
30
(1.18)
36.4
(1.43)
41
(1.61)
40
(1.57)
Turn to release
LPC B6644
Illuminated turn to release
LPC BL664...
7-44

22.3
(0.88)
27.5
(1.08)
29.5
(1.16)
29.5
(1.16)
27.3
(1.07)
Knob
Key
LPC S1...
LPC S3...
Illuminated knob
LPC SL1...
29.5
(1.16)
15.7
(0.62)
54 (2.12)
30
(1.18)
10
(0.4
LPC B73...
3.2 (+0.2, -0)
22.3 (+0.4, -0)
0.12(+0.01, -0)
87 (3.42")
28.9
(1.14)
29.5
(1.16)
29.5
(1.16)
16
(0.63)
1-6max
(0.04-0.24max)
LPX AU109
LM2T A...2...
Double/triple button boot

30.7
(1.21)
LPX AU157
CONTROL STATIONS WITHOUT ACTUATORS

LPZ P1 A8
15
(0.59)
28.5
(1.12)
90 (3.54)
Cable gland
Padlockable protection for

mushroom-head latch buttons
except LPC B634...
Rubber boot for

mushroom-head buttons
41.5
(1.63)
49
(1.93)
45
(1.77)
CH24
M20
LPX P01
LPX AU158
LPX AU167
LPZ P2 A8
35
(1.38)
Knockout for
M16/PG11
(left side)
56 (2.20)
117 (4.61)
(0 4.8
.1
9
)
60.4 (2.38)
58 (2.28)
(0 4.8
.1
9
)
72 (2.83)
56 (2.20)
72 (2.83)
60.4 (2.38)
45 (1.77)
Knockout for
M16/PG11
.3 )
4 .17
(0
72 (2.83)
4.8
(0.19)
LPX AU114
LPX AU115
LPX AU118
LPX AU112
LPX AU113
.3 )
4 .17
(0
.3 )
4 .17
(0
22.3
60.4 (2.38)
58 (2.28)
1.5
(0.06)
LPX AU108
16.8
(0.66)
31
(1.22)
31
(1.22)
LPX AU14...
LPX AU105
55.2 (2.17)
18.2
(0.72)
13.7
(0.54)
26.5
(1.04)
8.4
(0.33)
Rubber boot for

extended buttons
LPX AU13...
1.5
(0.06)
Plastick disk for mushroom-head pushbuttons
Label
105,4 (4.15)
90 (3.54)
Rubber boot for flush

buttons
27.5
(1.08)
30
(1.18)
27
(1.06)
48 (1.89)
LPX AU100
LM2T AU185
Label holder
43
(1.69)
LPX A130
Label
45 (1.77)
36
(1.42)
29
(1.14)
27.5
(1.08)
21.9
(0.86")
LPX S...
15.3
(0.60)
30
(1.18)
28
(1.10)
12.1
(0.48)
Label holder
Threaded plug for Knob selector

unused drilled
switch protection
holes
21.3
(0.84)
LP2T ZG...
6.4
(0.25)
8 LP2T IL...P
12.4
(0.49)
LPL...
4.8 (0.19)
22.3
(0.88)
Knockout for
M16/PG11
.3 )
4 .17
(0
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
Knockout for
M20/PG13.5
(one/side)
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
CH24 = Spanner/Wrench size 24
7-45
60 (2.36)
36
(1.42)
10.8
(0.52)
28.5
(1.12)
38.4
(1.51)
Interface connectors
29.5
(1.16")
10.8
(0.52)
Monoblock buzzers
34.7
(1.37")
LED-integrated monoblock
pilot lights - steady light
0.88(+0.02, -0)
28.1
9
(0.35) (1.11)
LPC B72... LPC BL72...
Pilot light head
11.2
(0.44")
54 (2.12)
LPC B71... LPC BL71...
30
(1.18)
16.5
(0.65)
54 (2.12)
29.5
(1.16)
55
(2.16)
55
(2.16)
29.5
10.2
(1.16) (0.40)
Triple-touch actuators with

middle extended button
24.1 (+0.4, -0)

0,95 (0.02, -0)
Double-touch actuators
with or without indicator
1 flush and 1 extended buttons
2 flush buttons

CONTROL STATIONS WITHOUT ACTUATORS
LPZ P3 A8
151 (5.94)
174.4 (6.87)
159 (6.26)
Knockout for
M20/PG13.5
(two/side)
.3 )
4 .17
(0
4.8 (0.19)
22.3
(0.88)
Knockout for
M16/PG11
.3 )
4 .17
(0
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
56 (2.20)
35
(1.38)
4.8 (0.19)
22.3
(0.88)
Knockout for
M16/PG11
60.4 (2.38)
58 (2.28)
(0 4.8
.1
9
)
72 (2.83)
Knockout for
M20/PG13.5
(two/side)
151 (5.94)
139.4 /5.49)
124 (4.88)
35
(1.38)
LPZ P4 A8
56 (2.20)
(0 4.8
.1
9
)
60.4 (2.38)
58 (2.28)
.3 )
4 .17
(0
.3 )
4 .17
(0
72 (2.83)
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
LPZ P6 A8
72 (2.83)
60.4 (2.38)
58 (2.28)
56 (2.20)
Knockout for
M20/PG13.5
(two/side)
240,4 (9.46)
225 (8.86)
220 (8.66)
208.4 (8.20)
193 (7.60)
(0 4.8
.1
9
)
56 (2.20)
Knockout for
M20/PG13.5
(two/side)
35
(1.38)
252 (9.92)
60.4 (2.38)
58 (2.28)
.3 )
4 .17
(0
.3 )
4 .17
(0
72 (2.83)
(0 4.8
.1
9
)
LPZ P5 A8
35
(1.38)
4.8 (0.19)
22.3
(0.88)
4.8 (0.19)
.3 )
4 .17
(0
Knockout for
M16/PG11
22.3
(0.88)
.3 )
4 .17
(0
Knockout for
M16/PG11
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
CONTROL STATIONS WITH ONE ACTUATOR

LPZ P1 B8 01
4.8
(0.19)
37.2
(1.46)
Knockout for
M16/PG11
40
(1.57)
72 (2.83)
40
(1.57)
72 (2.83)
Top view for all LPZ P1...

Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
Knockout for
M16/PG11
(left side)
Knockout for
M16/PG11
(left side)
4.8
(0.19)
72 (2.83)
56 (2.20)
Knockout for
M16/PG11
41.4
(1.63)
40
(1.57)
4.8
(0.19)
60.4 (2.38)
58 (2.28)
60.4 (2.38)
45 (1.77)
72
.3 )
4 .17
(0
Knockout for
M16/PG11
37.2
(1.46)
40
(1.57)
72 (2.83)
60.4 (2.38)
45 (1.77)
56 (2.20)
.3 )
4 .17
(0
60.4 (2.38)
58 (2.28)
.3 )
4 .17
(0
4.8
(0.19)
7-46
4.8
(0.19)
56 (2.20)
LPZ P1 B5 03
.3 )
4 .17
(0
72 (2.83)
4.8
(0.19)
LPZ P1 B5 02
60.4 (2.38)
58 (2.28)
.3 )
4 .17
(0
Knockout for
M16/PG11
72 (2.83)
41.4
(1.63)
Knockout for
M16/PG11
(left side)
.3 )
4 .17
(0
4.8
(0.19)
56 (2.20)
60.4 (2.38)
45 (1.77)
4.8
(0.19)
LPZ P1 B8 02
60.4 (2.38)
45 (1.77)
60.4 (2.38)
58 (2.28)
.3 )
4 .17
(0
.3 )
4 .17
(0
72 (2.83)
Knockout for
M16/PG11
(left side)

8 LM2T 22mm metal series dimensions [mm (in)]
METAL PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
1-6 max
(0.04-0.24 max)
65 (2.56)
29.8
(1.17)
ADD-ON
ELEMENTS
n1 LM2T C... - LM2T E... - LM2T T...

n1 LM2T VL230 - LM2T ZL230
n1 LM2T DL400... - LM2T EL400
n1 LM2T L... - LM2T M...
50 (1.97)
13.8
(0.54)
n1 LM2T AU120
n1 LM2T AU120
ADD-ON
ELEMENTS
30
(1.18)
43 (1.69)
20.3
(0.80)
42.4
(1.67)
22.7
(0.89)
66 (2.60)
42.4
(1.67)
13.8
(0.54)
29.8
(1.17)
30
(1.18)
10
(0.39)
1-6 max
(0.04-0.24 max)
43 (1.69)
20.3
(0.80)
Flush pushbutton with Faston contact elements
30
(1.18)
22.7
(0.89)
42.4
(1.67)
10
(0.39)
Flush pushbutton with contact or lamp-holder elements

(direct or resistor-diode type) or test element
n1 LM2T CF...
22.3 (+0.4, -0)
0.88(+0.02, -0)
When Faston contacts are used, the vertical

pitch must be 90mm (3.54) minimum.
Pushbutton actuators
13.8
(0.54)
20.9
(0.82)
29.8
(1.17)
29.8
(1.17)
29.8
(1.17)
20.5
(0.81)
Flush
Extended
LM2T B1...
LM2T B2...
LM2T B30...
Push-push
Push-push
Illuminated flush
LM2T Q1...
Shrouded
LM2T Q2...
LM2T BL1...
Illuminated extended
LM2T BL2...
LM2T QL1...
LM2T QL2...
Reset button (complete unit)
20.9
140 max
(5.51 max) 19.1 (0.82)
(0.75)
13.8
(0.54)
20
(0.79)
LM2T R1...
29.8
(1.17)
42.4
(1.67)
42.4
(1.67)
29.8
(1.17)
140 max
(5.51 max) 19.1
(0.75)
LM2T R2004
20
(0.79)
Mushroom-head button actuators

32.6
(1.28)
35.5
(1.40)
40
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
60 (2.36)
29
(1.14)
40
(1.57)
29.2
(1.15)
28.5
(1.12)
Spring return
Spring return
Push-pull
Illuminated push-pull
Turn to release
LM2T B614...
LM2T B616...
L2T B624...
LM2T BL624...
LM2T B634...
Illuminated spring return
LM2T BL614...
24.2
(0.95)
40
(1.57)
49
(1.93)
Turn to release
LM2T B654...
LM2T B6644
2 flush buttons
28.5
(1.12)
12
(0.47)
12
((0.47)
LM2T B71...
LM2T BL71...
Triple-touch actuators with

middle extended button
LM2T B72... LM2T BL72...

30
(1.18)
28.5
(1.12)
16
(0.63)
54 (2.12)
54 (2.12)
54 (2.12)
28.5
(1.12)
1 flush and 1 extended buttons
12
(0 (0.47)
STOP
50 (1.97)
17.4
(0.68)
42.4
(1.67)
Turn key to release
80 (3.15)
40
(1.57)
33.8
(1.33)
LM2T B73...
22.3 (+0.4, -0)
0.88(+0.02, -0)
7-47

8 LM2T 22mm metal series dimensions [mm (in)]
Pilot light head
Illuminated knob
Lever
Key
LM2T SL1...
LM2T S2...
LM2T S3...
LM2T IL1...
Only for
LM2T J40
LM2T J20
22.7
(0.89)
1.5
(0.06)
Only for
LM2T J41
LM2T J21
20.1
(0.79)
LM2T J21... - LM2T J41...
ERGENCY
EM
ERGENCY
EM
28.5
(1.12)
15.1
(0.59)
27.5
(1.08)
60 (2.36)
12.2
(0.48)
48 (1.89)
15.4
(0.61)
27.5
(1.08)
Plastic disk for

mushroom-head pushbuttons
Label
30
(1.18)
27.8
(1.09)
28.5
(1.12)
Label holder
90 (3.54)
Label
STOP
LM2T A...
LM2T AU105
STOP
LM2T AU10...
LM2T AU113
LM2T AU14...
1-6 max
(0.04-0.24max)
42.4
(1.67)
37
(1.46)
42.4
(1.67)
55 (2.16)
25.2
(0.99)
30
(1.18)
7-48
1-6 max
(0.04-0.24 max)
43 (1.69)
20.3
(0.80)
43 (1.69)
20.3
(0.80)
LM2T EL400
LM2T DL400
LM2T ZL230
LM2T VL230
LM2T AU167
Transformer or flashing
lamp holder element
51.3 (2.02)
1-6 max
(0.04-0.24max)
30
(1.18)
1-6 max
(0.04-0.24max)
35
(1.38)
LM2T AU157
LED steady or flashing light

element
10 (0.39)
with direct supply or
resistor and diode
20.4
(0.80)
33.4
(1.31)
33.4
(1.31)
LM2T AU13...
LM2T L... - LM2T M...
IP66 boot for mushroomhead buttons
Threaded plug for

unused drilled holes
21.3
(0.84)
20.3
(0.80)
LM2T YL... - LM2T GL...

LM2T XL... - LM2T FL...
Knob selector switch

protection
27.5
(1.08)
29
(1.14)
30
(1.18)
25
(0.98)
18.1
(0.71)
IP66 boot for double/triple

touch buttons
44
(1.73)
IP66 boot for extended and

illuminated extended buttons
42.4
(1.67)
IP66 boot for flush and

illumined flush buttons
LM2T AU115
LM2T AU118
LM2T A130
36
(1.42)
LM2T AU100
10 (0.39)
43
42.4
(1.67)
70.5 (2.77)
20.1
(0.79)
LM2T J20... - LM2T J40...
45-6 (1.79)
12.4
(0.49)
1-6 max
(0.04-0.24 max)
29.5
(1.16)
1.5
(0.06)
30
(1.18)
29.5
(1.16)
30
(1.18)
10
(0.39)
43 (1.69)
22.7
(0.89)
70.5 (2.77)
29.8
(1.17)
27.8
(1.09)
LM2T P100
LM2T P110
Joystick with mechanical latch lever
42.4
(1.67)
10
(0.39)
Joystick with free actuation lever
Label holder
56.8 (2.24)
35
(1.38)
16.5
(0.65)
29.8
(1 17)
39.4
(1.55)
Knob
LM2T S1...
1-6 max
(0.04-0.24 max)
23.9
(0.94)
27.5
(1.08)
29.8
(1.17)
27.5
(1.08)
29.8
(1.17)
29.8
(1.17)
27.5
(1.08)
29.8
(1.17)
27.5
(1.08)
Potentiometer drive
LM2T AU185

Wiring diagrams
FOR PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
LPX C10 - LPX E10 - LPX CF10
LPX C10A
LPX CS10 - LPX CB10
LM2T C10A
LM2T C10 - LM2T E10
3
LP2T IL...P
LPX L...
X1
LPX C01 - LPX E01 - LPX CF01

LPX CS01 - LPX CB01
LPZ P1 B... - LM2T C01
LPX C01D
LM2T C01D
.3
.1
.3
.1
.1
.4
.2
.4
.2
.2
LP2T ZG...
LPX T100
X1
X1
LPX C01SM
LPX C02SM
LPX T101
LPX T102
X1
7
X5
LM2T EL400
LM2T DL400
X5
X2
X5
LM2T ZL230
LM2T VL230
LM2T YL...
LM2T XL...
LM2T GL...
LM2T FL...
LM2T T100
LM2T L...
LM2T M...
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X2
X2
X2
X2
X5
TEST
X5
7-49
Page 8-2
SIGNAL TOWERS
Signal towers 70mm
Steady, blinking light or flash modules
Pulsed or continuous sound modules
Incandescent and LED bulbs.
Page 8-3
SIGNAL BEACONS
Signal beacons 62mm
Blinking or steady light modules
Sound-light pulsed or continuous modules
Incandescent and LED bulbs.
SIGNAL
TOWERS AND BEACONS
Signal towers 70mm

Modular and combinations up to
7 modules
Steady or blinking light, pulsed or
continuous sound modules.
Signal beacons 62mm
Steady or blinking light, pulsed or
continuous sound modules.
8 - 2
8 - 3
8 - 4
Dimensions .................................................................................................................
Wiring diagrams ...........................................................................................................
8 - 6
8 - 7
AND
Signal towers 70mm / 2.75 .......................................................................................................................................

Signal beacons 62mm / 2.44 .....................................................................................................................................
Accessorios .....................................................................................................................................................................
S IGNALLING
SEC. - PAGE
C ONTROL

Signal towers
70mm / 2.75
Order code
Description
Qty per Wt
pkg
n
[kg]
Steady light modules BA15d fitting.

Bulb (8 LT7 ALB... and 8 LT7 ALL...) not included.
8 LT7 EL1
Orange
8 LT7 EL3
Green
0.082
0.082
8 LT7 EL4
Red
0.082
8 LT7 EL5
Yellow
0.082
8 LT7 EL6
Blue
0.082
8 LT7 EL8
White
0.082
Blinking light modules. BA15d fitting.

Bulb (8 LT7 ALB... and 8 LT7ALL...) not included.
8 LT7 GL B1 Orange, 24VAC/DC
8 LT7 GL B3 Green, 24VAC/DC
0.083
0.083
8 LT7 GL B4 Red, 24VAC/DC
0.083
8 LT7 GL B5 Yellow, 24VAC/DC
0.083
8 LT7 GL B6 Blue, 24VAC/DC
0.083
8 LT7 GL B8 White, 24VAC/DC
0.083
8 LT7 GL E1 Orange, 110-120VAC
0.083
8 LT7 GL E3 Green, 110-120VAC
0.083
8 LT7 GL E4 Red, 110-120VAC
0.083
8 LT7 GL E5 Yellow,110-120VAC
0.083
8 LT7 GL E6 Blue, 110-120VAC
0.083
8 LT7 GL E8 White, 110-120VAC
0.083
8 LT7 GL M1 Orange, 230-240VAC
0.083
8 LT7 GL M3 Green, 230-240VAC
0.083
8 LT7 GL M4 Red, 230-240VAC
0.083
8 LT7 GL M5 Yellow, 230-240VAC
0.083
8 LT7 GL M6 Blue, 230-240VAC
0.083
8 LT7 GL M8 White, 230-240VAC
0.083
0.092
Signal towers are fundamental elements in
manufacturing processes for the visual and audible
signalling of the system status.
The signal towers can be assembled by stacking up to
7 modules, in the following sequence, starting from the
top: red, yellow, orange, blue, green and white.
The sound module, if any, must always be positioned at
the top of the signal tower.
Maximum operational voltage: 250VAC/DC
Consumption of flash and sound modules:
LT7 FL B... in AC: 135mA
LT7 FL B... in DC: 75mA
LT7 FL E...: 20mA
LT7 FL M...: 15mA
LT7 S0 B: 25mA
LT7 S1 B: 40mA
LT7 S2 B: 200mA
LT7 S2 E: 40mA
LT7 S2 M: 30mA
Material: Polycarbonate or anodised aluminium
Connections: Screw clamp terminals, maximum
1.5mm2/16 AWG conductor section
Tightening torque: 0.5Nm/4.5lbin
Operating temperature: -20...+50C; for 12VAC max up
to +40C
Number of stackable elements: Seven.
Degree of protection IEC/EN: IP65; IP54 for 8 LT7 S0B
sound module.
Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - file E318016) as Power Circuit and
motor-mounted Apparatus - Stackable tower lights.
IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Combinations
0.092
8 LT7 FL B5 Yellow, 24VAC/DC
0.092
8 LT7 FL B6 Blue, 24VAC/DC
0.092
8 LT7 FL B8 White, 24VAC/DC
0.092
8 LT7 FL E1 Orange, 110-120VAC
0.092
0.092
I M
8 LT7 FL B4 Red, 24VAC/DC
Cover
(supplied with
LT7 CM 01 and
LT7 CP 01 module)
LT7 S
0.092
0.092
8 LT7 FL E5 Yellow, 110-120VAC
0.092
8 LT7 FL E6 Blue, 110-120VAC
0.092
8 LT7 FL E8 White, 110-120VAC
0.092
8 LT7 FL M1 Orange, 230-240VAC
0.092
8 LT7 FL M3 Green, 230-240VAC
0.092
8 LT7 FL M4 Red, 230-240VAC
0.092
8 LT7 FL M5 Yellow, 230-240VAC
0.092
8 LT7 FL M6 Blue, 230-240VAC
0.092
8 LT7 FL M8 White, 230-240VAC
0.092
Pulsed or continuous sound modules complete with cover.

8 LT7 S0 B
24VAC/DC, pulsed (90dB).

IP54 protection
0.240
24VAC/DC, 16 sound tones

(80dB max). IP65 protection
8 LT7 S2 B 24VAC/DC pulsed (78dB)
or continuous
8 LT7 S2 E 110-120VAC
(75dB)sound
8 LT7 S2 M 230-240VAC IP65 protection
Connection modules complete with cover.
0.240
0.240
0.240
0.240
8 LT7 CP 01 For plastic tubes, black

colour, bottom entry
0.110
8 LT7 CM 01 For metal tubes, black colour, 1

bottom entry
0.120
8 LT7 S1 B
LT7 CM 01
LT7 CP 01
E N
8 LT7 FL E4 Red, 110-120VAC

page 8-4
Dimensions
pages 8-6 and 7
LT7ALL
(LED bulb)
Connection module
LT7CM 01 (metal)
LT7CP 01(plastic)
LT7BP 01
(plastic)
LT7TM
(metal)
LT7BM 01
(metal)
Fixing base and extension tubes
84.5dB for 8 LT7 S2 B.

82.6dB for 8 LT7 S2 B.
8-2
LT7ALB
(incandescent
bulb)
LT7 L
LT7 L
LT7 L
E L E M
8 LT7 FL E3 Green, 110-120VAC
LT7 EL
LT7 GL
LT7 FL
T S
8 LT7 FL B3 Green, 24VAC/DC
Sound module
(always on top)
LT7S
8 LT7 FL B1 Orange, 24VAC/DC
Flash modules. With 4-Joule xenon bulb.
Wiring diagrams
page 8-7
LT7BM 02
(metal)
LT7BP 02
(plastic)

Signal beacons
62mm / 2.44
Order code
Description
Qty per Wt
pkg
n
[kg]
0.060
Steady light modules. BA15d fitting.

Bulb not included.
8 LB6 EL1
Orange
8 LB6 EL3
Green
0.060
8 LB6 EL4
Red
0.060
8 LB6 EL5
Yellow
0.060
8 LB6 EL6
Blu2
0.060
8 LB6 EL8
White
0.060
Blinking or steady light modules. BA15d fitting.

Bulb not included.
8 LB6 GL B1 Orange, 12-48VAC/DC
0.060
8 LB6 GL B3 Green, 12-48VAC/DC
0.060
8 LB6 GL B4 Red, 12-48VAC/DC
0.060
8 LB6 GL B5 Yellow, 12-48VAC/DC
0.060
Signal beacons are fundamental elements in
manufacturing processes for the visual and audible
signalling of the system status.
Maximum operational voltage: 250VAC/DC
Consumption of sound modules LB6 S2...: 150mA
Material: Polycarbonate
Connections: Screw clamp terminals, maximum
1.5mm2/16 AWG conductor section
Degree of protection IEC/EN: IP54; IP30 if used with
8 LB6 BP 04, 8 LB6 BP 06 or 8 LB6 BP 08.
Reference standards
IEC/EN 60947-1.
Combinations
8 LB6 GL B6 Blue, 12-48VAC/DC
0.060
8 LB6 GL B8 White, 12-48VAC/DC
0.060
Light and sound modules
8 LB6 GL M1 Orange, 24-230VAC
0.060
LB6 EL - LB6 GL - LB6 S2B
8 LB6 GL M3 Green, 24-230VAC
0.060
8 LB6 GL M4 Red, 24-230VAC
0.060
8 LB6 GL M5 Yellow, 24-230VAC
0.060
8 LB6 GL M6 Blue, 24-230VAC
0.060
8 LB6 GL M8 White, 24-230VAC
0.060
8
6
Fixing base and extension tubes
Sound-light pulsed or continuous modules. Bulb included.

8 LB6 S2 B1 Orange, 24VAC/DC (80dB)
0.060
8 LB6 S2 B3 Green, 24VAC/DC (80dB)
0.060
8 LB6 S2 B4 Red, 24VAC/DC (80dB)
0.060
8 LB6 S2 B5 Yellow, 24VAC/DC (80dB)
0.060
8 LB6 S2 B6 Blue, 24VAC/DC (80dB)
0.060
8 LB6 S2 B8 White, 24VAC/DC (80dB)
0.060
LB6 BP 03
LB6 BP 04
LB6 BP 07
LB6 BP 05
LB6 BP 06
LT7 ALB
(incandescent bulb)
LT7 ALL
(LED Bulb)
LB6 BP 08
LT7 TP0100
LT7 BP 01
(plastic)
LT7 BP 02
(plastic)
Only for sound-light modules.
LB6 EL
LB6 GL
LB6 S2...
Visual code
Red
Yellow Orange Blue
Green
White
Meaning
Danger.
Emergency.
Warning and
Caution.
Abnormal
situation.
Mandatory
command.
Normal
situation.
Regular
operation.
No specific
meaning.
Sound
Fast modulated Continuous

repetition or
short sound.
high-pitch
pulsing.
Alternating
sound at.
constant tone
Constant and
prolonged
sound
after an alarm.
Other sounds.
Correlated
actions
Immediate
intervention
to deal with
dangerous
situation.
Intervention
needed for
mandatory
action.
No specific
action.
Depending on
the situation.

page 8-4
Control
intervention
required.
Dimensions
pages 8-6 and 7
Wiring diagrams
page 8-7
Interpretation of light and sound signals for signal

towers and beacons
Light and sound signals are a fundamental element for
the safety of a system.
To avoid incorrect interpretations, a European standard
has been introduced defining an equivocal meaning to
visual or audible signalling devices.
Each colour or sound alarm corresponds to a specific
state of operation of the connected system and various
levels of warning, as given in the following table,
according to EN 981-IEC/EN 60073 standards.
The white coloured module does not have a specific
meaning so it can be used as one may need.
8-3

Accessories and spare
parts for signal towers and
beacons
Order code
Description
Qty per Wt
pkg
n
[kg]
Fixing bases.
8 LT7 BP 01
Horizontal surface mount, 1

black plastic
with 100mm/3.94
extension
0.045
8 LT7 BP 02
Vertical wall mount,

black plastic
0.078
The assembly operation of the signal towers is simple
and fast and does not require the use of any tools.
The fixing of each element on top of the other is obtained
by the bayonet insert joint, with slight pressure and
simple rotating movement. There are specific white
inscriptions to indicate the correct alignment.
Extension tube for plastic base, stackable sections.

8 LT7 TP 0100
LT7 BP 01
100mm/3.94,
black plastic
0.029
0.006
Incandescent bulb, 5W, BA15d fitting.

8 LT7 ALB A
12VAC/DC
10
8 LT7 ALB B
24VAC/DC
10
0.006
8 LT7 ALB E
130VAC/DC
10
0.006
8 LT7 ALB M
260VAC/DC
10
0.006
LED bulb, BA15d fitting.
8
LT7 BP 02
LT7 ALB
LT7 ALL
8 LT7 ALL A4
Red, 12VAC/DC
0,010
8 LT7 ALL A8
White, 12VAC/DC
0,010
8 LT7 ALL B3
Green, 24VAC/DC
0.010
8 LT7 ALL B4
Red, 24VAC/DC
0.010
8 LT7 ALL B5
Yellow/Orange, 24VAC/DC 1
0.010
8 LT7 ALL B6
Blue, 24VAC/DC
0.010
8 LT7 ALL B8
White, 24VAC/DC
0.010
8 LT7 ALL E3
Green, 110-120VAC
0.010
8 LT7 ALL E4
Red, 110-120VAC
0.010
8 LT7 ALL E5
Yellow/Orange, 110-120VAC 1
0.010
8 LT7 ALL E6
Blue, 110-120VAC
0.010
8 LT7 ALL E8
White, 110-120VAC
0.010
8 LT7 ALL M3
Green, 230-240VAC
0.010
8 LT7 ALL M4
Red, 230-240VAC
0.010
8 LT7 ALL M5 Yellow/Orange, 230-240VAC 1
0.010
8 LT7 ALL M6
Blue, 230-240VAC
0.010
8 LT7 ALL M8
White, 230-240VAC
0.010
Used with yellow or orange light modules.

parts for signal towers
70mm / 2.75 only
LT7 BM 01
Order code
Description
Qty per Wt
pkg
n
8 LT7 BM 01

metal, black finish
0.099
8 LT7 BM 02
Vertical wall mount,

metal
0.184
Extension tubes for metal base, anodised aluminium,

fixed non-stackable sections.
8 LT7 TM 0100
100mm / 3.94
0.016
8 LT7 TM 0150
200mm / 7.9
0.024
8 LT7 TM 0300
300mm / 11.8
0.048
8 LT7 TM 0400
400mm / 15.75
0.064
8 LT7 TM 0500
500mm / 19.7
0.080
8 LT7 TM 1000
1000mm / 39.4
0.160
LT7 BM 02
LT7 TM
8-4
[kg]
Fixing bases.
Dimensions
page 8-7
1
2
Consumption of bulb fitted on light modules:
LT7 ALB A: 420mA
LT7 ALB B: 210mA
LT7 ALB E: 43mA
LT7 ALB M: 22mA
LT7 ALL A...: <60mA
LT7 ALL B...: <30mA
LT7 ALL E...: <20mA
LT7 ALL M...: <20mA.
Reference standards
IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.

parts for signal beacons
62mm / 2.44
Order code
Description
Qty per Wt
pkg
n
[kg]
Fixing bases for light modules.

8 LB6 BP 03

plastic, black colour
0.040
8 LB6 BP 05
For 22mm / 0.87

hole type, black plastic
0.040
8 LB6 BP 07
For extension
1
connection, plastic,
black colour. Use with
fixing bases 8 LT7 BP 01
and 8 LT7 BP 02
0.020
LB6 BP03
2
1
Fixing bases for sound modules.

8 LB6 BP 04

plastic, black colour
0.040
8 LB6 BP 06
For 22mm / 0.87

hole type, black plastic
0.040
8 LB6 BP 08
For extension
1
connection, plastic,
black colour. Use with
fixing bases 8 LT7 BP 01
and 8 LT7 BP 02
0.020
LB6 BP05
The assembly operation of the signal beacons is simple
and fast and does not require the use of any tools.
There are specific white marks to indicate the correct
alignment.
LB6 BP07
LB6 BP04
LB6 BP06
LB6 BP08
Dimensions
page 8-7
8-5

101.5 (4.00)
157.5 (6.20)
213.5 (8.40)
269.5 (10.61)
325.5 (12.81)
381.5 (15.02)
5 (0.20)
16
(0.63)
13
(0.51)
70 (2.75)
LT7 CM 01 - LT7 CP 01
7 (0.2
42 (1
.65)
7)
48
(1
.89
SIGNAL BEACONS 62mm / 2.44

LB6...
with base LB6 BP 05
and LB6 BP 06
37
(1.46)
62.5 (2.46)
17 (0.67)
23.5
(0.92)
31
(1.22)
22
(0.87)
85 (3.35)
62 (2.44)
62 (2.44)
62 (2.44)
32.5
(1.28)
65 (2.56)
5 (0.20)
22.3 (0.88)
(+0.4,-0 / +0.01, -0)
56.3
(22.17)
With slits for sound light modules LB6 S2...

1...4 (0.04...0.16)
8-6
LB6...
with base LB6 BP 07
and LB6 BP 08
62.5 (2.46)
LB6...
with base LB6 BP 03
and LB6 BP 04
62.5 (2.46)
62.5 (2.46)
LB6 EL...
LB6 GL...
LB6 S2...
Connection modules
LT7 CM 01
LT7 CP 01
60 (2.36)
45.5 (1.79)
72 (2.83)
70 (2.75)
453.9 (17.87)
473.5 (18.64)
70 (2.75)
LT7 S1...
LT7 S2...
60 (2.36)
56 (2.20)
LT7 S0 B
Sound modules
LT7 S0 B
92 (3.62)
LT7 EL...
LT7 GL...
LT7 FL...
LT7 S1...
LT7 S2...
Light modules
LT7 EL...
LT7 GL...
LT7 FL...
13
(0.51)
SIGNAL TOWERS 70mm / 2.75
70 (2.75)

ACCESSORIES - Extensions and bases
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
54 (2.12)
70 (2.75)
38 (1.50)
67 (2.64)
54 (2.12)
8
(0.31)
14.5
(0.57)
71 (2.79)
20
(0.79)
70 (2.75)
54 (2.12)
64.5 (2.54)
21
(0.83)
54 (2.12)
122 (4.80)
8
(0.31)
51 (2.01)
5
(0.20)
20
(0.79)
109 (4.29)
105 (4.13)
30
(1.18)
LT7 BM 02
9
(0.35)
20
(0.79)
18
(0.71)
20
(0.79)
LT7 BM 01
25
(0.98)
22 (0.87)
25
(0.98)
11
(0.43)
LT7 BP 02
LT7 BP 01
54 (2.12)
70 (2.75)
5
(0.20)
54 (2.12)
LT7 TP 0100
LT7 TM...
1000 (39.37) max
22
(0.87)
20
(0.79)
122 (4.80)
25
(0.98)
20
(0.79)
Wiring diagrams
SIGNAL TOWERS 70mm
LT7...
SIGNAL BEACONS 62mm

LB6...
X1
LT7 CM 01 - LT7 CP 01
BULB
BULB
7
X2
L
N
Connect terminals C and 1 as indicated

to power the first module. If other
modules are fitted, the respective
terminals must be connected accordingly.
8-7
Page 9-2
PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES
KB-KC TYPES
Dimensions to EN 50047 standards for KB type
Dimensions compatible to EN 50047 for KC type
Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic housing
Removable and interchangeable auxiliary contact
blocks
Bi-directional versions
Unique fixing mechanism of operating head
IEC degree of protection IP65
M20 cable entry; PG13.5 or 1/2 NPT entry
available.
Page 9-19
PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES
T SERIES
Dimensions to EN 50041 standards
Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic
housing
Heads rotatable in 4 different 90 angle
positions
PG13.5 cable entry.
Page 9-25
ROPE-PULL LEVER LIMIT SWITCHES
FOR EMERGENCY STOPPING
Compliant to ISO 13850 standards
IEC degree of protection IP65 and IP66
PG11 and PG13.5 cable entry.
Page 9-2
METAL LIMIT SWITCHES
KM-KN TYPES
Dimensions to EN 50047 standards for KM
type
Dimensions compatible to EN 50047 for KN
type
Aluminium-zinc alloy housing
Removable and interchangeable auxiliary
contact blocks
Bi-directional versions
Unique fixing mechanism of operating head
M20 cable entry; PG13.5 or 1/2 NPT entry
available.
Page 9-21
METAL LIMIT SWITCHES
PL SERIES
Maximum of 2 auxiliary contacts
PG11 cable entry.
Page 9-26
PLASTIC MICRO SWITCHES
KS TYPE
Polymer thermoplastic housing
Changeover contact switch
IEC degree of protection IP00 or IP20.
Page 9-18
PREWIRED METAL LIMIT SWITCHES
KP TYPE
Dimensions to EN 50047 stadards
2 metre long cable
IEC degree of protection IP67.
Page 9-23
ROPE-PULL LEVER LIMIT SWITCHES
FOR NORMAL STOPPING
housing
IEC degree of protection IP40, IP65 and
IP66
PG11 and PG13.5 cable entry.
Page 9-27
FOOT SWITCHES
Versions with or without protection cover
housing
M20 cable entry.
LIMIT, MICRO AND FOOT SWITCHES

Dimensions compatible to
EN 50047
Direct opening action of NC contacts
Extensive range of operating heads
Versions complete with
interchangeable and rotatable heads
Insertable and interchangeable
auxiliary contact blocks.
Metal and plastic limit switches, K series

(dimensions to/compatible to EN 50047)
Top push rod plunger ........................................................................................................................................................
Top roller push plunger ......................................................................................................................................................
Roller centre push lever .....................................................................................................................................................
Roller side push lever ........................................................................................................................................................
Roller lever ........................................................................................................................................................................
Adjustable roller lever ........................................................................................................................................................
Ceramic rod lever ..............................................................................................................................................................
Adjustable rod lever ...........................................................................................................................................................
Wobble stick, omnidirectional ............................................................................................................................................
Hinge operating .................................................................................................................................................................
Slotted lever ......................................................................................................................................................................
Key operated .....................................................................................................................................................................
Accessories and spare parts ..............................................................................................................................................
Prewired metal limit switches, K series ....................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
Plastic limit switches T series (dimensions to EN 50041)

Top push rod plunger and roller lever..................................................................................................................................
Wobble stick, omnidirectional and key operated .................................................................................................................
9 - 19
9 - 20
-
21
22
22
22
23
Rope-pull lever limit switches for emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant .................................................
Plastic micro switches, K series ..................................................................................................................................
Foot switches, K series ..................................................................................................................................................
9 - 25
9 - 27
Dimensions .................................................................................................................
Wiring diagrams ...........................................................................................................
9 - 28
9 - 35
9 - 26
AND
9
9
9
9
9
C ONTROL
Top push rod plunger, top roller push plunger, roller centre push lever ................................................................................
Latch and manual release ...................................................................................................................................................
Manual reload and magnetic release ..................................................................................................................................
Bi-directional ....................................................................................................................................................................
Rope-pull lever limit switches for normal stopping ................................................................................................
S IGNALLING
Metal limit switches, PL series

Limit switches, K series. One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047
Top push rod plunger
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Plunger Qty Wt
material per
pkg
n
[kg]
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047.

KB A1 S11
KM A1 S11 1NO+1NC Metal

Snap action
KB A1 S02
KM A1 S02 2NC
Metal
KB A1 A11
KM A1 A11 1NO+1NC
Metal
Snap action
Slow action make

before break
KB A1 L11
KM A1 L11 1NO+1NC
Slow action
Metal
KB A1 L02
KM A1 L02 2NC
Metal
KB A1 L20
KM A1 L20 2NO
Metal
KB A... - KM A...
Slow action
Slow action
KB A1 L12
KM A1 L12 1NO+2NC
Slow action
Metal
KB A1 L21
KM A1 L21 2NO+1NC
Slow action
Metal
KB A1 L03
KM A1 L03 3NC
Metal
Slow action
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047.

KC A1 S11
KN A1 S11
1NO+1NC Metal
Snap action
KC A1 S02
KN A1 S02
2NC
Metal
KC A1 A11
KN A1 A11
1NO+1NC
Metal
Snap action
Slow action make

before break
KC A... - KN A...
KC A1 L11
KN A1 L11
1NO+1NC
Slow action
Metal
KC A1 L02
KN A1 L02
2NC
Metal
KC A1 L20
KN A1 L20
2NO
Metal
Slow action
Slow action
; safety function according to

IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside
front cover.
Forward travel of snap action contacts
open
Return travel of snap action contacts
closed
K... S02
K... A11
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0
0
1.1
0.04
2.3
0.09
6mm
0.24
0
0
1.1
0.04
2.3
0.09
6mm
0.24
2.5
0.1
6mm
0.24
K... L11
2.1 3.3
0.08 0,13
6mm
0.24
21-22
11-12
K... L20
13-14
23-24
K... L12
K... L21
25-26
17-18
1.4
0.05
13-14
21-22
0
0
9-2
K... L02
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0
0
Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
Switching speed: 0.5-1.5m/s
Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
690VAC for KB-KC types
440VAC for KM-KN types
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
6kV for KB-KC types
4kV for KM-KN types
Class II insulation for KB-KC only
Contact resistance: <10m
Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
Housing:
KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
polymer thermoplastic
KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
1
/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Operating force: 5N / 1.1lb
Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
Tightening torque:
Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
Ambient conditions:
Operating temperature: -25 ... +70C
Storage temperature: -40 ... +70C
Pollution degree: 3
IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices Limit switches.
Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
M20 CABLE ENTRY

For types with PG13.5 cable entry,
add the letter P at the end of the order
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N.
E.g. KBA1S11P - KBA1S11N
K... S11
The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
sturdiness and constant reliability.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable.
The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
remove and reposition the operating head in the required
configuration with no tools.
The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
remarkable wiring ease.

pages 9-16 and 17
K... L03
0
0
2.4
0.09
6mm
0.24
0
0
2.4
0.09
6mm
0.24
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
0
2.2
3
0.09 0.12
6mm
0.24
0
0
2.4 2.8
0,09 0.11
6mm
0.24
0
0
2.2
0.09
6mm
0.24
31-32
23-24
13-14
11-12
21-22
31-32
Dimensions
page 9-28
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35

Top roller push plunger
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Roller Qty Wt
material per
pkg
11x4
[kg]

KB B1 S11
KB B... - KM B...
KB B2 S11
KM B1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic

KM B2 S11 Snap action Metal
KB B1 S02
KM B1 S02 2NC
Plastic
KB B2 S02
KM B2 S02 Snap action Metal
KB B1 A11
KM B1 A11 1NO+1NC
Plastic
KB B2 A11
KB B1 L11
KM B2 A11 Slow action make Metal

before break
KM B1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic

KM B2 L11 Slow action Metal
KB B2 L11
KB B1 L02
KM B1 L02 2NC
Plastic
KB B2 L02
5
5
KB B1 L20
KM B1 L20 2NO
Plastic
KB B2 L20
KM B2 L20 Slow action
Metal
KB B1 L12


KB B2 L12
KB B1 L21
KB B2 L21
KB B1 L03
KB B2 L03
KM B1 L03 3NC
Plastic
KC B... - KN B...
KC B1 S11
KN B1 S11
KC B2 S11
KN B2 S11
1NO+1NC Plastic
Snap action Metal
KC B1 S02
KN B1 S02
2NC
KC B2 S02
KN B2 S02
Snap action
Plastic
Metal
KC B1 A11
KN B1 A11
1NO+1NC
Plastic
KC B2 A11
KN B2 A11
Slow action make

before break
Metal

KC B1 L11
KN B1 L11
KN B2 L11
1NO+1NC Plastic
Slow action Metal
KC B2 L11
KC B1 L02
KN B1 L02
2NC
KC B2 L02
KN B2 L02
Slow action
Plastic
Metal
KC B1 L20
KN B1 L20
2NO
Plastic
KC B2 L20
KN B2 L20
Slow action
Metal
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.

front cover.
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KBB1S11P - KBB1S11N
open
closed
K... S11
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
K... L20
0
0
K... S02
K... A11
K... L11
K... L02
2
0.08
3.9
0.15
10.4mm
0.41
K... L12
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0
0
2
0.08
0
0
1.9
0.07
3.9
0.15
10.4mm
0.41
K... L21
25-26
17-18
3.8
0.15
10.4mm
0.41
13-14
21-22
0
0

pages 9-16 and 17
4.2 5.7
0.16 0.22
10.4mm
0.41
K... L03
6kV for KB-KC types
4kV for KM-KN types
Housing:
1
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
11x4mm = 0.43x0.16.
configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 45 angles.
21-22
11-12
0
0
3.6
0.14
10.4mm
0.41
0
0
3.6
0.14
10.4mm
0.41
0
0
3.8 4.7
0.15 0.18
10.4mm
0.41
0
0
3.8 4.7
0.15 0.18
10.4mm
0.41
0
0
3.8
0.15
10.4mm
0.41
13-14
23-24
21-22
31-32
13-14
31-32
23-24
13-14
11-12
21-22
31-32
Dimensions
page 9-28
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35
9-3

Roller centre push lever
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Roller Qty Wt
material per
pkg
14x5
[kg]

KB C1 S11
KB C... - KM C...
KM C1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic

KM C2 S11 Snap action Metal
KB C1 S02
KM C1 S02 2NC
Plastic
KB C2 S02
KM C2 S02 Snap action Metal
KB C1 A11
KM C1 A11 1NO+1NC
Plastic
KB C2 A11
KB C1 L11
KM C2 A11 Slow action make Metal

before break
KM C1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic

KM C2 L11 Slow action Metal
KB C2 L11
KB C1 L02
KM C1 L02 2NC
Plastic
KB C2 L02
5
5
KB C1 L20
KM C1 L20 2NO
Plastic
KB C2 L20
KM C2 L20 Slow action
Metal
KB C1 L12

KB C2 L21

KB C1 L03
KM C1 L03 3NC
KB C2 L12
KB C2 S11
KB C1 L21
KB C2 L03
Plastic
KC C... - KN C...
KC C1 S11
KN C1 S11
KC C2 S11
KN C2 S11
1NO+1NC Plastic
Snap action Metal
KC C1 S02
KN C1 S02
2NC
KC C2 S02
KN C2 S02
Snap action
Plastic
Metal
KC C1 A11
KN C1 A11
1NO+1NC
Plastic
KC C2 A11
KN C2 A11
Slow action make

before break
Metal

KC C1 L11
KN C1 L11
KN C2 L11
1NO+1NC Plastic
Slow action Metal
KC C2 L11
KC C1 L02
KN C1 L02
2NC
KC C2 L02
KN C2 L02
Slow action
Plastic
Metal
KC C1 L20
KN C1 L20
2NO
Plastic
KC C2 L20
KN C2 L20
Slow action
Metal
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.

front cover.
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KBC1S11P - KBC1S11N
open
closed
K... S11
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
K... L20
0 1.8
0 0.07
K... S02
8.15
0.32
21mm
0.83
3.9
0.15
7.4
0.29
21mm
0.83
13-14
21-22
0
0
9-4
21mm
0.83
K... L12
K... L21
25-26
17-18
0
0
K... L11
8.15
0.32
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0 1.8
0 0.07
K... A11
K... L02
7.4 10.2
0.29 0.40

pages 9-16 and 17
21mm
0.83
K... L03
6kV for KB-KC types
4kV for KM-KN types
Housing:
1
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
14x5mm = 0.55x0.2.
of 45 angles.
21-22
11-12
0
0
7.4
0.29
21mm
0.83
0
0
7.4
0.29
21mm
0.83
0
0
7.8 9.5
0.31 0.37
21mm
0.83
0
0
7.8 9.5
0.31 0.37
21mm
0.83
0
0
7.8
0.31
21mm
0.83
13-14
23-24
21-22
31-32
13-14
31-32
23-24
13-14
11-12
21-22
31-32
Dimensions
page 9-28
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35

Roller side push lever
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Roller Qty Wt
material per
pkg
14x5
[kg]

KB D1 S11
KB D... - KM D...
KB D2 S11
KM D1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic

KM D2 S11 Snap action Metal
KB D1 S02
KM D1 S02 2NC
Plastic
KB D2 S02
KM D2 S02 Snap action Metal
KB D1 A11
KM D1 A11 1NO+1NC
Plastic
KB D2 A11
KB D1 L11
KM D2 A11 Slow action make Metal

before break
KM D1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic

KM D2 L11 Slow action Metal
KB D2 L11
KB D1 L02
KM D1 L02 2NC
Plastic
KB D2 L02
5
5
KB D1 L20
KM D1 L20 2NO
Plastic
KB D2 L20
KM D2 L20 Slow action
Metal
KB D1 L12


KB D2 L12
KB D1 L21
KB D2 L21
KB D1 L03
KB D2 L03
KM D1 L03 3NC
Plastic

KC D1 S11
KC D... - KN D...
KC D2 S11
KN D1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic

KN D2 S11 Snap action Metal
KC D1 S02
KN D1 S02 2NC
Plastic
KC D2 S02
KN D2 S02 Snap action Metal
KC D1 A11
KN D1 A11 1NO+1NC
Plastic
KC D2 A11
KN D2 A11 Slow action make Metal

before break

KC D1 L11
KN D1 L11
KN D2 L11
1NO+1NC Plastic
Slow action Metal
KC D2 L11
KC D1 L02
KN D1 L02
2NC
KC D2 L02
KN D2 L02
Slow action
Plastic
Metal
KC D1 L20
KN D1 L20
2NO
Plastic
KC D2 L20
KN D2 L20
Slow action
Metal
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.

front cover.
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KBD1S11P - KBD1S11N
open
closed
K... S11
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
K... L20
0 1.7
0 0.07
K... S02
19.5mm
0.77
K... L12
7.6
0.30
19.5mm
0.77
K... L21
25-26
17-18
0
0
K... L11
7.6
0.30
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0 1.7
0 0.07
K... A11
K... L02
3.7
0.14
6.9
0.27
19.5mm
0.77
13-14
21-22
0
0

pages 9-16 and 17
6.9 9.5
0.27 0.37
19.5mm
0.77
K... L03
6kV for KB-KC types
4kV for KM-KN types
Housing:
1
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
14x5mm = 0.55x0.2.
of 45 angles.
21-22
11-12
0
0
6.9
0.27
19.5mm
0.77
0
0
6.9
0.27
19.5mm
0.77
0
0
7.25 8.5
0.28 0.33
19.5mm
0.77
0
0
7.25 8.5
0.28 0.33
19.5mm
0.77
13-14
23-24
21-22
31-32
13-14
31-32
23-24
13-14
11-12
21-22
31-32
0
0
Dimensions
page 9-28
7.25
0.28
19.5mm
0.77
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35
9-5

Limit switches, K series.
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047
Roller lever plunger
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Roller Qty Wt
material per
pkg
n
[kg]

KM E1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5
KM E2 S11 Snap action Metal 5
KB E2 S11
KB E3 S11
KM E3 S11
Rubber 5
KB E1 S02
KM E1 S02 2NC
Plastic 5
KM E2 S02 Snap action Metal 5
KB E2 S02
KB E3 S02
KM E3 S02
Rubber
KB E1 A11
KM E1 A11 1NO+1NC
Plastic 5
KB E2 A11
KM E2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5

before break
KM E3 A11
Rubber 5

KB E2 L11
KM E1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5

KM E2 L11 Slow action Metal 5
KB E3 L11
KM E3 L11
Rubber 5
KB E1 L02
KM E1 L02 2NC
Plastic 5
KB E2 L02
KB E3 L02
KM E3 L02
Rubber 5
KB E1 L20
KM E1 L20 2NO
Plastic 5
KB E2 L20
KM E2 L20 Slow action
Metal 5
KB E3 L20
KM E3 L20
Rubber 5
KB E1 L12
KB E2 L12

KB E3 L12
KM E3 L12
Rubber 5
KB E1 L21
KB E2 L21

KB E3 L21
KM E3 L21
Rubber 5
KB E1 L03
KM E1 L03 3NC
Plastic 5
KB E2 L03
KB E3 L03
KM E3 L03
Rubber 5
KB E1 S11
KB E3 A11
KB E1 L11
KB E1... - KB E2...
KM E1... - KM E2...
KB E3... - KM E3...

BI-DIRECTIONAL.
KB E1 D02
KM E1 D02 2NC
Plastic 5
independent
19x5mm = 0.75x0,2.
50x10mm = 1.97x0.39.

IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
front cover.
open
closed
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0
K... S02
25-26
17-18
K... L11
13-14
21-22
15
14
K... L20
13-14
23-24
K... L12
21-22
31-32
13-14
85
30
K... L21
31-32
23-24
13-14
K... L03
11-12
21-22
31-32
85
27
85
27
28
38
85
28
38
85
85
28
85
K... D02
0
30
40
85
75
28 28
75
21-22
21-22
11-12
11-12
0
9-6
30
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
K... A11
K... L02
15
A600 Q300 for KB types
A300 Q300 for KM types
690V for KB types
440V for KM types
6kVAC for KB types
4kVAC for KM types
Class II insulation for KB only
Housing:
KB types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KM types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
1
Operating torque: 3Ncm / 4.25ozin
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KBE1S11P - KBE1S11N
K... S11
of 45 angles.
27

pages 9-16 and 17
85
Dimensions
page 9-28
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35

Roller lever plunger
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Roller
Qty Wt
material per
pkg
n
[kg]
KC E1... - KC E2...
KN E1... - KN E2...
KC E1 S11
KN E1 S11
KN E2 S11
1NO+1NC Plastic 5
Snap action Metal 5
KC E2 S11
KC E3 S11
KN E3 S11
Rubber 5
KC E1 S02
KN E1 S02
Plastic 5
KC E2 S02
KN E2 S02
Metal
KC E3 S02
KN E3 S02
Rubber
KC E1 A11
KN E1 A11
1NO+1NC Plastic 5
KC E2 A11
KN E2 A11
KC E3 A11
KN E3 A11
Slow action make

before break
KC E1 L11
KN E1 L11
KC E2 L11
2NC
Snap action
Rubber 5

KN E2 L11
1NO+1NC Plastic 5
Slow action Metal 5
KC E3 L11
KN E3 L11
Rubber 5
KC E1 L02
KN E1 L02
Plastic 5
KC E2 L02
KN E2 L02
Metal
KC E3 L02
KN E3 L02
Rubber 5
KC E1 L20
KN E1 L20
2NO
Plastic 5
KC E2 L20
KN E2 L20
Slow action
Metal
KC E3 L20
KN E3 L20
Rubber 5
2NC
Slow action
Metal
BI-DIRECTIONAL.
KC E1 D02
KN E1 D02
2NC
Plastic 5
independent
19x5mm = 0.75x0,2.
50x10mm = 1.97x0.39.

IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
front cover.
KC E3... - KN E3...
open
closed
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
K... L02
K... S02
15
21-22
11-12
0
27
85
27
85
85
K... L20
30
85
13-14
23-24
K... D02
25-26
17-18
75
0
K... L11
30
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0
K... A11
15
14
A600 Q300 for KC types
A300 Q300 for KN types
690VAC for KC types
440VAC for KN types
6kV for KC types
4kV for KN types
Class II insulation for KC only
Housing:
KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
1
Operating torque: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KCE1S11P - KCE1S11N
K... S11
of 90 angles.
27
85
28 28
75
21-22
11-12
13-14
21-22
0

pages 9-16 and 17
30
40
85
Dimensions
page 9-28
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35
9-7

One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047
Adjustable roller lever
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Roller
Qty Wt
material per
pkg
n
[kg]

KM F1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5
KM F2 S11 Snap action Metal 5
KB F2 S11
KB F3 S11
KM F3 S11
Rubber 5
KB F4 S11
KM F4 S11
Rubber 5
KB F1 S02
KM F1 S02 2NC
Plastic 5
KB F1 S11
KB F... - KM F...
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KBF1S11P - KBF1S11N
KB F2 S02
KM F2 S02 Snap action Metal
KB F3 S02
KM F3 S02
Rubber 5
KB F4 S02
KM F4 S02
Rubber 5
KB F1 A11
KM F1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5
KB F2 A11
KB F3 A11
KM F2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5

before break
KM F3 A11
Rubber 5
KB F4 A11
KM F4 A11
Rubber 5
KB F1 L11
KB F2 L11
KM F1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5

KM F2 L11 Slow action Metal 5
KB F3 L11
KM F3 L11
Rubber 5
KB F4 L11
KM F4 L11
Rubber 5
KB F1 L02
KM F1 L02 2NC
Plastic 5
A600 Q300 for KB types
A300 Q300 for KM types
690V for KB types
440V for KM types
6kVAC for KB types
4kVAC for KM types
Class II insulation for KB only
Housing:
KB types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KM types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
1
Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
KB F2 L02
KM F2 L02 Slow action Metal
KB F3 L02
KM F3 L02
Rubber 5
KB F4 L02
KM F4 L02
Rubber 5
KB F1 L20
KM F1 L20 2NO
Plastic 5
KB F2 L20
KM F2 L20 Slow action
Metal
KB F3 L20
KM F3 L20
Rubber 5
KB F4 L20
KM F4 L20
Rubber 5
KB F1 L12
KB F2 L12

KB F3 L12
KM F3 L12
Rubber 5
KB F4 L12
KM F4 L12
Rubber 5
KB F1 L21
KB F2 L21

KB F3 L21
KM F3 L21
Rubber 5
KB F4 L21
KM F4 L21
Rubber 5
KB F1 L03
KM F1 L03 3NC
Plastic 5
KB F2 L03
KM F2 L03 Slow action Metal
KB F3 L03
KM F3 L03
Rubber 5
KB F4 L03
KM F4 L03
Rubber 5

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
BI-DIRECTIONAL.
KB F1 D02
KM F1 D02 2NC
Plastic 5
of 180 angles.
independent
19x5mm = 0.75x0.2.
50x10mm = 1.97x0.34.
50x10mm (1.97x0.35) with offset alignment.
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.

front cover.
open
closed
K ... S11
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
K ... L12
0
K ... S02
25-26
17-18
K ... L11
13-14
21-22
30
15
14
30
27
13-14
23-24
27
85
28
38
85
28
38
85
21-22
31-32
13-14
85
K ... L21
31-32
23-24
13-14
K ... L03
11-12
21-22
31-32
85
85
28
85
K... D02
0
30 40
85
75
28 28
75
21-22
21-22
11-12
11-12
0
9-8
15
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
K ... A11
K ... L02
K ... L20
27

pages 9-16 and 17
85
Dimensions
page 9-28
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35

Adjustable roller lever
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Roller
Qty Wt
material per
pkg
n
[kg]
KC F... - KN F...
KC F1 S11
KN F1 S11
KN F2 S11
1NO+1NC Plastic 5
Snap action Metal
5
KC F2 S11
KC F3 S11
KN F3 S11
Rubber 5
KC F4 S11
KN F4 S11
Rubber 5
off. align.
KC F1 S02
KN F1 S02
Plastic 5
KC F2 S02
KN F2 S02
Metal
KC F3 S02
KN F3 S02
Rubber 5
KC F4 S02
KN F4 S02
Rubber 5
off. align.
KC F1 A11
KN F1 A11
1NO+1NC Plastic 5
KC F2 A11
KN F2 A11
KC F3 A11
KN F3 A11
Slow action make

before break
Rubber 5
KC F4 A11
KN F4 A11
Rubber 5
off. align.
KC F1 L11
KN F1 L11
KN F2 L11
1NO+1NC Plastic 5
Slow action Metal
5
KC F2 L11
KC F3 L11
KN F3 L11
Rubber 5
KC F4 L11
KN F4 L11
Rubber 5
off. align.
KC F1 L02
KN F1 L02
Plastic 5
KC F2 L02
KN F2 L02
Metal
KC F3 L02
KN F3 L02
Rubber 5
KC F4 L02
KN F4 L02
Rubber 5
off. align.
KC F1 L20
KN F1 L20
2NO
Plastic 5
KC F2 L20
KN F2 L20
Slow action
Metal
KC F3 L20
KN F3 L20
Rubber 5
KC F4 L20
KN F4 L20
Rubber 5
off. align.
2NC
Snap action
2NC
Slow action
19x5mm = 0.75x0.2.
50x10mm = 1.97x0.34.
Metal
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.

front cover.
off. align. = offset alignment.
open
closed
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
K ... L11
K ... S02
30
K ... L02
15
30
K ... L20
14

pages 9-16 and 17
27
30 40
85
27
85
27
85
21-22
11-12
85
25-26
17-18
0
13-14
21-22
85
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0
K ... A11
15
A600 Q300 for KC types
A300 Q300 for KN types
690VAC for KC types
440VAC for KN types
6kV for KC types
4kV for KN types
Class II insulation for KC only
Housing:
KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
1
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KCF1S11P - KCF1S11N
K ... S11
of 180 angles.
85
13-14
23-24
Dimensions
page 9-28
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35
9-9

Ceramic rod lever
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Rod
Qty Wt
material per
pkg
n
[kg]

KB H1 S11
KM H1 S11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5

Snap action
KB H1 S02
KM H1 S02 2NC
Ceramic 5
KB H1 A11
KM H1 A11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5
Snap action
Slow action make

before break
KB H1 L11
KM H1 L11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5

Slow action
KB H1 L02
KM H1 L02 2NC
Ceramic 5
KB H1 L20
KM H1 L20 2NO
Ceramic 5
KB H1 L12

Slow action
KB H1 L21

Slow action
KB H1 L03
KM H1 L03 3NC
Slow action
Slow action
KB H... - KM H...
Slow action
Ceramic 5

KC H1 S11
KN H1 S11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5

Snap action
KC H1 S02
KN H1 S02 2NC
Ceramic 5
KC H1 A11
KN H1 A11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5
Snap action
Slow action make

before break
KC H1 L11
KN H1 L11
1NO+1NC Ceramic 5
Slow action
KC H1 L02
KN H1 L02
2NC
Ceramic 5
KC H1 L20
KN H1 L20
2NO
Ceramic 5
Slow action
Slow action

IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
front cover.
KC H... - KN H...
open
closed
K ... S02
K ... A11
K ... L11
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0
15
30
85
15
30
85
14
9-10
K ... L02
21-22
11-12
K ... L20
13-14
23-24
K ... L12
21-22
31-32
13-14
K ... L21
31-32
23-24
13-14
K ... L03
11-12
21-22
31-32
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
25-26
17-18
27
85
13-14
21-22
0
6kV for KB-KC types
4kV for KM-KN types
Housing:
1
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KBH1S11P - KBH1S11N
K ... S11
of 45 angles.
30 40

pages 9-16 and 17
85
27
85
27
85
28
38
85
28
38
85
28
Dimensions
page 9-28
85
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35

Adjustable rod lever
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Rod
Qty Wt
material per
pkg
n
[kg]

KB L1 S11
KB L... - KM L...
KM L1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic

KM L2 S11 Snap action Steel
KB L1 S02
KM L1 S02 2NC
Plastic
KB L2 S02
KM L2 S02 Snap action Steel
5
5
KB L1 A11
KM L1 A11 1NO+1NC
Plastic
KB L2 A11
KM L2 A11 Slow action make Steel

before break
KB L1 L11
KM L1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic

KM L2 L11 Slow action Steel
KB L2 L11
KB L1 L02
KM L1 L02 2NC
Plastic
KB L2 L02
5
5
KB L1 L20
KM L1 L20 2NO
Plastic
KB L2 L20
KM L2 L20 Slow action
Steel
KB L1 L12


KM L1 L03 3NC
Plastic
KB L2 L12
KB L1 L21
KB L2 L21
KB L1 L03
KB L2 L03
KB L2 S11
KC L... - KN L...
KN L1 S11
KN L2 S11
1NO+1NC Plastic
Snap action Steel
KC L1 S02
KN L1 S02
2NC
KC L2 S02
KN L2 S02
Snap action
Steel
KC L1 A11
KN L1 A11
1NO+1NC
Plastic
KC L2 A11
KN L2 A11
Slow action make

before break
Steel

Plastic
KC L1 S11
KC L2 S11
KC L1 L11
KN L1 L11
KN L2 L11
1NO+1NC Plastic
Slow action Steel
KC L2 L11
KC L1 L02
KN L1 L02
2NC
KC L2 L02
KN L2 L02
Slow action
Plastic
Steel
KC L1 L20
KN L1 L20
2NO
Plastic
KC L2 L20
KN L2 L20
Slow action
Steel
Plastic 5
Steel
BI-DIRECTIONAL.
KB L1 D02
KM L1 D02 2NC
independent
KB L2 D02
M20 CABLE ENTRY
E.g. KBL1S11P - KBL1S11N
front cover.
open
closed
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0
15
13-14
21-22
K ... L11
25-26
17-18
15
14
30
27
K ... L20
13-14
23-24
K ... L12
21-22
31-32
13-14
K ... L21
31-32
23-24
13-14
K ... L03
11-12
21-22
31-32
85
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
K ... A11
85
85
27
28
38
85
28
38
85
6kV for KB-KC types
4kV for KM-KN types
Housing:
1
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
85
28
85
K... D02
0
K ... L02
30
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
K ... S02
independent
K ... S11
KM L2 D02 2NC
of 90 angles (180 for KC and KN types).
30 40
85
75
28 28
75
21-22
21-22
11-12
11-12
0

pages 9-16 and 17
27
85
Dimensions
page 9-28
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35
9-11

Wobble stick,
omnidirectional
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Rod
Qty Wt
material per
pkg
n
[kg]

KB M1 S11 KM M1 S11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5
KB M2 S11 KM M2 S11 Snap action Semirigid 5
KB M1 S02 KM M1 S02 2NC
Flexible
KB M2 S02 KM M2 S02 Snap action
Semirigid 5
KB M2 A11 KM M2 A11 Slow action make Semirigid 5
KB M1 L11 KM M1 L11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5

KB M2 L11 KM M2 L11 Slow action Semirigid 5
KB M1 L02 KM M1 L02 2NC
Flexible
KB M2 L02 KM M2 L02 Slow action
Semirigid 5
KB M1 L20 KM M1 L20 2NO
Flexible
Semirigid 5
before break
KB M1 L12 KM M1 L12 1NO+2NC Flexible

KB M1 A11 KM M1 A11 1NO+1NC Flexible
KB M1... - KM M1...
5
5
5
Semirigid 5
KB M1 L21 KM M1 L21 2NO+1NC Flexible

Semirigid 5
KB M1 L03 KM M1 L03 3NC
Flexible
Semirigid 5

KC M1 S11 KN M1 S11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5
KC M2 S11 KN M2 S11 Snap action Semirigid 5
KC M1 S02 KN M1 S02 2NC
Flexible
KC M2 S02 KN M2 S02 Snap action
Semirigid 5
KC M2 A11 KN M2 A11 Slow action make Semirigid 5
KC M1 L11 KN M1 L11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5

KC M2 L11 KN M2 L11 Slow action Semirigid 5
KC M1 L02 KN M1 L02 2NC
Flexible
KC M2 L02 KN M2 L02 Slow action
Semirigid 5
KC M1 L20 KN M1 L20 2NO
Flexible
KC M2 L20 KN M2 L20 Slow action
Semirigid 5
KC M1 A11 KN M1 A11 1NO+1NC Flexible

before break
KC M2... - KN M2...
6kV for KB-KC types
4kV for KM-KN types
Housing:
1
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
front cover.

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KBM1S11P - KBM1S11N
open
closed
K... S11
K... S02
K... A11
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0
14
14
K... L20
13-14
23-24
K... L12
21-22
31-32
13-14
K... L21
31-32
23-24
13-14
K... L03
11-12
21-22
31-32
25-26
17-18
7,5
14
13-14
21-22
0
9-12
21-22
11-12
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
K... L11
K... L02
14 19

pages 9-16 and 17
14
14
14.5 30
14.5 30
14.5
Dimensions
page 9-29
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35

Hinge operating
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Shaft
Qty Wt
features per
pkg
n
[kg]
KB P... - KM P...
KB P1 L11
KM P1 L11 1NO+1NC Short

Slow action cylinder
KB P2 L11
KM P2 L11 1NO+1NC Long

Slow action solid
KB P3 L11

5
Slow action solid w/
reduction
KB P1 L02
KM P1 L02 2NC
KB P2 L02
KM P2 L02 2NC
Long
solid
KB P3 L02
KM P3 L02 2NC
Long
5
solid w/
reduction
KB P1 L12

KB P2 L12

Slow action solid
KB P3 L12

5
reduction
KB P1 L21

KB P2 L21

Slow action solid
KB P3 L21

5
reduction
KB P1 L03
KM P1 L03 3NC
Short
cylinder
KB P2 L03
KM P2 L03 3NC
Long
solid
KB P3 L03
KM P3 L03 3NC
Long
5
solid w/
reduction
Short
5
Slow action
Slow action
Slow action
Slow action
Slow action
KC P... - KN P...
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KBP1L11P - KBP1L11N
Short
5
cylinder
KC P1 L11
KN P1 L11
1NO+1NC Short
KC P1 L02
KN P1 L02
2NC
KC P1 L12
KN P1 L12
1NO+2NC Short
KC P1 L21
KN P1 L21
2NO+1NC Short
KC P1 L03
KN P1 L03
3NC
Slow action
Slow action
Short
cylinder
6kV for KB-KC types
4kV for KM-KN types
Housing:
1
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.

IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
front cover.
open
closed
K... L11
13-14
21-22
K... L02
21-22
11-12
K... L12

pages 9-16 and 17
31-32
23-24
13-14
K... L03
11-12
21-22
31-32
7 10
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
K... L21
7 10
7 10
Dimensions
page 9-29
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35
9-13

Slotted lever
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Qty Wt
per
pkg
n
[kg]

KB Q1 L11
KM Q1 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 5
KB Q1 L02
KM Q1 L02 2NC Slow action
KB Q1 L12
KB Q1 L21
KB Q1 L03
KM Q1 L03 3NC Slow action

KC Q1 L11
KN Q1 L11
1NO+1NC Slow action 5
KC Q1 L02
KN Q1 L02
2NC Slow action
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.

front cover.
KB Q... - KM Q...
KC Q... - KN Q...
6kV for KB-KC types
4kV for KM-KN types
Housing:
1
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KBQ1L11P - KBQ1L11N
open
closed
K... L11
13-14
21-22
K... L02
21-22
11-12
K... L12
7 10

pages 9-16 and 17
31-32
23-24
13-14
K... L03
11-12
21-22
31-32
90
90
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
9-14
7 10
K... L21
7 10
90
90
90
Dimensions
page 9-29
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35

Key operated
Order code
Plastic
body
Contacts
Key
shape
Qty Wt
per
pkg
n
[kg]

KB N1 L11
KB N2 L11
0.092
0.092
Straight T
0.092
KB N4 L11
Angled T
0.092
KB N2 L02
2NC
Slow action
Straight
0.092
Angled
0.092
KB N3 L02
Straight T
0.092
KB N4 L02
Angled T
0.092
KB N1 L12
KB N2 L12
1NO+2NC
Slow action
Straight
0.096
Angled
0.096
KB N3 L12
Straight T
0.096
KB N4 L12
Angled T
0.096
KB N1 L21
KB N2 L21
2NO+1NC
Slow action
Straight
0.096
Angled
0.096
KB N3 L21
Straight T
0.096
KB N4 L21
Angled T
0.096
Straight
0.096
0.096
KB N1 L03
3NC
Slow action
Angled
KB N3 L03
Straight T
0.096
KB N4 L03
Angled T
0.096
KB N2 L03
KC N...
Straight
Angled
KB N3 L11
KB N1 L02
KB N...
1NO+1NC
Slow action

KC N1 L11
KC N2 L11
Straight
0.107
Angled
0.107
KC N3 L11
Straight T
0.107
KC N4 L11
Angled T
0.107
KC N1 L02
KC N2 L02
M20 CABLE ENTRY
E.g. KBN1L11P - KBN1L11N
1NO+1NC
Slow action
2NC
Slow action
Straight
0.107
Angled
0.107
KC N3 L02
Straight T
0.107
KC N4 L02
Angled T
0.107
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
The key is standard supplied.
open
The heads have axial rotation in any of 4 positions at 90
angles.
A600 Q600
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 6kV
Class II insulation
Housing and operators in self-extinguishing
double-insulation polymer thermoplastic
1
Operating force: 8N/1.8lb
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
closed
K... L11
K... L02
K... L12
K... L21
13-14
21-22
0
0
5 5.5
0.20 0.22
mm
in
0
0
5
0.20
mm
in
21-22
11-12
K... L03
31-32
23-24
13-14
5 5.5
0.20 0.22

parts for key operated
switches
KX N1
KX N2
KX N3
KX N4

pages 9-16 and 17
5 5.5
0.20 0.22
mm
in
0
0
5
0.20
mm
in
11-12
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
0
0
0
mm
in
Order code
Description
Qty Wt
per
pkg
K X N1
Straight key
0.013
K X N2
Angled key
0.013
K X N3
Straight T key
0.012
K X N4
Angled T key
0.012
K X N5
Toggle key
0.019
[kg]
KX N5
Dimensions
page 9-29
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35
9-15

Accessories and spare parts for KB - KC - KM and KN type limit switches
Contact blocks
Order
code
Contacts
Qty Wt
per
pkg
n
[kg]
KX B S11 1NO+1NC Snap action
10
0.021
KX B S02 2NC Snap action
10
0.021
KX B A11 1NO+1NC Slow action make before break 10
0.021
KX B L11 1NO+1NC Slow action
10
0.021
KX B L02 2NC Slow action
10
0.021
KX B L20 2NO Slow action
10
0.021
10
0.026
10
0.026
KX B L03 3NC Slow action
10
0.026
Not suitable for key operated KBN / KCN, hinged operating KBP / KCP /
KMP / KNP and slotted lever KBQ / KCQ / KMQ / KNQ types.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Not suitable for KC and KN types, KG and KR foot switches.
K X B...
Body complete with

contact block
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
Qty Wt
per
pkg
[kg]
KX CB... - KX CM...
KX CB S11
KX CM S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 10
KX CB S02
KX CM S02 2NC Snap action
10
KX CB A11
KX CM A11 1NO+1NC Slow action

make before break
10
KX CB L11
KX CM L11 1NO+1NC Slow action
10
KX CB L02
KX CM L02 2NC Slow action
10
KX CB L20
KX CM L20 2NO Slow action
10
KX CB L12
KX CM L12 1NO+2NC Slow action 10
KX CB L21
KX CM L21 2NO+1NC Slow action 10
KX CB L03
KX CM L03 3NC Slow action
10
KX CC... - KX CN...
KX CC S11
KX CN S11
1NO+1NC Snap action 10
KX CC S02
KX CN S02
2NC Snap action
10
KX CC A11
KX CN A11
1NO+1NC Slow action

make before break
10
KX CC L11
KX CN L11
1NO+1NC Slow action
10
KX CC L02
KX CN L02
2NC Slow action
10
KX CC L20
KX CN L20
2NO Slow action
10
Not suitable for key operated KBN / KCN, hinged operating KBP / KCP /
KMP / KNP and slotted lever KBQ / KCQ / KMQ / KNQ types.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Not suitable for KC and KN types.
front cover.
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KXCCL11P - KXCCL11N
open
closed
KX ... S11
KX ... S02
KX ... A11
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0 0.5
0 0.02
2.3
0.09
6mm
0.24
0 0.5
0 0.02
2.3
0.09
6mm
0.24
KX ... L20
13-14
23-24
KX ... L12
KX ... L21
25-26
17-18
1.1
0.04
2.1
0.08
6mm
0.24
2.1 2.9
0.08 0.11
6mm
0.24
13-14
21-22
0
0
9-16
21-22
11-12
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
0
0
KX ... L11
KX ... L02
Accessories
page 9-17
KX ... L03
0
0
2.1
0.08
6mm
0.24
0
0
2.1
0.08
6mm
0.24
0
0
2.2 2.7
0.09 0.11
6mm
0.24
0
0
2.2 2.7
0.09 0.11
6mm
0.24
The KXB contact blocks can be used with the K series of
limit switches. Combinations of 2 contacts with slow or
snap action and, for KB and KM types only, 3 slow action
contacts are available.
The NC contacts have direct opening operation, a specific
safety principle.
The particular four-point contacts warrant high
conductivity in any sort of application. The removal of the
contacts from the limit switch body provides remarkable
wiring ease and reduces installation time as well.
The KX C... bodies, complete with auxiliary contacts, can
be used as spare parts for the K series limit switches or
coupled with the KX A... operating heads, to obtain
complete limit switches in the required configurations.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable to
have the best access. Each body includes the innovative
locking bayonet mechanism of the operating head.
Plastic and metal types are available.
A600 Q300 for KX CB-KX CC types
A300 Q300 for KX CM-KX CN types
690VAC for KX CB-KX CC types
440VAC for KX CM-KX CN types
6kV for KX CB-KX CC types
4kV for KX CM-KX CN types
Class II insulation for KX CB-KX CC only
Housing:
KX CB-KX CC types - Self-extinguishing
double-insulation polymer thermoplastic
KX CM-KX CN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
1
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
Certifications obtained: EAC for all, UL Listed for US and
Canada (File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices for
KX C... body types only. UL Recognized for USA and
Canada (cURus - File E93601) as component - Auxiliary
devices for auxiliary contacts only; products having this
type of marking are intended for use as components of
complete workshop-assembled equipment.
Comply with standards: EN50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
21-22
31-32
13-14
31-32
23-24
13-14
11-12
21-22
31-32
0
0
2.2
009
Dimensions
pages 9-28 and 29
6mm
0.24
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35

Accessories and spare parts for KB, KC, KM and KN type limit switches
Operating heads
KX A A1
KX A C1
KX A D1
KX A E1
KX A B1
KX A B2
KX A C2
KX A D2
KX A E2
Description
Qty
per
pkg
n
[kg]
KX A A1
0.013
KX A B1
Plastic top roller push plunger 5
0.020
KX A B2
Metal top roller push plunger
0.020
KX A C1
Plastic roller centre push lever 5
0.020
KX A C2
Metal roller centre push lever
0.020
KX A D1
Plastic roller side push lever
0.020
KX A D2
Metal roller side push lever
0.023
KX A E1
Plastic roller lever plunger
0.039
KX A E2
Metal roller lever plunger
0.048
KX A E3
Rubber 50x10mm roller lever 5

plunger
0.055
KX A F1
Adjustable plastic roller lever

19x5mm
0.055
KX A F2
Adjustable metal roller lever

19x5mm
0.065
KX A F3
Adjustable rubber 50x10mm

roller lever
0.065
KX A F4
Adjustable offset rubber

50x10mm roller lever
0.081
KX A H1
Ceramic rod lever
0.056
KX A L1
Adjustable plastic rod lever
0.043
KX A L2
Adjustable stainless steel

rod lever
0.050
KX A M1
Flexible wobble stick
0.032
KX A M2
Semirigid wobble stick
0.025
Wt
KX A E3
KX A F1
KX A F2
KX A F3
KX A F4
KX A L1
KX A L2
Wt
The KX A... operating heads can be used as spare parts
for the K series limit switches or coupled with the KX C...
bodies to obtain complete limit switches in the required
configurations.
The heads are made of metal and warrant sturdiness and
operating reliability in all conditions.
The shape of the coupling section with the body of the K
series switches permits to orient the head in any 45
angle position while the initial lever and rod position can
be adjusted 360 at 15 angle positions.
The head fixing to the body is achieved by the innovative
locking bayonet mechanism so there is no need of tools.
Tightening torque for eventual operating head actuator
fixing is 0.8Nm/7lbin.
KX A H1
Cable glands and cable

conduit
KX P...
Order code
KX A M1
KX A M2
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
n
[kg]
KX P01
M20 cable gland
50
0.009
KX P02
PG13.5 cable gland
50
0.009
KX P03
M20 rubber cable conduit
50
0.004
KX P03
The cable glands are in plastic with either M20 or PG13.5
thread and provide to keep the cable in place and
maintain the proper IP protection of the limit switch after
installation.
Operational characteristics for cable gland
Material: Self-extinguishing polyamide
Gland seal with cable diameter: 6-12mm/0.24-0.47.
Compliant with standards: EN 50262, UL508.
Dimensions
pages 9-28 and 29
9-17

Prewired metal limit switches, K series
Order code
Contacts
Cable Qty Wt
length per

pkg
m
[kg]
TOP PUSH ROD PLUNGER.
KP A1...
KP B1...
KP A2...
KP B2...
KP A1 S11
0.286
KP A1 L11
0.286
KP A2 S11
0.302
KP A2 L11
0.302
TOP ROLLER PUSH PLUNGER.

KP B1 S11
0.290
KP B1 L11
0.290
KP B2 S11
0.290
KP B2 L11
0.290
KP B3 S11
0.288
KP B3 L11
0.288
KP B4 S11
0.296
KP B4 L11
0.296
M12 HEAD TOP ROLLER PUSH PLUNGER.
KP B3...
KP B4...
KP B5 S11
0.308
KP B5 L11
0.308
KP B6 S11
0.310
KP B6 L11
0.310
KP B7 S11
0.310
KP B7 L11
0.310
KP B8 S11
0.310
KP B8 L11
0.310
0.336
B300 R300
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400VAC
Class I insulation
2 metre long cable (5 cores, each 0.75mm2/18 AWG)
Body housing: aluminium - zinc alloy
Operating force/torque:
KP A types: 15N/3.4lb
KP B types: 10N/2.2lb
KP E, KP F and KP L types: 0.08Nm/0.7lbin
KP M types: 0.1Nm/0.9lbin
Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm/22.1lbin
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
ROLLER LEVER PLUNGER.

KP E1 S11
KP E1 L11
0.336
KP E2 S11
0.336
KP E2 L11
0.336
ADJUSTABLE ROLLER LEVER.

KP B5...
KP B6...
KP F1 S11
0.344
KP F1 L11
0.344
ADJUSTABLE ROD LEVER.

KP L2 S11
0.342
KP L2 L11
0.342
0.298
OMNIDIRECTIONAL WOBBLE STICK.

KP M2 S11

KP B7...
KP B8...
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
For prewired switches with 1m long cable only, add suffix 010 at the end
of the order code.
Example: KP A1 S11 010 for prewired switch, top push metal rod
plunger, with 1NO+1NC snap action contacts and 1m long cable.
M12 head fixing.
Roller operation perpendicular to switch body.
KP E1...
open
closed
KP A... S11
KP E2...
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0
0
KP A... L11
1.0
0.04
1.9
0.075
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
KP E... L11
KP F... L11
KP L... L11
21-22
13-14
KP M... S11
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
5mm
0.20
21-22
13-14
0
0
KP B... S11
1.9
0.075
KP E... S11
KP F... S11
KP L... S11
3.3
0.13
5mm
0.20
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
KP F1...
KP L2...
0
0
KP M2 S11
KP B... L11
1.7
0.069
8,7mm
0.34
21-22
13-14
0
0
9-18
3.3
0.13
Dimensions
page 9-30
3.3
0.13
5.5
0.22
14
8,7mm
0.34
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35
26
27
14
74
45
74

Plastic limit switches, T series. Dimensions to EN 50047
Order code
Contacts
Plunger
material
Qty Wt
per
pkg
Type
[kg]
TS1 01...
TS2 01...
Without reset button.

TS1 01 10
1NO+1NC
Steel
Snap action
0.120
TL1 01 10
1NO+1NC Steel
Slow action
0.120
With reset button on front.

TS2 01 10
1NO+1NC
Steel
Snap action
0.130
TL2 01 10
1NO+1NC Steel
Slow action
0.130
TS1... - TL1...
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
TS2... - TL2...
Roller lever
Order code
Contacts
Roller
material
Qty Wt
per
pkg
n
[kg]
0.120

TS1 05 20 A
1NO+1NC
Plastic 20x5
Snap action Metal 20x5
TS1 05 21 A
TS1 05 24 A
0.125
Rubber 50x10 1
0.135
1NO+1NC Plastic 20x5

Slow action Metal 20x5
TL1 05 20 A
TL1 05 21 A
TL1 05 24 A
0.120
0.125
Rubber 50x10 1
0.135
With reset button.

TS2 05 20 AS 1NO+1NC
Plastic 20x5
Snap action Metal 20x5
TS2 05 21 AS
TS2 05 24 AS
TS1... - TL1...
TL2 05 20 AS
TL2 05 21 AS
0.130
0.135
Rubber 50x10 1
0.145
1NO+1NC Plastic 20x5

Slow action Metal 20x5
TL2 05 24 AS
0.130
0.135
Rubber 50x10 1
0.145
; safety function according to IEC/EN

60947-5-1.
Roller lever plunger limit switches with 30x5mm plastic roller are
available and can be ordered substituting the number 20 with 23 in the
above-given order codes.
Roller lever plunger limit switches with 35x15mm rubber roller are
available and can be ordered substituting the number 24 with 22 in the
above-given order codes.
20x5mm = 0.79x0.2.
50x10mm = 1.97x0.39.
30x5mm = 1.81x0.2.
35x15mm = 1.38x0.59.
open
closed
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
0
[mm (in)]
6 (0.24)
[mm (in)]
6 (0.24)
21-22
13-14
TS1 05...
TS2 05...
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
TL1 05...
TL2 05...
21-22
13-14
60
60
The TS-TL series limit switches are designed and
manufactured according to European standards
EN 50041 for dimensions.
The insulated housing of the limit switch is made of
self-extinguishing thermoplastic giving excellent
mechanical stability and is suitable, as a result, for
assembly on machinery or installations in the
general-purpose industrial field as well as saline
environments (for example close by the sea).
The housing sturdiness allows mounting of limit
switches in heavy duty applications.
The double-insulated housing of the limit switch warrants
and protects internal circuits against shocks or impacts
and in industrial environments, against accidental ingress
of tools and accidental contact.
The contacts are dimensioned to ensure self cleaning of
the silver-alloy contact surfaces. Contacts (NC) of the TL
series have direct (positive) opening action to prevent
sticking or welding.
Mechanical life: >10 million cycles (100,000 cycles
only for reset button versions)
IEC utilisation category:
DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V
AC15 duty: 6A 250V
Operating force: 6N/1.35lb (TS...01 and TL...01)
Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin (TS...05 and TL...05)
TS...05 and TL...05 have axial rotation in any of 4
positions (90)
TS...05 and TL...05 have lever inclination, 360
adjustment
Housing cable entry: PG13.5
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 81-1, EN 50041,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
TS2... - TL2...
Accessories
page 9-27
TL1 01...
TL2 01...
Dimensions
page 9-30
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35
9-19

T series plastic limit switches. Dimensions to EN 50041
Wobble stick,
omnidirectional
Order code
Contacts
Rod
material
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Type
TS1 09...

TS1 09 92
1NO+1NC
Snap action
Flexible
0.115
TL1 09 92
1NO+1NC
Slow action
Flexible
0.115
open
closed
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
TL1 09...
21-22
13-14
TL2 10...
21-22
13-14
36
36
TS1... - TL1...
Key operated
Order code
Contacts
Key
shape
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]

Front key withdrawal .
TL2 10 10
TL2 10 11
1NO+1NC Straight
Slow action Angled
0.120
0.120
TL2 10 12
Angled T
0.120
TL2 10 13
Straight T
0.120

IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Version with key withdrawal on the left or on the right is available; replace
the last letter (A) of the order code respectively with S or D
(e.g. TL2 10 10S - left or TL2 10 10D - right). For further assistance,
consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside
front cover.
The key is standard supplied.
TL2...
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Extra keys.
A 20746
P 32753
A 20747
A 20746
Straight key
10
0.013
A 20747
Angled key
10
0.013
P 32753
Angled T key
10
0.008
P 32752
Straight T key
10
0.008
A 20748
Toggle key
0.085
DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V
AC15 duty: 6A 250V
Operating torque: 1Ncm/1.42ozin (TS1 09... and
TL1 09...)
Operating force: 8N/1.8lb (TL2 10...)
TL2 10... has axial rotation in any of 4 positions (90)
TL2 10... has vertical or sideways key withdrawal
Housing cable entry: PG13.5
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Limit
switches.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 81-1, EN 50041,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
P 32752
Accessories
page 9-27
4.2 (0.17)
The TS-TL series limit switches are designed and
manufactured according to European standards
EN 50041 for dimensions.
The insulated housing of the limit switch is made of
self-extinguishing thermoplastic giving excellent
mechanical stability and is suitable, as a result, for
assembly on machinery or installations in the
general-purpose industrial field as well as saline
environments (for example close by the sea).
The housing sturdiness allows mounting of limit
switches in heavy duty applications.
The double-insulated housing of the limit switch warrants
and protects internal circuits against shocks or impacts
and in industrial environments, against accidental ingress
of tools and accidental contact.
the silver-alloy contact surfaces. Contacts (NC) of the TL
series have direct (positive) opening action to prevent
sticking or welding.
A 20748
9-20
[mm (in)]
Dimensions
page 9-30
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35

Order code
PLN A1 A
Contacts
1NC
PLN A1 A W
PLN A2 A
2NC
PLN A2 A W
PLN C1 A
1NO
PLN C1 A W
PLN...A...
PLN C2 A
2NO
PLN C2 A W
PLN U1 A
1NO+1NC
PLN U1 A W
Degree of Qty
protection per
pkg
Wt
IEC
[kg]
Order code
IP40
0.240
IP65
0.240
IP40
0.240
IP65
0.240
IP40
0.240
IP65
0.240
IP40
0.240
IP65
0.240
IP40
0.240
IP65
0.240
PLN A1 R
1NC
PLN A1 R W
PLN A2 R
2NC
PLN A2 R W
PLN C1 R
1NO
PLN C1 R W
PLN C2 R
2NO
PLN C2 R W
PLN...R...
PLN U1 R
1NO+1NC
PLN U1 R W
Order code
Contacts
PLN A1 H
1NC
PLN A1 H W
PLN A2 H
2NC
PLN A2 H W
PLN U1 H
1NO+1NC
PLN U1 H W
PLN A1 HSB
1NC
PLN A1 HSB W
PLN A2 HSB
2NC
PLN A2 HSB W
PLN U1 HSB
1NO+1NC
PLN U1 HSB W
1.5
0.06
11.5
0.45
[mm (in)]
PLN A1 H...
PLN A1 HSB...
2.4
0.09
20
0.79
11-12
[mm (in)]
PLN A2 A...
PLN A2 R...
1.5
0.06
6.5
0.25
11-12
21-22
[mm (in)]
PLN A2 H...
PLN A2 HSB...
2.4
0.09
11.5
0.45
11-12
21-22
[mm (in)]
Degree of Qty
protection per
pkg
Wt
IEC
[kg]
IP40
0.230
IP65
0.230
IP40
0.230
IP65
0.230
IP40
0.230
IP65
0.230
IP40
0.230
IP65
0.230
IP40
0.230
IP65
0.230
Degree of Qty
protection per
pkg
Wt
IEC
[kg]
IP40
0.270
IP65
0.270
IP40
0.270
IP65
0.270
IP40
0.270
IP65
0.270
0.290
IP40
IP65
0.290
IP40
0.290
IP65
0.290
IP40
0.290
IP65
0.290
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
2.2
0.09
11.5
0.45
13-14
[mm (in)]
PLN C2 A...
PLN C2 R...
With offset roller.

PLN...H
open
11-12
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Roller centre push lever
PLN A1 A...
PLN A1 R...
PLN C1 A...
PLN C1 R...
Contacts
Travel [mm (in)]
closed
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Top roller push plunger
Type
4.2 6.4
0.16 0.25
13-14
23-24
[mm (in)]
PLN U1 A...
PLN U1 R...
1.5
5.9 (0.23)
PLN U1 H...
PLN U1 HSB...
11.5
0.45
21-22
13-14
[mm (in)]
2.4
0.09
20
0.79
21-22
13-14
10.4 (0.41)
[mm (in)]
The PLN types are for general purpose use. The extensive
range of models with numerous of actuators and multiple
contact configurations is the optimal solution to the
diverse installation requirements.
Overall simple design, oversize contacts and choice
materials ensure durable and safe operation. The metal
alloy housing and resistant thermoplastic actuators
warrant reliable heavy-duty features for any sort of
operating conditions.
The PLN series limit switches are available with IEC IP40
or IP65 degree of protection; this characteristic is
ensured by the use of appropriate sealing gasket.
The IEC IP65 version is easily identified by the W suffix
of its order code and can be used in adverse ambient
conditions.
DC13 duty: 10A 24V
AC15 duty: 5A 250V, 3A 400V
Housing cable entry: PG11 (PLN...W types only
complete with cable gland)
Cable connection: screw terminal with clamp suitable
for cables up to 2.5mm2 / AWG 14
Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC degree of protection: IP40 / IP65 (see table
indications).
Certifications obtained: IMQ, EAC.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, EN 81-1.
PLN...HSB W
Dimensions
page 9-31
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35
9-21

Latch and manual release
Order code
Contacts
Degree of Qty
protection per
pkg
Wt
IEC
[kg]
Top roller push plunger.

PLN A1 RAG
1NC
IP40
0.220
PLN A1 RAG W
1NC
IP65
0.230
Type
PLN A1 RAG
PLN A1 RAG W
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
open
(The arrows indicate the

direction of operation)
closed
1
0.04
7
0.27
21-22
[mm (in)]
PL A1 AM
PL A1 AM W
PL A1 RM
PL A1 RM W
Travel [mm (in)]
0,5
0.02
8
0.31
21-22
[mm (in)]
PLN 978
8
0.31
0.5 0.5
0.02 0.02
8
0.31
11-12
21-22
PLN A1 RAG
[mm (in)]
Manual reload and

magnetic release
Order code
Contacts
Degree of Qty
protection per
pkg
Wt
IEC
[kg]
Top push rod plunger.
PL A1 AM
1NC
IP40
0.245
PL A1 AM W
1NC
IP65
0.250
Top roller push plunger.

PL A1 RM
1NC
IP40
0.250
PL A1 RM W
1NC
IP65
0.260
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
PL A1 AM
PL A1 RM W
Bi-directional
Order code
Contacts
Degree of Qty
protection per
pkg
Wt
IEC
[kg]
IP65
0.265
Rod plunger.
PLN 978
2NC
independent
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
The PLN limit switches were initially made specifically for
hoisting or lifting duty and then used in other diverse
applications. The type with latch and manual release as
well as the one with manual reload and magnetic release
are designed so the switch remains opened after the
switching of the NC contact. In the first instance, the
contact closing is made by pushing the release button. In
the second case, the reloading is obtained by pushing the
shaft end or else pulling it from the top for the IP65
types.
The limit switches with dual operation can be replaced by
two standard switches, for the stop control of moving
mechanisms with two directions of running (e.g.
automatic doors). It is equipped with two opposed
operating mechanisms and one NC contact for each
mechanism (i.e. 2NC).
The simple constructive design, oversize contacts and
careful material combinations warrant safe and constant
operation. The metal-alloy housing and the thermoplastic
mechanism material of first-rate mechanical features
assure reliability and durability with any type of operating
condition.
DC13 duty: 10A 24V
AC15 duty: 5A 250V, 3A 400V
IEC rated insulation voltage: 400VAC
Housing cable entry: PG11 (PL...W and PLN 978 types
only complete with cable gland)
Cable connection: screw terminal with clamp suitable
for cables up to 2.5mm2/AWG 14
Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm/22.1lbin
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC degree of protection: IP40 / IP65 (see table
indications).
Certifications obtained: IMQ, EAC.
IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 81-1.
PLN 978
9-22
Dimensions
page 9-31
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35

Rope-pull lever limit switches for normal stopping
Dimensions to EN 50047
Order code
Contacts
Ring
material
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]

RS1 13 10
1NO+1NC
Snap action
Steel
0.090
RS2 13 10
1NO+1NC
Slow action
Steel
0.090
2NO
Slow action
Steel
RS3 13 10
Order code
Contacts
Ring
material
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]

TS1 13 10
1NO+1NC
Snap action
Steel
0.117
TL1 13 10
1NO+1NC
Slow action
Steel
0.117
open
closed
RS1 13...
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
RS2 13...
21-22
13-14
RS3 13...
21-22
11-12
0.090
RS1 13 10
RS2 13 10
RS3 13 10
Dimensions to EN 50041
Type
TS1 13...
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
TL1 13...
21-22
13-14
[mm (in)]
6 (0.24)
[mm (in)]
6 (0.24)
[mm (in)]
6 (0.24)
[mm (in)]
6 (0.24)
[mm (in)]
6 (0.24)
The RS and T series limit switches are designed and
manufactured according to European standards for
dimensions and operating characteristics.
The double-insulated housing of the limit switch is made
of glass-reinforced self-extinguishing polyamide resin to
protect internal circuits against shocks or impacts and in
industrial environments, against accidental ingress of
tools and accidental contact.
the silver-alloy contact surfaces.
Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h for RS...13 10;
1200 cycles/h for T...13 10
IEC utilisation category
DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V
AC15 duty: 6A 250V
Operating force: 25N/5.6lb
Cable entry: PG11 for RS...13 10;
PG13.5 for T...13 10
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC degree of protection: IP65 for RS...13 10;
IP66 for T...13 10.
TS1 13 - TL1 10

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 81-1, EN 50041,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Accessories
page 9-27
Dimensions
page 9-32
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35
9-23

Rope-pull lever limit switches for normal stopping
Order code
Contacts
Degree Operating Qty Wt

of
force
per
protection
pkg
IEC
[N] / [lb] n [kg]
Type
PLN U1 AT W
PLN U1 AT25
1NO+1NC IP40
PLN U1 AT25 W
IP65
10 / 2.2
0.240
10 / 2.2
0.240
25 / 5.6
0.240
25 / 5.6
0.240
11
0.43
6 [mm (in)]
0.24
P2L 8...
11-12
21-22
0
[mm (in)]
10
0.39
[mm (in)]
10
0.39
P2L 10...
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
31-32
41-42
13-14
23-24
PLN...AT...W
Order code
Contacts
Degree Operating Qty Wt

of
force
per
protection
pkg
IEC
[N] / [lb] n [kg]
1,5
0.06
PLN U1 AT...
13-14
21-22
1NO+1NC IP40

IP65
open
closed
Without reset button

PLN U1 AT
Travel [mm (in)]
P2L8 13 11
P2L8 13 12
P2L10 13 11
P2L10 13 12
1NO+1NC IP65

IP65
0.459
120 / 27 1
0.459
2NO+2NC IP65

IP65
0.459
120 / 27 1
0.459
40 / 9
40 / 9
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
P2L...
The PLN and P2L types are limit switches for general
use.
The simple constructive design, oversize contacts and
careful material combinations warrant safe and constant
operation. The metal-alloy housing and the thermoplastic
mechanism material of first-rate mechanical features
assure reliability and durability with any type of operating
condition.
DC13 duty: 10A 24V
AC15 duty: 5A 250V; 3A 400V
IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A for PLN
types; 6A for P2L types
Cable entry: PG11 (PLN...W and P2L types only
complete with cable gland)
suitable for cables up to 2.5mm2/AWG 14
Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm/2.21 lbin
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC degree of protection: IP40 / IP65 (see order code
table indications).
Certifications obtained: IMQ.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, EN 81-1.
9-24
Dimensions
page 9-32
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35

Rope-pull lever limit switches for emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant.
Order code
Contacts
Force
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[N]/[lb]
[kg]
1NO + 1NC
25/5.6
0.092
TL13 13 10
1NO + 1NC
25/5.6
0.125
PLN13 13 11
1NO + 1NC
60/13.5
0.248
P2L13 13 11
1NO + 1NC
40/9
0.459
P2L13 13 12
1NO + 1NC
120/27
0.459
P2L15 13 11
2NO + 2NC
40/9
0.459
P2L15 13 12
2NO + 2NC
120/27
0.459
RS...
T...
PLN...
P2L13...
P2L15...
; safety function according to IEC/EN
60947-5-1.
Example of wiring diagram

RS13 13 10
MOTOR
TL13 13 10
M
3
START
STOP
ROPE LEVER
SWITCH
R
S
T
P2L...
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Accessories.
P33032
P33034
P33033
11-12
21-22
0
[mm (in)]
6 (0.24)
[mm (in)]
8 (0.31)
[mm (in)]
10 (0.39)
[mm (in)]
10 (0.39)
11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
31-32
41-42
13-14
23-24
The rope-operated switches for emergency stop are
mainly suitable for emergency stop or alarm systems for
machinery which occupies a large space. This emergency
stop can be achieved from any point when the rope is
manually pulled each time.
The choice of the body, between plastic and metal, can
satisfy the most diversified requirements for sturdiness
and size.
DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V (10A 24V only for PLN-P2L)
AC15 duty: 6A 250V (3A 400V only for PLN-P2L)
IEC conventional thermal current Ith:
10A for RS, TL and PLN; 6A for P2L
250VAC (400V for PLN-P2L)
Cable entry: PG11 for RS, PLN and P2L types (PLN
and P2L complete with cable gland); PG13.5 for TL13
only
Tightening torque:
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC degree of protection: IP65 (T series: IP66).
PLN 13 13 11
Order code
open
ROPE
CONTACT
ELEMENT
Accessories and
spare parts
Travel [mm (in)]
closed
With reset button.

RS13 13 10
Type
P33032
Rope terminal clamp, 5mm 10
0.023
P33033
Rope eye, 5mm
10
0.007
P33034
Turnbuckle M6x60
10
0.061
P33035
Eye bolt M8
10
0.030
P33036
Steel rope, 5mm
100[m] 4.900
The P33036 rope is sold in 100m/109.4yd roll; 5mm = 0.2.
Operation
Normal operation
position
Rope
traction
Rope
breaking
Certification and compliance

Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices Limit swtches for RS13 and TL13 types only.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, ISO 13850; also
UL508, CSA-C22.2 n 14 for RS and TL types.
P33035
P33036
Accessories
page 9-27
Dimensions
page 9-32
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35
9-25

Plastic micro switches, K series.
Accessories
Order code Contacts
Terminal
Qty per Wt
pkg
n
[kg]
0.031
TOP PUSH ROD - METAL PLUNGER. Pin.
KS A1...
KS A2...
KS A1 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
KS A1 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.031
KS A1 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.032
TOP PUSH ROD - METAL PLUNGER. High rod plunger.

KS A2 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
KS A2 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.033
0.033
KS A2 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.034
TOP PUSH ROD - METAL PLUNGER. Low rod plunger.
KS A3...
KS A4...
KS A3 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
KS A3 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.033
0.033
KS A3 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.035
TOP PUSH ROD - METAL PLUNGER. M12 fixing head.

KS A4 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
KS A4 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.052
0.052
KS A4 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.053
0.034
PUSH BUTTON.
9
KS A9...
KS B1...
KS A9 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
KS A9 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.034
KS A9 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.035
TOP ROLLER PUSH PLUNGER. M12 fixing head.

KS B1 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
0.057
KS B1 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.057
KS B1 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.058
TOP ROLLER PUSH PLUNGER. M12 fixing head, 90 roller.

KS B2 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
KS B2 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.057
0.057
KS B2 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.060
Maximum operating rate: 240 cycles/min
Switching time: 0.01-1ms
Operating speed: 0.01mm-1m per second
Electrical life: 500,000 cycles
Mechanical life: 20 million cycles
A600 P300
IEC rating: AC15 240VAC 3A
Body housing: polymer thermoplastic
Operating force:
KS A1-KS A4 and KS B types: 2.5N/9oz
KS A9 and KS C3 types: 1.5N/5.4oz
KS C1 types: 1N/3.6oz
KS C2 and KS L2: 1.3N/4.7oz
KS C9 types: 1.7N/6.1oz
KS L1 types: 6.4N/23oz
KS L3 types: 0.1N/0.36oz
Tightening torque:
For M12 head fixing: 4.9-6.9Nm/3.6-5.1lbft
For side screws: 0.6-1Nm/0.44-0.74lbft
For terminal screws: 0.7-1Nm/0.52-0.74lbft
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC degree of protection: IP00 or IP20 with terminal
shroud.
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Recognized for USA and
Canada (File E172189) as Industrial Control
Switches - Component; products having this type of
workshop - assembled equipment.
Compliance with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61058-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
ROLLER CENTRE PUSH LEVER. 26.6mm/1.05 long lever.

KS B2...
KS C1...
KS C1 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
KS C1 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.036
0.036
KS C1 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.037
ROLLER CENTRE PUSH LEVER. 48.5mm/1.91 long lever.
KS C2...
KS C3...
KS C2 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
KS C2 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.037
0.037
KS C2 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.038
ROLLER CENTRE PUSH LEVER. 38mm/1.5 long lever.

KS C3 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
KS C3 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.037
0.037
KS C3 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.038
ROLLER CENTRE PUSH LEVER. One-way roller lever.
KS C9...
KS L1...
KS C9 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
KS C9 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.038
0.038
KS C9 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.039
0.035
METAL LEVER. 63mm/2.48 long flat lever.

KS L1 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
KS L1 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.035
KS L1 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.037
0.035
METAL LEVER. 54mm/2.13 long flat lever.

KS L2...
KS L3...
KS L2 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
KS L2 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.035
KS L2 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.037
METAL LEVER. 168.3mm/6.63 long flat cylindrical lever.

KS L3 S
1NO/NC
Solder
10
KS L3 V
1NO/NC
Screw
10
0.037
0.037
KS L3 F
1NO/NC
Faston
10
0.038
ACCESSORIES.
KSS C01
9-26
KSS CB2
KSS C01
Terminal shroud
10
0.007
KSS CB2
Terminal shroud with conduit 10
0.015
Dimensions
page 9-33
Wiring diagrams
page 9-35

Foot switches, K series.
Accessories
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Model
Contacts
Qty Wt
per
pkg
n
[kg]
ONE PEDAL FOOT SWITCHES. With free actuation.
KG2 00 ...
KG2 20 ...
KR2 00 ...
KG1 00 S11 KR1 00 S11 Open

1NO+1NC 1
Snap action
KG1 00 L11 KR1 00 L11 Open

1NO+1NC 1
Slow action
KG2 00 S11 KR2 00 S11 With

cover
1NO+1NC 1
Snap action
KG2 00 L11 KR2 00 L11 With

cover
1NO+1NC 1
Slow action
KG1 10 S11 KR1 10 S11 Open

1NO+1NC 1
Snap action
KG1 10 L11 KR1 10 L11 Open

1NO+1NC 1
Slow action
KG2 10 S11 KR2 10 S11 With

cover
1NO+1NC 1
Snap action
KG2 10 L11 KR2 10 L11 With

cover
1NO+1NC 1
Slow action
KG2 10 S22 KR2 10 S22 With

cover
2NO+2NC 1
Snap action
KG1 20 S11 KR1 20 S11 Open

1NO+1NC 1
Snap action
KG1 20 L11 KR1 20 L11 Open

1NO+1NC 1
Slow action
KG2 20 S11 KR2 20 S11 With

cover
1NO+1NC 1
Snap action
KG2 20 L11 KR2 20 L11 With

cover
1NO+1NC 1
Slow action
KG2 11 S22 KR2 11 S22 With

cover
2NO+2NC
Order code
Plastic
Metal
body
body
Contacts
(for each
pedal)
With safety lever.
KG1 10 ...
KR2 10 ...
KR2 11 ...
With pedal actuator lock.
With two-stage safety lever.
KGD 003 - KGD 004
Model
2-stage
snap action
Qty Wt
per
pkg
n
[kg]
TWO PEDAL FOOT SWITCHES. With safety lever on both pedals.

KGD 001

KRD 001

Both
w/cover
1NO+1NC 1
Snap action
KGD 002
KRD 002
Both
w/cover
2NO+2NC 1
Snap action
Left pedal with free actuation and right pedal with safety lever.
; safety
function according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Consult Customer Service for information; see
A possible second contact block can be fitted;
blocks with only 2 contacts in total can be used.
See accessories below and contact blocks on
page 9-16.
Accessories
KGD 003

KRD 003

Left open 1NO+1NC 1

Snap action
Right
w/cover
KGD 004
KRD 004
Left
open
Right
w/cover
1NO+1NC 1
Snap action
2NO+2NC
Snap action
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Order code
Description
Accessories.
KX P...
KGX 01
Kit of elements to activate

2 contact block
10
0.039
KGX 02
Contact block mounting

bracket
10
0.022
0.009
KX P03
A possible second contact block can be fitted on
the left-hand pedal; blocks with only 2 contacts in

total can be used. See accessories below and
contact blocks on page 9-16.
The KG and KR foot switches are used to control machinery
and other equipment, leaving the operators hands free to do
other functions. The sturdiness of the metal and plastic body
and the wide range of the available versions provide the
proper solution for each control need.
Main features are:
Thermoplastic or metal version
The plastic or metal body gives adequate robustness to
the foot switch, for installation in all ambient and
application conditions.
Versions complete with or without pedal protection cover
The cover assures protection against accidental foot
switch operation, due to sudden tool or heavy material
dropping or other shock or vibration. The type without
cover, open version, is instead immediately accessible and
is preferred when the most important pedal operation is
to stop a machine.
Versions with safety lever
The safety mechanism prevents unintentional foot switch
activation and excludes the pedal pressing if the
operators foot is not completely in place.
Stable pedal base
The foot switch is equipped with rubber feet and metalreinforced base for a firm and non-sliding position and a
more reliable and safe activation.
Conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
Designation to IEC/EN 60947-5-1:
A600 Q600 for KG types
A300 Q300 for KR types
Tightening torque for contacts: 1Nm/0.74lbft
Rated insulation voltage Ui:
690VAC for KG types
440VAC for KR types
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
6kV for KG types
4kV for KR types
Class II insulation (KG types only)
Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG fuse
Cable connection: self-releasing screw terminal
Housing:
KG types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KR types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
Cable entry: M20
Ambient conditions:
Pollution degree: 3
IEC degree of protection:
IP20 for terminals
IP54 for body housing
IP65 available on request (add the letter S at the end
of the order code. E.g. KG1 00 S11 S).
Certifications obtained: EAC for foot switches and cURus
for contacts only (see page 9-16 for details).
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 60447.
The cable glands are in plastic with either M20 or PG13.5
thread and provide to keep the cable in place and maintain
the proper IP protection of the switch after installation.
Operational characteristics for cable gland
Material: Self-extinguishing polyamide
Gland seal with cable diameter: 6-12mm/0.24-0.47.
Compliant with standards: EN 50262, UL508.
Cable glands and cable conduit.

KX P01
M20 cable gland
50
KX P02
PG13.5 cable gland
50
0.009
KX P03
M20 rubber cable conduit
50
0.004
Dimensions
page 9-34
9-27

LIMIT SWITCHES K SERIES
22
(0.86")
20
(0.78")
42
(40)
4.3
(0.16")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
M20
M20
30
(1.18")
KB C1... - KB C2...
KM C1... - KM C2...
30
(1.18")
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
KC C1... - KC C2...
KN C1... - KN C2...
20
(0.78")
4.3
(0.16")
22
(0.86")
20
(0.78")
12.5
(0.49")
14
(0.55")
41
(1.61")
33
(1.30")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
4.3
(0.16")
44 (1.73")
39
(1.53")
22
(0.86")
12.5
(0.49")
14
(0.55")
54.5 (2.14")
4.3
(0.16")
30
(1.18")
KC D1... - KC D2...
KN D1... - KN D2...
12.5
(0.49")
14
(0.55")
M20
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")
M20
KB D1... - KB D2...
KM D1... - KM D2...
12.5
(0.49")
14
(0.55)
30
(1.18")
54.5 (2.14")
30
(1.18")
4.3
(0.16")
41 (1.61")
4.3
(0.16")
4.3
(0.16")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
44 (1.73")
22
(20)
12.5
(0.49")
11
(0.43")
30.5
(1.20")
20
(0.78")
8
(0.31")
54.5 (2.14")
22
(0.86")
20
(0.78")
44 (1.73")
20
(0.78")
4.3
(0.16")
12.5
(0.49")
11
(0.43
")
11.5
(0.45")
30.5
(1.20")
12.5
(0.49")
8
(0.31")
KC B1... - KC B2...
KN B1... - KN B2...
KB B1... - KB B2...
KM B1... - KM B2...
44 (1.73")
KC A1
KN A1
54.5 (2.14")
KB A1...
KM A1...
M20
30
(1.18")
M20
30
(1.18")
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")
30
(1.18")
KB E3...
KM E3...
KC E1... - KC E2...
KN E1... - KN E2...
KB E1... - KB E2...
KM E1... - KM E2...
M20
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")
M20
30
(1.18")
KC E3...
KN E3...
42 (1.57")
40 (1.57")
69.5 (2.73")
69.5 (2.73")
54 (2.12")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
4.3
(0.16")
50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
22
(0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
4.3
(0.16")
50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
44 (1.73")
54 (2.12")
22
(0.86")
20
(0.78")
19
(0.74")
54.5 (2.14")
19
(0.74")
4.3
(0.16")
40 (1.57")
20
(0.78")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
4.3
(0.16")
44 (1.73")
40 (1.57")
M20
M20
30
(1.18")
M20
KB F1... - KB F2...
KM F1... - KM F2...
30
(1.18")
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")
30
(1.18")
KC F1... - KC F2...
KN F1... - KN F2...
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")
M20
KB F3...
KM F3...
30
(1.18")
KC F3...
KN F3...
42.5 (1.67")
42.5 (1.67")
40 (1.57")
4.3
(0.16")
22
(0.86")
20
(0.78")
81-125 (3.19"-4.92")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
4.3
(0.16")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
44 (1.73")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
84 - 127 (3.30"- 5")
66-110 (2.60"x4.33")
4.3
(0.16")
50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
54.5 (2.14")
54.5 (2.14")
4.3
(0.16")
22
(0.86")
20
(0.78")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
44 (1.73")
68 - 111 (2.67"-4.37")
40 (1.57")
M20
30
(1.18")
M20
30
(1.18")
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")
KB F4...
KM F4...
KC F4...
KN F4...
M20
30
(1.18")
M20
KB H1...
KM H1...
30
(1.18")
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")
KC H1...
KN H1...
51.5-66.5 (2.02"-2.61")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
20
(0.78")
4.3
(0.16")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
M20
M20
30
(1.18")
9-28
30
(1.18")
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
10
(0.39")
94 (3.70")
50 (1.96")
50 (1.97")
94 (3.7")
22
(0.86")
26
(1.02")
26
(1.02")
44 (1.73")
20
(0.78")
4.3
(0.16")
4.3
(0.16")
10
(0.39")
54.5 (2.14")
22
(0.86")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
44 (1.73")
4.3
(0.16")
50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
54.5 (2.14")
50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
81-125 (3.19"-4.92")
84 - 127 (3.30"- 5")
51.5-66.5 (2.02"-2.61")
30
(1.18")
30
(1.18")
M20
30
(1.18")
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")

LIMIT SWITCHES
KB L1... - KB L2...
KM L1... - KM L2...
KC L1... - KC L2...
KN L1... - KN L2...
33.6
(1.32")
22
(0.86")
20
(0.78")
4.3
(0.16")
140 (5.51")
140 (5.51")
6
(0.23")
4.3
(0.16")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
44 (1.73")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
44 (1.73")
4.3
(0.16")
6
(0.24")
54.5 (2.14")
200 (7.87)
32-208 (1.26"-8.19")
3
(0.12")
200 (7.87)
32-208 (1.26"-8.19")
22
(0.86")
20
(0.78")
4.3
(0.16")
33.6
(1.32")
54.5 (2.14")
3
(0.12")
KC M1... - KC M2...
KN M1... - KN M2...
KB M1... - KB M2...
KM M1... - KM M2...
M20
M20
30
(1.18")
M20
KC P2...
KN P2...
69 (2.71")
44 (1.73")
22
(20)
4.3
(0.16")
42
(40)
30
(1.18")
M20
M20
KB Q1 L...
KM Q1 L...
30
(1.18")
M20
KC Q1 L...
KN Q1 L...
8 (0.31")
M20
M20
30
(1.18")
30
(1.18")
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
22
(0.86")
20
(0.78")
38,5
(1.52")
34 (1.34")
4.3
(0.16")
54.5 (2.14")
4.3
(0.16")
44 (1.73")
54.5 (2.14")
20
(0.78")
20
(0.79")
77 (3,03")
72.6 (2.86)
50.1 (1.97)
5.5 (0.22)
77 (3.03")
50.1 (1.97)
72.6 (2.86)
22
(0.86")
20
(0.78")
121 (4.76")
69 (2.71")
KB N1... - KB N2...
KM N1... - KM N2...
5.5 (0.22)
4.3
(0.16")
30
(1.18")
21 (0.83")
23.1
(0.90")
M20
30
(1.18")
KC P3...
KN P3...
8 (0.31")
20
(0.78")
3.3 (0.13")
6.9 (0.27")
6.9
(0.27")
KC P1...
KN P1...
21 (0.83")
121 (4.76")
30
(1.18")
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")
12 (0.47) Ext.
8 (0.31) Int.
KB P3...
KM P3...
8 (0.31")
3.3 (0.13")
23.1
(0.91")
54.5 (2.14")
22
(0.86")
20
(0.78")
12 (0.47) Ext.
8 (0.31) Int.
KB P2...
KM P2...
20 (0.79")
KB P1...
KM P1...
4.3
(0.16")
30
(1.18")
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")
M20
8
(0.31")
30
(1.18")
M20
9x4.6
(0.35x0.18")
15 (0.59")
M20
CH = Spanner/Wrench
PG13.5
5
(0.2")
CH = Spanner/Wrench
M20
CH24
5.6
(0.22")
28.1
9
(0.35") (1.11")
CH24
28.1
9
(0.35") (1.11")
M20
4.2
(0.18")
Cable conduit
KX P03
KX P02
CH24
30 (1.18")
)
5x4.2
(0.2x0.18")
7.9
(0.31")
Cable glands
KX P01
30
(1.18")
1.5 (0.06")
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
22
(0.87")
5x4.2
(0.2x0.18")
7.1 (0.28")
9x4.6
(0.35x0.18")
22
(0.87")
KX N5
30 (1.18")
11 (0.43")
17 (0.67")
30.9
(1.22")
9.5
(0.37")
43 (1.69")
38.5 (1.51")
14 (0.55")
44 (1.73")
34
(1.33")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
KX N4
30 (1.18")
14 (0.55")
4.3
(0.16")
KX N3
30
(1.18")
15 (0.59")
KX N2
M20
12.9 (0.51")
12.9 (0.51")
Keys
KX N1
KC N1... - KC N2...
KN N1... - KN N2...
30
(1.18")
7 (0.28")
13 (0.51")
30
(1.18")
50 (1.97")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")
M20
9.5
(0.37")
30
(1.18")
CH = Spanner/Wrench
9-29

PREWIRED METAL LIMIT SWITCHES, K SERIES
KP B1... - KP B2...
30
(1.18")
16 (0.63")
KP B7... - KP B8...
16 (0.63")
KP F1...
")
.17
(0
122 (4.8")
max. 170 (6.69")
7.9 (0.31")
.17
.17
")
")
5.5 (0.22")
(0
.3
.3
(0
(0
.17
")
15.8
20
(0.79")
30
(1.18")
16 (0.63")
20
(0.79")
40 (1.58")
48-118 (1.89"-4.65")
16 (0.63")
29
(1.14")
17.3 (0.68")
20
(0.79")
30
(1.18")
16 (0.63")
4.5 (0.18")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
30
(1.18")
16 (0.63")
13.5 (0.49")
40 (1.58")
4
.3
(0
.17
")
52 (2.05")
.17
(0
20
(0.79")
.3
4
20
(0.79")
30
(1.18")
4.5 (0.18")
14 (0.55")
")
44.8 (1.76")
40 (1.58")
16 (0.63")
30
(1.18")
16 (0.63")
PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES, T SERIES

Limit switches without reset button
TS1 01... - TL1 01...
TS1 05 20 - TL1 05 20
TS1 05 21 - TL1 05 21
TS1 05 24 - TL1 05 24
61 (2.40")
58.5 (2.30")
PG13.
TL2 10...
Keys
P32752
16
(0.63")
5.3x7,3
(0.20x0.28")
43 (1.69")
40 (1.57")
PG13.5
5.3x7,3
(0.20x0.28")
60 (2.36")
20
(0.78")
28
(1.10") 20
(0.78")
31
(1.22")
43 (1.69")
PG13.5
PG13.5
43 (1.69")
A20746
12
(0.47")
28
(1.10")
28.5
(1.12")
5
(0.20")
15
(0.59")
5.5 (0.22")
4.5
(0.17")
4.5
(0.17")
A20747
15
(0.59")
5.3
(0.20")
107 (4.21")
30
(1.18")
31
(1.22")
60 (2.36")
60 (2.36")
5.3
(0.20")
31
(1.22")
P32753
28.5
(1.12")
5
(0.20")
30
(1.18")
195 (7.67")
27
(1.06")
40 (1.57")
6
(0.24")
5.3
(0.20")
5.3x7,3
(0.20x0.28")
13.5
(0.53")
6 (0.23")
Steel
30
(1.18")
40 (1.57")
143 (5.63")
77 (3.03")
43 (1.69")
30
(1.18")
Rubber
15
(0.59")
Limit switches without reset button

TS1 09... - TL1 09...
5.3x7,3
(0.20x0.28")
31
(1.22")
50x10
(1.97x0.39")
35.5
(1.40")
13
(0.51")
28.5
4.5
(0.17") (1.12")
15
(0.59")
31.4
(1.24")
TS2 05 24 - TL2 05 24
61 (2.40")
58.5 (2.3")
40 (1.57")
9-30
5.3x7,3
(0.20x0.28")
43 (1.69")
PG13.5
40 (1.57")
5.3x7,3
(0.20x0.28")
77 (3.03")
4.3
0.17")
31
(1.22")
43 (1.69")
PG13.5
30
(1.18")
40 (1.57")
50x10
(1.97x0.39")
Rubber
5.3
(0.20")
5.3x7,3
(0.20x0.28")
143 (5.63")
5.3
(0.20")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")
20x5
(0.78x0.19")
Plastic
or metal
128 (5.03")
62 (2.44")
4.3
(0.17")
31
(1.22")
60 (2.36")
5.3
(0.20")
100.5 (3.95")
34.5
(1.36")
30
(1.18")
4.5
(0.17")
26
(1.02")
43 (1.69")
TS2 05 20 - TL2 05 20
TS2 05 21 - TL2 05 21
16
(0.63")
28.5
(1.12")
A20748
4.2
(0.16")
Limit switches with reset button

TS2 01... - TL2 01...
72
(2.83")
35
(1.37")
40 (1.57")
43 (1.69")
5.3
(0.20")
128 (5.03")
62 (2.44")
30
(1.18")
PG13
5.3x7,3
(0.20x0.28")
40 (1.57")
31
(1.22")
60 (2.36")
100.5 (3.95")
34.5
(1.36")
5.3
(0.20")
60 (2.36")
30
(1.18")
20x5
(0.78x0.19")
Plastic
or metal
55 (2.16")
16
(0.63")
60 (2.36")
18 (0.71")
24
(0.94")
12
(0.47")
30
(1.18")
KP M2...
3 (0.12")
M12x1
4
.3
16 (0.63")
KP L2...
34,4
(1.35")
20
(0.79")
40 (1.58")
30
(1.18")
16 (0.63")
M12x1
44.8 (1.76")
")
4
.3
(0
30
(1.18")
20
(0.79")
40 (1.58")
30
(1.18")
KP E1... - KP E2...
(0.47")
.17
")
.17
4
.3
(0
30
(1.18")
20
(0.79")
40 (1.58")
30
(1.18")
KP B5... - KP B6...
12
(0.47")
")
.17
(0
.3
20
(0.79")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
4
.3
(0
.17
34 (1.34")
")
M12x1
20
(0.79")
KP B3... - KP B4...
12
(0.47")
4
.3
KP A2...
20 (0.79")
KP A1...
31
(1.22")
43 (1.69")
PG13.5
50
(1.97")

METAL LIMIT SWITCHES, PL SERIES
PLN...A
PLN...R
PLN...AW
20.5
(0.81)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
40.5
(1.59)
PLN...H
20.5
(0.81)
PLN A1 RAG W
35.5
(1.40)
40.5
(1.59)
13.5
(0.53)
13.5
(0.53)
46
(1.81)
46
(1.81)
35.5
(1.40)
35.5
(1.40)
PG11
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
103.6 (4.08)
40.5
(1.59)
46
(1.81)
20
(0.79)
PG11
5.2
(0.20)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
46
(1.81)
PLN A1 RAG
35
(1.38)
5.2
(0.20)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
PLN A1 AM
40.5
(1.59)
30
(1.18)
5.2
(0.20)
40.5
(1.59)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
103.6 (4.08)
46
(1.81)
PG11
46
(1.81)
33
(1.30)
35.5
(1.40)
PG11
33
(1.30)
5.2
(0.20)
13.5
(0.53)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
103.6 (4.08)
46
(1.81)
35.5
(1.40)
46
(1.81)
13.5
(0.53)
40.5
(1.59)
20.5
(0.81)
46
(1.81)
46
(1.81)
35.5
(1.40)
PG11
PLN 978
PG11
40.5
(1.59)
5.2
(0.20)
20.5
(0.81)
20
(0.79)
5.2
(0.20)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
103.6 (4.08)
13.5
(0.53)
13.5
(0.53)
PG11
PL A1 RMW
20.5
(0.81)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
35.5
(1.40)
46
(1.81)
35.5
(1.40)
46
(1.81)
13.5
(0.53)
5.2
(0.20)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
PL A1 RM
20
(0.79)
20.5
(0.81)
30
(1.18)
46
(1.81)
PG11
40.5
(1.59)
40.5
(1.59)
PL A1 AM W
20.5
(0.81)
35.5
(1.40)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
103.6 (4.08)
5.2
(0.20)
PG11
5.2
(0.20)
20.5
(0.81)
20
(0.79)
40.5
(1.59)
13.5
(0.53)
35
(1.38)
35 - 50
(1.38 - 1-97)
59.5
(2.34)
59.5
(2.34)
20.5
(0.81)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
103.6 (4.08)
13.5
(0.53)
13.5
(0.53)
35 - 50
(1.38 - 1-97)
PG11
5.2
(0.20)
40.5
(1.59)
PLN...HSBW
PLN...HSB
35.5
(1.40)
46
(1.81)
PG11
5.2
(0.20)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
52
(2.05)
20
(0.79)
35.5
(1.40)
46
(1.81)
13.5
(0.53)
40.5
(1.59)
20.5
(0.81)
20.5
(0.81)
52
(2.05)
45
(1.77)
20
(0.79)
35.5
(1.40)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
103.6 (4.08)
40.5
(1.59)
PLN...HW
20.5
(0.81)
PG11
5.2
(0.20)
46
(1.81)
35.5
(1.40)
5.2
(0.20)
20.5
(0.81)
20
(0.79)
PG11
13.5
(0.53)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
103.6 (4.08)
PLN...RW
46
(1.81)
35.5
(1.40)
5.2
(0.20)
40.5
(1.59)
13.5
(0.53)
PG11
46
(1.81)
5.2
(0.20)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
PG11
13.5
(0.53)
35.5
(1.40)
46
(1.81)
28
(1.10)
28
(1.10)
20
(0.79)
45
(1.77)
20.5
(0.81)
20.5
(0.81)
40.5
(1.59)
9-31

ROPE LEVER
Limit switches for normal stopping
RS1 13... - RS3 13...
TS1 13... - TL1 13...
PLN...AT
16
(0.63")
PG11
5.3
(0.20")
35
(1.37")
PLN...ATW
40
(1.57")
PG13.5
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
43
(1.69")
46
(1.81)
33
(1.30)
31
(1.22")
5.2
(0.20)
13.5
0.53)
30.5
(1.20")
30
(1.18")
35.5
(1.40)
30
(1.18")
20
(0.78")
60 (2.36")
5.3x7,3
(0.20x0.28")
22
(0.86")
20
(0.78")
55 (2.16")
4.3
(0.16")
20
(0.78")
49 (1.93")
20
(0.78")
20.5
(0.81)
46.5 (1.83")
15
(0.59")
PG11
40.5
(1.59)
P2L...
20.4
(0.80)
81
(3.19)
PG11
13.5
(0.53)
5.2
(0.20)
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
103.6 (4.08)
5.2
(0.20)
46
(1.81)
35.5
(1.40)
36
(1.42)
33
(1.30)
20
(0.78")
14.5
(0.57)
PG11
40.5
(1.59)
19.5
(0.77)
20.5
(0.81)
60.8
(2.39)
27
(1.06)
48.5
(1.91)
72 (2.83)
84.5 (3.33)
100.1 (3.94)
ROPE-PULL SAFETY LIMIT SWITCHES, ISO 13850 COMPLIANT

Safety switches
RS13 13 10
TL13 13 10
PLN13 13 11
16
(0.63")
15
(0.59")
5.3
(0.20")
35
(1.37")
PG11
P2L 13... - P2L 15...

20.5
(0.81)
5.2
(0.20)
PG11
72 (2.83)
84.5 (3.33)
100.1 (3.94)
9-32
19.5
(0.77)
36
(1.42)
14.5
(0.57)
81
(3.19)
66.5
(2.62)
27
(1.06)
48.5
(1.91)
40
(1.57")
PG13.5
43
(1.69")
35.5
(1.40)
31
(1.22")
72 (2.83)
84 (3.31)
103.6 (4.08)
5.2
(0.20)
PG11
46
(1.81)
44.5
(1.75)
46.5 (1.83")
30
(1.18")
14.5
(0.57)
13.5
(0.53)
30.5
(1.20")
30
(1.18")
27
(1.06)
60 (2.36")
5.3x7,3
(0.20x0.28")
22
(0.86")
20
(0.78")
55 (2.16")
4.3
(0.16")
20
(0.78")
49 (1.93")
20
(0.79")
20.5
(0.81)
40.5
(1.59)

MICRO SWITCHES, K SERIES
17.5
(0.69")
17.5
(0.69")
4.4
(0.17")
13
(0.51)
33
(1.3")
13
(0.51)
20.2
(0.79")
27.5
(1.83")
38.6
(1.52")
13
(0.51)
M12x1
8.3 (0.33")
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
17.5
(0.69")
4.4
(0.17")
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
17.5
(0.69")
KS B2...
4.4
(0.17")
17.5
(0.69")
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
.5")
(R2
4.4
(0.17")
54 (2.12")
4.3 (0.17")
26
(1.02")
21
(0.83")
8
(0.31")
R5
4.9 (0.19")
4.4
(0.17")
33
(1.3")
17.5
(0.69")
26.2
(1.03")
168.3 (6.63")
9.5x4
(0.37"x0.16)
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
4.4
(0.17")
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
33
(1.3")
44
(1.73")
13
(0.51)
20.2
(0.79")
33
(1.3")
")
26.2
(1.03")
17.5
(0.69")
0.96
33
(1.3")
2
4 (R
29
(1.14")
13
(0.51)
20.2
(0.79")
33
(1.3")
17.5
(0.69")
R31.9
(R1.2")
17.5
(0.69")
KSS CB2 terminal shroud with conduit

39.2
(1.54")
ACCESSORIES
KSS C01 terminal shroud
26.2
(1.03")
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
17.5
(0.69")
9.5x4
(0.37"x0.16)
27
(1.06")
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
.5")
(R1
4.4
(0.17")
.13
4.9 (0.19")
29
(1.14")
13
(0.51)
20.2
(0.79")
26.2
(1.03")
R38
KS L3...
KS L2...
.5
R63
26.2
(1.03")
17 (0.67")
KS L1...
4.4
(0.17")
KS C9...
9.5x4
(0.37"x0.16)
37.3
(1.47")
13
(0.51)
20.2
(0.79")
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
17.5
(0.69")
KS C3...
.5
R481.91")
(R
16
(0.63")
4.4
(0.17")
26.2
(1.03")
13
(0.51)
20.2
(0.79")
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
33
(1.3")
20.2
(0.79")
33.7
(1.33")
R26.1
(R1.05")
9.5x4
(0.37"x0.16)
37.3
(1.47")
KS C2...
26.2
(1.03")
17.5
(0.69")
13
(0.51)
20.2
(0.79")
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
17.5
(0.69")
KS C1...
12.5x3.8
(0.49"x0.15")
27.5
(1.83")
27.5
(1.83")
4.4
(0.17")
M12x1
33
(1.3")
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
23.3
(0.92")
50.2
(1.98")
M12x1
12.5x3.8
(0.49"x0.15")
50.2
(1.98")
13
(0.51)
23.3
(0.92")
13
(0.51)
KS B1...
5
(0.20")
4.4
(0.17")
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
17.5
(0.69")
KS A9...
23.3
(0.92")
20
(0.79")
4.4
(0.17")
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
KS A4...
13
(0.51)
27.8
(1.83")
13
(0.51)
27.5
(1.83")
4.4
(0.17")
12.3 (0.40")
10 (0.39")
7.15 (0.28")
23.3
(0.92")
27.5
(1.83")
25.4 (1")
49.2 (1.94")
5.2 (0.2")
4 (0.16")
23.4
(0.92")
2.3 (0.09")
16.4
(0.65")
13
(0.51)
23.3
(0.92")
KS A3...
22
(0.87")
KS A2...
27.5
(1.83")
KS A1...
25
(0.98")
53 (2.09")
68 (2.68")
22
(0.87")
9-33

FOOT SWITCHES, K SERIES
KG1
264 (10.40")
150 (5.90")
34
(1.34")
86
(3.38")
M20
KG2
286.6 (11.28")
164 (6.46")
150 (5.90")
34
(1.34")
86
(3.38")
M20
9
KR1
140 (5.51")
238.7 (9.40")
57
(2.24")
25
(0.98")
M20
KR2
140 (5.51")
M20
25
(0.98")
75
(2.95")
120 (4.72")
250 (9.84")
516.5 (20.33")
KGD
286.6 (11.28")
166.5 (6.55")
516.5 (20.33")
301.2 (11.86")
286.6 (11.28")
9-34
36.5
(1.44")
88.5
(3.48")
M20
301.2 (11.86")

Wiring diagrams
LIMIT SWITCHES, KB - KM - KC - KN TYPE
K...S11
K...L11
K...L02
K...S02
K...D02
K...L20
Snap action
Slow action
Slow action
Snap action
Slow action Slow action
11
21
11
21
12
22
12
22
21
13
22
14
1NO + 1NC
21
13
22
14
2NC
1NO + 1NC
22
14
1NO + 1NC
black
brown
13
blue
21
22
yellow/green
Slow action
black
yellow/green
black
brown
blue
13
black
21
14
1NO + 1NC
Snap action
13
21
14
22
1NO + 1NC
RS3...
Snap action
Slow action
21
14
22
1NO + 1NC
Slow action
13
21
14
22
14
24
2NO
1NO + 1NC
13
22
14
K...L12
Slow action
17
25
11
21
31
18
26
12
22
32
LIMIT SWITCHES, PL TYPE

PLN A1...
PLN A2...
PLN 978
11
1NO + 1NC
11
21
12
12
22
1NC
2NC
K...L21
Slow action
1NO + 1NC
3NC
make before break
Slow action
21
K...L03
Slow action
13
21
31
14
22
32
1NO + 2NC
PLN C1...
14
1NO
23
31
14
24
32
2NO + 1NC
PLN C2....
13
13
13
23
14
24
2NO
PLN U1...
21
13
22
14
1NO + 1NC
LIMIT SWITCHES FOR NORMAL STOPPING

RS1...
RS2...
TS1...
TL1...
13
23
LIMIT SWITCHES, T TYPE

TL...
TS...
LIMIT SWITCHES, KP TYPE

KP...L11
KP...S11
Snap action
2NC
13
K...A11
13
23
14
24
1NO + 1NC
LIMIT SWITCHES FOR EMERGENCY STOPPING

PLN13...
P2L13...
RS13...
TL13...
PLN U1AT...
P2L8...
21
13
22
14
PLN U1...
1NO + 1NC
21
13
22
14
1NO + 1NC
P2L10...
13
23
31
41
14
24
32
42
2NO + 2NC
P2L15...
13
14
11
12
31
32
13
23
31
41
21
22
21
22
41
42
14
24
32
42
MICRO SWITCHES, KS TYPE

KS...
NC
2
NO
3
1
COM
9-35
Page 10-2
GX SERIES
IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith
16A to 40A ratings
Square-shaped contact body
IEC IP20 degree of protection of contacts
IEC IP65 degree of protection on front,
standard supplied.
Page 10-10
GN SERIES
16A to 125A ratings
Round-shaped contact body
IEC IP00 degree of protection of contacts
IEC IP40 degree of protection on front,
standard supplied.
10
ROTARY CAM SWITCHES
Suitable for circuit connection,

changeover, switching on and off as
well as motor starting
Possible special circuit schemes
IEC IP40 or IP65 front degree of
protection
2-screw fixing
Wide range of features.
SEC. - PAGE PAGE

TYPE
GX GN
Front mount versions
On/Off switches. U version, front mount ..................................................................................................................
Changeover switches with or without O (OFF). U version, front mount .....................................................................
Motor switches. U version, front mount ..................................................................................................................
Voltemeter switches. Ammeter switches. U version, front mount .............................................................................
On/Off switches. U11 version, front ring mount with handle operation for 22mm/0.88 fixing ..............................
On/Off switches. U12 version, front ring mount with key operation for 22mm/0.88 fixing ...................................
On/Off safety switches. U25-U65 version, front mount with red/yellow padlockable handle ......................................
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
2
3
4
4
5
5
5
10
11
12
13
14
14
14
10 10 -
6
6
15
15
10 -
10
10
10
10
8
8
8
9
16
16
16
17
Special circuit scheme form .............................................................................................................................. 10 -
18
18
Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 10 Wiring diagrams .................................................................................................... 10 Technical characteristics .......................................................................................... 10 -
20
22
24
21
22
24
Rear mount versions

On/Off switches. O88-O98-O99 version, door coupling with red/yellow padlock system ...........................................
On/Off switches. O68-O78-O79 version, door coupling system ................................................................................
On/Off switches. Changeover switches. Voltmeter switches.
Ammeter switches. O48 version, modular DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mount ................................................................
AND
C ONTROL
On/Off switches. Changeover switches. P version ...................................................................................................

Motor switches. P version with rotating handle .......................................................................................................
On/Off switches. P25 version with padlockable handle .............................................................................................
Accessories ...........................................................................................................................................................
S IGNALLING
Versions in enclosure
Rotary cam switches

GX series
U version
front mount.
ON/OFF switches
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
Weight
[A]
[mm]
[kg]
n 48
n 48
0.096
20
0.096
GX32 90 U
32
n 65
0.192
GX40 90 U
40
n 65
0.194
IEC 16 to 40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
ratings
Extended mechanical and electrical life
Rotation angles: 30, 45, 60 and 90
Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
IEC IP65 front degree of protection; IEC IP20
protection of contacts
Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
the order code table; any other on request.
16
n 48
0.100
Selection guide
See page 10-24.
20
n 48
n 65
n 65
0.100
0.204
0.206
n 48
n 48
0.115
0.115
n 65
n 65
0.242
0.244
n 48
n 48
0.118
0.122
n 65
n 65
0.252
0.254
Order
code
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
One-pole 1 wafer scheme 90.
GX16 90 U
16
0
GX20 90 U
Two-pole 1 wafer scheme 91.

GX16 91 U
0
GX20 91 U
GX32 91 U
32
GX40 91 U
40
Three-pole 2 wafers scheme 10.

GX16 10 U
16
0
GX20 10 U
20
GX32 10 U
32
GX40 10 U
40
Four-pole 2 wafers scheme 92.

GX16 92 U
16
0
GX20 92 U
10
20
GX32 92 U
32
GX40 92 U
40
UL/CSA
general
use [A]
UL/CSA horsepower ratings

120V
230V
200V
230V
480V
600V
GX16
12
/4
11/2
6.5
GX20
15
/4
11/2
11/2
7.5
GX32
32
11/2
71/2
15
15
15
GX40
40
10
15
15
18.5
1 phase
Enlarged front plate for GX32-GX40 (90x90mm instead of

standard 65x65):
Add H after the switch rating in the order code
E.g. GX32H 10 U.
Special versions
In addition to standard types, particular versions are
available with special operating circuit schemes.
See page 10.18.
Example of U version switch mounting
Front plate size:

48x48mm = 1.9x1.9
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5.
Type
Optional
standard 48x48):
E.g. GX16H 10 U.
3 phases
Max IEC AC23

power [kW]
at 400V

Canada (File E155982) as Manual Motor Controllers.
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61058-1,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
10-2
Accessories
page 10-9
Dimensions
page 10-20
Wiring diagrams
page 10-22
pages 10-24 and 25
Rotary cam switches

GX series
U version
front mount.
Changeover switches
with 0 position.
Changeover switches
without 0 position
Order
code
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
Weight
[A]
[mm]
[kg]
n 48
n 48
0.098
20
0.098
GX32 51 U
32
n 65
0.210
GX40 51 U
40
n 65
0.212
ratings
IEC IP65 front degree of protection; IEC IP20
protection of contacts
16
n 48
0.120
Selection guide
See page 10-24.
20
n 48
n 65
n 65
0.120
0.270
0.272
n 48
n 48
0.148
0.148
n 65
n 65
0.327
0.326
n 48
n 48
0.164
0.172
n 65
n 65
0.378
0.380
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES WITH 0.

GX16 51 U
16
1
GX20 51 U
Two-pole 2 wafers scheme 52.

GX16 52 U
1
GX20 52 U
GX32 52 U
32
GX40 52 U
40

GX16 53 U
16
1
GX20 53 U
20
GX32 53 U
32
GX40 53 U
40

GX16 75 U
16
1
GX20 75 U
20
GX32 75 U
32
GX40 75 U
40
n 48
n 48
n 65
0.098
0.098
0.212
n 48
n 48
0.124
20
0.124
32
n 65
0.266
16
n 48
0.148
20
n 48
0.148
32
n 65
0.318
16
n 48
0.164
20
n 48
0.172
32
n 65
0.380
16
GX20 54 U
20
GX32 54 U
32

standard 65x65):
E.g. GX32H 52 U.
Special versions
See page 10-18.
10
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES WITHOUT 0.

GX16 54 U
Optional
standard 48x48):
E.g. GX16H 52 U.

GX16 55 U
16
GX20 55 U
GX32 55 U

GX16 56 U
GX20 56 U
GX32 56 U

GX16 69 U
GX20 69 U
GX32 69 U

UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Front plate size:

48x48mm = 1.9x1.9
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5.
Type
UL/CSA
general
use [A]

120V
230V
200V
230V
480V
600V
GX16
12
/4
11/2
6.5
GX20
15
/4
11/2
11/2
7.5
GX32
32
11/2
71/2
15
15
15
GX40
40
10
15
15
18.5
Accessories
page 10-9
1 phase
3 phases
Dimensions
page 10-20
Max IEC AC23

power [kW]
at 400V
Wiring diagrams
page 10-22
pages 10-24 and 25
10-3
Rotary cam switches

GX series
U version
front mount.
Motor switches
Order
code
Ith IEC
Front
AC1 power plate
IEC AC23A size
Qty
per
pkg
Wt.
16
0.138
7.5
n 48
n 48
20
0.140
32
15
n 65
0.316
n 65 1
Pole-changing switches. 4 wafers scheme 13.
0.318
ratings
IEC IP65 front degree of protection; IEC IP20 degree
of protection of contacts
[A]
[kg]
Selection
See page 10-24.
[kW]
[mm]
MOTOR SWITCHES.
Reversing switches. Three-pole 3 wafers scheme 11.
GX16 11 U
0
GX20 11 U
GX32 11 U
GX40 11 U
GX16 13 U
0
GX20 13 U
40
15
16
n 48
0.166
n 48
n 65
n 65
0.168
0.400
0.400
n 48
n 48
0.176
0.176
n 65
n 65
0.384
0.386
20
7.5
GX32 13 U
32
15
GX40 13 U
40
15
Star-delta switches. 4 wafers scheme 12.

GX16 12 U
16
20
7.5
GX32 12 U
32
15
GX40 12 U
40
15
GX20 12 U
3-pole motor reversing switches with spring return to 0.

3 wafers scheme 26.
16
0.148
20
7.5
n 48
n 48
GX20 26 U
0.148
GX32 26 U
32
15
n 65
0.320
GX16 26 U
10
U version
front mount.
Voltmeter switches.
Ammeter switches
1 0 2
Order
code
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
Weight
[A]
[mm]
[kg]
Optional
standard 48x48): Add H after the switch rating in the
order code E.g. GX16H 11 U.
standard 65x65): Add H after the switch rating in the
order code E.g. GX32H 11 U.
Special versions
See page 10-18.
VOLTMETER SWITCHES.
Phase-Neutral L1-N/L2-N/L3-N 2 wafers scheme 68.
GX16 68 U
0
L1N
n 48
16
0.120
L2N
L3N
Phase-Phase L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1 2 wafers scheme 67.

GX16 67 U
0
L1-L2
n 48
16
0.124
L2-L3
L3-L1
For 3 phase to phase voltage and 3 phase voltage readings

3 wafers scheme 66.
GX16 66 U
L1-L2
0
L1-N
n 48
16
0.152
L2-N
L2-L3
L3-N
L3-L1
For 1 phase voltage and 3 phase to phase voltage readings

3 wafers scheme 60.
GX16 60 U
L1N
0
L1-L2
n 48
16

UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Valid for motor, voltmeter and ammeter switches:
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5.
0.143
L2-L3
L3-L1
AMMETER SWITCHES.
Direct L1-L2-L3 current readings 5 wafers scheme 97.
0
n 48 1
GX16 97 U
16
0.186
L3
L1
L2
For L1-L2-L3 readings via 3 CTs 3 wafers scheme 98.

GX16 98 U
n 48
16
0
L3
0.144
L1
L2
Type
UL/CSA
general
use [A]

120V
230V
200V
230V
480V
600V
GX16
12
/4
11/2
6.5
GX20
15
/4
11/2
11/2
7.5
GX32
32
11/2
71/2
15
15
15
GX40
40
10
15
15
18.5
10-4
1 phase
Accessories
page 10-9
3 phases
Max IEC AC23

power [kW]
at 400V
Dimensions
page 10-20
Wiring diagrams
pages 10-22 and 23
pages 10-24 and 25
Rotary cam switches

GX series
U11 version
front ring mount
with handle operation,
for 22mm/0.88 fixing.
ON/OFF switches
Order
code
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
Weight
[A]
[mm] n
[kg]
0.100
0.100
0.120
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
GX16 90 U11
16

GX16 91 U11
16

GX16 10 U11
16
U12 version
front ring mount
with key operation,
ON/OFF switches
Order
code
16
Qty
per
pkg
Selection
See page 10-24.
0.123
Optional
standard 48x48):
E.g. GX16H 10 U25.
Weight

standard 65x65):
E.g. GX32H 10 U25.

GX16 92 U11
ratings
IEC IP65 front degree of protection for U25 amd U65,
IEC IP40 for U11 and U12; IEC IP20 protection of
contacts
Legend marking for U11 and U12 versions is only for
reference while for U25 and U65 types standard
supplied as illustrated in the order code table; any
other on request.
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
[A]
[mm] n
[kg]
Special versions
See page 10-18.
0.122
Example of U25-U65 switch mounting
0.122
0.140
16
0.146
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
Weight
[A]
[mm] n
[kg]
n 48
n 48
0.125
20
0.125
GX32 10 U25
32
n 65
0.254
GX40 10 U65
40
n 65
0.254
n 48
n 48
0.130
0.130
n 65
n 65
0.266
0.266
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
GX16 90 U12
16

GX16 91 U12
16

GX16 10 U12
16

GX16 92 U12
U25-U65 versions
front mount with red/yellow
padlockable handle.
ON/OFF switches
Order
code
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
GX16 10 U25
16
0
GX20 10 U25

UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Valid for U25 - U65 versions:
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5.

GX16 92 U25
16
0
GX20 92 U25
Type
20
GX32 92 U25
32
GX40 92 U65
40
UL/CSA
general
use [A]

120V
230V
200V
230V
480V
600V
GX16
12
/4
11/2
6.5
GX20
15
/4
11/2
11/2
7.5
GX32
32
11/2
71/2
15
15
15
GX40
40
10
15
15
18.5
Accessories
page 10-9
1 phase
3 phases
Dimensions
page 10-20
Max IEC AC23

power [kW]
at 400V
Wiring diagrams
page 10-22
pages 10-24 and 25
10-5
10
Rotary cam switches

GX series
O88 - 098 versions
rear mount
door coupling with
red/yellow padlock system.
ON/OFF switches
Order
code
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
Weight
[A]
[mm] n
[kg]
n 48
n 48
0.178
20
0.200
GX32 10 O88
32
n 65
0.320
GX40 10 O98
40
n 65
0.320
ratings
16
n 48
0.182
Selection
See page 10-24.
20
0.182
0.320
0.330
Optional
standard 48x48):
E.g. GX16H 10 O88.
Qty
per
pkg
Weight

standard 65x65):
E.g. GX32H 10 O88.
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
GX16 10 O88
16
0
GX20 10 O88

GX16 92 O88
0
GX32 92 O88
32
GX40 92 O98
40
n 48
n 65
n 65
Order
code
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
[A]
[mm] n
[kg]
16
n 48
0.170
Special versions
See page 10-18.
20
0.170
Example of O version switch mounting
0.295
GX20 92 O88
O68 - 078 versions

rear mount
door coupling system.
ON/OFF switches
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
GX16 10 O68
10
GX32 10 O68
32
n 48
n 65
GX40 10 O78
40
n 65
0.295
16
n 48
0.180
20
n 48
0.190
GX32 92 O68
32
0.316
GX40 92 O78
40
n 65
n 65
0.316
GX20 10 O68

GX16 92 O68
0
GX20 92 O68
Type
UL/CSA
general
use [A]

120V
230V
200V
230V
480V
600V
GX16
12
/4
11/2
6.5
GX20
15
/4
11/2
11/2
7.5
GX32
32
11/2
71/2
15
15
15
GX40
40
10
15
15
18.5
10-6
1 phase
Accessories
page 10-9
3 phases
Max IEC AC23

power [kW]
at 400V
Dimensions
page 10-20

UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
Valid for O88 - O98 - O68 - O78 versions:
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9
60x60mm = 2.6x2.6
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5.
Wiring diagrams
page 10-22
pages 10-24 and 25
Rotary cam switches

GX series
O48 version
modular service cover
35mm DIN rail mount.
ON/OFF switches.
Changeover switches.
Voltmeter switches.
Ammeter switches
Order
code
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
Weight
[A]
[mm] n
[kg]
45x54 1
0.110
45x54 1
0.110
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
One-pole 3 wafers scheme 90.
GX16 90 O48
16

GX16 91 O48
16
Selection guide
See page 10-24.

GX16 10 O48
16
45x54 1
0.118
45x54 1
0.125
45x54 1
0.098

GX16 92 O48
16
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES WITH 0.

One-pole 3 wafers scheme 51.
GX16 51 O48
16
IEC 16A conventional free air thermal current Ith
ratings
Suitable for screw fixing or mounting on 35mm DIN
rail (IEC/EN 60175)
Special versions
See page 10-18.
UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
10
GX16 52 O48
16
45x54 1
0.122
45x54 1
0.150
45x54 1
0.170

GX16 53 O48
16

GX16 75 O48
16
VOLTMETER SWITCHES.
Phase-Neutral L1-N/L2-N/L3-N 3 wafers scheme 68.
GX16 68 O48
0
L1N
16
45x54 1
0.130
L2N
L3N
Phase-Phase L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1 3 wafers scheme 67.

GX16 67 O48
0
L1-L2
16
45x54 1
0.130
L2-L3
L3-L1
For 3 phase to phase voltage and 3 phase voltage readings

3 wafers scheme 66
GX16 66 O48
L1-L2
0
L1-N
L2-L3
16
45x54 1
0.156
L2-N
L3-N
L3-L1
AMMETER SWITCHES.
Direct L1-L2-L3 current readings 5 wafers scheme 97.
GX16 97 O48
16
0
L3
45x54 1
0.196
L1
L2
For L1-L2-L3 readings via 3 CTs 4 wafers scheme 98.

GX16 98 O48
16
0
L3
45x54 1
0.150
L1
L2
Front cover size:

45x54mm = 1.8x2.1
Type
GX16
UL/CSA
general
use [A]

120V
230V
200V
230V
480V
600V
12
11/2
Accessories
page 10-9
1 phase
/4
3 phases
Dimensions
page 10-20
Max IEC AC23

power [kW]
at 400V
6.5
Wiring diagrams
pages 10-22 and 23
pages 10-24 and 25
10-7
Rotary cam switches

GX series
P version in enclosure
with rotating handle.
ON/OFF switches.
Changeover switches
Orde code
IEC
Housing Qty Wt
per
current size
pkg
AC1
[A]
[mm]
[kg]
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
Three poles - scheme 10.
GX16 10 P
16
90x90
0.330
20
90x90
0.330
GX32 10 P
32
110x110 1
0.560
GX40 10 P
40
110x110 1
0.560
16
90x90
0.340
GX20 10 P
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
Four poles - scheme 92.
GX16 92 P
0
GX20 92 P
20
90x90
0.340
GX32 92 P
32
110x110 1
0.575
GX40 92 P
40
110x110 1
0.575
16
90x90
0.415
CHANGEOVER SWICTHES.
GX16 53 P
0
GX20 53 P
20
90x90
0.415
GX32 53 P
32
110x110 1
0.710
GX40 53 P
40
110x110 1
0.710
16
90x90
0.430
20
90x90
0.430
GX32 75 P
32
110x110 1
0.760
GX40 75 P
40
110x110 1
0.760

GX16 75 P
10
Motor switches
GX20 75 P
Order code
Ith
AC1
IEC
IEC
Housing Qty
per
power size
AC23A
pkg
Wt.
[A]
[A]
[kg]
[mm]
ratings
IP65 degree of protection
Top and bottom entry: 4 PG16 threaded knockouts for
90x90mm types and 4 PG21 for 110x110mm
Selection guide
See page 10-24.
Special versions
See page 10-18.
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61058-1.
Valid for P - P25 versions:
Housing size:
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5
110x110mm = 4.3x4.3.
MOTOR SWITCHES.
Three-pole reversing switches - scheme 11.
GX16 11 P
16
90x90 1
20
7.5
90x90 1
0.425
GX32 11 P
32
15
110x110 1
0.695
GX40 11 P
40
15
110x110 1
0.700
GX20 11 P
P25 version in enclosure

with padlockable rotating
handle.
ON/OFF switches
Orde code
0.405
IEC
Housing Qty Wt
per
current size
pkg
AC1
[A]
[mm]
[kg]
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
GX16 10 P25
16
90x90
0.340
GX20 10 P25
20
90x90
0.345
GX32 10 P25
32
110x110 1
0.586

GX16 92 P25
16
90x90
0.350
GX20 92 P25
20
90x90
0.350
GX32 92 P25
32
110x110 1
0.605
For indication and reference purposes only - No UL/CSA approval

Type
UL/CSA
general
use [A]

120V
230V
200V
230V
480V
600V
GX16
12
/4
11/2
6.5
GX20
15
/4
11/2
11/2
7.5
GX32
32
11/2
71/2
15
15
15
GX40
40
10
15
15
18.5
10-8
1 phase
Accessories
page 10-9
3 phases
Max IEC AC23

power [kW]
at 400V
Dimensions
page 10-20
Wiring diagrams
page 10-22
pages 10-24 and 25
Rotary cam switches

Accessories for GX series
Accessories for
GX switches
Order
code
Description
Q.ty Weight
per
pkg
n.
[kg]
Black operating handle.
7 AO14 - 7 AR114 - 7 A114 - 7 AR214
7 AO14
For 48x48mm/1.9x19
front plate n 6mm/0.24 for
GX16-GX20
0.005
7 A114
For 65x65mm/2.6x2.6
GX32-GX40 and
GX16H-GX20H
0.010
7 AR214
For 90x90mm/3.5x3.4
front plate
n 7mm/0.28 for
GX32H-GX40H
0.015
Black operating lever.
7 AR124 - 7 A124 - 7 AR224
7 A124
For 65x65mm/2.6x2.6
GX32-GX40 and
GX16H-GX20H
0.020
7 AR224
For 90x90mm/3.5x3.4
GX32H-GX40H
0.038
Adjustable door-coupling extension shaft. 70mm/2.8

long max.
7 APRBP
For GX16 to GX40
0.027
IP40 face plate.
10
GX M1
48x48mm/1.9x1.9 blank
face plate
0.018
GX M2
face plate
0.023
7 APRBP
IP40 face plate with legend plate.

GX M5
face plate with legend plate
0.017
GX M6
face plate with legend plate
0.033
GX A01
48x48mm/1.9x1.9 red/yellow 1
0-1 padlockable handle for
2-position GX16-GX20
0.026
GX A01H
0.047
GX A11
0.047
Padlockable handle.
GX M1 - GX M2
Also suitable for GN series.
GX M5 - GX M6
GX A01 - GX A01H - GX A11
10-9
Rotary cam switches

GN series
U version
front mount.
ON/OFF switches
Order code
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[mm]
[kg]
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
One pole - 1 wafer - scheme 90.
7 GN12 90 U
16
0.075
20
n 48
n 48
7 GN20 90 U
0.077
25
n 48
0.087
7 GN32 90 U
32
0.173
7 GN40 90 U
40
0.173
7 GN63 90 U
63
n 65
n 65
n 65
0.200
n 48
n 48
0.079
0.082
0.094
0.186
0.186
7 GN25 90 U
IEC 16 to 125A conventional free air thermal current
Ith ratings
Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
IEC IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see
Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts
Selection guide
See page 10-24.
2 poles - 1 wafer - scheme 91.

7 GN12 91 U
16
7 GN20 91 U
20
0
7 GN32 91 U
32
7 GN40 91 U
40
n 48
n 65
n 65
7 GN63 91 U
63
n 65
0.218
7 GN25 91 U
25
3 poles - 2 wafers - scheme 10.

7 GN12 10 U
16
n 48
0.088
7 GN20 10 U
20
n 48
n 48
0.095
0.116
0.228
0.240
7 GN25 10 U
10
25
7 GN32 10 U
32
7 GN40 10 U
40
n 65
n 65
7 GN63 10 U
63
n 65
0.282
7 GN125 10 U
125
n 90
0.706
16
n 48
0.088
20
n 48
n 48
n 65
0.098
0.122
0.232
n 65
n 65
n 90
0.251
0.302
0.782
Optional
IEC IP65 front plate
Add 51 at the end of the order code.
E.g. 7 GN12 92 U 51.
Enlarged plate for GN12-20-25 (65x65mm instead of
48x48)
Add the letter H after the switch size of the order code.
E.g. 7 GN12H 10 U.
65x65)
E.g. 7 GN32H 10 U.
Special versions
See page 10-18.
4 poles - 2 wafers - scheme 92.

7 GN12 92 U
7 GN20 92 U
7 GN25 92 U
25
7 GN32 92 U
32
7 GN40 92 U
40
7 GN63 92 U
63
7 GN125 92 U
125

Certifications obtained: EAC; CSA certified, for Canada
and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
(File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Front plate size:

48x48mm = 1.9x1.9
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5.
Type
UL/CSA
general
use [A]

120V
230V
200V
230V
480V
600V
GN12
15
/4
11/2
GN20
20
/4
11/2
7.5
GN25
30
11/2
10
15
11
GN32
40
10
15
15
15
GN40
50
10
20
20
18.5
GN63
60
10
71/2
15
25
25
30
GN125
130
71/2
15
15
25
50
40
45
10-10
1 phase
Accessories
page 10-17
3 phases
Max IEC AC23

power [kW]
at 400V
5.5
Dimensions
page 10-20
Wiring diagrams
page 10-22
page 10-24 e 25
Rotary cam switches

GN series
U version, front mount.
Changeover switches with
or without 0 (OFF)
Order code
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[mm]
[kg]
CHANGEOVER SWITCH WITH 0 (OFF).

One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 51.
7 GN12 51 U
16
0.078
20
n 48
n 48
7 GN20 51 U
0.081
25
n 48
0.090
7 GN32 51 U
32
0.183
7 GN40 51 U
40
0.194
7 GN63 51 U
63
n 65
n 65
n 65
0.224
n 48
n 48
0.095
0.098
n 48
n 65
n 65
0.121
0.232
0.251
n 65
n 90
0.302
0.788
n 48
n 48
0.107
0.115
0.152
0.285
7 GN25 51 U
Ith ratings
Selection guide
See page 10-24.
Two-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 52.

7 GN12 52 U
16
7 GN20 52 U
20
7 GN25 52 U
25
7 GN32 52 U
32
7 GN40 52 U
40
7 GN63 52 U
63
7 GN125 52 U
125
Three-pole - 3 wafers - scheme 53.

7 GN12 53 U
16
7 GN20 53 U
20
7 GN32 53 U
32
n 48
n 65
7 GN40 53 U
40
n 65
0.308
7 GN63 53 U
63
0.377
125
n 65
n 90
7 GN125 53 U
1.036
7 GN25 53 U
25
Four-pole - 4 wafers - scheme 75.

7 GN12 75 U
16
7 GN20 75 U
20
7 GN25 75 U
25
n 48
n 48
n 48
0.123
0.134
0.180
0.334
0.358
0.468
1.270
7 GN32 75 U
32
7 GN40 75 U
40
7 GN63 75 U
63
n 65
n 65
n 65
7 GN125 75 U
125
n 90
Optional
E.g. 7 GN12 52 U 51.
48x48)
E.g. 7 GN12H 51 U.
65x65)
E.g. 7 GN32H 51 U.
Special versions
See page 10-18.
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
CHANGEOVER SWITCH WITHOUT 0 (OFF).

One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 54.
7 GN12 54 U
7 GN20 54 U
n 48
n 48
0.079
20
0.082
25
n 48
0.096
n 48
n 48
0.093
20
0.100
25
n 48
0.122
16
n 48
0.108
20
n 48
n 48
0.115
0.145
n 48
n 48
n 48
0.124
0.134
0.174
16
2
1
7 GN25 54 U
Two-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 55.

7 GN12 55 U
7 GN20 55 U
16
2
1
7 GN25 55 U

7 GN12 56 U
7 GN20 56 U
2
1
7 GN25 56 U
25

7 GN12 69 U
7 GN20 69 U
16
20
7 GN25 69 U
25
Front plate size:

48x48mm = 1.9x1.9 - 60x60mm = 2.6x2.6 - 90x90mm = 3.5x3.5.
Type
UL/CSA
general
use [A]

120V
230V
200V
230V
480V
600V
GN12
15
/4
11/2
GN20
20
/4
11/2
7.5
GN25
30
11/2
10
15
11
GN32
40
10
15
15
15
GN40
50
10
20
20
18.5
GN63
60
10
71/2
15
25
25
30
GN125
130
71/2
15
15
25
50
40
45
Accessories
page 10-17
1 phase
3 phases
Dimensions
page 10-21
Max IEC AC23

power [kW]
at 400V
5.5
Wiring diagrams
page 10-22
pages 10-24 and 25
10-11
10
Rotary cam switches

GN series
U version
front mount.
Motor switches
Order code
Ith IEC
Front Qty Wt
AC1 power plate per
IEC AC23A size pkg
[A]
[kW]
[mm] n
[kg]
MOTOR SWITCHES.
Three-pole reversing switches - 3 wafers - scheme 11.
7 GN12 11 U
16
n 48 1
0.105
7 GN20 11 U
20
7.5
0.111
25
11
7 GN32 11 U
32
15
n 48 1
n 48 1
n 65 1
7 GN40 11 U
40
18.5
0.294
7 GN63 11 U
63
30
7 GN125 11 U
125 45
n 65 1
n 65 1
n 90 1
7 GN25 11 U
0.145
0.278
0.366
0.126
7.5
n 48 1
n 48 1
11
n 48 1
0.181
32
15
0.342
7 GN40 13 U
40
18.5
n 65 1
n 65 1
7 GN63 13 U
63
30
0.465
7 GN125 13 U
125 45
n 65 1
n 90 1
16
20
25
7 GN32 13 U
7 GN20 13 U
7 GN25 13 U
0.134
0.366
1.301
Star-delta switches - 4 wafers - scheme 12.
10
7 GN12 12 U
16
7 GN20 12 U
20
7.5
25
11
7 GN32 12 U
32
15
7 GN40 12 U
40
18.5
7 GN63 12 U
63
30
7 GN125 12 U
125 45
7 GN25 12 U
n 48 1
n 48 1
0.124
n 48 1
n 65 1
n 65 1
0.175
n 65 1
n 90 1
0.465
0.134
0.343
0.366
1.303
Three-pole reversing switches with spring return to 0 3 wafers - scheme 26.

7 GN12 26 U
16
7 GN20 26 U
20
7.5
7 GN25 26 U
25
11
1 0 2
n 48 1
n 48 1
n 48 1
Selection guide
See page 10-24.
0.976
Pole changing switches - 4 wafers - scheme 13.

7 GN12 13 U
Ith ratings
0.106
0.111
0.144
Optional
E.g. 7 GN12 13 U 51.
48x48)
E.g. 7 GN12H 11 U.
65x65)
E.g. 7 GN32H 11 U.
Special versions
See page 10-18.
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Pole changing switches with reversing (Dahlander) 6 wafers - scheme 20.

7 GN12 20 U
7 GN20 20 U
1
2
1
2
7 GN25 20 U
16
6
7.5
n 48 1
n 48 1
0.161
20
25
11
n 48 1
0.246
0.165
Front plate size:

48x48mm = 1.9x1.9
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5.
Type
UL/CSA
general
use [A]

120V
230V
200V
230V
480V
600V
GN12
15
/4
11/2
GN20
20
/4
11/2
7.5
GN25
30
11/2
10
15
11
GN32
40
10
15
15
15
GN40
50
10
20
20
18.5
GN63
60
10
71/2
15
25
25
30
GN125
130
71/2
15
15
25
50
40
45
10-12
1 phase
Accessories
page 10-17
3 phases
Max IEC AC23

power [kW]
at 400V
5.5
Dimensions
page 10-21
Wiring diagrams
pages 10-22 and 23
pages 10-24 and 25
Rotary cam switches

GN series
U version, front mount.
Voltmeter switches.
Ammeter switches
Order code
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[mm]
[kg]
n 48
n 48
0.094
0.099
n 48
n 48
0.094
0.099
VOLTMETER SWITCHES.
Phase-Neutral L1-N/L2-N/L3-N
2 wafers - scheme 68.
7 GN12 68 U
0
L1N
7 GN20 68 U
L2N
16
20
L3N
Phase-Phase L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1
7 GN12 67 U
0
L1-L2
7 GN20 67 U
L2-L3
16
20
L3-L1
For 3 phase to phase voltages and 3 phase voltages

n 48 1
0.116
7 GN12 66 U L1-L2 0 L1-N 16
7 GN20 66 U
L2-N
L2-L3
n 48
20
0.116
L3-N
L3-L1
For 1 phase voltage and 3 phase to phase voltages

7 GN12 60 U
L1N
0
L1-L2
7 GN20 60 U
L2-L3
n 48
n 48
16
20
0.105
0.116
L3-L1
AMMETER SWITCHES.
Direct L1-L2-L3 reading - 5 wafers - scheme 97.
7 GN12 97 U
7 GN20 97 U
0
L3
L1
16
n 48
0.132
20
n 48
0.148
0.115
0.115
L2
L1-L2-L3 reading via 3 current transformers

7 GN12 98 U
7 GN20 98 U
n 48
n 48
16
0
L3
L1
20
Ith ratings
Selection guide
See page 10-24.
Optional
E.g. 7 GN12 67 U 51.
48x48)
E.g. 7 GN12H 68 U.
Special versions
See page 10-18.
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
L2
Front plate size:

48x48mm = 1.9x1.9
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6.
Type
UL/CSA
general
use [A]

120V
230V
200V
230V
480V
600V
GN12
15
/4
11/2
5.5
GN20
20
/4
11/2
7.5
Accessories
page 10-17
1 phase
3 phases
Dimensions
page 10-21
Max IEC AC23

power [kW]
at 400V
Wiring diagrams
pages 10-23
pages 10-24 and 25
10-13
10
Rotary cam switches

GN Series
U11 version
front ring mount
with handle operation
ON/OFF switches
Order code
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
[A]
[mm] n
Wt
[kg]
ON/OFF SWITCHES. One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 90.

7 GN12 90 U11
7 GN20 90 U11
16
0.078
20
0.082
16
0.080
20
0.084
16
0.092
20
0.095
Two-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 91.

7 GN12 91 U11
7 GN20 91 U11

7 GN12 10 U11
7 GN20 10 U11
7 GN20 92 U11
10
U12 version
front ring mount
with key operation
ON/OFF switches
Order code
16
0.094
20
0.100
Wt

65x65)
E.g. 7 GN32H 10 U25.
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
[A]
[mm] n
[kg]
ON/OFF SWITCHES. One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 90.

7 GN12 90 U12
7 GN20 90 U12
16
0.100
20
0.104
16
0.108
20
0.112
16
0.129
20
0.135
Two-pole - 1 wafer scheme 91.

7 GN12 91 U12
7 GN20 91 U12

7 GN12 10 U12
7 GN20 10 U12
Selection guide
See page 10-24.
Optional
E.g. 7 GN12 92 U25 51.

7 GN12 92 U11
Ith ratings
Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts for U11 and
U12 and IEC IP20 of incoming contacts for U25 and
U65 only
Legend marking for U11 and U12 versions is only for
reference while for U25 and U65 types standard
supplied as illustrated in the order code table; any
other on request.
Special versions
See page 10-18.
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Valid for U25 - U65 versions:
Front plate size:
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5.
For UL/CSA ratings, see page 10-15.

7 GN12 92 U12
U25-U65 version
front ring mount with
red/yellow padlockable
handle.
ON/OFF switches
16
0.132
7 GN20 92 U12
20
0.139
Order code
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[mm] n
[kg]
ON/OFF SWITCHES. Three-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 10.

7 GN12 10 U25
16
7 GN20 10 U25
20
7 GN25 10 U25
25
n 65
n 65
n 65
0.161
0.165
0.187
0.277
0.294
0.366
7 GN32 10 U25
32
7 GN40 10 U65
40
7 GN63 10 U65
63
n 65
n 65
n 65
7 GN125 10 U65
125
n 90
0.976

7 GN12 92 U25
16
0.164
20
n 65
n 65
7 GN20 92 U25
0.169
25
n 65
0.196
7 GN32 92 U25
32
0.285
7 GN40 92 U65
40
n 65
n 65
0.298
7 GN63 92 U65
63
n 65
0.370
7 GN125 92 U65
125
n 90
0.984
7 GN25 92 U25
10-14
Accessories
page 10-17
Dimensions
page 10-21
Wiring diagrams
pages 10-22
pages 10-24 and 25
Rotary cam switches

GN Series
O88-O98-O99 version
rear mount
door coupling with
red/yellow padlock system.
ON/OFF switches
Order code
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[mm] n
[kg]
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
7 GN12 10 O88
16
0.223
20
n 65
n 65
7 GN20 10 O88
0.223
25
n 65
0.252
7 GN32 10 O88
32
0.326
7 GN40 10 O98
40
0.329
7 GN63 10 O98
63
n 65
n 65
n 65
0.374
7 GN125 10 O99
125
n 90
0.909
16
n 65
0.223
20
n 65
n 65
n 65
0.233
0.259
0.327
0.341
0.391
0.985
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
7 GN25 10 O88

7 GN12 92 O88
7 GN20 92 O88
7 GN25 92 O88
O68-O78-O79 version
rear mount
door coupling system.
ON/OFF switches
25
7 GN32 92 O88
32
7 GN40 92 O98
40
7 GN63 92 O98
63
7 GN125 92 O99
125
n 65
n 65
n 90
Order code
IEC
current
AC1
Front
plate
size
[A]
[mm] n
[kg]
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
7 GN12 10 O68
16
0.170
20
n 48
n 48
7 GN20 10 O68
0.176
25
n 48
0.199
7 GN32 10 O68
32
0.330
7 GN40 10 O78
40
0.310
7 GN63 10 O78
63
n 65
n 65
n 65
0.359
7 GN125 10 O79
125
n 90
0.985
7 GN25 10 O68

7 GN12 92 O68
16
n 48
0.170
7 GN20 92 O68
20
n 48
n 48
0.178
0.240
0.341
0.342
0.378
0.950
7 GN25 92 O68
Type
25
7 GN32 92 O68
32
7 GN40 92 O78
40
7 GN63 92 O78
63
n 65
n 65
n 65
7 GN125 92 O79
125
n 90
UL/CSA
general
use [A]

120V
230V
200V
230V
480V
600V
GN12
15
/4
11/2
GN20
20
/4
11/2
7.5
GN25
30
11/2
10
15
11
GN32
40
10
15
15
15
GN40
50
10
20
20
18.5
GN63
60
10
71/2
15
25
25
30
GN125
130
71/2
15
15
25
50
40
45
Accessories
page 10-17
1 phase
3 phases
Dimensions
page 10-21
Ith ratings
Optional-front plate); IEC IP20 of incoming contacts
only
Selection guide
See page 10-24.
Optional
E.g. 7 GN12 92 088 51.
Fixing plate for DIN 35mm rail (IEC/EN 60715)
E.g. 7 GN25 10 O 18.
48x48)
E.g. 7 GN12H 10 068.
65x65)
E.g. 7 GN32H 10 068.
Special versions
See page 10-18.
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Valid for O88 - O98 - O99 - O68 - O78 - O79 versions:
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5.
Max IEC AC23

power [kW]
at 400V
5.5
Wiring diagrams
page 10-22
pages 10-24 and 25
10-15
10
Rotary cam switches

GN Series
ON/OFF switches.
Changeover switches
Order code
IEC
current
AC1
Housing Qty Wt
size
per
pkg
[A]
[mm]
[kg]
7 GN12 10 P
16
75x75
0.168
7 GN20 10 P
20
75x75
0.227
25
75x75
0.258
7 GN32 10 P
32
90x90
0.392
7 GN40 10 P
40
110x110 1
0.453
7 GN63 10 P
63
110x110 1
0.766
7 GN12 92 P
16
75x75
0.174
7 GN20 92 P
20
75x75
0.222
ON/OFF SWITCHES.
Three-pole - scheme 10.
7 GN25 10 P
ratings
IP65 degree of protection
Top and bottom entry:
4 PG13.5 threaded knockouts for 75x75mm types
4 PG16 threaded knockouts for 90x90mm types
4 PG21 threaded knockouts for 110x110mm types
Four-pole - scheme 92.
7 GN25 92 P
25
75x75
0.278
7 GN32 92 P
32
90x90
0.411
7 GN40 92 P
40
110x110 1
0.411
7 GN63 92 P
63
110x110 1
0.625
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES.
16
75x75
0.219
20
75x75
0.273
25
75x75
0.307
7 GN32 53 P
32
90x90
0.500
7 GN40 53 P
40
110x110 1
0.727
7 GN63 53 P
63
110x110 1
0.785
Valid for P - P25 versions:

Housing size:
75x75mm = 3x3
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5
110x110 = 4.3x4.3.
16
75x75
0.226
For indication and reference purposes only

No UL/CSA approval
20
75x75
0.289
25
90x90
0.418
7 GN32 75 P
32
90x90
0.540
7 GN40 75 P
40
110x110 1
7 GN63 75 P
63
110x110 1
7 GN12 75 P
7 GN20 75 P
1
7 GN25 75 P
Order code
Type
UL/CSA
general
use [A]
Max IEC
AC23 power
[kW] at 400V
0.753
GN12
15
5.5
0.840
GN20
20
7.5
GN25
30
11
GN32
40
15
GN40
50
18.5
GN63
60
30
Type
Ith
AC1
IEC
IEC
Housing Qty Wt
power size
per
AC23A
pkg
[A]
[kW]
[mm]
[kg]
MOTOR SWITCHES.
Three-pole reversing switches - scheme 11.
7 GN12 11 P
16
5.5
75x75 1
0.216
1 phase
7 GN20 11 P
20
7.5
75x75 1
0.271
120V
230V
200V
230V
480V
600V
25
11
75x75 1
0.299
GN12
/4
11/2
7 GN32 11 P
32
15
90x90 1
0.482
GN20
/4
11/2
7 GN40 11 P
40
18.5
110x110 1
0.508
GN25
1 /2
10
15
7 GN63 11 P
63
30
110x110 1
0.750
GN32
10
15
15
GN40
10
20
20
GN63
10
71/2
15
25
25
7 GN25 11 P
P25 version in enclosure with

padlockable rotating handle.
ON/OFF switches

IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
7 GN20 53 P
Four-pole - scheme 75.
Motor switches
Special versions
See page 10-18.
7 GN12 53 P
7 GN25 53 P
10
Selection guide
See page 10-24.
Order code
IEC
current
AC1
Housing Qty
size
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[mm]
[kg]
3 phases
ON/OFF SWITHCES.
7 GN20 10 P25
20
90x90 1
0.313
7 GN25 10 P25
25
90x90 1
0.327
7 GN32 10 P25
32
90x90 1
0.400

7 GN20 92 P25
10-16
Accessories
page 10-17
20
90x90 1
0.314
7 GN25 92 P25
25
90x90 1
0.339
7 GN32 92 P25
32
90x90 1
0.425
Dimensions
page 10-21
Wiring diagrams
page 10-22
pages 10-24 and 25
Rotary cam switches

Accessories for GN series
Accessories for
GN switches
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
IEC IP20 finger protection shroud for supply terminals.

For 2 wafers complete with screws and bracket.
7 A0191
For GN12-GN20
0.017
7 A0192
For GN25
0.021
7 A119U
For GN32 U version
0.033
7 A119O
For GN32 O version
0.101
2-piece kit, snap-on fixing for 1 wafer.

7 A019... 7 A119...
7 A169...
7 A1691
For GN40
0.005
7 A1692
For GN63
0.006
7 A1693
For GN125
0.020
7 A1694
For GN12 - GN20
0.005
7 A1695
For GN25
0.005
Black operating handle.
7 AO14 7 AR114 7 A114 7 AR214
7 AR124 7 A124 7 AR224
7 AO14
For 48x48mm front plate

n 6mm/0.24 for
GN12-GN20-GN25
0.005
7 AR114

n 6mm/0.24 for
GN12H-GN20H-GN25H
0.010
7 A114

n 6mm/0.24 for
GN32-GN40-GN63
0.010
7 AR214

1
n 7mm/0.28 for GN125 and
GN32H-GN40H-GN63H
0.013
10
Black operating lever.
7 A180 - 7 A181
7 APRBP
7 AR214

n 6mm/0.24 for
GN12H-GN20H-GN25H
0.019
7 A124

n 7mm/0.28 for
GN32-GN40-GN63
0.020
7 AR224

1
n 8mm/0.31 for GN125 and
GN32H-GN40H-GN63H
0.038
35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) base mounting piece for

U version.
7 A180
For GN12 to GN25
0.011
7 A181
For GN32 to GN63
0.018
Adjustable door-coupling extension shaft, 70mm/2.8 long

max.
7 APRBP
7 A441 - 7 A442 - 7 A443
For GN12 to GN63
0.027
Flexible rubber shroud.

7 A441
58mm/2.3, 70mm/2.8
long for GN12 to GN25
with 2 elements
0.045
7 A442
58mm/2.3, 92mm/3.6
with 4 elements
0.065
7 A443
58mm/2.3, 125mm/4,9
with 6 elements
0.063
IP40 face plate.

GX M1 - GX M2
GX M1
48x48mm blank face plate
0.018
GX M2
65x65mm blank face plate
0.023
GX A01
48x48mm red/yellow 0-1

1
padlockable handle for
2-position GN12-GN20-GN25
0.026
GX A01H

1
0.047
GX A11

1
0.047
Padlockable handle.
GX A01 - GX A01H - GX A11
Front plate size:

48x48mm = 1.9x1.9
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5.
Suitable for GN... types with IEC IP40 (standard supply). For GN...51
types, consult Customer Service for information; see contact details
Raises contact degree of protection from IEC IP00 to IP20.
Also suitable for GX series.
10-17
Rotary cam switches

Special circuit scheme form.
Order code structure
X
GG X
N
O
P
TYPE
GX
IEC Protection:
Front = IP65
Contacts = IP20
GN
IEC Protection :
Front = IP40
Contacts = IP00
10
Insert H when an enlarged front plate is required
GX16 - GX20
GN12 - GN20 - GN25
from 48x48mm to 65x65mm
GX32 - GX40
GN32 - GN40 - GN63
from 65x65mm to 90x90mm
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in.
RATING
GX
16A
20A
32A
40A
ENLARGED
FRONT
PLATE
VERSION
SCHEME
GN
16A
20A
25A
32A
40A
63A
125A
e.g.
90
91
10
92
99
100
U = Front mount
O = Rear mount
P = In enclosure
11
Front mount, with handle operation, for 22mm fixing
12
Front mount, with key operation, for 22mm fixing
18
35mm DIN rail mounting (IEC/EN 60715)
25
Red-yellow padlockable handle
48
Modular service cover, 35mm DIN rail mounting
4V
Front mount, with 4-screw fixing
51
IP65 front protection, for GN only
65
Red-yellow padlockable handle
68
Door coupling (up to GN32)
78
Door coupling (GN125 excluded)
79
Door coupling
88
Door coupling, with red-yellow padlockable handle

(up to GN32)
98

(GN125 excluded)
99
Consult technical instructions I230 on our website for additional information (contact configurations, schemes, plate indications,etc).
Custom-built schemes are available on request; fill out the form on page 10-19.
Example for ordering:
= Changeover switch, 16A, 3 poles, 3 positions, 3 wafers in 90x90mm, IEC IP65 enclosure.
GX16 53 P
GN25 H 90 U 51 = On-Off switch, 25A, 1 pole, 2 positions, 1 wafer, with enlarged 65x65mm front plate and IEC IP65 protection, 2-screw fixing.
10-18
OPTIONALS
Rotary cam switches

Special circuit scheme form
12
11
10
9 12 13 16 17 20 21 24 25 28 29 32 33 36 37 40 41 44 45 48
7 10 11 14 15 18 19 22 23 26 27 30 31 34 35 38 39 42 43 46 47
2
D
3
8
4
7
Plate
indication
Pos.
7
C
8
10
10
D
11
12
1
A
2
4
B
5
6
Front plate
X
X
Overlapping
contacts
Closed contact
in 2 or more
positions
BODY SHAPE:
n Square - GX
n Round - GN
VERSION:
n Front mount
n Rear mount
X
Open/
passing
contact
Closed
contact
Spring
return
Amp rating ..........................

n Enclosed
n Other ....................................
FINISH:
n Standard
n Red/yellow padlockable n Special ...............................
FIXING:
n 2 screw
n 4 screw
Q.ty:..................
Company name and contact details: ........................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................................
Maximum 40A ratings for GX series.

Standard suppliled finish is grey front plate while 0-12 indication and the handle are black; any other is considered special.
Also consult technical instructions I230 on the website.
10-19
Rotary cam switches

GX SERIES
MONTAGGIO
FRONTALE
MONTAGGIO
FRONTALE
MONTAGGIO
GX...
FRONTALE
GX...
FRONTALE
GX...
Front
mountMONTAGGIO
1...5
GX...
1...5
1...5
1...5
E
(0.2)
GL
GL
F
Rear view
Dimensions
A
D
T
GL
F
L fixing
Drilling for 2-screw
Type
28 (1.1)
28 (1.1)
I
5
(0.2)
D
C
(0.2)
A (0.2)
28 (1.1)
D
C
28 (1.1)
L [mm (in)]
1 wafer
2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 5 wafers 6 wafers
GX16 U
48
(1.89)
39.5
1.55)
45
(1.77)
48
(1.89)
26.5
(1.04)
23.5
(0.92)
6
(0.24)
12
(0.47)
42.5
(1.67)
51
(2.00)
59.5
(2.34)
68
(2.67)
76.5
(3.01)
GX16 U25
48
(1.89)
31
(1.22)
45
(1.77)
48
(1.89)
34
(1.33)
23.5
(0.92)
26
(0.24)
12
(0.47)
39.5
(1.55)
48
(1.89)
56.5
(2.22)
65
(2.55)
73.5
82
(2.89) (3.22)
GX20 U
48
(1.89)
39.5
(1.55)
45
(1.77)
48
(1.89)
26.5
(1.04)
23.5
(0.92)
6
(0.24)
12
(0.47)
42.5
(1.67)
51
(2.00)
59.5
(2.34)
68
(2.67)
76.5
(3.01)
GX20 U25
48
(1.89)
31
(1.22)
45
(1.77)
48
(1.89)
34
(1.33)
23.5
(0.92)
6
(0.24)
12
(0.47)
39.5
(1.55)
48
(1.89)
56.5
(2.22)
65
(2.55)
73.5
82
(2.89) (3.22)
GX32 U
65
(2.56)
53
(2.09)
58
(2.28)
66
(2.59)
34.5
(1.36)
26
(1.02)
7
(0.27)
14
(0.55)
47.5
(1.87)
59.5
(2.34)
71.5
(2.81)
83.5
(3.29)
95.5
(3.75)
107.5
(4.23)
GX32 U25
65
(2.56)
45
(1.77)
58
(2.28)
66
(2.59)
38
(1.50)
26
(1.02)
7
(0.27)
14
(0.55)
48
(1.89)
60
(2.36)
72
(2.83)
84
(3.30)
96
(3.77)
108
(4.25)
GX40 U
65
(2.56)
53
(2.09)
58
(2.28)
66
(2.59)
34.5
(1.36)
26
(1.02)
7
(0.27)
14
(0.55)
47.5
(1.87)
59.5
(2.34)
71.5
(2.81)
83.5
(3.29)
95.5
(3.75)
107.5
(4.23)
GX40 U25
65
(2.56)
45
(1.77)
58
(2.28)
66
(2.59)
38
(1.50)
26
(1.02)
7
(0.27)
14
(0.55)
48
(1.89)
60
(2.36)
72
(2.83)
84
(3.30)
96
(3.77)
108
(4.25)
85
(3.35)
85
(3.35)
Padlockable handle.
MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
BLOCCO-PORTA
MONTAGGIO
GX...
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
GX... BLOCCO-PORTA
BLOCCO-PORTA
GX...
DoorMONTAGGIO
coupling O version
Coupling
and front
plate
Drilling
for GX...
4-screwGX...
(4V) front
plate
fixing on the door
fixing
Type
G
5.5
F
(0.22)
5.5
L (0.22) L
45
(1.77)
48
(1.89)
26.5
(1.04)
23.5
(0.92)
O
5.5
5.5
(0.22) Rear(0.22)
view
5.5
(0.22)
L [mm (in)]
G
F
Dimensions
A
P
D
G
E
E
1...5
1...5 S
1...5
(0.04...0.20) (0.04...0.20)(0.04...0.20)
DIN35
IEC/EN 60715
IEC/EN 60715
5
(0.2)
5 P (0.2)
D
DIN35
IEC/EN5
60715
(0.2)
N
P
OD
DIN35
5
(0.2)
(0.2)
5
(0.2)
M
C
P
CD
DIN35
IEC/EN 60715
DIN35
IEC/EN 60715
C
A
T
E
1...5
S
(0.04...0.20)
KS
K
1...5
(0.04...0.20)
(0.2)
PA
D
5
(0.2)
5
M
TT
CA
10
5
(0.2)
(0.2)
28
(1.1)
6
(0.24)
1 wafer
2 wafers
3 wafers
4 wafers
5 wafers
6 wafers
52
(2.04)
66.5
(2.61)
48-58
(1.89-2.28)
12
(0.47)
40
(1.57)
48.5
(1.90)
57
(2.24)
65.5
(2.57)
74
(2.91)
82.5
(3.24)
GX16 O68
48
(1.89)
39.5
(1.55)
GX16 O88
48
(1.89)
31
(1.22)
45
(1.77)
48
(1.89)
34
(1.33)
23.5
(0.92)
36
(1.42)
6
(0.24)
52
(2.04)
66.5
(2.61)
45-55
(1.77-2.16)
12
(0.47)
40
(1.57)
48.5
(1.90)
57
(2.24)
65.5
(2.57)
74
(2.91)
82.5
(3.24)
GX20 O68
48
(1.89)
39.5
(1.55)
45
(1.77)
48
(1.89)
26.5
(1.04)
23.5
(0.92)
28
(1.1)
6
(0.24)
52
(2.04)
66.5
(2.61)
48-58
(1.89-2.28)
12
(0.47)
40
(1.57)
48.5
(1.90)
57
(2.24)
65.5
(2.57)
74
(2.91)
82.5
(3.24)
GX20 O88
48
(1.89)
31
(1.22)
45
(1.77)
48
(1.89)
34
(1.33)
23.5
(0.92)
36
(1.42)
6
(0.24)
52
(2.04)
66.5
(2.61)
45-55
(1.77-2.16)
12
(0.47)
40
(1.57)
48.5
(1.90)
57
(2.24)
65.5
(2.57)
74
(2.91)
82.5
(3.24)
GX32 O68
65
(2.56)
53
(2.09)
58
(2.28)
66
(2.59)
34.5
(1.36)
26
(1.02)
28
(1.1)
7
(0.27)
68
(2.68)
78
(3.07)
48-58
(1.89-2.28)
14
(0.55)
48.7
(1.91)
60.7
(2.38)
72.7
(2.86)
84.7
(3.33)
96.7
(3.80)
108.7
(4.27)
GX32 O88
65
(2.56)
45
(1.77)
58
(2.28)
66
(2.59)
38
(1.49)
26
(1.02)
48
(1.89)
7
(0.27)
68
(2.68)
78
(3.07)
45-55
(1.77-2.16)
14
(0.55)
48.7
(1.91)
60.7
(2.38)
72.7
(2.86)
84.7
(3.33)
96.7
(3.80)
108.7
(4.27)
GX40 O78
65
(2.56)
53
(2.09)
58
(2.28)
66
(2.59)
34.5
(1.36)
26
(1.02)
28
(1.1)
7
(0.27)
68
(2.68)
78
(3.07)
48-58
(1.89-2.28)
14
(0.55)
48.7
(1.91)
60.7
(2.38)
72.7
(2.86)
84.7
(3.33)
96.7
(3.80)
108.7
(4.27)
GX40 O98
65
(2.56)
45
(1.77)
58
(2.28)
66
(2.59)
38
(1.49)
26
(1.02)
48
(1.89)
7
(0.27)
68
(2.68)
78
(3.07)
45-55
(1.77-2.16)
14
(0.55)
48.7
(1.91)
60.7
(2.38)
72.7
(2.86)
84.7
(3.33)
96.7
(3.80)
108.7
(4.27)
Padlockable handle.
Type
2 wafers
3 wafers
4 wafers
35
(1.37)
43.5
(1.71)
52
(2.04)
60.5
(2.38)
1 wafer
2 wafers
3 wafers
4 wafers
35
(1.37)
43.5
(1.71)
52
(2.04)
60.5
(2.38)
48 (1.89)
(1.89)
48 (1.89)
48
52 (2.05)
52
52 (2.05)
(2.05)
DIN35
IEC/EN 60715
Type
L [mm (in)]
GX16
DIN35
DIN35
23
18.5
(0.73) (0.90)
39 (1.53)
(1.53)
39 (1.53)
39
MONTAGGIO IN CASSETTA GX...

C
L [mm (in)]
3 wafers
GX16
A1
L [mm (in)]
1 wafer
50
(1.37)
4 wafers
5 wafers
58.5
(2.30)
67
(2.64)
C1
22.5
(0.88)
LL
IEC/EN
60715
35
(1.38)
IEC/EN
60715
28
(1.10)
52
52 (2.05)
(2.05)
44
(1.73)
44
52 (1.73)
(2.05)
45 (1.77)
30
18.5
(0.73) (1.18)
54 (2.12)
(2.12)
54 (2.12)
54
1...5
(0.04...0.20)
28
(1.10)
45 (1.77)
Type
GX16
45 (1.77)
1...5
(0.04...0.20)
22.5
(0.88)
MONTAGGIO
MODULARE
GX...
MONTAGGIO
MODULARE
GX...
MONTAGGIO FRONTALE 22mm GX...
66.5
66.5 (2.62)
(2.62)
35
35 (1.38)
(1.38)
66.5
(2.62)
MONTAGGIO FRONTALE 22mm GX...

45 (1.77)
Modular mount
Front ring mount on 22mm drilling, 2-screw fixing
44 (1.73)
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
IN
MONTAGGIO
CASSETTA
MONTAGGIO
IN CASSETTA
IN
GX...
CASSETTA
INGX...
CASSETTA
GX... GX...
Mounting in enclosure
Drilling for enclosure fixing

N
AC
F L1
L1
F L1
L1
F
Cable glands
L1
A1
C1
L1
degree
90x90
(3.54x3.54)
1-2
1-2
3-5
3-5
90
(3.54)
90
(3.54)
79
(3.11)
63
(2.48)
4.5
(0.17)
25
(0.98)
19
(0.74)
30
(1.18)
71.3
(2.80)
98.3
(3.87)
IP65
4 PG 16
GX32
GX40
110x110
(4.33x4.33)
1-2
1-2
83
R(3.26)
4.5
(0.17)
32
(1.25)
21
(0.82)
39.5
(1.55)
85.5
(3.36)
119.5
(4.70)
IP65
4 PG 21
110
R
(4.33)
110
98.4
(4.33) R (3.87)
Protection
size
GX16
GX20
10-20
N
N of wafers
N
Enclosure
Type
3-4
R
3-4
C1
C1
C1
A1
C1
A1
A1
A1
28 (1.1) for ...P25 type.

38.5 (1.52) for ...P25 type.
Rotary cam switches

GN SERIES
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
FRONTALE
FRONTALE
FRONTALE
GN...
GN...
GN...
Dimensions
A
D3GN125
D3 D3
4-screw drilling for
and 4V suffix types only
2-screw drilling
for types up to GN63
1...5
1...5
(0.04...0.20)
(0.04...0.20)
J
D3
Front wafer
6 wafers
45.8
(1.80)
55.5
(2.18)
65.2
(2.57)
74.9
(2.95)
84.6
(3.33)
J
J
GN12
65
(2.56)
53
(2.09)
14
(0.55)
4.3
(0.17)
34.5
(1.36)
26
(1.02)
58
(2.28)
48
(1.89)
65
(2.56)
7
(0.27)
36.6
(1.44)
46.3
(1.82)
56
(2.20)
65.7
(2.59)
75.4
(2.97)
85.1
(3.35)
GN20
48
(1.89)
39.5
(1.55)
12
(0.47)
4.3
(0.17)
26.5
(1.04)
23.5
(0.92)
39
(1.53)
36
(1.42)
48
(1.89)
6
(0.24)
36.1
(1.42)
45.8
(1.80)
55.5
(2.18)
65.2
(2.57)
74.9
(2.95)
84.6
(3.33)
14
4.3
(0.55)
(0.17)
L12F
F 4.3F
E
E
E
(0.47)
(0.17)
34.5
(1.36)
26
(1.02)
58
(2.28)
48
(1.89)
65
(2.56)
7
(0.27)
36.6
(1.44)
46.3
(1.82)
56
(2.20)
65.7
(2.59)
75.4
(2.97)
85.1
(3.35)
26.5
(1.04)
23.5
(0.92)
39
(1.53)
36
(1.42)
48
(1.89)
6
(0.24)
40.5
(1.59)
54.1
(2.13)
67.7
(2.66)
81.3
(3.20)
94.9
(3.74)
108.5
(4.27)
GN20
65
(2.56)
GN25
48
(1.89)
53
(2.09)
L 39.5L
(1.55)
5 wafers
36.1
(1.42)
4 wafers
6
(0.24)
1 wafer
2 wafers
3 wafers
GN25
65
(2.56)
53
(2.09)
14
(0.55)
4.3
(0.17)
34.5
(1.36)
26
(1.02)
58.5
(2.30)
48
(1.89)
65
(2.56)
7
(0.27)
41
(1.61)
54.6
(2.15)
68.2
(2.68)
81.8
(3.22)
95.4
(3.75)
109
(4.29)
GN32
65
(2.56)
53
(2.09)
14
(0.55)
4.3
(0.17)
34.5
(1.36)
26
(1.02)
58.5
(2.30)
48
(1.89)
65
(2.56)
7
(0.27)
46.5
(1.83)
61.6
76.7
(2,442) (3.02)
91.8
(3.61)
106.9
(4.21)
122
(4.80)
GN40
65
(2.56)
53
(2.09)
14
(0.55)
4.3
(0.17)
34.5
(1.36)
26
(1.02)
58.5
(2.30)
48
(1.89)
65
(2.56)
7
(0.27)
46.5
(1.83)
61.6
76.7
(2,442) (3.02)
91.8
(3.61)
106.9
(4.21)
122
(4.80)
GN63
65
(2.56)
53
(2.09)
14
(0.55)
4.3
(0.17)
34.5
(1.36)
26
(1.02)
62
(2.44)
48
(1.89)
65
(2.56)
7
(0.27)
50.3
(1.98)
68.4
(2.69)
86.5
(3.40)
104.6
(4.12)
122.7
(4.83)
140.8
(5.54)
GN125
90
(3.54)
70.5
(2.77)
16
(0.63)
5.3
(0.21)
41.5
(1.63)
28
(1.10)
84
(3.31)
68
(2.68)
90
(3.54)
9
(0.35)
67.3
(2.65)
96.4
(3.79)
125.5
(4.94)
154.6
(6.09)
183.7
(7.23)
212.8
(8.38)
F
E
Dimensions for U06 and U25 versions
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
MONTAGGIO
BLOCCO-PORTA
GN...
BLOCCO-PORTA
GN...
BLOCCO-PORTA
GN... GN... GN...
Door coupling
Drillings for wafer and handle fixing

S 1...5
D2
D2
4-screw drilling for wafer

fixing on rear plate
D2
K
D1
D1
D1
D2
D2
1...5
1...5
1...5
D2
D2
2-screw drilling for handle

L
of types up to GN63
4-screw drilling for GN125

L only
handleLand 4V types
Dimensions
L
2 wafers
3 wafers
4 wafers
GN12-O88
65 (2.56)
53 (2.09)
14 (0.55)
5 (0.20)
38.5 (1.52)
48 (1.89)
45-55 (1.77-2.16)
37.58 (1.48)
47.1 (1.85)
56.7 (2.23)
66.3 (2.61)
GN20-O88
65 (2.56)
53 (2.09)
14 (0.55)
5 (0.20)
38.5 (1.52)
48 (1.89)
45-55 (1.77-2.16)
38.1 (1.50)
47.8 (1.88)
57.5 (2.26)
67.2 (2.64)
GN25-O88
65 (2.56)
53 (2.09)
14 (0.55)
5 (0.20)
38.5 (1.52)
48 (1.89)
45-55 (1.77-2.16)
42.5 (1.67)
56.1 (2.21)
65.7 (2.59)
83.2 (3.27)
GN12-O68
48 (1.89)
39.5 (1.56)
12 (0.47)
5 (0.20)
26.5 (1.04)
36 (1.42)
45-55 (1.77-2.16)
37.5 (1.48)
47.1 (1.85)
56.7 (2.23)
66.3 (2.61)
GN20-O68
48 (1.89)
39.5 (1.56)
12 (0.47)
5 (0.20)
26.5 (1.04)
36 (1.42)
45-55 (1.77-2.16)
38.1 (1.50)
47.8 (1.88)
57.5 (2.26)
67.2 (2.64)
GN25-O68
48 (1.89)
39.5 (1.56)
12 (0.47)
5 (0.20)
26.5 (1.04)
36 (1.42)
45-55 (1.77-2.16)
42.5 (1.67)
56.1 (2.21)
65.7 (2.59)
83.2 (3.27)
GN32 O...
65 (2.56)
53 (2.09)
14 (0.55)
5 (0.20)
34.5 (1.36)
48 (1.89)
45-55 (1.77-2.16)
49.2 (1.94)
62.8 (2.47)
76.4 (3.00)
90 (3.54)
GN40 O...
65 (2.56)
53 (2.09)
14 (0.55)
5 (0.20)
34.5 (1.36)
48 (1.89)
45-55 (1.77-2.16)
45.9 (1.81)
59.5 (2.34)
73.1 (2.88)
86.7 (3.41)
GN63 O...
65 (2.56)
53 (2.09)
14 (0.55)
5 (0.20)
34.5 (1.36)
48 (1.89)
45-55 (1.77-2.16)
54.3 (2.14)
72.4 (2.85)
90.5 (3.56)
108.6 (4.27)
70.5 (2.78)
16 (0.63)
6 (0.24)
41.5 (1.63)
68 (2.68)
45-55 (1.77-2.16)
74.8 (2.94)
103.9 (4.09)
133 (5.23)
162.1 (6.38)
GN125 O... 90 (3.54)
D1
D2
1 wafer
1...5
(0.04...0.20)
GN12
GN20
GN25
38 (1.50)
30
(1.18)
22.5
(0.88)
Type
45 (1.77) for O88 and O98 types .

65 (2.56) for O99 types .
38.5 (1.52) for O88 and O98 types .
49 (1.93) for O99 types .
Padlockable handle.
1...5
(0.04...0.20)
38 (1.50)
28
(1.10)
10

R
(0 1.6
.06
)
R
(0 1.6
.06
)
28
(1.10)
1 wafer
L [mm]
2 wafers
3 wafers
4 wafers
41.5 (1.63)
42.1 (1.66)
46.5 (1.83)
51.1 (2.01)
51.8 (2.04)
60.1 (2.37)
60.7 (2.39)
61.5 (2.42)
73.7 (2.90)
70.3 (2.77)
71.2 (2.80)
87.3 (3.44)
22.5
(0.88)
Type
GN12
GN20
GN25
MONTAGGIO IN CASSETTA GX
23
(0.90)
1 wafer
L [mm]
2 wafers
3 wafers
4 wafers
41.5 (1.63)
42.1 (1.66)
46.5 (1.83)
51.1 (2.01)
51.8 (2.04)
60.1 (2.37)
60.7 (2.39)
61.5 (2.42)
73.7 (2.90)
70.3 (2.77)
71.2 (2.80)
87.3 (3.44)
A1
1...5 S
C1
Type
D2 D2
K
D1
D2D2
K
C
D1
D2
K K
D1
KK
D2
CD1
A
D2
C
A
D2
D1
D1
K
C
MONTAGGIO
MONTAGGIO
IN
MONTAGGIO
CASSETTA
MONTAGGIO
IN CASSETTA
IN
GX...
CASSETTA
INGX...
CASSETTA
GX... GX...
Mounting in enclosure
Drilling for enclosure fixing

A
AC
N
C
F L1
L1
F L1
L1
F
D
N
A1
N of wafers
size
L1
GN12
GN20
GN25
75x75
(2.95x2.95)
1-2
1-2
1
3-4
3-4
R
2-3
75
75
(2.95)R (2.95)
GN20
GN25
GN32
GN40
90x90
(3.54x3.54)
1-3
1-2
1-2
1
4-6
3-4
3-4
2-3
90
(3.54)
90
(3.54)
GN32
GN40
GN63
GN125
110x110
(4.33x4.33)
1-3
1-2
1-2
1
4-5
3-4
3-4
2
110
(4.33)
110
(4.33)
Enclosure
Type
Protection
Conduits
L1
degree
50
(1.96)
R
4.5
(0.17)
19
(0.74)
14
(0.55)
28
(1.10)
57.5
(2.26)
79.8
(3.14)
IP65
4 PG 13.5
63
(2.48)
79
(3.11)
4.5
(0.17)
25
(0.98)
19
(0.74)
30
(1.18)
71.3
(2.80)
98.3
(3.87)
IP65
4 PG 16
98.4
(3.87)
83
(3.27)
4.5
(0.18)
32
(1.25)
21
(0.82)
39.5
(1.55)
85.5
(3.37)
119.5
(4.70)
IP65
4 PG 21
C
64
R(2.51)
C1
C1
C1
C1
A1
C1
A1
A1
A1
D1
M
D3
M
48
(1.89)
(0.2)
J
36
(1.42)
6(0.24) (0.24)
6
D1
G
39
(1.53)
K
D1
F
23.5
(0.92)
5 (0.2)
5 (0.2) (0.2)
12 1...5 1...5
4.3 1...5 26.5
(0.47)
(0.17)
(1.04)
(0.04...0.20)
(0.04...0.20)
(0.04...0.20)
D1
M
D1
D1
C
D1
C
D1
M
D1
M
D3
39.5
(1.55)
6 (0.24)
6 (0.24)(0.24)
D1
48
(1.89)
J
6
GN12
Wafer and front plate fixing on the door
LE
NTALE
GN...GN...
Type
Front mount
28 (1.1) for P25 type with padlockable handle.

38.5 (1.52) for P25 type with padlockable handle.
10-21
Rotary cam switches

Wiring diagrams
90 - One-pole ON/OFF switch
0
91 - Two-pole ON/OFF switch

0
92 - Four-pole ON/OFF switch

0
Number of wafers: 1
Switching angle: 60
Number of wafers: 1
Switching angle: 60
Number of wafers: 2
Switching angle: 60
Number of wafers: 2
Switching angle: 60
51 - 1-pole changeover /
double throw switch with 0
Number of wafers: 1
Switching angle: 60
Number of wafers: 2
Switching angle: 60
Number of wafers: 3
Switching angle: 60
Number of wafers: 4
Switching angle: 60
double throw without 0
10
10 - Three-pole ON/OFF switch
Number of wafers: 1
Switching angle: 90
Number of wafers: 2
Switching angle: 90
11 - 3-pole reversing switch
13 - Pole-changing switch with 0 (Dahlander)
Number of wafers: 3
Switching angle: 60
12 - Star-delta switch
0
Number of wafers: 4
Switching angle: 60
10-22
2
1
Number of wafers: 3
Switching angle: 90
Number of wafers: 4
Switching angle: 60
26 - Reversing switch, spring return to 0

1 0 2
Number of wafers: 3
Switching angle: 30
Number of wafers: 4
Switching angle: 90
Rotary cam switches

Wiring diagrams
20 - Pole-changing switch with reversing (Dahlander)
1
1
2
Number of wafers: 6
Switching angle: 60
68 - Phase-neutral voltmeter switch

0
67 - Phase-phase voltmeter switch
66 - Phase-phase phase-neutral
voltmeter changeover / double throw
60 - Changeover / double throw switch

1 phase phase-neutral, 3 phase-phase voltages
0
L1N
L1-L2
0
L2N
L2-L3
L1-L2
L1-N
L3N
L3-L1
L2-L3
L2-N
L2-L3
L3-N
L3-L1
L3-L1
Number of wafers: 2
Switching angle: 30
Number of wafers: 2
Switching angle: 30
97 - Ammeter switch direct reading or via current transformer
L1N
L1-L2
Number of wafers: 3
Switching angle: 30
Number of wafers: 3
Switching angle: 30
98 - L1-L2-L3 current changeover / double throw switch
0
L3
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
Number of wafers: 5
Switching angle: 90
10
Number of wafers: 4
Switching angle: 90
10-23
Rotary cam switches

SELECTION GUIDE
The choice of a rotary cam switch and the relative type are based on the functional diagram
and the type of application as well.
UTILISATION
MAIN SUPPLY DISCONNECTING SWITCH WITH
EMERGENCY-STOP OPERATION:
Red operating handle with yellow background
Lockable in open position (OFF).
IEC standards provide a comprehensible and quick classification of the most frequent
utilisation categories:
AC1:
Connection and disconnection of non-inductive or slightly inductive loads
(cos 0.95)
AC21: Resistance furnaces
AC3:
Starting and switching off motors during running
AC23A: Switching of motor loads or other highly inductive loads
AC15: Control of electromagnetic loads
EMERGENCY-STOP SWITCH
Red operating handle with yellow background
Independent operation and the breaking of the load circuit of switching devices before
the opening of its main contacts
Rated capacity is to sufficient in order to break the sum of the rated operating currents
of all the connected equipment
Breaking capacity equal to the current of the largest motor when stalled (locked rotor)
together with the total of the normal running currents of the other motors or loads.
For DC applications. the rotary cam switches are used for the switching of minor loads or
in control circuits. such as:
DC13: Control of electromagnets
DC21A: Switching of resistive loads
DC23: Switching of highly inductive loads
MAIN SUPPLY DISCONNECTING SWITCH

Used to disconnect all live electrical equipment from the power supply circuit
Contact clearance distance is to comply with
IEC/EN 60947-3 standards
Provided with a means in order to be locked in the OFF position
Selection of current breaking according to IEC AC1 and AC21 utilisation categories.
Other prescriptions and recommendations concerning the use of cam switches as auxiliary
equipment of electrical machines are given in IEC/EN 60204-1 standards and specifically as
given under utilisation.
TYPE
10
GX16
Rated insulation voltage

Ui
IEC/EN
UL/CSA
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Uimp IEC/EN 60947-3
GX20
GX32
GX40
GN12
GN20
GN25
GN32
GN40
GN63
GN125
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
kV
Conventional free air thermal

current Ith IEC/EN
UL/CSA (general purpose use)
16
20
32
40
16
20
25
32
40
63
125
12
15
32
40
15
20
30
40
50
60
130
Rated operating
voltage (switch disconnect)
440
440
440
440
480
480
480
480
480
480
690
Operatioanl impulse
voltage (switch disconnect)
Maximum fuse size for
short-circuit protection
In (gG)
Short-time
withstand current
Icw
kV
10kA
20
20
40
40
16
20
25
32
40
63
125
25kA
16
16
35
35
10
16
25
32
40
63
100
50kA
32
35
32
40
63
100
63kA
35
40
63
100
1sec
250
250
800
800
200
250
400
800
1000
1600
2100
Rated operational current

Ie
AC1/AC21A (IEC/EN)
AC15 (IEC/EN)
16
20
32
40
12
20
25
32
40
63
125
110V
10
10
25
25
10
10
16
25
25
32
40
220-230V
20
22
12
20
22
25
28
380-400V
10
12
10
12
15
15
660-690V
3.7
5.5
7.5
1.5
1.5
Motor power for switches

in AC utilisation categories
AC3 (IEC/EN)
220-230V
3 phases
1 phase (2 poles)
kW
3.5
3.7
7.5
7.5
2.5
5.5
7.5
11
18.5
380-440V
kW
4.5
5.5
11
15
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
37
500-690V
kW
5.5
5.5
11
15
5.5
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
33
110V
kW
0.55
0.75
1.8
2.2
0.8
0.8
1.5
2.2
3.7
220-230V
kW
1.5
1.8
3.5
4.4
1.5
2.2
6.5
6.5
11
380-440V
kW
2.2
5.5
2.2
5.5
6.5
11.5
15
AC23A (IEC/EN)
220-230V
kW
3.7
6.5
12.5
30
3 phases
380-440V
kW
6.5
7.5
15
18.5
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
30
45
500-690V
kW
7.5
7.5
15
15
7.5
7.5
11
18.5
22
30
37
1 phase (2 poles)
110V
kW
0.75
0.75
2.2
0.8
0.8
1.5
2.2
3.7
220-230V
kW
1.8
2.2
3.5
5.2
1.7
2.5
3.7
7.5
11
380-440V
kW
3.5
7.5
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
12.5
15
Valid for systems with earthed neutral, overvoltage category III, pollution degree 3.
10-24
Rotary cam switches

TYPE
Motor power for
direct-on-line control
(UL/CSA-DOL)
3 phases
1 phase (2 poles)
Motor power for switches in DC
utilisation categories
1 contact
DC21A
Ie
DC23A
Ie
No. of contacts connected in
series are indicated in brackets
GX16
GX20
GX32
GX40
GN12
GN20
GN25
GN32
GN40
GN63
GN125
120V
HP
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
7.5
15
230V
HP
7.5
10
10
10
15
25
50
480V
HP
15
15
10
15
20
25
600V
HP
15
15
15
15
20
25
40
120V
HP
0.75
0.75
1.5
0.75
0.75
1.5
7.5
230V
HP
1.5
10
15
125
48V
16
20
32
40
12
20
25
32
40
63
60V
16
20
32
40
12
20
25
32
40
50
80
110V
10
220V
0.5
0.6
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.7
0.9
0.9
1.2
440V
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
24V
16(1)
20(1)
32(1)
40(1)
10(1)
20(1)
25(1)
32(1)
40(1)
50(1)
125(1)
48V
16(2)
20(2)
32(2)
40(1)
10(2)
20(2)
25(2)
32(2)
40(2)
50(2)
125(2)
60V
16(3)
20(3)
32(3)
40(3)
10(3)
20(3)
25(3)
32(3)
40(3)
50(3)
125(3)
110V
10(3)
10(3)
15(3)
20(3)
5(3)
10(3)
12(3)
15(3)
20(3)
25(3)
50(3)
220V
7(4)
8(4)
12(4)
12(4)
5(4)
8(4)
10(4)
12(4)
12(4)
15(4)
20(4)
24V
16
20
32
40
12
20
25
32
40
63
125
48V
14
16
25
32
10
16
20
25
32
40
100
60V
12
12
16
16
12
16
16
16
28
50
110V
0.8
1.5
3.3
220V
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.5
440V
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.15
Mechanical life
cycles
5x106
5x106
5x106
5x106
3x106
5x106
5x106
5x106
5x106
5x106
1x106
Terminal screw
3.5
2x5
Nm
0.5
0.8
1.2
1.2
0.5
0.5
0.8
1.2
1.2
max. r/f 2 mm2

2 AWG
min. r/f 2 mm2
2.5/2.5
2.5/2.5
10/6
10/6
2.5/2.5
2.5/2.5
4/4
6/4
10/6
16/10
50/50
14/14
14/14
8/10
8/10
14/16
12/14
10/12
8/10
8/10
6/8
1/0 / 1/0
0.5/0.5
0.5/0.5
1.5/1.5
1.5/1.5
0.5/0.5
0.5/0.5
0.5/0.5
1.5/1.5
1.5/1.5
2.5/2.5
2.5/2.5
2 AWG
20/20
20/20
16/16
16/16
20/20
20/20
20/20
16/16
16/16
14/14
14/14
DC13
Ie
Tightening torque
Conductor cross section
r: rigid/solid
f: flexible/stranded
max
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-25...+55
Storage temperature
-40...+70
10-25
10
Page 11-4
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 16A TO 125A
(AC21A)
Switch disconnectors with direct operating
handle and door coupling version
Switch disconnectors with front door mount
Switch disconnectors in non-metallic
enclosure
Changeover switches in non-metallic

enclosure.
Page 11-16
(AC21A)
Three and four-pole switch disconnectors
with NFC, NH and BS type fuse holders
Three and four-pole changeover switches;
add-on motorised control unit available.
Page 11-24
FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS
UP TO 850A 1000VDC (DC21B)
Direct operating and door coupling
versions
Serial connection of 2, 3, 4, 6 and 8 poles.
11
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
16A to 1600A ratings

Versions: direct operating handle,
door coupling and in housing
Wide range of accessories
Types for photovoltaic applications
up to 850A 1000VDC in DC21B
duty
Changeover switches in
polycarbonate enclosure.
GA series 16A to 125A

Three-pole switch disconnectors ............................................................................................................................................
Fourth pole add on.....................................................................................................................................................................
Add-on blocks and accessories ...............................................................................................................................................
Empty non-metallic enclosures ..............................................................................................................................................
Enclosed switch disconnectors ..............................................................................................................................................
Enclosed changeover switches ...............................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
11
11
11
11
11
11
4
5
7
11
12
14
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
21
GE series 50A to 1600A

Three-pole switch disconnectors ............................................................................................................................................
Three-pole switch disconnectors with fuse holder ................................................................................................................
Four-pole switch disconnectors .............................................................................................................................................
Four-pole switch disconnectors with fuse holder ..................................................................................................................
Three-pole changeover switches ............................................................................................................................................
Four-pole changeover switches ...............................................................................................................................................
Add-on blocks and accessories ..............................................................................................................................................
Combinations ...........................................................................................................................................................................
AND
C IRCUIT P ROTECTION
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 11 - 26
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 11 - 50
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 11 - 53
I SOLATION
For photovoltaic applications ....................................................................................................................................... 11 - 24
Overview
GA series
16A to 125A
DIRECT OPERATING HANDLE AND

DOOR COUPLING VERSION
36mm / 1.42 width
IEC AC21A
Three pole
DOOR MOUNT VERSION
70mm / 2.75 width
36mm / 1.42 width
70mm / 2.75 width
16A
25A
32A
40A
63A
63A
80A
100A
125A
16A
25A
32A
40A
63A
80A
100A
4th pole - simultaneous closing
4th pole - early-make closing
Three-pole for photovoltaic

applications
125A
Fuse holder
Mechanical 6-8 pole coupling system
Mechanical interlock for line

switching
11
ENCLOSED VERSION - IEC/EN TYPE IP65
WITH RED/ YELLOW OR BLACK HANDLE
IEC AC21A
16A
25A
32A
40A
63A
63A
80A
ENCLOSED VERSION - UL/CSA TYPE 4/4X

WITH RED/ YELLOW OR BLACK HANDLE
100A 125A
UL/CSA general use 600VAC
16A
25A
32A
40A
63A
63A
80A
100A
125A
16A
25A
32A
40A
60A
60A
100A 100A
100A
Enclosure width
100mm / 3.94
Enclosure width
220mm
8.66
175mm / 6.89
100mm / 3.94
175mm /
6.89
220mm / 8.66
Three pole
Four pole
Enclosure width
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
175mm / 6.89
220mm / 8.66
Three pole
Four pole
GE series
50A to 1600A
Changeover switches
DIRECT OPERATING AND DOOR COUPLING VERSION

IEC AC21A
50A
125A
160A
200A
250A
315A
400A
500A
630A
800A
1000A
1250A
1600A

Three and four pole
Three and four pole with NFC
fuse holder
Three and four pole with NH

fuse holder
Three and four pole with BS

fuse holder
Four-pole for photovoltaic

applications

CHANGEOVER SWITCHES 160A TO 1600A

Three and four pole
Motorised control unit
11-2

Overview
VERSATILITY!
VERSION FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC
APPLICATIONS
The GA...D type switch disconnectors are
suitable for both small domestic installations
as well as those with a large number of solar
cells. Use up to 1000V in DC21B category.
COMPACT SIZE
The three-pole 16A to 63A switch
disconnectors, are made up of a single
unit body, merely 36mm/1.4 wide, while
the 63A to 125A ratings, of another body
size of only 70mm/2.8 wide.
CERTIFICATIONS
All GA series switch disconnectors are
certified by EAC, cCSAus and UL Listed
for Canada and USA. The 16A to 63A
types are certified according to
UL508/CSA 22.2 n 14 while the 63A to
125A types to UL98/CSA 22.2 n 4
standards.
ACCESSORY FLEXIBILITY
Mounting and removal of the fourth pole
and add-on blocks are simple and quick
operations with no need of tools.
11
SIDE MOUNT ADD-ON
FOURTH POLE
Simultaneous or early-make contact
operation of the fourth pole with
respect to the switch disconnector
poles.
6 AND 8 POLE VERSION

A mechanical coupling system is
available for the 16A to 125A switch
disconnectors with direct operating
handle to provide 6/8 pole
disconnectors along with a
mechanical interlock mechanism for
the line changeover function
(I - 0 - II).
Enclosed changeover switches are
available in a variety of ratings and
cCSAus certified.
IP65 PADLOCKABLE HANDLES

Wide range of selector or pistol grip
handles, with screw or ring fixing.
All handles are equipped with builtin padlockable mechanism.
The selector handle GAX63... snaps
onto the door-mount switch
disconnectors in16A to 40A ratings,
with no need of tools.
SWITCH STATUS INDICATION

The switch open or closed state is
clearly and unequivocally seen at a
distance thanks to the simple and
modern design of the handle.
DIN RAIL FIXING

Switch disconnector mounting on
and removal from the 35mm
(IEC/EN 60715) DIN rail are done by
simply pressing it downwards with
no need of tools.
PAD INSERT FOR NO SLIDING

One only add-on block suitable for
all the 8 ratings of switch
disconnectors, having
simultaneuous operation with the
switch poles. There are versions
with an early-break NO contact.
MAXIMUM COMBINATIONS
Mounting up to 4 auxiliary contacts
or 1 fourth pole and 3 auxiliary
contacts (2 blocks always on the
right and 2 on the left side) of each
switch disconnector. The earth and
neutral terminals and fuse holder
also can be added.
9mm/0.35
HANDLE ADAPABILITY
The extensive number of fixing
holes in the front handle plate can
replace switch disconnectors,
normally found out in the field,
without having to drill others.
FUSE HOLDERS
A three-pole fuse holder can be

added to 16A to 32A switch
disconnectors, with direct operating
handle, to provide a single compact
unit. Access to the fuse can be
made only when the disconnector is
in OFF position. UL Listed type up
to 25A class CC fuses.
REDUCED HANDLE THICKNESS
GAX61 and GAX 61 B handles are
only 23mm/0.9 thick.
DEFEATABLE UL508A HANDLE

VERSION
In compliance with UL508A
standards, which require internal
panel inspection by authorised
personnel with power applied,
selector and lever handles are
available with defeatable feature of
the door coupling when the switch
disconnector is closed, i.e. in ON
position.
A rubber pad insert prevents the

sliding of switch disconnectors
on the DIN rail even when out of
tolerance or mounted vertically.
TERMINAL ADAPTABILITY
Terminals are suitable to accept any
type of cable: flexible, rigid, AWG
wire.
The terminals can withstand high
tightening torques.
HIGH IEC CAPABILITY IN AC23

The rated currents Ie in AC23 at
690VAC are the highest of the
category.
MODULARITY
The switch disconnectors can be
mounted in modular panels.
23mm/0.9
11-3
Order code

thermal
current Ith
AC21A
(690V)
IEC rated
operational
current Ie
[A]
[A]
Qty Wt
per
pkg
AC22A (690V)
AC23A (415V)
n
[kg]
Direct operating version, complete with black handle.

For door-coupling version, separately purchase the handle
and shaft extension; refer to pages 11-9 and 11-10.
16
0.146
25
25
0.146
GA032 A
32
32
0.146
GA040 A
40
40
0.146
GA063 SA
63
45
0.148
GA063 A
63
63
0.388
GA080 A
80
80
0.388
GA100 A
100
100
0.388
GA125 A
125
125
0.388
IEC rated impulse withstand Uimp: 8kV
Electrical life in IEC AC21A:
100,000 cycles for GA016-GA040
15,000 cycles for GA063 SA
30,000 cycles for GA063-GA125
Mechanical life:
100,000 cycles for GA016-GA040-GA063 SA
30,000 cycles for GA063-GA125.
Door-mount version, complete with shaft;

separately purchase the handle, refer to pages 11-9.
11
GA016 C...
GA040 C
GA063 C...
GA125 C
GA016 C
16
16
0.170
GA025 C
25
25
0.170
GA032 C
32
32
0.170
GA040 C
40
40
0.170
GA063 C
63
63
0.404
GA080 C
80
80
0.404
GA100 C
100
100
0.404
GA125 C
125
125
0.404
Strokes of GA switch poles

Travel 01 0
30
60
60
GA016 A...GA040 A - GA063SA
90
60
GA016 C...GA040 C
55
GA063 C...GA125 C
OFF
GA016 A...GA040 A
GA063 SA
GA016 C...GA040 C
GA063 A...GA125 A
GA063 C...GA125 C
Type
Certification obtained.
55
GA063 A...GA125 A
cULus per UL98 /

CSA C22.2 n4
UL Listed (File E328470)
16
GA025 A
cULus per UL508 /

CSA C22.2 n14
GA063 A...
GA125 A
GA016 A
KEMA
GA016 A...
GA040 A
GA063 SA
IEC 16A to 125A ratings
Available versions:
Direct operating
Door mount
Door coupling version. Use switch disconnector
with direct operating handle and separately purchase
the handle and shaft extension for this version.
See pages 11-9 and 11-10
Compact and modular size
Screw or 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail fixing
Padlockable in 0 position with no extra accessory.
EAC
Three-pole switch
disconnectors
ON
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,

UL508, UL98, CSA C22.2.
UL/CSA ratings
Type
1 phase
[HP]
3 phase
[HP]
General
use at
600VAC
Shortcircuit
rating at
600VAC
Fuse class max rating

at 600V
120V
240V
200208V
240V
480V
600V
[A]
[kA]
Type - [A]
RK5 - 20A
GA016...
10
10
16
GA025...
11/2
71/2
71/2
15
20
25
RK5 - 30A
GA032...
10
10
20
20
32
RK5 - 35A
GA040...
10
15
20
25
40
RK5 - 45A
71/2
10
15
30
30
60
RK5 - 45A
GA063 SA 2
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAA, GAC and GAD (on page 11-24) types, according to UL508 and CSA 22.2 n14.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Manual Motor Controllers while UL designation is GENERAL PURPOSE
SWITCH. INTERRUPTEUR USAGE GENERAL and SUITABLE AS MOTOR DISCONNECT.
Type
1 phase
[HP]
120V
3 phase
[HP]
240V
200240V
208V
480V
600V
General
use at
600VAC
Shortcircuit
rating at
600VAC
Max fuse
rating
at 600V
[A]
[kA]
[A]
GA063... 3
71/2
20
20
40
40
60
10
100
GA080...
10
25
25
40
40
100
10
100
GA100...
10
30
30
50
50
100
10
100
GA125...
71/2
10
30
30
60
60
100
10
100
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAA, GAC and GAD (on page 11-24) types, according to UL98 and CSA C22.2 N4.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E328470), as Open Type Switches Open type unfused switch while UL designation is
GENERAL PURPOSE SWITCH. INTERRUPTEUR USAGE GENERAL.
Lower ratings in this same UL/CSA category are available on specific request for volume orders.
For information, consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
Voltage value not considered in UL98 / CSA 22.2 n4 standards so not indicated in UL product marking.
11-4
pages 11-6 to 10
Dimensions
pages 11-26 to 28
Wiring diagrams
page 11-50
page 11-53
Fourth pole
add on
Order code

thermal
current Ith
AC21A
(690V)
IEC rated
operational
current Ie
[A]
[A]
Qty Wt
per
pkg
AC22A (690V)
AC23A (415V)
n
[kg]
Simultaneous closing operation as switch poles.

For GA...A version.
GAX42...A
GAX41...A
GAX42 063SA
GAX41 063SA
GAX42 040A 40
40
0.045
GAX42 063SA 63
45
0.045
GAX42 063A
63
63
0.126
GAX42 080A
80
80
0.126
GAX42 100A
100
100
0.126
GAX42 125A
125
125
0.126
GAX42 040C 40
40
0.045
GAX42 063C
63
63
0.128
GAX42 080C
80
80
0.128
GAX42 100C
100
100
0.128
GAX42 125C
125
125
0.128
For GA...C version.
Available version for:
Direct operating
Door mount
Simultaneous closing with switch poles
Early-make closing respect with switch poles
Compact and modular size.
Electrical life in IEC AC21A:
100,000 cycles for GAX42 040A/C and
GAX41 040A/C
15,000 cycles for GAX42 063SA and GAX41 063SA
30,000 cycles for GAX42 063A/C and GAX41 125A/C
Mechanical life:
100,000 cycles for GAX42 040A/C and
GAX41 040A/C, GAX42 063SA and GAX41 063SA
30,000 cycles for GAX42 063A/C - GAX42 125A/C
and GAX41 125A/C.
GAX41 040A 40
40
0.046
GAX41 063SA 63
45
0.046
GAX41 125A 125
125
0.116
GAX41 040C 40
40
0.046
Type
cULus per UL98 /

CSA C22.2 n4
GAX41 125C 125
125
0.128
GAX41 040A-GAX42 040A
GAX41 063SA-GAX42 063SA
GAX41 040C-GAX42 040C
GAX41 125A-GAX42 125C
GAX42 063A...GAX42 125A
GAX42 063C...GAX42 125C
EAC
GAX42 040C
GAX41 040C
cULus per UL508 /

CSA C22.2 n14
Early-make closing operation with respect to switch poles.

For GA...A version.
For GA...C version.

For GA016 A-GA040 A only.

For GA063 SA only.
For GA016 C-GA040 C only.
For GA063 A-GA125 A only.
For GA063 C-GA125 C only.
See page 11-4 for UL/CSA ratings which are the same as the
corresponding switch types.
Strokes of GA poles (switch and add-on pole)

Travel 01 0
GA016A/CGA040A/C - GA063SA
Main poles
GAX42040A/C - GAX42063SA
Simultaneous fourth-pole add on
GAX41040A/C-GAX41063SA
Early-make fourth-pole add on
60
60
90

UL508, UL98, CSA C22.2.
60
55
55
GA063A/CGA125A/C
Main poles
GAX42063A/CGAX42125A/C
GAX41125A/C
Early-make fourth-pole add on
55
48
OFF
pages 11-6 to 10
30
Dimensions
pages 11-26 to 28
ON
Wiring diagrams
page 11-50
page 11-53
11-5
11
Maximum combination
GA016 A...GA040 A Sequence and maximum combination of add-on blocks on direct operating switch disconnectors
GA040 D
GAX31 A
GAX33 A
GAX10 11A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
GAX31 A
GAX33 A
GAX10 11A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
GAX32 A
GAX34 A
GAX10 11A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
GAX11 10EA GAX41 040A

GAX42 040A
GAX42 040D
1
1
GAX42 040D can be used with GA040 D switch only.
GAX41 040A GAX11 10EA

GAX42 040A
GAX42 040D
GA016 A
GA025 A
GA032 A
GA040 A
GA040 D
GAX10 11A
GAX33 A
GAX31 A
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GAX10 11A
GAX33 A
GAX31 A
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GAX10 11A
GAX34 A
GAX32 A
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
GA063 SA
11
GAX11 10EA GAX41 063SA

GAX42 063SA
1
1
GAX41 063SA GAX11 10EA

GAX42 063SA
GA063 SA
GA063 A...GA125 A
GA080 D, GA125 D

GAX42...A
GA042 080D
GA042 125D
1
1


GAX42...A
GA042 080D
GA042 125D
GA063 A
GA080 A
GA100 A
GA125 A
GA080 D
GA125 D
GA016 C...GA040 C Sequence and maximum combination of add-on blocks on door mount switch disconnectors
GAX31 C
GAX33 C
GAX10 11C
GAX41 040C
GAX42 040C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GAX32 C
GAX34 C
GAX10 11C
GAX41 125C
GAX42 125C
1
1
1
1
GAX41 040C
GAX42 040C
GAX10 11C
GAX33 C
GAX31 C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GAX41 125C
GAX42 125C
GAX10 11C
GAX34 C
GAX32 C
1
1
1
GA016 C
GA025 C
GA032 C
GA040 C
GA063 C...GA125 C
11-6
pages 11-6 to 10
Dimensions
pages 11-26 to 28
GA063 C
GA080 C
GA100 C
GA125 C
Wiring diagrams
page 11-50
pages 11-53
GA016 A...GA040 A Sequence and maximum combination for mechanical coupling and mechanical interlock for line changeover
GA040 D
+ GAX50 00 GAX60 00
GAX31 A
GAX33 A
GAX10 11A

GAX42 040A
GAX42 040D

GAX42 040A
GAX42 040D
GAX10 11A
GAX33 A
GAX31 A
GAX50 00 - GAX60 00
GA016 A +
GA016 A +
GA025 A +
GA025 A +
GA032 A +
GA032 A +
GA040 A +
GA040 A +
GA040 D +
GA040 D
1
1
GAX10 11A
GAX33 A
GAX31 A

GA063 SA
+ GAX50 00 GAX60 00
GAX31 A
GAX33 A
GAX10 11A
GAX11 10EA GAX41 063SA

GAX42 063SA
GAX41 063SA GAX11 10EA

GAX42 063SA
GAX50 00 - GAX60 00
GA063SA +
GA063SA
GAX32 A
GAX34 A
GAX10 11A
GAX10 11A
GAX34 A
GAX32 A
GA063 A...GA125 A
GA080 D, GA125 D
+ GAX50 01 GAX60 01
GAX42...A
GA042 080D
GA042 125D

GAX42...A
GA042 080D
GA042 125D
GAX50 01 - GAX60 01
GA063 A +
GA063 A +
GA080 A +
GA080 A +
GA100 A +
GA100 A +
GA125 A +
GA125 A +
GA080 D +
GA080 D
GA125 D +
GA125 D

pages 11-6 to 10
Dimensions
pages 11-26 to 28
Wiring diagrams
page 11-50
pages 11-53
11-7
11
Accessories
Add-on blocks
Order code
Characteristics
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Auxiliary contacts, simultaneous operation as switch poles.

GAX10 11A
1NO+1NC for GA...A,

GA063 SA and GA...D
0.030
GAX10 11C
1NO+1NC for GA...C
0.030
Auxiliary contacts, early-break operation with respect to

switch poles.
GAX10 11A
GAX10 11C
GAX11 10EA 1EB (NO) for GA016 A-GA040 A, 1

GA063 SA and GA040 D
0.035
GAX12 10EA 1EB (NO) for GA063 A-GA125 A, 1

GA080 D and GA125 D
0.035
Neutral terminal.
GAX11 10EA
GAX12 10EA
GAX31 A
For GA016 A-GA040 A,

GA063 SA and GA040D
0.040
GAX32 A
For GA063 A-GA125 A and

GA080 D - GA125 D
0.110
GAX31 C
For GA016 C-GA040 C
0.040
GAX32 C
For GA063 C-GA125 C
0.110
Operational characteristics of auxiliary contacts

A600-Q600
Tightening torque: 0.8Nm/7.1lbin.
Operational characteristics for other devices
Tightening torque:
GAX31A/C-GAX33A/C terminals: 1.8-2Nm/16-18lbin
GAX32A/C-GAX34A/C terminals: 5-6Nm/45-54lbin
GAX5000/5001-GAX6000/6001 fixing:
0.5Nm/4.4lbin; extension with handle:
0.8Nm/7.1lbin.
Transformation of direct operating version into door
coupling type
GA016 A-GA040 A +
GA016 A-GA040A /
GA063 SA + GA063 SA /
GA040 D + GA040 D
with GAX50 00
for line changeover
GA063 A-GA125 A +
GA063 A-GA124 A /
GA080 D + GA080 D /
GA125 D + GA125 D
with GAX50 01
for line changeover
GAX7... (
5mm/02in)
Earth/Ground terminal.
GAX33 A

GA063 SA and GA...D
0.040
GAX34 A

GA080 D - GA125 D
0.110
GAX33 C
For GA016 C-GA040 C
0.040
GAX34 C
For GA063 C-GA125 C
0.110
GAX67 B
0
II
11
Mechanical coupling system for 6-8 pole switch disconnectors.
Type
cULus per UL98 /

CSA C22.2 n4
GAX50...
GAX60...
cULus per UL508 /

CSA C22.2 n14
Mechanical interlock for line changeover (I-0-II).
GAX3...C
GAX60 00
GAX10 11A - GAX10 11C
GAX11 10EA
GAX12 10EA
GAX31 A GAX31 C
GAX32 A GAX32 C
GAX33 A GAX33 C
GAX34 A GAX34 C
GAX50 00 GAX60 00
GAX50 00

1
GA063 SA, GA...D and GAX67 B;
5mm/0.2
0.050
GAX50 01
For GA063 A-GA125 A, GA080 D 1

GA125 D and GAX67 B;
5mm/0.2
0.075
GAX60 01

30
60
60
90
60
Travel 10
GA063A/CGA125A/C
Main poles
GAX10 11A GAX10 11C
Auxiliary contacts (1NO+1NC) NO
NC
70
55
45
Travel 10
Travel 01 0
GA040 D
Main poles
GA042 040D
GAX10 11A
NC
0.075
ON
30
60
60
60
Travel 10
pages 11-6 to 10
GAX50 01 GAX60 01
GAX61-GAX61 B
GAX62-GAX62 B
GAX63-GAX63 B
GAX63 1B
GAX63 2-GAX63 2B
GAX64-GAX64 B
GAX66-GAX66 B
GAX67 B
GAX60 B
UL Listed - cULus File E93601.
60
NOTE: GAX61/61B and GAX66/66B are UL/CSA Type 1, 4, 4X

outdoor use with all GA switch types.
GAX62/62B, GAX63/63B, GAX632/2B, GAX64/64B and
GAX67B are UL/CSA Type 1, 4, 4X outdoor use with
GA016A/C-GA040A/C and GA063SA types, otherwise Type 1
only.
70
55
55

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, UL98, CSA C22.2.
45
25
Travel 01 55
GAX12 10EA
Auxiliary contact
(1EB NO early break)
Travel 10
65
OFF
11-8
90
40
Travel 01 60
GA080 D - GA125 D
Main poles
GAX42 080D - GAX42 125D
GAX10 11A GAX10 11C
NC
65
OFF
0.050
For GA063 A-GA125 A, GA080 D, 1

GA125 D; 7mm/0.3
GAX11 10EA
Auxiliary contact
25
Travel 01 55
GAX12 10EA
Auxiliary contact
Strokes of GAD types (switch and add-on blocks)
40
Travel 01 60
GAX11 10EA
Auxiliary contact

GA063 SA and GA...D;
5mm/0.2
Use GAX7 shaft extensions.

Use GAX66.. handles and GAX7A extensions for a door-coupling
version.
Strokes of GA poles (switch with auxiliary contact blocks)

Travel 01 0
GA016A/CGA040A/C - GA063SA
Main poles
GAX10 11A GAX10 11C
NC

EAC
GAX3...A
Dimensions
pages 11-26 to 28
ON
Wiring diagrams
page 11-50
Accessories
Rotary handles
Order code
Characteristics
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
DOOR COUPLING HANDLES, PADLOCKABLE.

Red/yellow, rotating.
GAX61
GAX62
GAX61
For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C and 1

GA...D. Screw fixing. Recessed
selector. 5mm/0.2 .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
0.073
GAX62

GA...D. Screw fixing. Protruding
selector. 5mm/0.2 .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
0.072
GAX63
For GA...A, GA063 SA,

1
GA016 C - GA040 C and GA...D.
Ring fixing. Protruding selector.
5mm/0.2 .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
0.068

and GA...D. Low-profile ring
fixing. Protruding selector.
5mm/0.2 .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
0.057
GAX63 2
GAX64
GAX66
GAX66
Choice of handle fixing: ring or screw
Fixing handle interaxis: 36x36mm/1.4x1.4 or
48x48mm/1.9x1.9 for GAX61/61B-GAX62/62BGAX67B; 36x36mm/1.4x1.4 for GAX66/66B
Compatible with pre-existing drillings of most
common types on marketplace
1 to 3 padlocks (4-8mm/0.2-0.3) for all handles
Tightening torque:
Fixing ring types: 2.3Nm/20.4lbin
GAX60B: 0.8Nm/7lbin
GAX66/66B: 1.5Nm/13.3lbin
All others: 1Nm/9lbin
Degree of protection: IEC/EN IP65 for all except
GAX66/66B with IP66; for UL/CSA ratings, see note
details on page 11-8.
coupling type
GA...A - GA063 SA
GA...D
GAX7... (
5mm/0.2in)
(GAX64/64B)
For GA...A, GA063 SA, and

1
GA...D. Ring fixing. Protruding
selector with release, defeatable
per UL508A; 5mm/0.2 .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
0.064

GA080 D, GA125 D and
GAX60 01. Screw fixing. Pistol
grip with release, defeatable
per UL508A; 7mm/0.3 .
IEC IP66/UL Type 4X
0.140
GAX63/63B
GAX63 1B
GAX63 2/2B
GAX64/64B
(GAX63/63B)
(GAX63 1B)
11
GAX62/62B
Black, rotating.
GAX63 B
GAX63 2B
Low profile
GAX61 B
For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C and

GA...D. Screw fixing. Recessed
selector. 5mm/0.2 .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
0.073
GAX62 B

GA...D, Screw fixing. Protruding
selector. 5mm/0.2 .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
0.072
GAX63 B

1
GA016 C - GA040 C and GA...D.
Ring fixing. Protruding selector.
5mm/0.2 .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
0.068
GAX63 1B
For GAA, GA063 SA,

1
GA016 C-GA040 C and GAD.
Ring fixing. Protruding selector,
padlockable at ON (per UNI 9490
and UNI EN 12845 - firefighting
systems); 5mm/0.2 .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
0.074
For GA...A, GA063 SA and GA...D. 1

Low-profile ring fixing. Protruding
selector. 5mm/0.2 .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
0.057
For GA...A, GA063 SA and GA...D 1

Ring fixing. Protruding selector
with release, defeatable per
UL508A. 5mm/0.2 .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
0.064

1
GA080 D-GA125 D and
GAX60 01. Screw fixing. Pistol
grip with release, defeatable per
UL508A; 7mm/0.3 .
IEC IP66/UL Type 4X
0.140
For GAX50... mechanical

interlock mechanism (I-O-II).
5mm/0.2 .
IEC IP65/UL Type 4X
0.078
GAX63 2B
GAX64 B
GAX66 B
GAX67 B
GAX67 B

For GA...A and GA...D switch disconnectors,

separately purchase GAX7... shaft extensions.
Snap-on fixing of GA016-GA040C switch
disconnectors with the handle.
Separately purchase GAX7A shaft extension
and GAX60 B handle having a 7mm/0.3
square section, nor required for GAX60 01.
GAX61/61B
GA080 D + GA080 D /
GA125 D + GA125 D
with GAX60 01
for 6 and 8 poles
GA080 D
GA125 D
GAX60 B
GAX7150A
GAX7200A
GAX7300A
( 7mm/0.3)
GAX66
GAX66 B
Door-mount version
GA016 C - GA040 C
GAX63/63B
GAX63 1B
GA016 C - GA040 C
GA063 C - GA125 C
GAX61/61B
GAX62/62B
ACCESSORIES FOR DOOR COUPLING CONTROL.

For GAX66 and GAX66 B handles.
GAX60 B
Adapter 7mm/0.3 for

GA063 A-GA125 A,
GA080 D and GA125 D
Dimensions
pages 11-26 to 28
0.010
See the table on page 11-8 for details.
11-9
Accessories
Characteristics
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Shaft extension for door-coupling handles GAX61-GAX64,

GAX61 B-GAX64 B, GAX67 B and mechanical interlock type
GAX50 00, GAX50 01 and coupling system GAX60 00.
55mm long; 5mm/0.2
70mm long; 5mm/0.2
0,012
GAX7 070
0.014
GAX7 090
90mm long; 5mm/0.2
0.018
GAX7 150
150mm long; 5mm/0.2
0.032
GAX7 200
200mm long; 5mm/0.2
0.040
GAX7 300
300mm long; 5mm/0.2
0.068
GAX7 400
400mm long; 5mm/0.2
0.072
GAX7 500
500mm long; 5mm/0.2
0.090
GAX7 055
GAX7...
Shaft extension for door-coupling handles GAX66, GAX66 B

and mechanical coupling system GAX60 01.
GAX7... A
GAX7 150A
150mm long; 7mm/0.3
0.090
GAX7 200A
200mm long; 7mm/0.3

300mm long; 7mm/0.3
0.112
0.160
GAX7 300A
GAX8...
Terminal covers
For switch disconnectors
GA...A
GA063 SA
GA...D
GAX83
GAX84
GAX83
GAX84
GA...C
For fourth pole
Set of 2 one-pole terminal covers for fourth pole.

GAX81
For GAX42 040A, GAX42 040C

GAX42 040D, GAX41 040A,
GAX41 040C, GAX41 063SA,
GAX42 063SA
0.009
GAX82
For GAX42 063A-GAX42 125A,

GAX42 063C-GAX42 125C,
GAX42 080D, GAX42 125D,
GAX41 125A, GAX41 125C
0.012
11
Operational characteristics of fuse holder

The fuse holder/block connects directly to the switch
disconnectors.
Access to fuses only when the switch disconnectors
are in OFF position.
GAX41...A
GAX41 063SA
GAX42...A
GAX42 063SA
GAX42...D
GAX81
GAX82
GAX81
GAX82
GAX41...C
GAX42...C
Set of 2 three-pole terminal covers.

GAX83

GA063 SA, GA016 C-GA040 C,
GA040 D
0.018
GAX84

GA063 C-GA125 C, GA080 D,
GA125 D
0.030

GAX39 1
For GA016 A-GA032 A

Suitable for 10.3x38 fuse size
0.132
GAX39 1UL
For GA016 A-GA025 A

Suitable for Class CC fuses
0.135
GAX39 1
EAC
Fuse holder/block for switch disconnectors.
Type
cULus per UL98 /

CSA C22.2 n4
Order code
cULus per UL508 /

CSA C22.2 n14
Shaft extensions
Terminal covers
Fuse holders/blocks
GAX7 055GAX7 500
GAX7 150A GAX7 300A
GAX81-GAX83
GAX82-GAX84
GAX39 1
GAX39 1UL
UL508, UL98, CSA C22.2.
11-10
Dimensions
pages 11-26 to 28
Wiring diagrams
page 11-50
IEC/EN type IP65
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
For switch disconnectors.

With rotating red/yellow handle. Complete with shaft
extension.
GAZ1
GAZ1

GA040 D
0.320
GAZ2
For GA063 SA,

1
GA063 A-GA100 A and GA080 D
0.780
GAZ3
For GA125 A and GA125 D
1.900
With rotating black handle. Complete with shaft extension.
GAZ2
GAZ1 B

GA040 D
0.320
GAZ2 B
For GA063 SA,

1
GA063 A-GA100 A and GA080 D
0.780
GAZ3 B
For GA125 A and GA125 D
1.900
Enclosure material: ABS
Padlockable handle
Sealable cover
For GAZ3/3B if any earth/ground and/or neutral
terminal required, separately purchase types GAX3
given on page 11-8
Tightening torque for cover screws:
GAZ1/1B: 1.3Nm/16lbin
Other types: 1.5Nm/13lbin
IEC/EN degree of protection: IP65
Cable entry:
GAZ1/1B: PG16/M25 and PG13.5/M20 knockouts
GAX2/2B: PG29/M32 and PG16/M25 knockouts
GAZ3/3B: Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by
customer.
IEC/EN 60947-3.
The empty enclosures are supplied with the following

accessories:
Enclosure
GAZ1
GAZ1B
GAZ2
GAZ2B
GAZ3
GAZ3B
Red/yellow handle
GAX61
GAX61
GAX61
Black handle
GAX61B
GAX61B
GAX61B
Extension
Neutral plate terminal
Earth/Ground plate
terminal
11
GAZ3
UL/CSA Type 4/4X
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
For switch disconnectors.

With rotating red/yellow handle. Complete with shaft
extension.
GAZ1 UL
GAZ1 UL
For GA016 A-GA040 A

and GA040D
0.320
GAZ2 UL
For GA063 SA and GA063 A
0.730
GAZ3 UL
For GA80 A-GA125 A,

GA080 D and GA125 D
1.900
With rotating black handle. Complete with shaft extension.
GAZ2 UL
GAZ1 B UL
For GA016 A-GA040 A

and GA040D
0.320
GAZ2 B UL
For GA063 SA and GA063 A
0.730
GAZ3 B UL
For GA80 A-GA125 A,

GA080 D and GA125 D
1.900
The empty enclosures are supplied with the following

accessories:
Enclosure
GAZ1UL GAZ2UL GAZ3UL

GAZ1BUL GAZ2BUL GAX3BUL
Red/yellow handle
GAX61
GAX61
GAX61
Black handle
GAX61B
GAX61B
GAX61B
Extension
Neutral plate terminal
Earth/Ground plate
terminal
Enclosure material: Polycarbonate
Padlockable handle
Sealable cover
Tightening torque for enclosure screws:
GAZ1/1B UL: 1.3Nm/16lbin for cover; 1.2Nm/11lbin
for plate terminals
Other types: 1.5Nm/13lbin for cover; 1.2Nm/11lbin
for plate terminals
UL/CSA degree of protection: Type 1, 4 and 4X indoor
use only for GAZ1 UL; not available for others / testing
pending completion at time of catalogue printing
Cable entry:
GAZ1/1B UL: PG16/M25 and PG13.5/M20
knockouts
GAX2/2B UL: PG29/M32 and PG16/M25 knockouts
GAZ3/3B UL: Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by
customer.
Canada (cULus file E93602) as Polymeric Enclosures
for Manual Motor Controllers; cCSAus pending for
GAZ2/2B UL and GAZ3/3B UL at time of catalogue
printing.
IEC/EN 60947-3, UL508, CSA C22.2 n14, UL98,
CSA C22.2 n4.
GAZ3 UL
Dimensions
page 11-28
Wiring diagrams
page 11-50
11-11
Enclosed switch disconnectors
IEC/EN type IP65
non-metallic enclosure
Order code
IEC conventional free air thermal Qty

current Ith
per
AC21A (690V)
pkg
Wt
[A]
[kg]
Components
Enclosure
Switch
disconnector
Handle
THREE POLE.
With rotating red/yellow handle.
GAZ016...GAZ040...
GAZ016
16
0.450
GAZ1
GA016 A
GAX61
GAZ025
25
0.450
GAZ1
GA025 A
GAX61
GAZ032
32
0.450
GAZ1
GA032 A
GAX61
GAZ040
40
0.450
GAZ1
GA040 A
GAX61
GAZ063 SA
63
0.870
GAZ2
GA063 SA
GAX61
GAZ063 C
63
1.220
GAZ2
GA063 A
GAX61
GAZ080 C
80
1.220
GAZ2
GA080 A
GAX61
GAZ100 C
100
1.220
GAZ2
GA100 A
GAX61
GAZ125
125
2.220
GAZ3
GA125 A
GAX61
With rotating black handle.
GAZ063...100 C
11
GAZ016 B
16
0.450
GAZ1 B
GA016 A
GAX61 B
GAZ025 B
25
0.450
GAZ1 B
GA025 A
GAX61 B
GAZ032 B
32
0.450
GAZ1 B
GA032 A
GAX61 B
GAZ040 B
40
0.450
GAZ1 B
GA040 A
GAX61 B
GAZ063 SAB 63
0.870
GAZ2 B
GA063 SA
GAX61 B
GAZ063 CB
63
1.220
GAZ2 B
GA063 A
GAX61 B
GAZ080 CB
80
1.220
GAZ2 B
GA080 A
GAX61 B
GAZ100 CB
100
1.220
GAZ2 B
GA100 A
GAX61 B
GAZ125 B
125
2.220
GAZ3 B
GA125 A
GAX61 B
Enclosure
Switch
Fourth
disconnector pole
Handle
FOUR POLE.
GAZ016 T4
16
0.550
GAZ1
GA016 A
GAX42040A
GAX61
GAZ032 T4
32
0.550
GAZ1
GA032 A
GAX42040A
GAX61
GAZ063 CT4 63
1.250
GAZ2
GA063 A
GAX42063A
GAX61
GAZ100 CT4 100
1.250
GAZ2
GA100 A
GAX42100A
GAX61
GAZ125 T4
2.500
GAZ3
GA125 A
GAX42125A
GAX61
GAZ016 T4B 16
0.550
GAZ1 B
GA016 A
GAX42040A
GAX61 B
GAZ032 T4B 32
0.550
GAZ1 B
GA032 A
GAX42040A
GAX61 B
GAZ063 CT4B 63
1.250
GAZ2 B
GA063 A
GAX42063A
GAX61 B
GAZ100 CT4B 100
1.250
GAZ2 B
GA100 A
GAX42100A
GAX61 B
GAZ125 T4B 125
2.500
GAZ3 B
GA125 A
GAX42125A
GAX61 B
125
GAZ125...
Enclosure material: ABS
For four-pole types not indicated, separately purchase
corresponding fourth pole GAX42A and install on
enclosed 3-pole version
Possible accessories to mount afterwards, if any
required:
GAZ016-GAZ040 types: 1 contact block both on the
right and left disconnector side unless 4th pole is
installed
All other types: 2 contact blocks both on the right
and left disconnector side unless 4th pole is
installed
For GAZ125 types: if any earth/ground and/or
neutral terminal required, separately purchase types
GAX3 given on page 11-8
Padlockable handle
Sealable cover
Tightening torque for cover screws:
GAZ016-GAZ040 types: 1.3Nm/16lbin
All other types: 1.5Nm/13lbin
IEC/EN degree of protection: IP65
Cable entry:
GAZ016-GAZ040 types: PG16/M25 and PG13.5/M20
knockouts
GAZ063SA-GAZ100 types: PG29/M32 and
PG16/M25 knockouts
GAZ125 types: Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by
customer.
Compliant with standards: IEC7EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-3.
11-12
Dimensions
page 11-28
Wiring diagrams
page 11-50
page 11-53
Enclosed switch disconnectors
UL/CSA Type 4/4X
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Components
Enclosure
Switch
disconnector
Handle
THREE POLE.
GAZ016...GAZ040...UL
GAZ016 UL
16
0.450
GAZ1 UL
GA016 A
GAX61
GAZ025 UL
25
0.450
GAZ1 UL
GA025 A
GAX61
GAZ032 UL
32
0.450
GAZ1 UL
GA032 A
GAX61
GAZ040 UL
40
0.450
GAZ1 UL
GA040 A
GAX61
GAZ063 SA UL
63
0.870
GAZ2 UL
GA063 SA
GAX61
GAZ063 CUL
63
1.220
GAZ2 UL
GA063 A
GAX61
GAZ080 UL
80
2.220
GAZ3 UL
GA080 A
GAX61
GAZ100 UL
100
2.220
GAZ3 UL
GA100 A
GAX61
GAZ125 UL
125
2.220
GAZ3 UL
GA125 A
GAX61
GAZ063 SAB UL
GAZ063 CB UL
GAZ016 BUL
16
0.450
GAZ1 B UL
GA016 A
GAX61 B
GAZ025 BUL
25
0.450
GAZ1 B UL
GA025 A
GAX61 B
GAZ032 BUL
32
0.450
GAZ1 B UL
GA032 A
GAX61 B
GAZ040 BUL
40
0.450
GAZ1 B UL
GA040 A
GAX61 B
GAZ063 SAB UL 63
0.870
GAZ2 B UL
GA063 SA
GAX61 B
GAZ063 CB UL
63
1.220
GAZ2 B UL
GA063 A
GAX61 B
GAZ080 B UL
80
2.220
GAZ3 B UL
GA080 A
GAX61 B
GAZ100 B UL
100
2.220
GAZ3 B UL
GA100 A
GAX61 B
GAZ125 B UL
125
2.220
GAZ3 B UL
GA125 A
GAX61 B
Enclosure
Switch
Fourth
disconnector pole
Handle
FOUR POLE.
GAZ016 T4 UL
16
0.550
GAZ1 UL
GA016 A
GAX42040A
GAX61
GAZ032 T4 UL
32
0.550
GAZ1 UL
GA032 A
GAX42040A
GAX61
GAZ063 CT4 UL 63
1.150
GAZ2 UL
GA063 A
GAX42063A
GAX61
GAZ100 T4 UL
100
2.500
GAZ3 UL
GA100 A
GAX42100A
GAX61
GAZ125 T4 UL
125
2.500
GAZ3 UL
GA125 A
GAX42125A
GAX61
GAZ016 T4B UL 16
0.550
GAZ1 B UL
GA016 A
GAX42040A
GAX61 B
GAZ032 T4B UL 32
0.550
GAZ1 B UL
GA032 A
GAX42040A
GAX61 B
GAZ063 CT4B UL 63
1.150
GAZ2 B UL
GA063 A
GAX42063A
GAX61 B
GAZ100 T4B UL
100
2.500
GAZ3 B UL
GA100 A
GAX42100A
GAX61 B
GAZ125 T4B UL 125
2.500
GAZ3 B UL
GA125 A
GAX42125A
GAX61 B
GAZ100 UL - GAZ125 UL
UL/CSA ratings
Type
1 phase
[HP]
120V
3 phase
[HP]
General
use at
600VAC
Shortcircuit
rating at
600VAC

at 600V
240V
200208V
240V
480V
600V
[A]
[kA]
Type - [A]
RK5 - 20A
GAZ016... 1
10
10
16
GAZ025... 11/2
71/2
71/2
15
20
25
RK5 - 30A
GAZ032... 2
10
10
20
20
32
RK5 - 35A
GAZ040... 2
10
15
20
25
40
RK5 - 45A
GAZ063S... 2
71/2
10
15
30
30
60
RK5 - 45A
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ016 - GAZ063S...UL types, according to UL508 and CSA 22.2 n14.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Manual Motor Controllers while UL designation is GENERAL PURPOSE
SWITCH. INTERRUPTEUR USAGE GENERAL and SUITABLE AS MOTOR DISCONNECT; GAZ063S... pending.
Type
1 phase
[HP]
120V
3 phase
[HP]
240V
200240V
208V
480V
600V
General
use at
600VAC
Shortcircuit
rating at
600VAC
Max fuse
rating
at 600V
[A]
[kA]
[A]
GAZ063C... 3
71/2
20
20
40
40
60
10
100
GAZ080... 3
10
25
25
40
40
100
10
100
GAZ100... 5
10
30
30
50
50
100
10
100
GAZ125... 71/2
10
30
30
60
60
100
10
100
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ063C - GAZ125... types, according to UL98 and CSA C22.2 n4.
For indication and reference purposes only while cCSAus is pending.
Lower ratings in this same UL/CSA category are available on specific request for volume orders.
For information, consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
Voltage value not considered in UL98 / CSA 22.2 n4 standards.
Dimensions
page 11-28
Wiring diagrams
page 11-50
For four-pole types not indicated, separately purchase
corresponding fourth pole GAX42A and install on
enclosed 3-pole UL-suffix version
required:
GAZ016-040UL types: 1 contact block on both the
right and left disconnector side unless 4th pole is
installed
All other types: 2 contact blocks both on the right
and left disconnector side unless 4th pole is installed
Padlockable handle
Sealable cover
GAZ016-040UL: 1.3Nm/16lbin for cover;
1.2Nm/11lbin for plate terminals
Other types: 1.5Nm/13lbin for cover; 1.2Nm/11lbin
for plate terminals
UL/CSA degree of protection: Type 1, 4 and 4X indoor
use only for GAZ016-040UL types; not available for
others / testing pending completion at time of
catalogue printing
Cable entry:
GAZ016-040UL: PG16/M25 and PG13.5/M20
knockouts
GAX063UL: PG29/M32 and PG16/M25 knockouts
GAZ0100-125UL: Smooth surfaces; can be drilled
by customer.
Canada (cULus file E93602), as Manual Motor
Controllers Enclosed for GAZ016-040UL types;
cCSAus pending for all others at time of catalogue printing.
IEC/EN 60947-3; UL508 and CSA C22.2 n14 up to
GAZ063S; UL98 and CSA C22.2 n4 for all others.
page 11-53
11-13
11
Enclosed changeover switches
UL/CSA Type 4/4X
Order code

thermal
current Ith
AC21A
(690V)
IEC rated
operational
current Ie
Qty Wt
per
pkg
AC22A AC23B
(400V) (500V)
[A]
[A]
[A]
[kg]
Components
Enclosure
3-pole switch
disconnector
Interlock
Handle
Three-pole line changeover switches I-0-II.

25
25
25
1.060
GAZ UL
2x GA025A
GAX5000
GAX67 B
GAZ040 ET6
40
40
25
1.060
GAZ UL
2x GA040A
GAX5000
GAX67 B
GAZ063SA ET6 63
45
25
1.070
GAZ UL
2x GA063SA
GAX5000
GAX67 B
GAZ080 ET6
80
80
63
2.950
GAZ3UL
2x GA080A
GAX5001
GAX67 B
GAZ125 ET6
125
125
100
2.950
GAZ3UL
2x GA125A
GAX5001
GAX67 B
Enclosure
Switch
disconnector +
4th pole
Interlock
Handle
Four-pole line changeover switches I-0-II.
GAZ 025 E...GAZ 063SA E...
11
GAZ025 ET6
GAZ025 ET8
25
25
25
1.060
GAZ UL
2x GA025A +
2x GAX42040A
GAX5000
GAX67 B
GAZ040 ET8
40
40
25
1.060
GAZ UL
2x GA040A+
2x GAX42040A
GAX5000
GAX67 B
GAZ063SA ET8 63
45
25
1.070
GAZ UL
2x GA063SA+
GAX5000
2x GAX42063SA
GAX67 B
GAZ080 ET8
80
80
63
2.950
GAZ3UL
2x GA080A+
2x GAX42080A
GAX5001
GAX67 B
GAZ125 ET8
125
125
100
2.950
GAZ3UL
2x GA125A+
2x GAX42125A
GAX5001
GAX67 B

GAZ 080 E...
GAZ 125 E...
UL/CSA ratings
Type
1 phase
[HP]
120V
3 phase
[HP]
240V
200208V
240V
480V
600V
General
use at
600VAC
Shortcircuit
rating at
600VAC

at 600V
[A]
[kA]
Type - [A]
GAZ025... 11/2
71/2
71/2
15
20
25
RK5 - 30A
GAZ040... 2
10
15
20
25
40
RK5 - 45A
GAZ063S... 2
71/2
10
15
30
30
60
RK5 - 45A
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ025-GAZ040ET... types, according to UL508 and CSA 22.2 n14.
For indication and references purposes only while cCSAus is pending.
Type
1 phase
[HP]
120V
3 phase
[HP]
240V
200240V
208V
480V
600V
General
use at
600VAC
Shortcircuit
rating at
600VAC
Max fuse
rating
at 600V
[A]
[kA]
[A]
GA080...
10
25
25
40
40
100
10
100
GA125...
71/2
10
30
30
60
60
100
10
100
For major details, consult Customer Service; see contact details on

inside front cover.
required:
2 contact blocks both on the right and left side for
GAZET6 types
1 contact block both on the right and left side for
GAZET8 types
Complete with neutral and earth/ground plate
terminals
Sealable cover
Padlockable handle, complete with shaft extension
1.5Nm/13lbin for cover
1.2Nm/11lbin for plate terminals
Degree of protection: IEC/EN IP65; UL/CSA Type 1, 4
and 4X indoor use only
Cable entry:
GAZ025-063ET6/8: PG29/M32 and PG16/M25
knockouts
GAZ080-125 ET6/8: Smooth surfaces; can be drilled
by customer.
Certifications pending: EAC, cCSAus.
IEC/EN 60947-3; CSA C22.2 n14 and UL508 up to
GAZ063ET6/8; CSA C22.2 n4 and UL98 for
GAZ100-125 ET6/8
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ080-GAZ125ET... types, according to UL98 and CSA C22.2 N4.
For indication and references purposes only while cCSAus is pending.
Voltage value not considered in UL98 / CSA 22.2 n4 standards so not indicated in UL product marking.
11-14
Dimensions
page 11-29
Wiring diagrams
page 11-50
pages 11-53
Maximum combination
Enclosures
GAX10 11A
GAX10 11A
GAX81
GAX42 063SA
GAX41 063SA
or
GAX11 10EA
GAX81
GAX42 040A
GAX41 040A
GAX42 040D or
GAX11 10EA
GAX83
GAX83
GAZ016...GAZ040
GAZ016 B...GAZ040 B
GAZ1
GAZ1 B
GAZ063 SA
GAZ063 SAB
GAZ2
GAZ2 B
One auxiliary contact block can be fitted on the right and left sides of the
disconnector unless the fourth pole is installed.
The earth and neutral plate terminals are standard supplied on the
enclosure base.
Sealing eyelet
Two auxiliary contacts blocks can be fitted both on the right and left sides of
the disconnector unless the fourth pole is installed.
Earth/ground and neutral plate terminals are standard supplied on the
enclosure base.
11
GAX12 10EA
or
GAX12 10EA
or
GAX34A
GAX10 11A
GAX34A
GAX32A
GAX10 11A
GAX32A
GAX83
GAX41 125A
GAX42 063A...
GAX42 125A
GAX42 080D
GAX42 125D
GAX83
GAX41 125A
GAX42 125A
GAX42 125D
GAX84
GAX84
GAZ063...GAZ100C
GAZ063...GAZ100CB
GAZ2
GAZ2 B
GAZ125
GAZ125 B
GAZ3
GAZ3 B
Two auxiliary contact blocks can be fitted both on the right and left sides of the disconnector unless the fourth pole is installed.
Earth/ground and neutral terminals, GAX... type, if any required, are to be purchased separately for the enclosure except for
GAZ...UL types which have plate terminals standard supplied.
Dimensions
page 11-28
Wiring diagrams
page 11-50
pages 11-53
11-15
Three-pole switch
disconnectors
Order code IEC conventional free air

thermal
current Ith
AC21A
(500V)
IEC rated
operational
current Ie
Qty Wt
per
pkg
AC23A AC23A
(400V) (500V)
Selection of handle and accessories

Types of handle to use per type are given below. Also
refer to pages 11-19 and 11-22 for other accessories.
Direct operating
Door coupling
Black
Black
Red/yellow
GEX65D
GAX66B
GAX66
GEX66ND
GEX66NB
GEX66N
GEX67ND
GEX67NB
GEX67N
GEX68ND
GEX68NB
GEX68N
With NFC fuse holder .

Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension .
Direct operating
Black
Door coupling
Black
Red/yellow
GE0050 F 50
50
50
1.250
GEX61D
GEX61NB
GEX61N
GE0125 F 125
125
125
1.700
With NH fuse holder .

Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension.
Direct operating
Black
Door coupling
Black
Red/yellow
GE0160 N
160
160
125
1.700
GEX61D
GEX61NB
GEX61N
GE0161 N
160
160
160
3.100
GEX62D
GEX66NB
GEX66N
GE0250 N
250
250
250
6.600
GEX63D
GEX67NB
GEX67N
GE0400 N
400
400
400
6.600
GE0630 N
630
630
630
13.000
GEX64D
GEX68NB
GEX68N
GE0800 N
800
630
630
13.000
With BS fuse holder .

Direct operating
Black
Door coupling
Black
Red/yellow
GE0160 B
160
160
160
3.500
GEX62D
GEX66NB
GEX66N
GE0200 B
200
200
200
3.500
GE0250 B
250
250
250
6.600
GE0315 B
315
315
315
6.600
GEX63D
GEX67NB
GEX67N
GE0400 B
400
400
400
6.600
GE0630 B
630
630
630
13.000
GEX64D
GEX68NB
GEX68N
GE0800 B
800
630
630
13.000
[A]
[A]
[A]
[kg]
GE...
11
Three-pole switch
disconnectors with
fuse holder
GE... F - GE...N - GE...B
GE0160 P 160
160
125
0.850
GE0160
160
160
125
0.850
GE0200
200
160
125
0.900
GE0250
250
160
125
0.900
GE0251
250
250
200
1.700
GE0315
315
315
250
1.700
GE0400
400
400
315
1.900
GE0500
500
500
400
4.200
GE0630
630
630
500
4.200
GE0800
800
800
500
4.200
GE1000
1000
800
800
7.600
GE1250
1250
800
800
7.600
GE1600
1600
1000
900
20.800
Refer to the side table for the selection of the handle. A shaft insert is
standard-supplied with all direct operating handles so no other shaft
extension is required in this case.
See table on page 11-22 also for the types of fuses.
The switch disconnector is standard-supplied with fuse protection shield.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection.
IEC 250A Ith; IEC 200A AC21A 500V.
Available versions: direct operating and door coupling
Screw fixing: 35mm DIN rail mount adapter kit for
GE0160 P on p. 11-19
Padlockable at 0 position with no extra accessory.
1000V for GE0160 P, GE0160-GE1600,
GE0250 N/B-GE0800 N/B
800V for GE0050 F, GE0125 F, GE0160 N/B,
GE0161 N, and GE0200 B
Mechanical life:
30,000 cycles for GE0160 P, GE0160-GE0250,
20,000 cycles for GE0251-GE0400
10,000 cycles for GE0500-GE1600, GE0050 F,
GE0125 F, GE0160 N/B-GE0400 N/B
5,000 cycles for GE0630 N/B-GE0800 N/B.
Certificatons obtained: EAC.
IEC/EN 60947-3.
11-16
pages 11-19 to 22
Dimensions
pages 11-30 to 42
Wiring diagrams
page 11-51
pages 11-54 and 56
Four-pole
switch disconnectors
Order code

thermal
current Ith
AC21A
(500V)
IEC rated
operational
current Ie
[A]
[A]
Qty Wt
per
pkg
AC23A AC23A
(400V) (500V)
Selection of handles and accessories

Types of handle to use per type are given below. Also
refer to pages 11-19 and 11-23 for other accessories.
Direct operating
Door coupling
Black
Black
Red/yellow
GEX65D
GAX66B
GAX66
GEX66ND
GEX66NB
GEX66N
GEX67ND
GEX67NB
GEX67N
GEX68ND
GEX68NB
GEX68N
With NFC fuse holder .

Direct actuator
Black
Door coupling
Black
Red/yellow
GE0050 FT4 50
50
50
1.250
GEX61D
GEX61NB
GEX61N
GE0125 FT4 125
125
125
1.700
With NH fuse holder .

Direct actuator
Black
Door coupling
Black
Red/yellow
GE0160 NT4
160
160
125
2.200
GEX61D
GEX61NB
GEX61N
GE0161 NT4
160
160
160
8.000
GEX62D
GEX66NB
GEX66N
GE0250 NT4
250
250
250
8.000
GEX63D
GEX67NB
GEX67N
GE0400 NT4
400
400
400
8.000
GE0630 NT4
630
630
630
15.000
GEX64D
GEX68NB
GEX68N
GE0800 NT4
800
630
630
15.000
With BS fuse holder .

Direct actuator
Black
Door coupling
Black
Red/yellow
GE0160 BT4
160
160
160
4.000
GEX62D
GEX66NB
GEX66N
GE0200 BT4
200
200
200
4.000
GE0250 BT4
250
250
250
4.000
GE0315 BT4
315
315
315
8.000
GEX63D
GEX67NB
GEX67N
GE0400 BT4
400
400
400
8.000
GE0630 BT4
630
630
630
15.000
GEX64D
GEX68NB
GEX68N
GE0800 BT4
800
630
630
15.000
[A]
[kg]
GE...T4...
Four-pole switch
disconnectors with
fuse holder
GE... FT4 - GE...NT4-GE...BT4
GE0160 T4P 160
160
125
1.000
GE0160 T4
160
160
125
1.000
GE0200 T4
200
160
125
1.000
GE0250 T4
250
160
125
1.000
GE0251 T4
250
250
200
1.900
GE0315 T4
315
315
250
1.900
GE0400 T4
400
400
315
2.100
GE0500 T4
500
500
400
4.500
GE0630 T4
630
630
500
4.500
GE0800 T4
800
800
500
4.500
GE1000 T4
1000
800
800
7.600
GE1250 T4
1250
800
800
7.600
GE1600 T4
1600
1000
900
20.800

See table on page 11-23 also for the types of fuses.
The switch disconnector is standard-supplied with fuse protection shield.
11
4-pole types (3P+N) with early-make late-break neutral
pole
GE0160 T4P on p. 11-19
1000V for GE1600 T4P, GE0160 T4-GE1600 T4,
GE0250 NT4/BT4-GE0800 NT4/BT4
800V for GE0050 FT4, GE0125 FT4,
GE0160 NT4/BT4, GE0161 NT, GE0200 BT4
Mechanical life:
30,000 cycles for GE1600 T4P, GE0160 T4GE0250 T4
20,000 cycles for GE0251 T4-GE0400 T4
10,000 cycles for GE0500 T4-GE1600 T4,
GE0050 FT4, GE0125 FT4,
GE0160 NT4/BT4-GE0400 NT4/BT4
5,000 cycles for GE0630 NT4/BT4,
GE0800 NT4/BT4.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3.
pages 11-19 to 23
Dimensions
pages 11-30 to 42
Wiring diagrams
page 11-51
pages 11-54 and 56
11-17
Changeover switches
Three-pole changeover
switches
Order code

thermal
current Ith
AC21A
(500V)
IEC rated
operational
current Ie
AC23B AC23B
(400V) (500V)
[A]
[A]
[A]
Qty Wt
per
pkg
[kg]

Types of handle to use per type are given below.
Also refer to pages 11-19 and 11-21 for other
accessories.
Direct actuator
Door coupling
Black
Black
GEX61E
GEX61NC
GEX62NE
GEX62NC
GEX63NE
GEX63NC
GEX64NE
GEX64NC
GE...E
Four-pole
changeover switches
GE0160 E
160
160
125
1.800
GE0200 E
200
160
125
1.900
GE0201 E
200
160
125
4.800
GE0250 E
250
180
150
4.800
GE0315 E
315
200
160
5.000
GE0400 E
400
250
200
5.000
GE0500 E
500
400
250
11.500
GE0630 E
630
500
315
11.500
GE0800 E
800
630
400
11.900
GE1000 E
1000
1000
800
21.800
GE1250 E
1250
1000
900
23.600
GE1600 E
1600
1000
900
50.000
Order code

thermal
current Ith
AC21A
(500V)
IEC rated
operational
current Ie
AC23B AC23B
(400V) (500V)
[A]
[A]
11
[A]
Qty Wt
per
pkg
[kg]

Also refer to pages 11-19 and 11-21 for other
accessories.
Direct actuator
Door coupling
Black
Black
GEX61E
GEX61NC
GEX62NE
GEX62NC
GEX63NE
GEX63NC
GEX64NE
GEX64NC
GE...ET4
GE0160 ET4 160
160
125
2.100
GE0200 ET4 200
160
125
2.200
GE0201 ET4 200
160
125
5.300
GE0250 ET4 250
180
150
5.300
GE0315 ET4 315
200
160
5,500
GE0400 ET4 400
250
200
5.500
GE0500 ET4 500
400
250
12.600
GE0630 ET4 630
500
315
12.600
GE0800 ET4 800
630
400
13.200
GE1000 ET4 1000
1000
800
24.300
GE1250 ET4 1250
1000
900
26.700
GE1600 ET4 1600
1000
900
55.000
4-pole types (3P+N) with early-make late-break neutral
pole
Screw fixing
Mechanical life: 30,000 cycles for GE0160 E/ET4 and
GE0200 E/ET4 only; 10,000 cycles for other types.
IEC/EN 60947-3.
11-18
pages 11-19 to 21
Dimensions
pages 11-43 to 47
Wiring diagrams
page 11-51
page 11-54 and 57
Auxiliary contacts
Terminal covers
Motorised unit
Order code
Characteristics
Qty Wt
per
pkg
n [kg]
Selection of add-on contacts and accessories

Refer to the combinations given on pages 11-21 to 11-25
for a correct choice based on the switch disconnector
type used.
General characteristics for auxiliary contacts

IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 16A.
Auxiliary contacts.
GEX10 11 1NO/1NC changeover/SPDT
0.032
Auxiliary contacts for switch disconnector types GE0050 F,

GE0050 FT4, GE0125 F, GE0125 FT4, GE0160 N and GE0160 NT4.
GEX10...
GEX10 11N 1NO/1NC changeover/SPDT
0.024
Auxiliary contacts for switch disconnector types GE0160 E,

GE0200 E, GE0160 ET4, GE0200 ET4, GE1600 E and
GE1600 ET4.
GEX10 11M 1NO/1NC changeover/SPDT
0.016
0.040
Adapter kit for 35mm DIN fixing.

GEX89 00
GEX89 00
For GE...P types only
Set of terminal covers consisting of pieces given below.

See tables on pages 11-21 to 11-25 for the selection based
on the switch disconnector type. Screw fixing.
GEX81 01
1-piece set, transparent sheet

covering four poles
0.048
GEX81 11
2-piece set, each covers two poles 1
0.080
GEX81 21
0.140
GEX81 31
0.170
GEX81 41
0.440
GEX82 01
3-piece set, each covers one pole 1
0.090
GEX82 03
0.120
GEX82 11
0.120
GEX82 12
0.120
GEX82 13
0.160
GEX82 21
0.240
GEX82 22
0.240
GEX82 23
0.320
GEX82 31
0.340
GEX82 32
0.340
GEX82 33
0.440
GEX83 11
0.120
GEX83 12
0.160
GEX83 21
0.260
GEX83 22
0.340
GEX83 31
0.360
GEX83 32
0.460
General characteristics for motorised control unit

IEC rated auxiliary supply voltage: 230VAC/DC
4 static outputs, 24VDC 120mA total
4 inputs, contacts powered at 24VDC or 5VDC
(500mA) for changeover control (pulsed or
continuous)
RS485 Modbus serial port for control, monitoring,
programming
Padlockable at 0 position
Programming by position inputs
4-digit display for status-error indications.
IEC/EN 60947-3.
Snap-on fixing.
GEX8...
11
Motorised control unit for changeover switches.

Rated auxiliary supply voltage 230VAC/DC.
Complete with control handle, shaft extension and fixing
elements.
GEX69...
For the correct choice of

auxiliary contacts, terminals covers
and motorised unit for the switch
disconnector, refer to tables on
pages 11-21 to 11-25.
GEX69 1
For GE0201 E-GE0400 E and

GE0201 ET4-GE0400 ET4
3.840
GEX69 2

GE0500 ET4-GE0800 ET4
5.340
GEX69 3

GE1000 ET4-GE1600 ET4
5.753

Suitable for all types except switch disconnectors GE0050 F,

GE0050 FT4, GE0125 F, GE0125 FT4, GE0160 N, GE0160 NT4, GE0160 E,
GE0200 E, GE0160 ET4, GE0200 ET4, GE1600 E and GE1600 ET4.
Changeover contact/SPDT.
Dimensions
pages 11-43 to 49
Wiring diagrams
page 11-51
11-19
Accessories
Order code
Characteristics
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
DIRECT OPERATING LEVER HANDLE, PADLOCKABLE .

Rotating type with screw fixing on switch disconnector.
Complete with shaft insert.
GEX...D-GEX...E
GEX6 2NE
GEX6 1D
95mm/3.7 black
0.340
GEX6 1E
50mm/2 black
0.052
GEX6 2D
105mm/4.1 black
0.268
GEX6 2NE
143mm/5.6 black
0.266
GEX6 3D
145mm/5.7 black
0.536
GEX6 3NE
360mm/14.2 black
0.424
GEX6 4D
360mm/14.2 black
0.612
GEX6 4NE
396mm/15.6 black
0.612
GEX6 5D
50mm/2 black
0.054
GEX6 6ND
115mm/4.5 black
0.216
GEX6 7ND
143mm/5.6 black
0.322
GEX6 8ND
396mm/15.6 black
0.328
DOOR COUPLING LEVER HANDLE, PADLOCKABLE .

Red/yellow rotating type with screw fixing on door.
Shaft extension to order separately.
11
GEX6 6N
Pistrol grip, 65mm/2.6

7mm/0.3. IEC IP66
0.140
GEX6 1N
94mm/3.7 7mm/0.3.
0.326
GEX61N-GEX61NB
GEX61NC
GEX61D
95mm (3.74)
GEX62D
105mm (4.1)
143mm (5.6)
GEX66ND-GEX66NB
GEX66N
GEX62NC-GEX62NE
GEX67N-GEX67NB
GEX67ND
GEX63NC-GEX63NE
0.248
GEX6 7N
143mm/5.6 14mm/0.6.
IEC IP65
0.302
245mm (9.6)
2-hand
GEX63D
GEX6 8N
396mm/15.6 1 4mm/0.6.
IEC IP65
0.312
360mm (14.2)
2-hand
GEX64D
DOOR COUPLING LEVER HANDLE, PADLOCKABLE .

Black rotating type with screw fixing on door.
Shaft extension to order separately.
396mm (15.6)
GAX66 B
Pistrol grip, 65mm/2.6

7mm/0.3. IEC IP66
0.075
GEX6 1NB
94mm/3.7 7mm/0.3.
IEC IP65
0.334
GEX6 1NC
94mm/3.7 7mm/0.3.
IEC IP65
143mm/5.6 10mm/0.4.
IEC IP65
0.074
0.252
GEX6 3NC
176mm/6.9 14mm/0.6.
IEC IP65
0.302
GEX6 4NC
396mm/15.6 14mm/0.6.
IEC IP65
0.488
GEX6 6NB
115mm/4.5 10mm/0.4.
IEC IP65
0.246
GEX6 7NB
143mm/5.6 14mm/0.6.
IEC IP65
396mm/15.6 14mm/0.6.
IEC IP65
0.298
0.310
150mm/5.9in; 7mm/0.3
200mm/7.9in; 7mm/0.3
0.090
GAX7 200A
0.112
GAX7 300A
300mm/11.8in; 7mm/0.3
0.160
GEX7 162N
177mm/6.97; 7mm/0.3
0.056
GEX7 195N
195mm/7.7"; 14mm/0.6
0.248
GAX7 150A
GEX7 227N
227mm/8.9; 10mm/0.4
0.154
GEX7 239N
239mm/9.4; 14mm/0.6
0.310
GEX7 250N
250mm/9.8; 7mm/0.3
0.084
GEX7 345N
345mm/13.6; 14mm/0.6
0.480
GEX7 375N
375mm/14.7; 10mm/0.4
0.274
GEX7 387N
387mm/15.2; 7mm/0.3
0.142
GEX7 536N
536mm/21.1; 10mm/0.4
0.408
GEX7 535N
535mm/21.06; 14mm/0.6
0.784
1
0.930
GEX7 485N 485mm/19.1; 14mm/0.6
See tables on pages 11-21 to 11-25 for the correct choice based on the
switch disconnector type used.
Use with GAX7...A extension types only.
11-20
94mm (3.7)
SHAFT EXTENSION
for door coupling lever handles.
For the correct choice of

handle and shaft extension for the
switch disconnector, refer to
tables on pages 11-21 to 11-25.
GAX66-GAX66B
65mm (2.6)
115mm/4.5 10mm/0.4.
IEC IP65
GEX6 8NB
GEX7...
GEX61E-GEX65D
50mm (2)
GEX6 6N
GEX6 2NC
GAX7...A
Type of handle
176mm (6.9)
GEX6 8N
GEX6 7NB
Handle shape
and length
115mm (4.5)
GAX66
GAX66

Certifications obtained: EAC for all types; cULus to UL98 /
CSA C22.2 n4 for GAX66 and GAX7...A types (see
pages 11-8 and 11-10 for cULus details).
IEC/EN 60947-3.
Dimensions
pages 11-30 to 49
2-hand
GEX64NC-GEX64NE
GEX68N-GEX68NB
GEX68ND
Summary table of combinations - Three and four-pole changeover switches
Type
Order
code
IEC
Conventional
free air
thermal
current Ith
IEC rated
operational
current Ie
AC21A
(500V)
AC23B AC23B Black

(400V) (500V)
Black
Red/Yellow
[A]
[A]
Order
code
Order
code
Order
code
GEX61E
GEX61NC
[A]
Direct
Door-coupling
operating handles
handle
Shaft extension for

door-coupling handles
(the last 3 digits of GEX code indicate
length in mm/in)
Shaft
section
Order
code
Auxiliary
contacts
1NO/1NC
Motorised Terminal covers

control unit for:
Max panel
depth
Line 2
Load
Order
code
Order
code
Order
code
[mm/in]
Order
code
GEX7162N 7mm/
269/10.59
GEX1011M
GEX7250N
342/13.36
GEX8101
GEX1011
GEX691
GEX8212 GEX8211 GEX8311
GEX692
GEX8222 GEX8221 GEX8321
GEX693
GEX8232 GEX8231 GEX8331
[mm/in]
Order
code
Line 1
Changeover switches. Three poles.

GE0160 E
160
160
125
GE0200 E
200
160
125
GE0201 E
200
160
125
GE0250 E
250
180
GE0315 E
315
GE0400 E
400
0.3
GEX7387N
279/10.98
150
GEX7375N
427/16.81
200
160
GEX7536N
250
200
GE0500 E
500
400
250
630
500
315
GE0800 E
800
630
400
GE1000 E
1000
1000
800
GE1250 E
1250
1000
900
GE1600 E
1600
1000
900
GEX63NE GEX63NC
479/18.86
GEX7227N 10mm/
GE0630 E
GEX62NE GEX62NC
0.4
588/23.15
GEX7195N
14mm/
257/10.12
GEX7345N
0.6
407/16.02
GEX7535N
GEX64NE GEX64NC
GEX8101
597/23.50
280/11.02
430/16.93
620/24.41
GEX7239N
14mm/
579/22.79
GEX7485N
0.6
825/32.48
GEX1011M
GEX8141
GEX8141
GEX1011M
GEX8101
GEX8101
GEX1011
GEX691
GEX8213 GEX8213 GEX8312
GEX692
GEX8223 GEX8223 GEX8322
GEX693
GEX8233 GEX8233 GEX8332
Changeover switches. Four poles.

GE0160 ET4 160
160
125
GE0200 ET4 200
160
125
GE0201 ET4 200
200
160
GE0250 ET4 250
200
GEX61E
GEX61NC
GEX7162N 7mm/
269/10.59
GEX7250N
342/13.36
0.3
GEX7387N
279/10.98
160
GEX7375N
427/16.81
GEX7536N
250
200
GE0400 ET4 400
250
200
GE0500 ET4 500
400
315
GE0630 ET4 630
400
315
GE0800 ET4 800
630
400
GE1000 ET4 1000
1000
800
GE1250 ET4 1250
1000
900
GE1600 ET4 1600
1000
900
GEX63NE GEX63NC
479/18.86
GEX7227N 10mm/
GE0315 ET4 315
GEX62NE GEX62NC
0.4
588/23.15
GEX7195N
14mm/
257/10.12
GEX7345N
0.6
407/16.02
GEX7535N
GEX64NE GEX64NC
597/23.50
280/11.02
430/16.93
620/24.41
GEX7239N
14mm/
579/22.79
GEX7485N
0.6
825/32.48
GEX1011M
GEX8141
GEX8141
GEX81 01 terminal cover protects the input of both Line 1 and Line 2.
Dimensions
pages 11-43 to 45
Wiring diagrams
page 11-51
page 11-55
11-21
11
Summary table of combinations - Three-pole switch disconnectors
Three-pole
type
Order
code
IEC
Conventional
free air
thermal
IEC rated
operational
current Ie
Direct
operating
handle
Door-coupling
handles
AC21A
(500V)
AC23A AC23A
(400V) (500V)
Black
Black
Red/Yellow
[A]
[A]
Order
code
Order
code
Order
code
GEX65D
GAX66B GAX66
[A]
Shaft extensions for

length in mm/in)
Shaft
section
Order
code
Auxiliary
contacts
1NO/1NC
(SPDT)
Type of
fuse
Terminal covers
for:
Max panel
depth
[mm/in]
Order
code
GEX1011
[mm/in]
Line
Load
Order
code
Order
code
GEX8101
GEX8101
GEX8111
GEX8111
GEX8121
GEX8121
GEX8131
GEX8131
GEX8141
GEX8141
Switch disconnectors.
11
GE0160 P 160
160
125
GAX7150A 7mm/
214/8.42
GE0160
160
160
125
GAX7200A 0.3
264/10.39
GE0200
200
160
125
GAX7300A
364/14.33
GE0250
250
160
125
GE0251
250
250
200
GE0315
315
315
250
GE0400
400
400
315
GE0500
500
500
400
GE0630
630
630
500
GE0800
800
630
500
GE1000
1000
800
800
GE1250
1250
800
800
GE1600
1600
1000
900
GEX66ND
GEX66NB GEX66N
GEX7227N
10mm/
267/10.51
GEX7375N
0.4
415/16.34
GEX7536N
GEX67ND
GEX67NB GEX67N
576/22.68
GEX7195N
14mm/
251/9.88
GEX7345N
0.6
401/15.79
GEX7535N
GEX68ND
591/23.27
GEX68NB GEX68N
267/10.51
417/16.42
607/23.90
GEX7239N
14mm/
399/15.71
GEX7485N
0.6
645/25.39
Switch disconnectors with NFC fuse holder.

GE0050 F
50
50
50
GE0125 F
125
125
125
GEX61D
GEX61NB GEX61N
GEX7162N
7mm/
192/7.56
GEX7250N
0.3
265/10.43
GEX7387N
GEX1011N
14x51
22x58
402/15.83
Switch disconnectors with NH fuse holder.

GE0160 N
160
160
125
GEX61D
GEX61NB GEX61N
GEX7162N
7mm/
192/7.56
GEX7250N
0.3
265/10.43
GEX7387N
GE0161 N
160
160
160
GEX62D
GEX66NB GEX66N
250
250
250
GE0400 N
400
400
400
GE0630 N
630
630
630
GE0800 N
800
630
630
GEX63D
GEX67NB GEX67N
10mm/
302/11.89
GEX7375N
0.4
450/17.72
GEX8201
GEX8201
GEX1011
GEX8211
GEX8212
GEX8221
GEX8222
GEX8231
GEX8232
A4
GEX8211
GEX8212
GEX8221
GEX8222
GEX8231
GEX8232
611/24.05
GEX7195N
14mm/
271/10.67
GEX7345N
0.6
421/16.57
GEX7535N
GEX64D
00
402/15.83
GEX7227N
GEX7536N
GE0250 N
GEX1011N
611/24.05
GEX68NB GEX68N
285/11.22
435/17.12
625/24.61
Switch disconnectors with BS fuse holder.

GE0160 B
160
160
160
GE0200 B
200
200
200
GE0250 B
250
250
250
GE0315 B
315
315
315
GE0400 B
400
400
400
GE0630 B
630
630
630
GE0800 B
800
630
630
GEX62D
GEX66NB GEX66N
GEX7227N
10mm/
302/11.89
GEX7375N
0.4
450/17.72
GEX7536N
GEX63D
GEX67NB GEX67N
B1-B2
611/24.05
GEX7195N
14mm/
271/10.67
B1-B2-B3
GEX7345N
0.6
421/16.57
B1-B2-B3-B4
GEX7535N
GEX64D
GEX1011
GEX68NB GEX68N
611/24.05
285/11.22
C1-C2
435/17.12
C1-C2-C3
625/24.61

The motorised control unit cannot be installed.

Standard supplied with IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 95mm2. Suitable for mounting on 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail, adapters kit is available on page 11-19.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 35mm2 for GE0050 F and of 95mm2 for GE0125 F.
11-22
Dimensions
pages 11-30 to 42
Wiring diagrams
page 11-51
pages 11-54 and 56
Summary table of combinations - Four-pole switch disconnectors
Four-pole
type
Order
code
IEC
conventional
free air
thermal
IEC rated
operational
current Ie
Direct
operating
handle
Door-coupling
handles
AC21A
(500V)
AC23A AC23A
(400V) (500V)
Black
Black
Red/Yellow
[A]
[A]
Order
code
Order
code
Order
code
GEX65D
GAX66B GAX66
[A]
Shaft extensions for

length in mm/in)
Shaft
section
Order
code
Auxiliary
contacts
1NO/1NC
(SPDT)
Type of
fuse
Max panel
depth
[mm/in]
Order
code
GEX1011
[mm/in]
Terminal covers
for:
Line
Load
Order
code
Order
code
GEX8101
GEX8101
GEX8111
GEX8111
GEX8121
GEX8121
GEX8131
GEX8131
GEX8141
GEX8141
Switch disconnectors.
GE0160 T4P
160
160
125
GAX7150A 7mm/
214/8.42
GE0160 T4
160
160
125
GAX7200A 0.3
264/10.39
GE0200 T4
200
160
125
GAX7300A
364/14.33
GE0250 T4
250
160
125
GE0251 T4
250
250
200
GE0315 T4
315
315
250
GE0400 T4
400
400
315
GE0500 T4
500
500
400
GE0630 T4
630
630
500
GE0800 T4
800
630
500
GE1000 T4
1000
800
800
GE1250 T4
1250
800
800
GE1600 T4
1600
1000
900
GEX66ND
GEX66NB GEX66N
GEX7227N
10mm/
267/10.51
GEX7375N
0.4
415/16.34
GEX7536N
GEX67ND
GEX67NB GEX67N
576/22.68
GEX7195N
14mm/
251/9.88
GEX7345N
0.6
401/15.79
GEX7535N
GEX68ND
591/23.27
GEX68NB GEX68N
267/10.51
417/16.42
607/23.90
GEX7239N
14mm/
399/15.71
GEX7485N
0.6
645/25.39
Switch disconnectors with NFC fuse holder.

GE0050 FT4
50
50
50
GE0125 FT4
125
125
125
GEX61D
GEX61NB GEX61N
GEX7162N
7mm/
192/7.56
GEX7250N
0.3
265/10.43
GEX7387N
GEX1011N
14x51
22x58
402/15.83
Switch disconnectors with NH fuse holder.

GE0160 NT4
160
160
125
GEX61D
GEX61NB GEX61N
GEX7162N
7mm/
192/7.56
GEX7250N
0.3
265/10.43
GEX7227N
10mm/
302/11.89
GEX7375N
0.4
450/17.72
GEX7387N
GE0161 NT4
160
160
160
GEX62D
GEX66NB GEX66N
250
250
250
GE0400 NT4
400
400
400
GE0630 NT4
630
630
630
GE0800 NT4
800
630
630
GEX63D
GEX67NB GEX67N
GEX8203
GEX8203
GEX1011
GEX8213
GEX8213
GEX8223
GEX8223
GEX8233
GEX8233
A4
GEX8213
GEX8213
GEX8223
GEX8223
GEX8233
GEX8233
611/24.05
GEX7195N
14mm/
271/10.67
GEX7345N
0.6
421/16.57
GEX7535N
GEX64D
00
402/15.83
GEX7536N
GE0250 NT4
GEX1011N
611/24.05
GEX68NB GEX68N
285/11.22
435/17.12
625/24.61
Switch disconnectors with BS fuse holder.

GE0160 BT4
160
160
160
GE0200 BT4
200
200
200
GE0250 BT4
250
250
250
GE0315 BT4
315
315
315
GE0400 BT4
400
400
400
GE0630 BT4
630
630
630
GE0800 BT4
800
630
630
GEX62D
GEX66NB GEX66N
GEX7227N
10mm/
302/11.89
GEX7375N
0.4
450/17.72
GEX7536N
GEX63D
GEX67NB GEX67N
GEX68NB GEX68N
B1-B2
611/24.05
GEX7195N
14mm/
271/10.67
B1-B2-B3
GEX7345N
0.6
421/16.57
B1-B2-B3-B4
GEX7535N
GEX64D
GEX1011
611/24.05
285/11.22
C1-C2
435/17.12
C1-C2-C3
625/24.61


Standard supplied with IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 95mm2. Suitable for mounting on 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail, adapter kit is available on page 11-19.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 35mm2 for GE0050 FT4 and of 95mm2 for GE0125 FT4.
Dimensions
pages 11-42 to 30
Wiring diagrams
page 11-51
pages 11-54 and 56
11-23
11
For photovoltaic applications
GA series
Three-pole switch
disconnectors
Order code
IEC
conventional
free air
thermal
current Ith
IEC rated
operational
current Ie
DC21B
Qty Wt
per
pkg
Poles in series
800V 1000V
4p 6p 8p
[A]
GA040 D
[A]
[A]
[A]
[kg]
Direct operating version, complete with black handle.

For door-coupling version, separately purchase the handle
and shaft extension; refer to pages 11-9 and 11-10.
GA080 D
GA125 D
GA040 D
40
15
10
25
0.135
GA080 D
80
18
20
32
0.355
GA125 D
125
20
25
40
0.355
For other operational voltages, refer to technical characteristics on page

11-52 or 11-58.
NOTE: See UL/CSA ratings on page 11-58 and/or on the bottom of page 11-4.
Available versions:
Direct operating
Door coupling version. Use switch disconnector
with direct actuator and separately purchase the
handle and shaft extension for this version.
See pages 11-9 and 11-10.
Screw or 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail fixing
Padlockable in 0 position with no extra accessory.
Mechanical life:
100,000 cycles for GA040 D and GAX42 040 D
30,000 cycles for GA080 D, GAX42 080 D, GA125D
and GAX42 125D.
coupling type
Fourth pole add-on with simultaneous closing operation as

corresponding GA...D switch poles.
Fourth pole add-on
GAX42 040D 40
0.040
GAX42 080D 80
0.110
GAX42 125D 125
0.110
GA040 D + GA040 D
with GAX60 00
for 6 and 8 poles
GA040 D
GA080 D
GA125 D
(GAX64/64B)
( 5mm/0.2)
GAX42...D
GAX7...
(GAX63... only)
UTILISATION IN DC21B CATEGORY
11
IEC operational voltage Ue 600V

4-pole assembly
GA040 D
GAX42 040D
GA080 D /
GA125 D
GAX42 080D /
GAX42 125D
Maximum
Current [A]
Assembly
Products to purchase and

connect together
20
GA040D - 4 poles GA040D + GAX42040D
30
35
GA040D - 6 poles GA040D + GA040D + GAX6000
40
45
50
GAX63/63B
GAX63 2/2B
GAX64/64B
GAX62/62B
GAX61/61B
6-pole assembly
GA080 D /
GA125 D
GA040 D
GAX60 00
GA040 D
GA080 D /
GA125 D
GAX60 01
Maximum
Current [A]
Assembly

connect together
15
18
20
25
35

+ GAX42040D + GAX42040D
40
50

+ GAX42080D + GAX42080D
60

+ GAX42125D + GAX42125D
GA040 D
GAX42 040D
GAX60 00
GAX42 040D
GA080 D /
GA125 D
GAX42 080D /
GAX42 125D
GAX7150A
GAX7200A
GAX7300A
( 7mm/0.3)
GAX66
GAX66 B
10

25

+ GAX42040D + GAX42040D
Strokes of GAD types (switch and add-on pole)
32

+ GAX42080D + GAX42080D
40

+ GAX42125D + GAX42125D
GA080 D /
GA125 D
GAX60 B
20
GA040 D
GA080 D
GA125 D

Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93602) as Manual Motor
Controllers, to UL508/CSA C22.2 n 14 for GA040 D and
GAX42 040D; (cULus - File E328470) as Open Type
Switches to UL98/CSA C22.2 n 4 for GA080 D, GA125 D,
GAX42 080D and GAX42 125D.
UL508, UL98, CSA C22.2.
Maximum
Current [A]
8-pole assembly
GA080 D + GA080 D /
GA125 D + GA125 D
with GAX60 01
for 6 and 8 poles
Assembly

connect together

11-52 or 11-58.
Travel 01 0
GA040 D
Main poles
GAX420 40D
30
60
60
60
55
GA080 D - GA125 D
Main poles
GAX42 080D - GAX42 125D
55
OFF
GAX60 01
GAX42 080D / GAX42 125D
11-24
pages 11-6 to 10
Dimensions
pages 11-30 to 33
Wiring diagrams
page 11-52
90
page 11-54 and 59
ON
For photovoltaic applications
Four-pole switch
disconnectors
Order code

Also refer to pages 11-19 or 20 and at page bottom for
other accessories.
IEC
IEC rated
Qty Wt
per
free air operational current Ie
pkg
thermal DC21B
220V 800V 1000V
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[kg]
Version for photovoltaic applications.

GE0160 DT4
GE...DT4 - GE...DT4P
160
160
70
30
1.000
GE0160 DT4P 160
160
70
30
1.000
GE0125 DT4
125
125
125
100
1.900
GE0250 DT4
250
250
250
200
2.000
GE0315 DT4
315
315
280
250
4.000
GE0630 DT4
630
630
600
500
4.500
GE0800 DT4
800
800
630
630
4.500
GE1250 DT4
1250
1250 1000 850
8.900
Connection of four poles in series.
11-59.
Direct operating
Black
Door coupling
Black
GEX65D
GAX66B
GAX66
GEX66ND
GEX66NB
GEX66N
GEX67ND
GEX67NB
GEX67N
GEX68ND
GEX68NB
GEX68N
Red/yellow
Available versions:
Direct operating
Door coupling. Use switch disconnector with direct
operation and separately purchase the handle and
shaft extension. See page 11-20 and at page bottom.
GE0160 DT4P on p. 11-19
Mechanical life:
30,000 cycles for GE0160 DT4, GE0160 DT4P
20,000 cycles for GE0125 DT4, GE0250 DT4,
GE0315 DT4
10,000 cycles for GE0630 DT4, GE0800 DT4,
GE1250 DT4.
11

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3.
Summary table of combinations

Four-pole
type

Conventional
free air
thermal
current Ith
Rated
operational
current Ie
DC21B
600V
800V
1000V
[A]
[A]
[A]
Order
code
[A]
GE0160 DT4
160
160
70
30
GE0160 DT4P
160
160
70
30
Direct
operating
handle
Door-coupling
handles
Shaft extension for

length in mm/in)
Black
Black
Red/Yellow
Order
code
Order
code
Order
code
GEX65D
GAX66B
GAX66
Shaft
section
Order
code
GE0125 DT4
125
125
125
100
GE0250 DT4
250
250
250
200
GE0315 DT4
315
315
280
250
GE0630 DT4
630
630
600
500
GE0800 DT4
800
800
630
630
GE1250 DT4
1250
1250
1000
850
GEX66ND
GEX67ND
GEX66NB
GEX67NB
GEX66N
GEX67N
GEX68NB
[mm/in]
Order
code
GEX1011
GAX7150A
7mm/
214/8.42
GAX7200A
0.3
236/9.29
Terminal covers
for:
Line
Load
Order
code
Order
code
GEX8101
GEX8101
GEX8111
GEX8111
GEX8121
GEX8121
GEX8131
GEX8131
336/13.22
GEX7227N 10mm/
267/10.51
GEX7375N
415/16.34
0.4
GEX7536N
576/22.68
GEX7195N 14mm/
251/9.88
GEX7345N
401/15.79
0.8
GEX7535N
GEX68ND
Max panel
depth
[mm/in]
GAX7300A
Auxiliary
contacts
1NO/1NC
(SPDT)
GEX68N
591/23.27
267/10.51
417/16.42
607/23.90


Connection of four poles in series.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 95mm2. Suitable for mounting on 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail, adapter kit is available on page 11-19.
pages 11-19 to 20
Dimensions
pages 11-30 to 33
Wiring diagrams
page 11-52
page 11-54 and 59
11-25
GA SERIES - 16A TO 125A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
Direct operating version
GA016 A - GA040 A
GA063 SA
GA040 D
22
(0.87)
70 (2.75)
43.9 (1.73)
45
(1.77)
41.9
(1.65)
94 (3.70)
32.5
(1.28)
45 (1.77)
78 (3.07)
5
(0.20)
70 (2.75)
100 (3.94)
70 (2.75)
43.9 (1.73)
5
(0.20)
74 (2.91)
36
(1.42)
GA063 A - GA125 A
GA080 D - GA125 D
14.2 (0.56)
14.4 (0.57)
38.2
(1.50)
Door mount version

GA016 C - GA040 C
GA063 C - GA125 C
19.9
(0.78)
48.6 (1.91)
20.8
(0.82)
65 (2.56)
78 (3.07)
ADD-ON BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES
70 (2.75)
43.6 (1.72)
48.6 (1.91)
42.6 (1.68)
12
(0.47)
9
(0.35)
78 (3.07)
72.6 (2.86)
5
(0.20)
78 (3.07)
41.6
(1.64)
78 (3.07)
72.6 (2.86)
12
(0.47)
Fourth pole
GAX41 125A
GAX42 063A...GAX42 125A
GAX42 080D...GAX42 125D
Neutral GAX32 A earth/ground GAX34 A terminals
32.5
(1.28)
46.2 (1.82)
43.6 (1.72)
12
(0.47)
Auxiliary contacts
GAX10 11A
GAX12 10EA
23
(0.90)
70 (2.75)
43.9 (1.73)
5
(0.20)
41.6
(1.64)
Fourth pole
GAX41 040A - GAX42 040A
GAX41 063SA - GAX42 063SA
GAX42 040D
Neutral GAX31 A earth/ground GAX33 A terminals
Auxiliary contacts
GAX10 11A
GAX11 10EA
9
(0.35)
For GA063 A-GA125 A, GA080 D, GA125 D
100 (3.94)
For GA016 A-GA040 A, GA063 SA, GA040 D
GAX41 040A, GAX42 040A...

GAX41 063SA, GAX42 063SA,
GAX42 040D, GAX31 A, GAX33 A
GAX11 10EA
GAX10 11A
GAX41 125A, GAX42 063A... GAX42 125A,

GAX42 080D, GAX42 125D,
GAX32 A, GAX34 A
GAX12 10EA
GAX10 11A
Mechanical interlock GAX50 00 and

mechanical coupling system GAX60 00
72 (2.83)
Mechanical interlock GAX50 01 and

mechanical coupling system GAX60 01
89 (3.50)
140 (5.51)
89 (3.50)
27
(1.06)
45
(1.77)
100 (3.94)
45
(1.77)
78 (3.07)
27
(1.06)
GAX50 00 - GAX60 00
GAX50 01 - GAX60 01
GAX10 11C
43 (1.69)
46.2 (1.82)
8.5
(0.33)
78 (3.07)
72.6 (2.86)
12
0.47)
Fourth pole GAX41 125C GAX42 063C...GAX42 125C

Neutral GAX32 C earth/ground GAX34 C terminals
23
(0.90)
48.6 (1.91)
100 (3.94)
46.2 (1.82)
8.5
0.33)
For GA063 C - GA125 C

Auxiliary contacts GAX10 11C
72.6 (2.86)
Fourth pole GAX41 040C GAX42 040C Neutral GAX31 C earth/ground GAX33 C terminals
100 (3.94)
41.6
(1.64)
For GA016 C - GA040 C

Auxiliary contacts GAX10 11C
78 (3.07)
41.6
(1.64)
11
70 (2.75)
44.8 (1.76)
55.5 (2.18)
52.7 (2.07)
100 (3.94)
36
(1.42)
GAX41 040C - GAX42 040C

GAX31 C - GAX33 C
GAX10 11C
GAX41 125C, GAX42 063C, GAX42 125C,

GAX32 C, GAX34 C
11-26
GAX62/62B
36 (1.42)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
23
22
(0.87) (0.90)
48 (1.89)
36 (1.42)
65 (2.56)
16 (0.63)
28...32
(1.10...1.26)
36 (1.42)
65 (2.56)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
35
(1.38)
22
(0.87)
65 (2.56)
61.8 (2.43)
65 (2.56)
28...32
(1.10...1.26)
16 (0.63)
36 (1.42)
48 (1.89)
Rotary handles
GAX61/61B
3 (0.12)
3 (0.12)
GAX63 1B
34.3
(1.35)
3.3 (0.13)
2.5 )
2 .88
(0
35
(1.38)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
3.3 (0.13)
65 (2.56)
37
(1.46)
32.9
(1.29)
65 (2.56)
65 (2.56)
37
(1.46)
32.9
(1.29)
65 (2.56)
35
(1.38)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
24.3
(0.96)
34.3
(1.35)
2.5 )
2 .88
(0
24.3
(0.96)
GAX63/63B
Padlockable at ON (3 padlocks)
per UNI 9490, UNI/EN 12485
GAX63 2/2B
GAX64/64B
35.5
(1.40)
3.3 (0.13)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
35
(1.38)
3.3 (0.13)
2.5 )
2 .88
(0
22
(0.87)
2.5 )
2 .88
(0
24.3
(0.96)
65 (2.56)
20
(0.79)
65 (2.56)
65 (2.56)
65 (2.56)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
35
(1.38)
24.3
(0.96)
5
(0.20)
11
GAX67 B
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
36 (1.42)
2
3 26)
(1.
48 (1.89)
36 (1.42)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
35
(1.38)
65 (2.56)
75 (2.95)
66 (2.60)
48 (1.89)
65 (2.56)
36 (1.42)
46
(1.81)
98 (3.86)
60 (2.36)
22
(0.87)
16 (0.63)
36 (1.42)
48 (1.89)
GAX66/66B
3 (0.12)
4.2 (0.16)
Shaft extensions for door coupling handles

GAX7...
5 (0.20)
65 (2.56)
Extension
5 (0.20)
65 (2.56)
Length
[mm (in)]
GAX7055
GAX7090
65 (2.56)
65 (2.56)
GAX7070
GAX7150
GAX7200
GA016 A...GA040 A
GA063 SA - GA040 D
GAX7...
GAX6...
GAX7...
GAX7300
GAX6...
GA063 A...GA125 A
GA080 D - GA125 D
GAX7400
GAX7500
GAX7... used with GAX50 00, GAX50 01 and GAX60 00
A1
A1
GAX50 00
GAX60 00
GAX50 01
20
(0.90)
GAX7...
GAX6...
GAX7...
20 1
(0.79
0.04)
GAX6001
min. 10
(0.39)
75 (2.95)
Extension
100 (3.94)
75 (2.95)
66
(2.60)
GAX60B
GAX7...A
GAX7...A
GAX66...
GA063A...GA125A
GA080D - GA125D
40
(1.57)
19
(0.75)
GAX7150A
GAX7200A
19
(0.75)
49 (1.93)
A1 [mm (in)] maximum

Used with
Used with
GAX60 00
GAX50 00/GAX50 01
Type of handle
GAX62...
GAX63...
GAX64...
GAX67 B
114 (4.49) 119 (4.68) 133 (5.24)
114 (4.49)
129 (5.08) 134 (5.27) 148 (5.83)
129 (5.08)
149 (5.87) 154 (6.06) 168 (6.61)
149 (5.87)
209 (8.23) 214 (8.42) 228 (8.98)
209 (8.23)
259 (10.20) 264 (10.39) 278 (10.94)
259 (10.20)
359 (14.13) 364 (14.33) 378 (14.88)
359 (14.13)
459 (18.07) 464 (18.27) 468 (18.42)
459 (18.07)
559 (22.01) 564 (22.20) 578 (22.75)
559 (22.01)
20 1
(0.79
0.04)
B1
min. 10
(0.39)
GA063 A...GA125 A
GA080 D - GA125 D
GAX67 B
97
(3.82)
112
4.41)
132
(5.20)
192
(7.56)
242
(9.53)
342
(13.46)
442
(17.40)
542
(21.34)
46 (1.81)
46 (1.81)
5 (0.20)
A [mm (in)] maximum

Type of handle
GAX62... GAX63... GAX64...
97
102
116
(3.82) (4.01) (4.57)
112
117
131
(4.41) ((4.61) (5.16)
132
137
151
(5.20) (5.39) (5.94)
192
197
211
(7.56) (7.75) (8.31)
242
247
261
(9.53) (9.72) (10.27)
342
347
361
(13.46) (13.66) (14.21)
442
447
461
(17.40) (17.60) (18.15)
542
547
561
(21.34) (21.53) (22.09)
GAX7...A used with GAX60 01 and GAX66/66B handle
88 (3.46)
73 (2.87)
98 (3.86)
60 (2.36)
GAX67 B
GA063 A...GA125 A
GA080 D - GA125 D
GAX7...A used with GAX60 B and GAX66/66B
Length
[mm(in)]
GAX61...
GAX7055 55 (2.16) 116 (4.57)
GAX7070 70 (2.75) 131 (5.16)
GAX7090 90 (3.54) 151 (5.94)
GAX7150 150 (5.90) 211 (8.31)
GAX7200 200 (7.87) 261 (10.27)
GAX7300 300 (11.81) 361 (14.21)
GAX7400 400 (15.75) 461 (18.15)
GAX7500 500 (19.68) 561(22.09)
65 (2.56)
100 (3.94)
65 (2.56)
78 (3.07)
23
(0.90)
GA016 A...GA040 A
GA063 SA - GA040 D
Extension
GAX61...
55
99
(2.16) (3.90)
70
114
(2.75) (4.49)
90
134
(3.54) (5.27)
150
194
(5.90) (7.64)
200
244
(7.87) (9.61)
300
344
(11.81) (13.54)
400
444
(15.75) (17.48)
500
544
(19.68) (21.42)
19
(0.75)
GAX66...
GAX7300A
B
B1
Length
with GAX66/66B handle
[mm(in)]
[mm(in)]
[mm(in)]
176
118...229
119...205
(6.93) (4.64...9.01) (4.68...8.07)
226
118...279
119...255
(8.90) (4.64...10.99) (4.68...10.03)
326
118...379
119...355
(12.83) (4.64...14.92) (4.68...13.98)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
11-27
Terminal covers
GAX81 - GAX83
23
(0.90)
GAX84
GAX82
20.7
(0.81)
10 (0.39)
70 (2.75)
GAX84
23
(0.90)
46 (1.81)
8.6 (0.34)
46 (1.81)
70 (2.75)
10
(0.39)
GAX82
37.3
(1.47)
12.7 (0.50)
46 (1.81)
37 (1.46)
12
(0.47)
GAX83
36
(1.42)
10
(0.39)
GAX81
46 (1.81)
26.4
(1.04)
36
(1.42)
GAX82 - GAX84
3.6
(0.14)
9.9 (0.39)
12
(0.47)
GAX83
26.4
(1.04)
GAX81
80.1 (3.15)
Fuse holder
GAX39 1 - GAX39 1UL
75.2 (2.96)
52.5 (2.07)
ENCLOSED SWITCH DISCONNECTORS AND EMPTY ENCLOSURES

GAZ016... - GAZ040... / GAZ016...UL - GAZ040...UL
GAZ1... - GAZ1...UL
GAZ063 S... - GAZ100 C... / GAZ065S...UL - GAZ063C...UL

GAZ2... - GAZ2...UL
121.5 (4.78)
120 (4.72)
97 (3.82)
100 (3.94)
4.5 (0.18)
175 (6.89)
98.5 (3.88)
210 (8.27)
159 (6.26)
167.7 (6.60)
11
23.3
(0.92)
54 (2.12)

153.5 (6.04)
4.5 (0.18)
28
(1.10)
120 (4.72)
PG13.5 / M20
PG16 / M25
knockouts on top
and bottom
52 (2.05)
184 (7.24)
PG16 / M25
PG29 / M32
knockouts on top
and bottom
GAZ125... - GAZ080...UL - GAZ125...UL

GAZ3... - GAZ3...UL
13
(0.51)
220 (8.66)
193 (7.60)
170 (6.69)

6.2 (0.24)
11-28
238 (9.37)
280 (11.02)
178 (7.01)
ENCLOSED CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
GAZ025 ET6...GAZ063 SAET6
GAZ025 ET8...GAZ063 SAET8
184.5 (7.26)
175 (6.89)
4.5 (0.18)
184 (7.24)
210 (8.27)
153.5 (6.04)
28
(1.10)
52 (2.05)
148.5 5.85)
PG16 / M25
PG29 / M32
knockouts on top
and bottom
11
GAZ080 ET6 - GAZ125 ET6

GAZ080 ET8 - GAZ125 ET8
208 (8.19)
172 (6.77)
13
(0.51)
220 (8.66)
280 ((11.02)

6.2 (0.24)
178 (7.01)
238 (9.37)
11-29
GE SERIES - 160A TO 1600A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
Door coupling version with handle GAX66 - GAX66 B
131 (5.16)
Drilling
46 (1.81)
66
(2.60)
36
(1.42)
1.2
2(
.5
(
.5
(
0.1
22.4
(0.88)
85 (3.35)
128 (5.04)
110 (4.33)
84.4 (3.32)
)
8
0.1
78.2 (3.08)
14 (0.55)
64 (2.52)
18 (0.71)
78.2 (3.08)
14 (0.55)
128 (5.04)
110 (4.33)
84.4 (3.32)
53 (2.09)
max. 364 (14.33)

29 (1.14)
77 (3.03)
66 (2.60)
3
(0.12)
GAX7 150A
GAX7 200A
GAX7 300A
7 (0.3)
142 (5.59)
36
(1.42)
GE0160 T4 - GE0160 DT4
75 (2.95)
GE0160
4.2 (0.16)
GAX66...
M8
M8
34
(1.34)
34
(1.34)
34
(1.34)
34
(1.34)
20
(0.79)
Not indicated on GE0160 DT4 type.
Direct operating version with handle

GEX6 5D
With terminal cover and auxiliary contact

184 (7.24)
2
(0.08)
GEX81 01
(line)
3
(0.12)
22.4
(0.88)
102 (4.01)
68 (2.68)
254 (10)
50 (1.97)
85 (3.35)
GEX6 5D
11
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
87 (3.42)
34
(1.34)
GEX10 11
GEX81 01
(load)
(0. 4.5
18
)
(0. 4.5
18
)
122 (4.80)
74 (2.91)
122 (4.80)
74 (2.91)
M8
34
(1.34)
max. 364 (14.33)

77 (3.03)
29 (1.14)
66 (2.60)
GAX7 150A
GAX7 200A
GAX7 300A
7 (0.3)
76 (2.99)
9.5 (0.37)
34
(1.34)
34
(1.34)
19
(0.75)
Not indicated on GE0160 DTP4 type.

GEX6 5D
With auxiliary contact
102 (4.01)
68 (2.68)
N
GEX6 5D
50 (1.97)
GEX10 11
11-30
36
(1.42)
1.2
2(
4.2 (0.16)
GAX66...
M8
34
(1.34)
34
(1.34)
Drilling
46 (1.81)
75 (2.95)
64 (2.52)
18 (0.71)
76 (2.99)
9.5 (0.37)
85 (3.35)
53 (2.09)
18 (0.71)
Door coupling version with handle GAX66 - GAX66 B
140 (5.51)
36
(1.42)
GE0160 T4P - GE0160 DT4P

129 (5.08)
66
(2.60)
GE0160 P
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
26
(1.02)
78.2 (3.08)
26
(1.02)
.
4
.1
(0
154 (6.06)
130 (5.12)
84.4 (3.32)
64 (2.52)
154 (6.06)
130 (5.12)
84.4 (3.32)
53 (2.09)
max. 364 (14.33)

29 (1.14)
77 (3.03)
66 (2.60)
3
22.4 (0.12)
(0.88)
GAX7 150A
GAX7 200A
GAX7 300A
7 (0.3)
142 (5.59)
N
5
.
4
.1
(0
46 (1.81)
36
(1.42)
75 (2.95)
11.8
(0.46)
78.2 (3.08)
Drilling
66
(2.60)
131 (5.16)
Door coupling version

with handle GAX66 - GAX66 B
36
(1.42)
GE0200 T4 - GE0250 T4
85 (3.35)
GE0200 - GE0250
1.2
2(
4.2 (0.16)
GAX66...
M10
M10
42 (1.65)
42 (1.65)
42 (1.65)
Direct operating version with handle GEX6 5D
19
(0.75)
42 (1.65)
1...4
(0.04....0.16)
With terminal cover and auxiliary contact

184 (7.24)
68 (2.68)
GEX81 01
(line)
2
(0.08)
102 (4.01)
3
22.4 (0.12)
(0.88)
87 (3.42)
42 (1.65)
50 (1.97)
85 (3.35)
254 (10)
GEX6 5D
11
GEX10 11
GEX81 01
(load)
GE0251 - GE0315 - GE0400
GE0125 DT4 - GE0250 DT4 - GE0315 DT4

GE0251 T4 - GE0315 T4 - GE0400 T4
217 (8.54)
217 (8.54)
100 (3.94)
100 (3.94)
Door coupling version with handle

GEX66N - GEX66NB
100 (3.94)
25
(0.98)
117 (4.61)
25
(0.98)
117 (4.61)
100 (3.94)
20.2
(0.79)
max. 486 (19.13)
90 (3.54)
4
(0.16)
19
(0.75)
22
(0.
5
.5
5
.5
(0.
22
114 (4.49)
167 (6.57)
143 (5.63)
106 (4.17)
167 (6.57)
143 (5.63)
106 (4.17)
GEX66N
GEX66NB
M1
50 (1.97)
19
(0.75)
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
M1
50 (1.97)
GEX7277N
GEX7375N
GEX7536N
10 (0.4)
27
1...4
(0.04....0.16) (1.06)
45 (1.77)
50 (1.97)
Not indicated on GE... DT4 type.

20mm (0.79) and M8 for GE0125 DT4 type.
GEX66ND
Drilling
With terminal covers and auxiliary contact
GEX81 11
(line)
60 (2.36)
200 (7.87)
5.5
(0.22)
40 (1.57)
GEX10 11
226 (8.90)
106 (4.17)
60 (2.36)
28 (1.10)
115 (4.53)
34 (1.34)
GEX81 11
(load)
11-31
GE0500 - GE0630 - GE0800
GE0500 T4 - GE0630 T4 - GE0800 T4

GE0630 DT4 - GE0800 DT4
275 (10.83)
130 (5.12)
140 (5.51)
275 (10.83)
145 (5.71)
C
130 (5.12)
145 (5.71)
Type
140 (5.51)
GE0500
0
65 (2.56)
6
.5
6
.5
(0
.2
5
)
(0
.2
5
)
B
A
160 (6.30)
B
A
160 (6.30)
M1
0
65 (2.56)
65 (2.56)
25
(0.98)
65 (2.56)
M1

For GE0500 - GE0630 - GE0800 - GE0500 T4 - GE0630 DT4 - GE0630 T4 - GE0800 DT4 - GE0800 T4
Direct operating version with handle GEX67ND
Door coupling version with handle GEX67N - GEX67NB
30
(1.18)
121 (4.76)
5
(0.20)
max 470 (18.50)
Drilling
28 (1.10)
190 (7.48)
40 (1.57)
60 (2.36)
11
42 (1.65)
143 (5.63)
GEX7195N
GEX7345N
GEX7535N
14 (0.6)

GEX8121
(2 pcs/set)
(line)
290 (11.42)
0
GEX10 11
GEX8121
(2 pcs/set)
(load)
11-32
65 (2.56)
200 (7.87)
1...4
(0.04....0.16)
190 220
25
(7.48) (8.66) (0.98)
205 235
30
(8.07) (9.25) (1.18)
GE0800
205 235
30
(8.07) (9.25) (1.18)
GE0500 T4
190 220
25
(7.48) (8.66) (0.98)
GE0630 DT4 205 235
30
(8.07) (9.25) (1.18)
GE0630 T4
205 235
30
(8.07) (9.25) (1.18)
GE0800 DT4 205 235
30
(8.07) (9.25) (1.18)
GE0800 T4
205 235
30
(8.07) (9.25) (1.18)
GE0630
25
(0.98)
65 (2.56)
34 (1.34)
5.5
(0.22)
GE1000 - GE1250
GE1000 T4 - GE1250 T4
GE1250 DT4
325 (12.79)
325 (12.79)
150 (5.90)
150 (5.90)
40
(1.57)
175 (6.89)
40
(1.57)
140 (5.51)
175 (6.89)
140 (5.51)
6
.5
6
.5
(0
.2
5
)
(0
.2
5
)
290 (11.42)
250 (9.84)
190 (7.48)
290 (11.42)
250 (9.84)
190 (7.48)
30
(1.18)
75 (2.95)
75 (2.95)
M1
75 (2.95)
75 (2.95)
30
(1.18)
75 (2.95)

M1
For GE1000 - GE1250 - GE1000 T4 - GE1250 DT4 - GE1250 T4

Direct operating version with handle GEX68ND
11
396 (15.59)

137 (5.39)
8
(0.31)
30
(1.18)
max 470 (18.50)
42 (1.65)
Drilling
5.5
(0.22)
40 (1.57)
190 (7.48)
28 (1.10)
34 (1.34)
GEX7 195
GEX7 345
GEX7 535
14 (0.6)
60 (2.36)
1...4
(0.04....0.16)

GEX8131
(2 pcs/kit)
(line)
75 (2,95)
300 (11.81)
340 (13.38)
0
GEX10 11
GEX8131
(2 pcs/kit)
(load)
11-33
GE1600
GE1600 T4
441 (17.36)
441 (17.36)
209 (8.23)
11 (0
.43)
(0. 16.2
64
)
40
(1.57)
36
(1.42)
100 (3.94)
100 (3.94)

GEX68ND
441 (17.36)
330 (12.99)
381 (15)
330 (12.99)
100 (3.94)
255 (10.04)
255 (10.04)
36
(1.42)
100 (3.94)

GEX68N - GEX68NB
max 483 (19.01)
162 (6.38)
200 (7.87)
50
(1.97)
10
(0.39)
Drilling
28 (1.10)
396 (15.59)
40 (1.57)
240 (9.45)
60
(2.36)
42
(1.65)
60
(2.36)
34 (1.34)
GEX7 239N
GEX7 485N
14 (0.6)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
410 (16.14)
GEX81 31
(2 pcs/kit)
104 (4.09)
(line)
255 (10.04)
472 (18.58)
11
60
(2.36)
40
(1.57)
60
(2.36)
60
(2.36)
11 (0
.43)
232 (9.13)
(0. 14.1
55
)
232 (9.13)
(0. 14.1
55
)
209 (8.23)
GEX10 11
GEX81 31
(2 pcs/kit)
(load)
11-34
5.5
(0.22)
GE SERIES - 50A TO 800A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS WITH FUSE HOLDER
GE0050 FT4 with auxiliary contact
GE0050 F with auxiliary contact

GEX10 11N
GEX10 11N
76 (2.99)
130 (5.12)
124 (4.88)
104 (4.09)
124 (4.88)
31 (1.22) 31 (1.22)
GEX10 11N
5.4 (0.21)
104 (4.09)
5.4 (0.21)
52 (2.05)
31 (1.22) 31 (1.22) 31 (1.22)
114 (4.49)
28
(1.10)
52 (2.05)
121 (4.76)
145 (5.71)
GE0125 F with auxiliary contact

132 (5.20)
5.4 (0.21)
6
(0.24)
GE0125 FT4 with auxiliary contact

169 (6.65)
5.4 (0.21)
GEX10 11N
GEX10 11N
150 (5.90)
145 (5.71)
104 (4.09)
145 (5.71)
104 (4.09)
76 (2.99)
GEX10 11N
11
37
(1.46)
37
(1.46)
37
(1.46)
58 (2.28)
37
(1.46)
37
(1.46)
28
(1.10)
58 (2.28)
6
(0.24)
131 (5.16)
For GE0050 F - GE0050 FT4 - GE125 F - GE125 FT4

Direct operating version with handle GEX61D
49 (1.93)
184 (7.24)
95 (3.74)
GEX6 1D
34
(1.34)
For GE0050 F - GE0050 FT4 - GE125 F - GE125 FT4

Drilling
49 (1.93)
26.5
(1.04)
22.5
(0.88)
28 (1.10)
5.5
(0.22)
45
(1.77)
13
(0.51)
max 402 (15.83)

GEX7162N
GEX7250N
GEX7387N
7 (0.3)
56 (2.20)
GEX61N
GEX61NB
34 (1.34)
84.5 (3.33)
95 (3.74)
27
(1.06)
max 281
(11.06)
34
(1.34)
GEX61N
GEX61NB
11-35
GE0160 N with auxiliary contact
GE0160 NT4 with auxiliary contact
152 (5.98)
5.4 (0.21)
169 (6.65)
5.4 (0.21)
GEX10 11N
GEX10 11N
37
(1.46)
37
(1.46)
170 (6.69)
170 (6.69)
147 (5.79)
104 (4.09)
170 (6.69)
147 (5.79)
104 (4.09)
76 (2.99)
GEX10 11N
37
(1.46)
37
(1.46)
37
(1.46)
58 (2.28)
34
(1.34)
131 (5.16)
58 (2.28)
For GE0160 N - GE0160 NT4

184 (7.24)
GEX10 11N
49 (1.93)
76 (2.99)
GEX10 11N
170 (6.69)
GEX6 1D
95 (3.74)
11
34
(1.34)

Door coupling version with handle GEX6 1 - GEX6 1B
max 402 (15.83)
Drilling
49 (1.93)
26.5
(1.04)
GEX7162N
GEX7250N
GEX7387N
7 (0.3)
22.5
(0.88)
5.5
(0.22)
28 (1.10)
45
(1.77)
GEX61N
GEX61NB
56 (2.20)
GEX61N
GEX61NB
34 (1.34)
27
(1.06)
34
(1.34)
95 (3.74)
Terminal covers GEX82 01 for GE0160 N
Terminal covers GEX82 03 for GE0160 NT4
35
(1.38)
35
(1.38)
GEX82 01
(line)
55 (1.38)
GEX82 03
(line)
GEX82 01
GEX82 03
(line)
299 (11.77)
84.5 (3.33)
GEX82 01
(load)
11-36
max. 271
(10.67)
GEX82 03
(load)
GEX82 01
GEX82 03
(load)
GE0161 N
with terminal covers and auxiliary contact
GE0161 NT4
200 (7.87)
239 (9.41)
117.5 (4.62)
121.5 (4.78)
117.5 (4.62)
GEX10 11
GEX10 11
18
(0.71)
131 (5.16)
150 (5.90)
168 (6.61)
192 (7.56)
131 (5.16)
150 (5.90)
168 (6.61)
192 (7.56)
22
(0.87)
M8
M8
45 (1.77)
88 (3.46)
25
(0.98)
5
(0.2 .5
2)
25
(0.98)
22
(0.87)
42
(1.65)
5
(0.2 .5
2)
82.5 (3.25)
42 (1.65)
45
(1.77)
88 (3.46)
18
(0.71)
45 (1.77)
11


and terminal covers
39
(1.53)
133 (4.13)
3 (0.12)
Drilling
45 (1.77)
5.5
(0.22)
40 (1.57)
28 (1.10)
335 (13.19)
142 (5.59)
81 (3.19)
157 (6.18)
GEX66N
GEX66NB
27
(1.06)
34 (1.34)
GEX7227N
GEX7375N
GEX7536N
10 (0.4)
105 (4.13)
165 (6.50)
60 (2.36)
TYPE
GE0161 N
GE0161 NT4
C (line)
(N of pcs/set)
GEX82 11 (3)
GEX82 13 (4)
max. 446
(17.56)
D (load)
(N of pcs/set)
GEX82 12 (3)
GEX82 13 (4)
11-37
GE0250 N - GE0400 N - GE0315 B - GE0400 B
GE0250 NT4 - GE0400 NT4 - GE0315 BT4 - GE0400 BT4

with terminal covers and auxiliary contacts
274 (10.79)
166 (6.53)
30
(1.18)
161 (6.34)
200 (7.87)
212 (8.34)
242 (9.53)
161 (6.34)
200 (7.87)
212 (8.34)
242 (9.53)
31
(1.22)
10
10
22
(0.87)
65 (2.56)
59 (2.32)
59 (2.32)
115 (4.53)
65
(2.56)
22
(0.87)
65 (2.56)
For GE0250 N - GE0400 N - GE0250 NT4 - GE0400 NT4


and terminal covers
180 (7.09)
51 (2.01)
4 (0.16)
Drilling
194 (7.64)
60
(2.36)
42
(1.65)
28 (1.10)
40 (1.57)
410 (16.14)
175 (6.89)
81 (3.19)
11
GEX10 11
(0.2 7
7)
30
(1.18)
(0.2 7
7)
GEX10 11
115 (4.53)
163 (6.42)
31
(1.22)
329 (12.95)
163 (6.42)
111 (4.37)
GEX67N
GEX67NB
34 (1.34)
1...4
(0.04... 0.16)
245 (9.64)
GEX7195N
GEX7345N
GEX7535N
14 (0.6)
85 (3.35)
TYPE
GE0250 N
GE0250 NT4
GE0400 N
GE0400 NT4
11-38
C (line)
D (load)
(N of pcs/set) (N of pcs/set)
GEX82 21 (3) GEX82 22 (3)
GEX82 23 (4) GEX82 23 (4)
GEX82 21 (3) GEX82 22 (3)
GEX82 23 (4) GEX82 23 (4)
203 (7.99)
max. 408
(16.06)
5.5
(0.22)
GE0630 N
GE0630 NT4
381 (15)
426 (16.77)
211 (8.31)
215 (8.46)
212 (8.34)
222 (8.74)
227 (10.90)
317 (12.48)
30
(1.18)
M1
2
212 (8.34)
222 (8.74)
227 (10.90)
317 (12.48)
M1
2
40
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
D
85
(3.35)
85 (3.35)
163 (6.42)
73
(2.87)
73
(2.87)
GE0800 N
30
(1.18)
85 (3.35)
163 (6.42)
GE0800 NT4
381 (15)
426 (16.77)
215 (8.46)
10 (0.39)
30 (1.18)
GEX10 11
30
(1.18)
50
10
10
(0.39) (1.97)
(0.39)
11
215 (8.46)
211 (8.31)
GEX10 11
30
(1.18)
50
10
(0.39) (1.97)
212 (8.34)
222 (8.74)
322 (12.68)
342 (13.46)
10
(0.39)
317(12.48)
277 (10.90)
40 (1.57)
163 (6.42)
85 (3.35)
73
(2.87)
73
(2.87)
For GE0630 N - GE0630 NT4 - GE0800 N - GE0800 NT4

30
(1.18)
85
(3.35)
30
(1.18)
30
(1.18)
M8
M8
30
(1.18)
10
(0.39)
212 (8.34)
222 (8.74)
322 (12.68)
342 (13.46)
40
(1.57)
9
(0.35)
9
(0.35)
10
(0.39)
10 (0.39)
30 (1.18)
166 (6.53)
(0.
35
)
GEX10 11
(0.
35
)
GEX10 11
215 (8.46)
166 (6.53)
85 (3.35)
163 (6.42)
Door coupling handle GEX68N - GEX68NB

and terminal covers
56
(2.20)
248 (9.76)
6
(0.24)
214 (8.42)
Drilling
60
(2.36)
28 (1.10)
5.5
(0.22)
360 (14.17)
40 (1.57)
512 (20.16)
232 (9.13)
81
(3.19)
42
(1.65)
GEX68N
GEX68NB
1...4
(0.04... 0.16)
TYPE
GE0630 N - GE0630 B
GE0630 NT4 - GE0630 BT4
GE0800 N - GE0800 B
GE0800 NT4 - GE0800 BT4
C (line)
(N of pcs/set)
GEX82 31 (3)
GEX82 33 (4)
GEX82 31 (3)
GEX82 33 (4)
D (load)
(N of pcs/set)
GEX82 32 (3)
GEX82 33 (4)
GEX82 32 (3)
GEX82 33 (4)
90 (3.54)
222 (8.74)
34 (1.34)
GEX7195N
GEX7345N
GEX7535N
14 (0.6)
max 403
(15.89)
11-39
GE0160 B - GE0200 B - GE0250 B
GE0160 BT4 - GE0200 BT4 - GE0250 BT4

117.5 (4.62)
117.5 (4.62)
GEX10 11
)
25
(0.98)
,5
18
(0.71)
M8
131 (5.16)
150 (5.90)
168 (6.61)
192 (7.56)
22
(0.87)
131 (5.16)
150 (5.90)
168 (6.61)
192 (7.56)
22
(0.87)
5.5
25
(0.98)
GEX10 11
(0.22
5.5
(0.22
)
M8
18
(0.71)
42
(1.65)
88 (3.46)
11
45
(1.77)
42
(1.65)
42
88 (3.46)
45
(1.77)
45
(1.77)
For GE0160 B - GE0200 B - GE0250 B - GE0160 BT4 - GE0200 BT4 - GE0350 BT4

and terminal covers
39
(1.53)
133 (5.24)
3 (0.12)
Drilling
40 (1.57)
28 (1.10)
335 (13.19)
142 (5.59)
81 (3.19)
157 (6.18)
27
(1.06)
45 (1.77)
GEX7277N
GEX7375N
GEX7536N
10 (0.4)
105 (4.13)
166 (6.63)
60 (2.36)
TYPE
GE0160 B - GE0200 B
GE0160 BT4 - GE0200 BT4
GE0250 B
GE0250 BT4
11-40
200
(7.87)
239
(9.41)
200
(7.87)
239
(9.41)
82.5
(3.25)
121.5
(4.78)
82.5
(3.25)
121.5
(4.78)
C (line)
(N of pcs/set)
GEX82 11 (3)
D (load)
(N of pcs/set)
GEX82 12 (3)
GEX82 13 (4)
GEX82 13 (4)
GEX82 11 (3)
GEX82 12 (3)
GEX82 13 (4)
GEX82 13 (4)
max. 445
(17.52)
34 (1.34)
5.5
(0.22)
163 (6.42)
GEX10 11
22
(0.87)
115 (4.53)
GEX10 11
30
(1.18)
161 (6.34)
200 (7.87)
E
F
161 (6.34)
200 (7.87)
E
F
10
163 (6.42)
31
(1.22)
30
(1.18)
31
(1.22)
7 (0
.27
)
GE0315 BT4 - GE0400 BT4

7 (0
.27
)
GE0315 B - GE0400 B
22
(0.87)
65 (2.56)
59 (2.32)
59 (2.32)
115 (4.53)
65
(2.56)
65 (2.56)
11
For GE0315 B - GE0400 B - GE0315 BT4 - GE0400 BT4


and terminal covers
180 (7.09)
51
(2.01)
194 (7.64)
Drilling
60 (2.36)
42
(1.65)
5.5
(0.22)
40 (1.57)
410 (16.14)
175 (6.89)
81 (3.19)
28 (1.10)
GEX67N
GEX67NB
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
34 (1.34)
245 (9.64)
GEX7195N
GEX7345N
GEX7535N
14 (0.6)
202 (7.95)
85 (3.35)
TYPE
GE0315 B
GE0315 BT4
GE0400 B
GE0400 BT4
274
(10.79)
329
(12.95)
274
(10.79)
329
(12.95)
111
(4.37)
166
(6.53)
111
(4.37)
166
(6.53)
C (line)
(N of pcs/set)
GEX82 21 (3)
D (load)
(N of pcs/set)
GEX82 22 (3)
GEX82 23 (4)
GEX82 23 (4)
GEX82 21 (3)
GEX82 22 (3)
GEX82 23 (4)
GEX82 23 (4)
212
(8.35)
212
(8.35)
216
(8.50)
216
(8.50)
242
(9.53)
242
(9.53)
246
(9.68)
246
(9.68)
4
(0.16)
4
(0.16)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
max. 409
(16.1)
11-41
GE0630 B
GE0630 BT4
381 (15)
426 (16.77)
215 (8.64)
211 (8.31)
30
(1.18)
163 (6.42)
85 (3.35)
73
(2.87)
73
(2.87)
GE0800 B
85 (3.35)
GE0800 BT4
426 (16.77)
211 (8.31)
215 (8.64)
30
(1.18)
50
10
(0.39) (1.97)
163 (6.42)
212 (8.35)
222 (8.74)
322 (12.68)
342 (13.46)
85 (3.35)
73
(2.87)
73
(2.87)
For GE0630 B - GE0630 BT4 - GE0800 B - GE0800 BT4

30
(1.18)
163 (6.42)
85
(3.35)
30 (1.18)
40
(1.57)
M8
30 (1.18)
M8
30
(1.18)
10 (0.39)
212 (8.35)
222 (8.74)
322 (12.68)
342 (13.46)
(0.3 9
5)
10
(0.39)
(0.3 9
5)
40
(1.57)
10 (0.39)
30 (1.18)
10 (0.39)
30 (1.18)
10
50
(0.39) (1.97)
10
(0.39)
215 (8.64)
GEX10 11
GEX10 11
30
(1.18)
10 (0.39)
166 (6.53)
30
(1.18)
163 (6.42)
85
(3.35)
381 (15)
11
212 (8.35)
222 (8.74)
277 (10.90)
317 (12.48)
212 (8.35)
222 (8.74)
277 (10.90)
317 (12.48)
M1
2
40
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
(0.3
(0.3
5 )
GEX10 11
5 )
GEX10 11
215 (8.64)
M1
2
166 (6.53)
85 (3.35)
Door coupling handle GEX68N - GEX68NB

and terminal covers
56
(2.20)
248 (9.76)
6 (0.24)
42
(1.65) GEX68N
GEX68NB
60
(2.36)
360 (14.17)
1...4
(0.04... 0.16)
TYPE
GE0630 B - GE0800 B
GE0630 BT4 - GE0800 BT4
C (line)
(N of pcs/set)
GEX82 31 (3)
GEX82 33 (4)
D (load)
(N of pcs/set)
GEX82 32 (3)
GEX82 33 (4)
90 (3.54)
11-42
28
(1.10)
40
(1.57)
512 (20.16)
232 (9.13)
81
(3.19)
214 (8.42)
Drilling
222 (8.74)
GEX7195N
GEX7345N
GEX7535N
14 (0.6)
max. 403
(15.89)
34
(1.34)
5.5
(0.22)
GE SERIES - 160A TO 1600A CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
GE0160 E
GE0160 ET4
181 (7.12)
91 (3.58)
14 (0.55)
128 (5.04)
110 (4.33)
84.4 (3.32)
128 (5.04)
110 (4.33)
84.4 (3.32)
192 (7.56)
91 (3.58)
14 (0.55)
64 (2.52)
M8
18
(0.71)
M8
53 (2.09)
18
(0.71)
.5
34
(1.34)
.5
(0
.1
34
(1.34)
34
(1.34)
34
(1.34)
(0
.1
34
(1.34)
Direct operating version with handle GEX61E and auxiliary contacts

83 (3.27)
171 (6.73)
GEX10 11M
11
Door coupling version with handle GEX61NC
43.6 (1.72)
145.6 (5.73)
135 (5.31)
3
(0.12)
max. 333
(13.11)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
60 (2.36)
Drilling
42
(1.65)
5.5
(0.22)
40 (1.57)
94 (3.70)
28 (1.10)
34 (1.34)
44.8 (1.76)
3
(0.12)
GEX7162N
GEX7250N
GEX7387N
7 (0.3)
GEX61NC
Terminal covers
3
(0.12)
184 (7.24)
249 (9.80)
GEX81 01
(line 1 and line 2)
GEX81 01
(load)
11-43
GE0200 E
GE0200 ET4
181 (7.12)
91 (3.58)
26
(1.02)
11.8
(0.46)
193 (7.60)
91 (3.58)
65 (2.56)
26
(1.02)
154 (1.65)
130 (5.12)
84.4 (3.32)
14
(0.55)
154 (1.65)
130 (5.12)
84.4 (3.32)
53 (2.09)
14
(0.55)
.5
.5
(0
.1
42
(1.65)
10
42
(1.65)
42
(1.65)
42
(1.65)
42
(1.65)
Direct operating version with handle GEX61E and auxiliary contacts

83 (3.27)
171 (6.73)
GEX10 11M
11
43.6 (1.72)
145.6 (5.73)
135 (5.31)
3
(0.12)
max. 333
(13.11)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
Drilling
60 (2.36)
42
(1.65)
5.5
(0.22)
94 (3.70)
40 (1.57)
28 (1.10)
34 (1.34)
44.8 (1.76)
3
(0.12)
GEX7162N
GEX7250N
GEX7387N
7 (0.3)
GEX61NC
Terminal covers
3
(0.12)
184 (7.24)
249 (9.80)
GEX81 01
(line 1 and line 2)
GEX81 01
(load)
11-44
(0
.1
8
10
GE0201 E - GE0250 E - GE0315 E - GE0400 E GE0500 E - GE0630 E - GE0800 E
GE0201 ET4 - GE0250 ET4 - GE0315 ET4 - GE0400 ET4 GE0500 ET4 - GE0630 ET4 - GE0800 ET4
A
C
GEX10 11
GEX10 11
Y/Z
F
G
H
II
II
F
G
H
Y/Z
GEX10 11
GEX10 11
11
For GE0201 E - GE0250 E - GE0315 E - GE0400 E - GE0201 ET4 - GE0250 ET4 - GE0315 ET4 - GE0400 ET4
GE0500 E - GE0630 E - GE0800 E - GE0500 ET4 - GE0630 ET4 - GE0800 ET4

N
P
O
Drilling
42
(1.65)
28
(1.10)
5.5
(0.22)
L
M
40 (1.57)
60
(2.36)
GEX62NC for GE0201 E...GE0400 E...

GEX63NC for GE0500 E...GE0800 E...
34 (1.34)
60 (2.36)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
X
Q
TYPE
GE0201 E
GE0250 E
GE0315 E
GE0400 E
GE0201 ET4
GE0250 ET4
GE0315 ET4
GE0400 ET4
GE0500 E
GE0630 E
GE0800 E
GE0500 ET4
GE0630 ET4
GE0800 ET4
R
Max
235 119.5 115.5 25 5.5 157 192 216 45 88 357 170 42

3
67 151 437 143 M10 133 142
(9.25) (4.70) (4.55) (0.98) (0.22) (6.18) (7.56) (8.50) (1.77) (3.46) (14.05) (6.69) (1.65) (0.12) (2.64) (5.94) (17.2) (5.63)
(5.24) (5.59)
321 162 159 40

7 232 282 312 65 121 482 247 46
5
87 180 417 176 M12 186 171
(12.63) (6.38) (6.26) (1.57) (0.27) (9.13) (11.10) (12.28) (2.56) (4.73) (18.98) (9.72) (1.81) (0.20) (3.42) (7.09) (16.42) (6.93) M12 (7.32) (6.73)
Shaft
extension
W
GEX7227N
GEX7375N
GEX7536N
10 (0.6)
GEX7195N
GEX7345N
GEX7535N
10 (0.6)
X (line 1)
Terminal covers
(N of pcs/set)
Y (line 2)
Z (load)
GEX82 12 (3)
GEX82 11 (3)
GEX83 12 (3)
GEX82 13 (4)
GEX82 13 (4)
GEX83 12 (4)
GEX82 22 (3)
GEX82 21 (3)
GEX83 21 (3)
GEX82 23 (4)
GEX82 23 (4)
GEX83 22 (4)
11-45
GE1000 E - GE1250 E
GE1000 ET4 - GE1250 ET4

A
C
GEX10 11
GEX10 11
Y/Z
F
G
H
II
II
GEX10 11
GEX10 11
For GE1000 E - GE1250 E - GE1000 ET4 - GE1250 ET4

Direct operating version with handle GEX64NE
Direct operating version with handle GEX64NC

N
P
O
42
(1.65)
Drilling
5.5
(0.22)
28
(1.10)
L
M
40 (1.57)
60
(2.36)
11
F
G
H
Y/Z
396 (15,59)
34 (1.34)
60 (2.36)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
X
Q
TYPE
GE1000 E
GE1250 E
GE1000 ET4
GE1250 ET4
11-46
R
Max
424 210 214 50

9 295 375 419 85 163 595 315 57
6
88 208 412 360 M14 248 199
(12.69) (2.68) (8.43) (1.97) (0.35) (11.61) (14.63) (16.5) (3.35) (6.42) (23.43) (12.4) (2.24) (0.24) (3.46) (8.19) (16.22) (14.17)
(9.76) (7.83)
Shaft
extension
W
GEX7195N
GEX7345N
GEX7535N
14 (0.6)
X (line 1)
Terminal covers
(N of pcs/set)
Y (line 2)
Z (load)
GEX82 32 (3)
GEX82 31 (3)
GEX83 31 (3)
GEX82 33 (4)
GEX82 33 (4)
GEX83 32 (4)
GE1600 ET4
250 (9.84)
200 (7.87)
330 (12.99)
381 (15)
330 (12.99)
255 (10.04)
441 (17.36)
40
(2.75)
(0. 16.2
64
)
60
(2.36)
N
(0. 13
51
)
(0. 13
51
)
330 (12.99)
40
(2.75)
60
(2.36)
250 (9.84)
209 (8.23)
60
(2.36)
(0. 14.1
55
)
200 (7.87)
(0. 14.1
55
)
209 (8.23)
36
(1.42)
100 (3.94)
441 (17.36)
GE1600 E
36
(1.42)
100 (3.94)
100 (3.94)
100 (3.94)
551 (21.69)
100 (3.94)
551 (21.69)
Direct operating version with handle GEX64NE
200 (7.87)
100 (3.94)
10
(0.39)
max. 484
(19.05)
Drilling
28
(1.10)
5.5
(0.22)
40 (1.57)
310 (12.20)
350 (13.78)
42
(1.65)
34 (1.34)
60
(2.36)
1...4
(0.04...0.16)
396 (15.59)
120 (4.72)
10 (0.39)
342 (13.46)
Auxiliary contacts
GEX7239N
GEX7485N
14 (0.6)
GEX10 11M
GEX81 41
(line 1 - 2 pcs/set)
472 (18.58)
Terminal covers
GEX81 41
(load - 2 pcs/set)
11-47
11
21.7 (0.85)
16
(0.63)
39.7 (1.56)
GEX10 11N
24
(0.94)
GE SERIES - ADD-ON BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES

Auxiliary contacts
GEX10 11 - GEX10 11M
10.3
(0.40)
48.5 (1.91)
25.2
(0.99)
16
(0.63)
21.7 (0.85)
35mm DIN rail adapter kit GEX89 00

For GE0160 P
93.9 (3.70)
86.5 (3.40)
For GE0160 T4P - GE0160 DT4P
12.5
(0.49)

GEX69 1 - GEX69 2 - GEX69 3
112 (4.41)
11
98 (3.86)
10
(0.39)
.5
(0
.2
2
)
16 (0.63)
57.5 (2.26)
C
E
Type
GEX69 1
52.5 (2.07)
133 (5.24)
117 (4.61)
150 (5.90)
150 (5.90)
237 (9.33)
380 (14.96)
245 (9.64)
GEX69 2
88.5 (3.48)
167 (6.57)
153 (6.02)
184 (7.24)
172 (6.77)
312 (12.28)
455 (17.91)
360 (14.17)
GEX69 3
88.5 (3.48)
167 (6.57)
153 (6.02)
184 (7.24)
172 (6.77)
312 (12.28)
455 (17.91)
360 (14.17)
11-48
GEX69 1 for GE0201 E - GE0201 ET4 - GE0250 E - GE0250 ET4 - GE0315 E - GE0315 ET4 - GE0400 E - GE0400 ET4
GEX69 2 for GE0500 E - GE0500 ET4 - GE0630 E - GE0630 ET4 - GE0800 E - GE0800 ET4
GEX69 3 for GE1000 E - GE1000 ET4 - GE1250 E - GE1250 ET4
H
J
Type
GEX69 1
245 (9.64)
310 (12.20)
235 (9.25)
383 (15.08)
L
254 (10)
GEX69 2
360 (14.17)
339 (13.35)
321 (12.64)
468 (18.42)
283 (11.14)
GEX69 3
360 (14.17)
367 (14.45)
424 (16.69)
522 (20.55)
311 (12.24)
GEX69 3 mounted on GE1600 E - GE1600 ET4
532 (20.94)
11
447 (17.60)
459 (18.07)
503 (19.80)
552 (21.73)
360 (14.17)
11-49
Wiring diagrams
GA SERIES - 16A TO 125A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
LINE
L2
L3
Line
7 L4
Line
7 L4
8 T4
L1
Fourth pole add on

GAX41...
GAX42...
8 T4
Three-pole disconnectors
GA016... - GA125A/C
GAZ016... - GAZ125/B
GAZ016UL... - GAZ125UL
Four-pole disconnectors
GAZ160 T4... - GAZ125 T4
GAZ016 T4UL... - GAZ125 T4UL
L4 (N)
LINE
L2
L1
L3
T3
T4(N)
7 L4
T2
LOAD
7 L4
T1
8 T4
Load
8 T4
Load
T1
T2
LOAD
T3
57
13
21
68
14
22
Neutral terminal
GAX31... - GAX32...
Earth terminal
GAX33... - GAX34...
PE
GAX11... - GAX12...
67
58
11
ENCLOSED CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
Three-pole GAZ...ET6
L1
T1
LINE 1
L2
L3
T2
T3
LOAD
11-50
L1
T1
Four-pole GAZ...ET8
LINE 2
L2
L3
T2
T3
LOAD
Fuse holder
GAX39 1
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
PE
Auxiliary contacts
GAX10...
L4
T4
LINE 1
L2
L1
T1
T2
LOAD
L3
L1
T3
T1
LINE 2
L3
L2
T2
T3
LOAD
L4
T4
Wiring diagrams
GE SERIES - 50A TO 1600A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
Three-pole disconnectors
GE0160 - GE1600
GE0160 P
L1
T1
LINE
L2
T2
LOAD
Three-pole disconnectors with fuse holders

GE0050 F - GE0125 F
GE0160 N - GE0800 N
GE0160 B - GE0800 B
L3
L1
T3
T1
LINE
L2
T2
LOAD
Four-pole disconnectors
GE0160 T4 - GE1600 T4
GE0160 T4P
L3
L4 (N)
T3
T4(N)
LINE
L2
L1
T1
T2
LOAD
Four-pole disconnectors with fuse holders

GE0050 FT4 - GE0125 FT4
GE0160 NT4 - GE0800 NT4
GE0160 BT4 - GE0800 BT4
L3
L4 (N)
T3
T4(N)
LINE
L2
L1
T1
T2
LOAD
L3
T3
160A TO 1600A CHANGEOVER SWITCHES

Three-pole switches
GE0160 E - GE0200 E
LINE 1
L2
L3
L1
LINE 2
L2
L3
L1
T1
T1
T2
T3
LOAD
Four-pole switches
GE0160 ET4 - GE0200 ET4
GE0201 E - GE1600 E
LINE 1
L2
L1
L3
T1
T3
LOAD
L4
T4
T2
T3
LOAD
T2
LINE 2
LINE 1
L2
L1
T1
T2
LOAD
GE0201 ET4 - GE1600 ET4
L3
L1
T3
T1
LINE 2
L3
L2
T2
T3
LOAD
L4
L4 (N)
LINE 1
L2
L1
L3
LOAD
T4
T4(N)
T1
T2
LINE 2
T3
11

Auxiliary contacts
GEX10 11 - GEX10 11M - GEX10 11N

GEX69 1 - GEX69 2 - GEX69 3
L
N
230VAC/DC
B A
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IN
Signals
Error
0
1
2
RS485
+24VDC
+5VDC
Closing pes. II
Closing pes. I
Open all poles
1 2
11 12 13 14 15
OUT
11-51
Wiring diagrams
GA SERIES - with GA...D types
One-line control
2 poles in series
LINE
3 poles in series
LINE
L1
LINE
L2
L1
L2
4 poles in series
L3
L2
L1
L3
L4
The positive pole of the load is connected to the fourth pole of the
switch disconnector on the right.

If it is to be connected on the left, wiring needs to change accordingly.
T1
T1
T2
LOAD
T2
T3
T1
T2
LOAD
T4
LOAD
6 poles in series
8 poles in series
LINE
LINE
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
L4
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
L4
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T4
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T4
LOAD
Two-line control
2+2 poles in series
11
T3
LINE
L1
T1
LOAD
LINE
L2
L3
T2
T3
LOAD
+
L4
T4
The positive pole of the load is connected to the fourth pole of the
switch disconnector on the right.

If it is to be connected on the left, wiring needs to change accordingly.
GE SERIES - with GE...DT4 and GE0160 DT4P types

One-line control
4 poles in series
4 (2+2) poles in series
LINE
+
L1
L2
T1
T2
11-52
LINE
L3
L4
L1
T3
T4
T1
LOAD
L2
L3
L4
T2
T3
T4
LOAD
LOAD
TYPE
3-pole
4th-pole
GA016...
GA025...
GA032...
GA040...
GA063 SA
GA063...
GA080...
GA100...
GA125...
GAX42 040... GAX42 040... GAX42 040... GAX42 040... GAX42 063SA GAX42 063... GAX42 080... GAX42 100... GAX42 125...
CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
IEC conventional free air thernal
current Ith (40C)
16
25
32
40
63
1000
IEC rated impulse withstand

voltage Uimp
kV
63
80
100
125
IEC rated operational current Ie

AC21A
AC22A
AC23A
400V
16
25
32
40
63
63
80
100
125
500V
16
25
32
40
63
63
80
100
125
690V
16
25
32
40
63
63
80
100
125
400V
16
25
32
40
45
63
80
100
125
500V
16
25
32
40
45
63
80
100
125
690V
16
25
32
40
45
63
80
100
125
400V
16
25
32
40
45
63
80
100
125
500V
16
25
25
25
25
63
63
80
100
690V
16
25
25
25
25
47
47
47
47
400V
kW
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
45
55
55
690V
kW
11
22
22
22
22
45
45
45
45
kvar
7.5
10
12.5
15
15
25
30
40
50
IEC rated operational power

AC23A
IEC reactive power for
capacitor control 400V
IEC protection against short-circuit
Rated short-time
withstand current (1s) Icw
A rms
Rated conditional
short-circuit current
kA rms
With fuse class gG
IEC making capacity (AC23A 400V)
800
11
50
16
25
32
IEC breaking capacity (AC23A 400V)
2500
40
400
63
63
80
450
320
360
1000
Mechanical life
cycles
100,000
100,000
30,000
Electrical life (IEC AC21A)
cycles
100,000
100
125
1250
15,000
30,000
UL/CSA general use at 600V
16
25
32
40
50
60
100
100
100
UL/CSA short-circuit rating

at 600V
kA
10
10
10
10
Type/A
RK5/20
RK5/30
RK5/35
RK5/45
RK5/45
/100
/100
/100
/100
UL/CSA fuse class/max rating

at 600V
120V
HP
11/2
71/2
Single phase
240V
HP
71/2
71/2
10
10
10
Three phase
200-208V
HP
71/2
10
10
10
20
25
30
25
240V
HP
71/2
10
15
15
20
30
30
30
480V
HP
10
15
20
20
30
40
40
50
50
600V
HP
10
20
20
25
30
40
40
60
40
UL/CSA HP ratings
Type
B
Terminals
Lug clamp
A mm
5.6 (0.22)
12.4 (0.49)
B mm
6.5 (0.26)
10.4 (0.41)
Screw
M4
M8
Tool
Phillips 2
Metric Allen key 4
Tightening torque
min...max
Nm
1.8...2
5...6
lbin
16...18
45...54
Conductor section min...max

(flexible/stranded)
mm2
0.75...16
4...50
AWG
18...6
12...1
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature
Operating
-25+55
Storage
-40+70
Maximum altitude
Mounting position Normal

Admissible
Fixing
3000
Vertical
Any
By screw or on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
11-53
MOUNTING POSITION
The performances, given in this catalogue, have been established with GE series switch disconnectors mounted on a vertical place with line terminals facing upwards and load
terminals facing downwards.
All GE series switch disconnectors can be mounted as illustrated in the following figures without any derating except for position A.
It is not recommended to mount switch disconnectors with the neutral pole facing downwards.
0
0
Pos. A
II
II
II
II
11
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
Pos. A
MOTORISED CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
Pos. A
Pos. A
Special assembly, consult Customer Service for details; contact details on inside front cover.
11-54
GE series 160A to 1600A - Three and four-pole switch disconnectors
TYPE
3-pole
4-pole

GE0160P
GE0160
GE0200
GE0250
GE0251
GE0315
GE0400
GE0500
GE0630
GE0800
GE1000
GE1250
GE1600
GE0160 T4P
GE0160 T4 GE0200 T4 GE0250 T4 GE0251 T4 GE0315 T4 GE0400 T4 GE0500 T4 GE0630 T4 GE0800 T4 GE1000 T4 GE1250 T4 GE1600 T4
IEC conventional free
air current Ith (40C)

voltage Uimp
kV
160
200
250
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
1000
8
12

AC21A
AC22A
AC23A
400V
160
200
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
500V
160
200
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
690V
160
180
180
200
250
250
500
630
800
1000
1000
1600
400V
160
200
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
500V
160
200
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1000
1250
690V
125
160
160
160
200
200
400
500
500
630
630
1000
400V
160
160
160
250
315
400
500
630
800
800
800
1000
500V
125
125
125
200
250
315
400
500
500
800
800
900
690V
80
80
80
160
160
160
250
315
315
500
500
630
kvar
72
72
72
112
142
180
225
284
284
360
360
450
IEC reactive power for capacitor

control 400V sine = 0.65
AC23A
400V
kW
90
90
90
138
174
220
220
349
443
443
443
554
690V
kW
75
75
75
153
153
153
239
300
300
478
478
600
Protection against short-circuit

IEC rated short-time
kA rms
IEC rated conditional

kA rms
With fuse class gG

12
100
160
200
250
1600
2500
2000
1280
Mechanical life
cycles
30,000
Electrical life (AC23A 400V)
cycles
315
400
500
3150
4000
5000
6300
A mm
A
Tightening torque
800
2520
3200
4000
5000
25
35
72
72
1000
1250
2x800
8000
10000
6400
8000
10,000
1,000
500
Terminal for lugs or bars
18
B mm
Screw
630
20,000
Type
Terminals
16
26
25
25
30
M8
M10
M10
40
60
10
M14
M14
Nm
13
18
24
45
55
lbft
10
13
18
33
40
mm2
95
120
Maximum bar size

(thickness-width)
mm
5-25
5-30
185
240
2x185
2x240
2x300
6-40
2x 5-40
2x 10-50
2x 7-80
7-25
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature
Operating
-25+55
Storage
-40+70
Maximum altitude
Mounting
position
m
Normal
Admissible
Fixing
3000
Vertical
Any
Screw
With protection fuse to limit current peak and let-through energy.

Not suitable with GE0160 P and GE0160 T4P.
GE...P types have IP20 lug clamp/pillar terminals.
4Nm/3lbft only GE...P types.
The four-pole type (3P+N) has early-make late-break neutral pole.
11-55
11
GE series 50A to 800A - Three and four switch disconnectors with fuse holder
TYPE
NFC
3-pole
GE0050 F
GE0125 F
4-pole GE0050 FT4 GE0125 FT4

BS
NH
GE0200 B
GE0250 B
GE0315 B
GE0400 B
GE0630 B
GE0800 B
3-pole
GE0160 B
4-pole
GE0160 BT4
GE0160 N
GE0161 N
GE0200 BT4 GE0250 BT4 GE0315 BT4 GE0400 BT4 GE0630 BT4 GE0800 BT4
3-pole
4-pole
50
125
800
800
800
1000

voltage Uimp
kV
12
GE0160 NT4 GE0161 NT4
GE0250 N
GE0250 NT4
200
250
315
GE0400 N
GE0630 N
GE0800 N
GE0400 NT4 GE0630 NT4 GE0800 NT4
160
160
400
630
800

AC21A
400V
50
125
160
160
200
250
315
400
630
800
500V
50
125
160
160
200
250
315
400
630
800
690V
50
125
160
160
200
250
315
400
630
630
400V
50
125
160
160
200
250
315
400
630
800
500V
50
125
160
160
200
250
315
400
630
800
690V
50
100
125
160
200
250
315
400
630
630
400V
50
125
160
160
200
250
315
400
630
630
500V
50
125
125
160
200
250
315
400
630
630
690V
50
80
100
125
160
200
250
315
400
400
kvar
18
52
60
60
75
115
150
200
250
325

AC23A
400V
kW
25
65
90
90
110
132
185
220
355
355
690V
kW
42
80
90
110
160
250
315
400
630
800
Let-through energy I2t
kA2s
0.076
0.19
0.19
0.478
0.478
1.6
1.6
1.6
4.6
4.6

kA rms
50
50
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
IEC making capacity

(AC23A 400V)
500
1250
1600
2000
2500
3150
4000
6300
IEC breaking capacity

(AC23A 400V)
400
1000
1280
1600
2000
2600
3200
5100
Mechanical life
cycles
10,000
10,000
10,000
cycles
1,500
1,500
1,000
Type
A mm
B mm
Screw
M6
M6
M8
M10
M12
4x M8
Nm
13
24
45
13
lbft
2.2
10
18
33
10
mm2
35
95
95
120
240
2x185
2x240
Maximum bar size

(thickness-width)
mm
3-25
3-25
5-25
6-40
2x 7-50
2x 7-50
AC22A
AC23A
IEC reactive power 400V

for capacitor control
Terminals
11
Tightening torque
20
25
Operating
-25+55
Storage
-40+70
3000
Maximum altitude
Mounting position
Normal
Admissible
Fixing
50kA rms for GE0160 N and GE0160 NT4.

GE...F types have IP20 lug clamp/pillar terminals.
11-56
500
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature
5,000
1,000
Vertical
Any
Screw
30
35
40
50
6
GE series 160A to 1600A - Three and four-pole changeover switches
TYPE
3-pole
GE0160 E
GE0200 E
GE0201 E
GE0250 E
GE0315 E
GE0400 E
GE0500 E
GE0630 E
GE0800 E
GE1000 E
GE1250 E
GE1600 E
4-pole GE0160 ET4 GE0200 ET4 GE0201 ET4 GE0250 ET4 GE0315 ET4 GE0400 ET4 GE0500 ET4 GE0630 ET4 GE0800 ET4 GE1000 ET4 GE1250 ET4 GE1600 ET4
IEC conventional free
air current Ith (40C)
160
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1000

voltage Uimp
kV
12
1000
1250
1600

AC21A
AC22A
AC23B
400V
160
200
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
500V
160
200
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
690V
160
200
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
400V
160
200
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
500V
160
200
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1250
690V
125
160
160
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1000
400V
160
160
160
180
200
250
400
500
630
1000
1000
1000
500V
125
125
125
150
160
200
250
315
400
800
800
900
690V
80
80
80
100
125
160
200
250
315
630
630
630
kvar
72
72
83
104
131
166
208
262
333
415
415
450
IEC reactive power 400V

for capacitor control
AC23A
400V
kW
89
89
100
100
125
125
200
200
315
500
525
550
690V
kW
76
76
69
86
108
138
173
216
272
544
575
600
IEC rated short-time

kA rms

kA rms
100
With fuse class gG

13
25
35
100
160
200
250
1600
1600
3150
2520
315
800
1000
1250
2x800
4000
400
500
6300
630
8000
10000
10000
10000
3200
5040
6400
8000
8000
8000
1280
1280
Mechanical life
cycles
30,000
30,000
10,000
10,000
cycles
1,000
1,000
1,000
500
Type
Terminals
A mm
18
B mm
Screw
M8
M10
Nm
13
24
lbft
10
18
33
mm2
95
120
240
2x240
Maximum bar size

(thickness-width)
mm
4-13
13-18
2x 5-30
2x 6-45
Tightening torque
11
72
26
25
35
40
50
60
10
M12
M14
M14
45
55
40
2x 10-60
2x 7-80
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature
Operating
-25+55
Storage
-40+70
Maximum altitude
Mounting position
m
Normal
Admissible
Fixing
3000
Vertical
Any
Screw
With protection fuse to limit current peak and let-through energy.

Values in IEC DC22B duty.
11-57
GA series for photovoltaic applications
TYPE
Three-pole
GA040 D
GA080 D
GA125 D
4th-pole
GAX42 040 D
GAX42 080 D
GAX42 125 D
40
80
125
1000

voltage Uimp
kV

DC21B
2 poles in series
300V
16
20
25
3 poles in series
48V
40
80
125
110V
35
70
120
220V
32
40
95
500V
12
15
20
400V
35
40
64
440V
32
40
64
500V
32
40
56
600V
20
30
40
700V
15
18
20
750V
15
18
20
800V
15
18
20
1000V
12
15
600V
35
45
50
700V
30
35
40
750V
25
35
40
800V
25
35
40
1000V
10
20
25
4 poles in series
6 poles in series
11
700V
40
60
80
750V
35
50
60
800V
35
50
60
1000V
25
32
40
UL/CSA general use at 600V
40
100
100
UL/CSA short-circuit rating

at 600V
kA
10
10
Type/A
RK5 / 45
/ 100
/ 100
HP
71/2
8 poles in series
UL/CSA fuse class / max rating

at 600V
UL/CSA HP ratings
120V
Single phase
240V
HP
10
10
Three phase 200-208V
HP
10
25
25
240V
HP
15
30
30
480V
HP
20
40
50
600V
HP
25
40
cycles
100,000
Mechanical life
Lug clamp
Type
B
Terminals
40
30,000
A mm
5.6 (0.22)
12.4 (0.49)
B mm
6.5 (0.26)
10.4 (0.41)
Screw
M4
M8
Tool
Phillips 2
Metric Allen key 4
Tightening torque
min...max
Nm
1.8...2
5...6
lbin
16...18
45...54
Conductor section min...max

(flexible/rigid)
mm2
0.75...16
4...50
AWG
18...6
12...1
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature
Operating
-25+55
Storage
-40+70
Maximum altitude
Mounting position
m
Normal
Admissible
Fixing

3000
Vertical
Any
By screw or on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
Using two pieces of 3-pole switch disconnectors mechanically coupled together by GAX60 00 / GAX60 01.
Using two pieces of 3-pole switch disconnectors, each with the fourth-pole add-on, mechanically coupled together by GAX60 00 / GAX60 01.
Voltage value is not considered in standards UL98/CSA C22.2 n 4 so not indicated in UL product marking.
11-58
GE series for photovoltaic applications
TYPE
4-pole
GE0160 DT4P
GE0160 DT4
GE0125 DT4
GE0250 DT4
GE0315 DT4
GE0630 DT4
GE0800 DT4
GE1250 DT4
160
125
250
315
630
800
1250
Conventional free
air thermal current Ith (40C)
Rated impulse withstand

voltage Uimp
kV
Rated operational current Ie

DC21B
12
48V
160
125
250
315
630
800
1250
110V
160
125
250
315
630
800
1250
220V
160
125
250
315
630
800
1250
400V
160
125
250
315
630
800
1250
440V
150
125
250
315
630
750
1250
500V
150
125
250
315
630
700
1250
600V
150
125
250
315
630
700
1250
750V
80
125
250
290
630
650
1050
800V
70
125
250
280
600
630
1000
850V
45
125
240
270
600
630
940
900V
40
125
220
260
600
630
870
1000V
30
100
200
250
600
630
850
cycles
30,000
4 poles in series
Mechanical life
20,000
Type
Terminals
1000
8
10,000
A mm
18
20
25
30
B mm
Screw
M8
M8
Tightening torque
Nm
13
13
lbft
10
10
18
33
Maximum bar size

(thickness-width)
mm
5-25
7-25
2x 5-40
2x 10-50
mm2
95
185
2x240
2x300
M10
18
8
M14
24
13
40
45
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature
Operating
-25+55
Storage
-40+70
Maximum altitude
Mounting
position
m
Normal
Admissible
Fissaggio
3000
Vertical
Any
Screw
4Nm/3lbft only for GE0160 DT4P.

GE0160 DT4P type has lug clamp/pillar terminals, IP20.
Not suitable with GE0160 DT4P.
11-59
11
Page 12-2
Page 12-2
AC FUSE HOLDERS
Version without indicator:
1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N
Version with indicator: 1P
For fuses 10x38, 14x51 and 22x58mm
IEC class gG or aM.
IEC rated current: 32A, 50A, 125A
IEC rated voltage: 690VAC.
AC FUSE HOLDERS CLASS CC FOR

NORTH AMERICAN MARKET
Version without indicator: 1P, 2P, 3P
Version with indicator: 1P
For 10x38mm UL/CSA class CC fuses
IEC rated current: 30A
IEC rated voltage: 600VAC.
Page 12-3
Page 12-3
DC FUSE HOLDERS FOR
PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS
Version without indicator: 1P, 2P
Version with indicator: 1P, 2P
For 10x38mm IEC class gPV fuses
IEC rated current: 32A
IEC rated voltage: 1000VDC
IEC utilisation category: DC20B.
DC FUSES FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC

APPLICATIONS
10x38mm, IEC class gPV
Rated current: 20A
Rated voltage: 1000VDC.
FUSE
12
HOLDERS
Modular size for 10x38, 14x51

and 22x58mm fuses
Finger safe - IEC IP20 degree of
protection against accidental
contact with live parts and with
sealable cover for operators safety
Version with status indicator to
quickly determine if the fuse is still
operative or needs to be replaced
UL and CSA certified versions.
Fuse holders
AC fuse holders.................................................................................................................................................................
DC fuse holders for photovoltaic applications ..................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
12 - 2
12 - 3
Fuses for photovoltaic applications .................................................................................... 12 - 3

Accessories ................................................................................................................. 12 - 3
AND
I SOLATION
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 12 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 12 - 4
Fuse holders
AC fuse holders
Fuse holders UL
Recognized and CSA
certified
Order
code
Pole
arrangement
Status DIN
indicator size
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.066
For 10x38mm fuses.

IEC 32A rated current at 690VAC.
FB01 F 1PL
FB01 F...
FB01 F 1P
1P
12
FB01 F 1PL
1P
YES
12
0.065
FB01 A 1M
1P+N
12
0.062
FB01 F 1N
1P+N
0.134
FB01 F 2P
2P
0.132
FB01 F 3P
3P
0.188
FB01 F 3N
3P+N
0.260
12
0.113
For 14x51mm fuses.

FB02 A 1PL
1P
YES
12
0.114
FB02 A 1N
1P+N
0.237
FB02 A 2P
2P
0.224
FB02 A 3P
3P
0.335
FB02 A 3N
3P+N
0.460
FB01 F...
FB03 A 1P
1P
12
0.167
FB02 A...
FB03 A 1PL
1P
YES
12
0.167
FB03 A...
FB03 A 1N
1P+N
0.354
l Certification obtained.
FB03 A 2P
2P
0.334
FB03 A 3P
3P
0.500
FB03 A 3N
3P+N
0.720
Type
For 22x58mm fuses.

Use with gG/aM class 125A fuses, not dissipating more than 12W power.
FB03 A 1PL
FB03 A...
Fuse holders
NOTE:
For FB01 F type: UL Recognized as Fuseholders - Component.
Current rating: 30A. Voltage rating: 750V max. CSA certified as
Fuseholder Assemblies. Current rating: 30A. Voltage rating: 600V max.
For FB02 A type: UL Recognized as Fuseholders - Component.
Current rating: 50A. Voltage rating: 750V max.
For FB03 A type: UL Recognized as Fuseholders - Component.
Current rating: 100A. Voltage rating: 750V max.
Order
code
Pole
arrangement
Status DIN
indicator size
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
12
0.062
For 10x38mm fuses.

FB01 B...
FB01 B 1PL
Fuse holders
UL Listed and CSA certified
for class CC fuses for North
American market

UL Recognized for
USA and Canada
(cULus - File E343395)
12
1P
CSA certified
(File 252040
class 6255)
FB02 A 1PL
FB02 A...
FB02 A 1P
IEC rated voltage Ue:
690VAC (FB01 A 1M excluded)
400VAC (FB01 A 1M only)
IEC rated current Ie:
FB01 A 1M: 32A
FB01 F: 32A
FB02 A: 50A
FB03 A: 125A
FB01 A 1M: AC22B 400V
FB01 F: AC22B 500V, AC21B 690V
FB02 A: AC22B 500V, AC21B 690V
FB03 A: AC21B 690V
Suitable for IEC fuse class: gG and aM
FB01 B 1P
1P
FB01 B 1PL
1P
YES
12
0.064
FB01 B 1N
1P+N
0.127
FB01 B 2P
2P
0.128
FB01 B 3P
3P
0.185
FB01 B 3N
3P+N
0.247
Order
code
Pole
arrangement
Status DIN
indicator size
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
12
0.070
For 10x38mm fuses.

FB01 G 1P
1P
FB01 G 1PL
1P
YES
12
0.072
FB01 G 2P
2P
0.140
FB01 G 3P
3P
0.210
NOTE: UL Listed and CSA certified as Fuseholders, Cartridge Fuse for

use with Class CC fuses. Interrupting rating 200,000 Amps rms
symmetrical. Voltage rating 600V. Current rating 30A.
UL Recognized: Products having this type of marking

are intended for use as components of complete
IEC/EN 60269-2, IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
UL 4248-1, UL 4248-4, CSA C22.2 n4248.1,
CSA C22.2 n4248.4.
IEC rated voltage Ue: 690VAC
IEC rated current Ie: 32A
IEC utilisation category: AC22B 500V, AC21B 690V
Suitable for IEC fuse class: gG and aM
Reference standards
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60269-1, IEC/EN 60269-2.
IEC rated voltage Ue: 600VAC
IEC utilisation category: AC22B 500V, AC21B 690V
Suitable for UL/CSA fuse class: CC
Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA (UL - File
E343395) and CSA certified for Canada only (File 252040
class 6225).
UL 4248-1, UL 4248-4, CSA C22.2 n4248.1,
CSA C22.2 n4248.4.
FB01 G 1PL
FB01 G...
12-2
Accessories
page 12-3
Dimensions
page 12-4
Wiring diagrams
page 12-4
page 12-5
Fuse holders
DC fuse holders for photovoltaic applications.
Accessories
Fuse holders for photovolatic
applications
UL Listed / CSA certified
Order
code
Pole
arrangement
Status DIN
indicator size
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
For 10x38mm fuses.

IEC 32A rated current at 1000VDC.
FB01 D...
FB01 D 1PL
Fuses for photovoltaic

applications
FB01 D 1P
1P
12
0.064
FB01 D 1PL
1P
YES
12
0.065
FB01 D 2P
2P
0.127
FB01 D 2PL
2P
YES
0.130
NOTE: UL Listed and CSA certified as Photovoltaic fuseholders for use

with Photovoltaic Fuses. Interrupting rating 30,000 DC Amps. Voltage
rating 1000V. Current rating 30A.
Order
code
Rated current
In
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[kg]
Accessories
FBX 00
FBX 01
FBX 03
P1X 90 33
FE01 D 00200
10
0.008
FE01 D 00400
10
0.008
FE01 D 00600
10
0.008
FE01 D 00800
10
0.008
FE01 D 01000
10
10
0.008
FE01 D 01200
12
10
0.008
FE01 D 01600
16
10
0.008
FE01 D 02000
20
10
0.008
Order
code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[kg]
FBX 00
Coupling clip for 10x38,

14x51 and 22x58mm
sizes
100
0.003
FBX 01
Coupling pin for

100
10x38mm size type
FB01 A1M, FB01 B1P and
FB01 B1PL only
0.005
FBX 02
Coupling pin for 14x51

and 22x58mm sizes
0.008
FBX 03
Coupling pin for 10x38mm 1

size types FB01 F, FB01 G,
FB01 D only
FBX 02

Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA (UL - File
E366062) and CSA certified for Canada (file ref. not
available at time of catalogue printing).
UL 4248-1, UL4248-18, CSA C22.2 n 4248-1,
CSA C22.2 n 4248-18.
IEC rated voltage Ue: 1000VDC
IEC rated current Ie: 2-20A
IEC fuse class: gPV.
Reference standards
For 10x38mm fuses.

IEC 30kA breaking capacity at 1000VDC.
FE01 D...
IEC rated voltage Ue: 1000VDC
IEC utilisation category: DC20B 1000VDC
Suitable for IEC fuse class: gPV
100

SUPPLY CONNECTION BUSBARS
Central point of power supply: 100A max
Side point of power supply: 63A max
Pitch: 18mm/0.7
Busbar section: 10mm2
For paralleling connection
Length can be cut in shorter sections.
See technical characteristics under derating factor of FB01 type for
operating conditions.
Fuse holder combinations

FB01...
FBX 00
0.005
For FB01 F, FB01 A1M, FB01 B and FB01 G types, AC duty.
P1X 92 01
P1X 91 33
P1X 90 31
1-phase connection
busbar for 57 modules in
total, 996mm/39.2 long
10
0.240
P1X 90 33
3-phase connection
10
busbar for 60 modules in
total, 1060mm/41.7 long
0.474
P1X 91 30
Kit of 5 isolating covers

for unused busbar
terminals
10
0.030
P1X 91 31
End cap for 1-phase

P1X9031 busbar
50
0.001
P1X 91 33
End cap for 3-phase

P1X9033 busbar
50
0.001
P1X 92 01
1-pole terminal for busbar 25

supply, 25mmmax
conductor
0.011
1-pole terminal for busbar 25

supply, 50mmmax
conductor
0.022
P1X 92 02
P1X 92 02
FBX 03
FBX 01
FB01...
FB02...
FBX 00
FBX 02
FB02...
FB03...
FBX 00
FBX 02
FB03...
Dimensions
page 12-4
Wiring diagrams
page 12-4
page 12-5
12-3
12
Fuse holders
70 (2.75)
52.5 (2.07)
35
(1.38)
17.5
(0.69)
FB01 A1M
58 (2.28)
78 (3.07)
45
20
(0.79)
45
(1.77)
84 (3.31)
88.8 (3.50)
6
(0.24)
3.2 (0.12)
FB02 A
110 (4.33)
100.7 (3.96)
76 (2.99)
45
35.3 (1.39)
49.5 (1.95)
FB03 A
126.5 (4.98)
102.5 (4.03)
76.5 (3.01)
47 (1.85)
45
49.5 (1.95)
FUSES
FE01 D 0...
38 (1.50)
10.3
(0.40)
12
143 (5.63)
107.5 (4.23)
71.5 (2.81)
35.5
(1.40)
10
(0.39)
Wiring diagrams
1P
12-4
1P+N
2P
79.5 (3.13)
61 (2.40)
56 (2.20)
10
(0.39)
45
16.5 (0.65)
2.5
(0.10)
40 (1.57)
74.8 (2.94)
106 (4.17)
79.5 (3.13)
53 (2.09)
26.5
(1.04)
70 (2.75)
52.5 (2.07)
35
(1.38)
17.5
(0.69)
79.5 (3.13)
61 (2.40)
56 (2.20)
10
(0.39)
17.5
(0.69)
40 (1.57)
FB01 B
78 (3.07)
FB01 F FB01 G FB01 D
3P
3P+N
16.5 (0.65)
3.2 (0.12)
2.5
(0.10)
Fuse holders
TYPE
FB01 A...
FB01 B...
FB02 A...
Range
FB03 A...
FB01 C...
AC
IEC maximum rated current In
32A
IEC maximum rated voltage Un

Maximum power dissipation
3W
600VAC
1000VDC
AC21B 690V
AC22B 500V;
AC21B 690V
DC20B 1000VDC
9.5W
3W
4W
120...600VAC
350...1000VDC
5W
20C
30C
0.95
40C
0.9
50C
0.8
60C
0.7
70C
0.5
Derating factor of current In

for side-by-side fuse holders number of poles
32A
690VAC
AC22B 500V; AC21B 690V;
AC22B 400V
Derating factor of current In

for different ambient temperatures
DC
30A
125A
50A
690VAC;
400VAC
1-4
5-6
0.8
7-9
0.7
10
FB01 D...
Class CC (AC)
0.6
Voltage for status indicator
120...690VAC
230...690VAC
CONNECTIONS
2.5Nm; 2Nm / 22lbin
3Nm / 26lbin
4Nm / 35lbin
flexible/stranded
1x16mm2; 1-16mm2 / 8AWG
1x25mm2 / 6AWG
1x35mm2 / 2AWG
1x16mm2 / 8AWG
1x16mm2 / 6AWG
rigid/solid
1x25mm ; 1-10mm / 8AWG
1x25mm2 / 4AWG
Maximum tightening torque

Maximum conductor
cross section
1x35mm / 8AWG
1x50mm / 1AWG
2.5Nm / 22lbin
1x25mm / 10AWG
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-20...+70C
Storage temperature
-40...+80C
Maximum altitude
3,000m
Operation position
12
Any
Fixing
On 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)

Use with gG/aM class 125A fuses, not dissipating more than 12W power.
Values valid only for FB01 A 1M type.
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS FOR FE01 D... FUSES

TYPE
Rated current
[A]
Power consumption at 0.7 In

[W]
Power consumption at In
[W]
Prearcing I2t
[A2s]
Total I2t at 1000VDC

[A2s]
FE01 D 00200
0.78
1.45
0.62
FE01 D 00400
0.64
1.57
6.9
11
FE01 D 00600
0.76
1.84
24
38
FE01 D 00800
0.8
1.92
62
99
FE01 D 01000
10
0.94
2.2
10
48
FE01 D 01200
12
0.98
2.4
18
94
FE01 D 01600
16
1.1
2.7
46
110
FE01 D 02000
20
1.2
2.9
118
282
20A
16A
8A
10A
12A
6A
4A
2A
TIME-CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS FOR FE01 D... FUSES
10000
1000
PREARCING TIME [s]
100
10
0.1
0.01
0.001
1
10
100
1000
PROSPECTIVE CURRENT [A rms]
12-5
Page 13-2
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS UP TO 63A
1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P and 4P versions
IEC rated current In: 1-63A
IEC short-circuit capacity Icn: 10kA
(6kA for 1P+N)
Trip characteristic curve: Type B, C, D.
Page 13-6
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 80-125A
1P, 2P 3P and 4P versions
IEC short-circuit capacity Icn: 10kA
Trip characteristic curve: Type C, D.
Page 13-7
FOR MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Auxiliary and indicator contacts
Shunt trip releases
Connection elements.
Page 13-8
Page 13-9
RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT

BREAKERS 25-63A
2P and 4P versions
IEC rated current In: 25A, 40A and 63A
IEC rated residual operating current In:
30mA and 300mA
Residual current operating characteristic:
Type A and AC.
RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT

BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT
PROTECTION UP TO 40A
1P+N version
IEC rated short-circuit capacity Icn: 10kA
30mA
Trip characteristic curve: Type C
Residual current operating characteristic:
Type A and AC.
MINIATURE
13
AND RESIDUAL CIRCUIT BREAKERS
High breaking capacity

Various trip characteristic curves:
Type B, C and D
Wide 1 to 125A current range
Accessories available
UL approved versions.
Miniature circuit breakers 1-63A

1P 10kA, 1 module, curve type B, C and D / Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 ...................................................
1P+N 6kA, 1 module, curve type C ...............................................................................................................................
1P+N 6kA, 2 module, curve type C ...............................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
13
13
13
13
13
13
2
2
3
3
4
5
Miniature circuit breakers 80-125A

1P, 2P, 3P and 4P 10kA, curve type C / Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 ..........................................................
3P and 4P 10kA, curve type D / Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 .....................................................................
Add-on blocks and accessories ...................................................................................................................................
13 - 6
13 - 6
13 - 7
Residual current operated circuit breakers .............................................................................................................. 13 - 8

Residual current operated circuit breakers with overcurrent protection ............................................................ 13 - 9
AND
I SOLATION
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 13 - 10
Wiring diagrams ............................................................................................................ 13 - 10

Miniature circuit breakers 1 to 63A
1P - 10kA
1 module
Order code
Curve IEC
In
IEC
Icn
Type
[kA]
[A]
N of
Qty
DIN
per
modules pkg
n
Wt
[kg]
Single pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, B-type

characteristic.
P1 MB 1P...
P1 MB 1P B01
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P B02
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P B04
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P B06
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P B10
10
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P B16
16
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P B20
20
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P B25
25
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P B32
32
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P B40
40
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P B50
50
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P B63
63
10
12
0.115
Single pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type

characteristic.
13
P1 MB 1P C01
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P C02
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P C04
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P C06
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P C10
10
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P C16
16
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P C20
20
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P C25
25
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P C32
32
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P C40
40
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P C50
50
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P C63
63
10
12
0.115
Single pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-type

characteristic.
P1 MB 1P D01
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P D02
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P D04
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P D06
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P D10
10
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P D16
16
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P D20
20
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P D25
25
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P D32
32
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P D40
40
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P D50
50
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1P D63
63
10
12
0.115
These devices are used to protect against short circuits
and overloads of wiring installations and loads in panel
boards, office buildings, stores, and similar applications.
Their purpose is circuit protection, circuit isolation and
load operation controls. They have instantaneous trip
characteristics defined as follows:
B-type: Instantaneous trip 3-5 times In
For non-inductive or low inductive loads (heating
resistors, generators, very long wire lines)
C-type: Instantaneous trip 5-10 times In
For inductive loads (mixed loads, resistive and
inductive with low inrush current)
D-type: Instantaneous trip 10-14 times In
For highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and
current such as motors).
Main features include:
Pole width: 17.5mm / 0.69
Contact status with flag indicator
Trip characteristic: Curve type B, C and D
Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on MCB
left side
Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
Dissipation per pole: 3-13W
IEC rated impulse voltage: 4kV
IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230/440VAC.
Certifications obtained: TV Rheinland; UL Recognized
for USA and Canada (cURus File E359585) as
Supplementary Protectors, designated as Overcurrent
type, for general industrial use, suitable for factory wiring
only with 125-135% tripping current of amp rating.
Products having this type of marking are intended for use
as components of complete workshop- assembled
equipment.
IEC/EN 60947-2, UL 1077, CSA C22.2 n235.
NOTE: Supplementary Protectors per UL1077 / CSA C22-2 n235.
1P+N - 6kA
1 module
Order code
Curve IEC
In
IEC
Icn
Type
[kA]
[A]
N of
Qty
DIN
per
modules pkg
n
Wt
[kg]
Single pole + neutral, thermal and magnetic trip type,

C-type characteristic.
P1 MB 1M...
13-2
Accessories
page 13-7
P1 MB 1M C02 C
12
P1 MB 1M C04 C
12
0.115
P1 MB 1M C06 C
12
0.115
P1 MB 1M C10 C
10
12
0.115
P1 MB 1M C16 C
16
12
0.115
P1 MB 1M C20 C
20
12
0.115
P1 MB 1M C25 C
25
12
0.115
P1 MB 1M C32 C
32
12
0.115
P1 MB 1M C40 C
40
12
0.115
Dimensions
page 13-10
0.115
Pole width: 9mm / 0.35
Trip characteristic: Curve type C
left side
Dissipation per pole: 3-7.5W
IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230VAC.
Certifications obtained: TV Rheinland.
IEC/EN 60947-2.
page 13-11

1P+N - 6kA
2 module
Order code
Curve IEC
In
IEC
Icn
Type
[kA]
[A]
N of
Qty
DIN
per
modules pkg
n
Wt
[kg]
Single pole + neutral, thermal and magnetic trip type,

C-type characteristic.
P1 MB 1N...
2P - 10kA
2 module
P1 MB 1N C01
0.190
P1 MB 1N C02
0.190
P1 MB 1N C04
0.190
P1 MB 1N C06
0.190
P1 MB 1N C10
10
0.190
P1 MB 1N C16
16
0.190
P1 MB 1N C20
20
0.190
P1 MB 1N C25
25
0.190
P1 MB 1N C32
32
0.190
P1 MB 1N C40
40
0.190
P1 MB 1N C50
50
0.190
P1 MB 1N C63
63
0.190
Order code
Curve IEC
In
IEC
Icn
N of
Qty
DIN
per
modules pkg
Type
[kA]
[A]
Wt
[kg]
Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, B-type

characteristic.
P1 MB 2P...
P1 MB 2P B01
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P B02
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P B04
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P B06
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P B10
10
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P B16
16
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P B20
20
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P B25
25
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P B32
32
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P B40
40
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P B50
50
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P B63
63
10
0.230
Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type

characteristic.
P1 MB 2P C01
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P C02
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P C04
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P C06
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P C10
10
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P C16
16
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P C20
20
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P C25
25
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P C32
32
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P C40
40
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P C50
50
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P C63
63
10
0.230
left side
IEC/EN 60947-2.
left side
13

equipment.
IEC/EN 60947-2, UL 1077, CSA C22.2 n235.
Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-type

characteristic.
P1 MB 2P D01
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P D02
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P D04
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P D06
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P D10
10
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P D16
16
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P D20
20
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P D25
25
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P D32
32
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P D40
40
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P D50
50
10
0.230
P1 MB 2P D63
63
10
0.230
Accessories
page 13-7
Dimensions
page 13-10
page 13-11
13-3

3P - 10kA
3 module
Order code
Curve IEC
In
IEC
Icn
Type
[kA]
[A]
N of
Qty
DIN
per
modules pkg
n
Wt
[kg]
Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, B-type

characteristic.
P1 MB 3P...
P1 MB 3P B01
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P B02
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P B04
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P B06
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P B10
10
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P B16
16
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P B20
20
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P B25
25
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P B32
32
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P B40
40
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P B50
50
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P B63
63
10
0.345
Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type

characteristic.
13
P1 MB 3P C01
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P C02
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P C04
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P C06
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P C10
10
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P C16
16
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P C20
20
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P C25
25
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P C32
32
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P C40
40
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P C50
50
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P C63
63
10
0.345
left side
equipment.
IEC/EN 60947-2, UL 1077, CSA C22.2 n235.
Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-type

characteristic.
P1 MB 3P D01
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P D02
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P D04
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P D06
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P D10
10
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P D16
16
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P D20
20
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P D25
25
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P D32
32
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P D40
40
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P D50
50
10
0.345
P1 MB 3P D63
63
10
0.345
13-4
Accessories
page 13-7
Dimensions
page 13-10
page 13-11

4P - 10kA
4 module
Order code
Curve IEC
In
IEC
Icn
Type
[kA]
[A]
N of
Qty
DIN
per
modules pkg
n
Wt
[kg]
Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, B-type

characteristic.
P1 MB 4P...
P1 MB 4P B01
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P B02
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P B04
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P B06
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P B10
10
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P B16
16
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P B20
20
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P B25
25
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P B32
32
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P B40
40
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P B50
50
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P B63
63
10
0.460
Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type

characteristic.
P1 MB 4P C01
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P C02
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P C04
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P C06
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P C10
10
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P C16
16
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P C20
20
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P C25
25
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P C32
32
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P C40
40
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P C50
50
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P C63
63
10
0.460
left side
equipment.
IEC/EN 60947-2, UL 1077, CSA C22.2 n235.
13
Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-type

characteristic.
P1 MB 4P D01
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P D02
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P D04
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P D06
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P D10
10
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P D16
16
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P D20
20
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P D25
25
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P D32
32
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P D40
40
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P D50
50
10
0.460
P1 MB 4P D63
63
10
0.460
Accessories
page 13-7
Dimensions
page 13-10
page 13-11
13-5

1, 2, 3, 4P - 10kA
Order code
Curve IEC
In
IEC
Icn
Type
[kA]
[A]
N of
Qty
DIN
per
modules pkg
n
Wt
[kg]
One pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type

characteristic.
P2 MB 1P C080 C
80
10 1.5
0.166
P2 MB 1P C100 C
100
10 1.5
0.166
P2 MB 1P C125 C
125
10 1.5
0.166
Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type

characteristic.
P2 MB 1P...
P2 MB 2P C080 C
80
10
0.340
P2 MB 2P C100 C
100
10
0.340
P2 MB 2P C125 C
125
10
0.340
Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type

characteristic.
P2 MB 3P C080 C
80
10
4.5
0.510
P2 MB 3P C100 C
100
10
4.5
0.510
P2 MB 3P C125 C
125
10
4.5
0.510
Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-type

characteristic.
P2 MB 4P C080 C
80
10
0.680
P2 MB 4P C100 C
100
10
0.680
P2 MB 4P C125 C
125
10
0.680
Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-type

characteristic.
P2 MB 2P...
P2 MB 3P D080 D
80
10
4.5
10
0.510
P2 MB 3P D100 D
100
10
4.5
10
0.510
P2 MB 3P D125 D
125
10
4.5
10
0.510
Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-type

characteristic.
13
P2 MB 4P D080 D
80
10
10
0.510
P2 MB 4P D100 D
100
10
10
0.510
P2 MB 4P D125 D
125
10
10
0.510
These types are always used to protect against short
circuits and overloads of wiring installations and loads in
industrial applications.
Their purpose is always circuit protection, circuit
isolation and load operation controls. They have
instantaneous trip characteristics defined as follows:
C-type: Instantaneous trip 5-10 times In
For inductive loads (mixed loads, resistive and
inductive with low inrush current)
D-type: Instantaneous trip 10-14 times In
For highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and
current such as motors).
Trip characteristic: Curve type C and D
left side
only with more than135% tripping current of amp rating.
equipment.
IEC/EN 60947-2, UL 1077, CSA C22.2 n235.
IEC current Icn at 230V.

P2 MB 3P...
P2 MB 4P...
13-6
Accessories
page 13-7
Dimensions
page 13-10
page 13-11

Add-on blocks for P1MB
miniature circuit breakers
1-63A
Order code
Characteristics
Qty
per
MCB
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
10
0.040
10
0.040
0.070
Auxiliary contact.
P1X 1011
One changeover
(SPDT), side
mount
Indicator contact for thermal-magnetic trip.

P1X 1311
One changeover
(SPDT), side
mount
Auxiliary and indicator contact width: 9mm / 0.35
(0.5 module)
Undervoltage and shunt trip release width:
17.5mm / 0.69
Maximum combination: 3 add-on blocks on MCB left
side only of which 1 undervoltage or shunt release
directly on MCB side and then 2 contacts of which
1 auxiliary and 1 indicator.
IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kA
IEC rated operational current in AC: 6A 230V for
releases; 3A 400V for auxiliary contacts.

P1X 14230
P1X 1011
P1X 16230
Add-on blocks for P2MB

miniature circuit breakers
80-125A
230V 50/60Hz,
side mount
Shunt trip release.

P1X 16230
110-415V
50/60Hz,
side mount
0.070
Order code
Characteristics
Qty
per
MCB
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
10
0.040
10
0.040
0.070
Wt
Auxiliary contact.
P2X 1011
One changeover
(SPDT), side
mount
Indicator contact for thermal-magnetic trip.

P2X 1311
One changeover
(SPDT), side
mount

P2X 14230
230V 50/60Hz,
side mount
Accessories for P1MB types
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
n
[kg]
P1X 90 33
P1X 90 31
1-phase connection
busbar for 55 1P modules
(55 1P MCBs in total),
966mm/39.2 long
10
0.240
P1X 90 33
3-phase connection
busbar for 60 modules
(20 3P MCBs in total),
1060mm/41.7 long
10
0.474
P1X 91 30
Kit of 5 isolating covers

for unused busbar terminals
10
0.030
P1X 91 31
End cap for 1-phase

P1X9031 busbar
50
0.001
P1X 91 33
End cap for 3-phase

P1X9033 busbar
50
0.001
P1X 92 01
1-pole terminal for busbar

25
supply, 25mm max conductor
0.011
P1X 92 02
1-pole terminal for busbar

25
supply, 50mm max conductor
0.022
P2X 1311
Auxiliary and indicator contact width: 9mm / 0.35
(0.5 module)
Undervoltage and shunt trip release width:
17.5mm / 0.69
Maximum combination: 3 add-on blocks on MCB
sides of which 1 undervoltage or shunt release on
MCB right side and 2 contacts on the left of which
1 auxiliary and 1 indicator.
13
IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kA
IEC rated operational current in AC: 6A 230V for
releases; 3A 400V for auxiliary contacts.
Reference standards
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
P2X 1311
P1X 91 33
P1X 92 01

Certifications obtained: UL Recognized for USA and
Canada (cURus File E359585) as Accessories for
supplementary protectors.
equipment.
P1X 92 02
Dimensions
page 13-10
Wiring diagrams
page 13-10

SINGLE-PHASE SUPPLY BUSBAR
Pitch: 17.5mm / 0.69
Busbar section: 10mm
Number of modules/poles: 55
Standard-supplied length: 966mm/39.2 which can be
cut in shorter sections.
THREE-PHASE SUPPLY BUSBAR
Pitch: 17.5mm / 0.69
Busbar section: 10mm
Number of modules/poles: 60 (20pcs 3P MCBs)
Standard-supplied length: 1060mm/41.7 which can
be cut in shorter sections.
13-7

Residual current operated circuit breakers
2P and 4P
2 and 4 module
Order code
Trip
IEC IEC N of
Qty Wt
In In DIN
per
modules pkg
Type
[A] [mA] n
[kg]
P1 RC 2P 25 AC030 AC
25 30
0.185
25 300 2
0.185
40 30
0.185
40 300 2
0.185
63 30
0.185
63 300 2
0.185
Two pole RCCB type AC.
These RCCBs are intended for the protection of people
against indirect contact (electric shock) and of
installations against fire hazards due to a persistent
earth/ground fault current.
Specifically to prevent electric shock, RCCBs must be
rated with a rated residual current (In) not exceeding
30mA so that these devices trip in the case of
earth/ground fault only.
They usually are connected in series with MCBs which
assure short circuit and overcurrent protection too.
P1RC types have a In of either 30mA or 300mA and are
available with two different versions of residual current
tripping, as follows:
Two pole RCCB type A.

P1 RC 2P...
P1 RC 2P 25 A030
25 30
0.185
P1 RC 2P 25 A300
25 300 2
0.185
P1 RC 2P 40 A030
40 30
0.185
P1 RC 2P 40 A300
40 300 2
0.185
P1 RC 2P 63 A030
63 30
0.185
P1 RC 2P 63 A300
63 300 2
0.185
Four pole RCCB type AC.
P1 RC 4P...
25 30
0.326
25 300 4
0.326
40 30
0.326
40 300 4
0.326
63 30
0.326
63 300 4
0.326
Four pole RCCB type A.
13
P1 RC 4P 25 A030
25 30
0.326
P1 RC 4P 25 A300
25 300 4
0.326
P1 RC 4P 40 A030
40 30
0.326
P1 RC 4P 40 A300
40 300 4
0.326
P1 RC 4P 63 A030
63 30
0.326
P1 RC 4P 63 A300
63 300 4
0.326
Type AC Tripping for earth/ground fault is ensured for

residual sinusoidal alternating currents, suddenly applied
or slowly rising. It is identified by the symbol:
Type A Tripping for earth/ground fault is ensured for

residual sinusoidal alternating currents and pulsating
direct currents, suddenly applied or slowly rising. In
addition to the protection given by Type AC, this version
protects against residual current with pulsating
waveform. This can be caused by circuits connected with
electronic equipment. The symbol identifying Type A is
the following:

IEC rated current In: 24A, 40A and 63A
Versions: 2 and 4 pole
Type of operation: AC or A
Dissipation per pole:
1.1W for P1RC2/4 P25 type AC or A
IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV
IEC rated operating voltage Uc: 230VAC for 2P;
230/400VAC for 4P
IEC rated residual operating voltage In:
30mA or 300mA
IEC rated short-circuit capacity Icn: 10kA.
Certifications obtained: TV SD.
13-8
Dimensions
page 13-10
page 13-11

Residual current operated circuit breakers with overcurrent protection
1P+N - 10kA
2 module
Order code
Trip IEC IEC IEC DIN Qty Wt

curve In Inc In
per
pkg
Type [A] [kA] [mA] n
[kg]
Single pole + neutral RCBO type AC.
P1 RB 1N...
P1 RB 1N C06 AC030 C
10
30
0.205
10
300 2
0.205
10 10
30
0.205
10 10
300 2
0.205
16 10
30
0.205
16 10
300 2
0.205
20 10
30
0.205
20 10
300 2
0.205
25 10
30
0.205
25 10
300 2
0.205
32 10
30
0.205
32 10
300 2
0.205
40 10
30
0.205
40 10
300 2
0.205
Single pole + neutral RCBO type A.

P1 RB 1N C06 A030 C
10
30
0.205
P1 RB 1N C06 A300 C
10
300 2
0.205
P1 RB 1N C10 A030 C
10 10
30
0.205
P1 RB 1N C10 A300 C
10 10
300 2
0.205
P1 RB 1N C16 A030 C
16 10
30
0.205
P1 RB 1N C16 A300 C
16 10
300 2
0.205
P1 RB 1N C20 A030 C
20 10
30
0.205
P1 RB 1N C20 A300 C
20 10
300 2
0.205
P1 RB 1N C25 A030 C
25 10
30
0.205
P1 RB 1N C25 A300 C
25 10
300 2
0.205
P1 RB 1N C32 A030 C
32 10
30
0.205
P1 RB 1N C32 A300 C
32 10
300 2
0.205
P1 RB 1N C40 A030 C
40 10
30
0.205
P1 RB 1N C40 A300 C
40 10
300 2
0.205
Dimensions
page 13-10
These RCBOs perform both to protect in cases detect and
trip the event of residual current and to protect circuits in
case of short circuits and overcurrent. From a practical
point of view, RCBOs integrate both functions of MCB
and of RCCB.
They have a C-type trip characteristic (instantaneous trip
5-10 times In) and are used for inductive loads (mixed
loads, resistive and inductive with low inrush current).
In addition, they have a rated residual current (In) of
either 30mA or 300mA and are available with two
different versions of residual current tripping type AC or
A as described on page 13-8.
Version: single pole + neutral
IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV
Normal operating voltage Uc: 230VAC
IEC rated residual operating voltage In:
30mA or 300mA
IEC rated short-circuit capacity Icn: 10kA.
13
page 13-11
13-9

Undervoltage and shunt releases

P1X 14230
P1X 16230
9 max
(0.35 max)
60 (2.36)
45 (1.77)
18 max
(0.71 max)
66 (2.60)
66 (2.60)
60 (2.36)
5.5 (0.22)
83 (3.27)
86 (3.38)
60 (2.36)
45 (1.77)
81 (3.19)
72 max
(2.83 max)
54 max
(2.12 max)
45 max
(1.77 max)
36 max
(1.42 max)
86.5 max
(3.40 max)
35
(1.38)
18 max
(0.71 max)
ACCESSORIES
Add-on contacts
P1X 1011
P1X 1311
5.5 (0.22)
45 (1.77)
81 (3.19)
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

P1 MB...
5.52 (0.22)
74 max
(2.91 max)
74 (2.91)
74 (2.91)
67 max
(2.64 max)
49.5 max
(1.95 max)
5.5 (0.22)
108 max
(4.25 max)
81 max
(3.19 max)
Undervoltage and shunt releases

P2X 14230
9 max
(0.35 max)
45 (1.77)
80 (3.15)
43 (1.69)
32
(1.26)
5.4
(0.21)
18 max
(0.71 max)
43 (1.69)
32
(1.26)
5.4
(0.21)
45 (1.77)
79 (3.11)
54 max
(2.12 max)
85 max (3.35 max)
27 max
(1.06 max)
ACCESSORIES
Add-on contacts
P2X 1011
P2X 1311
60 (2.36)
74.5 (2.93)
72 max
(2.83 max)
5.5
(0.22)
36 max
(1.42 max)
60 (2.36)
45 (1.77)
5.4
(0.21)
60 (2.36)
82 max (3.23)
36 max
(1.42 max)
80 (3.15)
13
RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

P1 RB...
45 (1.77)
RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

P1 RC...
44 (1.73)
50 (1.97)
Wiring diagrams
P1X 1011
P2X 1011
13-10
P1X 1311
P2X 1311
P1X 14230
P1X 16230
P2X 16230
44 (1.73)
79 (3.11)
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

P2 MB...

TYPE
Standards
P1 MB
P2 MB
P1 RC
P1 RB
IEC/EN 60898, IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 60947-2
IEC/EN 61008-1
IEC/EN 61009-1
400
440
400
400
kV
IEC rated operational voltage Ue
230 (1P, 1P+N) /

230/400 (2P, 3P, 4P)
230 (1P) /
230/400 (2P, 3P, 4P)
230 (2P) /
230/400(4P)
230
60 (1P) / 80 (2P)
60
Hz
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
in AC
in DC
Rated frequency
Maximum rated current
63
125
63
40
Available rated current for types
1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 16,
20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
80, 100, 125
25, 40, 63
6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 4P
1P, 2P, 3P, 4P
2P, 4P
1P+N
Curve B: 3-5In
Curve C: 5-10In
Curve D: 10-14In
Curve C: 5-10In
Curve D: 10-14In
Curve C: 5-10In
AC, A
AC, A
30, 300
Versions
IEC instantaneous tripping
(tripping characteristic)
IEC residual current operating
characteristic
IEC rated residual operating current In
mA
30, 300
Short circuit capacity
kA
10 (6kA 1P+N)
10
10
cycles
20,000
10,000
20,000
20,000
Mechanical life
Maximum tightening torque of terminals
Conductor section min-max
Nm
lbin
15
26
15
15
Tool
Pz2
Pz2
Pz2
Pz2
mm2
1-16
2.5-50
1-35
1-25
AWG
14-6
14-1/0
16-2
16-3
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature
Operating
-35...+70
-35...+75
-25...+55
-25...+40
Storage
-40...+80
-40...+80
-35...+60
-35...+60
2,000
2,000
2,000
2,000
Maximum altitude
Pollution degree
Mounting
13
35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
TRIP CHARACTERISTICS (Thermal - magnetic overcurrent type)

Curve B
Curve C
Curve D
Tripping time [s]
Tripping time [s]
Tripping time [s]
10000
10000
10000
1000
1000
1000
100
100
100
10
10
10
0,1
0,1
0,1
0,01
0,01
1
1,45
1,13
5
4
7
6
9
8 10
20
40
30
60
50
100
70
Tripping current In [A]
0,01
1
1,45
1,13
5
4
7
6
9
8 10
20
40
30
60
50
100
70
1,45
1,13
5
4
7
6
9
8 10
20
40
30
60
50
100
70
13-11
Page 14-4
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 1 AND 2
Monoblock versions:
1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350s): 25kA
IEC maximum discharge current Imax
(8/20s): 100kA
SPD status indicator
Version with output for remote status
indication.
Page 14-4
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 1 AND 2
Versions with plug-in cartridge:
1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350s): 12.5kA
IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20s):
60kA
IEC combined surge Uoc/Isc (1.2/50, 8/20s):
10kV/5kA
Single module status indicator
Version with output for remote status
indication.
Page 14-4
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 2
Versions with plug-in cartridge:
1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P
40kA
IEC rated discharge current In (8/20s): 20kA
Versions with and without output for remote
status indication.
Page 14-5
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 2
Versions with plug-in cartridge: +, -, PE
IEC maximum operational voltage: 1200VDC
40kA
IEC rated discharge current In (8/20s): 20kA
Versions with or without output for remote status
indication
Tested according to EN 50539-11
UL Recognized versions.
Page 14-5
SPARE PLUG-IN CARTRIDGES
Versions suitable for SPDs:
- Type 1 and 2
- Type 2
- Type 2 for photovoltaic applications
Status indicator for single modules.
SURGE
14
PROTECTION DEVICES
Protection against overvoltage and

high surge conditions caused by
direct or indirect lightning strikes
Types with plug-in cartridge
provide fast servicing capability
Mechanical indicator for visual
failure status signalling of single
modules
Versions with or without output for
remote SPD status indication
Versions for photovoltaic
applications.
Surge protection devices (SPD)

Type 1 and 2 monoblock ..................................................................................................................................................
Type 1 and 2 .....................................................................................................................................................................
Type 2 ...............................................................................................................................................................................
Type 2 for photovoltaic applications ................................................................................................................................
Accessories ......................................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
14
14
14
14
14
4
4
4
5
5
AND
I SOLATION
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 14 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 14 - 7
SAFE INSTALLATIONS!
Type
1, 2
2
Type 1, 2, 3
Type
LPZ
protection
zones
Installation
category
Impulse
withstand voltage
of equipment
14
OA
OB
IV
III
II
6kV
4kV
2,5kV
1,5kV
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

The surge arresters commonly defined as SPDs (Surge Protection Devices), are devices designed to protect electric systems and equipment against transient and impulse
overvoltages such as those caused by lightning and by electric switching.
Their function is to divert the discharge or impulse current generated by an overvoltage to earth/ground, thereby protecting the equipment downstream.
SPDs are installed in parallel with the electric line to be protected. At the mains rated voltage, they are comparable to an open circuit and have a high impedance at their ends.
In the presence of an overvoltage, this impedance falls to very low values, closing the circuit to earth/ground.
Once the overvoltage has ended, their impedance rises again rapidly to the initial value (very high), returning to open loop conditions.
The SA1 (monoblock) type protects against direct and indirect lightning strikes as well as induced overvoltage conditions. It can be installed in areas with a high risk of direct
lightning strikes, inside main distribution boards or nearby sub-distribution boards. With the SA0 plug-in cartridge type, the same features are available with the advantage of
only having to replace the protection cartridge once the SPD blows.
PROTECTION ZONES
INSTALLATION CATEGORY
Standards define the LPZs (Lightning Protection Zones), which indicate the
different zones at risk. These are distinguished among:
For the correct choice of the SPD, the dielectric strength of the equipment to
protect needs to be considered. This level is established by IEC 60664-1
standard.
For a 230/400V installation, it specifies:
LPZ 0A: Area outside a building not protected by LPS (e.g. lightning rods)
where a direct lightning strike is possible. In this zone, there is total exposure to
induced electromagnetic fields.
LPZ 0B: Area outside a building protected by LPS; therefore, a direct lighting
strike is not possible. In this zone, there is total exposure to induced
electromagnetic fields.
LPZ 1: Area inside a building so protected against direct lightning strikes.
In this zone, there is the possibility of very high overvoltages and of induced
electromagnetic fields which may be attenuated depending on the degree of
screening. This zone must be protected by an SPD type 1 at the boundary with
zone LPZ 0A or 0B.
Installation category IV: 6kV for devices installed upstream of the distribution
board (for example, delivery point with the distribution system).
Installation category III: 4kV for devices being part of the fixed system (for
example, distribution boards, switching devices, isolators, ducting and their
accessories)
Installation category II: 2.5kV for non electronic devices (for example,
household appliances or electric tools)
Installation category I: 1.5kV for equipment containing particularly sensitive
electronic circuits (for example, electronic devices like PCs or TVs)
LPZ 2: Area inside a building (e.g. in a room), in which there is the possibility of
low overvoltages since they are limited by SPDs installed upstream. This zone
must be protected by an SPD type 2 at the boundary with zone LPZ 1.
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR INSTALLATION
LPZ 3: Area inside a building (e.g. the system connected to a socket in a room)
characterised by very sensitive equipment, in which there is the possibility of
very low overvoltages as they are limited by SPDs installed upstream.
This zone must be protected by an SPD type 3 at the boundary with zone LPZ 2.
For correct installation, it is advisable to make connections between the line and
the SPD input (phase or neutral terminals) as well as between the SPD output
(earth/ground terminal) and the equipotential bonding connection with a
maximum 0.5m/20 length of the leads. To reduce the distance, use of the
so-called V connection is admissible.
Fuse
Fuse
a
S
P
D
S
P
D
_ 0.5m/20
a+b <
b
EBB
EBB
For more details, IEC/EN 62305 standards can be consulted.
14-2
_ 0.5m/20
b<
Type
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

In photovoltaic applications of a
domestic environment or industrial
facility or other similar circumstances,
equipped with lightning rod systems
having a safety distance (S), SPD type 2,
suitable for DC duty, can be used to
protect the installation. It is advisable to
install these devices as close as possible
to the photovoltaic panels, consequently
in the so-called string boards. If the
AC/DC inverter is far away from the
string boards (indicatively more than
10m/33 apart), another SPD type 2 DC
needs to be installed next to the inverter
on the DC side. Installation of SPD type
2 suitable of AC duty is also required
downstream of the inverter on the AC
side. For more details, consult specific
national standards and/or application
guides issued by local authorities for
solar systems concerning protection
against lightning. The SA2DG and
SA2DF types with plug-in cartridges
are suitable for connection in the DC side
of a solar installation and offer protection
against induced overvoltage conditions.
The SA2 type is suitable for installation
downstream of the inverter on the AC
side and in intermediate panels.
Industrial
buildings
Housing
DC
AC
DC
AC
BACK-UP PROTECTION
Protection against short circuits of SPDs is provided by overcurrent devices
(gL/gG fuses), which should be chosen according to the SPD manufacturers
recommendations.
2 DC
Impulse current Imp:

Crest value of the current that circulates in the SPD with a 10/350s waveform
(activation must be guaranteed for 20 times without damage). It is used to classify
SPDs in test class I.
Iimp
F1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
10/350s
100%
14
50%
F2
SA2 3N
10%
10
F1 > 125A gL/gG F2 =125A gL/gG

F1 125A gL/gG F2 = not required.
350
t (s)
Rated discharge current In:

Crest value of the current that circulates in the SPD with an (/20s waveform
(activation must be guaranteed for 20 times without damage). It is used to classify
SPDs in test class II.
ln
SPD COORDINATION
In order to obtain an effective protection against overvoltage, it is advisable to
install several SPDs coordinated with one another in cascade connection.
For instance, it is advisable to have a Type 1 SPD in the main distribution board,
a Type 2 SPD in the sub-distribution board and a Type 3 SPD near the terminal
equipment to be protected.
In this way, the energy originating from an overvoltage gradually decreases as it
reaches the equipment to protect.
8/20s
100%
50%
10%
8
DEFINITIONS AND RATINGS

Maximum continuous voltage Uc:
Maximum value of AC or DC voltage that the SPD is capable of permanently
withstanding without activating or getting damaged; this is its rated voltage.
Protection level voltage Up:
Maximum value of the voltage between the terminals of the SPD in presence of
an impulsive overvoltage. It is a fundamental parameter to correctly choose the
SPD; it must be taken into account with regards to the impulse voltage of the
equipment to protect.
t (s)
20
Open circuit discharge voltage Uoc:

Crest value of the no-load discharge voltage delivered by the test generation with a
1.2/50s waveform simultaneously with a short-circuit current of an 8/20s
waveform, applied at the SPD terminals. It is used to classify SPDs in test class III.
Uoc
1.2/50s
100%
50%
10%
1.2
50
t (s)
14-3

Type 1 and 2
monoblock
Order code
Pole
Relay
arrange- output
ment
Number Qty Wt
of DIN per
modules pkg
(SPDT)
[kg]
MONOBLOCK VERSION.
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350s) 25kA per pole.
SA1 1P A320R
SA1 1P A320R
1P
YES
SA1 1N A320R
1P+N
YES
0.390
SA1 2P A320R
2P
YES
0.395
SA1 3P A320R
3P
YES
0.595
SA1 3N A320R
3P+N
YES
0.760
SA1 4P A320R
4P
YES
0.780
Characteristics
Type
SA1 3N A320R
IEC rated IEC voltage pro- Power

voltage Un tection level Up installation
system
[V]
[kV] L-N
SA1 1P A320R
230
<1.3
TN-C, TN-S, TT
SA1 1N A320R
230
<1.4
TT, TN-S
SA1 2P A320R
230
<1.4
TN-S
SA1 3P A320R
230/400
<1.4
TN-C
SA1 3N A320R
230/400
<1.4
TT, TN-S
SA1 4P A320R
230/400
<1.4
TN-S

Type 1 and 2 with
plug-in cartridge
0.275
SA0 1P A320R
SA0 2P A320R

Type 2 with
plug-in cartridge
Order code
Pole
Relay
arrange- output
ment
Number Qty Wt
of DIN per
modules pkg
(SPDT)
[kg]
SA0 1P A320R
1P
YES
SA0 1N A320R
1P+N
YES
0.195
0.365
SA0 2P A320R
2P
YES
0.370
SA0 3P A320R
3P
YES
0.540
SA0 3N A320R
3P+N
YES
0.670
SA0 4P A320R
4P
YES
0.670
Order code
Pole
Relay
arrange- output
ment
Number Qty Wt
of DIN per
modules pkg
(SPDT)
[kg]
VERSION WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE.

IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20s) 40kA per pole.
SA2 2P A320R
14-4
SA2 3N A320R
Accessories
page 14-5
Operational characterstics
IEC maximum continuous operating voltage Uc:
320VAC/420VDC
100kA per pole
IEC rated discharge current In (8/20s):
25kA per pole
Version with relay output having changeover contact
for remote status indication
Reference standards
Comply with standards: IEC 61643-1, EN 61643-11.
For L-PE only.

IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350s) 12.5kA per pole.
14
Main characteristics
The surge protection device type SA1 combines the
performance of SPD type 1 and 2 into a single product.
It protects against direct and indirect lightning strikes as
well as induced overvoltage conditions.
It can be installed in areas with a high risk of direct
lightning strikes, inside main distribution boards or
nearby sub-distribution boards.
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE SA0
It has a plug-in cartridge and combines the performance
of SPD type 1 and 2 into a single product. It is ideal in all
those systems of reduced extent to protect the load side
downstream of main circuit breaker to terminal
equipment.
It protects against direct and indirect lightning strikes as
well as induced overvoltage conditions. It can be installed
inside main distribution boards and nearby terminal
equipment.
The protection cartridges are plug-in and can be easily
replaced for quick servicing.
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE SA2
It is suitable for installation in sub-distribution boards
and nearby terminal equipment.
It protects against indirect overvoltages.
Opwerational characteristics
IEC maximum continuous operating voltage Uc:
320VAC/420VDC
IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20s) per
pole: 60kA (SA0...); 40kA (SA2...)
IEC rated discharge current In (8/20s) per pole:
25kA (SA0...); 20kA (SA2...)
Versions with or without relay output having
changeover contact for remote status indication
SA2 1P A320
1P
NO
0.140
SA2 1P A320R
1P
YES
0.145
SA2 1N A320
1P+N
NO
0.240
SA2 1N A320R
1P+N
YES
0.245
SA2 2P A320
2P
NO
0.260
SA2 2P A320R
2P
YES
0.265
SA2 3P A320
3P
NO
0.370
SA2 3P A320R
3P
YES
0.375
SA2 3N A320
3P+N
NO
0.465
SA2 3N A320R
3P+N
YES
0.470
SA2 4P A320
4P
NO
0.480
IEC rated IEC voltage Power

voltage
protection installation
Un
level Up
SA2 4P A320R
4P
YES
0.485
Un
Up
[V]
[kV] L-N
Dimensions
page 14-6
Reference standards
Comply with standards: IEC/EN 61643-11.
Characteristics
Type
SA0/SA2 1P A... 230
<1.5
TN-C, TN-S, TT
SA0/SA2 1N A... 230
<1.5
TT, TN-S
SA0/SA2 2P A... 230
<1.5
TN-S
SA0/SA2 3P A... 230/400
<1.5
TN-C
SA0/SA2 3N A... 230/400
<1.5
TT, TN-S
SA0/SA2 4P A... 230/400

For L-PE only.
<1.5
TN-S
Wiring diagrams
page 14-7
page 14-8

Type 2 for photovoltaic
applications with
plug-in cartridge
Order code
Pole
Relay
arrange- output
ment
Number Qty Wt
of DIN per
modules pkg
(SPDT)
[kg]

EN short-circuit current rating Iscpv 100A.
SA2 DG 600M2
NO
0.320
SA2 DG 600M2R +, -, PE
+, -, PE
YES
0.325
SA2 DG K00M3
NO
0.420
YES
0.425
+, -, PE
SA2 DG K00M3R +, -, PE
EN short-circuit current rating Iscpv 1000A.
SA2 DG...
SA2 DF 600M2
+, -, PE
NO
0.285
SA2 DF 600M3
+, -, PE
NO
0.305
SA2 DF K00M2
+, -, PE
NO
0.410
SA2 DF K00M3
+, -, PE
NO
0.500
SA2 DF K20M3
+, -, PE
NO
0.550
SA2 DF...
GDT
T/o relay
MOV
In case of short but intense overvoltage conditions, both the

spark gap element (GDT- Gas Discharge Tube) and the
varistor (MOV Metal Oxide Varistor) simultaneously trigger.
In case of weak but prolonged overvoltage conditions, the
current limiter considerably reduces the current flowing
through the varistor. This technological solution guarantees a
longer varistor life.
Ultimately, another particular mechanism of the surge
arrester quickly extinguishes the electric arc during the
thermal overload tripping phase.

Plug-in cartridges
SAX00 P A320
SAX02 P A320
EN maximum continuous voltage Ucpv:
600VDC, 1000VDC, 1200VDC
Versions with or without relay output having
changeover contact for remote status indication
EN degree of protection: IP20.
Certifications obtained: UL Recognized for USA and Canada
(cURus File E352471), as Surge-protective Devices
Component, Type 4 for use in SPD Type 2 photovoltaic
applications only; for SA2DF600M2, SA2DFK00M2 and
SA2DFK20M3 types.
as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
Compliant with standards: EN 50539-11 for all; also
UL 1449 and CSA C22.2 n8 for cURus certified types
mentioned above.
Characteristics
Type
Protection circuit for each module type SA2 DF

Self-protected surge protection devices
Current
Limiter
The surge protection device type SA2 D with plug-in
cartridge for photovoltaic applications is suitable for
installation on the direct-current end of a photovoltaic
installation and protects against induced overvoltage
conditions.
Order code
Description
Qty Wt
per
pkg
n
[kg]
SAX00 P A320
For SA0... types
0.100
SAX02 P A320
For SA2... types
0.100
SAX02 DF 600M2 For SA2 DF 600M2 type
0.100
SAX02 DF 600M3 For SA2 DF 600M3 type
0.100
SAX02 DF K00M2 For SA2 DF K00M2 type
0.100
0.100
0.100
SAX02 DG 600M2 For SA2 DG 600... types
0.100
SAX02 DG K00M3 For SA2 DG K00... types
0.100
Dimensions
page 14-6
Wiring diagrams
page 14-7
EN
rated
voltage
Un
EN
continuous
voltage
Ucpv
EN voltage
protection
level
Up
[VDC]
[kV] L-N
[kV]
SA2 DG 600M2
600
600
<1.9
SA2 DG K00M3
1000
1000
<3.6
SA2 DF 600M2
600
600
<2.0
SA2 DF 600M3
600
600
<3
SA2 DF K00M2
1000
1000
<4.0
SA2 DF K00M3
1000
1000
<4.0
SA2 DF K20M3
1200
1200
<4.0
14
Reference standards
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61643-11 for all;
EN 50539-11 for types SAX02 DF... and SAX02 DG...;
UL 1449, CSA C22.2 n 8 for SAX02 DF 600M2,
SAX02 DF K00M2, SAX02 DF K20M3.
page 14-8
14-5

Dimensioni [mm (in)]
SA1...A320R
90 (3.54")
54 (2.12")
36 (1.42")
72 (2.83")
101 (3.98")
72 (2.83")
90 (3.54")
SA0...A320R
18
(0.71")
72 (2.83")
54 (2.12")
36 (1.42")
103 (4.05")
90 (3.54")
72 (2.83")
SA2...A320
18
(0.71")
54 (2.12")
36 (1.42")
94 (3.70")
90 (3.54")
72 (2.83")
72 (2.83")
SA2...A320R
90 (3.54")
14
18
(0.71")
54 (2.12")
36 (1.42")
103 (4.05")
72 (2.83")
72 (2.83")
SA2 DG...
SA2 DG...R
72 (2.83")
90 (3.54")
94 (3.70")
90 (3.54")
36 (1.42")
36 (1.42")
54 (2.12")
SA2 DF...
36 (1.42")
14-6
54 (2.12")
93 (3.66")
90 (3.54")
72 (2.83")
54 (2.12")
103 (4.05")
72 (2.83")

Wiring diagrams
SA1 1P A320R
L
SA1 1N A320R
SA1 2P A320R
L
SA1 3P A320R
L1
14
11
12
14
14
11
11
12
12
RC
RC
SA0 1N A320R
L
L/N
12
14
14
14
11
11
11
12
12
12
RC
RC
RC
PE
PE
SA2 1P A320
PE
PE
SA0 3N A320R
SA0 4P A320R
L2
L1
L3
14
14
11
11
11
12
12
12
RC
RC
RC
L3
L2
L1
SA2 4P A320
L2
L3
SA2 3P A320R
L1
SA2 3N A320R
L3
L2
L1
L1
L2
L1
14
14
14
14
14
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
SA2 DG 600M2
SA2 DG 600M2R
-
PE
L2
14
L3
PE
SA2 DG K00M3R
-
14
14
11
11
12
12
RC
RC
PE
SA2 DF 600M2
SA2 DF K00M2
SA2 DG K00M3
PE
PEN
PE
SA2 4P A320R
L3
11
PE
L3
PE
14
PE
L2
PE
PEN
L3
PE
SA2 3N A320
L1
L2
PE
SA2 3P A320
N
SA2 2P A320R
N
L1
PE
14
PE
SA2 1N A320R
L/N
12
PEN
SA2 2P A320
11
PE
L3
L2
L3
RC
RC
PE
SA2 1N A320
L/N
SA2 1P A320R
L1
L2
14
PEN
L1
12
SA0 3P A320R
SA1 4P A320R
N
L3
11
RC
SA0 2P A320R
L2
14
PE
L1
11
PE
SA0 1P A320R
SA1 3N A320R
L3
14
RC
PE
L2
PE
PE
SA2 DF 600M3
SA2 DF K00M3
SA2 DF K20M3
PE
T.C.
T.C.
T.C.
T.C.
T.C.
PE
14-7

TYPE
with relay output
SA1 1P A320R
SA1 1N A320R
230
230
SA1 2P A320R
SA1 3P A320R
SA1 3N A320R
SA1 4P A320R
230 / 400
230 / 400
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES
SPD per IEC/EN 61643-11
Type 1 and 2 (Test class I and II)
IEC rated voltage Un
VAC
IEC maximum continuous voltageUc
230
VAC / VDC
230 / 400
320 / 420
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350) (L-N/N-PE)
kA
25
25 / 50
25 per pole
25 per pole
25 / 100
25 per pole
IEC max impulse current Imax (8/20) (L-N/N-PE)
kA
100
100 / 100
100 per pole
100 per pole
100 / 100
100 per pole
IEC rated discharge current In (8/20) (L-N/N-PE)
kA
25
25 / 50
25 per pole
25 per pole
25 / 100
25 per pole
IEC voltage protection level Up (L-N/N-PE)
kV
< 1.3
< 1.4 / < 1.5
< 1.4
< 1.4
< 1.4 / < 1.75
< 1.4
Temporary overvoltage (TOV) Ut (L-N for 5s)

IEC residual voltage Ures (L-N/N-PE) at 3kA (8/20)
VAC
335
kV
0.9
0.9 / 0.2
0.9
0.9
0.9 / 0.2
0.9
IEC follow current If (N-PE)
Arms
>100
>100
Tripping time ta (L-N/N-PE)
ns
< 25
< 25 / 100
< 25
< 25
< 25 / 100
< 25
Thermal isolation protection
Yes
IEC backup protection fuse

(supply > 250A) (L-N/N-PE)
250
(gL/gG class)
IEC maximum short-circuit current
kA
25 / 50 Hz
Status indicator - operating / failure
Colour
/ Red
CONNECTIONS
IP20
Terminal tightening torque
Nm
mm2
25 (flexible) / 35 (rigid)
RELAY OUTPUT FOR REMOTE STATUS INDICATION

Type of contact
Changeover (NO/NC - SPDT)
Contact capacity
0.5A 250VAC; 3A 125VAC; 0.1A 250VDC; 0.2A 125VDC
Contact terminal tightening torque
Nm
0.25
Maximum contact conductor section
mm2
1.5
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
14
-40.+80
Fixing
Housing material
Termoplastic, RAL 7035, UL 94 V-0
TYPE
with relay output
SA0 1P A320R
SA0 1N A320R
230
230
SA0 2P A320R
SA0 3P A320R
SA0 3N A320R
SA0 4P A320R
230 / 400
230 / 400
IEC Rated voltage Un
IEC maximum continuous voltage Uc
Type 1, 2 and 3 (Test class I, II and II)

VAC
230
VAC / VDC
230 / 400
320 / 420
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350) (L-N/N-PE)
kA
12.5
12.5 / 50
12.5 per pole
12.5 per pole
12.5 / 50
12.5 per pole
IEC max discharge current Imax (8/20) (L-N/N-PE)
kA
60
60 / 50
60 per pole
60 per pole
60 / 50
60 per pole
IEC rated discharge current In (8/20) (L-N/N-PE)
kA
25
25 / 30
25 per pole
25 per pole
25 / 30
25 per pole
< 1.5
< 1.5 / < 1.7
< 1.5
0.8
IEC combined surge Uoc/Isc (1.2/50, 8/20)

IEC voltage level protection Up (L-N/N-PE)
IEC temporary overvoltage (TOV) Ut (L-N for 5s)
kV/kA
kV
10 / 5
< 1.5
< 1.5 / < 1.7
< 1.5
VAC
335
kV
0.8
0.8 / 0.2
0.8
0.8
0.8 / 0.2
Arms
>100
>100
ns
< 25
< 25 / 100
< 25
< 25
< 25 / 100
< 25
Yes
IEC backup fuse (supply >160A) (L-N/N-PE)
160 (gL/gG class)
IEC maximum short-circuit current
kA
25 / 50 Hz
Colour
/ Red
CONNECTIONS
IP20
Nm
mm2

Type of contact
Contact capacity

A
0.5A at 250VAC; 3A at 125VAC; 0.1A at 250VDC; 0.2A at 125VDC
Nm
0.25
mm2
1.5
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Fixing
Housing material
14-8
-40.+80
Thermoplastic, RAL 7035, UL 94 V-0

TYPE
without relay output

with relay output
SA2 1P A320
SA2 1N A320
SA2 2P A320
SA2 3P A320
SA2 3N A320
SA2 4P A320
SA2 1P A320R
SA2 1N A320R
SA2 2P A320R
SA2 3P A320R
SA2 3N A320R
SA2 4P A320R
230
230
230
230 / 400
230 / 400
230 / 400
Type 2 (Test Class II)
IEC rated voltage Un
VAC
IEC maximum continuous voltage Uc
VAC / VDC
320 / 420
IEC max discharge current Imax (8/20) (L-N/N-PE)
kA
40
40 / 40
40 per pole
40 per pole
40 / 40
40 per pole
IEC rated impulse current In (8/20) (L-N/N-PE)
kA
20
20 / 20
20 per pole
20 per pole
20 / 20
20 per pole
IEC voltage protection level Up (L-N/N-PE)
kV
< 1.5
< 1.5 / < 2
< 1.5
< 1.5
< 1.5 / <2
< 1.5
IEC temporary overvoltage (TOV) Ut (L-N for 5s)

VAC
335
kV
0.95
0.95 / 0.1
0.95
0.95
0.95 / 0.1
0.95
Arms
>100
>100
ns
< 25
< 25 / 100
< 25
< 25
< 25 / 100
< 25
Yes
IEC backup protection fuse

(supply > 125A) (L-N/N-PE)
IEC maximum short-circruit current 50Hz
kA
125
(gL/gG class)
25
Green / Red
CONNECTIONS
IP20
Nm
mm2

Type of contact
Contact capacity
0.5A at 250VAC; 3A at 125VAC; 0.1A at 250VDC; 0.2A at 125VDC
Nm
0.25
mm2
1.5
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-40.+80
Fixing
Housing material
TYPE

without relay output
14
SA2 DF 600M2 SA2 DF 600M3 SA2 DF K00M2 SA2 DF K00M3 SA2 DF K20M3 SA2 DG 600M2 SA2 DG K00M3
with relay output
Yes
Yes
SA2 DG 600M2R SA2 DG K00M3R
SPD per EN 50539-11
Type 2 (Test class II)
UL Recognized for USA and Canada
Yes
Rated voltage Un (EN) / MCOV (UL)
VDC
600
600
1000
1000
1200
600
1000
Maximum continuous voltage Ucpv (EN/UL)
VDC
600
600
1000
1000
1200
600
1000
40
30
30
40
40
30
30
50
20
50
Maximum discharge current Imax (8/20) EN

UL
Rated discharge current In (8/20)
EN
UL
kA/pole
kA/pole
20
20
20
20
20
15
15
20
10
20
<2.0
<3.0
<4.0
<4.0
<4.0
<1.9
<3.6
Voltage protection level Up (EN) / VPR (UL)
kV
EN residual voltage Ures at 5kA (8/20)
kV
Tripping time ta
ns
< 25
Yes
EN maximum short-circuit current Iscpv
1000
100
EN backup protection fuse (Isc > 100A)
100A gPV
Colour
/ Red
Green / Red
Nm
3 (26lbin)
mm2
Status indication operating / failure

CONNECTIONS
EN degree of protection
IP20
3
1.5-25 (flexible / stranded) / AWG 16-3 - 1.5-35 (rigid / solid) AWG 16-2

Type of contact, if any
Contact capacity
Changeover (1NO/1NC SPDT)

A
0.5A 250VAC; 3A 125VAC; 0.1A 250VDC; 0.2A 125VDC
Nm / lbin
0.25 / 2.2
mm / AWG
1.5 / 16
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Fixing
Housing material
-40.+80C
14-9
Page 15-2
TWO POLES
IEC rated current Ith: 20A (AC1)
IEC operational power: 1.3kW (AC3 230V)
Ideal for domestic applications.
Page 15-2
THREE AND FOUR POLES
IEC rated current Ith:
25A, 40A and 63A (AC1)
IEC operational power:
4kW, 11kW and 15kW (AC3 400V)
Ideal for civil or industrial installations,
such as office buildings, stores, hospitals,
hotels, etc.
15
MODULAR CONTACTORS
Two, three and four-pole versions,

20A to 63A
Very silent during operation or
control stage
Operation flag indicator
Modular contactors
Contactors ........................................................................................................................................................................
Add-on blocks and accessories ..........................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
15 - 2
15 - 3
C IRCUIT
PROTECTION AND
I SOLATION
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 15 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 15 - 4
Modular contactors
CN contactors
Order code
Rated
auxiliary
supply voltage
Configura- Qty
tion and n per
of contacts pkg
[V]
NO
NC n
Wt
[kg]
One-pole or two-pole.
CN20 11 024 24VAC/DC
1 10
0.135
CN20 11 220 220-230VAC 1
1 10
0.135
CN20 20 024 24VAC/DC
10
0.135
CN20 20 220 220-230VAC 2
10
0.135
Order code
CN20...
Rated
Configura- Q.ty
auxiliary
tion and n per
supply voltage of contacts pkg
Wt
[V]
[kg]
NO
NC n
24VAC/DC
230V
400V
[kW]
[kW]
[A]
CN20...
20
1.3
20
0.260
CN25...
25
2.2
35
40
5.5
11
63
63
8.5
15
80
CN25 10 220
220-230VAC 4
0.260
CN40...
CN25 01 024
24VAC/DC
1 5
0.260
CN63...
CN25 01 220
220-230VAC 3
1 5
0.260
Noise level:
Closed contactor 20dB
Making/breaking operation 50dB
Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60175).
CN40 10 024
24VAC/DC
0.425
CN40 10 220
220-230VAC 4
0.425
CN40 01 024
24VAC/DC
1 5
0.425
CN40 01 220
220-230VAC 3
1 5
0.425
Three-pole or four-pole.
CN63 10 024
24VAC/DC
0.425
CN63 10 220
220-230VAC 4
0.425
CN63 01 024
24VAC/DC
1 5
0.425
CN63 01 220
220-230VAC 3
1 5
0.425
15
CN40...
Protection
fuse
gG (IEC)
[A]
CN25...
IEC conventional IEC cperating
Type
free-air thermal power
current Ith
in AC3
in AC1
CN25 10 024
DC powered magnetic core system assuring silent
operation and noise damping during the control phase
Overvoltage protection circuit and voltage peak limitation
of the magnetic core
Equipped with 2 or 4 closing contacts of equal capacity
permitting use in power or auxiliary circuits
Operation flag indicator
Fast mounting.
Other voltages on request. Consult Customer Service; see contact details on

inside front cover.
2NC version supplied on request.
The last (NC) pole has the same characteristics as the power pole. It can
therefore be used indifferently as an auxiliary or as a NC power contact.
The fourth NO or NC pole has the same characteristics as the power poles;
therefore it can be used indifferently as auxiliary or as power contact.
On request CN25 and CN40 contactors in the following versions can be
supplied: 2NO + 2NC or 4NC power poles. Consult Customer Service; see
Can also operate at 220VDC.
No auxiliary contacts can be mounted.
When contactors are mounted side by side and operate in

continuous service (1 hour), spacing is needed between
equipment to consent appropriate cooling.
9mm spacing is required; there is an accessory, called
half-module spacer, order code CNX 80, for this specific
type of mounting. The following table indicates details of
the space needed between each.
Maximum number of contactors to be mounted
side-by-side without spacing; the CNX 80 spacer is
required when the number of pieces is more than the
indicated below:
CN20
CN25
CN40
CN63
Ambient
temperature
40C
Ambient
temperature
>40...55C
Operational characteristics of contactor-incorporated

auxiliary contacts
Type
IEC insulation IEC rating (AC15 category)
voltage Ui
230V
400V
CN63...
[V]
[A]
[A]
CN20...
440
CN25...
440
CN40...
500
CN63...
500

IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61095.
Utilisation
Lighting systems
Electric home heating
Heat pumps
Conditioning
Ventilation
Civil installations.
Lighting circuit switching
See page 15-6.
15-2
page 15-3
Dimensions
page 15-4
Wiring diagrams
page 15-4
page 15-5 to 7
Modular contactors
Add-on blocks and
accessories
Order code Characteristics
Max
qty per
contactor
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Auxiliary contacts.
CNH 11
1NO + 1NC
0.044
CNH 20
2NO
0.044
Set for terminal protection (also sealable).
CNH...
CNP 0
For CN20
0.001
CNP 1
For CN25
0.002
CNP 2
For CN40
and CN63
0.003
1/2 module wide
10
0.013
Operational characteristics for auxiliary contacts

IEC rated insulation voltage: 440VAC
Minimum switching capacity: 5mA 12V
Conductor section: 1...2.5mm2
Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm.
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61095.
Spacer.
CNX 80
Not suitable for CN20 modular contactors.

Set of 2 pieces.
Mounting
Fasten the CNH... auxiliary contact by slightly pressing it
in place.
CNP2
Removal
Release the catch using a screwdriver.
15
Dimensions
page 15-4
Wiring diagrams
page 15-4
15-3
Modular contactors
Dimensions (mm [in])
CN25...
(1
45
84
(3.31)
45
(1.77)
ADD-ON BLOCKS
Contact blocks
CNH...
Spacer
CNX80
60
(2.26)
43
(0.69)
9
(0.35)
67
(2.64)
45
(1.77)
84
(3.31)
45
(1.77)
10
(0.39)
5.5
(0.22)
5.5
(0.22)
5.5
(0.22)
5.5
(0.22)
2
(0.08)
Wiring diagrams
TWO-POLE MODULAR CONTACTORS
THREE AND FOUR-POLE MODULAR CONTACTORS
CN20 11
CN25 01
CN40 01
CN63 01
CN20 20
CN25 10
CN40 10
CN63 10
A1
21
A1
A1
21
A1
13 (7)
A2
22
A2
A2
22
A2
14 (8)
15
The NC contact has the same characteristics as the power pole contact. Therefore, it can be used
indifferently as an auxiliary or as a NC power pole contact.
The fourth pole NO or NC has the same characteristics as the power poles. Therefore, it can be
used indifferently as auxiliary or as power pole contact.

CNH11
CNH20
63
63
53
51
52
54
64
15-4
64
60
(2.26)
43
(0.69)
53.5
(2.11)
35
(1.38)
84
(3.31)
17.5
(0.69)
CN40...
CN63...
60
(2.26)
43
(0.69)
84
(3.31)
60
(2.26)
43
(0.69)
45
(1 77)
CONTACTORS
CN20...
Modular contactors
TYPE
CN20...
CN25...
CN40...
CN63...
IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith (40C)
20
25
40
63
230
440
440
440
kV
Minimum switching capacity
17V, 50mA
17V, 50mA
17V, 50mA
17V, 50mA
Average coil consumption in-rush and holding
2.5
Maximum tightening torque for

coil terminals
Nm
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
lbft
0.44
0.44
0.44
0.44
Tool
PZ1
PZ1
PZ2
PZ2
Coil conductor section
min.
mm2
max.
mm2

for power terminals
Power conductor section
1
2,5
Nm
1.2
1,2
lbft
0.9
0.9
1.48
1.48
PZ2
Tool
PZ1
PZ1
PZ2
min.
mm2
2.5
2.5
max.
mm2
25
25
pick-up
% Us
85-110
drop-out
% Us
20-25
AC/DC CONTROL CIRCUIT

Operating voltage
limits
OPERATING TIMES
Average time
closing NO
ms
15-45
15-45
15-20
15-20
opening NO
ms
25-50
20-70
35-45
35-45
LIFE
Mechanical
cycles
3,000,000
3,000,000
3,000,000
3,000,000
Electrical (in AC3 duty)
cycles
300,000
500,000
150,000
150,000
Electrical (in AC1 duty)
cycles
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-5...+55
Storage temperature
-30...+80
15
15-5
Modular contactors
LIGHTING CIRCUIT SWITCHING
Lamp features
INCANDESCENT AND TUNGSTEN

HALOGEN
ENERGY SAVING
FLUORESCENT
not corrected and series correction
FLUORESCENT
DUO circuit (lead-lag)
15
FLUORESCENT
corrected
ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT BALLAST

not corrected

corrected
15-6
Lamp
power
Retd
current
Capacitor
power
Maximum number [n] of lamps each contactor pole

230V 50Hz
[W]
[A]
[F]
CN20
CN25
CN40
CN63
60
0.26
23
29
65
85
100
0.43
14
16
40
50
200
0.87
20
25
500
2.17
10
1000
4.35
0,03
50
60
150
200
0.04
45
55
135
180
0.055
40
50
12
160
0.065
35
45
110
150
0.075
30
40
100
140
10
0.08
30
40
100
140
11
009
30
40
100
140
12
0.10
25
35
95
120
14
0.11
25
35
90
120
15
0.12
20
30
85
115
16
0.13
20
30
80
105
18
0.145
18
26
70
95
20
0.16
17
22
65
85
21
0.17
15
20
60
80
23
0.185
15
20
60
70
24
0.195
15
20
55
70
30
0.16
15
20
55
70
18
0.37
22
24
90
140
24
0.35
22
24
90
140
36
0.43
17
20
65
95
58
0.67
14
17
45
70
18
0.11
30
40
100
150
24
0.14
24
31
78
118
36
0.22
17
24
65
95
58
0.35
10
14
40
60
18
0.12
4.5
48
73
24
0.15
4.5
48
73
36
0.2
4.5
48
73
58
0.32
31
47
1 x 18
0.09
25
35
100
140
1 x 36
0.16
15
20
52
75
1 x 58
0.25
14
19
50
72
2 x 18
0.17
12
17
50
70
2 x 36
0.32
10
26
38
2 x 58
0.49
25
36
50
0.61
14
18
38
55
80
0.8
10
13
29
42
125
1.15
20
29
250
2.15
10
15
400
3.25
10
700
5.4
1000
7.5
50
0.28
31
47
80
0.41
27
41
125
0.65
10
22
33
250
1.22
18
12
18
400
1.95
25
13
700
3.45
45
1000
4.8
60
Modular contactors
Lamp features
METAL HALIDE
not corrected
METAL HALIDE
corrected

not corrected

corrected

not corrected

corrected
LED LIGHTING BALLAST
Lamp
power
Retd
current
Capacitor
power
Maximum number [n] of lamps each contactor pole

230V 50Hz
[W]
[A]
[F]
CN20
CN25
CN40
CN63
35
0.53
18
22
43
60
70
10
12
23
32
150
1.8
12
18
250
10
400
3.5
1000
9.5
2000
16.5
35
0.25
36
50
70
0.45
12
18
25
150
0.75
20
11
15
250
1.5
33
400
2.5
35
1000
5.8
95
2000
11.5
148
150
1.8
17
22
13
250
10
400
4.7
1000
10.3
150
0.83
20
11
16
250
1.5
33
10
400
2.4
48
1000
6.3
106
18
0.35
22
27
71
90
35
1.5
23
30
55
1.5
23
30
90
2.4
14
19
135
3.5
10
13
180
3.3
10
13
18
0.35
44
66
35
0.31
20
11
16
55
0.42
20
11
16
90
0.63
26
12
135
0.94
45
180
1.16
40
N=2400/In
N=3800/In
N=5600/In
N=11000/In
10V, 12V, 24V,...; 350mA, 500mA, 750mA...

N = Number of controlled ballasts
In = Ballast rated current in mA
15
Example of calculation with 500mA ballast:

Considering type CN40, then N = 5600 / 500 = 11.2.
Therefore, the maximum number of ballasts which each CN40 power pole can be connected to and control is 11.
15-7
Page 16-3
Page 16-2
FLUSH-MOUNT VERSION
R1D type
1 operation threshold
External toroidal transformer
Adjustable tripping IDn and delay time.
FLUSH-MOUNT VERSION
R2D type
2 operation thresholds
Configurable fail safe operation
R3D type
Flag indicator
Page 16-2
MODULAR VERSION
RM1 type
Fixed tripping IDn and delay time.
Page 16-2
MODULAR VERSION
RMT type
Incorporated toroidal transformer
RM type
Page 16-3
TOROIDAL CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
RT type
Solid core
35mm to 210mm diameter.
RTA type
Split core
110mm and 210mm diameter.
Page 16-3
EXTERNAL MULTIPLIER
RX10 type
10-fold multiplier.
Page 16-3
FLUSH-MOUNT VERSION
R4D type
Fault current measurement
Digital display
Flag indicator
Shunt tripping circuit
Page 16-2
COMPACT INTERNAL PANEL VERSION
RC type
Incorporated toroidal transformer
16
EARTH LEAKAGE RELAYS
Modular, flush and internal panel

mount version, with or without flag
indicator, configurable prealarm
indication and fail safe operation
Versions with automatic toroid
connection control
Choice of supply voltage ranges
Adjustable fault current IDn
Adjustment and choice of tripping
range for both fault current and
delay time.

With 1 operation threshold ................................................................................................................................................
With 2 operation thresholds ...............................................................................................................................................
Toroidal current transformers ............................................................................................................................................
External multiplier .............................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
16
16
16
16
2
3
3
3
AND
I SOLATION
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 16 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 16 - 5

Relays with
Order code
Rated auxiliary
supply voltage
Output
contacts
[V]
SPDT
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
1 OPERATION THRESHOLD.
Flush mount. External CT.
R1D 48
24-48VAC/DC
0.280
R1D 415
110-240-415V
0.280
Earth leakage relay type A
Green power LED indicator (ON)
Red relay tripped LED indicator (TRIP)
Front TEST and RESET buttons
Configurable automatic or manual resetting
Flush mount 96x96mm housing with transparent cover
IEC degree of protection: IP20 terminals, IP40 on front
with cover.
ADJUSTMENTS FOR R1D
Configurable tripping 0.025-0.25A
set-point (IDn):
0.25-2.5A
2.5-25A
25-250A (with external
multiplier RX10)
Configurable tripping 0.02-0.5s
delay time (t):
0.2-5s
Supply voltage:
110-125VAC (50/60Hz)/DC
220-240VAC (50/60Hz)
380-415VAC (50/60Hz).
R1D...
Reference standards
Order code
Rated auxiliary
supply voltage
Output
contacts
[V]
SPDT
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Modular, 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail mounting.
External CT. Fixed tripping set point and time.
RM1...
RM1 48
24-48VAC/DC
0.175
RM1 415
110-240-415V
AC
0.175
External CT.
31 RM 48
24-48VAC/DC
0.190
31 RM 415
110-240-415V
0.190
28mm/1.1 incorporated CT. Configurable fail safe.
31 RM...
16
31 RMT 48
24-48VAC/DC
0.375
31 RMT 415
110-240-415V
0.375
Configurable fail safe operation for RMT type only
Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module, with
transparent cover, suitable for fixing on 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715)
with cover.
SETTINGS FOR RM1
Selectable tripping set-point (IDn): fixed 0.3A or 0.5A
Selectable tripping time (t): fixed 0.02s or 0.5s
ADJUSTMENTS FOR RM AND RMT
set-point (IDn):
0.25-2.5A
2.5-25A
multiplier RX10 for RM only)
delay time (t):
0.2-5s
Reference standards
Supply voltage:
110-125VAC (50/60Hz)/DC
220-240VAC (50/60Hz)
380-415VAC (50/60Hz).
2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT).
31 RMT...
Order code
Rated auxiliary
supply voltage
Output
contacts
[V]
SPDT
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Compact panel mount. CT incorporated.
31 RC60...
31 RC 48
24-48VAC/DC
0.485
31 RC 415
110-240-415V
0.485
Supply voltage:
110-125VAC (50/60Hz)/DC
220-240VAC (50/60Hz)
380-415VAC (50/60Hz).
Replace with the digit of the required diameter (35-60-80-110mm/
1.38-2.36-3.15-4.33).
Compact housing for fixing on panel mounting plate
IEC degree of protection: IP20 terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS FOR RC
set-point (IDn):
0.25-2.5A
2.5-25A
delay time (t):
0.2-5s
Reference standards
31 RC110...
16-2
Dimensions
page 16-4
Wiring diagrams
page 16-5
page 16-6 and 7

Relays with
Ordering
code
Rated auxiliary
supply voltage
Output
contacts
[V]
SPDT
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
2 OPERATION THRESHOLDS.
Flush mount. External CT. Fail safe.
R2D 48
24-48VAC/DC
0.395
R2D 415
110-240-415V 2
0.395
Fail safe. Flag Indicator.
R2D...
R3D 48
24-48VAC/DC
0.405
R3D 415
110-240-415V 2
0.405
Fault current measurement. Digital display.
Fail safe. Flag indicator.
R4D 48
24-48VAC/DC
0.570
R4D 415
110-240-415V 2
0.570
Supply voltage:
110-125VAC (50/60Hz)
220-240VAC (50/60Hz)
380-415VAC (50/60Hz).
2 output relays each with changeover contact,
configurable 2 tripping or 1 tripping and 1 alarm
Configurable fail safe prealarm and operation
Automatic toroid connection control
Red tripping prealarm LED indicator (ALARM)
Front TEST button
Manual resetting by front RESET button or remote
contact closing
Automatic resetting by remote contact closing or rear
jumper connection
Constant toroid-relay circuit control
Flag indicator (TRIP MEMORY) (R3D-R4D only)
Digital fault current measurement and display with
configurable tripping value memory (R4D only)
Shunt tripping circuit operating test (TCS) (R4D only)
Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78x3.78 housing with
transparent cover
with cover.
ADJUSTMENTS FOR R2D and R3D
set-point (IDn):
0.25-2.5A
2.5-25A
multiplier RX10)
Prealarm set-point:
fixed 70%
delay time (t):
0.2-5s
R3D...
ADJUSTMENTS FOR R4D

set-point (IDn):
0.3-3A
3-30A
multiplier RX10)
Prealarm set-point:
fixed 70%
delay time (t):
0.3-5s
R4D...
Reference standards
Toroidal current
transformers
Order code
Diameter
Openable
[mm/in]
31 RT...
31 RT...
External multiplier
Qty
per
pkg
Wt.
[kg]
31 RT 35
35/1.38
No
0.200
31 RT 60
60/2.36
No
0.245
31 RT 80
80/3.15
No
0.410
31 RT 110
110/4.33
No
0.400
31 RT 210
210/8.27
No
1.200
31 RTA 110
110/4.33
Yes
0.540
31 RTA 210
210/8.27
Yes
1.820
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
31 RX 10
10-fold multiplier suitable

for R1D, RM, R2D, R3D
and R4D types only
0.300
Dimensions
page 16-4
Wiring diagrams
page 16-5
Reference standards
16
Dimensions: refer to RT35 toroidal transformer on
page 16-4.
To connect between toroid and relay.
Reference standards
page 16-6 and 7
16-3

RELAYS
R1D - R2D - R3D
R4D
96
(3.78)
56
(2.20)
Cutout
16
(0.63)
96
(3.78)
19
(0.75)
85
(3.35)
91
(3.58)
19
(0.75)
RM1 - RM
RMT
67 6
(2.64)
43
(1.69)
45
(1.77)
89
(3.50)
45
(1.77)
91
(3.58)
RC
67
(2.64)
43
(1.69)
105
(4.13)
89
(3.50)
52
(2.05)
90
(3.54)
66
(2.60)
96
(3.78)
90
(3.54)
96
(3.78)
R3
(0.12)
D
5
(0.20)
27
(1.06)
5
(0.20)
(1 28.
.12 5
)
G
C
5 (0.20)
F
TYPE
RC35
RC60
RC80
RC110
TOROIDAL TRANSFORMERS AND MULTIPLIER

RT35 - RT60 - RT80 - RT110 - RX10
A
A
100 (3.94)
100 (3.94)
150 (5.90)
150 (5.90)
B
110 (4.33)
110 (4.33)
160 (6.30)
160 (6.30)
C
70 (2.75)
70 (2.75)
70 (2.75)
70 (2.75)
D
35 (1.38)
60 (2.36)
80 (3.15)
110 (4.33)
E
47 (1.85)
47 (1.85)
70 (2.75)
70 (2.75)
F
60 (2.36)
60 (2.36)
110 (4.33)
110 (4.33)
G
60 (2.36)
60 (2.36)
60 (2.36)
60 (2.36)
H
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
RT210 - RTA210
A
16
5 (0.20)
F
G
B
G
C
RTA110
H
E
5 (0.20)
F
With screws, for RTA210 split-core type; fixed structure, without screws, for RT210 type.
G
C
5 (0.20)
F
A
TYPE
RT35
RT60
RT80
RT110
RT210
RTA110
RTA210
RX10
16-4
A
100 (3.94)
100 (3.94)
150 (5.90)
150 (5.90)
310 (12.20)
180 (7.09)
310 (12.20)
100 (3.94)
B
110 (4.33)
110 (4.33)
160 (6.30)
160 (6.30)
290 (11.41)
150 (5.90)
290 (11.41)
110 (4.33)
C
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
54 (2.12)
45 (1.77)
54 (2.12)
50 (1.97)
D
35 (1.38)
60 (2.36)
80 (3.15)
110 (4.33)
210 (8.27)
110 (4.33)
210 (8.27)
E
47 (1.85)
47 (1.85)
70 (2.75)
70 (2.75)
145 (5.71)
75 (2.95)
145 (5.71)
F
60 (2.36)
60 (2.36)
110 (4.33)
110 (4.33)
240 (9.45)
110 (4.33)
240 (9.45)
60 (2.36)
G
43 (1.69)
43 (1.69)
43 (1.69)
43 (1.69)
280 (11.02)
38 (1.50)
280 (11.02)
43 (1.69)
H
30 (1.18)
30 (1.18)
30 (1.18)
30 (1.18)
36 (1.42)
25 (0.98)
36 (1.42)
30 (1.18)
258 (10.16)
145 (5.71)
258 (10.16)

Wiring diagrams
RELAYS
R1D
GRD
R2D
GRD
Line
Line
N L1L2 L3
N L1L2 L3
Us
Us
9 8 7 6 5 4
8 7 6 5
12 11 10
3 2 1
R2D
R1D
Trip
Trip
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5-6 - 24VAC/DC
5-7 - 48VAC/DC
1
2
5-6 - 110-125VAC/DC
5-7 - 220-240VAC
5-8 - 380-415VAC
11
12
13
14
15
16
1-2 - 24VAC/DC
1-3 - 48VAC/DC
1-2 - 110-125VAC
2-3 - 220-240VAC
1-3 - 380-415VAC
Remote
control
Load
Load
Alarm/Trip
The coil connection can vary depending on the connected type of device (contactor, breaker with shunt trip release or breaker with undervoltage trip release).
R3D
GRD
Line
N L1L2 L3
Us
9 8 7 6 5 4
3 2 1
R3D
Trip Alarm/Trip
1
2
3
4
11
12
13
14
15
16
1-2 - 24VAC/DC
1-3 - 48VAC/DC
1-2 - 110-125VAC
2-3 - 220-240VAC
1-3 - 380-415VAC
**
Remote
control
Load
**
Flag indicator
R4D
RM - RM1
GRD
GRD
Line
Line
N L1L2 L3
N L1L2 L3
16
Us
Us
TCS control
19
18
17
9 8 7 6 5 4
14 12 10
3 2 1
RM
R4D
Type
Us
Us
Wiring
TCS
Wiring
R4D 48
24VAC/DC
48VAC/DC
1-2
1-3
17-18
17-19
R4D 415
110-125VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
1-2
2-3
1-3
17-18
17-18
17-19
1-2 - 24VAC/DC
1-3 - 48VAC/DC
Trip Alarm/Trip
11
12
13
14
15
16
1-2 - 110-125VAC
2-3 - 220-240VAC
1-3 - 380-415VAC
TCS
1
2
16
17
18
7-5 - 24VAC/DC
7-3 - 48VAC/DC
Trip
7-1 - 380-415VAC
7-3 - 220-240VAC
7-5 - 110-125VAC/DC
Load
Flag indicator
**
TCS: Shunt circuit test control
Remote
control
Load
**
22 2120
1
2
3
4
7 5 3 1
RMT
GRD
RC
Line
GRD
5-4 - 24VAC/DC
5-3 - 48VAC/DC
N L1 L2 L3
Line
N L1L2 L3
5-1 - 380-415VAC
5-3 - 220-240VAC
5-4 - 110-125VAC/DC
Us
Us
10 11 12
RMT
14 15 16
6 5 4
RC
2 1 0
0-1 - 24VAC/DC
0-2 - 48VAC/DC
Trip
1
Trip
0-1 - 110-125VAC/DC
0-2 - 220-240VAC
0-3 - 380-415VAC
3 4 5
Load
Load
16-5

TYPE
R1D
R2D
R3D
R4D
DESCRIPTION
Flush mount with
transparent cover,
1 operating threshold
Flush mount with transparent

Flush mount with transparent Flush mount with display and cover,
2 operating thresholds - constant
cover, 2 operating thresholds
cover, 2 operating thresholds
constant toroid-relay circuit control constant toroid-relay circuit control
toroid-relay circuit control
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Toroidal transformer
External
(see types given
on page 16-3)
Adjustments
0.025-0.25A (x0.1)
0.25-2.5A (x1)
2.5-25A (x10)
25-250A (external multiplier)
Tripping set-point (IDn)
Prealarm set-point
Tripping delay time (t)
70% IDn (fixed)
Shunt circuit control
70% IDn (fixed)
0.02-0.5s (tx1)
0.2-5s (tx10)
Selection of multiplier for IDn and t

Resetting
0.03-0,3A (x0.1)
0.3-3A (x1)
3-30A (x10)
70% IDn (fixed)
0.03-0,5s (tx1)
0.3-5s (tx10)
By dip switches
Automatic by remote contact closing or rear jumper connection
Manual by button on front or remote contact closing
Configurable automatic
or manual by
button on front
Yes
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Auxiliary voltage Us
(0.85 - 1.1 Us limit)
24-48VAC/DC
110-125VAC/DC
220-240/380-415VAC
110-125/220-240/380-415VAC
Rated frequency
Power consumption (maximum)
50/60Hz
5.5VA
4.5VA
4.5VA
5.5VA
Normally de-energised
Configurable normally
de-energised or
energised
de-energised or
energised
de-energised or
energised
RELAY OUTPUTS
State
Contact arrangement
1 changeover SPDT (trip)
2 changeover SPDT each (configurable: 2 trip or 1 trip and 1 alarm)
Rated contact capacity IEC Ith
5A - 250VAC
Electrical life
3 x 105 cycles
Mechanical life
50 x 106 cycles
INSULATION
16
Power frequency withstand

voltage
2.5kV
INDICATIONS
Auxiliaty voltage available (ON)
Green LED
Relay tripping (TRIP)
Red LED
Trip prealarm (ALARM)
Red LED
Red LED
Red LED
Mechanical (TRIP MEMORY)
Flag indicator
Flag indicator
Shunt circuit tripping (TCS)
Red LED
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals
Fixed
Removable, plug-in
Tightening torque maximum
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-10...+60C
Storage temperature
-20...+80C
Relative humidity
90%
HOUSING
Material
Type A, sensitive to residual sinusoidal AC and pulsating DC currents.
Remote resetting by removing power for more than 1 second.
Digital display of fault current measurement and tripping value memory.
16-6
Self-extinguishing polycarbonate

RM1...
RM...
RMT...
RC...
Modular with transparent cover,



Compact,
External
(see types given on page 16-3)
External
(see types given on page 16-3)
Incorporated 28mm/1.1
Incorporated
35-60-80-110mm/
1.38-2.36-3.15-4.33
standard diameter
0.3A or 0.5A only
0.025-0.25A (x0.1)
0.25-2.5A (x1)
2.5-25A (x10)
0.025-0.25A (x0.1)
0.25-2.5A (x1)
2.5-25A (x10)
0.025-0.25A (x0.1)
0.25-2.5A (x1)
2.5-25A (x10)
0.02s or 0.5s only
0.02-0.5s (tx1)
0.2-5s (tx10)
0.02-0.5s (tx1)
0.2-5s (tx10)
0.02-0.5s (tx1)
0.2-5s (tx10)
de-energised or
energised
2 changeover SPDT each (both trip)
By dip switches
Configurable A: Automatic or
M: Manual by button on front
24-48VAC/DC
110-125VAC/DC
220-240/380-415VAC
50/60Hz
3VA
5A - 250VAC
3x105 cycles
50x106 cycles
2.5kV
16
Green LED
Red LED
Fixed
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG)
-10...+60C
-20...+80C
90%
Type A, sensitive to residual sinusoidal AC and pulsating DC currents.
16-7
Page 17-2
MODULAR TIME RELAYS
Suitable for modular-slot switchboards
Selectable time ranges on front:
0.1 second - 100 days
LED indication
Mounting on 35mm DIN rail
Screw terminals.
Page 17-5
PLUG-IN AND FLUSH-MOUNT TIME
RELAYS, 48X48MM
Flush and internal panel mounting
Time ranges: 0.05 seconds - 10 hours
LED indication
8 and 11-pin sockets for panel mounting.
TIME
17
RELAYS
Modular version for modular-slot

switchboards, also suitable for rear
mounting plate fixing
Plug-in or flush-mount version
Vast range of functions and time
scales
Reliable time and repeat accuracy.
Modular version
On delay. Mutiscale. Multivoltage .......................................................................................................................................
Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage. 1 changeover contact ...........................................................................................
Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage. 1 changeover contact and 1 normally open contact ................................................
Recycle, independent timings. Multiscale. Multivoltage ......................................................................................................
Off delay. Multiscale. Multivoltage ......................................................................................................................................
For starting. Multiscale. Multivoltage .................................................................................................................................
For staircase .....................................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
17
17
17
17
17
5
5
5
5
5
Plug-in and flush-mount version, 48x48mm/1.9x1.9

On delay. Single scale. Single voltage .................................................................................................................................
On delay. Multiscale. Multivoltage ......................................................................................................................................
On delay. Multiscale. Single voltage ...................................................................................................................................
Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage ..............................................................................................................................
Accessories ......................................................................................................................................................................
A UTOMATION
AND
C ONTROL
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 17 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 17 - 7
Time relays
Modular version
On delay time relay.
Multiscale. Multivoltage
Order code
Time of
scale
range
Rated
Qty
auxiliary
per
supply voltage pkg
Wt
TM P
0.1-1s
24-48VDC
1-10s
24-240VAC
6-60s
1-10min
6min-1h
1-10h
0.1-1 day
1-10 days
ON only
OFF only
[V]
[kg]
0.048
Order code
Time of
scale
range
TM M1
0.1-1s
12-240V
1-10s
AC/DC
6-60s
1-10min
6min-1h
1-10h
0.1-1 day
1-10 days
ON only
OFF only
Order code
Time of
scale
range
TM M2
0.1-1s
12-240V
1-10s
AC/DC
6-60s
1-10min
6min-1h
1-10h
0.1-1 day
1-10 days
ON only
OFF only
TM P
Multifunction time relay.

Multiscale. Multivoltage.
1 relay output
Rated
Qty
auxiliary
per
supply voltage pkg
Wt
[V]
[kg]
0.086
TM M1
17
Multifunction time relay.
Multiscale. Multivoltage.
2 relay outputs.
Rated
Qty
auxiliary
per
supply voltage pkg
Wt
[V]
[kg]
0.094
TM M2
17-2
Dimensions
page 17-6
Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage.
On delay, delay on make, with start at relay energising
1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch: 10-100%
Green LED indicator for power on
Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay
and steady when relay energised
Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module
IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
IP20 on terminals.
Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Timers.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61812-1, UL508, CSA
C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-7.
Electronic time relay, multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage
Enabling input
Selectable functions: (a) On delay; delay on make with
start at relay energising. (b) Pulse on relay energising
with start when energised. (c) Flasher starting with OFF
interval. Equal timing recycle. (d) Flasher starting with
ON interval. Equal timing recycle. (e) Off delay; relay
energising at external contact closing with start on
break. (f) Pulse on relay energising with start on external
contact closing. (g) Pulse on relay energising with start
on external contact opening. (h) On-off delay. Delay on
make, with start at external contact closing, and delay at
break, with start at external contact opening. (i) Internal
ON/OFF trigger with relay contact closing or operating at
each closing of an external contact. (j) Pulse generator,
unequal timing recycle; starting with OFF pulse time and
0.5s ON pulse.
Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module suitable for
fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
IP20 on terminals.
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-7.
Electronic time relay, multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage
Enabling input
2 relay outputs, one with 1 delayed changeover
(C/O-SPDT) contact and the other with 1 normally
open (N/O-SPST)) contact, programmable as
instantaneous or delayed
Selectable functions: (a) On delay; delay on make with
start at relay energising. (b) Pulse on relay energising
with start when energised. (c) Flasher starting with OFF
interval. Equal timing recycle. (d) Flasher starting with
ON interval. Equal timing recycle. (e) Off delay; relay
energising at external contact closing with start on break.
(f) Pulse on relay energising with start on external
contact closing. (g) Pulse on relay energising with start
on external contact opening. (h) On-off delay. Delay on
make, with start at external contact closing, and delay at
break, with start at external contact opening. (i) Internal
ON/OFF trigger with relay contact closing or operating at
each closing of an external contact. (j) Pulse generator,
unequal timing recycle; starting with OFF pulse time and
0.5s ON pulse.
IP20 on terminals.
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-8.
Wiring diagrams
page 17-7 and 8
page 17-12
Time relays
Modular version
Recycle time relay,
independent timings.
Multiscale.
Multivoltage
Order code
Time of
scale
range
Rated
Qty
auxiliary
per
supply voltage pkg
TM PL
0.1-1s
12-240V
1-10s
AC/DC
6-60s
1-10min
6min-1h
1h-10h
0.1-1 day
1-10 days
3-30 days
10-100 days
[V]
Wt
[kg]
0.082
Programmable asymmetrical recycle time relay,
multiscale, multivoltage. Flasher with independent
timing for ON and OFF intervals
Enabling input of ON or OFF interval
Delay time for OFF (pause) interval, adjustable on
front by rotary switch: 10-100%
Delay time for ON (work) interval, adjustable on front
by rotary switch: 10-100%
Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module; suitable for
IP20 on terminals.
CSA C22.2 n 14.
TM PL
Operational diagram
See page 17-9.
Off delay time relay.

Multiscale.
Multivoltage
Order code
Time of
scale
range
Rated
Qty
auxiliary
per
supply voltage pkg
Wt
[V]
[kg]
TM D
0.06-0.6s
0.6-6s
6-60s
18-180s
24-240V
AC/DC
0.080
Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage. True off
delay; delay on break with start at relay de-energising
Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch:
10-100%
IP20 on terminals.
CSA C22.2 n 14.
TM D
Operational diagram
See page 17-9.
17
Dimensions
page 17-6
Wiring diagrams
page 17-9
page 17-12
17-3
Time relays
Modular version
Time relay for starting.
Multiscale.
Multivoltage
Order code
Time of
scale
range
Rated
Qty
auxiliary
per
supply voltage pkg
Wt
[V]
[kg]
TM ST
0.1-1s
1-10s
6-60s
1-10min
24-48VDC
24-240VAC
0.090
TM ST A440
0.1-1s
1-10s
6-60s
1-10min
380-440VAC
0.090
TM ST
Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage for
starting (star-delta, impedance, autotransformer, etc)
of induction motors (squirrel cage), 2 separate
timings
1 relay output with 2 normally open (N/O-SPST)
contacts with common pole
Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch:
10-100% for star connection
Starting and transition (20-300ms time scale - from
star to delta), time adjustable on front by rotary
switch
Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing during
delay and steady at delay lapsing
IP20 on terminals.
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-9.
Staircase time relay
Order code
Time of
scale
range
Rated
Qty
auxiliary
per
supply voltage pkg
TM LS
0.5-20min 220-240VAC
[V]
Wt
[kg]
0.080
TM LS
Electronic time relay single scale and voltage for
staircase illumination
1 relay output with 1 powered normally open
(N/O-SPST) contact
Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch
Suitable for 3 or 4-wire systems
1 slide switch for timed or constant lighting operation
Function for one hour lighting and fast switch off
Connection with up to 50 light-up switches maximum;
1mA each
IP20 on terminals.
CSA C22.2 n 14.
17
Operational diagram
See page 17-9.
17-4
Dimensions
page 17-17
Wiring diagrams
page 17-9
page 17-12
Time relays
Plug-in and flush mount version 48x48mm/1.9x1.9
Accessories
Time relay
Order code
Time
scale
range
Rated
auxiliary
supply
voltage
Qty Wt
per
pkg
[V]
[kg]
Time relay on delay.

Single scale and single voltage.
31 L48T...
31 L48TP...
31 L48T 3S 24
0.1-3s
0.115
31 L48T 6S 24
0.1-6s
0.115
31 L48T 30S 24
0.5-30s
0.115
31 L48T 60S 24
0.5-60s
31 L48T 3M 24
1s-3min
31 L48T 6M 24
31 L48T 30M 24
0.115
0.115
3s-6min
0.115
30s-30min
0.115
31 L48T 60M 24
30s-60min
0.115
31 L48T 3H 24
3min-3h
0.115
31 L48T 3S 240
0.1-3s
0.120
31 L48T 6S 240
0.1-6s
0.120
31 L48T 30S 240
0.5-30s
0.120
31 L48T 60S 240
0.5-60s
0.120
31 L48T 3M 240
1s-3min
220-240VAC 1
0.120
31 L48T 6M 240
3s-6min
0.120
31 L48T 30M 240 30s-30min
0.120
31 L48T 60M 240 30s-60min
0.120
31 L48T 3H 240
0.120
1
24VAC/DC
110VAC
18s-780min 220-240VAC 1
0.124
24VAC/DC
3min-3h

Multiscale and multivoltage.
31 L48TP S 240
31 L48TP M 240
0.3-780s
0.124

Multiscale and single voltage.
31 L48TPB M24
31 L48TPB...
0.05s-10min 24VAC/DC
31 L48TPB M240
0.124
220-240VAC 1
0.124
Time relay, multifunction, multivoltage and multiscale.

31 L48M M 240
31 L48M H 240
0.05s-10min 24-240V
0.05min-10h AC/DC
0.135
0.135
31 L48M...
Accessories for 48x48mm

time relay
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
n
[kg]
31 S8
8-pin socket for screw

fixing or on 35mm DIN
rail (IEC/EN 60715).
Screw terminals
10
0.061
31 L48 P8
8-pin loose socket.

Screw terminals
10
0.040
31 S11

fixing or on 35mm DIN
rail (IEC/EN 60715).
Screw terminals
10
0.064
31 L48 P11
11-pin loose socket.

Screw terminals
10
0.048
31 L48AP
Flush mount bracket
10
0.012
31 S8
31 S11
Wt
TIME RELAY L48TP

Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage.
On delay, delay on make with start at relay energising
Delay time adjustable on front by rotary knob
Time range selected by dip switches:
L48TP S: 0.3-3s; 1.2-12s; 10-100s; 7.8-780s
L48 TP M: 18s-3min; 72s-12min; 10-100min;
78-780min
LED indicators for power on and relay state
Plug-in housing with 8-pin socket, 31 S8 or 31 L48 P8
Flush mount bracket 31 L48AP available
IEC protection degree: IP40 on front and IP20 at terminals.
Time range setting
A B
L48TP S
L48TP M
A B
A B
A B
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0.3-3s
18s-3min
1.2-12s
72s-12min
10-100s
10-100min
7.8-780s
78-780min
TIME RELAY T48TPB

Electronic time relay, multiscale, single voltage,
multifunction
2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT),
configurable either delay on make or instantaneous
Time range selected by dip switches: 0.05-1s;
0.1-10s; 0.6s-1min; 6s-10min
Time range setting
A B
L48TPB
A B
A B
A B
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0.05-1s
0.1-10s
0.6s-1min
6s-10min
TIME RELAY L48M

Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage,
multifunction
Selectable functions: On delay, delay on make with
start at relay energising. On delay, delay on break with
start at relay de-energising. Flasher, starting with OFF
interval. Flasher, starting with ON interval. Time relay
resetting is possible on closing of external contact (R)
connected to terminals 7-6. Possible time relay stopping
storing elapsed time on closing of external contact (M)
connected to terminals 7-5 and then restarting time
on its opening. See diagrams on page 17-11
2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact; both
delayed (SPDT)
Time range selected by dip switches:
L48M M: 0.05-1s; 0.1-10s; 0.6s-1min; 6s-10min
L48M H: 0.05-1min; 0.1-10min; 0.6min-1h; 1min-10h
Plug-in housing with 11-pin socket, 31 S11 or
31 L48 P11
Time range setting
A B
N.B. Max. conductor section for sockets: 2x2.5mm2/2x14AWG.

Tightening torque: 0.8Nm/7.1lbin.
Dimensions
page 17-6
TIME RELAY L48T
Electronic time relay, single scale, single voltage.
On delay, delay on make with start at relay energising
Wiring diagrams
page 17-10 and 11
L48M M
L48M H
A B
A B
A B
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0.05-1s
0.05-1min
0.1-10s
0.1-10min
0.6s-1min
0.6min-1h
6s-10min
1min-10h

Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Recognized, for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E172189) as Industrial
Switches - Timer modules.
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-10 and 17-11.
page 17-13
17-5
17
Time relays
TIME RELAYS
TM...
58
(2.28)
43.7
(1.72)
45
(1.77)
90
(3.54)
98.3
(3.87)
104.7
(4.12)
5
(0.20)
17.5
(0.69)
59.9
(2.36)
4.2
(0.16)
L48...
45
(1.77)
76
(2.99)
14
(0.55)
45
(1.77)
35
(1.38)
48
(1.89)
48
(1.89)
Cutout
3.5
(0.14)
Cutout
L48... with S8 - S11 sockets
45
(1.77)
76
(2.99)
3.5
(0.14)
17-6
L48 P11
20.5
(0.81)
43.5
(1.71)
20.5
(0.81)
47
(1.85)
47
(1.85)
65
(2.56)
38
(1.50)
L48 P8
33
(1.30)
27
(1.06)
43.5
(1.71)
Accessories - Plug-in sockets

S8 - S11
33
(1.30)
38
(1.50)
17
45
(1.77)
65
(2.56)
35
(1.38)
48
(1.89)
27
(1.06)
48
(1.89)
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
TM P
A1
15
A2
16 18
On delay. Delay on make, with

start at relay energising.
15
On delay. Delay on make, with

start at relay energising
TM M1
A2
18
16
Pulse on relay energising with start

at external contact closing
A1
A2
ON
A1 S
A1
A2
ON
15
15
G
H
I
J
18
16
A1
A2
ON
C A1
S
15
18
16
16 18
Pulse on relay energising with

start on energising
D
A1
A2
ON
15
Flasher, starting with OFF (pause)

interval. Equal timing recycle.
D
18
16
H
I
J
A1
A2
ON
On-Off delay. Delay on make, with

start at external contact closing, and
delay at break, with start at external
contact opening.
H
J
15
Flasher, starting with ON (work)

interval. Equal timing recycle.
D
18
16
C A1
S
15
t
t
t
t
(pause) (work) (pause) (work)
B
J
Internal ON/OFF trigger. Relay

contact either closes or opens at
each external contact closing.
A1
A2
ON
16
A1
A2
ON
18
C A1
S
A1
A2
ON
Pulse on relay energising with start

at external contact opening
15
18
16
A1
A2
ON
15
18
16
G
H
C
J
t
t
t
t
(work) (pause) (work) (pause)
C A1
S
15
18
16
17
Off delay. Relay energising at
external contact closing with start
on break
D
I
A
A1
A2
ON
Pulse generator. Unequal timing

recycle, starting with OFF pulse time
and 0.5sec ON time.
D
C A1
S
15
G
H
B
A
18
16
A1
A2
ON
15
t
18
16
t
0,5s
0,5s
17-7
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
TM M2
With instantaneous
operation programmed
A1 S
23
15
A1 S
23
INST
24
A2
24
INST
E F
G
H
B
J
On delay. Delay on make,

with start at relay
energising
18
Flasher, starting with ON

(work) interval.
Equal timing recycle
G
H
I
B
J
Pulse on relay energising

with start on energising
G
H
I
B
J
27
28
G
H
B
J
18
16
E F
D
C
15
27
28
28
A1
A2
ON
16
A1
A2
ON
A1
A2
ON
15
23
24
Flasher, starting with OFF

(pause) interval.
27
DEL
28
A1
A2
ON
16
23
24
18
15
16
16 18
A1
A2
ON
18

with start on energising
A1
A2
ON
15
D
C
B
23
28
A2
On delay. Delay on make,

with start at relay energising
27
15
27
DEL
24
16 18
With delayed
operation programmed
Flasher, starting with OFF

(pause) interval.
Flasher, starting with ON

(work) interval.
G
H
B
J
A1
A2
ON
A1
A2
ON
C
B
15
18
15
t
t
t
t
23 (pause) (work) (pause) (work)
24
G
H
I
J
Off delay. Relay energising

with start on break
A1
A2
ON
C A1
S
15
17
I
J
G
H
I
J
16
27
28
t
t
t
t
(pause) (work) (pause) (work)
I
J
Off delay. Relay energising

with start on break
H
J
C A1
S
15
18
15
16
E F
I
J
18
16
27
28
On-off delay. Delay make, with

start at external contact closing
and delay at break, with start at
external contact opening
E F
I
J

with start on external
contact opening
H
I
J
A1
A2
ON
C A1
S
C A1
S
C A1
S
C A1
S
18
18
15
t
23
24
23
24
I
J
15
16
Internal trigger ON/OFF.

Relay contact either closes
or opens at each external
contact closing
I
J
Pulse generator. Unequal

timing recycle, starting
with ON pulse time
15
16
G
H
I
J
Internal trigger ON/OFF.

Relay contact either closes
or opens at each external
contact closing
H
I
J
A1
A2
ON
C A1
S
C A1
S
18
18
18
18
15
16
23
24
23
24
17-8
15
t
0,5s
0,5s
A1
A2
ON
16
A1
A2
ON
15
27
28
27
28
18
16
On-off delay. Delay make, with

start at external contact closing
and delay at break, with start at
external contact opening
A1
A2
ON
16
A1
A2
ON
15
27
28
A1
A2
ON
18

contact closing
G
I
C A1
S
C A1
S
18
t
t
t
t
A1
A2
ON
16

contact opening
18
A1
A2
ON
23
24
15
A1
A2
ON
15
27
28

contact closing
G
H
23
24
D
C
18
16
t
t
t
t
23
24
18
16
15
16
16
18
Pulse generator. Unequal

timing recycle, starting
with ON pulse time
A1
A2
ON
15
16
16
27
28
27
28
0,5s
0,5s
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
TM PL
Flasher, starting with ON interval.
Equal timing recycle, ON first
A1 S
15
A2
16 18
Flasher, starting with OFF interval.

Equal timing recycle, OFF first
A1
A2
ON
A1
A2
ON
A1
S
18
A1
S
18
15
16
15
W
16
W = Work (ON)
P = Pause (OFF)
W = Work (ON)
P = Pause (OFF)
TM D
True off delay. Delay on break, starting at
relay de-energising
A1
15
A2
16 18
A1
A2
ON
15
18
16
t
TM ST
For starting
A1
A1
A2
17
ON
A2
18
28
18
17
28
17
start
transition
LINE
...V - ...Hz
L1
L2
L3
21
S1
22
13
S2
1
KM2
KM3
14
53
KM2
54
KM1
FR1
17
2
KT1
(TM ST)
95
U2
V2
W2
U1
M
3~
U2
V2
W2
95
V1
18
28
22
KM3
21
62
KM1
61
13
KM2
14
KM1
14
17
W1
FR1 KT1 A1
(TM ST)
96
A2
U1
M
3~
17
13
A1
KM1
A2
A1
KM3
A2
A1
KM2
A2
96
V1
W1
TM LS
Staircase lighting
4-wire connection
3-wire connection
Constant lighting
L
N
L
N
N 3
N 3
Timed lighting
ON
ON
L/N
L
>3s
>3s
>3s
L
t
1h
17-9
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
L48T...
On delay
24VAC/DC
220240VAC
2
5 6
2
7
ON
RELAY
6
5
t
L48TP...
110VAC
On delay
220240VAC
24VAC/DC
1 2 4
ON
RELAY
5 6
1.2.4
7
8
6
5
t
L48TPB...
4 3
5 6
2
7
ON
B
A
RELAY
8
17-10
DIP-SWITCH
On delay with one instantaneous c/o contact and

one late-break c/o contact
4 3
5 6
2
7
ON
3
4
RELAY
8
5
t
17
24VAC/DC
110VAC
240VAC
On delay with both instantaneous c/o contacts
24VAC/DC
110VAC
220240VAC
6
5
B
A
DIP-SWITCH
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
L48M...
On delay
24240VAC/DC
2
11
5
6
10
4 3
8 9
Pulse on relay energising with start on energising

2
10
ON
2
10
ON
5
7
6
7
T (preset time) = T1+T2

Contacts M and R are to be volt
free (dry).
t1
1
0
t2
9
RELAY
5
7
6
7
11
DIP SWITCH
RELAY
11
t1
1
Flasher starting with OFF
6
7
1
0
11
8
5
7
6
7
F
t
RELAY
1
0
11
8
3
1
F
t
DIP SWITCH
t
2
10
ON
9
RELAY
Flasher starting with ON
2
10
M
t2
5
7
DIP SWITCH
ON
F
1
0
DIP SWITCH
3
1
17
17-11
Time relays
Modular version
TYPE
TM P
TM M1
TM M2
TM PL
TM D
TM ST
TM LS
On delay
Programmable
multifunction
Programmable
multifunction timing
Asymmetrical
recycle
True off
delay
For starting
Staircase
illumination
DESCRIPTION
Multiscale
Multiscale
Multiscale
Multiscale
Multiscale
Multiscale
Single scale
Multivoltage
Multivoltage
Multivoltage
Multivoltage
Multivoltage
Multivoltage
Single voltage
24-240VAC/DC
24-48VDC
24-240VAC
380-440VAC
220-240VAC
CONTROL CIRCUIT
24-48VDC
24-240VAC

voltage Us
12-240VAC/DC
Rated frequency
50/60Hz
Operating voltage range
0.85-1.1 Us
Power consumption (maximum) 1.2VA/0.8W max

(24...48VAC/DC)
16VA/0.9W max
(110...240VAC/DC)
0.6VA/0.3W max
(12...48VAC/DC)
1.6VA/1.2W max
(110...240VAC/DC)
1.1VA/0.8W max
(12...48VAC/DC)
1.8VA/1.2W max
(110...240VAC/DC)
0.6VA/0.3W max
0.1VA/0.1W
1.2VA/0.8W max
(12...48VAC/DC)
(24...48VAC/DC) (24...48VAC/DC)
1.6VA/1.2W max
1.1VA/0.8W
1.6VA/0.9W max
(110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC)
De-energised
5VA/0.5W max
Energised
12VA/0.8W max
TIMING CIRCUIT
Time setting range
Multiscale
0.1-1s
1-10s
6s-60s
1-10min
6min-1h
1-10h
0.1-1day
1-10days
ON only
OFF only
Multiscale
0.1-1s
1-10s
6s-60s
1-10min
6min-1h
1h-10h
0.1-1day
1-10days
3-30days
10-100days
Setting accuracy
< 0.1%
< 0.5%
< 0.2%
Influence of
voltage variation
Average variation of
set delays related
to +20C condition
at 20C
Minimum power time
Minimum ON time
Multiscale
0.5-20min
< 0.5%
< 0.01%
< 0.5%
< 0.2%
< 0.25%
25ms (no maximum limit)
200ms
60ms (no max lim.)

100ms
during timing
100ms
100ms
elapsed time
50ms
50ms
40ms
20ms
2 delayed N/O
1 delayed N/O
8A
16A
Immunity time for microbreakings
17
Multiscale
0.1-1s
1-10s
6s-60s
1-10min
< 9%
Repeat accuracy
Resetting
time
Multiscale
0.06-0.6s
0.6-6s
6s-60s
18s-180s
50ms
25ms
15ms
25ms
RELAY OUTPUTS
Contact arrangement
1 delayed
1 inst./delayed N/O
1 delayed
changeover
+ 1 delayed c/o
changeover
Maximum switching voltage

thermal current (Ith)
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1
designation
Electrical life (with rated load)
Mechanical life
250VAC
8A
5A
B300
16A AC1
240VAC
105 cycles
30x106 cycles
0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin per UL)

0.2-4mm2 (24-12 AWG; 12-18 AWG per UL)
INSULATION (input-output)
IEC rated insulation voltage
250V

voltage
4kV
IEC power frequency withstand

voltage
2kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Storage temperature
Housing material
Used at 24-48VDC or 24-240VAC; 30ms at 380-440VAC.

NOTE: N/O = normally open / SPST
c/o = changeover / SPDT; inst. = instantaneous.
17-12
20...+60C
30...+80C
Self-extinguishing polyamide
Time relays
Plug-in and flush mount version 48x48mm/1.9x1.9
TYPE
L48T...
L48TP...
L48TPB...
L48M...
On delay
On delay
On delay
Programmable
multifunction
DESCRIPTION
Single scale
Multiscale
Multiscale
Multiscale
Single voltage
Multivoltage
Single voltage
Multivoltage
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24-240VAC/DC
220-240VAC
110VAC
220-240VAC
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated supply
voltage Us
220-240VAC
Rated frequency
50-60Hz
0.85-1.1 Us
6VA
Power dissipation (maximum)

TIMING CIRCUIT
Time setting range
Single scale
Multiscale
Multiscale
0.1-3s
0.3-3s
0.05-1s
Multiscale
0.05-1s
0.1-6s
0.12-12s
0.10-10s
0.1-10s
0.6s-1min
0.5-30s
10-100s
0.6s-1min
0.5-60s
7.8-780s
6s-10min
1s-3min
18s-3min
0.05-1min
6s-10min
3s-6min
72s-12min
0.1-10min
30s-30min
10-100min
0.6min-1h
30s-60min
78-780min
1min-10h
3min-3h
Setting accuracy
9%
5%
Repeat accuracy
0.5%
0.5%
Influence of voltage variation
0.3%
0,.
at 20C
+2%
+2%
at +60C
3%
Average variation of
set delays in related
to 20C condition
3%
Minimum ON time
Resetting
time
during operation
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
elasped time
65ms
65ms
65ms
65ms
40ms
40ms
40ms
40ms

RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays
Contact arrangement
1 delayed c/o
1 delayed c/o
2 del. or 1 inst. + 1 del. c/o
2 delayed c/o
17
250V
IEC conventional free air thermal current

(Ith)
5A
B300
105 cycles
30x106 cycles
Mechanical life
CONNECTIONS
Conductor section (min-max)
250V
IEC power frequency withstand voltage

Uimp
2kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
10...+60C
Storage temperature
30...+80C
Housing material
Other voltages on request.

Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
NOTE:
del. = delayed
inst. = instantaneous
c/o = changeover/SPDT
17-13
Pages 18-4 to 8
VOLTAGE MONITORING RELAYS
For three-phase systems without neutral,
three-phase systems with or without
neutral and single-phase systems
Minimum and maximum AC voltage
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence
Asymmetry
Minimum and maximum frequency.
Page 18-10
PUMP PROTECTION RELAYS
For single and three-phase systems
Minimum cos for dry running protection
Maximum AC current
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence.
Page 18-11
FREQUENCY MONITORING RELAYS
Minimum frequency
Maximum frequency.
Pages 18-8 and 9

CURRENT MONITORING RELAYS
For single-phase systems
Maximum AC/DC current
Minimum or maximum AC/DC current
Minimum and maximum AC/DC current.
Page 18-11
PHASE SHIFT MONITORING RELAYS
Minimum cos
Maximum cos.
Page 18-12
INTERFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM UNITS
Compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-21,
06-2012 edition, for low voltage
Compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-16,
12-2012 edition, for medium voltage.
PROTECTION
18
RELAYS
Modular version for switchgear

panels, also suitable for rear
mounting plate fixing
Minimum and maximum voltage
monitoring relays for single and
three-phase systems, with or
without neutral
Voltage asymmetry, phase
sequence and phase loss control
relays
Minimum and maximum current
monitoring relays
Frequency monitoring relay
Interface protection system units
compliant with Italian standards
CEI 0-21 and CEI 0-16.
Modular voltage monitoring relays

For three-phase systems, without neutral ...........................................................................................................................
For three-phase systems, with or without neutral ...............................................................................................................
For single-phase systems ..................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
18 - 4
18 - 6
18 - 8
Modular current monitoring relays

For single-phase systems ..........................................................................................................................................................
Modular pump protection relay ..........................................................................................

Modular phase shift monitoring relay ..................................................................................
Modular frequency monitoring relay ....................................................................................
Interface protection system units .......................................................................................
18 - 8
18
18
18
18
- 10
- 11
- 11
- 12
A UTOMATION
AND
C ONTROL
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 18 - 16
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 18 - 17
Protection relays
Overview
Voltage monitoring relays
for three-phase systems
without neutral
PMV10
Modular version
PMV20
(1U)
PMV30
(2U)
(2U)
PMV40
(2U)
Minimum AC voltage
PMV50
PMV60
(2U)
(2U)
PMV70
(2U)
Maximum AC voltage
Phase loss
Incorrect phase sequence
Asymmetry
Page
18-4
18-5
18-6

for three-phase systems
with or without neutral
PMV50N
PMV70N
PMV80N
Modular version
(3U)
(3U)
(3U)
Minimmum AC voltage
Maximum AC voltage
Phase loss
Neutral loss
Asymmetry
Minimum frequency
Maximum frequency
Page
18
18-6
18-7
Voltage monitoring relay

for single-phase systems
PMV55
Modular version
(2U)
Minimum AC voltage
Maximum AC voltage
Page
18-2

18-8
Protection relays
Overview
Current monitoring relays
Modular version
PMA20
PMA30
PMA40
(2U)
(2U)
(3U)
Maximum AC/DC current
Minimum or maximum AC/DC current
Minimum and maximum AC/DC current

Page
18-8
18-9
Pump protection relay

for single and three-phase
systems
Phase shift monitoring relay

for single and three-phase
systems
PMA50
PMA60
(3U)
Modular version
(3U)
Minimum cos for dry running

pump protection
Minimum cos
Maximum AC current
Phase loss
Modular version

Page
Maximum cos
Page
18-11

18-10
Interface protection system compliant with

Italian standard CEI 0-16,
December 2012 edition,
for medium voltage
Frequency monitoring relay for

single and three-phase systems
18
PMF20
Modular version
PMVF30
(2U)
Version
Flush mount (96x96mm/3.78x3.78)
Minimum frequency only
Dual threshold voltage/frequency
Maximum frequency only
Voltage release
Page
18-11

Page
18-14
Interface protection system compliant with

Italian standard CEI 0-21,
June 2012 edition,
for low voltage
Version
PMVF20
PMVF50
PMVF51
Flush mount (96x96mm/3.78x3.78)
Modular (8U)
Modular (6U)
Dual threshold min and max voltage
Dual threshold min and max frequency
18-12
18-13
Page
18-3
Protection relays
For three-phase systems,
without neutral
Order code
Rated voltage
to control Ue
(phase to phase)
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V] 50/60Hz
[kg]
Three-phase system, without neutral.

Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip.
PMV10 A440
208-480VAC
0.050
PMV20 A240
100-240VAC
0.120
PMV20 A575
208-575VAC
0.120
PMV20 A600
380-600VAC
0.120
Order code
Rated voltage
to control Ue
(phase to phase)
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V] 50/60Hz
[kg]

Minimum AC voltage. Delayed trip.
PMV30 A240
208-240VAC
0.130
PMV30 A575
380-575VAC
0.130
PMV30 A600
600VAC
0.130
Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
voltage, phase loss and incorrect phase sequence
Configurable rated voltage (Ue):
PMV30 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
PMV30 A575: 380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC
Excellent tripping accuracy
TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
Control of phase-to-phase voltages
Phase loss detection if one of the voltages is <70%
rated value
Phase loss tripping time: 60ms
IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when placed
in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
V min
Minimum voltage tripping threshold
80-95% Ue
Delay
Tripping time 0.1-20s
Reset delay Resetting time 0.1-20s.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
PMV30...
18

Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.
PMV10 A440
PMV20...
General characteristicz
Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for phase loss
and incorrect phase sequece
rated value
Modular DIN 43880 housing: 1 module for PMV10;
2 module for PMV20
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.
Order code
Rated voltage
to control Ue
(phase-to-phase)
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V] 50/60Hz
[kg]

Asymmetry. Delayed trip.
PMV40 A240
208-240VAC
0.130
PMV40 A575
380-575VAC
0.130
PMV40 A600
600VAC
0.130
PMV40...
Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for asymmetry,
phase loss and incorrect phase sequence
rated value
ADJUSTMENTS
Asymmetry High voltage asymmetry tripping
threshold 5-15% Ue
Delay
Reset delay Resetting time 0.1-20s
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.
18-4
Dimensions
page 18-16
Wiring diagrams
page 18-17
page 18-28
Protection relays
without neutral
Order code
Rated voltage
to control Ue
(phase-to-phase)
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V] 50/60Hz
[kg]

Minimum and maximum AC voltage. Delayed trip.
PMV50 A240
208-240VAC
PMV50 A575
380-575VAC
0.130
0.130
PMV50 A600
600VAC
0.130
PMV50...
and maximum voltage, phase loss and incorrect phase
sequence
PMV50 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
PMV50 A575: 380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC
High tripping accuracy
rated value
in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 on terninals.
ADJUSTMENTS
V max
Maximum voltage tripping threshold
105-115% Ue
V min
80-95% Ue
Delay for each Tripping time 0.1-20s
Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices.
Compliant to standards: IEC/EN 60255-5,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.
Order code
Rated voltage
to control Ue
(phase-to-phase)
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V] 50/60Hz
[kg]

Minimum AC voltage and asymmetry. Delayed trip.
PMV60 A240
208-240VAC
PMV60 A575
380-575VAC
0.130
0.130
PMV60 A600
600VAC
0.130
PMV60...
voltage, phase loss and incorrect phase sequence
PMV60 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
PMV60 A575: 380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC
rated value
in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 on terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
V min
80-95% Ue
threshold 5-15% Ue
Delay
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508, CSA
C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.
Dimensions
page 18-16
Wiring Diagrams
page 18-17
page 18-29
18-5
18
Protection relays
without neutral
Order code
Rated voltage
to control Ue
(phase to phase)
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V] 50/60Hz
[kg]

Minimum and maximum AC voltage and asymmetry.
Delayed trip.
PMV70 A240
208-240VAC
PMV70 A575
380-575VAC
0.130
0.130
PMV70 A600
600VAC
0.130
PMV70...
and maximum voltage, phase loss, incorrect phase
sequence and asymmetry
PMV70 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
PMV70 A575: 380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC
rated value
ADJUSTMENTS
V max
105-115% Ue
V min
80-95% Ue
Delay for each Tripping delay 0.1-20s
threshold 5-15% Ue.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-17.
For three-phase systems

Order code
Rated voltage
to control Ue
(phase to phase)
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V] 50/60Hz
[kg]
Three-phase system, with or without neutral.

Phase loss, neutral loss and incorrect phase sequence.
Instantaneous trip.
PMV50N A240
208-240VAC
0.150
PMV50N A440
380-440VAC
0.150
PMV50N A600
480-600VAC
0.150
18
PMV50N...
and maximum voltage, phase loss, neutral loss and
incorrect phase sequence
4 configurable rated voltage (Ue):
PMV50N A240: 208-220-230-240VAC (phase-phase)
120-127-132-138VAC (phase-neutral)
Phase loss detection when one of the voltages is
<70% rated voltage
Phase or neutral loss tripping time: 60ms
2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
IEC protection degree: IP40 on front (only when
placed in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
V max
105-115% Ue
V min
80-95% Ue
Reset Delay Resetting time 0.1-20s.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.
18-6
Dimensions
page 18-16
Wiring diagrams
pages 18-17 and 18
page 18-29
Protection relays
Order code
Rated voltage
to control Ue
(phase to phase)
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V] 50/60Hz
[kg]

Minimum and maximum AC voltage and asymmetry.
Delayed trip.
Instantaneous trip.
PMV70N A240
208-240VAC
0.150
PMV70N A440
380-440VAC
0.150
PMV70N A600
480-600VAC
0.150
PMV70N...
and maximum voltage, phase loss, neutral loss,
incorrect phase sequence and asymmetry
Phase loss detection when one of the voltages is
<70% rated value
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
V max
105-115% Ue
V min
80-95% Ue
threshold 5-15% Ue.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.
Order code
Rated voltage
to control Ue
(phase to phase)
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V] 50/60Hz
[kg]

Minimum and maximum AC voltage, minimum and maximum
frequency. Delayed trip.
Instantaneous trip.
PMV80N A240
208-240VAC
0.150
PMV80N A440
380-440VAC
0.150
PMV80N A600
480-600VAC
0.150
PMV80N...
and maximum voltage, minimum and maximum
frequency, phase loss, neutral loss and incorrect
phase sequence
rated value
Modular DIN 43880, 3 module
placed in iP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
V max
105-115% Ue
V min
Minimum voltage thripping threshold
80-95% Ue
Hz min/max Minimum/maximum frequency tripping
threshold 1-10%
V delay
Hz delay
Tripping time 0.1-5s.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.
Dimensions
page 18-16
Wiring diagrams
page 18-18
page 18-29
18-7
18
Protection relays
Voltage monitoring relays.
Voltage monitoring relay
Order code
Rated voltage
to control Ue
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V] 50/60Hz
[kg]
Single-phase system.
PMV55 A240
208-240VAC
0.125
PMV55 A440
380-440VAC
0.125
PMV55...
and maximum voltage
PMV55 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
PMV55 A440: 380-400-415-440VAC
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
V max
105-115% Ue
V min
80-95% Ue
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.
Current monitoring relay

Order code
Rated
current
Ie
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[V]
[kg]
24-240V
AC/DC
0.121
AC/DC maximum current control.
Auxiliary AC/DC power supply.
Automatic or manual reset.
PMA20 240
5 or 16A
PMA20 240
18
Current monitoring relay for AC/DC maximum current
control, AC/DC multivoltage auxiliary power supply
Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
transformer (CT)
TRMS current measurements (True Root Mean Square)
Resetting and inhibition input
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Imax"
Maximum current tripping threshold
5-100% Ie
"Hysteresis"
Maximum hysteresis thresold
1-50%
"Trip delay"
"Inhibition time" Tripping delay for external input or at
power up 1-60s
Aut. reset delay Automatic resetting time 0.1-30s
Mode
Rated current 5A or 16A,
Relay output normally energised or
de-energised
Tripping memory (Latch) On or Off.
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices Modular ampere monitoring relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-19.
18-8
Dimensions
page 18-16
Wiring diagrams
pages 18-18 and 19
pages 18-28 and 30
Protection relays
For single-phase systems
Order code
Rated
current
Ie
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[V]
[kg]
AC/DC minimum or maximum current control. Delayed trip.
PMA30 240
5 or 16A
24-240V
AC/DC
0.121
PMA30 240
Current monitoring relay for AC/DC minimum or
maximum current control; AC/DC multivoltage
auxiliary power supply
transformer (CT)
Resetting and inhibition input
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Set point"
Minimum or maximum current tripping
threshold 5-100% Ie
"Hysteresis"
Minimum or maximum hysteresis
threshold 1-50%
"Trip delay"
"Inhibition time" Tripping delay for external input or at
power up 1-60s
Ie
Current scale selection: 5A or 16A
Mode
Min or max function
de-energised
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
Order code
Rated
current
Ie
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[V]
[kg]
AC/DC minimum and maximum current control. Delayed trip.
PMA40 240
0.02-0.050.25-1-516A
24-240V
AC/DC
0.166
PMA40 240
Current monioring relay for AC/DC minimum and
maximum current control, AC/DC multivoltage auxiliary
power supply
transformer (CT)
Automatic or manual resetting (manual resetting by
power removal)
2 relay outputs (Min and Max), configurable, each with
1 changeover contact (SPDT)
in iP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Imax"
Maximum current tripping threshold
5-100% Ie
"Imin"
Minimum current tripping threshold
5-100% Ie
"Trip delay"
Minimum and maximum current
tripping time 0.1-30s
"Inhibition time" Tripping time at power up 1-60s
Ie
Current scale selection: 20mA, 50mA,
250mA, 1A, 5A or 16A
Mode
Separate or common relay outputs
de-energised
Certifications obtainee: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
Dimensions
page 18-16
Wiring diagrams
pages 18-20 to 22
page 18-30
18-9
18
Protection relays
Pump protection relay
For single and
three-phase systems
Order code
Rated
current
Ie
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[V]
[kg]
Single and three-phase systems.

Maximum AC current and minimum cos. Delayed trip.
Auxiliary AC power supply.
220-240VAC 1
0.251
PMA50 A415
380-415VAC 1
0.251
PMA50 A480
440-480VAC 1
0.251
PMA50 A240
5 or 16A
PMA50...
Pump protection relay against dry running, auxiliary
AC power supply
Motor under-load and over-current control
transformer (CT)
Voltage control range 80-660VAC
Current control range 0.1-16A
Resetting and enabling consent input
1 relay output relay with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
ADJUSTMENTS
"Cos min
Minimum costhreshold 0.1-0.99
(under-load/dry running)
Imax
Maximum (over) current threshold
10-100%Ie
"Trip delay"
Tripping time for minimum cosand
maximum current 0.1-10s
Inhibition time Tripping delay for external input or at
power up 1-60s
Aut. reset delay Automatic reset time OFF-100min
Mode
Rated current 5A or 16A
Single or three phase
External reset On or Off.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
18
18-10
Dimensions
page 18-16
Wiring diagrams
pages 18-22 and 23
page 18-31
Protection relays
Phase shift monitoring relays.
Frequency monitoring relays
Phase shift monitoring
relay for single and
three-phase systems
Order code
Rated
current
Ie
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[V]
[kg]

Minimum and maximum cos control. Delayed trip.
AC auxiliary power supply.
220-240VAC 1
0.254
PMA60 A415
380-415VAC 1
0.254
PMA60 A480
440-480VAC 1
0.254
PMA60 A240
16A
PMA60...
Minimum and maximum phase shift monitoring relay,
AC auxiliary power supply
transformer (CT)
Voltage control range 80-660VAC
Current control range 0.1-16A
Automatic or manual resetting (manual resetting by
power removal)
2 relay outputs (Min and Max), configurable, each with
1 changeover contact (SPDT)
placed in iP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Cos min
Minimum costhreshold
0.1-0.99 inductive
"Trip delay"
Tripping time for minimum cos
0.1-30s
"Cos max
Maximum inductive costhreshold
0.1-0.99
Trip delay
Tripping time for maximum cos
0.1-30s
Inhibition time Tripping delay at power up 1-60s
Mode
Single or three phase
Relay outputs normally energised or
de-energised
Certificartions and compliance
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
Frequency monitoring
relay for single and
three-phase systems
Order code
Rated voltage Ue
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V] 50/60Hz
[kg]

Minimum and maximum frequency. Delayed trip.
Automatic reset.
PMF20 A240
220-240VAC
0.125
PMF20 A415
380-415VAC
0.125
PMF20...
Frequency monitoring relay, self powered, for
minimum and maximum control
Rated frequency selection: 50 or 60Hz
Tripping threshold for minimum and maximum
frequency
1 relay output, configurable, with 1 changeover
contact (SPDT)
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
Hz max
Maximum frequency tripping threshold
+1 to +10%
Delay
Hz min
Minimum frequency tripping threshold
-1 to -10%
Delay
Mode
Minimum and maximum frequency
Output relay energised at maximum
frequency
Output relay energised at minimum
frequency
Output relay de-energised at maximum
frequency.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-24.
Dimensions
page 18-16
Wiring diagrams
pages 18-23 and 24
page 18-31 and 32
18-11
18
Protection relays
Interface protection system units compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-21, June 2012 edition
For low voltage
Order code
Rated voltage
Control
Auxiliary
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V]
[kg]
[V]
Three-phase system, with or without neutral, in low voltage.

Dual threshold minimum and maximum voltage and
frequency protection.
Flush mount type.
PMVF 20
PMVF 20 D048
230VAC
400VAC
100-400VAC/
110-250VDC
0.568
12-48VDC
0.580
PMVF 20...
Voltage threshold per CEI 0-21
Frequency threshold per CEI 0-21
Type of protection
Tripping
threshold
Maximum voltage 59.S2
Tripping
time
1.15Un
0.2s

1.10Un
(moving mean over 10min)
3s
Minimum voltage 27.S1
0.85Un
0.4s
0.4Un
0.2s
Type of protection
Tripping
threshold
Tripping
time
High external signal and low local control conditions.

Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz
0.1s
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz
0.1s
Low external signal and high local control conditions.

1s
4s
High conditions for both external signal and local control.

0.1s
0.1s
NOTE: Low conditions for both external signal and local

control are not taken into consideration by the standard.
Order code
18
Description
EXPANSION MODULES FOR PMVF20.

For independent signal in case of power limit unbalance (LSP).
EXP10 03
2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC
EXP10 03
EXP10 18
IEC/EN 61850 interface
EXP10 10
EXP10 11
EXP10 12
EXP10 13
Opto-isolated Ethernet interface
Adapter for pre-existing cutout.

PMVF X00
Consisting of 2 RAL 7035 finish plates for

154x102.5mm/6.06x4.04 cutout and
fixing screws
IEC/EN 61850 protocol

The EXP10 18 module will be made available only when
the competent authorities have established the exact
terms of the supervision and control of the specific
commands (currently under study as specified in the
Italian CEI 0-21 standard).
18-12
Accessories
page 18-15
Expansion modules
page 28-2
Dimensions
page 18-16
PMVF20 interface protection system (SPI) unit has been
developed according to the Italian CEI 0-21 standard
prescriptions of the June 2012 edition. It is used when a
local generating system is connected in parallel with the
low-voltage power grid of a power supplier. The controls
refer to limits of voltage and frequency monitoring.
In the case when either the voltage or the frequency
are out of admissible limits, the SPI must step in by
de-energising a relay output so that the interface device
(DDI) trips.
PMVF20 is equipped with 4 inputs having the following
functions:
DDI status feedback
External signal for frequency selection
(communication network malfunction)
Local control for frequency selection
Remote tripping (forced DDI opening independent of
voltage and frequency values)
DDI opening and closing
Standby device opening (programmable: retentive
normally energised, retentive normally de-energised or
adjustable pulse).
The standby device control is compulsory in installations
with more than 20kW and consists of a signal, with a
0.5s delay respect to the DDI opening command,
transmitted only if the DDI fails and does not complete
the disconnection.
By fitting the EXP10 03 expansion module on the
PMVF20, the following functions can be configured as:
Programmable alarm
Autonomous signalling in case of power limit
unbalance (LSP), only if three CTs are also installed.
Auxiliary voltage:
PMVF 20: 100400VAC/110250VDC
PMVF 20 D048: 1248VDC
Voltage inputs:
400VAC (three-phase connection)
230VAC (sing-phase connection)
Relay outputs 5A 250VAC AC1 / 5A 30VDC
4 digital inputs
Current inputs (optional): Use via CTs with selectable
/5A or /1A secondary
Support of EXP series communications ports (USB,
RS232, RS485, Ethernet) see section 28
Housing: Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78x3.78
Degree of protection: IP65 on front; IP20 on terminals
Predisposed for IEC/EN 61850 signal supervision
using expansion or external module.
Reference standards
Compliant with standards: Italian CEI 0-21;
IEC/EN 60255-5, IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
Note for Italian CEI 0-21 standard, June 2012 edition:
According to standard prescriptions, once the installation
is completed, the interface protection must be tested by
the installer using a relay test box which controls the trip
thresholds and timing.
Operational diagram
See page 18-25.
Programming software
software is available for future PMVF20
parameter configuration change and saving.
Since PMVF20 is standard-supplied pre-programmed,
with specific default settings as per the Italian standard
CEI 0-21, it can be put in service immediately without
having to change any programming. Setup editing is
password protected so that parameter settings cannot be
tampered with by unauthorised personnel.
Wiring diagrams
page 18-25
page 18-34
Protection relays
Interface protection system units compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-21, June 2012 edition
For low voltage
Order code
Rated voltage
Control
Auxiliary
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V]
[kg]
[V]
Three-phase system, with or without neutral, in low voltage.

Modular type with 4 relay outputs.
PMVF 50
PMVF 50
230VAC
400VAC
100-240VAC/
110-250VDC
0.615
Three-phase system with or without neutral in low voltage.

Modular type with 2 relay outputs.
PMVF 51
230VAC
400VAC
100-240VAC/
110-250VDC
0.470
PMVF 51
Type of protection
Tripping
threshold
Tripping
time
1.15Un
0.2s

1.10Un
3s
0.85Un
0.4s
0.4Un
0.2s
Type of protection
Tripping
threshold
Tripping
time
High external signal and low local control conditions.

0.1s
Maximum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz
0.1s
Low external signal and high local control conditions.

1s
4s
High conditions for both external signal and local control.

0.1s
0.1s
NOTE: Low conditions for both external signal and local

control are not taken into consideration by the standard.
Order code
Description
EXPANSION MODULES FOR PMVF50 AND PMVF51.

EXM10 18
EXM10 10
EXM10 11
EXM10 12
EXM10 13
EXM10...
2 digital opto-isolated inputs and 2 relay

outputs 5A 250VAC

The EXM10 18 module will be made available only when
Expansion modules
page 28-2
Dimensions
page 18-16
Auxiliary voltage: 100-240VAC/110-250VDC
Voltage inputs:
400VAC (three-phase connection)
230VAC (single-phase connection)
4 digital inputs
Current inputs (optional): Use via CTs with selectable
/5A or /1A secondary
Support of EXM series communications inputs (USB,
RS232, RS485, Ethernet) see section 28
Modular housing:
PMVF50: 8 module
PMVF51: 6 module
Degree of protection for both: IP40 on front; IP20 on
terminals
Reference standards
IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
Note for Italian CEI 0-21 standard, June 2012 edition:
According to standard prescriptions, once the installation
is completed, the interface protection must be tested by
the installer using a relay test box which controls the trip
thresholds and timing.
Operational diagram
Inputs and outputs for PMVF51 only.

EXM10 01
PMVF50/PMVF51 interface protection system (SPI) unit
has been developed according to the Italian CEI 0-21
standard prescriptions of the June 2012 edition. Each is
used when a local solar generating system is connected
in parallel with the low-voltage power grid of a power
supplier. The controls refer to limits of voltage and
frequency monitoring.
(DDI) trips.
PMVF50/51 is equipped with 4 inputs having the
following functions:
DDI status feedback
External signal for frequency selection
(communication network malfunction)
Local control for frequency selection
Remote tripping (forced DDI opening, independent of
voltage and frequency values)
DDI opening and closing
Standby device opening (programmable: retentive
normally energised, retentive normally de-energised or
adjustable pulse).
The standby device control is compulsory in installations
with more than 20kW and consists of a signal, with a
0.5s delay respect to the DDI opening command,
transmitted only if the DDI failed and did not complete
the disconnection.
PMVF50 also has two additional relay outputs (optional
for PMVF51) to configure as:
Programmable alarm
Autonomous signalling in case of power limit
unbalance (LSP), only if three CTs are also installed.
software is available for future PMVF50/
PMVF51 parameter configuration change and saving.
Since PMVF50/PMVF51 is standard-supplied
pre-programmed, with specific default factory settings as
per the Italian standard CEI 0-21, it can be put in service
immediately without having to change any programming.
Setup editing is password protected so that parameter
settings cannot be tampered with by unauthorised
personnel.
Wiring diagrams
pages 18-25 and 26
page 18-35
18-13
18
Protection relays
Interface protection system units compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-16, December 2012 edition
For medium voltage
Order code
Rated voltage
Control
Auxiliary
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V]
[kg]
[V]
Medium-voltage system.
Flush mount type.
Measure100-400VAC/
ments via
110-250VDC
PMVF 30 D048 VTs in MV or 12-48VDC
direct in LV
PMVF 30
0.566
0.566
PMVF 30...

Frequency protection at voltage release
Type of protection
Tripping
threshold
Tripping
time
1.2Un
0.6s

1.1Un
3s
0.85Un
0.4s
0.4Un
0.2s
Maximum residual
voltage 59.V0 (59N)
5% 3 Un
25s
Type of protection
Tripping
threshold
Tripping
time
Configuration in standard conditions.

1s
4s
Limited configuration in case of local control or voltage

release condition
0.15s
0.15s
Voltage release functions

Maximum residual
voltage 59.V0 (59N)
5% 3 Un
Minimum direct sequence

voltage 27.Vd
70% Un
Maximum inverse sequence 15% Un

voltage 59.Vi
Order code
18
Description
EXPANSION MODULES FOR PMVF30.

For automatic reclosing supervision of automatic circuit
breaker (DDI).
EXP10 03
EXP10...
EXP10 18
EXP10 10
EXP10 11
EXP10 12
EXP10 13
Adapter for pre-existing cutout.

PMVF X00
Consisting of 2 RAL 7035 finish plates for

154x102.5mm/6.06x4.04 cutout and
fixing screws

The EXP10 18 module will be made available only when
18-14
Accessories
page 18-15
Expansion modules
page 28-2
Dimensions
page 18-16
PMVF30 interface protection system (SPI) unit has been
developed according to the Italian CEI 0-16 standard
prescriptions of the December 2012 edition. It is used
when a local generating system is connected in parallel
with the medium-voltage network of a power supplier.
The controls refer to limits of voltage and frequency
monitoring.
(DDI) trips.
PMVF30 is equipped with inputs having the following
functions:
DDI status feedback
Interface protection system exclusion
Local control
Remote tripping (forced DDI opening, independent of
voltage and frequency values).
In addition, there are two relay outputs to configure as:
DDI opening
Programmable output (default factory programmed as
standby device opening or set up for automatic
reclosing if the DDI is an automatic circuit breaker).
Standby device opening
In installations with more than 400kW, the standard
specifies there must be a command signal, that releases
another standby device, given within 1 second whenever
the DDI opening fails or malfunctions.
Automatic DDI reclosing
Whenever an automatic circuit breaker is used as the
DDI, the PMVF30 is capable of controlling both the
opening (according to the installation conditions
indicated in the Italian CEI 0-16 standard) and the
automatic reclosing. The supervision of the automatic
reclosing includes defining the number of attempts and
the time interval between an attempt and the subsequent
one and generating an alarm when the final closing
malfunction so does not take place.
This function can be carried out through a programmable
output of the PMVF30, either the built-in standard
supplied unless it is already used for the standby device
operation or by installing an optional EXP10 03
expansion module.
Auxiliary voltage:
PMVF30: 100-400VAC/110-250VDC
PMVF30D048: 12-48VDC
Voltage inputs (connection via VTs in MV or directly in
LV end):
Primary: 400-150,000V
Secondary: 50-500V (for voltage/frequency);
50-150V (for residual voltage measurement)
4 digital inputs
3 current inputs (for optional measuring): Use via CTs
with selectable /5A or /1A secondary
Support of EXP series communications puts (USB,
RS232, RS485, Ethernet); see section 28
Degree of protection: IP65 on front; IP20 on terminals
Reference standards
IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
Operational diagram
See page 18-27.
software is available for future PMVF30
parameter configuration change and saving.
Since PMVF30 is standard-supplied pre-programmed,
with specific default factory settings as per the Italian
standard CEI 0-21, it can be put in service immediately
without having to change any programming. Setup
editing is password protected so that parameter settings
cannot be tampered with by unauthorised personnel.
Wiring diagrams
page 18-27
page 18-33
Protection relays
Accessories for PMVF20 and PMVF30.
Maximum combination
Order code
Description
PMVF X00
Adapter for pre-existing

cutout consisting of 2
RAL 7035 finish plates for
154x102.5mm/6.06x4.04
cutout and fixing screws
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.300
General characterisics
The adapter for pre-existing cutout is an accessory to
install the PMVF20 or PMVF30 in place of other similar
previously mounted devices.
Maximum combination for PMVF 20 and PMVF 30 types

In addition to the two standard-supplied modules, another two expansion modules (one per type) can be installed from the following indicated below.
MAX
2
SLOT SLOT SLOT SLOT
EXP10 03
Used as:
1. Unbalance limit signal (LSP) for PMVF 20
or for automatic reclosing control of circuit
breaker for PMVF 30.
2. Programmable alarm.
EXP10 18
Ethernet interface
EXP10 10
USB
interface
EXP10 12
RS485
interface
EXP10 11
RS232
interface
EXP10 13
Ethernet
TCP/IP
interface
Maximum combination for PMVF 50 type

In addition to the two standard-supplied modules, one only other expansion module
(for communication purposes) can be installed from the following indicated.
EXM10 18
Ethernet interface
per IEC/EN 61850
EXM10 10
USB
interface
EXM10 12
RS485
interface
EXM10 13
Ethernet
TCP/IP
interface
EXM10 11
RS232
interface
MAX
1
18
Maximum combination for PMVF 51 type

In addition to the standard-supplied module (1), another two
expansion modules (one per type) can be installed from the
following indicated.
EXM10 01
Used as:
1. Unbalance limit signal (LSP).
2. Programmable alarm.
MAX
2
18-15
Protection relays
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
4.2
(0.16")
4.2
(0.16")
5
(0.20")
53.5 (2.11")
4.2
(0.16")
59.9 (2.36")
INTERFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM UNITS FOR LOW VOLTAGE

PMVF 20...
58 (2.28")
43.7 (1.72")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
58.1 (2.29")
43.8 (1.72")
5
(0.20")
104.7 (4.12")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
104.7 (4.12")
98.3 (3.87")
PMV...N - PMA40... PMA50... - PMA60... - PMVF10
98.3 (3.87")
(
)
35.8
(1.41")
58 (2.28")
43.7 (1.72")
98.3 (3.87")
5
(0.20")
17.5
(0.69")
PMV... - PMF20
PMA20... - PMA30...
104.7 (4.12")
PROTECTION RELAYS
PMV10...
59.9 (2.36")
PMVF 50
Cutout
61.5 (2.42)
EXM 10...
EXP 10 03
PMVF 51
108 (4.25)
63 (2.48)
43.8 (1.72)
42.7
(1.68)
5
(0.20)
35.8
(1.41)
EXM 10...
45 (1.77)
63.5 (2.50)
105.4 (4.15)
90 (3.54)
35.8
(1.41)
EXM 10...
36.4
(1.43)
INTERFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM UNIT FOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE

PMVF 30
Cutout
26.3
(1.03)
19
(0.75)
92 (3.62)
96 (3.78)
99.5 (3.92)
64.5 (2.54)
53.2 (2.09)
92 (3.62)
96 (3.78)
18
61.5 (2.42)
EXP10...
Cutout adapter
PMVF X00
107 (4.21)
(0. 4
16
)
1
(0.04)
1
(0.04)
161 (6.34)
92 (3.62)
177 (6.97)
92 (3.62)
70 (2.75)
18-16
35.8
(1.41)
92 (3.62)
96 (3.78)
144 (5.67)
5
(0.20)
63 (2.48)
43.8 (1.72)
42.7
(1.68)
45 (1.77)
63.5 (2.50)
53.2 (2.09)
99.5 (3.92)
64.5 (2.54)
96 (3.78)
92 (3.62)
19
(0.75)
105.4 (4.15)
90 (3.54)
26.3
(1.03)
36.4
(1.43)
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Voltage monitoring relays for
3-phase systems without neutral
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence (PMV10-PMV20-PMV30-PMV40-PMV50-PMV60- MV70)

Reset delay
PMV10 - PMV20 - PMV30 - PMV40

PMV50 - PMV60 - PMV70
L1
L2
L3
Reset delay
Reset delay
L1
L2
L2
L1
L3
L3
ON
ON
MAX
MAX
L1 L2 L3
TRMS
14 12 11
MIN
MIN
ASYMMETRY
ASYMMETRY
11 14
12
11
14
12
Maximum and minimum voltage (PMV30 - PMV50 - PMV60 - PMV70)

Reset delay
MAX Delay
Reset delay
MIN Delay
Reset delay
Set up V MAX
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Set up V MIN
L1 - L2 - L3
ON
V MAX
V MIN
11
14
12
Asymmetry (PMV40 - PMV60 - PMV70)

Reset delay
Trip delay
Reset delay
Set point
asymmetry
Hysteresis
L1 - L2 - L3
On
ASYMMETRY
11
14
12
18
18-17
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Voltage monitoring relays for
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence (PMV50N - PMV70N - PMV80N)
3-phase systems c/w or w/o neutral
Reset delay
Reset delay
Reset delay
Reset delay
PMV50N - PMV60N - PMV70N
L1
L2
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
L3
N
ON
ON
MAX
MAX
TRMS
Min
MIN
MIN
ASYMMETRY
ASYMMETRY
Max
14 12 11
24 22 21
V MIN relay 11
14
12
V MIN relay 11
14
12
V MAX relay 21
24
22
V MAX relay 21
24
22
Neutral loss only with VL-N monitoring
Maximum and minimum voltage (PMV50N - PMV70N - PMV80N)

Reset delay
Reset delay
Reset delay
Reset delay
Reset delay
Set up V MAX
Hysteresis
Ue
Hysteresis
Set up V MIN
Ue
ON
V MAX
V MIN
14
12
V MAX relay 21 24
22
V MIN relay 11
Asymmetry (PMV70N)
Reset delay
Maximum and minimum frequency (PMV80N)

Trip delay
Reset delay
Reset delay
Max frequency
Hysteresis
Set point asymmetry

Hysteresis
Hz
Hysteresis
Min frequency
Ue
Ue
ON
ASYMMETRY
Hz
18
14
12
V MAX relay 21 24
22
V MIN relay 11
ON
V MIN relay 11
14
12
V MAX relay 21 24
22
Voltage monitoring relay for 1-phase systems

PMV55
Reset delay
A1
A2
A1 A2
TRMS
14 12 11
Set up V MAX
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Set up V MIN
V MAX
V MIN
ON
14
11
12
A1
A2
18-18
MAX Delay
Reset delay
MIN Delay
Reset delay
MAX delay
Reset delay
MIN delay
Reset delay
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Current monitoring relay for 1-phase systems
PMA20
Operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)

A1
A2
Single-phase connection with CT

L
O
A
D
ON
B1
C(-)
N
L
Reset
16A
A1
Y
METER
Inhibition time
Trip Max current
A1
A2
14 12 11
t >trip delay
C
Inhibition or
Reset
t > trip delay
t < trip delay
Threshold Max current

Hysteresis Max current
Single-phase direct connection

L
O
A
D
B1
16A
D E
OR
D E
Relay ON
A2
Inhibition
14
11
12
METER
A1
Inhibition
Inhibition
Positions
C(-)
N(-)
L(+)
D E
OR
D E
Relay OFF
14
11
12
14 12 11
C
Inhibition or
Reset
Three-phase connection with CT

(1 phase control)
L
O
A
D
L1
L2
L3
Operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)
B1
C(-)
A1
A2
16A
METER
ON
Inhibition
A1
A2
A1
Y
14 12 11
C
Inhibition time
Inhibition or
Reset
Trip Max current
Three-phase direct connection

(1 phase control)
L
O
A
D
B1
A2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Operation
Ie
Relay
output
5A
OFF
ON
16A
OFF
ON
C
G
Inhibition or
Reset
D E
14 12 11
C
Mode
Inhibition
Positions
16A
METER
A1
t < trip delay
C(-)
L1
L2
L3
t > trip delay
t < trip delay

D E
OR
C
G
OR
D E
D E
Relay ON
Inhibition
Inhibition
18
14
11
12
Relay OFF
14
11
12
Latch
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
18-19
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Current monitoring relay for
1-phase systems
Maximum current control operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)

A1
A2
PMA30
Single-phase connection by CT
ON
L
O
A
D
Reset
A1
Y
B1
C(-)
N
L
Inhibition time
16A
METER
Trip Max current
t > trip delay
t > trip delay
t < trip delay

A1
A2
14 12 11
C
Inhibition or
Reset
L
O
A
D
B1
F
G
Relay ON
Inhibition
Inhibition
14
11
12
16A
D E
C(-)
N(-)
L(+)
Inhibition
Positions
D E
Relay OFF
14
11
12
METER
A1
A2
14 12 11
C
Inhibition or
Reset
Maximum current control operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)

A1
A2
Three-phase connection by CT
(1 phase control)
L
O
A
D
L1
L2
L3
ON
B1
C(-)
Inhibition
16A
A1
Y
Inhibition time
METER
Trip Max current
t > trip delay
t < trip delay

A1
A2
Inhibition or
Reset
L
O
A
D
C(-)
D E
B1
18
Inhibition
Positions

(1 phase control)
L1
L2
L3
t < trip delay
14 12 11
D E
Relay ON
Inhibition
Inhibition
14
11
12
Relay OFF
14
11
12
16A
METER
Minimum current control operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)

A1
A2
14 12 11
C
A1
A2
Inhibition or
Reset
ON
Mode
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Operation
Function Relay
output
Minimum
OFF
current
ON
Maximum
current
OFF
ON
Reset
Latch
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
A1
Y
Inhibition time
Trip Min current
t > trip delay
Threshold Min current
Inhibition
Positions
C
D E
18-20
t > trip delay
Hysteresis Min current
D E
Relay ON
14
11
12
Relay OFF
14
11
12
Inhibition
Inhibition
t < trip delay
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Minimum current control operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)
A1
A2
ON
Inhibition
A1
Y
Inhibition time
Trip Min current
t > trip delay
t < trip delay
t < trip delay

Inhibition
Positions
C
D E
D E
Relay ON
14
12
Relay OFF
14
11
12

A1
A2
PMA40
ON
L
O
A
D
Inhibition time
C(-)
B3
N
L
B2
Inhibition
11
Current monitoring relay for

1-phase systems
B1
Inhibition
16A
1A
50mA
Trip Max current

t < trip delay
t > trip delay
METER
MIN current
Trip Min current

t > trip delay
MAX current
t < trip delay

A1
14 12 11
A2
24 22 21

Inhibition
N(-)
L(+)
C(-)
B3
MAX current
14 12 11
A2
24 22 21
L
O
A
D
24
21
22
Separate
14
Relay
MIN ON
11
Relay
MAX OFF
21
12
C(-)
B3
F
G
D E
F
G
D E
18
22
Separate
Relay
MIN OFF
24
14
11
12
14-24
Common
relays ON 11-21
12-22
14-24
Common
relays OFF 11-21
12-22
16A
B2
1A
B1
L1
L2
L3
D E
(1 phase control)
50mA
Relay
MAX ON
METER
MIN current
A2
Inhibition
METER
MIN current
A1
D E
16A
B2
1A
50mA
B1
A1
Inhibition
Positions
L
O
A
D
14 12 11
MAX current
24 22 21
18-21
Relay protection
Wiring diagrams
(1 phase control)

A1
A2
L
O
A
D
C(-)
B3
B2
ON
Inhibition time
16A
1A
50mA
B1
L1
L2
L3
Trip Max current
METER
MIN current
t > trip delay
MAX current
t < trip delay
Trip Min current

t > trip delay
A1
t < trip delay
24 22 21
14 12 11
A2

Operation
Operation Relay
output
Separate
OFF
relays
ON
Mode
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Common
relays
OFF
ON
Latch
Inhibition
Positions
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
D E
Relay
MAX ON
D E
D E
F
G
D E
22
Separate
14
Relay
MIN ON
11
Relay
MAX OFF
21
12
24
22
Separate
Relay
MIN OFF
24
21
14
11
12
14-24
Common
relays ON 11-21
12-22
14-24
Common
relays OFF 11-21
12-22
Pump protection - motor under-load/over-current monitoring

PMA50
External reset disabled (OFF)
A1
A2
L
O
A
D
16A
ON
Reset
L3
L2/N
L1/L
B1
L1
L2
L3
A1
Y
600V
Inhibition time
METER
Trip Max current
18
A1
A2
t < trip delay
14 12 11
t > trip delay
Trip Min cos

C Enable
t < trip delay

Relay
L3
L2/N
L1/L
B1
11
12
L
O
A
D
L1
L2
L3
t > trip delay
14

Hysteresis Min cos
Threshold Min cos
16A
600V
METER
A1
A2
14 12 11
Y
C Enable
18-22
Inhibition
Inhibition
Inhibition
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
External reset enabled (ON)

A1
A2
L
O
A
D
16A
ON
L3
L2/N
L1/L
B1
L1
N
600V
Reset
METER
A1
Y
Inhibition time
A1
A2
14 12 11
Trip Max current

C Enable
t < trip delay
t > trip delay
Trip Min cos
Operation
Connection External
Ie
reset
5A
1 phase
OFF
ON
3 phase
OFF
ON
16A
1 phase
OFF
ON
3 phase
OFF
ON
Mode
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
t < trip delay
Relay
11
12

Hysteresis Min cos
Threshold Min cos
Inhibition
Phase shift monitoring relay

PMA60
ON
L2/N
L1/L
B1
Inhib.

L
O
A
D
16A
Inhibition
Inhibition
A1
A2
L1
L2
L3
t > trip delay
14
Inhibition time
600V
METER
Trip Max cos

t > trip delay
MAX cos
MIN cos
t < trip delay
Trip Min cos

t < trip delay
t > trip delay

Threshold Max cos
A1
24 22 21
14 12 11
A2
Hysteresis Max cos

Hysteresis Min cos
Threshold Min cos
Inhibition
L
O
A
D
16A
600V
A1
A2
14 12 11
D E
24
Relay
MAX ON 21
22
14
Relay
MIN ON 11
12
OR
MAX cos
Inhibition
METER
MIN cos
Inhibition
Positions
L2/N
L1/L
B1
L1
L2
L3
D E
18
24 22 21
C
D E
24
Relay
MAX OFF 21
22
14
Relay
MIN OFF 11
12
OR
C
D E
18-23
Relay protection
Wiring diagrams

A1
A2
L
O
A
D
16A
L2/N
L1/L
B1
L1
N
ON
600V
Inhibition time
METER
MIN cos
MAX cos
Trip Max cos

t < trip delay
t > trip delay

Trip Min cos
A1
24 22 21
14 12 11
A2
t > trip delay
t < trip delay
Threshold Max cos

Hysteresis Max cos
Operation
Connection Relay
output
1 phase
OFF
Mode
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
ON
3 phase
OFF
ON
Hysteresis Min cos
Latch
Threshold Min cos

Inhibition
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Positions
C
D E
24
Relay
MAX ON 21
22
14
Relay
MIN ON 11
12
OR
C
D E
D E
24
Relay
21
MAX OFF
22
14
Relay
MIN OFF 11
12
OR
C

PMF20
D E
MAX-MIN, MAX or MIN function
MAX function
A1
Reset delay
A2
MAX Delay
Reset delay
MIN Delay
Reset delay
A1 A2
F. Detect
Set Hz MAX
Hysteresis
14 12 11
Rated
frequency
Hysteresis
Set Hz MIN
MAX Delay
Set Hz MAX
Hysteresis
Rated
frequency
A1 - A2
18
A1 - A2
Hz MAX
Hz MAX
Hz MIN
ON
ON
14
14
Relay 11
Relay 11
12
18-24
12
Reset delay
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Interface protection systems compliant with Italian CEI 0-21 standard, June 2012 edition - For low voltage
PMVF 20...
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION LINE

DDI
(OPTION)
L1 L2 L3 N
TA1
TA2
TA3
GENERATION
Rear view
---
VOLTAGE
INPUTS
A1
A2
400VAC
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
I1
I2
I3
OUT1
OUT3
OUT2
DIGITAL INPUTS
CURRENT INPUTS
11
12
14
21
22
+ COM
24
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
STANDBY DEVICE
A1
RELAY SUPPLY
250VAC MAX
A1
OUT4
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS
11
12
14
21
22
24
A1/-
A2/+
I2
S2
S1
I3
S2
V1
V2
S1
S2
V3
VN
LSP
PROGRAMMABLE
PROTECTION
ALARM
DDI
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
S1
OPTION
V1 V2 V3 VN
I1
INPUTS
12...48VDC
100...400VAC
110...250VDC
ON
1
OPTIONAL
EXP10 03
OUTPUTS
PMVF 20
OPTION
IN1 DDI Feedback

IN2 Frequency window choice
IN3 Local control
IN4 Remote tripping
A2
For PMVF 20 D048 only.

Local control choice.
A2
PMVF 50
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION LINE
DDI
(OPTION)
L1 L2 L3 N
TA1
TA2
TA3
GENERATION
OUT1
V1 V2 V3 VN
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
---
VOLTAGE
INPUTS
A1
A2
400VAC
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
I1
I2
I3
OUT2
OUT3
OUTPUTS
OUT4
OUTPUTS
DIGITAL INPUTS
DIGITAL INPUTS
CURRENT INPUTS
A1
A2
11
12
14
21
22
24
STANDBY DEVICE
DDI
IN1 IN2
A1
A2
11
12
14
21
22
24
IN3 IN4
LSP
PROGRAMMABLE
PROTECTION
ALARM

Product termination is IN1 and IN2 respectively
A1
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
IN3 Frequency window choice

IN4 Remote tripping
IN1 DDI feedback

IN2 Local control
PMVF 50
for IN3 and IN4 functions.
A2
18
Activation modes for standby device

P01.05
P01.05
P04.19
P04.17 P01.14
POWER SUPPLY
SPI
V/F OK
DDI OUT 1
11
14
12
DDI INP 1
STANDBY DEVICE
P01.13
24
MODE A
21
22
(default)
MODE B
21
24
22
MODE C
21
24
22
18-25
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Sistema di protezione di interfaccia conforme norma CEI 0-21 edizione giugno 2012 - Per bassa tensione
PMVF 51
LOW VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3 N
DDI
(OPTION)
TA1
TA2
TA3
GENERATION
EXM10 02
S1 S2
S1 S2
I1
I2
I3
CURRENT INPUTS
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
A1 A1 A2 A2
14 11 12
24 21 22
COM IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
STANDBY DEVICE
DDI FEEDBACK
LOCAL CONTROL
FREQUENCY
WINDOW CHOICE
REMOTE TRIPPING
A1
A2

P01.05
POWER SUPPLY
SPI
V/F OK
DDI OUT 1
11
14
12
DDI INP 1
STANDBY DEVICE
P01.13
24
MODE A
21
22
(default)
18
MODE B
21
24
22
MODE C
21
24
22
18-26
P01.05
P04.19
P04.17 P01.14
A1 A1 A2 A2
14 11 12
24 21 22
LSP
GLOBAL
PROTECTION ALARM
DDI
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
OUT 4
INPUT 4
A2
S1 S2
INPUT 3
---
A1
VOLTAGE
INPUTS
400VAC
INPUT 1
V1 V2 V3 VN
100 - 240VAC
110 - 250VDC
OPTIONAL EXM10 01
INPUT 2
PMVF 51
IN1 IN2
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Interface protection systems compliant with Italian CEI 0-16 standard, December 2012 edition - For medium voltage
PMVF 30...
Connection through VTs in Medium Voltage
MEDIUM VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3
(OPTION)
Current input wiring not required
by Italian CEI 0-16
To use only with
CT connection (e.g. ARON)
DG
DDI
TA1
Rear view
ON
1
TV5
TV1
I1
TV2
S1
OUTPUTS
IN1 DDI Feedback

IN2 Interface protection exclusion
IN3 Local control
IN4 Remote tripping
A1/-
A2/+
I2
S2
S1
I3
S2
OPTION
TV4
INPUTS
TV3
V1
S1
S2
OPTION
GENERATION
TA2
V2
V3
VN
(OPTIONAL EXP10 03)
12...48VDC
100...400VAC
110...250VDC
---
A1
A2
V4 V5
V1
VOLTAGE INPUTS
50 - 500V~ AC
V2 V3
S1 S2
S1 S2
I3
I2
CURRENT
MEASUREMENTS
OUT 3
OUT 4
OUTPUTS
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUTPUTS
S1 S2
I1
DIGITAL INPUTS
11 12 14
21 22 24
+ COM -
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
STANDBY DEVICE
DDI
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
A1
RELAY SUPPLY
250VAC MAX
A1
11 12 14
21 22 24
AUTOMATIC
RECLOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
ALARM
A2

VT in MV for residual voltage measurements.
A2
Direct connection in Low Voltage

MEDIUM VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3
(OPTION)
Current input wiring not required
by Italian CEI 0-16
To use only with
CT connection (e.g. ARON)
DG
DDI
TA1
GENERATION
TA2
TV3
TV4
TV5
Rear view
ON
1
---
A1
A2
V4 V5
V1 V2 V3
VOLTAGE INPUTS
50 - 500V~ AC
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
S1 S2
I3
I2
CURRENT
MEASUREMENTS
A1/-
11 12 14
21 22 24
DDI
A1
RELAY SUPPLY
250VAC MAX
A1
A2
I2
S1
I3
S2
OPTION
S2
S1
S2
DIGITAL INPUTS
+ COM -
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
STANDBY DEVICE
AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
INPUTS
12...48VDC
100...400VAC
110...250VDC
OUT 3
OUT 4
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS
S1
(OPTIONAL EXP10 03)

OUT 1
OUT 2
OUTPUTS
I1
OPTION
IN1 DDI Feedback

IN2 Interface protection exclusion
IN3 Local control
IN4 Remote tripping
11 12 14
AUTOMATIC
RECLOSING
A2/+
V1
V2
V3
VN
21 22 24
PROGRAMMABLE
ALARM

VT in MV for residual voltage measurements.
A2

P01.05
P01.05
P04.19
P04.17 P01.14
POWER SUPPLY
SPI
V/F OK
DDI OUT 1
11
14
12
DDI INP 1
STANDBY DEVICE
P01.13
24
MODE A
21
22
(default)
MODE B
21
24
22
MODE C
21
24
22
18-27
18
Protection relays
TYPE
Single phase
PMV55
Three phase
PMV10
PMV20
PMV30
PMV40
Three phase with/without neutral
Minimum AC voltage,
phase loss and
Asymmetry,
phase loss and
DESCRIPTION
Mimum and
maximum AC voltage
Phase loss and

CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated voltage
to control (Ue)
380-440VAC
208-240VAC
208-480VAC
100-240VAC
208-240VAC
208-575VAC
380-575VAC
Maximum voltage set-point
105-115% Ue
Minimum voltage set-point
80-95% Ue
80-95% Ue
Asymmetry set-point
5-15%Ue
Minimum and maximum

frequency set-point
380-600VAC
600VAC
Tripping time
0.1-20s
60ms
0.1-20s
Resetting time
0.1-20s
(0.5s at power up)
0.5s
0.1-20s
(0.5s at power up)
Resetting hysteresis
Instantaneous tripping for Ue
Repeat accuracy
3%
5%
<70% Ue configured
Umin<70% Umax
<70% Ue configured
3%
<70% minimum Ue
< 0-1%
< 1%
< 0.1%
< 0.1%
0.7-1.2Ue
0.85-1.1Ue
POWER SUPPLY
Auxiliary voltage (Us)
Operating range
Self powered
Frequency
0.7-1.2Ue
50/60Hz 5%
10VA (208-240VAC)
17VA (380-440VAC)
20VA
1.5W
2.2W
28VA
11VA (208-240VAC)
30VA (380-575VAC)
19VA (600VAC)
2.5W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays
Relay state
Normally enegised
De-energises at tripping
Contact arrangement
1 changeover SPDT
Rated operational voltage
250VAC
400VAC
Conventional free-air thermal

current (Ith)
8A

designation
18
B300
105 cycles
Electrical life
(with rated load)
30x106 cycles
Mechanical life
Indications
1 green LED for power on

and tripping
2 red LEDs for tripping

and tripping

and tripping
1 red LED for tripping
CONNECTIONS
(maximum)
0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin per UL/CSA)

0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12 AWG per UL/CSA)

INSULTION (input-output)
440VAC
480VAC
600VAC
6kV
4kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
20...+60C
Storage temperature
30...+80C
HOUSING
Material
Power consumption (maximum) at 50Hz.
18-28
Protection relays
PMV50
PMV60
PMV70
PMV50 N
PMV70 N
PMV80 N
Minimum and maximum

AC voltage, phase loss and
Minimum AC voltage,
phase loss,
and asymmetry
Minimum and maximum

AC voltage, phase loss,
and asymmetry
Minimum and maximum

neutral loss and incorrect
phase sequence
Minimum and maximum

neutral loss, incorrect phase
sequence and asymmetry
Minimum and maximum

AC voltage and frequency,
phase loss, neutral loss and
208-240VAC
208-240VAC
208-240VAC
208-240VAC
208-240VAC
208-240VAC
380-575VAC
380-575VAC
380-575VAC
380-440VAC
380-440VAC
380-440VAC
600VAC
600VAC
600VAC
480-600VAC
480-600VAC
480-600VAC
105-15% Ue
105-115% Ue
105-115% Ue
105-115% Ue
105-115% Ue
80-95% Ue
80-95% Ue
80-95% Ue
80-95% Ue
80-95% Ue
80-95% Ue
5-15% Ue
5-15% Ue
5-15% Ue
1-10% rated frequency
0.1-20s
(0.5s at power up)
0,1-20s
(0.5s at power up)
0.5s
0.1-20s
0.5s
3%
3%
3%
3%
3%
0.1-20s
0.1-20s
0.1-5s frequency
0.5s
3%
0.5% frequency
<70% Ue configured
< 0.1%
Self powered
0.7-1.2Ue
50/60Hz 5%
11VA (208-240VAC)
30VA (380-575VAC)
19VA (600VAC)
27VA max
2.5W
1.9W max
2
Normally energised
De-energises at tripping
1 changeover SPDT
2 changeover SPDT
250VAC
400VAC
8A
B300
105 cycles
18
30x106 cycles
and tripping

and tripping

and tripping
0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin per UL/CSA - PMV...N excluded)

0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12 AWG per UL/CSA - PMV...N excluded)
600VAC
6kV
4kV
20...+60C
30...+80C
18-29
Protection relays
TYPE
PMA20
PMA30
PMA40
Single-phase
maximum current
monitoring
AC/DC multiscale
Single-phase
minimum or maximum
current monitoring
AC/DC multiscale
Single-phase
minimum and maximum
current monitoring
AC/DC multiscale
DESCRIPTION
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated current to be monitored Ie
5 or 16A
0.02 - 0.05 - 0.25 - 1 - 5 -16A
Rated frequency
50/60Hz 5%
Overload capacity
50mA - 1A inputs
16A input
5 Ie for 1s
10Ie for 10ms
Constant 2Ie
5 Ie for 1s
160A for 10ms
Constant 16A
5 Ie for 1s
160A for 10ms
Constant 16A
Connection
Adjustment
Direct or by current transformer

Tripping values
5-100% f.s.
Tripping time
0.1-30s
Inhibition time
Resetting hysteresis
1-60s
1-50%
3% fixed
Resetting
External input
Automatic / Manual
Resetting / Inhibition
Repeat accuracy
1% with constant parameters
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Auxiliary supply voltage Us
24-240VAC/DC
Operating range
0.85-1.1 Us
Rated frequency
50/60Hz 5%
3.2VA
7VA
1.6W
1.7W
Number of relays
Relay state
Normally energised / de-energised (selectable)
RELAY OUTPUTS
Contact arrangement
1 changeover contact SPDT each
250VAC
Maximum switching
voltage
400VAC
IEC conventional free air thermal

current Ith
8A

designation
B300
105 cycles
Electrical life
(with rated load)
30x106 cycles
Mechanical life
Indications
18
1 green LED
for power on/inhibition
1 red LED for tripping
1 green LED for

power on/inhibition
2 red LEDs for max/min tripping
CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque
maximum

voltage
415V
4kV
2.5kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
20...+60C
Storage temperature
30...+80C
HOUSING
Material
18-30
Protection relays
Pump protection and phase shift monitoring relays
TYPE
PMA50
PMA60
Single and three-phase pump protection

(motor under-load and over-current control)
monitoring for max AC current, min cos
phase loss and incorrect phase sequence
Single and three-phase shift control

for minimum and maximum
cosmonitoring
DESCRIPTION
CURRENT AND COS CONTROL CIRCUIT

Rated current Ie
5 or 16A
16A
Rated frequency
50/60Hz 5%
Overload capacity
5Ie for 1s
160A for 10ms
Constant 16A
Connection
Adjustments
Direct or by current transformer

End-scale value
5 or 16A
16A
Tripping for MAX current
10-100Ie
Tripping for cos 0.1-0.99 cos (MIN) 0.1-0.99 cos (MIN and MAX)
Tripping delay
0.1-10s
0.1-30s
Inhibition time
1-60s
1-60s
OFF-100min
Automatic resetting
delay
External input
Consent for running/resetting
Repeat accuracy
1% with constant parameters
VOLTAGE CONTROL CIRCUIT

Voltage measuring range (Ue)
80...660VAC
Tripping time for phase loss
60ms
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
220-240VAC
380-415VAC (maximum voltage for UL/CSA)
440-480VAC
Operating range
0.85-1.1 Us
0.85-1.1 Us
Frequency range
50/60Hz 5%
50/60Hz 5%
4.5VA
4.4VA
2.3W
2.4W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays
Relay state
Contact arrangement
Normally energised,
de-energises at tripping
Normally energised / de-energised (ON-OFF)

(configurable)
1 changeover contact SPDT each
250VAC
400VAC
8A
B300
Electrical life (With rated load)

Mechanical life
Indications
18
105 cycles
30x106 cycles
1 green LED for power on/inhibition
2 red LEDs for minimum/maximum tripping
CONNECTIONS
600VAC
6kV
2.5kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
20...+60C
Storage temperature
30...+80C
HOUSING
Material
18-31
Protection relays
TYPE
PMF20
DESCRIPTION
Single-phase minimum and maximum frequency control
FREQUENCY CONTROL CIRCUIT

Rated frequency
50 or 60Hz selectable
Operating frequency range

Adjustment
MAX tripping
40-70Hz
101-110% operating frequency
MIN tripping90-99% operating frequency

Resetting hysteresys
Inhibition time
Reset delay
Resetting
Repeat accuracy
0.5%
0.1-20s
0.1-20s
Automatic
< 0.1%
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
Operating range
Rated frequency
0.85-1.1 Us
50/60Hz
10VA (220-240VAC); 17VA (380-415VAC)
1.5W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays
Relay state
Contact arrangement
1
Normally energised, de-energises at tripping
1 changeover contact SPDT
250VAC
400VAC
8A
B300

Mechanical life
Indications
105 cycles
30x106 cycles
1 green LED for power on/tripping
2 red LEDs for min-max tripping
CONNECTIONS
INSULATION (input - output)

575V
6kV
4kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
18
20...+60C
Storage temperature
30...+80C
HOUSING
Material
Normally de-energised, energises at tripping with MAX function configured.
18-32
Protection relays
TYPE
PMVF 20
PMVF 20 D048
Rated control supply voltage Us
100400VAC/110250VDC
12-48VDC
Operating limits
90440VAC/93.5-300VDC
9-70VDC
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
Frequency
Power consumption
Power dissipation
4555Hz
6VA at 110VAC; 8VA at 230VAC; 11VA at 400VAC
DC supply
25mA at 110VDC; 11mA at 250VDC
250mA at 12VDC; 120mA 24VDC; 62mA at 48VDC
AC supply
2.7W at 110VAC; 3W at 220V; 3.9W at 400VAC
DC supply
2.6W at 110VAC; 2.8W at 250VDC
3W at 12VDC; 2.9W at 24VDC; 3W at 48VDC
50ms at 110VAC ; 200ms at 230VAC
15ms at 12VDC; 30ms at 24VDC; 70ms at 48VDC
III
III
AC supply
Micro-breaking immunity
Overload category
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Maximum rated operating voltage
400VAC L-L; 230VAC L-N 50Hz
Measuring range
20 480VAC L-L; 10 276VAC L-N
Frequency range
45 55Hz
Overload category
IV
CURRENT INPUTS (OPTIONAL)

Measuring range
Type of input
Type of measurement
Overload capacity
Overload peak
Burden (per phase)
1A or 5A in AC programmable
For 1A scale: 0.011.2A; for 5A scale: 0.016A
Shunts powered by external current transformer (low voltage) 5A max.
RMS
20% Ie
50A for 1 second
0.6W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs
Type of output
Rated operating voltage
Overload category
2
1 changeover contact/SPDT each
250VAC
5A 250VAC AC1 /B300 ; 5A 30VDC
III
DIGITAL INPUTS
Number and type of inputs
4 negative (NPN)
Input voltage
24VDC isolated
Input current
7mA
SUPPLY/VOLTAGE MEASURING CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS

Type of terminals
Conductor section (min - max)
Tightening torque
Screw - removable
0.2-2.5mm (24-12 AWG)
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
CURRENT MEASURING CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS

Type of terminals
Number of terminals
Tightening torque
Screw - fixed
18
6 for external CT connections

0.2-4mm (26-10 AWG)
0.8Nm (7lbin)
RELAY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

Type of terminals
Tightening torque
Screw - removable
0.2-2.5 mm (24-12 AWG)
0.5Nm (4.5 lbin)
INPUT CONNECTIONS Input terminals

Type of terminals
Tightening torque
Screw - removable
0.2-1.5 mm (28-14 AWG)
0.18Nm (1.7lbin)
INPUT CONNECTIONS COM and auxiliary voltage terminals

Type of terminals
Tightening torque
Screw - removable
0.2-2.5 mm (24-12 AWG)
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
HOUSING
Material
Polyamide
Version
Flush mount 96x96mm / 3.78x3.78
18-33
Protection relays
TYPE
PMVF 50
PMVF 51
100240VAC/110250VDC
100240VAC/110250VDC
Operating limits
85264VAC/93.5300VDC
85264VAC/93.5300VDC
Frequency
Power consumption
Power dissipation
4555Hz
4555Hz
AC supply
8.5VA at 110VAC; 12.5VA at 230VAC
4.6VA at 110VAC; 12.5VA at 230VAC
DC supply
23mA at 110VDC; 11mA 250VDC
AC supply
4.4W at 110VAC; 5W at 230VAC
2.5W at 110VAC; 2.7W at 230VAC
DC supply
4.3W at 110VAC; 4.7W at 250VDC
2.3W at 110VDC; 2.5W at 250VDC
50ms at 100VDC; 200ms at 240VDC
II
II
Overload category
VOLTAGE INPUTS
400VAC L-L; 230VAC L-N 50Hz
Measuring range
20 480VAC L-L; 10 276VAC L-N
Frequency range
45 55Hz
Overload category
IV

Measuring range
Type of measurement
RMS
Overload capacity
20% Ie
Overload peak
50A for 1 second

0.6W
Burden (per phase)

RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs
Type of output
2
250VAC
250VAC
For NO contact: 5A 250VAC AC1/C300;

5A 30VDC
For NC contact: 2A 250VAC AC1 / C300;
2A 30VDC
For NO contact: 5A 250VAC AC1/C300;

5A 30VDC
For NC contact: 2A 250VAC AC1 / C300;
2A 30VDC
II
II
Overload category
DIGITAL INPUTS
4 negative (NPN)
4 positive (PNP)
Input voltage
24VDC isolated
12VDC isolated
Input current
7mA
7mA

Type of terminals
Screw - removable
0.2-4mm (24-12 AWG)
Tightening torque
0.8Nm (4.5lbin)
18
Type of terminals
Screw - fixed
Number of terminals
0.2-2.5mm (24-12 AWG)
Tightening torque
0.44Nm (4lbin)

Type of terminals
Screw - removable
0.2-2.5 mm (24-12 AWG)
Tightening torque
0.44Nm (4lbin)

Type of terminals
Screw - removable
0.2-2.5 mm (24-12 AWG)
Tightening torque
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
HOUSING
Material
Polyamide
Polyamide
Version
Modular 8U
Modular 6U
Single insulation between the two outputs. Both outputs must use the same voltage group.
18-34
Protection relays
TYPE
PMVF 30

100400VAC/110250VDC
Operating limits
90440VAC/93.5300VDC
Frequency
4555Hz
Power consumption
alimentazione AC
alimentazione DC
Power dissipation
alimentazione AC
4W at 110VAC; 4.2W at 220V; 5W at 400VAC
alimentazione DC
Overload category
7.5VA at 110VAC; 10VA at 230VAC; 14VA at 400VAC
3.8W at 110VAC; 4W at 250VDC

III
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Measuring range (Un)
Frequency range
Overload category
50-500VAC (for voltages/frequency) / 50-150V (for residual voltage measurement)

400-150,000V (VT primary)
45 55Hz
IV

Measuring range
Type of input
Type of measurement
Overload capacity
Overload peak
Burden (per phase)
Shunts powered by external current transformer (low voltage) 5A max.
RMS
100% Ie
50A for 1 second
0.3W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs
Type of output
Overload category
2
250VAC
5A 250VAC AC1 /B300; 5A 30VDC
III
DIGITAL INPUTS
4 negative (NPN)
Input voltage
24VDC isolated
Input current
7mA

Type of terminals
Number of terminals
Tightening torque
Screw - removable
2 for power supply; 5 for voltage control
0.2-2.5mm (24-12 AWG)
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)

Type of terminal
Number of terminals
Tightening torque
18
Screw - fixed
0.2-4mm (26-10 AWG)
0.8Nm (7lbin)

Type and (number) of terminals
Screw removable (3)
0.2-2.5 mm (24-12 AWG)
Tightening torque
0.5Nm (4.5 lbin)

Screw removable (4)
0.2-1.5 mm (28-14 AWG)
Tightening torque
0.18Nm (1.7lbin)
INPUT CONNECTIONS COM and auxiliary voltage terminals

Screw removable (3)
0.2-2.5 mm (24-12 AWG)
Tightening torque
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
HOUSING
Material
Polyamide
Version
Flush mount 96x96mm / 3.78x3.78
18-35
Page 19-2
Page 19-5
ELECTRODES
Single pole
Three pole.
LEVEL CONTROL RELAYS

For conductive liquids
Single, dual or multivoltage
Emptying or filling functions
Multifunction
Automatic resetting
Modular and plug-in versions.
Description
START-UP PRIORITY CHANGE RELAY

2 outputs
Single or multivoltage
Modular and plug-in versions.

LVM20
Modular version
(2U)
LVM25
(1U)
LVM30
(3U)
LVM40
5 detecting electrodes
(MIN1, MAX1, MIN2, MAX2 and COM)
Sensitivity adjustment 2.5...50k
(1U)

(8 pin)

(11 pin)
LVMP10
CSP2E
(3U)

(11 pin)
Adjustable sensitivity full-scale value

25-50-100-200 k
Separate sensitivity adjustment

of MAX probe (foam detection)

Emptying function with Extra-MIN

and/or Extra-MAX alarm relays
Filling function with Extra-MIN and

Extra-MAX alarm relays
Emptying function with pump

start change control
Filling function with pump start

change control
Tank filling, well drawing functions

and alarm

5 function adjustment
selector

Motor start-up priority change

Motor start-up priority change with
stand-by motor function
Page
LVMP05
Fixed sensitivity: 7...8k
Filling-emptying adjustment
selector
LV2E
Filling function and alarms
LV1E
Emptying function and alarms
PRIORITY CHANGE RELAYS

FOR 2 MOTORS
(3U)
Plug-in version
3 detecting electrodes
(MIN, MAX and COM)
Page 19-6

19-2
19-3
19-4
19-6
19
Level monitoring for electrically

conductive liquids
Modular and plug-in versions
Adjustable 2.5-200k sensitivity
Single and three-pole electrodes
Startup priority change relays.
Level monitoring relays

Modular version for conductive liquids ..............................................................................................................................
Modular starter kit ............................................................................................................................................................
Plug-in level control relays for conductive liquids ..............................................................................................................
Electrodes and electrode holder. Rod probes ......................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
19
19
19
19
2
4
4
5
Start-up priority change relays

Modular version .................................................................................................................................................................
Plug-in version ..................................................................................................................................................................
19 - 6
19 - 6
Accessories ................................................................................................................. 19 - 7
A UTOMATION
AND
C ONTROL
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 19 - 8
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 19 - 9

Modular version
Single-voltage relay
Order code
Supply
voltage
Type of
output
contacts
[V] 50/60Hz
Qty
per
pkg
Weight
[kg]
Automatic resetting.
LVM20 A024
24VAC
1 C/O (SPDT) 1
0.215
LVM20 A127
110-127VAC
1 C/O (SPDT) 1
0.215
LVM20 A240
220-240VAC
1 C/O (SPDT) 1
0.215
LVM20 A415
380-415VAC
1 C/O (SPDT) 1
0.215
Use with 3 sensing electrodes, MIN, MAX and COM
2.5-50kOhm adjustable sensitivity
Double insulation between supply, electrodes and
output relay circuit
Fixed probe signal delay: <1s
Red LED indicator for output relay state
IP20 on terminals.
Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Level
control relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
LVM20...
Electrodes and electrode holders

Use electrodes or electrode holders type:
SN1/PS31/PS3S/SCM/CGL or similar. See page 19-5.
Multi-voltage relay
Order code
Supply
voltage
Type of
output
contacts
[V]
Qty
per
pkg
Weight
[kg]
Emptying or filling function.

LVM25 240
24-240VAC/DC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1
0.095
LVM25 240
Insensivity to stray electrode-cable capacitance
Programming selector for emptying or filling function
with fail-safe operation
IP20 on terminals.
control relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Dual-voltage relay
Order code
19
Supply
voltage
[V] 50/60Hz
Type of
output
contacts
Qty
per
pkg
Weight
[kg]
Emptying or filling function.

LVM30 A240
24/220-240VAC 2 C/O (SPDT) 1
0.315
LVM30 A415
110-127VAC
380-415VAC
0.315
2 C/O (SPDT) 1
LVM30...
Programming selector for emptying or filling function
with fail-safe operation
Double insulation between each supply, electrode and
Adjustable probe signal delay: 1-10s
Adjustable pump start delay: 0-300s
IP20 on terminals.
control relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
19-2
Dimensions
page 19-8
Wiring diagrams
page 19-9
page 19-12

Modular version
Single-voltage
multifunction relay
Order code
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
Type of
output
contacts
[V] 50/60Hz
Qty Weight
per
pkg
n
[kg]
Multifunctions.
LVM40 A024
24VAC
1 C/O +1 N/O 1
0.278
LVM40 A127
110-127VAC 1 C/O +1 N/O 1
0.278
LVM40 A240
220-240VAC 1 C/O +1 N/O 1
0.278
LVM40 A415
380-415VAC 1 C/O +1 N/O 1
0.278
Two relay outputs; one with c/o (SPDT) and the other with N/O (SPST).
LVM40...
FUNCTIONS
A- Emptying with MIN and/or
MAX alarms.
B- Filling with MIN
and/or MAX alarms.
Tank
Alarm
Start
Stop
Alarm
MAX 2
MAX 1
MIN 1
MIN 2
COM
C- Emptying with pump priority

change.
D- Filling with pump priority
change.
Tank
MAX 2
MAX 1
MIN 2
MIN 1
COM
E- Tank filling and well drawing

with alarm.
Tank
MAX 1
MIN 1
COM
Tank
MAX 2
EXAMPLE OF EMPTYNG OPERATION

To achieve this type of operation, two electrodes are used
to control the liquid between the fixed limits using MIN1
and MAX1 and two alarm levels using MIN2 and MAX2.
When one of the alarm electrodes is wet, the alarm relay is
de-energised.
The alarm can be caused by pump malfunction,
insufficient pump delivery capacity, MAX control level
failure or MIN level electrode shorted.
With a proper connection, only the MIN alarm or MAX
alarm can be activated or neither of the two can be
activated so the relative output contacts can be used for
pump control.
Use with 5 sensing electrodes, MIN1, MAX1, MIN2,
MAX2 and COM
Sensitivity adjustment: 25-50-100-200kOhm
Separate sensitivity adjustment of MAX electrodes for
foam detection
Insensitivity to stray electrode-cable capacitance
Programming selector for 5 different functions:
Standard emptying and alarms
Standard filling and alarms
Emptying and filling with priority start-up change
control
Filling with priority start-up change pump
Well draining and tank filling and alarms
Double insulation between each supply, electrodes and
output relay circuits
Adjustable probe signal delay: 1-10s
Adjustable pump start delay: 0-30min
Red LED indicators for output relay and electrode state
IP20 on terminals.
control relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
EXAMPLE OF EMPTYNG OPERATION

This operation is obtained by using four electrodes
positioned at four different levels and two relay outputs to
control two pumps.
For example, one can place the four electrodes, MIN1,
MIN2, MAX1 and MAX2, in increasing order from the
lowest to the highest levels and must control the tank
emptying. Usually. The level is controlled between the
MIN1 and MAX1 levels by starting one of the two pumps
but this case is different so the pumps can be mainteined
at the best efficiency and optimise thei wear.
When the liquid wets the MAX2 level and because the first
pump is faulty or else a higher delivery capacity is needed,
the second stand-by pump is activiated to back up the first
pump. When the liquid lowers and no longer wets the
MIN2 level, the second pump is stopped and then when
the MIN1 level is no longer wet, the first pump is stopped
too.
19
EXAMPLE OF OPERATION
Two electrodes are used in this operation to control the

tank level and another two for the well. One relay is
used to activate the pump while the other for dry
running / no water alarm.
When the well liquid wets the MAX2 level and the
liquid wets the MIN1 tank level, the tank-filling pump
is activated. When the tank MAX1 level is wet, the
pump is stopped.
During the tank filling, the pump could stop before the
MAX1 level is wet because the well MIN2 level is no
longer wet.
Should the tank MIN1 level no longer be wet at which
the pump should restart but the well MIN2 level is also
no longer wet, then the alarm relay is de-energised.
MIN 2
COM
Dimensions
page 19-8
Wiring diagrams
page 19-10
page 19-12
19-3

Modular starter kit.
Plug-in version
Starter kit
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[mm]
[kg]
LVMKIT25
Level control starter kit

1
complete with LVM25 240
relay and two SN1
electrodes
0.192
LVM25 240
Use with 2 sensing electrodes, MIN and COM
IP20 on terminals.
SN1 SINGLE POLE ELECTRODE
A single pole electrode used for level control in wells or
storage tanks. It comprises an AISI 303 stainless steel
probe, a plastic (PPOX) holder and a cable gland.
A seal ring and the tightening of the cable gland prevent
water from entering the cable terminal connector and
causing its oxidation.
The external cable diameter must be 2.5 to 6mm/0.1 to
0.24 to warrant perfect sealing of the PG7 gland.
Maximum cable section: 2.5mm2/14AWG.
Maximum operating temperature: +60C.
Application: tanks and deep wells.
Level control relay only:
control relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Plug-in
single-voltage relay
Order code
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
Type of
output
contact
[V] 50/60Hz
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Automatic reset.
31 LV1E 24
24VAC
1 C/O (SPDT) 1
0.263
31 LV1E 110
110-120VAC
1 C/O (SPDT) 1
0.263
31 LV1E 230
220-240VAC
1 C/O (SPDT) 1
0.263
31 LV1E 400
380-415VAC
1 C/O (SPDT) 1
0.263
Used with 3 sensing electrodes, MIN, MAX and COM
7-8kOhm fixed sensitivity
Maximum relay-electrode cable length: 500m/547yd
using single-core double insulated cables
8-pin plug-in housing
Mounting on 35mm (IEC/EN 60715) DIN rail using
31 S8 socket; see page 19-7
Flush mounting with mount frame 31 G216 and loose
31 L48 P8 socket; see page 19-7
Reference standards
31 LV1E...

19
Plug-in
dual-voltage relay
Order code
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
Type of
output
contact
[V] 50/60Hz
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Automatic reset.
31 LV2E 48
24-48VAC
1 C/O (SPDT) 1
0.266
31 LV2E 220
110-120VAC/
220-240VAC
1 C/O (SPDT) 1
0.266
31 LV2E 400
220-240/
380-415VAC
1 C/O (SPDT) 1
0.266
Used with 3 sensing electrodes, MIN, MAX and COM
7-8kOhm fixed sensitivity
Maximum relay-electrode cable length: 500m/547yd
using single-core double insulated cables
11-pin plug-in housing
Mounting on 35mm (IEC/EN 60715) DIN rail using
31 S11 socket; see page 19-7
Flush mounting using mount frame 31 G216 and
loose 31 L48 P11 socket; see page 19-7
Reference standards
31 LV2E...

19-4
Accessories
page 19-7
Dimensions
page 19-8
Wiring diagrams
pages 19-9 and 11
page 19-13

Level electrodes and electrode holders for conductive liquids.
Rod probes
Electrodes and
electrode holder
Order code
Rod
Rod
probe
probe
included length
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[mm/in]
[kg]
Single pole electrodes.
11 SN1
11 SN1
Yes
100/3.9
10
0.050
31 SCM 04
Yes
43/1.7
0.060
31 SCM 50
Yes
500/19.7
0.115
31 SCM 100
Yes
1000/39.4 1
0.162
31 CGL125 3
Yes
327/12.9
0.126
31 CGL125 5
Yes
500/19.7
0.158
31 CGL125 7
Yes
700/27.6
0.208
31 CGL125 10
Yes
1000/39.4 1
0.281
Yes
300/11.8
0.120
0.184
Three pole electrode.

31 PS31
Electrode holder (for 3 rod probes).

31 PS3S
31 SCM...
No
Total electrode length.
SN1 SINGLE POLE ELECTRODE
A single pole electrode used for level control in wells or
storage tanks. It comprises an AISI 303 stainless steel
probe, a plastic (PPOX) holder and a cable gland.
A seal ring and the tightening of the cable gland PG7 prevent
water from entering the cable terminal connector and
causing its oxidation.
Cable connection: screw.
The external cable diameter must be 2.5 to 6mm/0.1 to
0.24 to warrant perfect sealing.
Maximum connection cable section: 2.5mm2/14 AWG.
Application: Tanks and deep wells.
SCM ELECTRODE
A single pole electrode used for level control on boilers,
autoclaves and in general where pressure (10 bar
maximum) and high temperature (+100C maximum) are
present.
It comprises an AISI 303 stainless steel probe embedded in
an alumina oxide body and a 3/8 GAS threaded metal
support holder.
Cable connection: Threaded rod with nut.
Application: Tanks, pressurised tanks and boilers.
CGL 125 ELECTRODE
A single pole electrode with AISI 302 probe, used for level
control on boilers and autoclaves and in general wherever
pressure is up to 10 bar maximum.
3/8 GAS threaded terminal.
Cable connection threaded rod with nut.
Application: Tanks, pressurised tanks and boilers.
PS31 ELECTRODE
A small electrode holder, complete with three AISI 304
stainless steel probes.
Particularly suited to small containers whenever pressure is
maximum up to 2 bar.
1/2" GAS threaded coupling
Faston termination; relative lugs standard supplied
Application: Tanks and automatic dispensers.
31 CGL125...
PS3S ELECTRODE HOLDER

A thermoset resin electrode holder to be used with three
probes (rods probes to be ordered separately) and complete
with terminal cover.
Maximum operating temperature is +100C.
2 GAS threaded coupling.
Cable connection: screw.
Application: tanks.
31 PS31
Reference standards
31 PS3S
19
Rod probes
Order code
Rod probe length
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[mm/in]
[kg]
31 ASTA 46O MM4 460/18.11
0.053
31 ASTA 96O MM4 960/37.8
0.103
31 ASTA 46O MM6 460/18.11
0.100
31 ASTA 96O MM6 960/37.8
0.210
Stainless steel AISI 304 probes with 4M or 6M threaded
extremity suitable as extensions for SCM electrode or as rod
probe for PS3S a holder.
See page 19-7 for SCM electrode extension coupler unit.
For SCM electrodes.
For PS3S electrode holder.
Accessories
page 19-7
Dimensions
page 19-8
19-5

Start-up priority change relays
Modular version
Order code
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
Type of
output
contacts
[V]
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.090
2 outputs. AC/DC supply voltage.

LVMP05
24/48VDC
24-240VAC
2 N/O (SPST)
The relays are designed to balance the operating time, and
hence the wear of pumps, compressors, generators, when
two units primary and stand-by are installed.
Operating limit: 0.85-1.1 Ue
Connection: permanent
Red LED indicators for output relay state
IP20 on terminals.
Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices Automatic starting control.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
LVMP05
Order code
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
Type of
output
contacts
[V] 50/60Hz
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
2 outputs. AC supply voltage.

LVMP10 A024 24VAC
2 N/O (SPST)
0.250
LVMP10 A127 110-127VAC
2 N/O (SPST)
0.250
LVMP10 A240 220-240VAC
2 N/O (SPST)
0.250
LVMP10 A415 380-415VAC
2 N/O (SPST)
0.250
Operating limit: 0.85-1.1 Ue
Red LED indicators for output relay state
IP20 on terminals.
LVMP10...

Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices Automatic starting control.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Plug-in version
Order code
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
Type of
output
contacts
[V] 50/60Hz
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
2 outputs. AC supply voltage.

31 CSP2E 24
19
24VAC
2 N/O (SPST) 1
0.150
31 CSP2E 110 110VAC
2 N/O (SPST) 1
0.150
31 CSP2E 220 220VAC
2 N/O (SPST) 1
0.150
31 CSP2E 230 230/240VAC
2 N/O (SPST) 1
0.150
31 CSP2E...
19-6
Operating limit: 0.85-1.1 Us
Voltage applied across input contacts: 15VDC not isolated
with respect to supply.
Current consumption, input contacts: about 1mA.
Plug-in housing for use with 31 S11 socket; suitable
for screw fixing or fixing on 35mm DIN rail.
Reference standards
Accessories
page 19-7
Dimensions
page 19-8
Wiring diagrams
page 19-11
page 19-13

Accessories
Accessories
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
31 RE213
Coupler unit for

extension rod probe
ASTA...MM4
[kg]
0.008
31 S8

fixing or mounting on
35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715), used
with LV1E... relay.
Screw terminals.
10
0.061
31 S11
11-pin socket for screw 10

fixing or mounting
on 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715), used
with LV2E... and
CSP2E... relays.
Screw terminals.
0.064
31 RE014
Relay-socket retention
bracket; S8 or S11
types only.
10
0.001
31 L48 P8
8-pin loose socket.

Screw terminals.
10
0.040
31 L48 P11
11-pin loose socket.

Screw terminals.
10
0.048
31 G216
Flush-mount frame
complete with fixing
accessories for
plug-in relays.
0.080
31 S8
31 S11
SOCKETS
Conductor cross-section max (2 wires): 2.5 mm2/
14 AWG.
19
Dimensions
page 19-8
19-7

38
(1.40)
70
(2.75)
27
(1.07)
45
(1.77)
90
(3.54)
104.7
(4.12)
53.5
(2.11)
LV1E... - LV2E... - CSP2E...
58
(2.28)
43.7
(1.72)
5
( (0.20)
98.3
98.3
(3.87)
(3.87)
104.7
(4.12)
98.3
(3.87)
35.8
(1.41)
45
(1.77)
90
(3.54)
98.3
(3.87)
LVM30... - LVM40... - LVMP10

58
(2.28)
43.7
(1.72)
5
(0.20)
45
(1.77)
90
(3.54)
58
(2.28)
43.7
(1.72)
104.7
(4.12)
5
(0.20)
17.5
(0.69)
76
(2.99)
LEVEL CONTROL AND PRIORITY CHANGE RELAYS

LVM20...
LVM25... - LVMP05
14 (0.55)
59.9 (2.36)
(LVM25... only)
Electrodes and electrode holders for conductive liquids

SN1
SCM...
19.5
(0.77)
CGL125...
97
(3.82)
59.9 (2.36)
(LVM30... and LVM40... only)
PS31
PS3S
M3.5
48
(1.89)
47
(1.85)
25 (0.98)
22 (0.87)
TYPE
SCM04
SCM50
SCM100
L
43 (1.69)
500 (19.68)
1000 (39.37)
M4
7 (0.27)
35
(1.38)
3/8" GAS
1/2" GAS
3/8" GAS
TYPE
CGL125 3
CGL125 5
CGL125 7
CGL125 10
28
(1.10)
78
(3.07)
20
(0.79)
L
327 (12.87)
500 (19.68)
700 (27.56)
1000 (39.37)
2" GAS
18 (0.71)
21 (0.83)
23
(0.90)
100
(3.94)
40
(1.57)
7 (0.27)
53
(2.09)
8
(0.31)
4.2
(0.16)
300
(11.81)
4.2
(0.16)
59.9
(2.36)
4.2
(0.16)
4 (0.16)
6 (0.24)
Rod probes
ASTA 460 MM4
ASTA 960 MM4
M6
4
(0.16)
7 (0.27)
M4
6
(0.24)
20
(0.79)
460 (18.11) 960 (37.79)
M4
M4
7 (0.27)
M6
L48 P8
27
(1.06)
L48 P11
20.5
(0.81)
RE014
47
(1.85)
20.5
(0.81)
16
(0.63)
60
(2.36)
65
(2.56)
33
(1.30)
43.5
(1.71)
33
(1.30)
38
(1.50)
19
G216
39
(1.53)
72
(2.83)
76
(2.99)
86
(3.38)
21
(0.83)
96
(3.78)
48
(1.89)
40.5
(1.59)
Cutout
4
(0.16)
19-8
78
(3.07)
Accessories
S8 - S11
47
(1.85)
M4
43.5
(1.71)
460 (18.11) 960 (37.79)
Coupler unit
RE213
ASTA 460 MM6

ASTA 960 MM6

Wiring diagrams
Emptying function
LVM20
A1 A2
Emptying function with 2 electrodes
COM
MIN
MAX
COM
MAX
MIN
LVM20
12 14 11
COM MAX MIN
24VAC
110-127VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
LVM20
LVM20
0VAC
-MAX
A2
A1
ON
-MIN
-COM
A2
A1
ON
RELAY
RELAY
14
14
11
11
12
12
Emptying or filling functions

LVM25
Emptying function (DOWN)

Connection with 3 electrodes
COM
MIN
MAX
PROBE SIGNAL OR
STARTING DELAY
A1 A2
PROBE SIGNAL OR STARTING DELAY

PROBE SIGNAL
DELAY
COM
MAX
MIN
LVM25
PROBE SIGNAL
DELAY
12 14 11
COM MAX MIN
24-240VAC/DC
-MAX
-MIN
-COM
LVM30
SUPPLY
ON
SUPPLY
ON
RELAY
RELAY
LVM30
24
24
21
21
22
22
RELAY
RELAY
14
14
11
11
12
12

COM MAX MIN
12 14 11 22 24 21
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
Filling function (UP)

24VAC
110-127VAC
-MAX
-MIN

PROBE SIGNAL OR STARTING DELAY
PROBE SIGNAL DELAY
-COM
COM
MIN
MAX
0VAC
PROBE SIGNAL OR
STARTING DELAY
PROBE SIGNAL OR
STARTING DELAY
COM
A1 A3 A2
Delay for LVM30 only.

Changeover contact (SPDT) for LVM30 only.
MAX
0VAC
PROBE SIGNAL
DELAY
19
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
ON
ON
RELAY
RELAY
24
24
21
21
22
22
RELAY
RELAY
14
14
11
11
12

12
Delay for LVM30 only.

Changeover contact (SPDT) for LVM30 only.
19-9

Wiring diagrams
Emptying function + alarms
COM
MIN 2
MIN 1
MAX 1
MAX 2
Multiple functions
LVM40
LVM40
A1 A2
COM MIN2 MIN1 MAX1 MAX2
13 14
22 24 21
A2
A1
ON
14
13
24VAC
110-127VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
-MAX2
-MAX1
-MIN1
-MIN2
-COM
24
21
22
Filling function + alarms

COM
MIN 2
MIN 1
MAX 1
MAX 2
0VAC
A2
A1
ON
14
13
24
21
22
COM
MIN 1
MIN 2
MAX 1
MAX 2
Filling function + pump start change
A2
A1
ON
14
13
5 sec
24
21
22
COM
MIN 2
MIN 1
MAX 2
MAX 1
Filling function + pump start change
A2
A1
ON
19
14
13
5 sec
24
21
22
COM
MIN 1
MAX 1
Filling tank and draining well function + alarm
COM
MIN 2
MAX 2
Tank
Well
A2
A1
ON
Probe signal and starting delay

Probe signal delay
14
13
24
21
22
19-10

Wiring diagrams
COM
MIN
MAX
COM
LV1E
MAX
Emptying function
LV1E
1 8 7 2 3 4
24VAC
110-120VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
-MAX
0VAC
-COM
LV1E
LV1E
5
6
5
6
-MIN
RELAY
RELAY
LV2E
LV2E
LV2E
LV2E
9-10
11
9-10
11
9 10 11
7 5 6 4 3
RELAY
RELAY
48VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
1
24VAC
110-120VAC
220-240VAC
-MAX
0VAC
-COM
-MIN
Start-up priority change monitoring

LVMP05
A1
A1
A2
13
Relay
1
Relay
2
ON
A2
14
24
14
13
24
13
LVMP10
2-wire connection
A1
14
24
A2
A1
ON
Relay 1
A2
S1 S2
C1
Relay 2
R1 R2
C1
C
S1
C2
C
S2
23
13
C2
C1 = Primary
C2 = Secondary / Standby
RELAY 1
13
14
RELAY 2
23
24
DELAY
3-wire connection
A1
24
14
Relay 1
A2
C S1 S2
C1
C R1 R2
C2
C3
ON
Relay 2
13
19
A2
A1
C1
C
S1
C3
C
R1
C2
C
S2
C4
C
R2
23
C4
C1 = Start Primary
C2 = Start Standby
C3 = Stop Primary
C4 = Stop Standby
RELAY 1
13
14
RELAY 2
23
24
DELAY
CSP2E
24VAC 110VAC
220VAC 230-240VAC
F1
11
1
CSP2E
10
4 6 8
Relay 1
5 7
C1 C2
FR1
C1 = PRIMARY
C2 = SECONDARY/STANDBY
Relay 2
9
K1
MOTOR 1
FR2
K2
MOTOR 2
19-11

TYPE
LVM20...
LVM25...
LVM30...
LVM40...
DESCRIPTION
Modular
Automatic resetting
Application (examples)
Single voltage
Multi voltage
Dual voltage
Single voltage
Empting function
Emptying or filling
functions
Emptying or filling
functions
Multiple functions
Operating principle
Electrical conductivity of liquids
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Supply voltage Us
24VAC
110-127VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
24-240VAC/DC
3.5VA
3VA
5.5VA
4.5VA
1.8W
1.2W
2.8W
2.8W
24/220-240VAC
110-127/380-415VAC
24VAC
110-127VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
0.85-1.1 Ue 50/60Hz 5%
OUTPUTS
Number of connectable electrodes
Type of electrode
Electrode voltage
Electrodes and electrode holders: SN1 / SCM / CGL / PS31 / PS3S or similar
7.5VAC
5VPP
7.5VAC
5VPP
2.5-50kohm
2.5-100kohm
2.5-50kohm
2.5-200kohm
Tripping time (minimum)
600ms
1s
1s
1s
Resetting time (minimum)
750ms
1s
1s
1s
Probe tripping delay
OFF-10s
1-10s
Relay energising delay
OFF-300s
0-30min
Sensitivity
TIME DELAYS
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays
Relay state
Contact arrangement
Normally de-energised, energises at tripping

1 changeover / SPDT
1 changeover / SPDT
2 changeover / SPDT each
Rated utilisation voltage
250VAC
400VAC
IEC conventional free air thermal

current Ith
8A

designation
B300
105 cycles
30x106 cycles
Mechanical life
Indications
19
1 changeover / SPDT and

1 with 1 N/O - SPST

1 red LED for relay state



2 red LEDs for relay state
2 red LEDs for probe state
CONNECTIONS
0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin er UL/CSA)
0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12 AWG per UL/CSA)
INSULATION
voltage Ui
415VAC
240VAC
415VAC
415VAC
IEC rated impulse wihstand

voltage Uimp
6kV
4kV
6kV
6kV

voltage
4kV
2kV
4kV
4kV
250VAC
250VAC
250VAC
250VAC
Double insulation
Supply/relay/electrode
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
20...+60C
Storage temperature
30...+80C
HOUSING
Material
Typical configuration
(examples)
Maximum cable length

Double insulaton between supply, electrodes and output relay circuit.

Voltage applied to input contacts, not insulated at power supply.
Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
19-12
LVM20 + n 3 SN1 electrodes



LV1E...
LV2E...
LVMP 05
Automatic resetting
Automatic resetting
Single voltage
Dual voltage
Multivoltage
Multivoltage
Single voltage
Plug-in
LVMP 10
Modular
Plug-in
Minimum-maximum level threshold

Maintains level between minimum and maximum
Protection against dry pump running
Priority change relay for motors
Electrical conductivity of liquids
24VAC
110-120VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
24-48VAC
110-120VAC/220-240VAC
220-240VAC/380-415VAC
24-48VDC
24-240VAC
CSP2E
24VAC
110-127VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
24VAC
48VAC
110VAC
220VAC
0.8-1.1 Ue 50/60Hz
5.5VA
1.6VA
4.8VA
5VA
2.8W
0.9W
3W
3W
Electrodes and electrode holders: SN1 / SCM / CGL / PS31 / PS3S / or similar
9VAC (voltage between probes)
7 - 8kohm adjustable
50ms
100ms
Normally de-energised, energises at tripping

1 changeover contact / SPDT
1 N/O - SPST
1 N/O - SPST
1 N/O - SPST
220VAC
250VAC
250VAC
250VAC
380VAC
5A
8A
8A
5A
B300
B300
B300
B300
2,5x105 cycles
105 cycles
105 cycles
105 cycles
50x10 cycles
1 red LED for relay tripping
30x10 cycles
30x10 cycles
30x106 cycles


0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin er UL/CSA)
415VAC
250VAC
415VAC
250VAC
5kV
4kV
4kV
4kV
2kV
2kV
2.5kV
2.5kV
19
20...+60C
-30...+80C
LV1E + n 3 SN1 electrode

LV2E + n 2 SN1 electrodes + reset button
500m/547yd single-core, double insulated cables
19-13
Page 20-4
MICRO PLCs
10 Inputs/Outputs (LRD10...)
12VDC, 24VDC, 24VAC or 100-240VAC
power supply
Relay or transistor outputs.
Page 20-5
ACCESSORIES
Program backup memory
Programming and supervision software
Power supply unit
HMI operator panel with graphic LCD.
Page 20-4
EXPANSION AND COMMUNICATION MODULES
8 digital inputs/outputs
24VDC, 24VAC or 100-240VAC power supply
Analog inputs, 0...10V or 0...20mA
Analog outputs, 0...10V or 0...20mA
Relay or transistor outputs
PT100 temperature sensor inputs
Modbus-RTU protocol slave communication
unit.
Page 20-5
STARTER KITS
Complete kit to begin using micro PLCs
Each equipped with LRD relay,
programming-supervision software and
USB connecting cable.
20
Micro PLCs
10, 12 and 20 Input-Output base

units
Expansion modules with 4 digital
Inputs and 4 digital Outputs
Expansion modules with analog
Inputs-Outputs
Modbus-RTU communication
module
RS232/USB serial interface port for
PC, HMI operator panel or program
backup memory connection
On-board programming languages:
Italian, English, Spanish, French,
German, Portuguese and Chinese
PC programming languages:
Italian, English and Spanish.
Micro PLCs
Base modules ..................................................................................................................................................................
Expansion and communication modules..........................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
20 - 4
20 - 4
Accessories ................................................................................................................. 20 - 5
Starter kits .................................................................................................................. 20 - 5
A UTOMATION
AND
C ONTROL
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 20 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 20 - 6
Micro PLCs
MICRO PLC - EXCEPTIONAL
PERFORMANCE!
SYSTEM CONTROL AND SUPERVISION

- Contact status viewing in simple and small screen display
- Faculty to add the micro PLC to systems integrated on data
networks. By using
supervision software, a
multiclient structure can also be managed through Web
interface.
QUICK CONTROL BOARD INSTALLATION
- Fewer number of components
- Less wiring with minor number of connections.
REPETITIVENESS
- Less errors during panel building
- Considerable time saving.
FLEXIBILITY
- Quick correction of abnormal conditions at final testing
- Fast changes on control boards.
FUNCTION BLOCKS AND MEMORY
PROGRAM SIZE
Timer (T)
(delay on/off, recycle, pulsing, ...)
31
Real Time Clock (RTC)

(daily, weekly, monthly and yearly mode)
31
Language
LADDER (contact scheme)
Counter (C)
31
Analog comparator (G)
31
Users pages (H) - 16 characters - 4 lines
300 lines
FBD (function blocks)
260 blocks
31
Auxiliary relay - Scratchpad (M + N memory types)

Data register (DR)
63 + 63
240
Saving can be in memory storage of:

- Auxiliary relay
- Counter value
- Data register.
FUNCTIONS
20
MULTIPLEXER
PWM OUTPUT
Pulse train generation with
programmable pulse time and
frequency
Selection of 1 of 4 values based

on the combination of two digital signals
HIGH SPEED INPUT
A
B
C
D
SHIFT FUNCTION - activation of pulsed outputs in sequence

Out
1
2
Position and speed

detection
PID
20-2
IN:
Heating switch on and required

temperature setting
OUT: Current room temperature
INc: Measured room temperature in an
exact spot
OUTc: Temperature adjusting and
controlling.
3
4
BOOLEAN LOGIC BLOCKS

Output activation based on
a series of digital signals
In 1
In 2
In 3
In 4
...
...
...
...
Out
Micro PLCs
OPERATOR
PANEL
LRX P01
HMI INTERFACE
LRX P01 is an HMI operator panel, used with many types of PLCs or
other intelligent controllers equipped with communication port.
By using the HMI, the values of both PLC inner registers and relay status
can be monitored and changed with the keys or LEDs.
In this way, machinery and equipment functioning results to be simple
and direct.
The LRX SW P01 editor software permits to make dedicated screens by
taking advantage of the graphic display to view bitmaps, bar graphs and
trend lines.
BACKLIGHT 192x64 PIXEL GRAPGIC LCD

Read numerical Static
values
text
Dynamic
text
Read status (bits)
Images
Commands
Display bar graphs and trend lines
Write numerical values
COMMUNICATION MODES
LRX P01 supports Modbus-RTU protocol and different communication modes
can be chosen, such as RS232 and RS485.
Micro PLCs
Micro PLCs
Power
analyzers
Generating set controllers
20
RS232
RS485
Soft starters
Motor drives
Power factor
controllers
Transfer switch
controllers
20-3
Micro PLCs
Base modules
Order
code
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
In/Out
FUNCTIONS
Addition-Subtraction on variables
Multiplication-Division on variables
Comparator on variables
HMI display for parameter viewing and programming
PWM output
High speed input (1kHz)
PID function
Multiplexer
Analog ramp
Register transfer (numerical variables and status)
Shift function
Boolean logic blocks
LRD20R D024 P1 with RS485 port onboard.
Qty Wt
per
pkg
n
[kg]
0.241
Base modules.
LRD10...
LRD12...
LRD12R D024
24VDC
8/4 relay
LRD12T D024
24VDC
8/4 transistor 1
0.220
LRD20R D024
24VDC
12/8 relay
0.360
LRD20R D024 P1 24VDC
12/8 relay
0.360
LRD12R A024
24VAC
8/4 relay
0.250
LRD20R A024
24VAC
12/8 relay
LRD10R A240
100-240VAC 6/4 relay
LRD20R A240
100-240VAC 12/8 relay
0.367
LRD20R D012
12VDC
0.252

12/8 relay
0.368
0.242
8A Ith current relay outputs for AC and DC versions
0.3A 24VDC transistor outputs for DC version
0-10V analog inputs for DC version
Version: modular for mounting on 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715) or M4x15mm screw fixing
Type of terminal: Screw
Inputs/Outputs.
With RS485 onboard.

(cULus - File E300049), as Programmable Controllers.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61131-2, UL508, CSA
C22.2 n142.
LRD20R D024 P1
Expansion and
communication modules
Order
code
Auxiliary
supply
voltage
In/Out
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Expansion and communication modules.
LRE...
LRE02A D024
24VDC
2 analog outputs 1
0...10V/0...20mA
0.160
LRE04A D024
24VDC
4 analog outputs 1
0...10V/0...20mA
0.160
LRE04P D024
24VDC
4 PT100 temp. 1
sensor inputs
0.160
LRE08R D024 24VDC
4/4relay
0.171
LRE08T D024
24VDC
4/4 transistor
0.151
LRE08R A024
24VAC
4/4 relay
0.180
LRE08R A240
100-240VAC 4/4 relay
0.180
LRE P00
Modbus-RTU protocol
communication unit
0.134

Inputs/Outputs.
The expansion modules are supplied with connector for base module.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS REFERENCE TABLE

BASE MODULES
20
BASE +
DIGITAL EXPANSIONS
Type
Power supply
Inputs
Outputs
Max I/O
LRD12RD012
12VDC
8 digital + 4 digital/analog
8 relay
20 + 24
LRD12RD024
24VDC
4 relay
12 + 24
LRD12TD024
24VDC
4 transistor
12 + 24
LRD20RD024
24VDC
8 relay
20 + 24
LRD20RD024P1
24VDC
8 relay
20 + 24
LRD10RA240
100-240VAC
6 digital
4 relay
10 + 24
LRD20RA240
100-240VAC
12 digital
8 relay
20 + 24
LRD12RA024
24VAC
8 digital
4 relay
12 + 24
LRD20RA024
24VAC
12 digital
8 relay
20 + 24
EXPANSION AND COMMUNICATION MODULES

LRE02AD024
24VDC
2 analog
LRE04AD024
24VDC
4 analog
LRE04PD024
24VDC
4 PT100
LRE08RD024
24VDC
4 digital
4 relay
LRE08TD024
24VDC
4 digital
4 transistor
LRE08RA240
100-240VAC
4 digital
4 relay
LRE08RA024
24VAC
4 digital
4 relay
LREP00
24VDC
RS485 Modbus-RTU protocol slave communication unit
Expansion modules supplied at 24VDC.
20-4
Dimensions
page 20-6
Wiring diagrams
page 20-6
page 20-7
Micro PLCs
Accessories
Order
code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Power supply unit and backup memory caracteristics

The LRX 1V3 D024 power supply produces a
direct-current voltage to power the
base and
expansion modules in circumstances when 24VDC is
not available in the application. The power supply can
also be used to power eventual 24VDC auxiliary
circuits.
The LRX M00 backup memory allows to save the
users program and to simply and quickly transfer it
to the base modules.
Accessories.
LRX M00
Program backup
memory
0.011
LRX C00
PC (RS232)-LRD
connecting cable,
1.5m/5ft long
0.083
LRX C03
PC (USB)-LRD
connecting cable,
1.5/5ft long
0.080
LRX SW
Programming and
supervision software
(CD-ROM)
0.057
LRX 1V3 D024
Power supply unit,

1
100-240VAC/24VDC, 1.3A
0.220
LRX D00
Users manual Italian

edition (paper)
0.400
LRX D01
Users manual English

edition (paper)
0.400
LRX D02
Users manual Spanish

edition (paper)
0.400
LRX D03
Users manual French

edition (paper)
0.400
LRX P01
HMI operator panel,

24VDC, RS232, RS485
(Modbus-RTU Master)
0.200
LRX C02
PC-LRX P01 connecting

cable
0.180
LRX SW P01
LRX P01 editor software 1

(CD-ROM)
0.057
LRDKIT 12R D024 LRD starter kit complete 1

with LRD12R D024 base
module, LRX SW software
and LRX C03 cable
0.424
LRDKIT 12R A024 LRD starter kit complete 1

with LRD12R A024 base
and LRX C03 cable
0.424
LRDKIT 10R A240 LRD starter kit complete 1

with LRD10R A240 base
and LRX C03 cable
0.424
LRX 1V3 D024
LRX C00
LRX P01
LRX P01 panel general characteristics

24VDC power supply
RS232 communication port:
Direct connection to
using LRX C00
Connection to other devices using a standard
D-SUB 9 serial cable
RS485 communication port
LRX SW P01 editor software for specific pages and
easy use.
FUNCTIONS
Send commands
Read status
Provide static and dynamic texts
Write variables
Read variables:
Numerical value
Bar graph
Trend line.
Programming
At any time and with extreme simplicity,
can be
set up and reprogrammed to satisfy new requirements
and improve the operation of a system.
Programming is simple and intuitive and can be done
directly on the base module keypad or by personal
computer, connected by LRX C00 (RS232) or LRX C03
(USB) interface and using the relative LRX SW software.
With a personal computer, two programming language
locs can be used: FBD (Function Block Diagrams) and
LADDER (contact scheme).
Both of the following can be accomplieshed:
Simulate the program directly off-line on a personal
computer to test if it runs correctly.
Use the supervision mode to check the project
on-line.
There are 8 function keys on front, dedicated to onboard adjustment, control and supervision of digital
input and output status, analog input values, time and
date entry and the operation status of the
itself.
LRX C02
Starter kits
Starter kits.

(cULus - File E300049), as Programmable Controllers for
power supply and HMI units anbd base module of kits.
CSA C22.2 n142.
20
Maximum combinations
-
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6 A1 A2
X1 X2 X3 X4
In pu t
4x AC
L
AC 100~2 40V
Run
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Y3
AC 100~2 40V
Y4
Y1
Y3
AC 100~2 40V
X1 X2 X3 X4
In pu t
4x AC
L
Y4
Y1
Y3
Run
Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A
Y2
Y4
Base unit
4 inputs
4 inputs
4 inputs
12 inputs
+
8 outputs
+
4 outputs
+
4 outputs
+
4 outputs
24 digital inputs (4 configurable as analog 0-10V input)

20 digital outputs (relay, transistor or mixed)
4 analog inputs for PT100 temperature sensors
Y1
X1 X2 X3 X4
In pu t
4x AC
L
Y1
Y4
Y3
4 PT100
temperature
sensor inputs
Y4
Y1
Y3
AC 100~2 40V
Y1
Y4
Y3
AC 100~2 40V
Run
Y2
X1 X2 X3 X4
In pu t
4x AC
Run
Y2
X1 X2 X3 X4
In pu t
4x AC
AC 100~2 40V
Run
Y2
Y3
AC 100~2 40V
Run
Y2
X1 X2 X3 X4
In pu t
4x AC
AC 100~2 40V
Run
Y2
X1 X2 X3 X4
In pu t
4x AC
Run
Y1
X1 X2 X3 X4
In pu t
4x AC
Y2
Y4
Y1
Y2
Y4
Y3
2 outputs,
2 outputs,
4 inputs,
RS485
0-10V or
0-20mA
0-10V or
0-20mA
0-10V or
0-20mA
Modbus-RTU
4 analog outputs configurable as 0-10V or 0/4-20mA

4 analog inputs configurable as 0-10V or 0/4-20mA
1 RS485 slave communication module.
N.B. The sequence of the products given above must be respected for correct operation.
Dimensions
page 20-6
Wiring diagrams
page 20-6
page 20-7
20-5
Micro PLCs
4.5
(0.18)
165 (6.50)
85.5 (3.37)
101.5(4.00)
5.5
(0.22)
33
(1.30)
163.5 (6.44)
4.5
(0.18)
Wiring diagrams
BASE MODULES
LRD12R D024
LRD12T D024
24VDC DIGITAL
0...10VDC ANALOG
24VDC
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6
A1 A2
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL/ANALOG
INPUT
24VDC
24VDC
LRD12R A024
LRD10R A240
24VDC DIGITAL
0...10VDC ANALOG
24VAC
24VAC
100...240VAC
100...240VAC
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6
A1 A2
L N
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
L N
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL/ANALOG
INPUT
24VDC
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
RELAY OUTPUT
RELAY OUTPUT
RELAY OUTPUT
TRANSISTOR OUTPUT
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q1
Q4
Q2
Q3
Q4
24VDC
LRD20R D012 - LRD20R D024
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC DIGITAL
0...10VDC ANALOG
RS485
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
A1 A2 A3 A4
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
A1 A2 A3 A4
A B
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL/ANALOG
INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL/ANALOG
INPUT
24VDC
LRD20R D024 P1
24VDC DIGITAL
0...10VDC ANALOG
24VDC
RELAY OUTPUT
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
RELAY OUTPUT
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q6
Q7
Q8
LRD20R A240
24VAC
24VAC
100...240VAC
100...240VAC
L N
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 IA IB IC
L N
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 IA IB IC
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
RELAY OUTPUT
20
Q5
12VDC for LRD20R D012.
LRD20R A024
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
RELAY OUTPUT
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q1
Expansion and communication modules

LRE02A D024
LRE04A D024
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
LRE04P D024
LRE08R D024
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
X1 X2 X3 X4
DIGITAL INPUT
RELAY OUTPUT
ANALOG INPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
C1 V1 I1
C1 V1 I1
C2 V2 I2
LRE08T D024
C2 V2 I2
PT100 TEMPERATURE SENSOR
C3 V3 I3
LRE08R A024
24VDC
24VDC
24VAC
24VAC
X1 X2 X3 X4
L N
X1 X2 X3 X4
DIGITAL INPUT
C4 V4 I4
A1 B1 b1
A2 B2 b2
A3 B3 b3
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
A4 B4 b4
LRE08R A240
Accessories
LRX 1V3 D024
100...240VAC 100...240VAC
100...240VAC
24VDC
L N
L N
X1 X2 X3 X4
LRE P00 - LRX P01
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
RELAY OUTPUT
RELAY OUTPUT
TRANSISTOR OUTPUT
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
24VDC
20-6
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
45 (1.77)
68 (2.68)
90 (3.54)
45 (1.77)
68 (2.68)
Cutout
179.5 (7.07)
45 (1.77)
68 (2.68)
106 (4.17)
97.9 (3.85)
90 (3.54)
4.5
(0.18)
LRX P01 HMI operator panel
52.3 (2.06)
44.3 (1.74)
54.3 (2.14)
44.3 (1.74)
87 (3.42)
5
(0.20)
72 (2.83)
60 (2.36)
5
(0.20)
38
(1.50)
8
(0.31)
4.5
(0.18)
80 (3.15)
LRX1V3 D024 power supply unit
106 (4.17)
90 (3.54)
98 (3.86)
126 (4.96)
45 (1.77)
68 (2.68)
106 (4.17)
98 (3.86)
90 (3.54)
72 (2.83)
LRE... expansion/communication module

54.6 (2.15)
44.3 (1.74)
5
(0.20)
106 (4.17)
LRD20...
54.6 (2.15)
44.3 (1.74)
5
(0.20)
98 (3.86)
BASE MODULES
LRD10... - LRD12...
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
+ +
A B S
24VDC - 1.3A
RS485
Micro PLCs
BASE MODULE TYPE
LRD... D012
LRD... D024
LRD... A024
LRD... A240
POWER SUPPLY
IEC rated voltage Ue (frequency range)
Operating limits
Average current consumption
12VDC
24VDC
24VAC (50-60Hz)
100-240VAC (50-60Hz)
10.4-14.4VDC
20.4-28.8VDC
20.4-28.8VAC (47-63Hz)
85-265VAC (47-63Hz)
265mA
125mA (LRD12...)
185mA (LRD20...)
290mA
100mA
100-240VAC (50-60Hz)
DIGITAL INPUTS
12VDC
24VDC
24VAC (50-60Hz)
State 0
< 2.5VDC
< 5VDC
< 6VAC
< 40VAC
State 1
> 7.5VDC
> 15VDC
> 14VAC
> 79VAC
0 to 1
4ms
(0.5ms for high speed)
4ms
90ms
50/45ms (Ue=120VAC) 22/18ms (Ue=240VAC)
1 to 0
4ms
4ms
90ms
50/45ms (Ue=120VAC) 90/85ms (Ue=240VAC)
Rated voltage
Input voltage
Delay time
ANALOG INPUTS FOR DC VERSIONS ONLY

Input signal range
0-10V
Display resolution
0.01V
Conversion
12bit
< 0.17mA
< 1k
Current cunsumption at 10VDC

Input impedance
Admissible overload
14VDC
28VDC
Sampling time
5-20ms (LADDER); 2-10ms (FBD)
30m/98ft of screened type
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Type of output / IEC rated current Ith
Relay / 8A (LDR...R... / LRE08R... only)

Transistor / 0.3A 24VDC (LRD...T... / LRE08T... only)
Applied voltage
12-240VAC / 12-30VDC (LDR...R... / LRE08R... only)

10-28.8VDC (LRD...T... / LRE08T... only)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-20...+55C
Storage temperature
-40...+70C
Relative humidity
20-90% without condensation
HOUSING
Version
Connections
Modular for mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or M4x15mm screw fixing
Type of terminal
Screw
Conductor section
0.14-2.5mm2 / 26-14AWG
Tightening torque
0.6Nm / 0.4lbft
100m/328ft
IP20
EXPANSION MODULE TYPE
LRE02A D024
LRE04P D024
POWER SUPPLY
IEC rated voltage Ue
24VDC
24VDC
20.4-28.8VDC
20.4-28.8VDC
2 outputs configurable
for voltage or current
4 inputs for
PT100 temperature sensors
Operating limits
20
ANALOGIC INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Type of channels
Operating limits
Digital output
Resolution
0-10V
0-20mA
-100...+600C
0.00-10.00V
0.00-20.00mA
-100.0...+600.0C
40A
0.1C
10mV
Accuracy
2.5%
1%
Power consumption
70mA
70mA
20-7
Page 21-2
MODULAR VERSION
Single phase
Output voltage: 12 or 24VDC
Output power: 10-100W.
Page 21-3
DIN RAIL MOUNT VERSION
Single, two and three phase
Output voltage: 24VDC
Output power: 5-960W.
21
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES
Versions: modular and 35mm DIN

rail mount
Output voltage adjustment by front
potentiometer
Short-circuit protection
Built-in input voltage surge
suppressor
Used as power supply for DC
electromechanical and electronic
equipment.
Modular switching power supplies

Single phase ......................................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
21 - 2

Single phase ......................................................................................................................................................................
Two phase .........................................................................................................................................................................
Three phase ......................................................................................................................................................................
21 - 3
21 - 3
21 - 3
A UTOMATION
AND
C ONTROL
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 21 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 21 - 5

Modular power supplies
Order code
Rated
output
voltage
Rated
output
current
Output
power
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V]
[A]
[W]
[kg]
Single phase.
PSL1M 010...
PSL1M 010 12 12VDC
0.83
10
0.114
PSL1M 024 12
24
0.177
PSL1M 033 12
2.75
33
0.248
PSL1M 054 12
4.5
54
0.311
PSL1M 072 12
72
0.443
PSL1M 010 24 24VDC
0.42
10
0.114
PSL1M 024 24
24
0.177
PSL1M 036 24
1.5
36
0.248
PSL1M 060 24
2.5
60
0.311
PSL1M 100 24
4.2
100
0.443
Switching power supplies transform an AC input voltage
into a DC output one. This type of equipment is used in
industrial and domestic automation fields. The power
supplies are equipped with switching technology offering
very high efficiency in an extremely compact size.
Dimensions are compatible with modular consumer
panels and its plastic housing is suitable for building
automation installations as well as industrial automation
applications.
The wide range of power supply voltages and the choice
of DC current outputs provide for the best adaptability to
supply voltage needs of the most common electronic and
electromechanical devices.
Protections:
Short circuit
Overload
Input voltage peaks.
Indications:
LED indicator for low voltage conditions
LED indicator for power on.
Rated supply voltage: 100-240VAC
Rated output voltage: 12VDC for PSL1M...12 types;
24VDC for PSL1M...24 types
Output voltage adjustment by front potentiometer
High efficiency up to 89%
35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting
Screw connection terminals
Modular DIN 43880 housing; number of modules:
1 for PSL1M 010...
2 for PSL1M 024...
3 for PSL1M 033 12 and PSL1M 036 24
IEC degree of protection: IP20 on terminals.
PSL1M 033 12
PSL1M 036 24

Canada (cULus-File E318016) as Power Supplies in power
circuit and motor-mounted apparatus category.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 107-1.
21
21-2
Dimensions
page 21-4
Wiring diagrams
page 21-5
page 21-6

Order code
Rated
output
voltage
Rated
output
current
Output
power
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[V]
[A]
[W]
[kg]
Single phase.
PSL1 005 24
PSL1 005 24
PSL1 010 24
PSL1 018 24
PSL1 030 24
PSL1 060 24
0.21
0.190
PSL1 010 24
24VDC
0.42
10
0.196
PSL1 018 24
0.75
18
0.226
PSL1 030 24
1.25
30
0.336
PSL1 060 24
2.5
60
0.400
PSL1 100 24
4.2
100
0.508
PSL1 120 24
120
1.018
PSL1 240 24
10
240
1.486
PSL1 300 24
12.5
300
1.496
PSL1 480 24
20
480
2.348
4.2
100
0.570
Two phase.
PSL1 100 24
PSL1 120 24
PSL1 240 24
PSL1 300 24
PSL2 100 24
24VDC
Three phase.
PSL3 120 24
120
0.910
PSL3 240 24
10
240
1.190
PSL3 480 24
20
480
1.995
PSL3 960 24
40
960
3.672
24VDC
Two-phase connection is admissible with a 25% output power derating.
PSL1 480 24
This type of equipment is used to power supply
electromechanical and electronic devices with DC control,
such as contactors, time relays, sensors, PLCs, DC
motors, displays, SSRs and other equipment normally
found in automation systems and networks.
Protections:
Short circuit
Overload
Input voltage peaks.
Indications:
LED indicator for low voltage conditions
LED indicator for power on.
Rated supply voltage:
100-240VAC for PSL1 005 24 - PSL1 100 24 types
115/230VAC self-configurable for PSL1 120 24... PLS1 480 24 types
400-500VAC for PSL2... and PSL3... types
Rated output voltage: 24VDC
Output voltage adjustment by front potentiometer
PFC function for types: PSL1 120 24 to PSL3 960 24
Parallel connection for types: PSL1 120 24,
PSL1 240 24, PSL1 300 24, PSL1 480 24,
PSL2 100 24, PSL3 240 24, PSL3 480 24,
PSL3 960 24
High efficiency up to 92%
35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting
Screw connection terminals
Plastic or metal housing depending on type
IEC degree of protection: IP20 on terminals.
Canada (cULus-File E318016) as Power Supplies in power
circuit and motor-mounted apparatus category.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 107.1.
PSL2 100 24
PSL3 120 24
PSL3 240 24
21
PSL3 480 24
PSL3 960 24
Dimensions
page 21-4
Wiring diagrams
page 21-5
page 21-7
21-3

Dimensioni [mm (in)]
50.6
(1.99)
44
(1.73)
5.6
(0.22)
96
(3.78)
45
(1.77)
91
(3.58)
90
(3.54)
45
(1.77)
91
(3.58)
96
(3.78)

PSL1 005 24 - PSL1 100 24
PSL2 100 24
C
TYPE
PSL1 005 24
PSL1 010 24
PSL1 018 24
PSL1 030 24
PSL1 060 24
PSL1 100 24
PSL2 100 24
A
22.5 (0.88)
22.5 (0.88)
22.5 (0.88)
40.5 (1.59)
40.5 (1.59)
54 (2.12)
54 (2.12)
B
90 (3.54)
90 (3.54)
90 (3.54)
90 (3.54)
90 (3.54)
90 (3.54)
90 (3.54)
C
115 (4.53)
115 (4.53)
115 (4.53)
115 (4.53)
115 (4.53)
115 (4.53)
115 (4.53)
PSL1 120 24 - PSL1 480 24

PSL3...
C
21
21-4
TYPE
PSL1 120 24
PSL1 240 24
PSL1 300 24
PSL1 480 24
PSL3 120 24
PSL3 240 24
PSL3 480 24
PSL3 960 24
A
64 (2.52)
83.5 (3.29)
83.5 (3.29)
175.5 (6.91)
74.3 (2.92)
89 (3.50)
150 (5.90)
275.8 (10.86)
B
124.5 (4.90)
124.5 (4.90)
124.5 (4.90)
124.5 (4.90)
124 (4.88)
124 (4.88)
124 (4.88)
126.2 (4.97)
C
123.6 (4.87)
123.6 (4.87)
123.6 (4.87)
123.6 (4.87)
118.8 (4.68)
118.8 (4.68)
118.8 (4.68)
118.8 (4.68)
50.6
(1.99)
44
(1.73)
45
(1.77)
91
(3.58)
5.6
(0.22)
PSL1M 72 12 - PSL1M 100 24
50.6
(1.99)
44
(1.73)
5.6
(0.22)
53
(2.09)
96
(3.78)
96
(3.78)
PSL1M 054 12 - PSL1M 060 24

72
(2.83)
PSL1M 033 12 - PSL1M 036 24

50.6
(1.99)
44
(1.73)
5.6
(0.22)
45
(1.77)
91
(3.58)
5.6
(0.22)
35
(1.38)
96
(3.78)
18
(0.71)
PSL1M 024...
50.6
(1.99)
44
(1.73)
45
(1.77)
91
(3.58)
MODULAR SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES

PSL1M 010...

Wiring diagrams
MODULAR SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES
PSL1M 010 12
PSL1M 010 24
PSL1M 024 12 - PSL1M 033 12

PSL1M 054 12 - PSL1M 072 12
PSL1M 024 24 - PSL1M 036 24

PSL1M 060 24 - PSL1M 100 24
100...240VAC
100...240VAC
100...240VAC
100...240VAC
L N
L N
L N
L N
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
+ +
+ +
12VDC
24VDC
12VDC
24VDC

PSL1 005 24
PSL1 010 24
PSL1 018 24
PSL1 030 24
PSL1 060 24
100...240VAC
100...240VAC
L N
GND
L N
PSL1 100 24 - PSL1 120 24

PSL1 240 24 - PSL1 300 24
PSL1 480 24
115/230VAC
GND
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
+ +
24VDC
24VDC
L N
GND
OUTPUT
+ +
RDY
RDY RDY
Open collector
PSL2 100 24
400...500VAC
L N
24VDC
PSL3 120 24 - PSL3 240 24

PSL3 480 24 - PSL3 900 24
400...500VAC
GND
OUTPUT
+ +
24VDC
L1 L2 L3
GND
Two-phase connection is admissible with a 25% output power derating.
OUTPUT
RDY RDY
+ +
RDY RDY
24VDC
21
21-5

TYPE
Single phase
PSL1M 010 12 PSL1M 010 24
PSL1M 024 12 PSL1M 024 24
PSL1M 033 12 PSL1M 036 24
PSL1M 054 12 PSL1M 060 24
PSL1M 072 12 PSL1M 100 24
Two phase
Three phase
INPUT CHARACTERITICS
Multivoltage 100-240VAC
Rated supply voltage

Operating range
90-264VAC /
120-375VDC
Consumption
Frequency range
47-63Hz
PFC
Insulation voltage
Input/output
3000VAC (4242VDC)
Internal fuse (250VAC)
T1A
T2A
T3A
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
12VDC (PSL1M...12); 24VDC (PSL1M...24)
Voltage
Voltage trimming (potentiometer)
Current
0.83A (PSL1M...12)
0.42A (PSL1M...24)
12-14VDC (PSL1M...12)
24-28VDC (PSL1M...24)
2A (PSL1M...12)
1A (PSL1M...24)
Temperature coefficient
2.75A (PSL1M...12)
1.5A (PSL1M...24)
4.5A (PSL1M...12)
2.5A (PSL1M...24)
6A (PSL1M...12)
4.2A (PSL1M...24)
84% (PSL1M...12)
86% (PSL1M...24)
86% (PSL1M...12)
89% (PSL1M...24)
110-150%
110-150%
0.03%/C
1%
Line adjustment
Load adjustment
1%
Efficiency
Overload protection
Short-circuit protection
78% (PSL1M...12)
80% (PSL1M...24)
84% (PSL1M...12)
85%(PSL1M...24)
83% (PSL1M...12)
84% (PSL1M...24)
110-165%
120-160%
110-150%
Fold forward
Hiccup
Ripple noise
Fold forward
50mV
Parallel connection (n of units)
INDICATIONS
LED indicator for power on
Yes
LED indicator for low voltage
Yes
Power Rdy (Ready)

(minimum limit)
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminal
Conductor section
min-max
Screw
Input
Output
Stripping length
Tightening torque
maximum
0.4-2.5mm2
(26-12AWG)
0.2- 2.5mm2
(24-12AWG)
4-5mm/0.15-0.2in
7mm/0.28in
0.5Nm/0.42lbft
0.6Nm/0.5lbft
Input
Output
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-25...+71C
Storage temperature
-25...+85C
Derating >60C
21
2.5%/C
HOUSING
Material

No replacement by user.
Two-phase connection is possible with 25% power derating, PSL2 100 24 excluded.
Minimum load of 150mA.
Maximum surrounding temperature of 50C for use according to UL508.
21-6
Plastic

PSL1 005 24 PSL1 010 24 PSL1 018 24 PSL1 030 24 PSL1 060 24 PSL1 100 24 PSL1 120 24 PSL1 240 24 PSL1 300 24 PSL1 480 24
PSL2 100 24
90-264VAC /
120-375VDC
200mA
300mA
500mA
800mA
90-264VAC
120-375VDC
1.5A
2.4A
90-132VAC / 180-264VAC
210-375VDC
2.8A
5.4A
PSL3 120 24 PSL3 240 24 PSL3 480 24 PSL3 960 24

Self-configurable 115/230VAC
85-264VAC /
90-375VDC
90-264VAC
120-375VDC
6A
7A
340-575VAC
480-820VDC
750mA
500mA
850mA
1.4A
2.4A
47-63Hz
0.7
0.97
0.55
0.65
0.8
T10A
T2A
T3.15A
T5A
20A
40A
90%
92%
3000VAC (4242VDC)
T2A
T3.15A
T6.3A
T8A
24VDC
21.6-28.8VDC
0.21A
0.42A
24-28VDC
0.75A
1.25A
22.5-28.5VDC
2.5A
4.2A
5A
10A
12.5A
20A
4.2A
5A
0.03%/C
72%
1%
0.5%
2%
0.5%
76%
77%
110-135% 110-145%
86%
110-140%
Hiccup
10A
0.03%/C
1%
0.5%
1%
1%
89%
88%
86%
110-150% 110-140% 110-145%

Fold forward
89%
89%
87%
120-145%
110-140%
115-135%
100mV
90%
120-140% 110-135%
Hiccup
Fold forward
50mV
89%
50mV
Fold forward
100mV
125-145%
Hiccup
80mV
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (transistor output)

(19.1VDC)
Yes (relay output)

(17.6VDC)
Yes
(transistor)
(60VDC)
Yes (relay output)

(17.6VDC)
Screw
0.4-2.5mm2
(26-12AWG)
0.2-4mm2
(24-10AWG)
0.2-4mm2
(24-10AWG)
4-5mm/0.15-0.2in
0.5-10mm2
(20-6AWG)
8mm/0.3in
10mm/0.4in
1Nm/0.75lbft
0.5Nm/0.42lbft
1Nm/0.75lbft
0.6Nm/0.46lbft
-20...+71C
0.6Nm/0.46lbft
1.7Nm/
1.3lbft
-25...+71C
-25...+85C
2.5%/C
Plastic
3.5%/C
Metal
Plastic
21
Metal
21-7
Page 22-2
SWITCHING BATTERY CHARGERS
MODULAR VERSION
For lead-acid batteries up to 50Ah rating
Rated output current:
2.5 and 4.5A at 12VDC
1.25 and 2.5A at 24VDC
Electronic lock for shorted battery, reverse
polarity and output overload
Output for alarm remote indication.
Page 22-2
SWITCHING BATTERY CHARGERS
For non-sealed and sealed lead-acid
batteries up to 150Ah
6A and 12A at 12VDC
5A and 10A at 24VDC
polarity and output overload
Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions
Page 22-3
LINEAR BATTERY CHARGERS
For lead-acid batteries up to 150Ah rating
3A, 6A, 12A at 12VDC
2.5A, 5A, 10A at 24VDC
Input and output protection
polarity, output overload and disconnected
battery
22
AUTOMATIC BATTERY CHARGERS
Switching and linear technology

1 charging level
Versions for non-sealed and
sealed lead-acid batteries,
1.25 to 12A ratings
Charging current limitation
selectable.
Automatic battery chargers for lead-acid batteries

Switching BCF series, modular version ..............................................................................................................................
Switching BCG series ........................................................................................................................................................
Linear BCE series ..............................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
22 - 2
22 - 2
22 - 3
A UTOMATION
AND
C ONTROL
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 22 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 22 - 4

Switching BCF and BCG series
For lead-acid batteries.
Modular version
Order code
Rated
output
current
Rated
output
voltage
in DC
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[V]
[kg]
0.332
0.332
0.332
0.332
1 charging level.
BCF...
U
Uc
BCF 0250 12
2.5
BCF 0450 12
4.5
BCF 0125 24
1.25
BCF 0250 24
2.5
a
0.5Uc
Ic
a - constant current charge

b - constant voltage charge
24
VDC ON
BAT LOW
GREEN LED RED LED
RELAY
Correct output
voltage
ON
OFF
Energised
Reverse
polarity
ON
ON
Energised
Short circuit/
Overload
OFF
OFF
De-energised
Type
Maximum power
Internal fuse
consumption dissipation mains side
Alarms
b
12
[VA]
[W]
[W]
[A]
BCF 0250 12
80
40
2
BCF 0450 12
150
70
2
BCF 0125 24
80
39
2
BCF 0250 24
150
77
2
Not replaceable.
For non-sealed and sealed

lead-acid batteries
Order code
Rated
output
current
Rated
output
voltage
in DC
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[V]
[kg]
1 charging level.
BCG 06 12
BCG 12 12
12
BCG 05 24
BCG 10 24
10
12
0.532
0.710
0.532
0.710
Adapter for DIN rail

1
vertical mount of
BCG 06 12 and BCG05 24
0.022
24
Accessories.
BCG...
BCG X00
U
Uc
Alarms
a
0.5Uc
22
ON
GRN
LED
REV
RED
LED
ALA
RED
LED
CHG
YEL
RED
RELAY
Correct output ON
voltage
OFF
OFF
OFF
Energ.
Charging
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Energ.
Low battery
voltage
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Energ.
Reverse
polarity
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
De-energ.
Short circuit /
Overload
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
De-energ.
Ic

Steady light if the charging current is more than approx. 30% of

programmed current value.
Switching technology
Wide auxiliary supply range
Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail mount (IEC/EN 60715).
Protection:
Mains input fuse
Battery output fuse
Electronic lock in case of short circuit on battery
terminals, reverse battery polarity and output overload
Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions.
LED indications:
Correct output voltage
Reverse battery polarity.
Auxiliary supply voltage
100-240VAC 10% 50/60Hz 5%
Fixed charging current
Current limitation
Charging current according to DIN 41773 standards
Fixed clamping screw terminal block with captive screws
Alarm output circuit
Type of output: 3A 250VAC AC1 duty relay, normally
energised.
Canada (cURus - File E360865), as Power Supplies Component.
Products having this type of marking are intended for use as
components of complete workshop-assembled equipment.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 60950-1,
CSA C22.2 n60950-1.
Switching technology
Wide auxiliary supply range
High efficiency
Two charging voltages selectable by DIP-switch
Boost external control for full battery charging
Hiccup function for battery recharging when its voltage
is lower than 50% rated value
Charging current limiting trimmer resistor
Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail mount (IEC/EN 60715).
Protection:
Input fuse on AC side
terminals, reverse battery polarity and output overload
Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions.
LED indications:
Power on
Charging operation (I>30% Ic)
Overload or short circuit conditions
Reverse battery polarity.
110-240VAC 10% 50/60Hz 10%
Charging voltage selectable by DIP-switch
Non-sealed lead-acid batteries
Sealed lead-acid batteries
Maximum charging current setting by front
potentiometer: 20-100% rated value
Current limitation
Charging cycle according to DIN 41773 standards
Type of output: 5A 30VDC duty relay, normally
energised.
Flashing during Hiccup operating conditions.

Type
BCG 06 12
Maximum power
consumption dissipation
Internal fuse
Mains side (type T)
[VA]
[W]
[W]
[A]
230
97
14
4
BCG 12 12
284
290
29
6.3
BCG 05 24
364
158
20
6.3
BCG 10 24
630
311
41

Canada (cURus - File E360865), as Power Supplies Component.
as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 60950-1,
CSA C22.2 n60950-1.
Not replaceable.
22-2
Dimensions
page 22-4
Wiring diagrams
page 22-4
page 22-5

Linear BCE series
For lead-acid batteries
Order code
Rated
output
current
Rated
output
voltage
in DC
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[A]
[V]
[kg]
1.984
12
4.832
8.690
1 charging level.
31 BCE 0312
31 BCE 2V524
31 BCE 0312
31 BCE 0612
31 BCE 1212
12
31 BCE 2V524
2,5
31 BCE 0524
31 BCE 1024
10
Type
31 BCE 0612
31 BCE 0524
24
Maximum power
consumption
dissipation
1.992
4.960
9.560
Mains
fuse (type)
[VA]
[W]
[A]
BCE 0312
117
24
1 (T) ext
BCE 0612
222
46
4 (F) int
BCE 1212
400
73
6.3 (F) int
BCE 2V524
166
26
1 (T) ext
BCE 0524
317
40
4 (F) int
BCE 1024
610
66
6.3 (F) int
Not supplied; installed by customer.
DERATING CURVES
BCE 2V5 - BCE 03
DERATING CURVE
Charging current
100%
95%
240
VA
C
230
VA
C
90%
Uc
55C
60C
65C
70C
BCE 05 - BCE 06
b
DERATING CURVE
Charging current
95%
240
VA
C
230
VA
C
BCE 0524 - BCE 0612 - BCE 1024 - BCE 1212

Type of output
Relay: 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
Rated voltage: 250VAC
IEC rated capacity in AC1 duty: 5A 250VAC Ith
IEC rated capacity in DC13 or DC14 duty: 5A 30VDC
Electrical life: >105 cycles
Mechanical life: >30x105 cycles.
220
VA
C
90%
85%
80%
75%
50C
55C
60C
65C
70C
DERATING CURVE

BCE 10 - BCE 12
100%
Charging current
0.5Uc


BCE 2V524 - BCE 0312
Type of output:
Negative static; NPN transistor
Maximum voltage applicable to load: +V battery
terminal
Maximum output current: 300mA
Maximum overload current for 1 second: 2A
Dynamic over-voltage protection with inductive load.
100%
Ic
Alarms
Possible causes of alarm include:
Low battery voltage
Battery fuse blown
Battery not connected
Battery polarity inverted (reverse polarity).
BCE 2V524 - BCE 0312
These types have a static alarm output for the control of a
relay or indicator, maximum 300mA duty.
If it is connected to a relay, this must be normally
energised in absence of alarm. In alarm conditions with
ALARM LED switched on or in absence of supply, the
relay de-energises.
85%
75%
50C
220-240VAC 10%, 50/60Hz 5%
Charging current: 30-100% Ie adjustable
Charging cycle according to DIN 41773 standards
Current limitation
Clamping screw terminal block with captive screws:
Removable for BCE 03 and BCE 2V5
Fixed for BCE 05, BCE 06, BCE 10 and BCE 12
BCE 0524 - BCE 0612 - BCE 1024 - BCE 1212

These types have a normally energised relay alarm
output. In alarm conditions with ALARM LED switched
on or in absence of supply, the relay de-energises.
220
VA
C
80%
31 BCE 1212
31 BCE 1024
Linear technology
Housing for internal panel mounting by screws.
Protection:
Mains input fuse (except for BCE 2V5 and BCE 03)
Battery output fuse
terminals, reverse battery polarity, output overload
(<0.5 Ue) and disconnected battery.
LED Indications:
Power on
Charge (I > 0.2 Ic)
Alarm for protection tripping.
95%
230
VA
C
90%
220
V
The output is not overload or short-circuit protected. It is however

capable of switching on a 3W filament bulb.
22
AC
240
VA
C
85%
80%
75%
50C
55C
60C
65C
70C
Dimensions
page 22-4
Wiring diagrams
page 22-4
page 22-5
22-3

BCG 0612 - BCG 0524
162 (6.38)
159 (6.26)
149 /5.87)
50.6 (1.99)
45 (1.77)
81.5 (3.21)
96 (3.78)
63.2 (2.49)
91 (3.58)
44 (1.73)
145 (5.71)
5.6
(1.99)
90 (3.54)
150.5 (5.92)
BCF...
80 (3.15)
Mounting adapter BCG X00
BCG 1212 - BCG 1024

9
(0.35)
145 (5.71)
71 (2.79)
213 (8.38)
206 (8.11)
198 (7.79)
130 (5.12)
63 (2.48)
BCE 0312 - BCE 2V524

134 (5.27)
151 (5.94)
35
(1.38)
136 (5.35)
100 (3.94)
POWER ON
CHARGE
90
BATTERY
ALARM
OUT
BATTERY
FUSE
100%
30%
100 (3.94)
80
40
93 (3.66)
70
50
POWER
220-240V
65 (2.56)
ALARM
60
120.5 (4.74)
BCE 0612 - BCE 0524
BCE 1212 - BCE 1024
192 (7.56)
140 (5.51)
192 (7.56)
140 (5.51)
POWER ON
90
100%
BATTERY
FUSE
BATTERY
-
ALARM
OUT
POWER
220-240V
FUSE
POWER
POWER ON
178 (7.01)
230 (9.05)
80
180 (7.09)
70
30%
COM NO NC
80 (3.15)
ALARM
60
50
40
130 (5.12)
CHARGE
CHARGE
ALARM
60
70
80
50
90
40
BATTERY
+
ALARM
OUT
POWER
220-240V
FUSE
POWER
COM NO NC
BATTERY
FUSE
100%
30%
178 (7.01)
22
Wiring diagrams
BCG...
BCF...
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT
CHARGING CONTROL
BCE 2V5... - BCE 03...
RDY RDY
BATTERY
22-4
OUT ALARM
FUSE
FUSE
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT

CHARGING CONTROL
COM NO
SUPPLY
110-240VAC
BATTERY
BOOST
OUT ALARM
NC
SUPPLY
110-240VAC
BCE 05... - BCE 06... - BCE 10... - BCE 12...

TYPE
Description
Supply voltage
BCG...
BCF...
Single phase automatic battery charger

1 charging level for sealed and non-sealed
lead-acid batteries
110-240VAC 10% 50/60Hz 10%
100-240VAC 10% 50/60Hz 5%
Rated output voltage (Uoc)

Rated charging current (Ic)
BCE...
Single phase automatic battery charger

1 charging level for lead-acid batteries
220-240VAC 10% 50/60Hz 5%
12-24VDC
6-12A (12VDC)
5-10A (24VDC)
2.5-4.5A (12VDC)
1.25-2.5A (24VDC)
3-6-12A (12VDC)
2.5-5-10A (24VDC)
CHARGING CYCLE
Reference standards
DIN 41773
Diagram
U
Uc

a
0,5Uc
Ic
End charging voltage Uc
Charging current
12V battery with DIP2:

in pos. V1: 13.8V
in pos. V2: 13.5V (default).
24V battery with DIP2:
in pos. V1: 27.6V
in pos. V2: 27.0V (default)
Adjustable 20% to 100% Ic
(using potentiometer/trimpot)
Current limit
Boost
12V battery: 13.6VDC (2.27V/cell)


Fixed
Adjustable 30% to 100% Ic

(using potentiometer)
Yes
+4.4% Uc
Mains supply fuse

Charging inhibition due to:
Short circuit at battery terminals
Reverse battery polarity
Low voltage at battery poles (<0.5 Uoc)
Output overload
Mains supply fuse

Output overload
Mains supply fuse

(5, 6, 10, 12A types only)
Battery output fuse
Disconnected battery
1 relay
5A 30VDC
1 relay
3A 250VAC AC1
Static (NPN transistor) ;

relay with 1 c/o contact (SPDT),
5A 250VAC
-30...+55C
(+55...+70C with 1-5%Ic/C derating
by trimpot)
-40...+51C
-10...+50C
-30...+80C
-40...+85C
-30...+80C
Internal panel mount
Modular
Internal panel mount
IP20
IP20
IP00
PROTECTION
ALARM OUTPUT CIRCUIT

Type of output
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Storage temperature
HOUSING
Version
Natural
Cooling
Connections
Fixed terminals
Fixed terminals
Removable/plug-in terminals
Fixed terminals
For 2.5A and 3A types only.

For 5, 6, 10 and 12A types only.
22
22-5
Page 23-15
Page 23-10
ENERGY METERS
Single phase, three phase with neutral,
three phase with or without neutral
Direct connection or by current
transformers
MID certified versions
Expandable versions.
DATA CONCENTRATORS
Energy consumption data storage for network
usage
Connection up to 14 energy meters equipped
with static output
Photovoltaic monitoring type
Page 23-16
DIGITAL LCD MULTIMETERS AND
POWER ANALYZERS
Graphic or icon LCD
Version with touch screen
Modular and panel mount types
Remote display
Pages 23-16 and 17

PORTABLE POWER ANALYZERS
IP65 casing
With built-in USB interface
GPRS/GSM communications
Available kits of current clamps and cables.
Page 23-18 to 24
LED MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
Voltmeters, ammeters, frequency meters,
cosphi meters and wattmeters.
DIGITAL LED MULTIMETERS
Basic version, with energy meters,
with 2 programmable outputs, for use
with generating sets and with data-logger.
Page 23-32
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Primary current: 50-4,000A
Secondary current: 5A
Solid and split-core types.
23
METERING
INSTRUMENTS AND
Digital voltmeters, ammeters,

wattmeters, frequency meters and
cosphi meters
Digital multimeters and power
analyzers, expandable, with
graphic LCD
Connection to single, two, three
phase systems
Ideal for distribution systems,
co-generation energy systems,
stand-by generating sets and
on-board machinery installation
High measurement accuracy
Totally programmable digital
outputs
RS485, RS232, USB, Ethernet,
Profibus DP serial interface for
remote control and data-logger.
Energy meters
Single phase ....................................................................................................................................................................
Single phase, MID certified ..............................................................................................................................................
Three phase with or without neutral ................................................................................................................................
Three phase with neutral, MID certified ...........................................................................................................................
Three phase with or without neutral, UTF certified ..........................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
23
23
23
23
23
10
11
12
13
14
Data concentrator
General use ......................................................................................................................................................................
For photovoltaic control and supervision ........................................................................................................................
23 - 15
23 - 15
Digital metering instruments

Modular LCD multimeters ................................................................................................................................................
Flush mount LCD multimeters .........................................................................................................................................
Flush mount touch-screen LCD power analyzers ............................................................................................................
Flush mount LED measuring instruments .......................................................................................................................
Flush mount LED multimeters .........................................................................................................................................
Modular LED measuring instruments ..............................................................................................................................
Modular LED multimeters ................................................................................................................................................
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
16
18
19
20
22
26
28
Communication devices, protection covers, accessories .......................................................... 23 - 30

RS232/RS485 converter drive, cables, software, kits of current clamps ........................................ 23 - 31
Current transformers ...................................................................................................... 23 - 32
E NERGY M ANAGEMENT
Dimensions.................................................................................................................. 23 - 34
Wiring diagrams............................................................................................................ 23 - 36

Installation supervision
DMG 900
+ EXP 1031
Energy Quality
per EN 50160
MV/LV
transformer
room
DMG 800
+ EXP 1004
Temperature
control
Primary
distribution
DME D310 (MID)

DMG 800
DMG 800
DMG 700
DMG 700
Secondary
distribution
DMG 300
210
200
(MCC)
DMG 800 + EXP

Process and ambient
control
23
DME D310 T2
DME D300 T2
DME D100 T1
DME D110 T1
DME D120 T1
DME CD
23-2

Networks
with
software
Web browsing
of each instrument
connected in Ethernet
Tablet,
Smartphone
Wi-Fi
SWITCH
Ethernet
Internet VPN
EXP 1013
Ethernet
EXP 1012
DMG 300 DMG 800-900
+
+
EXM 1013 EXP 1013
SMS,
e-mail
8+4 max with

EXM 10
DMG 800-900
DME CD
Data
concentrator
+
EXM 1013
Server
FTP
Energy meters
DME ... T1
with pulse outputs
Antenna GSM
CX03
DMG 210
EXP 10 15
DMG 900
DMK
RS485
8+6 max with

EXM 10
ETH-RS485
ETH-RS485
RS485
23
DMG 210
DMG 700
RS485
DMK
DME CD
Data
concentrator
23-3

Grid quality verification

Energy consumption control
Quality analysis
per EN 50160
High versatility
Easy and intuitive consulting and
configuration.
DMG series multimeters

and DME series
energy meters
Alarms
Boolean logic
Data acquisition of
environmental conditions
23
Micro PLCs
Diagnostics and control
Protection relays
23-4

Photovoltaic
installation
management

Option for distinct values

of import and export energy
DMED energy meter:

ENERGY PRODUCED
DC
AC
ELECTRIC LINE
DMED energy meter:

ENERGY CONSUMED
ELECTRIC PULSES
AC/DC INVERTER STATUS/ALARM
DME CD PV1
data concentrator views:
Energy
Produced
Consumed
Exchanged
Self-consuming index
AC/DC inverter alarms,
any others.
Option for 2 load

disconnection by
EXM10 01
Option for Ethernet

connection by
EXM10 03
Wi-Fi
Enabling / Commands
ETHERNET
Router
CONTROLLABLE LOADS
Contactors
APP: PV VIEW
23
PRIVILEGED
LOADS
Supervision option
remoted by
software (see Section 27)
If the distinct values of import and export energy need to be known, a third energy meter should be installed on the in-coming line; the exchanged energy is the difference between import and export energy with the power supplier.
The energy meters can be single or three phase based on the type of installation.
23-5

remote control and

Main plant synoptic view
Detailed pages of each user with status monitoring and

command sending
View trend lines
Harmonic analysis in bar graph and table format

Alarm and event list with upload to
text or Excel file
23
Data log consulting with periodical manual

or automatic uploading
See Section 27 for details.
23-6
Device parameterising

remote control
and supervision
software
Multiclient-server structure and
web-based application
with multi-language support
(including those of East Europe and Far East)
WI-FI
Only one software for many

LOVATO Electric devices
ON
Ethernet network
DATA
MENU
USB interface
Field
equipment
Multiclient structure
with three access levels
Visualizzazione trend grafici.
Simultaneous management of several channels
23
Interfaced equipment supervision
See Section 27 for details.
23-7

Flush mount version
ENERGY METERS - MULTIMEASUREMENT
Functions / Measurements
DME M100
DME M100 T1 DME D100 T1 DME D110 T1 DME D115 T1 DME D120 T1
DME D121
DME D130
63A
63A
INSTALLATION
Connection
Single phase
Direct
32A
32A
40A
1
Pulse
1
Pulse
40A
40A
63A
Through CT
MV usage
Built-in digital outputs
1
1
1
Programmable Programmable Programmable
Built-in digital inputs

Built-in communication port
RS485
Expandible
MID certified version
Version with UTF certificates

Current/Votlage accuracy
0.5%
Active energy accuracy

(IEC/EN 62053-21/EN 50470-3)
Class 1 /
Class B
IP40
MEASUREMENTS
Active energy
Total
Partial
Reactive energy Total
Partial

Separate energy count

Import - Export
Voltage
Current
Power
Active power max demand
Power factor
Frequency
Active power
max demand
only
23-10/11
23-10
23-10/11
Cos
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)
Detailed hamonic analysis (orders)
Page
23-10/11
23-10/11
EXPANSION MODULES
Digital inputs/outputs
Analog inputs/outputs
Communication ports
Ethernet Gateway function

GPRS-GSM modem
Type of memory
23
23-8
USB
RS232
RS485
Ethernet

Modular version
DME D300 T2 DME D310 T2 DME D320
MULTIMETERS - POWER ANALYZERS
DMG 200
DMG 210
DMG 300
DMG 600
Three phase
DMG 610
DMG 700
DMG 800
DMG 900
DMG 900T
Single / Three phase
63A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5-1A
5-1A
5-1A
5A
5-1A
5-1A
5-1A
2
2
Programmable Programmable
1
1
Programmable Programmable
RS485
RS485

RS485
RS485 or
RS232
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.2%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
Class 1 /
Class B
Class 1 /
Class B
Class 1
Class 1
Class 2
Class 0.5S
Class 1
Class 1
Class 1
Class 0.5S
Class 0.5S
Class 0.5S
IP40
IP40
IP54
IP65
2 to 31
2 to 63
2 to 63
2 to 31
23-12 to 14
23-12
USB
RS232
RS485
Ethernet
23-16
23-17
23-18
23-18
23-19
USB
RS232
RS485
Ethernet
Profibus
USB
RS232
RS485
Ethernet
Profibus
(SMS, email, Client FTP),

GPRS data connection
Data-logger
Data-logger
Data-logger
+
Energy Quality
EN 50160
USB
RS232
RS485
Ethernet
USB
RS232
RS485
Ethernet
USB
RS232
RS485
Ethernet
USB
RS232
RS485
Ethernet

Data-logger
23
23-9

Energy meters
Single phase,
non expandable
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Mechanical meter with mechanical display.

DME M100
32A direct connection, 1U
0.084
DME M100 T1
32A direct connection, 1U

1 pulse output
0.088
40A direct connection, 1U 1

1 pulse output, 220-240VAC
0.086
DME D100 T1 A120 40A direct connection, 1U 1

1 pulse output, 110-120VAC
0.086

1 programmable static output,
multi-measurements ,
220-240VAC
0.090

110-120VAC
0.090
Digital meter, with LCD screen.

DME D100 T1
DME M100
DME D110 T1
Digital meter with backlight LCD screen.

DME D115 T1
40A direct connection, 2U, 1

220-240VAC
0.090
DME D120 T1

220-240VAC
0.148

110-120VAC
0.148
DME D121
63A direct connection, 2U,

RS485 interface
220-240VAC
0.148
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
DME D110 T1...
DME D115
DME D120 T1... - DME D121
Single phase,
expandable
Digital meter with backlight LCD screen.

DME D130
Order code
63A direct connection, 2U, 1

multi-measurements,
expandable, 220-240VAC
0.148
Description
Inputs and outputs.

EXM10 00
2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs,

opto-isolated
EXM10 01
2 opto-isolated digital inputs and

EXM10 02
4 opto-isolated digital inputs and

23
EXM 10 10
EXM10 10
EXM10 11
EXM10 12
EXM10 13
EXM10 20
Opto-isolated RS485 and 2 relay outputs

rated 5A 250VAC
Maximum combination
MAX
1
23-10

page 23-30 and 31
Expansion modules
page 28-3
DME M... (mechanical display)
Rated supply voltage: 230VAC -20...+15%
Direct connection
32A maximum current
Active energy measurements
Active energy accuracy: Class 1 (IEC/EN 62053-21)
Mechanical meter with 6+1 digit count
Flashing LED for consumption indication
Static pulse output for DME M100 T1 only
Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied
IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at
terminals.
DME D110T1DME D110 T1DME D115 T1
DME D120 T1DME D121DME D130
Nominal supply voltage:
220-240VAC for DME DT1 - DME D1120/130
110-120VAC for DME DT1 A120
Voltage range:
187-265VAC 50/60Hz for DME DT1-DME D120/130
93-132VAC 60 Hz for DME DT1 A120
Direct connection
Maximum current: 40A for DME D100/110 T1,
DME D115 T1; 63A for DME D120 T1 and
DME D121/130
Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class 1
(IEC/EN 62053-21)
Reactive energy measurement and accuracy: Class 2
(IEC/EN 62053-23) except for DME D115 T1
LCD meter : With 5+1 digit count for
DME D100/110 T1; backlight with 6+1 digit
count for DME D115/120 T1 and DME D121/130
Metrological LED with pulse emission for
consumption indication
Clearable partial energy measurement except for
DME D100/110 T1
One output: Pulse for DME D100 T1; programmable
static for all other types
Built-in RS485 port for DME D121 and optional for
DME D130; both compatible with
Modular housing, 1 module for DME D100/110 T1;
2 module for all other types
IEC/UL/CSA protection degree: IP51 on front; IP20 at
terminals.
supervision and energy management software
See Section 27.
EXM series expansion modules
See Section 28, page 3.
DME D130 EXPANSION MODULES.

DME D130
The energy meters are instruments for energy consumption
measurement in single-phase installations with direct
connection.
Dimensions
page 23-34

Canada (File E346886), as Electrical Process Control
Equipment - Energy meters, for DME D... types.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61326-1 for DME M...
type; EN 50470-3, IEC/EN 61010-1, UL 61010-1,
CSA C22.2 n61010-1 for DME D... types.
Multi-measurements:
- Total and partial active energy
- Total and partial reactive energy
- Voltage
- Current
- Active and reactive power
- Power factor
- Frequency
- Total and partial hour counter
- Average active power (calculation on every last
15 minutes)
- Maximum demand.
Multi-measurements:
- Active power
15 minutes)
- Maximum demand.
Wiring diagrams
page 23-36
pages 23-40 amd 41

Energy meters
MID
Single phase, non
expandable, MID certified
MID
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.086
DME D110 T1 MID 40A direct connection, 1U 1

multi-measerements ,
230VAC
0.090
DME D120 T1 MID 63A direct connection, 2U 1

multi-measerements ,
230VAC
0.148
Digital meter with LCD display.

DME D100 T1 MID 40A direct connection, 1U
1 pulse output,
230VAC
DME D110 T1 MID
DME D120 T1 MID
The DME series energy meters, MID certified, are needed
for billing purposes between electricity supplliers and
consumers and for energy consumption measurement in
directly connected single-phase installations.
MID is the Measuring Instruments Directive of the
European Union; instruments must be certified must be
certified accordingly whenever used for monetary
transactions in this territory.
Nominal supply voltage: 230VAC
Voltage range: 187-264VAC 50Hz
Direct connection
Maximum current: 40A for DME D100/110 T1 MID;
63A for DME D120 T1 MID
Measurement of 14 electrical parameters for
DME D110/120 T1 MID
Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class B
(EN 50470-3)
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
LCD meter:
With 5+1 digit count for DME D100/110 T1 MID
Backlight with 6+1 digit count for DME D120 T1 MID
Clearable partial energy measurements in
DME D120 T1 MID
One output: pulse for DME D100 T1 MID;
programmable static for other types
Modular housing, 1 module for DME D100/110 T1 MID;
2 module for DME D120 T1 MID
EN protection degree: IP51 on front; IP20 at terminals.
Certifications obtained: MID Class B, certifications per
module B (type tests) and per module D (production
conformity).
Compliant with standards: EN 50470-1, EN 50470-3.
Multi-measurements:
- Voltage
- Current
- Power factor
- Frequency
15 minutes)
- Maximum demand.
23
Dimensions
page 23-34
Wiring diagrams
page 23-36
pages 23-40
23-11

Energy meters
Three phase with or without
neutral, non expandable
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.360
Digital meter for three phase with neutral.

DME D300 T2
63A direct connection,

4U, 2 programmable
static outputs,
multi-measurements
Digital meter for three phase with or without neutral.

DME D320
Connection by CT /5A
secondary, 4U,
RS485 interface,
multi-measurements
0.332
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
DME D300 T2
DME D320

neutral, expandable

DME D310 T2
Connection by CT /5A
1
secondary, 2 programmable
static outputs, 4U,
expandable
0.332
The energy meters are digital meters/analyzers of electric
energy for systems with direct three-phase connection
or by CT.
Expandable with up to 3 EXM series interfaced by infrared
beam.
Nominal supply voltage:
220-240VAC (L-N); 380-415VAC (L-L) for
DME D300/310 T2
100-240VAC / 110-250VDC for DME D320
Voltage range:
187-264VAC (L-N); 323-456VAC (L-L) 50/60Hz for
DME D300/310 T2
85-264VAC 50/60Hz; 93.5-300VDC for DME D320
Direct connection 63A for DME D300 T2
Connection by CT /5A for DME D320 T2 and
DME D320
Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class 1
(IEC/EN 62053-21)
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
Voltage measurement range: 20-830VAC L-L;
10-480VAC (L-N) for DME D320
LCD multifunction meter
Clearable partial active energy measurements
1 programmable digital input except DME D320
2 programmable static outputs except DME D320
Built-in RS485 port for DME D320 and optional for
DME D310 T2; compatible with
software
Optic interface for EXM series expansion modules
with DME D310 T2
Modular housing, 4 module
IEC/UL/CSA degree of protection: IP51 on front;
IP20 at terminals.
See Section 27.
Order
code
DME D310 T2
Description
DME D310 T2 EXPANSION MODULES.

Inputs and outputs.
EXM10 00
EXM10 01
2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs

rated 5A 250VAC
EXM 10 10
EXM10 10
EXM10 11
EXM10 12
EXM10 13
Ethernet interface with Web server function
EXM10 20
Opto-isolated RS485 interface and 2 relay

outputs rated 5A 250VAC
EXM10 30

reserve energy for data logging

Canada (cULus File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices,
Multimeters for DME D320.
Compliant with standards: EN 50740-3, IEC/EN 61010-1,
UL508,CSA C22.2 n14.
Multi-measurements:
- Voltage
- Current
- Power factor
- Frequency
15 minutes)
- Maximum demand.
Maximum combination
23
MAX
3
23-12

page 23-30 and 31
Expansion modules
page 28-3
Dimensions
page 23-34
Wiring diagrams
page 23-36
page 23-42

Energy meters
MID
Three phase with neutral,
non expandable,
MID certified
Order code
MID
Digital meter for three phase with neutral.
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
DME D300 T2 MID 63A direct connection, 4U

2 programmable static
outputs, non expandable,
multi-measurements
0.360

neutral, expandable,
MID certified
Order code
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
MID
DME D300 T2 MID
Description
DME D310 T2 MID Connection by CT /5A

1
secondary, 2 programmable
static outputs, 4U,
expandable
Order
code
0.332
Nominal supply voltage: 230VAC (L-N); 400VAC (L-L)
Voltage range: 187-264VAC (L-N); 323-456VAC (L-L)
50Hz
Direct connection 63A for DME D300 T2
Connection by CT /5A for DME D320 T2
(EN 50470-3)
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
Clearable partial energy measurements
1 programmable digital input
2 programmable static outputs
with DME D310 T2 MID compatible with
software
Modular housing 4 module
EN protection degree: IP51 on front; IP20 at
terminals.
See Section 27.
Description
DME D310 T2 MID EXPANSION MODULES.

Inputs and outputs.
DME D310 T2 MID
for billing purposes between electricity suppliers and
directly or CT connected three-phase installations.
Expandable with up to 3 EXM series interfaced by infrared
beam.
EXM10 00
EXM10 01

rated 5A 250VAC
EXM10 10
EXM10 11
EXM10 12
EXM10 13
EXM10 20

EXM10 30


conformity).
Compliant with standards: EN 50470-1, EN 50470-3.
Multi-measurements:
- Voltage
- Current
- Power factor
- Frequency
15 minutes)
- Maximum demand.
EXM 10 10
Maximum combination
MAX
3
23

page 23-30 and 31
Expansion modules
page 28-3
Dimensions
page 23-34
Wiring diagrams
page 23-36
page 23-42
23-13

Energy meters
MID With UTF certificates
neutral, MID certified
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Digital meter for three phase with neutral, complete with

UTF certificates for installations in Italy.
DME D300 F
MID certified type, 63A

1
direct connection, 4U,
2 programmable static
outputs, non expandable,
multi-measurements,
complete with UTF certificate
0.360
Starter kits with digital MID certified meter 4U, expandable

for three phase with or without neutral and 3 current
transformers, 0.5S class, all with UTF certificates for
installations in Italy.
DME D300 F
DME D310 F060
Composed of one
DMED310T2MID and n3
transformers DM5T0060
2.100
DME D310 F080
Composed of one
DMED310T2MID and n3
2.200
DME D310 F100
Composed of one
DMED310T2MID and n3
1.900
DME D310 F150
Composed of one
DMED310T2MID and n3
1.900
DME D310 F200
Composed of one
DMED310T2MID and n3
1.900
DME D310 F250
Composed of one
DMED310T2MID and n3
1.900
DME D310 F300
Composed of one
DMED310T2MID and n3
1.900
Starter kits
NOTE: Other starter kits are available with 3 CTs up to 1600A.

front cover.
DME D310 F...

Order code Description
DME D310 F EXPANSION MODULES.
Inputs and outputs.
EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs
rated 5A 250VAC
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface
EXM10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 and 2 relay outputs rated
5A 250VAC
EXM 10 10
Maximum combination
23
for billing purposes between electricity suppliers and
directly or CT connected three-phase installations.
Expandable with up to 3 EXM series expansion modules
interfaced by infrared beam.
MID is the Measuring Instruments Directive of the
European Union; instruments must be certified
accordingly whenever used for monetary transactions in
this territory.
The UTF certificate is required for revenue tax
purposes by Italian authorities when equipment is part
of generating electricity installations (e.g. solar, wind)
and there is electricity exchange with the power grid.
DME D300 F and DME D310 T2 MID of starter kits
Nominal supply voltage: 230VAC (L-N); 400VAC (L-L)
Voltage range: 187-264VAC (L-N); 323-456VAC (L-L)
50Hz
Direct connection 63A for DME D300 F
Connection by CT /5A, standard supplied, for
DME D320 T2 MID
(EN 50470-3)
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
Clearable partial energy measurements
1 programmable digital input
2 programmable static outputs
with DME D310 T2 MID compatible with
software
Modular housing 4 module
EN protection degree: IP51 on front; IP20 at terminals.
Multi-measurements
Total and partial active energy
Total and partial reactive energy
Voltage
Current
Active and reactive power
Power Factor
Frequency
Total and partial hour counter
Average active power (calculation on every last
15 minutes)
Maximum demand.
DM5T CURRENT TRANSFORMERS of starter kits
Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
Secondary output current: 5A
Class 0.5S burden
Overload withstand: 120% Ipn
Rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V
Rated short time thermal current Ith: 40-60Ipn for
1 second
Rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5Ith for 1 second
Insulation (dry type): class E
For 28mm/1.1 cable
For 21.5x21.5mm/0.85x0.85, 26x26mm/1.02x1.02,
31.5x31.5mm/1.24x1.24 busbars
Screw fixing terminals
Standard supplied sealable terminal covers and fixing
elements
EN degree of protection: IP30.
See Section 27.
MAX
3

conformity) for DME D300 F and DME D310F energy
meters. UTF certificates for the DME D300F and for each
component of the starter kits are standard supplied.
Compliant with standards: EN 50470-1, EN 50470-3 for
DME D300F and DME D310 T2 MID; IEC/EN 60044-1 for
DM5T
23-14

page 23-30 and 31
Expansion modules
page 28-3
Dimensions
page 23-34 and 35
Wiring diagrams
page 23-36
page 23-42

Data concentrators
Expandable
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Data concentrator for general use.

DME CD
With 8 programmable 1
digital inputs, 4U,
expandable, RS485 port,
for data collection+pulse
count from DMEM100T1
and DMED,
expandable
0.337
Data concentrator for photovoltaic applications.

DME CD PV1
Programmed for
1
installation control and
data collection+pulse
count from two
DMED minimum, 4U,
RS485 port, expandable
0.340
DME KIT CD PV1100 Starter kit composed

1
of one data concentrator
DMECDPV1 and two
energy meters
DMED110T1
0.515
DME CD - DME CD PV1
Use with DMED110T1, DMED115T1, DMED120T1, DMED300T2 and

DMED310T2.
Description
DME CD AND DME CD PV1 EXPANSION MODULES.

Inputs and outputs.

See Section 27.
EXM10 00
EXM10 01

rated 5A 250VAC

EXM10 02
4 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay


Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL listed for USA and
Canada (cULus File E346886), as Electrical Process
Control Equipment Data concentrator for DMECD; pending
for DMECDPV1 and DMEKITCDPV1100.
EXM 10 10
DMECDPV1 is specific for the monitoring of solar

installations and needs to be connected to at least two
DMED meters (single or three phase). The user can avail
of data, such as energy produced by the generating
installation, energy consumed by loads as well as exchanged
energy (difference between import and export energy) with
the power supplier.
It is already programmed to automatically calculate the selfconsuming index, mean power values, production (total and
partial values) and the operating status of the AC/DC inverter,
if it is equipped with digital outputs.
In addition, it can be customised by the user for load
supervision, using the EXM series expansion modules,
according to the defined logics and on the basis of the
energy available.
Nominal supply voltage: 110-240VAC / 110-250VDC
Voltage range: 85-264VAC / 93.5-300VDC
Backlight graphic LCD
8 inputs, expandable with EXM modules up to 14
Built-in RS485 communication port
Modbus-RTU, ASCII and TCP communication protocol
Multifunction display
Clearable total and partial counters for each channel
Programmable general counters
Calculation of derivative average values
Mathematical operations among counters
IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals.
DME KIT CD PV1100
Order code
DMECD is equipped with 8 inputs, which can be increased
up to a maximum of 14 and allows to indirectly interface
devices without communication as long as they have at least
one pulse output.
It is capable of pulse counting that come in from the outputs
of meters for energy, water, gas and other types of
consumption: All data is viewed on its display or can also be
available for PCs through its built-in RS485 interface using
Synergy (STILIZZATO) software.
It can be expanded with up to 3 EXM series modules by
optic interface.
With the programmable functions, average values can be
determined for instantaneous quantities, such as power,
speed, production rate, gas and water consumption, etc.
EXM10 10
EXM10 11
EXM10 12
EXM10 13
EXM10 20

outputs, rated 5A 250VAC
EXM10 30

Maximum combination
23
MAX
3

page 23-30 and 31
Expansion modules
page 28-3
Dimensions
page 23-34
Wiring diagrams
page 23-36
page 23-43
23-15

Digital measuring instruments.
Starter kits
Modular LCD multimeters
non expandable
DMG 200 - DMG 210
Starter kits
Order
code
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
DMG 200
Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD,

auxiliary supply
100-240VAC/110-250VDC.
and Portuguese
0.294
DMG 200 L01
Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1

auxiliary supply
100-240VAC/110-250VDC.
0.294
DMG 210

RS485 port, auxiliary supply
100-240VAC/110-250VDC.
and Portuguese
0.300
DMG 210 L01

RS485 port, auxiliary supply
100-240VAC/110-250VDC.
0.300
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Order code
DMG KIT 200 150
Description
DMG KIT 200 060 Composed of one DMG200 1

multimeter and n3 CTs
60/5A for 22mm/0.87
cable
1.035

80/5A for 22mm/0.87
cable
1.035

100/5A for 22mm/0.87
cable
1.035

150/5A for 23mm/0.91
cable
0.856

200/5A for 23mm/0.91
cable
0.856

250/5A for 23mm/0.91
cable
0.856
DMG 200... and DMG 210 digital multimeters are available
with a modular housing, 4 module size, and are equipped
with a graphic backlight LCD capable of providing extremely
clear, intuitive and flexible viewing of all electrical parameters
of an installation. Very accurate measurements combined
with their extreme compactness provide an ideal solution for
every type of application.
The DMG 210 version is supplied with RS485 opto-isolated
built-in interface.
Voltage: phase, line and system values
Current: phase values (neutral current calculated)
Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total
values
HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions of all
measurements
values
Energy meters for active, reactive and apparent values
Hour counter for programmable total and partial hours.
DMG200 - DMG210
Auxiliary supply voltage range: 85-264VAC / 93.5-300VDC
Usage in medium and high-voltage systems with voltage
transformers
Rated input current: With external CT /5A
Frequency measurement range: 45-66Hz
Accuracy:
Current: 0.5% (0.1-1.1 In)
Power: 1% f.s.
Frequency: 0.05%
Active energy: Class 1 (IEC/EN 62053-21)
Non-volatile memory for data storage
Communication protocol Modbus-RTU and ASCII for
DMG 210 only
Programming and remote control by software for
software
DMG 210 only; compatible with
IEC protection degree: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTs) of starter kits
Class 1 burden
Rated short time thermal current Ith: 40-60Ipn for
1 second
Faston terminals
Standard supplied fixing elements
See Section 27.
23

Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices Multimeter for DMG200/210 types.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n14 for DMG200/210; IEC/EN 60044-1 for
transformers of starter kits.
23-16

pages 23-30 and 31
Dimensions
page 23-34
Wiring diagrams
page 23-37
page 23-44

Modular LCD multimeters
expandable
Order
code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
DMG 300

harmonic analysis,
auxiliary supply
100-240VAC/110-250VDC.
and Portuguese
0.320
DMG 300 L01

harmonic analysis,
auxiliary supply
100-240VAC/110-250VDC.
0.320
DMG 300
Order
code
Description
DMG 300 EXPANSION MODULES.

Inputs and outputs.
EXM10 00
EXM10 01

rated 5A 250VAC
EXM10 02

EXM 10 10
EXM10 10
EXM10 11
EXM10 12
EXM10 13
EXM10 20
Opto-isolated RS485 interface and 2 relay outputs

rated 5A 250VAC
EXM10 30

battery for data logging
Maximum combination
MAX
3
DMG300 digital multimeters are available with a modular
housing, 4 module size, and are equipped with a graphic
backlight LCD capable of providing extremely clear, intuitive
and flexible viewing of all electrical parameters of a system.
The very accurate measurements combined with their
extreme compactness provide an ideal solution for every
type of application.
Expandable with up to 3 EXM series modules interfaced by
infrared beam.
values
HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions for all
measuements
values
Harmonic analysis of voltage and current up to 31 order
total values, programmable tariff functions
Pulse counter for general use: consumption pulse
counting for water, gas, etc. with expansion module only.
Auxiliary supply voltage range: 85-264VAC / 93.5-300VDC
transformers
Rated input current: With external CT, 5A or 1A
Accuracy:
Current: 0.2% (0.1-1.1 In)
Power: 0.5% f.s.
Power factor: 0.5%
Frequency: 0.05%
Communication protocol Modbus-RTU, ASCII and TCP
(only with communication expansion modules)
Programming and remote control by software
(only with communication expansion modules);
software
compatible with
See Section 27.
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices Multimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.

pages 23-30 and 31
Expansion modules
page 28-3
Dimensions
page 23-34
Wiring diagrams
page 23-37
page 23-44
23-17
23

Flush mount LCD
multimeters, expandable
DMG 600 - DMG 610
Order
code
Description
DMG 600
Backlight icon LCD,

1
72x46mmm/2.8x1.8,
auxiliary supply
100-400VAC / 120-250VDC,
front optical port
0.300
DMG 610
Backlight icon LCD,

1
72x46mmm/2.8x1.8,
auxiliary supply
100-400VAC / 120-250VDC,
front optical port and
RS485 port
0.350
DMG 700

auxiliary supply
100-440VAC/110-250VDC.
and Portuguese
0.510
DMG 700 L01

1
auxiliary supply
100-440VAC/110-250VDC.
0.510
DMG 800

harmonic analysis,
auxiliary supply
100-440VAC/110-250VDC.
and Portuguese
0.510
DMG 700 - DMG 800...
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
EXP10 01
4 opto-isolated static outputs
EXP10 02
EXP10 03
EXP10 04
2 opto-isolated analog inputs 0/4-20mA or

PT100 or 0-10V or 0...5V for DMG 800
EXP10 05
2 opto-isolated analog outputs 0/4-20mA or

0-10V or 0...5V for DMG 800
100-400VAC / 120-250VDC for DMG 600/610
90-484VAC / 93.5-300VDC for DMG 700/800
9-70VDC for DMG 800 D048
50-720VAC for DMG600/610
20-830VAC L-L / 10-480VAC L-N for DMG 700/800
Usage in medium and high voltage systems with
voltage transformers
Rated input current: By external CT 5A for DMG 700;
1A or 5A for DMG 600/610 and DMG 800
True RMS measurements: for voltage and current
Measurement accuracy for DMG 600/610-DMG 700:
Voltage: 0.5% (50-720VAC DMG 600/610; 50830VAC DMG 700)
Current: 0.5% (0.1-1.1In)
Power: 1% f.s.
Frequency: 0.05%
Active energy: Classe 1 (IEC/EN 62053-22)
Measurement accuracy for DMG 800:
Current: 0.2% (0.1-1.1In)
Power: 0.5% f.s.
Power factor: 0.5%
Frequency: 0.05%
Active energy: Classe 0.5S (IEC/EN 62053-22)
Compatible with
software
Flush-mount housing 96x96mm/3.78x3.78
IEC degree of protection: On front IP54 DMG600/610;
IP65 all others. All IP20 at terminals
EXP10 08

Overall M3N case dimensions: See page 4-17.
DMG 800 L01

1
harmonic analysis,
auxiliary supply
100-440VAC/110-250VDC.
0.510
DMG 800 D048

with harmonic analysis,
auxiliary supply
12-24-48VDC
0.520
DMG M3 800 01
DMG 800 portable unit in

M3N case, prewired,
for mobile applications,
with USB port, without
external cable (see page
23-31)
3.300
DMG M3 800 01
Order
code
Description
DMG 600/610, DMG 700 AND DMG 800 EXPANSION MODULES

Inputs and outputs.
EXP10 00
23
23-18
4 opto-isolated digital inputs
EXP 10...

pages 23-30 and 31
DMG 600, DMG 610, DMG 700 and DMG 800 digital
multimeters are capable of viewing the measurements
with high accuracy on the wide graphic LCD, which allow
to control energy distribution networks.
They are available with a flush-mount housing,
96x96mm/3.78x3.78 size, and expansion slots to fit
plug-in expansion modules (1 for DMG 600/610 and 4 for
DMG 700/800) suitable for numerous applications.
The main features include an extended power supply
voltage range, high measurement accuracy, expandability
and graphic interactive interface for simple use.
values
HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions for all
measurements
Total harmonic distortion (THD): voltage and current
Harmonic analysis of voltage and current up to the
31 order with DMG 800 only
counting for water, gas, etc., with expansion module
only.
EXP10 10
EXP10 11
EXP10 12
EXP10 13
Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with web

server function for DMG 800
EXP10 14

for DMG 800
EXP10 30

reserve energy for data logging for DMG 800
Expansion modules
page 28-2
Dimensions
page 23-34

See Section 27.
EXP series expansion modules
Certifications obtained: EAC for all except DMGM380001;
UL listed for USA and Canada (cULus File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices Multimeters for DMG types pending
for DMG600/610 and excluding DMGM380001.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22-2 n14.
Wiring diagrams
page 23-37
page 23-45

Flush mount LCD touchscreen power analyzers,
expandable
Order
code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
DMG 900

1
touch-screen LCD, harmonic
analysis, 4 current channels,
(neutral meas.) auxiliary
supply 100-440VAC/
110-250VDC.
and Portuguese
0.566
DMG 900 L01

1
touch-screen LCD, harmonic
analysis, 4 current channels,
(neutral meas.) auxiliary
supply 100-440VAC/
110-250VDC.
0.566
DMG M3 900 01
DMG 900 portable unit in

1
M3N case, prewired for
mobile applications, with USB
port, without external cables
(see page 23-31)
3.400
DMG 900 D048

1
touch-screen LCD,
harmonic analysis, auxiliary
supply 12-24-48VDC
0.580
DMG 900T
1
harmonic analysis,
100-440VAC/110-250VDC,
RS232/RS485 ports
0.570
DMG 900T D048
1
harmonic analysis,
12-24-48VDC,
RS232/RS485 ports
0.590
DMG 900...
DMG M3 900 01
Wt
[kg]
EXP10 10
EXP10 11
EXP10 12
90-484VAC / 93.5-300VDC for DMG 900 and DMG 900T;
9-70VDC for DMG 900 D048 and DMG 900T D048
transformers
Rated input current: 5A or 1A by CT up to 10,000A
Current measurement range: 0.01-10A or 0.002-1.2A
Frequency measurement range: 45-66Hz / 360-440Hz
Accuracy:
Current: 0.2% (0.1-1.1In)
Power: 0.5% f.s.
Power factor: 0.5%
Frequency: 0.05%
Non-volatile memory for data and event (last 100) storage
with communication expansion modules only
Programming and remote control by software with
communication expansion modules only;
compatible
Housing: Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78x3.78 for
DMG900... and DMG 900RD; 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715) fixing for DMG 900T
IEC protection degree: IP65 on front for DMG 900... and
DMG 900RD; IP20 at terminals for DMG 900... - DMG 900T.
EXP10 13
Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with Web

server function

See Section 27.
EXP10 14
EXP10 15
GPRS/GSM modem
EXP10 30

EXP10 31
Data storage, with Energy Quality (EN 50160),

clock-calendar (RTC) with backup reserve energy
for data logging
Remote display for DMG 900T...

DMG 900RD

0.396
Graphic 128x112 pixel touch 1

screen LCD, with 3m/9.8ft
long connecting cable
No simultaneous operations of serial ports; only one port can be used at

a time. Consult instructions manual for details.
Direct link to DMG 900T dedicated port: powered directly by DMG 900T.
Order
code
DMG 900T...
Description
DMG 900 and DMG 900 T EXPANSION MODULES.

Inputs and outputs.
EXP10 00
EXP10 01
EXP10 02
EXP10 03
EXP10 04

PT100 or 0-10V or 0...5V
EXP10 05

0-10V or 0...5V
EXP10 08

rated 5A 250VAC
DMG 900RD
EXP 10...

pages 23-30 and 31
DMG 900... expandable digital power analyzers are available
with a flush-mount housing, 96x96mm/3.78x3.78 size. The
wide graphic touch screen display provides extremely simple
interacting between the device and the user.
The high performance of the power analyzers gives very
accurate measurements and can control energy distribution
networks, to detect and prevent energy problems which could
compromise quality and supply.
The main features include an extensive power supply voltage
range, high measurement accuracy, expandability up to 4
plug in expansion modules.
There also is available the DMG 900T measurement
transducer which can be used with the DMG 900RD remote
display. The DMG 900T, without display, is arranged for
mounting inside the panel board, on 35mm DIN rail, and is an
ideal solution for installations where the measurements of
various multimeters must be remotely viewed.
The DMG 900RD remote display connected to the DMG 900T
transducer can display the measurements on the panel front
while power connections remain inside the panel.
Voltage: phase, phase-neutral and ground neutral-earth
Supply voltage value for the DC supply types only
Neutral current calculated and true values
Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total values
Cos per phase and total
Harmonic analysis of voltage and current up to the 63 order
HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions for all measurements
counting for water, gas, etc., with expansion module only
Energy quality analysis to EN 50160 with expansion
module only.
Expansion modules
page 28-2
Dimensions
page 23-34

Wiring diagrams
page 23-37

Certifications obtained: EAC for all except DMG M3...;
UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices-Multimeters for all except DMG M3...
IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n14.
page 23-45
23-19
23

Flush-mount LED
instruments single phase
non expandable
Order
code
Displayed
measurements
Relay Qty
output per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
1 voltage value
1 max voltage value
1 min voltage value
0.290
0.323
1 current value
1 max current value
1 min current value
0.290
0.323
0.290
Voltmeter.
DMK 00
DMK 00 R1
Ammeter.
DMK 01
DMK 01 R1
Voltmeter or ammeter.
DMK 0...
DMK 02
1 voltage or
current value
1 maximum voltage
or current value
1 minimum voltage
or current value
DMK 03 R1
1 frequency value
1 max frequency value 1

1 min frequency value
0.290
0.323
0.290
0.323
Cosphi meter.
DMK 04
DMK 04 R1

1 cosphi value
1 power factor value 1
Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC standard;
24VAC, 110-127VAC or 380-415AC type on request
True RMS measurements
HIGH and LOW measurement storage
1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT) for
DMK...R1 only
Terminals: 4mm2
DMK 00 - DMK 00 R1
Voltage measurement range: 15-660VAC
Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
Accuracy: 0.25% f.s. 1 digit
Frequency meter.
DMK 03
The DMK 0... instruments are available with flush-mount
housing, 96x48mm/3.78x1.9 size.
Measurements are True RMS values and provide for
reliable operation even in presence of harmonics.
The DMK02 can operate as a voltmeter or ammeter. It is duly equipped

with two front plates (V and A) which must be fitted by the user
depending on which instrument is required and on the wiring scheme
used.
Relay output for control and protection functions.
DMK 01 - DMK 01 R1
Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
DMK 02
Programmable CT ratio: OFF/5-10,000
Accuracy: Voltage 0.25% f.s. 1 digit
Current 0.5% f.s. 1 digit
DMK 03 - DMK 03 R1
Measurement input: 15-660VAC
Accuracy: 1 digit
DMK 04 - DMK 04 R1
Cosphi measurement error: 0.5 1 digit
Cosphi measurement in 4 quadrants
Accuracy: 1 1 digit
Control and protection functions
DMK 00 R1
Voltage loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
Maximum voltage: OFF/102-120%
Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
Time delay for max-min voltage or voltage loss, phase
loss : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 01 R1
Current loss: OFF/2-100%
Maximum current: OFF/102-200%
Maximum current instantaneous tripping:
OFF/110-600%
Minimum current: OFF/5-98%
Time delay for max-min current or current loss :
0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 03 R1
Maximum frequency: OFF/101-110%
Minimum frequency: OFF/90-99%
Time delay for min-max frequency :
0.5-900.0 seconds.
23
DMK 04 R1
Minimum-maximum cos thresholds in 4 quadrants
Minimum-maximum PF thresholds in 4 quadrants
Delay time for max or min threshold :
1-9,000 seconds.
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary DevicesMultimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.

23-20
Accessories
page 23-30
Dimensions
page 23-34
Independent adjustable delays.
Wiring diagrams
page 23-38
page 23-46

Flush-mount LED
instruments three phase
non expandable
Order
code
Displayd
measurements
Relay Qty
output per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
3 phase voltage values

3 phase to phase
1
voltage values
3 maximum phase
voltage values
3 maximum phase to
phase voltage values
3 minimum phase
voltage values
3 minimum phase to
0.297
0.330
3 phase current values

3 maximum phase
1
current values
3 minimum phase
current values
0.292
0.336
DMK 11 - DMK 11 R1
Accuracy: 0.5% f.s. 1 digit.
0.332
0.350
DMK 15 - DMK 15 R1
Frequency measure range: 45-65Hz
Power 1% f.s. 1 digit.
DMK 10 R1
Phase loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
Phase sequence: OFF/L1-L2-L3/L3-L2-L1
Frequency
Time delay for max-min voltage, phase loss, asymmetry
and min-max frequency : 0.5-900.0 seconds.
Voltmeter.
DMK 10
DMK 10 R1
DMK 1...
Ammeter.
DMK 11
DMK 11 R1
Combined voltmeter, ammeter and wattmeter.

DMK 15

1
DMK 15 R1 3 phase to phase
voltage values
4 active power values,
phase and total
3 maximum phase
voltage values
3 maximum phase to
3 maximum phase
current values
4 maximum active
power values,
phase and total
3 minimum phase
voltage values
3 minimum phase to
3 minimum phase
current values
4 minimum active
power values,
phase and total
Connection also to single phase.
Relay output for control and protection functions.
The DMK 1... instruments are available with flush-mount
Measurements are TRMS values and provide for reliable
operation even in presence of harmonics.
24VAC, 110-127VAC or 380-415VAC type on request
TRMS measurements
DMK...R1 only
Terminals: 4mm2
DMK 10 - DMK 10 R1
Accuracy: 0.25% f.s. 1 digit.
DMK 11 R1
OFF/110-600%
Time delay for max-min current or current loss and
asymmetry : 0.5-900.0 seconds.
DMK 15 R1
Voltage
Current
OFF/110-600%
Power
Rated power: 1-10,000
Maximum power: OFF/101-200%
Max. power instantaneous tripping: OFF/110-600%
Minimum power: OFF/10-99%
Freuency
Minimum frequency OFF/90-99%
Time delay for max-min voltage, max-min current or
current loss, phase loss, asymmetry and min-max
power : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Accessories
page 23-30
Dimensions
page 23-34
Wiring diagrams
page 23-38
page 23-47
23-21
23

Flush-mount LED multimeter
three phase
non expandable
DMK 16
Order
code
Displayed
measurements
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
DMK 16

1
3 phase to phase voltage
values
4 active power values, phase
and total
4 reactive power values,
phase and total
4 apparent power values,
phase and total
3 phase power factor values
1 frequency value
1 active energy value in kWh
1 reactive energy value
in kvarh
1 hour counter
3 maximum phase voltage
values
3 maximum phase to phase
voltage values
3 maximum phase current
values
4 maximum active power
values, phase and total
4 maximum reactive power
4 maximum apparent power
3 minimum phase voltage
values
3 minimum phase to phase
voltage values
3 minimum phase
current values
4 minimum active power
4 minimum reactive power
4 minimum apparent power
[kg]
0.350
The DMK 16 multimeter is available with flush-mount
Active energy accuracy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-21 and
IEC/EN 62053-23)
Terminals: 4mm2
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
23
23-22
Accessories
page 23-30
Dimensions
page 23-34
Wiring diagrams
page 23-38
page 23-47

Flush-mount LED multimeter
three phase
non expandable
Order code
DMK 16 R1
DMK 16 R1
Displayed
measurements
Relay Qty
output per
pkg
3 phase voltage
1
values
3 phase to phase
voltage values
3 phase current
values
phase and total
4 reactive power
values, phase and
total
4 apparent power
values, phase and
total
3 phase power factor
values
1 frequency value
1 active energy value
in kWh
1 reactive energy
value in kvarh
1 hour counter
3 maximum phase
voltage values
3 maximum phase to
phase voltage
values
3 maximum phase
current values
4 minimum and
maximum active
power values,
phase and total
4 minimum and
maximum reactive
power values,
phase and total
4 minimum and
maximum apparent
power values,
phase and total
2 minimum and
maximum power
factor values
Wt
[kg]
0.353
The DMK 16 R1 multimeter is available with flush-mount
Active energy accuracy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-21
and IEC/EN 62053-23)
1 relay output with 1 changeover (SPDT) contact
Terminals: 4mm2
PROGRAMMABLE RELAY OUTPUT
Voltage
Current
Protection inhibition max current: OFF/2-100%
OFF/110-600%
Power factor
Maximum power factor: 0.10-1.00
Minimum power factor: 0.10-1.00
power factor : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
23
Accessories
page 23-30
Dimensions
page 23-34
Wiring diagrams
page 23-38
page 23-47
23-23

Flush mount LED
multimeters
non expandable
47 electrical parameters
DMK 2...
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
DMK 20
Basic version, auxiliary

supply 208-240VAC
0.434
DMK 21
Version with energy

1
meters included, auxiliary
supply 208-240VAC
0.477
DMK 22
Version with energy

1
meters and RS485 port
included, auxiliary supply
208-240VAC
0.477
DMK 25
Version for generating

1
set duty, auxiliary supply
12-24VDC
0.350
DMK 2... digital multimeters are available with fush-mount
housing, 96x96mm/3.78x3.78 size. They monitor and view
reliable readings of electrical parameters, even in presence
of critical operating conditions, such as voltages and
currents with high harmonic content and variable frequency.
The total and partial hour counter feature provides an
interesting feature for electric panels of emergency
generating sets.
The diversified and accurate measurements give the
multimeters valuable technical and cost effective advantages
respect to traditional analog instrumentation.
DMK2... digital multimeters view 47 electrical parameters:
Battery voltage: 9-32VDC for DMK 25 only
Power: apparent phase, active and reactive values
P.F.: power factor per phase
Frequency (measured voltage frequency)
HIGH/LOW: instantaneous minimum and maximum
values of each phase voltage and current, total active
power (W), total reactive power (var) and total
apparent power (VA) values
Total hours: non-volatile clearable log for DMK 20 and
DMK 25 only
Partial hours: non-volatile configurable log for DMK 20
and DMK 25 only
Active and reactive energy meters for DMK21 and
DMK22 only.
154-288VAC for DMK 20
177-264VAC for DMK 21-DMK 22
9-32VDC for DMK 25
Voltage measurement range: 60-830VAC phase-phase
Current measurement range: 0.05-6A
Programmable CT ratio: 1.0-2,000
Voltage accuracy: Class 0.5 0.35% f.s. (830V)
Current accuracy: Class 0.5 0.5% f.s. (6A)
Active energy accuracy: Class 2
Non-volatile total and partial hour counter with
separate clearing; used as maintenance interval with
alarm display in DMK 20 - DMK 25 only
HIGH and LOW value functions to read and log
instantaneous voltage, current and power values
Delayed automatic resetting of default measurements
Averaging function to slow down repetitive fluctuations
to obtain more stable readouts
Current connection in ARON configuration by 2 current
transformers (CTs) only
Single, two, three phase, with or without neutral, and
balanced three-phase connection
RS485 serial port, compatible with
software
TRMS measurements up to 22 harmonic order
IEC protection degree: IP54 on front; IP 20 at rear.
See Section 28.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n14.
23
23-24
Accessories
page 23-30 and 31
Dimensions
page 23-34
Wiring diagrams
page 23-39
page 23-48

Flush mount LED
multimeters
non expandable
251 electric parameters
DMK 3...
DMK 40
Order code
Description
DMK 30
Basic version, auxiliary supply 1

100-240VAC / 110-250VDC
0.410
DMK 31
Version with 1 relay and

1 static programmable
outputs, auxiliary supply
100-240VAC / 110-250VDC
0.480
DMK 32

1
1 static programmable outputs
and RS485 opto-isolated port,
auxiliary supply
100-240VAC / 110-250VDC
0.490
DMK 32 D048 Version with 1 relay and

1
1 static programmable outputs
and RS485 opto-isolated port,
auxiliary supply 24-48VDC
0.485
DMK 40
0.470
Version with data-logger,

RS232 and RS485
opto-isolated ports,
auxiliary supply
100-240VAC / 110-250VDC
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
DMK3... and DMK40 digital multimeters are available with
flush-mount housing, 96x96mm/3.78x3.78 size. They
comprise excellent features so distorted waveform
conditions, such as very disturbed supply lines having
voltage and currents with high harmonic content and variable
freqeuncy, do not influence the high accuracy of DMK
multimeter readouts, because of the rigorous deisgn in
addition to the use of the latest generation of microprocessor
technology. Measurement of the phase angle (cos) in
addition to power factor, harmonic analysis and HIGH-LOWMAX DEMAND functions are just a few of those which are
difficult to find on higher category equipment.
The DMK 40 version includes a reliable data-logger system,
extremely easy to use. DMK 3... and DMK 40 multimeters can
display 251 electric parameters; a few of these are listed below:
Current: phase and system values
Power: active, reactive, apparent phase and total values
Energy: import, export, active and reactive values
cos: angle displacement, i.e. power factor related to
the harmonic fundamental only
Harmonics (HARM.): residual and total harmonic
content for each harmonic order up to the 22 per
phase, both for voltage and current values
HIGH / LOW: maximum / minimum values of phase
voltage and current and W, var and VA power
Maximum demand (MAX): maximum current and total
active power values, both calculated on programmable
integration time.
The technical features of the DMK 40 data-logger are:
2Mbyte (MB) non-volatile memory for data logging
Real Time Clock (RTC) with replaceable backup lithium
battery
Sampling time, 1s to 24h configurable
Number of sampling measurements, 1 to 32
configurable at a time
Communication protocols: Modbus-RTU and
Modbus-ASCII
Data logging of one electrical parameter in continuous
format or with begin-end by programmable thresholds
Compatible with
software
Suspension of data acquisition at full memory or
refreshing oldest data.
Operating auxiliary voltage range: 85-265VAC /
93.5-300VDC; 18-70VDC for DMK32 D048
Voltage measurement range: 20-830VAC phase-phase;
VT ratio programming: 1.0-5,000
CT ratio programming: 1.0-2,000
Voltage accuracy: 0.25% f.s. (830V)
Current accuracy: 0.35% f.s. (6A)
Frequency and harmonic distortion accuracy: 1 digit
HIGH and LOW value functions to detect and log
Averaging function to slow down repetitive fluctuations
to obtain more stable readouts
transformers only
Single, two, three phase, with or without neutral, and
balanced three-phase connection by 1 CT only
Usage with voltage transformers for voltages >830VAC
True RMS measurements up to 22 harmonic order
Power factor and cos measurements
Voltage and current harmonic analysis per phase up to
22 harmonic order
Active energy meters (import-export)
Reactive energy meters (import-export)
IEC protection degree: IP54 on front; IP 20 at rear.
See Section 28.
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices Multimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, CISPR11/EN 55011, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Accessories
page 23-30 and 31
Dimensions
page 23-34
Wiring diagrams
page 23-39
page 23-48
23-25
23

Modular LED instruments
single phase
non expandable
Order
code
Displayed
measurements
Relay Qty
output per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
1 voltage value
1 max voltage value
1 min voltage value
0.237
0.268
1 current value
1 max current value
1 min current value
0.237
0.268
0.241
Voltmeter.
DMK 80
DMK 80 R1
Ammeter.
DMK 81
DMK 81 R1
Voltmeter or ammeter.
DMK 80
DMK 80 R1
DMK 82
1 voltage or current
value
1 maximum voltage
or current value
1 minimum voltage
or current value
Frequency meter.
DMK 83
DMK 83 R1
1 frequency value
1 max frequency value 1

1 min frequency value
0.237
0.268
0.241
0.272
Cosphi meter.
DMK 84
DMK 81
DMK 81 R1
DMK 84 R1

DMK 82
1 cosphi value
1 power factor value 1
The DMK82 can operate as a voltmeter or ammeter. It is duly equipped

with two front plates (V and A) which must be fitted by the user
depending on which instrument is required and on the wiring scheme
used.
Relay output with control and protection functions.
The DMK 8... instruments are available with modular
housing, 3 module size.
DMK...R1 version only
Terminals: 4mm2
Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 modules
IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 on
terminals.
DMK 80 - DMK 80 R1
DMK 81 - DMK 81 R1
DMK 82
Programmable CT ratio: OFF/5-10,000
DMK 83 - DMK 83 R1
Measurement input: 15-660VAC
Frequency measurement range: 50-60Hz 10%
Measurement accuracy: 1 digit
Accuracy: 1 digit
DMK 82
DMK 84 - DMK 84 R1
Cosphi measurement error: 0.5 1 digit
Cosphi measurement in 4 quadrants
Accuracy: 1 1 digit
DMK 83

DMK 80 R1
Voltage loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
Time delay for max-min voltage or voltage loss, phase
loss : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 83 R1
DMK 81 R1
OFF/110-600%
Time delay for max-min current or current loss :
0.0-900.0 seconds.
23
DMK 84
DMK 83 R1
Time delay for min-max frequency :
0.5-900.0 seconds.
DMK 84 R1
DMK 84 R1
Minimum-maximum cos thresholds in 4 quadrants
Minimum-maximum PF thresholds in 4 quadrants
Delay time for max or min threshold :
1-9,000 seconds.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3.

23-26
Dimensions
page 23-35
Wiring diagrams
page 23-38
page 23-46

Modular LED instruments
three phase
non expandable
Order
code
Displayed
measurements
Relay Qty
output per
pkg
Wt
[kg]

3 phase to phase
1
voltage values
3 max phase voltage
values
3 max phase to phase
voltage values
3 min phase voltage
values
3 min phase to phase
voltage values
0.233
0.264

3 max phase current 1
values
3 min phase current
values
0.241
0.272
Voltmeter.
DMK 70
DMK 70 R1
DMK 70
DMK 70 R1
Ammeter.
DMK 71
DMK 71 R1
Combined voltmeter, ammeter and wattmeter.

DMK 75
DMK 75 R1
DMK 71
DMK 75
DMK 71 R1
DMK 75 R1

3 phase to phase
1
voltage values
phase and total
3 maximum phase
voltage values
3 maximum phase to
3 maximum phase
current values
4 max active power,
phase and total
3 minimum phase
voltage values
3 minimum phase to
3 minimum phase
current values
4 min active power,
phase and total
0.271
0.280
The DMK 7... instruments are available with modular
housing, 3 module size.
DMK...R1 version only
Terminals: 4mm2
IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 on
terminals.
DMK 70 - DMK 70 R1
DMK 71 - DMK 71 R1
DMK 75 - DMK 75 R1
Frequency measure range: 45-65Hz
DMK 70 R1
Time delay for max-min voltage, phase loss,
asymmetry and min-max frequency :
0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 71 R1
OFF/110-600%
Time delay for max-min current or current loss and
asymmetry : 0.0-900.0 seconds.

Relay output with control and protection functions.
DMK 75 R1
Voltage
Current
OFF/110-600%
Power
Rated power: 1-10,000
Maximum power: OFF/101-200%
Maximum power instantaneous tripping:
OFF/110-600%
Minimum power: OFF/10-99%
Frequency
power : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3.

Dimensions
page 23-35
Wiring diagrams
page 23-38
page 23-47
23-27
23

Digital measuring instruments.
Starter kits
Modular LED multimeters
non expandable
Order
code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
DMK 50
Basic version,
auxiliary supply
208-240VAC
0.398
DMK 51
Version with energy

meters included,
auxiliary supply
208-240VAC
0.420
DMK 52
Version with energy meters 1

and RS485 port,
auxiliary supply
208-240VAC
0.420
Order
code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
DMKKIT 51 060
Kit composed of one

DMK 51 multimeter and
three 60/5A CTs
for 22mm/0.87 cable
1.020
DMKKIT 51 080
Kit composed of one

three 80/5A CTs
for 22mm/0.87 cable
1.020
DMKKIT 51 100
Kit composed of one

three 100/5A CTs
for 22mm/0.87 cable
1.020
DMKKIT 51 150
Kit composed of one

three 150/5A CTs
for 23mm/0.91 cable
0.810
DMKKIT 51 200
Kit composed of one

three 200/5A CTs
for 23mm/0.91 cable
0.810
DMKKIT 51 250
Kit composed of one

three 250/5A CTs
for 23mm/0.91 cable
8.210
DMK 5...
Starter kits
DMKKIT 51 060
DMKKIT 51 080
DMKKIT 51 100
DMKKIT 51 150
DMKKIT 51 200
DMKKIT 51 250
DMK 5... digital multimeters are available with modular
housing, 6 module size. They monitor and view reliable
readings of electric parameters, even in presence of
critical operating conditions, such as voltages and
currents with high harmonic content and variable
frequency.
The total and partial hour counter feature provides an
interesting feature for electric panels of emergency
generating sets.
The diversified and accurate measurements give the
multimeters valuable technical and cost effective
advantages respect to traditional analog instrumentation.
The digital multimeters DMK 5... view 47 electric
parameters:
Power: apparent phase, active and reactive values
HIGH/LOW: instantaneous minimum and maximum
values of each phase voltage and current, total active
power (W), total reactive power (var) and total
apparent power (VA) values
Total hours: non-volatile clearable log for DMK 50 only
Partial hours: non-volatile configurable log for
DMK 50 only
Active and reactive energy meters for DMK 51 and
DMK 52 only.
DMK 50 - DMK 51 - DMK 52
177-264VAC for DMK 51-DMK 52
60-830VAC phase-phase; 30-480VAC phase-neutral
Programmable CT ratio: 1.0-2,000
Accuracy: Voltage-class 0.5 0.35% f.s. (830V)
Current-class 0.5% 0.5% f.s. (6A)
Non-volatile total and partial hour counter with
separate clearing; used as maintenance interval with
alarm display in DMK 50 only
HIGH and LOW value functions to read and log
Delayed automatic resetting of default measurements
Averaging function to slow down repetitive
fluctuations to obtain more stable readouts
transformers (CTs) only
Single, two, three phase with or without neutral
True RMS measurements up to 22 harmonic order
RS485 serial port,
software compatible for
DMK 52
IEC degree of protection: IP41 on front; IP 20 on
terminals.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTs) of starter kits
Class 1 burden
Rated short time thermal current Ith: 40-60Ipn for 1
second
Faston terminals
Standard supplied fixing elements
23

See Section 27.
Certifications obtained: EAC for DMK 5...; UL Listed, for
USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary
Devices - Multimeters for DMK5... types, in the starter
kits as well.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14 for DMK5; IEC/EN 60044-1 for
transformers of starter kits.
23-28

page 23-30
Dimensions
page 23-35
Wiring diagrams
page 23-39
page 23-49

Modular LED multimeters
non expandable
DMK 6...
Order
code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
DMK 60
Basic version,
auxiliary supply
100-240VAC/110-250VDC
0.290
DMK 61

1 static programmable
outputs, auxiliary supply
100-240VAC / 110-250VDC
0.300
DMK 62

1
1 static programmable outputs,
and RS485 port, auxiliary supply
100-240VAC / 110-250VDC
0.320
DMK6... digital multimeters are avaibalble with modular
housing, 6 module size. They comprise excellent
features, superior to devices of the same category
currently on the marketplace. Distorted waveform
conditions, such as very disturbed electric lines having
voltage and currents with high harmonic content and
variable frequency, do not influence the high accuracy
DMK multimeter readouts because of rigorous design in
addition to the use of the latest generation of
microprocessor technology. Measurement of the phase
angle (cos) in addition to power factor, harmonics
analysis and HIGH-LOW-MAX functions are just a few of
those which are difficult to find on higher category
equipment.
DMK 6... digital multimeter can display 251 electric
parameters; a few of these are listed below.
Current: phase and system values
Power: active, reactive, apparent phase and total values
Energy: active, reactive import and export values
cos: angle displacement, i.e. power factor related to
the harmonic fundamental only
Harmonics (HARM.): residual and total harmonic
content for each harmonic order up to the 22 per
phase, both for voltage and current values
HIGH / LOW: maximum / minimum values of phase
voltage and current and W, var and VA power
Maximum (MAX): maximum current and total active
power values, both calculated on programmable
integration time.
85-265VAC/93.5-300VDC
Voltage measurement range: 20-830VAC phase-phase
VT ratio programming: 1.0-5,000
CT ratio programming: 1.0-2000
Accuracy: Voltage 0.25% f.s. (830V)
Current 0.35% f.s. (6A)
Frequency and harmonic distortion 1 digit
HIGH and LOW value functions to detect and log
Averaging function to slow down repetitive
fluctuations to obtain more stable readouts
Current connection in ARON configuration via 2
current transformers only
Single, two, three phase with or without neutral and
balanced three-phase connection via 1 current
transformer only
Usage with voltage transformers for voltages >830VAC
True RMS measurements up to 22 harmonic order,
class 1 accuracy
Power factor and cos measurement
Voltage and current harmonic analysis per phase up
to 22 harmonic order
Active energy meters (import-export)
Reactive energy meters (import-export)
software
RS485 serial port, compatible with
for DMK 62
IEC degree of protection: IP41 on front; IP 20 on
terminals.
See Section 27.
Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices Multimeters.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN
61000-6-2, CISPR11/EN55011, UL508, CSA C22.2 n14.

page 23-30
Dimensions
page 23-35
Wiring diagrams
page 23-39
page 23-49
23-29
23

Communication devices, coves and accessories for measuring instruments
Communication devices
CX 01
Order code
Description
CX 01
USB/optical dongle with

1
PC LOVATO Electric product
connecting cable, for
programming, data download,
diagnostics and firmware
upgrade
0.090
CX 02
Wi-Fi dongle for PC LOVATO 1

Electric product programming,
data download, diagnostics and
cloning
0.090
GSM/GPRS quad-band antenna 1

(800/900/1800/199Mhz) for
EXP1015 expansion module
0.090
CX 03
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
EXP80 00
23
23-30
CX 02
By Wi-Fi connection, compatible LOVATO Electric
products can be viewed on PCs, smartphones and
tablets with no need for cabling.
For dimensions, wiring schemes and technical

characteristics, refer to technical instructions in
Downloads of local or global websites or consult
Customer Service. See contact details on the inside
front cover.
CX 03
Accessories
CX 01
The USB/optical dongle, complete with cable, allows the
connection of products compatible with PCs without
having to disconnect the power supply from the electric
panel.
The PC identifies the connection as a standard USB.
CX 03
Antenna compatible with the major part of worldwide
mobile networks thanks to the available frequencies at
800/900/1800/1900MHz.
IEC degree of protection: IP67. Fixing by 12mm/0.04
drilling.
CX 02
Protection covers
Communication devices for connection of LOVATO
Electric products to personal computers, smartphones
and tablets.
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
PA 96X48
Front protection cover, IEC IP65

for DMK 0 and DMK 1
[kg]
0.048
31 PA 96X96 Front protection cover, IEC IP54

for DMK 2, DMK 3 and
DMK 40
0.077
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
EXP80 00
Plastic insert for customising

label fixing for DMG 600/610
10
0.005
EXM80 04
Set of sealable terminal covers

for DMG 200/210/300
0.020
When a higher front IP protection degree is needed, the
covers can be installed on the corresponding devices
and also provide a sealing feature.

Converter drive, cables, clamp kits and software for measuring instruments
RS232-RS485
converter drive
Order code
Description
4 PX1
RS2322/RS485 converter
drive, opto-isolated,
220-240VAC
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.600
RS232/RS485 opto-isolated converter drive, 38,400 Baud rate maximum,

4 PX1
Connecting cables
automatic or manual TRANSMIT line supervision,

220-240VAC 10% (110-120VAC supply on request).
Order code
Description
CONNECTING CABLES 51 C
To connect energy meters and/or multimeters with:
Personal computers
Modems
Bus converters.
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Connecting cables.
51 C2
For PCmultimeter RS232

port, 1.8m/2yd long
0.090
51 C4
For PC4 PX1 converter drive, 1

1.8m/2yd long
0.147
51 C5
For analog modemmultimeter 1

RS232 port,
1.8m/2yd long
0.111
51 C9
For 4PX 1 converter

driveanalog modem,
1.8m/2yd long
0.137
51 C4
Current clamp kits for DMG M3. portable devices.

DMG M3 KIT01 Composed by 3 current
clamps 1000/1 and 4 alligator
clip cables for voltage
measurements
DMG M3 KIT...
Software
6.900
DMG M3 KIT02 Composed by 1 current

1
clamps 1000/1 and 1 alligator
clip cable for voltage
measurements.
For DMGM3900, if measuring
inputs for neutral-earth/ground
and neutral current are used too
0.860
Order code
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Description
Software.
DMK SW10
DMK SW
Remote control software for

1
PC-DMK 22/32/40/52/62 and
PC-DMG 210/200/600/800/900
having Modbus-RTU and ASCII
protocols, complete with 51 C4
connecting cable
0.246
DMK SW 10
Data-logger software complete 1

with 31 C2 connecting cable.
0.400
Remote control and supervision

Software for PC-DMK / DMG
(as above) having Modbus-RTU
and ASCII protocols, complete
with 51 C4 connecting cable
RS232-RS485 CONVERTER DRIVE
It can interface slave devices connected in an RS485
bus with a master equipped with RS232 interface port.
When configured appropriately, it can also be used as
RS485 repeater whenever the devices connected to the
bus are many or the maximum distance among the bus
devices is longer than the allowed.
Electrical safety for DMG M3

(IEC/EN 61010-1 and IEC/EN 61010-2-032)
CURRENT CLAMPS
600V category III (industrial and services) with antislip protection and conductor
anti-pinching system
300V category IV.
VOLTAGE MEASURING CABLES
1000V category III (industrial and services).
DMK SW SOFTWARE
Remote control software for DMK 22, DMK 32, DMK 40,
DMK 52, DMK 62, DMG 210, DMG 300, DMG 700,
DMG 800, DMG 900 and DMG 900T.
This software is capable of controlling a maximum of
250 digital multimeters remotely connected to one RS485
bus.
The DMK SW is subdivided into modules which warrant
simple and easy use:
Main synoptic page which includes the most important
in-coming data of the various DMK/DMG connected
Detailed page with data related to the selected
DMK/DMG unit
Data log which consents to store sampled
measurements on disk (max 128 measurements)
Events / alarms log with alarm data acquisition of the
various DMKs/DMGs as well as the elaborated analysis
Trend graphs to control electric parameters status
Harmonic content analysis bar graph
Energy count to periodically view energy counters of
the various instruments and monitor energy
consumption.
DMK SW10 SOFTWARE
Data-logger and remote control for DMK 40 and DMG...
with memory modules.
The DMK SW10 includes the data-logger software and
the remote control DMK SW software, two applications
with separate installation.
The data-logger software permits:
To configure multimeter parameters for data logging
and installation parameters (VT and CT ratio, etc.)
To view and print acquired data from the multimeter
storage memory in table or trend graph format.
No data-logger configuration or stored data viewing is
obtainable on the unit front
To download data in ACCESS, EXCEL or TEXT file
To view all actual electric parameter measurements on
a virtual multimeter display (DMK only)
To program the multimeter clock-calendar (RTC - Real
Time Clock) to automatically manage daylight saving
time
To connect directly or via modem with the multimeters.
See Section 27.
Reference standards
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
Customer Service. See contact details on the inside front
cover.
23-31
23

Current transformers
Solid-core
Order code
Primary
current
Ipn
Burden
Class Class
0.5
1
Qty Weight
per
pkg
/5 [A]
[VA]
[VA]
[kg]
For 22mm/0.9 cable.
DM0T...
DM2T...
DM3T...
DM4T...
DM0T 0050
50
1.25
0.200
DM0T 0060
60
1.5
0.200
DM0T 0080
80
1.5
0.200
DM0T 0100
100
1.5
0.200
DM0T 0150
150
0.200
300/5A
For 23mm/0.9 cable.

For 30x10mm/1.2x0.4, 25x12.5mm/1x0.5,
20x15mm/0.8x0.4 busbars.
DM2T 0100
100
1.5
0.130
DM2T 0150
150
1.5
0.130
DM2T 0200
200
2.5
0.130
DM2T 0250
250
2.5
0.130
DM2T 0300
300
1.5
0.130
DM2T 0400
400
0.130
For 30mm/1.2 cable.

For 40x10mm/1.6x0.4, 30x20mm/1.2x0.8,
25x25mm/1x1 busbars.
DM3T 0200
200
0.260
DM3T 0250
250
0.260
DM3T 0300
300
2.5
0.260
DM3T 0400
400
2.5
0.260
DM3T 0500
500
2.5
0.260
DM3T 0600
600
10
0.260
DM3T 0800
800
10
0.260
DM3T 1000
1000
10
0.260
For 86mm/3.4 cable.

For 100x30mm/3.9x1.2, 80x50mm/3.1x2,
70x60mm/2.8x2.4 busbars.
DM4T 1000
1000
10
20
0,700
DM4T 1200
1200
15
30
0.700
DM4T 1250
1250
15
30
0.760
DM4T 1500
1500
30
30
0.760
DM4T 1600
1600
30
30
0.800
DM4T 2000
2000
45
45
0.840
DM4T 2500
2500
45
45
0.900
DM4T 3000
3000
45
45
0.900
DM4T 3500
3500
50
50
0.900
DM4T 4000
4000
50
50
0.900
Order code
Primary
current
Ipn
Burden
Class Class
0.5S
0.5
Qty Weight
per
pkg
/5 [A]
[VA]
[VA]
[kg]
For 28mm/1.1 cable.

For 20x10mm/0.8x0.4 and 30x10mm/1.2x0.4 busbars.
23
DM5T...
Versions with Italian UTF certificates
on request.
DM5T 0060
60
1.5
1.5
0.560
DM5T 0080
80
2.5
2.5
0.580
DM5T 0100
100
2.5
3.75
0.480
DM5T 0150
150
2.5
3.75
0.480
DM5T 0200
200
2.5
3.75
0.460
DM5T 0250
250
2.5
0.480
DM5T 0300
300
2.5
0.480
The DM... series current transformers (CTs) are installed
in electric installations to reduce the line current to a
secondary value of 5A, which is compatible with current
inputs of digital multimeters or protection relays.
These are without primary winding and are used for high
primary current values from 50A upward.
The number of loops of the primary cable does not
modify the accuracy but converts the primary current
value proportional to secondary current.
Consult Customer Service to query about versions with Italian UTF

certificates; see contact details on inside front cover.
S2
L
S1
K
n=1
300 / 5A
1 loop = 300 / 5A
9
J-2 K
P1
300:n/5A
300:1/5A=300/5A
300/5A
S2
L
n=2
S1
K
300 / 5A
2 loops = 150 / 5A
9
J-2 K
P1
300:n/5A
300:2/5A=150/5A
300/5A
S2
L
S1
K
9
J-2 K
P1
n=3
300 / 5A
3 loops = 100 / 5A
300:n/5A
300:3/5A=100/5A
IEC rated short-time thermal current Ith:
40-60 Ipn for 1 second
IEC rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5 Ith for 1 second
Insulation (dry type): Class E
Terminals:
Faston for DM2T and DM3T types
Screw for DM0T, DM4T and DM5T types
Sealable terminal covers for DM0T, DM4T and DM5T
types
Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or by screws
(fixing elements standard supplied with the product)
Ambient conditions
Storage temperature: -40 ... +80C.
Relative humidity, non condensing: 90%.
Reference standards
The UTF certificate is required for revenue tax
purposes by Italian authorities when equipment is part
of generating electricity installations (e.g. solar, wind)
and there is electricity exchange with the power grid.
23-32
Dimensions
page 23-35

Split-core
Order code
Primary
current
Ipn
Burden
Class Class
0.5
1
Qty Weight
per
pkg
/5 [A]
[VA]
[VA]
[kg]
For 50x60mm/2x2.4 busbar.
DM1TA...
DM1TA 0250
250
0.900
DM1TA 0300
300
1.5
0.900
DM1TA 0400
400
1.5
0.900
DM1TA 0500
500
2.5
0.900
DM1TA 0600
600
2.5
0.900
DM1TA 0750
750
0.900
DM1TA 0800
800
7.5
0.900
DM1TA 1000
1000
10
0.900
For 80x80mm/3.1x3.1 busbar.
DM2TA...
DM2TA 0250
250
1.050
DM2TA 0300
300
1.5
1.050
DM2TA 0400
400
1.5
1.050
DM2TA 0500
500
2.5
1.050
DM2TA 0600
600
2.5
1.050
DM2TA 0750
750
1.050
DM2TA 0800
800
7.5
1.050
DM2TA 1000
1000
10
1.050

DM3TA 0500
500
1.250
DM3TA 0600
600
1.250
DM3TA 0750
750
2.5
1.250
DM3TA 0800
800
7.5
1.250
DM3TA 1000
1000
10
1.250
DM3TA 1200
1200
12.5
1.250
DM3TA 1250
1250
7.5
15
1.250
DM3TA 1500
1500
17
1.250
The DM... series current transformers (CTs) are installed
in electric installations to reduce the line current to a
secondary value of 5A, which is compatible with current
inputs of digital multimeters or protection relays.
These are without primary winding and are used for high
primary current values from 250A upward.
IEC rated short-time thermal current Ith:
40-60 Ipn for 1 second
IEC rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5 Ith for 1 second
Insulation (dry type): Class E
Screw terminals
Sealable terminal covers
Screw fixing (fixing elements standard supplied with
the product)
Ambient conditions
Storage temperature: -40 ... +80C.
Relative humidity, non condensing: 90%.
Reference standards
DM3TA...
DM4TA 2000
2000
15
20
3.160
DM4TA 2500
2500
15
20
3.340
DM4TA 3000
3000
20
25
3.500
DM4TA 4000
4000
20
25
3.760
DM4TA...
23
Dimensions
page 23-35
23-33

ENERGY METERS
63 (2.48")
43.8 (1.72")
45 (1.77")
63.5 (2.50")
93.4 (3.68")
35.8
(1.41")
45 (1.77")
63.5 (2.50")
11
(0.43")
95 (3.74")
90 (3.54")
5
(0.20")
Expansion modules EXM...
63 (2.48")
43.8 (1.72")
42.7 (1.68")
105.4 (4.15")
90 (3.54")
71.6 (2.82")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
4.2
(0.16")
4.2
(0.16")
MULTIMETERS
DMG 200 - DMG 210 - DMG 300
58 (2.28")
43.7 (1.72")
5
(0.20")
71.6 (2.82")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
104.7 (4.12")
98.3 (3.87")
45 (1.77")
85 (3.35")
5
(0.20")
58 (2.28")
43.7 (1.72")
5
(0.20")
98.3 (3.87")
35.8
(1.41")
59.9 (2.35")
43.8 (1.72")
17.5
(0.69")
Digital meter DME D300 T2... - DME D300 F DME D310 F... - DME D310 T2... - DME D320
Data concentrator DME CD - DME CD PV1...
104.7 (4.12")
Digital meter DME D115 T1 - DME D120 T1...

DME D121 - DME D130
Mechanical meter DME M100...

Digital meter DME D100... - DME D110...
36.4
(1.43")
DMG 700 - DMG 800... - DMG 900... with expansion modules EXP...
92 (3.62")
26.3
(1.03")
96 (3.78")
92 (3.62")
37.3
(1.47)
92 (3.62")
19
(0.75")
EXP 10...
91.7 (3.61")
54 (2.12")
91.6 (3.61")
24
(0.94")
96 (3.78")
64.5 (2.54)
96.3 (3.79)
110 (4.33")
101.3 (3.99")
43.5 (1.71)
92 (3.62")
28.8
(1.13")
Cutout
90.8 (3.57")
5
(0.20")
DMG 900RD remote display
96 (3.78")
Transducer DMG 900T with expansion modules EXP...

20
(0.79")
92 (3.62")
61.5 (2.42")
EXP 10...
EXP 10...
115 (4.53")
96 (3.78")
19
(0.75")
53.2 (2.09")
92 (3.62")
8.5
(0.33")
99.5 (3.92")
64.5 (2.54")
65 (2.56")
55 (2.16")
96 (3.78")
96 (3.78")
DMG 600 - DMG 610
INSTRUMENTS
DMK 0... - DMK 1...
23
9
(0.35")
92 (3.62")
48 (1.89")
81 (3.19")
45 (1.77")
24
(0.94")
44 (1.73")
MULTIMETERS
DMK 2...
23-34
12
(0.47")
82 (3.23")
6
(0.24")
92 (3.62")
92 (3.62")
96 (3.78")
96 (3.78")
92 (3.62")
92 (3.62")
62 (2.44")
6
(0.24")
96 (3.78")
90 (3.54")
96 (3.78")
DMK 3... - DMK 40

14
(0.55")
90 (3.54")
96 (3.78")

INSTRUMENTS
DMK 7... - DMK 8...
Multimetri DMK 5... - DMK 6...

58.1 (2.29")
43.8 (1.72")
5
(0.20")
53.5 (2.11")
60 (2.36")
55 (2.16")
105 (4.13")
45 (1.77")
63.5 (2.50")
95 (3.74")
90 (3.54")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
99 (3.90")
105.4 (4.15")
36
4.2
(0.16")
DM4T...
104 (4.09")
25
(0.98")
30
(1.18")
40 (1.57")
53 (2.08")
72.5 (2.85")
81.5 (3.19")
62.5 (2.46")
10 (0.39")
20 (0.79")
30 ")
8
(1.1
36.5
(1.44")
56.5 (2.22")
12.5
(0.49")
10
(0.39")
27.5
(1.08")
20
(0.79")
25
(0.79")
30
(1.18")
30
(1.18)
44 (1.73)
71 (2.79")
40 (1.57")
DM3T...
46.5 (1.83")
15
(0.59")
3
2 0")
9
(0.
28
(1.10")
66 (2.60)
2
2 7)
8
(0.
52 (2.05")
65.5 (2.58")
32
(1.26)
9.5
(0.37")
DM2T...
Solid core DM0T...
9.5
(0.37")
44.5 (1.75")
DM5T...
16.5
(0.65)
(1
40
(1.18)
31.5
(1.24)
74.5 (2.93)
51 (2.01")
101 (3.98")
121 (4.76")
140 (5.51")
80 (3.15")
109 (4.29")
P2
120 (4.72")
80 (3.15")
S2
32
(1.26")
P2
DM4TA...
68 (2.68")
P2
80 (3.15")
109 (4.29")
32
(1.26")
32
(1.26")
S2
47 (1.85")
184 (7.24")
50 (1.97")
32
(1.26")
P2
32
(1.26")
52 (2.05")
78 (3.07")
P2
144 (5.67")
32
(1.26")
80 (3.15")
S2
142 (5.59")
144 (5.67")
P2
P2
DM3TA...
50 (1.97")
142 (5.59")
50 (1.97")
184 (7.24")
DM2TA...
114 (4.49")
32
(1.26")
Split core DM1TA...
S2
31.5
(1.24)
98.5 (3.88)
2
8
.10
)
21.5
(0.85)
26
(1.02)
155 (6.10")
74 (2.91")
31
(1.22")
51 (2.01")
61 (2.40")
71 (2.79")
81 (3.19")
6
8 8")
3
(3.
11
(0.43)
60 (2.36)
45 (1.77)
80 (3.15")
120 (4.72")
175 (6.89")
38
(1.50")
38
(1.50")
160 (6.30")
245 (9.64")
23
32
(1.26")
52 (2.05")
23-35

Wiring diagrams
ENERGY METERS
Mechanical DME M100
DME M100 T1
230VAC
N
L
230VAC
N
5
640 pulses/kWh
Vce max: 35V
Imax: 20mA
METER
METER
6
L
LOAD
LOAD
Digital DME D100 T1... - DME D110 T1...

N
DME D115 T1 - DME D120 T1... - DME D130
O1- N
N O1+
N O1+
LINE
LOAD
METER
L
L
LINE
220...240VAC
LOAD
L
L
V1 V2 V3 VN
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I3
L3
I1
L2
Tariff input
100...240VAC
L1
L2
L3
N
I2
L1
DME D310 T2... - DME D310 F...

380-415V (L-L)
220-240V (L-N)
T1 T2
METER
Static
Static
O2
O1
+
L1
L2
T1
O1+ O1-
T2
L3
O2+ O2-
Pulse output
30VDC 50mA
Pulse output
30VDC 50mA
LOAD
230V 50Hz (L-N), 400V 50Hz (L-L) DMED... T2 MID / DMED... F.
DME D320
Single phase
Two phase
CT1
L
O
A
D
Three phase with or without neutral

CT1
CT1
L
O
A
D
CT2
CT2
CT3
N
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
CURRENT
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
CURRENT
Three phase without neutral in ARON connection

CT1
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
CURRENT
Data concentrator DME CD - DME CD PV1
Tariff
Input
SG
TR
T2
T1
A2
A1
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
110VDC
Aux
Supply
RS485
I4.2
I3.2
COM4
I4.1
COM3
I3.1
I2.2
COM2
I2.1
I1.2
2 x 4 groups
Insulated inputs
23-36
CT3
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
AUX SUPPLY
COM1
I1.1
23
CT1
L
O
A
D
CT2
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
CURRENT
S1 S2
I3
L
O
A
D
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
CURRENT
S1 S2
I3
LOAD
L
L
110-120VAC DMED...A120; 220-240VAC DMED...; 230V 50Hz DMED... T1 MID.
LINE
380-415V (L-L)
220-240V (L-N)
METER
DME D300 T2... - DME D300 F
A
RS485
METER
O1-
Static
Static
LINE
DME D121
L
O
A
D

Wiring diagrams
MULTIMETERS DMG 200 - DMG 210 - DMG 300
Two phase
Single phase
CT1

CT1
L
O
A
D
CT1
L
O
A
D
CT2
L
O
A
D
CT2
CT3
N
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
CURRENT
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
CURRENT
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
CURRENT

CT1
CT1
L
O
A
D
CT2
L
O
A
D
CT3
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
CURRENT
MULTIMETRI DMG 700 - DMG 800...

Single phase
CT1
12-24-48VDC
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
CURRENT
CT2
CT3
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
CURRENT
DMG 900...
Single phase
L
O
A
D
CT2
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
Two phase
CT1
CT1
L
O
A
D
12-24-48VDC
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
AUX SUPPLY

CT1
VOLTAGE
CT1
12-24-48VDC
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
AUX SUPPLY
V1 V2 V3 VN
Two phase
L
O
A
D
A1 A2 GND
AUX SUPPLY
A1 A2 GND
AUX SUPPLY
12-24-48VDC
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
V1 V2 V3 V4 VN
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
S1 S2
I4
A1 A2 GND
AUX SUPPLY
CURRENT
CURRENT
L
O
A
D
CT2
V1 V2 V3 V4 VN
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
S1 S2
I4
CURRENT

CT1
L
O
A
D
L
O
A
D
CT2
CT3
N
12-24-48VDC
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
12-24-48VDC
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
A1 A2 GND
AUX SUPPLY
CURRENT

CT1
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I3
S1 S2
I3
S1 S2
I4
CURRENT
CT1
CT1
L
O
A
D
CT2
CT3
A1 A2 GND
AUX SUPPLY
CURRENT
S1 S2
I2
12-24-48VDC
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
AUX SUPPLY
V1 V2 V3 V4 VN
L
O
A
D
CT2
12-24-48VDC
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
12-24-48VDC
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
V1 V2 V3 V4 VN
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
A1 A2 GND
S1 S2
I4
L
O
A
D
AUX SUPPLY
V1 V2 V3 V4 VN
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
S1 S2
I4
CURRENT
CURRENT
23
CT1
CT3
12-24-48VDC
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
L
O
A
D
Two phase with neutral. Measurement of

neutral current and neutral-earth voltage
CT1
CT2
CT4
N
12-24-48VDC
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
A1 A2 GND
V1 V2 V3 VN
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
CT1
L
O
A
D
L
O
A
D
CT2
CT3
CT4
N
12-24-48VDC
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
S1 S2
I3
CURRENT
A1 A2 GND
For DMG 800 D048 only.
Three phase with neutral. Measurement of

neutral current and neutral-earth voltage
AUX SUPPLY
V1 V2 V3 V4 VN
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
CURRENT
S1 S2
I3
S1 S2
I4
A1 A2 GND
AUX SUPPLY
V1 V2 V3 V4 VN
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
S1 S2
I4
CURRENT
For DMG 900... D048 only.
23-37

Wiring diagrams
INSTRUMENTS
DMK 00 - DMK 00 R1
L
O
A
D
L
L
O
A
D
L
L/N
1.3
1.1
L/N
1.4
1.5
5A~
METER
METER
1.2
3.2 3.1 3.3
1.1
1.3
3.2 3.1 3.3
1.3
600V~
1.1
1.1
1.4
1.5
1.6
METER
1.1
1.2
DMK 04 - DMK 04 R1
Single phase
L1
L2
L3
N
Three phase
L1
L2
L3
N
L
O
A
D
1.4
1.3
1.2
220...240VAC
L
O
A
D
1.3
1.5 1.6
1.4
600V~
45/65Hz
1.2
1.3
1.6
5A~
METER
1.4
1.1
1.2
5A~
METER
1.1
3.2 3.1 3.3
220...240VAC
For DMK 03 R1 only
1.5 1.6
600V~
5A~
METER
3.2 3.1 3.3
220...240VAC
1.5
L/N
220...240VAC
For DMK 01 R1 only
L
O
A
D
L/N
1.4
L
O
A
D
METER
DMK 03 - DMK 03 R1
L/N
600V~
1.2
220...240VAC
For DMK 00 R1 only
Ammeter
L
O
A
D
1.6
600V~
220...240VAC
DMK 02
Voltmeter
DMK 01 - DMK 01 R1
1.2
3.2 3.1 3.3
220...240VAC
For DMK 04 R1 only
For DMK 04 R1 only
Input for other supply voltages on request.
DMK 10 - DMK 10 R1
L1
L2
L3
N
DMK 11 - DMK 11 R1
L
O
A
D
1.3
1.4
1.5
L1
L2
L3
N
1.3 1.4
1.6
L
O
A
D
1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
1.5 1.6
1.1
3.2 3.1 3.3
L1
L2
L3
N
2.3 2.4
L
O
A
D
1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
5A~
1.1
5A~
METER
3.2 3.1 3.3
1.2
220...240VAC
1.1
1.2
3.2 3.1 3.3
220...240VAC
For DMK 15 R1 only
For DMK 11 R1 only
2.3 2.4
2.1 2.2
600V~
METER
3.2 3.1 3.3
1.2
220...240VAC
For DMK 10 R1 only
2.1 2.2
600V~
METER
METER
DMK 16 - DMK 16 R1
L1
L2
L3
N
5A~
600V~
1.1
1.2
220...240VAC
DMK 15 - DMK 15 R1
L
O
A
D
For DMK 16 R1 only
DMK 80 - DMK 80 R1
DMK 81 - DMK 81 R1
L
O
A
D
L
L
O
A
D
L
L/N
L
A1
L/N
L/N
S1
5A~
METER
METER
A2
14 12 11
A1
A2
A1
A1
METER
A1
DMK 84 - DMK 84 R1
Single phase
L1
L2
L3
N
L1
L2
L3
N
600V~
1.3
A1
14 12 11
L1
L2
L3
N
DMK 71 - DMK 71 R1
L
O
A
D
A1
A2
220...240VAC
L3
14 12 11
1.1
I1
I2
I3 COM
5A~
METER
METER
14 12 11
A1
A2
220...240VAC
For DMK 70 R1 only
L1
L2
L3
N
L
O
A
D
L1 L2 L3 N
600V~
I1
I2
I3
COM
5A~
METER
14 12 11
For DMK 71 R1 only
A1
A2
220...240VAC
14
13
For DMK 75 R1 only
1.2
220...240VAC
For DMK 84 R1 only
DMK 75 - DMK 75 R1
L
O
A
D
600V~
23-38
L1
L2
L3
N
1.5 1.6
600V~
5A~
METER
A2
220...240VAC
For DMK 83 R1 only
L2
1.4
5A~
METER
DMK 70 - DMK 70 R1
L1
L
O
A
D
S1 S2
L/N
23
A2
Three phase
L
O
A
D
S2
220...240VAC
45/65Hz
A2
S1
5A~
A2
METER
220...240VAC
L/N
S2
220...240VAC
For DMK 81 R1 only
L/N
600V~
S1
L/N
METER
L
O
A
D
L/N
L/N
L
O
A
D
600V~
DMK 83 - DMK 83 R1
L/N
14 12 11
220...240VAC
For DMK 80 R1 only
Ammeter
L
O
A
D
S2
600V~
220...240VAC
DMK 82
Voltmeter
3.2 3.1 3.3
For DMK 84 R1 only

Wiring diagrams
MULTIMETERS DMK2...
Single phase
Two phase
L
O
A
D
CT1
L
N

CT1
L1
CT2
L2
CT1
L
O
A
D
L1
CT2
L2
L
O
A
D
CT3
L3
N
DMK 2... 208...240VAC

DMK 25 12...24VDC
DMK 2... 208...240VAC

DMK 25 12...24VDC
L1 L2 L3 N
AUX SUPPLY
I1
I2
I3
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
DMK 2... 208...240VAC

DMK 25 12...24VDC
L1 L2 L3 N
I1
I2
I3
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
AUX SUPPLY
AUX SUPPLY
L1 L2 L3 N
I1
I2
I3
CURRENT
VOLTAGE

CT1
L1
CT1
L
O
A
D
CT2
L2
L3
CT3
L3
DMK 2... 208...240VAC

DMK 25 12...24VDC
DMK 2... 208...240VAC

DMK 25 12...24VDC
L1 L2 L3 N
I1
I2
I3
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
AUX SUPPLY
L
O
A
D
L1
L2
AUX SUPPLY
DMK3... - DMK40 - DMK6...

Single phase
L1 L2 L3 N
I1
I2
I3
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
Two phase
CT1
L
O
A
D

CT1
CT1
L
O
A
D
CT2
CT2
CT3
L
O
A
D
N
24...48VDC
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
24...48VDC
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
24...48VDC
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
+ GND
L1 L2 L3 N
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
+ GND
L1 L2 L3 N
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I3
CURRENT
DMK 3... - DMK 40
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
+ GND
L1 L2 L3 N
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
CURRENT
CURRENT
DMK 3... - DMK 40
DMK 3... - DMK 40

CT1
CT1
L
O
A
D
CT2
CT3
L
O
A
D
24...48VDC
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
24...48VDC
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
+ GND
L1 L2 L3 N
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
+ GND
L1 L2 L3 N
AUX SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
For DMK 32 D048 only.
CURRENT
CURRENT
DMK 3... - DMK 40
DMK 3... - DMK 40
DMK5...
Single phase
Two phase
CT1
CT1
CT1
L1
L
O
A
D
L1
CT2
L
O
A
D
L2
-A1
+
A2
AUX SUPPLY
S1 S2
I1
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
S1 S2
I2
I3
-A1
CURRENT
CT3
L3
L
O
A
D
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
V1 V2 V3 VN
CT2
L2
N
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
L1
+
A2
AUX SUPPLY
V1 V2 V3 VN
S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
S1 S2
I2
I3
-A1
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
+
A2
AUX SUPPLY
V1 V2 V3 VN
S1 S2
I1
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
S1 S2
I2
I3
CURRENT
23

CT1
CT1
L1
L
O
A
D
CT2
L2
L3
-A1
+
A2
L2
CT3
L3
L
O
A
D
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
AUX SUPPLY
L1
V1 V2 V3 VN
S1 S2
I1
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
S1 S2
I2
I3
CURRENT
-A1
+
A2
AUX SUPPLY
V1 V2 V3 VN
S1 S2
I1
VOLTAGE
S1 S2
S1 S2
I2
I3
CURRENT
23-39

Single-phase energy meters
TYPE
DME M100...
DME D100 T1
DME D100 T1 A120
DME D100 T1 MID
DME D110 T1
DME D110 T1 A120
Single phase
mechanical
Single phase
digital
Single phase
digital
Single phase
MID certified
Monofase
digital
Monofase
digital
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Ue
Rated frequency
230VAC
220...240VAC
110...120VAC
230VAC
220...240VAC
110...120VAC
184...264VAC
187...264VAC
93...132VAC
187...264VAC
187...264VAC
93...132VAC
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
60Hz
50Hz
50/60Hz
60Hz
Maximum power consumption

<7VA
7VA
0.45W
CURRENT
IEC maximum current Imax
32A
40A
IEC minimum current Imin
0.25A
IEC rated current Iref/Ib
5A
5A
IEC start current Ist
20mA
20mA
Transition current Itr
0.5A
ACCURACY
Active energy (per IEC/EN 62053-21)
Class 1
Class B (per EN 50470-3)
Class 1
Class 1
OUTPUTS
LED rate
640 flashes/kWh
1000 flashes/kWh
Pulse rate
640 pulses/kWh
(Vce=35VImax=20mA)
DME M...T1 only
1000 pulses/kWh
30ms
Pulse duration
STATIC OUTPUTS
Pulse rate
10 pulses/kWh
1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh
programmable
Pulse duration
100ms
External voltage
10...30VDC
Maximum current
50mA
INSULATION
250VAC
6kV
4kV
SUPPLY/MEASUREMENT CONNECTION CIRCUIT

Type of terminals
Fixed
Fixed
Conductor section min - max
2.5-6mm2
1.5-10mm2 (16-6 AWG)
1.2Nm
1.5Nm (14lbin)
PULSE OUTPUT CONNECTION

Type of terminals
Fixed
Fixed
1-1.5mm2
for DME M100 T1
only
0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG)
0.6Nm
0.8Nm (7lbin)
-25...+55C
-25...+55C
Storage temperature
-30...+80C
-25...+70C
Relative humidity
<80%
Overvoltage category
III
Mechanical environment
Class M1
Magnetic environment
Class E1
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
HOUSING
23
Material
23-40
Polyamide
Polyamide

Single-phase energy meters
DME D110 T1 MID
DME D115 T1
DME D120 T1
DME D120 T1 A120
DME D120 T1 MID
DME D121
DME D130
Single phase
MID certified
Single phase
digital
Single phase
digital
Single phase
RS485
Single phase
MID certified
Single phase
RS485
Single phase
expandable
230VAC
220...240VAC
220...240VAC
110...120VAC
230VAC
220...240VAC
220...240VAC
187...264VAC
187...264VAC
187...264VAC
93...132VAC
187...264VAC
187...264VAC
187...264VAC
50Hz
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
60Hz
50Hz
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
7VA
7VA
4.8VA
0.45W
0.45W
1.4W
40A
63A
63A
0.25A
0.5A
0.5A
5A
10A
10A
20mA
40mA
40mA
0.5A
1A
1A
Class 1
Class 1
1000 flashes/kWh
1000 flashes/kWh
1000 flashes/kWh
1000 pulses/kWh
1000 pulses/kWh
1000 pulses/kWh
30ms
30ms
30ms
1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh
programmable
1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh
programmable
100ms
100ms
10...30VDC
10...30VDC
50mA
50mA
250VAC
250VAC
250VAC
6kV
6kV
6kV
4kV
4kV
4kV
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
1.5-10mm2 (16-6 AWG)
2.5...16mm2 (14...6AWG stranded;

14...10AWG solid)
2.5...16mm2 (14...6AWG stranded;

14...10AWG solid)
1.5Nm (14lbin)
2Nm (26.5lbin)
2Nm (26.5lbin)
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG)
0.5-4mm2 (20-11AWG)
0.5-4mm2 (20-11AWG)
0.8Nm (7lbin)
1.3Nm (12.1lbin)
1.3Nm (12.1lbin)
-25...+55C
-25...+55C
-25...+55C
-25...+70C
-25...+70C
-25...+70C
<80%
<80%
<80%
III
III
III
Class M1
Class M1
Class E1
Class E1
Polyamide
Polyamide
Polyamide
23
23-41

Three-phase energy meters
TYPE
DME D300 T2
DME D300 T2 MID / F
DME D310 T2
DME D310 T2 MID / F
DME D320
3 phase with neutral
3 phase with neutral

MID certified
3 phase c/w and

w/o neutral
3 phase c/w and

w/o neutral MID certified
3 phase c/w and

w/o neutral
230VAC phase-neutral
400VAC phase-phase
100-240VAC
110-250VDC
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Ue
220-240VAC phase-neutral 230VAC phase-neutral 220-240VAC phase-neutral

380-415VAC phase-phase 400VAC phase-phase 380-415VAC phase-phase
Voltage range
Rated frequency
323-456VAC phase-phase
50/60Hz
50Hz
85-264VAC
93.5-300VDC
50/60Hz
50Hz
45...66Hz
20VA
2.1VA
4.5VA
1.35W
0.8W
1.7W
CURRENT
IEC maximum current Imax
63A
5A
5A
IEC minimum current Imin
0.5A
0.05A
0.01A
IEC rated current Iref/Ib

IEC start current Ist
IEC transition current It
10A
5A
40mA
0.01A
1A
0.25A
ACCURACY
Active energy (per IEC/EN 62053-21)
Class 1
Class B (EN50470-3)
Class 1
Class B (EN50470-3)
Class 1
TARIFF CIRCUIT INPUT

Rated voltage Uc
100-240VAC
100-240VAC
Voltage range
85-264VAC
85-264VAC
Frequency
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
0.25VA
0.25VA
0.18W
0.18W
LED rate
1000 flashes/kWh
10000 flashes/kWh
Pulse rate
1000 pulses/kWh
10000 pulses/kWh
30ms
30ms
OUTPUTS
Pulse duration
STATIC OUTPUTS
Programmable 1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh
Programmable 0.1-1-10-100 pulses/kWh
Pulse duration
100ms for 1-10-100 pulse rates;

60ms for 1000 pulse rate
100ms
External voltage
10-30VDC
10-30VDC
Pulse rate
Maximum current
50mA
INSULATION
250VAC
250VAC
690VAC
6kV
6kV
9.5kV
4kV
4kV
5.2kV
SUPPLY/MEASURMENT CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS

Type of terminals
Fixed
Fixed
2.5-16mm2 (16-6 AWG)
0.2-4mm2 (24-12 AWG) for supply/voltage measurement;

0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG) for current measurement
2Nm (14lbin)
0.8Nm (7lbin)
TARIFF CONTROL CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS

Type of terminals
Fixed
Fixed
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG)
0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG)
0.49Nm (4.4lbin)
0.8Nm (7lbin)
PULSE OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

Fixed
Fixed
0.2-1.3mm2 (24-16AWG)
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG)
0.15Nm (1.7lbin)
0.44Nm (4lbin)
-25...+55C
-25...+55C
-20...+60C
Storage temperature
-25...+70C
-25...+70C
-30...+80C
<80% non condensing
<80% non condensing
<90%
Overvoltage capacity
III
III
III
Type of terminals
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
23
Relative humidity
Mechanical environment
Class M1
Class M1
Magnetic environment
Class E1
Class E1
HOUSING
Material
23-42
Polyamide
Polyamide

Data concentrator
TYPE
DME CD
DME CD PV1
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Us
100-240VAC/110-250VDC
Operating range
85-264VAC/93.5-300VDC
Rated frequency
50/60Hz
8.8VA
3.6W
ENERGY METER INPUTS

Number of inputs
Input separation
2 for 4 pairs (insulated between each pair 500VRMS)
Type of input
Maximum voltage at inputs
Maximum input current
High input signal
Low input signal
Maximum frequency
Negative (NPN)
15VDC
18mA (15mA typical)
7.6V
2V
2000Hz
TARIFF CONTROL CIRCUIT

Rated voltage Uc
Voltage range
100-240VAC/110VDC
85-264VAC/93.5-140VDC
Frequency
50/60Hz
0.25VA
0.18W
RS485 SERIAL INTERFACE

Baud rate
Programmable 1200-38400bps
Insulation
1500VAC towards energy meter inputs. Double insulation towards supply and tariff inputs
INSULATION
250VAC
6.5kV
3.6kV
SUPPLY CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS

Type of terminals
Fixed
0.2-4mm2 (24-12 AWG)
0.8Nm (7lbin)
TARIFF INPUT CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS

Type of terminals
Fixed
0.2-4mm2 (24-12 AWG)
0.8Nm (7lbin)
RS485 CONNECTION
Type of terminals
Fixed
0.2-4mm2 (24-12 AWG)
0.8Nm (7lbin)
ENERGY METER INPUT CONNECTIONS

Type of terminals
Fixed
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG)
0.44Nm (4lbin)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-20...+60C
Storage temperature
-30...+80C
Relative humidity
<90%
Overvoltage capacity
III
HOUSING
Material
23
Polyamide
23-43

LCD multimeters and power analyzers
TYPE
DMG 200
DMG 210
DMG 300
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Us
100-240VAC /
110-250VDC
Voltage range
85-264VAC /
93.5-300VDC
Frequency range
45-66Hz
3.5VA
4.5VA
4.2VA
1.2W
1.7W
1.3W
Microbreaking immunity
50ms
50ms
50ms
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Type of input
Three phase + neutral
Maximum rated voltage Ue
690VAC phase-phase (400VAC phase-neutral)
Measurement range
20-830VAC phase-phase (10-480VAC phase-neutral)
Frequency range
45-66Hz
Method of measurement
True RMS
Method of connection
Single, two, three phase with or without neutral, balanced three phase systems
CURRENT INPUTS
Rated current Ie
Measurement range
Method of measurement
Overload capacity
Overload peak
5A
5A
1A / 5A
0.01-6A
0.01-6A
0.01-1.2A / 0.01-6A
True RMS
+20% Ie through external CT with 5A secondary
50A for 1s
INSULATION
690VAC
9.5kV
5.2kV
SUPPLY CIRCUIT/VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT CONNECTIONS

Type of terminal
Fixed
0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12 AWG)
0.8Nm (7lbin)
CURRENT MEASUREMENT CIRCUIT AND RS485 CONNECTIONS

Type of terminal
Fixed
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG)
0.44Nm (4lbin)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-20...+60C
Storage temperature
-30...+80C
Relative humidity
<90%
Measurement class
III
Overload capacity
III
HOUSING
Material

RS485 communication port for DMG 210 and DMG 900T only.
For DMG 800 D048, DMG 900 D048 and DMG 900T D048 only.
23
23-44
Polyamide

LCD multimeters and power analyzers
DMG 600
DMG 610
DMG 700
DMG 800
100-400VAC
120-250VDC
100-440VAC /
110-250VDC - (12-48VDC)
100-400VAC
120-250VDC
90-484VAC /
93.5-300VDC - (9-70VDC)
45-65Hz
45-66Hz
9.5VA
3.9VA
3.5W
3.4W
50ms
50ms
600VACL-L (300VAC L-N)
690VAC L-L (400VAC L-N)
50-720VAC L-L (30-360 L-N)
DMG 900 T
DMG 900
20-830VAC L-L (10-480VAC L-N)
45-66Hz
45-66Hz
45-66Hz e 360-440Hz
True RMS
True RMS
Single, two, three phase c/w or w/o neutral
Single, two, three phase with or without neutral, balanced three phase systems
5A
5A
1A/5A
1A/5A
0.01-6A
0.01-6A
0.01-1.2A / 0.01-6A
0.002-1.2A / 0,01-10A
True RMS
True RMS
+20% Ie by external CT with 5A secondary
50A for 1s
600VAC
690VAC
9.5kV
9.5kV
5.2kV
5.2kV
Removable / Plug-in
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG)
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
Fixed
Fixed
0.2-1,5mm2 (24-12 AWG)
0.5-4mm2 (26-10 AWG); 0.2-1.5mm2 (24-12 AWG) for RS485
0.8Nm (7lbin)
0.8Nm (7lbin)
-20...+60C
-30...+80C
<90%
2
III
III
Polyamide
23
23-45

Measuring instruments
TYPE
DMK 00 - DMK 00 R1
DMK 80 - DMK 80 R1
DMK 01 - DMK 01 R1
DMK 81 - DMK 81 R1
DMK 02
DMK 82
DMK 03 - DMK 03 R1
DMK 83 - DMK 83 R1
DMK 04 - DMK 04 R1
DMK 84 - DMK 84 R1
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Us
24VAC
110-127VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
0.85-1.1 Us
Rated frequency
50-60Hz 10%
3.3VA (DMK...)
3.6VA (DMK... R1)
3.3VA
3.3VA (DMK...)
3.6VA (DMK... R1)
1.5W (DMK...)
1.8W (DMK... R1)
1.5W
1.5W (DMK...)
1.8W (DMK... R1)
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Rated voltage Ue
Operating voltage range, phase-phase
Rated frequency
Method of measuring
600VAC
600VAC
15-660VAC
15-660VAC
600VAC
15-660VAC (DMK...)
25-660VAC (DMK... R1)
50-60Hz 10%
50-60Hz 10%
50-60Hz 10%
TRMS
TRMS
TRMS
CURRENT INPUTS
Rated current Ie
5A
5A
Measuring range
0.05-5.75A
0.05-5.75A (DMK...)
0.1-5.75A (DMK... R1)
Rated frequency
50-60Hz 10%
50-60Hz 10%
Type of input
Shunts connected by
external low voltage CT 5A max
Shunts connected by
external low voltage CT
5A max
Type of measuring
TRMS
TRMS
Overload capacity
+20% Ie
+20% Ie
FREQUENCY INPUTS
Measuring range and type
15-65Hz 10% TRMS
Voltage range
15-660VAC
Input rated voltage
600VAC
1 1 digit
0.25% f.s. 1 digit
0.25% f.s. 1 digit
1 digit
MEASURING ACCURACY
Measurement conditions
cos
(Temperature +23C 1C) voltage
(Relative humidity
current
45 15% R.H.)
frequency
0.5% f.s. 1 digit
ADDITIONAL ERRORS
Relative humidity
1 digit 60-90% R.H..
Temperature
1 digit -20...+60C
RELAY OUTPUT FOR DMK... R1 TYPES ONLY

Number and tyoe of contact
1 changeover (SPDT)
Rated voltage
250VAC

designation
8A 250VAC in AC1 / B300

105
Electrical life
30x106
Mechanical life
INSULATION
600VAC
415VAC
600VAC
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals
23

Fixed (DMK 8...);

Removable (DMK 0...)
0.8Nm (7lbin) for DMK 0... / 0.5Nm (4.5lbin for DMK 8...)
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG) for DMK 0...
0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12 AWG) for DMK 8...
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-20...+60C
Storage temperature
-30...+80C
HOUSING
Material

On specific request.
23-46
Thermoplastic (DMK 0...) / Polyamide (DMK 8...)

Measuring instruments
TYPE
DMK 10 - DMK 10 R1
DMK 70 - DMK 70 R1
DMK 11 - DMK 11 R1
DMK 71 - DMK 71 R1
DMK 15 - DMK 15 R1
DMK 75 - DMK 75 R1
DMK 16
DMK 16 R1
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Us
24VAC
110-127VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
0.85-1.1 Us
Rated frequency
50-60Hz 10%
3.3VA (DMK...)
3.6VA (DMK... R1)
3.3VA (DMK...)
3.6VA (DMK... R1)
3.3VA (DMK...)
3.6VA (DMK... R1)
3.6VA (DMK...)
3.9VA (DMK... R1)
1.5W (DMK...)
1.8W (DMK... R1)
1.5W (DMK...)
1.8W (DMK... R1)
1.5W (DMK...)
1.8W (DMK... R1)
1.8W (DMK...)
2.1W (DMK... R1)
600VAC
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Rated voltage Ue
phase-phase
600VAC
600VAC
phase-neutral
347VAC
347VAC
347VAC
phase-phase
15-660VAC
35-660VAC
35-660VAC
phase-neutral
Frequency range
Method of measuring
10-382VAC
20-382VAC
20-382VAC
50-60Hz 10%
50-60Hz 10%
50-60Hz 10%
TRMS
TRMS
TRMS
CURRENT INPUTS
Rated current Ie
5A
5A
5A
Measuring range
0.05-6A
0.05-5.75A
0.05-5.75A
50-60Hz 10%
50-60Hz 10%
50-60Hz 10%
Frequency range
Type of input
Type of measuring
TRMS
TRMS
TRMS
Overload capacity
+20% Ie
+20% Ie
+20% Ie
0.25% f.s. 1 digit
0.25% f.s. 1 digit
0.25% f.s. 1 digit
0.5% f.s. 1 digit
0.5% f.s. 1 digit
0.5% f.s. 1 digit
1% f.s. 1 digit
1% f.s. 1 digit
energy
Classe 2
frequency
1 digit
1 digit
1 changeover (SPDT)
1 changeover (SPDT)
1 changeover (SPDT)
1 changeover (SPDT)
250VAC
250VAC
250VAC
250VAC
AC1 8A 250VAC / B300
AC1 8A 250VAC / B300
AC1 8A 250VAC / B300
AC1 8A 250VAC / B300
Shunts connected by
external low voltage CT 5A max
MEASURING ACCURACY
(Temperature +23C 1C) voltage
(Relative humidity
current
45 15% R.H.)
power
RELAY OUTPUT FOR DMK... R1 TYPES ONLY

Number and type of contact
Rated voltage
Electrical life
Mechanical life
105
105
105
105
30x106
30x106
30x106
30x106
600VAC
415VAC
600VAC
600VAC
INSULATION
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals
Removable (DMK 1...); Fixed (DMK 7...)
0.5Nm (4.5lbin) for DMK 0...; 0.8Nm (7lbin) for DMK 7...
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG) for DMK 0...

0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12 AWG) for DMK 7...
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-20...+60C
Storage temperature
-30...+80C
HOUSING
Material

Polyamide (DMK 7...) / Thermoplastic (DMK 1...)
On specific request.
One N/O (SPST) contact for DMK 75 R1.
23
23-47

Multimeters
TYPE
DMK 20 - DMK 21 - DMK 22
DMK 25
Rated supply voltage Us
208-240VAC
12-24VDC from battery

177-264VAC for DMK 21 - DMK 22
9-32VDC
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Frequency
45...65Hz
5.5VA (Us=240V) for DMK 20 - DMK 21

6VA (Us=240) for DMK 22
1.1W maximum
2.5W (Us=240V) for DMK 20 - DMK 21

2.8W (Us=240) for DMK 22
1.1W maximum
20ms
500ms
Immunity time of microbreakings

VOLTAGE INPUTS
690VAC phase-phase
(400VAC phase-neutral)
60-830V phase-phase
(30-480VAC phase-neutral)
Frequency range
45-65Hz
Method of measuring
True RMS value
Measuring input impedance
>1.1M phase-phase and >570k phase-neutral
Method of connections
Single phase, two-phase, three-phase

or balanced three-phase system
Measuring error
0.25% full scale 1digit (Class 0.5)
CURRENT INPUTS
Rated current Ie
Standard 5A (1A on request)
Measuring range
0.05...6A
Method of measuring
True RMS value

Overload capacity
Overload peak
50A for 1s
Dynamic peak
125A for 10ms
Power consumption
<0.6W per phase
Measuring error
Class 0.5 0.25% f.s. 1digit
MEASURING ACCURACY
(Temperature +23C 1C
Humidity 45 15% R.H.)
voltage
Class 0.5 0.35% f.s. (830V)
current
Class 0.5 0.5% f.s. (6A)
active energy
Class 2
frequency
harmonic distorsion
OUTPUTS
Relay
Static
INSULATION
690V
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals
Removable
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-20...+60C
Storage temperature
-30...+80C
Relative humidity
MAximum pollution degree
<90%
2
HOUSING
23
Material

For DMK 32D 048 only.
23-48
Self-extinguishing black plastic

Multimeters
DMK 30 - DMK 31 - DMK 32
DMK 40
DMK 50 - DMK 51 - DMK 52
DMK 60 - DMK 61 - DMK 62
24-48VDC/100-240VAC/110-250VDC
208-240VAC
100-240VAC/110-250VDC
18-70VDC
85-265VAC/93.5-300VDC

177-264VAC for DMK 51 - DMK 52
85-265VAC/93.5-300VDC
45-450Hz
45-65Hz
45-450Hz
10VA/4W
5.5VA (Us=240V) for DMK 50 - DMK 51

6VA (Us=240) for DMK 52
10VA/4W
2.5W (Us=240V) for DMK 50 - DMK 51

2.8W (Us=240) for DMK 52
3W for DMK 60
4W for DMK 61 - DMK 62
3W (DMK 30)
4W (DMK 31 - DMK 32)
4W
20ms
690VAC phase-phase (400VAC phase-neutral)

20-830V phase-phase
60-830V phase-phase
20-830V phase-phase
45...65Hz
True RMS value
>1.1M phase-phase and >570k phase-neutral
systems with or without neutral

or balanced three-phase system

systems with or without neutral
Class 0.5 0.25% full scale 1digit

standard 5A (1A on request)
0.02-6A
0.05-6A
0.02-6A
True RMS value

50A for 1s
125A for 10ms
<0.3VA
<0.6W per phase
<0.3VA
Class 0.5 0.25% full scale 1digit

0.25% f.s. (830V)
0.35% f.s. (6A)
Class 0.5 0.35% f.s. (830V)

Class 0.5 0.5% f.s. (6A)
0.25% f.s. (830V)

0.35% f.s. (6A)
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1
1 digit
1 digit
1 digit
1 digit
5A - 250VAC in AC1 for DMK 31 - DMK 32
5A - 250VAC in AC1 for DMK 61 - DMK 62
55mA - 60VAC/DC in AC1

for DMK 31 - DMK 32
55mA - 60VAC/DC in AC1

for DMK 61 - DMK 62
690V
Removable
Fixed
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
0.45Nm (4lbin)
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG)
0.2-1.5mm2 (24-16 AWG)

-20...+60C
-30...+80C
<90%
2
Self-extinguishing black plastic
Self-extinguishing grey plastic
23
23-49
Page 24-6
DCRM SERIES
2 steps in modular housing
Settings by front adjustment
potentiometers
3 LED indications.
Page 24-7
DCRL SERIES (EXPANDABLE
3 or 5 steps in 96x96mm housing
expandable up to 7 steps maximum
Expandable with EXP series modules,
such as outputs, step increment,
communication port, etc.
Backlight graphic display, 128x80 pixels
Optic interface port for programming,
data download and diagnostics
Independent voltage measurement input
Capacitor overload protection
Internal panel temperature sensor
Voltage and current harmonic-content
measurement up to 15 order
Configurable alarms
Suitable for medium-voltage installations
Compact and easy installation.
Page 24-8
DCRG SERIES (EXPANDABLE)
8, 10, 12, 14 or 16 steps in 144x144mm housing
Expandable with EXP series modules such as
inputs and outputs, step increment, capacitor
protection, communication port, etc.
Backlight graphic display, 128x80 pixels
Optic interface port for programming, data
download and diagnostics
Independent voltage measurement input
Capacitor overload protection
Internal and external panel temperature sensor
Voltage and current harmonic-content
measurement up to 31 order
Event logging
Configurable alarms
Suitable for medium-voltage installations
Suitable for dynamic power factor correction.
Page 24-11
THYRISTOR MODULES
30, 50, 100kvar step units
Suitable for dynamic power factor
correction
Current flow zero-crossing controlled
connection-disconnection
Over-temperature protection
Over-current protection at capacitor
switching.
AUTOMATIC
24
POWER FACTOR CONTROLLERS

AND THYRISTOR MODULES
Microprocessor supervision and

control
Accurate TRMS measurement
circuit
Automatic intelligent adjustment
system
Versions with 3, 5, 7, 8, 12,
14 and 16 steps
Versions with static outputs
Use in co-generation and
medium-voltage systems
USB, serial, Ethernet
communication interfaces
ASCII and Modbus-RTU
Thyristor modules for dynamic
correction.
Reactive current controller

DCRM series .....................................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
24 - 6
Automatic power factor controllers

DCRL series ......................................................................................................................................................................
DCRG series .....................................................................................................................................................................
Software and accessories ................................................................................................................................................
Communication devices ..................................................................................................................................................
24
24
24
24
7
8
8
10
Thyristors modules......................................................................................................... 24 - 11
E NERGY M ANAGEMENT
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 24 - 12
Wiring schemes ............................................................................................................ 24 - 13
Automatic power factor controllers and thyristor modules

controllers
Number of steps
DCRL
DCRG
DCRL 3: 3 (5 with EXP10 06)

DCRL 5: 5 (7 with EXP10 06)
8
(10, 12, 14, 16 with EXP...)
ON FRONT / HOUSING
Display
Backlight icon LCD
Backlight graphic 128x80 pixel LCD
Languages
6
Scrolling text only of alarm codes
in Italian, English, Spanish, French,
German, Portuguese
10
German, Czech, Polish, Russian,
Portuguese and 1 customisable
Dimensions
96x96mm / 3.8x3.8
144x44mm / 5.7x5.7
IP54
IP54
Automatic recognition of current flow direction
4-quadrant operation

Expandable with EXP module
CONTROL/FUNCTIONS
Independent auxiliary supply input

1 (by CT, /5A or 1A)

Independent power factor correction per phase

Phase-neutral connection in three-phase systems
3 (by CTs, 5A or 1A)

(with EXP10 01 8 steps)
Dynamic (FAST) power factor correction usage

Medium-voltage usage

Three-phase voltage control

Current input

Master-slave architecture

(with EXP10 04 module)
Programmable input as function or

external temperature sensor
USB communication interface
RS232 communication interface
Opto-isolated RS485 communication interface

Ethernet communication interface with web server function

Optical USB communication port on front
(with CX 01 dongle)
(with CX 01 dongle)
Optical Wi-Fi communication port on front
(with CX 02 dongle)
(with CX 02 dongle)
Fast setting of current transformer
Setup software with automatic panel test available
Remote control software available
Calendar-clock (RTC) with backup reserve energy
Event logging: Alarms, setup changes, etc.
MEASUREMENTS
Rated measurement voltage
600VAC max
600VAC max
Measurement voltage range
50-720VAC
50-720VAC
Instantaneous cos (power factor displacement)
Instantaneous and average weekly power factor values
Voltage and current
Reactve power to reach set-point and total values
Capacitor overload
Electric panel temperature
Maximum voltage and current value
Maximum capacitor overload value
Maximum panel temperature value
Active and apparent power value
24

Maximum capaitor temperature value

up to 15 order
up to 31 order
Var-measured value per step
Number of switching per step
Current and voltage harmonic analysis
24-2
Automatic power factor controllers and thryristor modules

controllers
DCRL
DCRG
Voltage too high and too low
Current too high and too low
Over compensation (all capacitors disconnected and cos

value higher than set-point)
Under compensation (all capacitors connected and cos

value lower than set-point)
Capacitor overload
PROTECTION

Capacitor overload on all 3 phases

Over temperature
Mains micro-breakings
Capacitor bank failure
Over maximum harmonic distortion level limit
Programmable alarm property

(enable, trip delay, relay energising, etc.)
L1
L2
L3
Automatic
power factor
controllers
Fuse holders
Fuse
holders
Contactors
Switch
disconnectors
24
24-3

DCRG series
THE
SOLUTION FOR ALL APPLICATIONS!

OPTICAL COMMUNICATION PORT
The optical port on the front using a standard USB or
Wi-Fi point, permits to communicate with a PC,
smartphone and tablet, to carry out programming,
diagnostics, and data download without removing power
to the electric panel.
BACKLIGHT
GRAPHIC DISPLAY
128x80 pixels with excellent
legibility, with adjustable
brightness and contrast.
CUSTOMISING OPTION
There is a customising slot available on the panel front
to show controller brand name, logo, trademark, part
number, brief indication or wording, etc.
COMPACT SIZE
FIXING SYSTEM
EXPANDABILITY
44mm
MAX
4
9mm
Trim frame profile and reduced

total depth simplify installation of
the controller also in very compact
electric panels.
HIGH PROTECTION DEGREE

The controller front and the rear
seal have been designed to warrant
an IP54 protection degree.
44
64.5
144
137
24
73
EXP 10...
24-4
The fixing system with metal

screws guarantees excellent
adhesion over time.
Basic controller functionality can be easily extended using the EXP series
expansion modules:
- Relay outputs to increase the number of steps
- Opto-isolated static outputs also for synamic correction
- Capacitor protection
- Digital and analog inputs and outputs
- Opto-isolated RS232 interface
- Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with web server function
- Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface
- GPRS/GSM modem.
Automatic power factor controllers and thryristor modules

DCRG series
SUITABLE FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

USING CONTACTORS OR THYRISTOR MODULES
SMS SENDING FOR ALARM CONDITIONS
DATA SENDING BY EMAIL OR FTP SERVER
WEB SERVER FOR DATA READING
STREAMLINE DESIGN
The DCRG controller has an ergonomic design and, at the same time,
particular care has been given to details.
MASTER-SLAVE FUNCTION
The DCRG controller can control the
outputs of other analog controllers in
addition to its own steps. In this way,
it offers a master-slave architecture.
Up to 8 slaves can be controlled to
obtain a system with a total of 32
steps.
WEB SERVER FUNCTION
By installing the Ethernet expansion

module EXP10 13, the main
measured values of the controller
can be viewed by most common
web-client compatibles, on the
market, using Java platform and
with no need to install any
additional PC software.
Master
Slave 1
CAPACITOR PROTECTION
By adding the apposite EXP10 16
expansion module, the DCRG
controller can be equipped with
additional capacitor protection
functions. The module can measure
the harmonic current values and the
capacitor temperature on-site along
with detecting any phase
malfunction.
THREE CURRENT INPUTS

- Independent power factor
correction of each step can be
done.
- Analysis of all electrical
parameters of the installation by a
multimeter.
Slave 2
GSM/GPRS MODEM
By fitting the EXP10 15 expansion
module, the controller is
automatically equipped and
configures a GSM/GPRS modem.
This simplifies installation and
wiring.
Once a data-enabled SIM card is
inserted, alarm or event SMS,
email messages and latest logged
data can be transmitted by the
controller to FTP servers.
5A AND 1A BOTH ON THE SAME

CONTROLLER
By configuring an apposite
parameter, the controller can be
enabled for use with either a 5A or
1A secondary current transformer.
GRAPHS AND TEXT IN 10

LANGUAGES
SUITABLE FOR MEDIUM-VOLTAGE

SYSTEMS
The controllers can be installed in
medium-voltage systems thanks to
its configuration for voltage
transformer ratio, thereby obtaining
measurements with regards to the
transformer primary value both for
the correction adjustment and the
display readouts.
SUITABLE FOR DYNAMIC (FAST)
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
With the EXP10 01 static output
expansion module installed, the
controller can be used in dynamic
power factor correction systems
where the reactive load quickly
varies over time.
Also taking advantage of the built-in
controller relay outputs, a mixed
system of traditional relay and
dynamic type of correction steps
can be obtained.
Viewing of waveforms, text, trend

and bar graphs in 10 languages:
German, Czech, Polish, Russian,
Portuguese and one customisable.
24
WIDE RANGE OF RATED VOLTAGE

MEASUREMENTS
The wide measurement range
between 100 to 690VAC allows
using the controller in most types
of applications.
Slave 8
24-5

Reactive current controller
DCRM series
Order code
Steps
Auxiliary supply Qty

voltage
per
pkg
Wt
[V]
[kg]
0.166
Single and three-phase low-voltage systems.

DCRM 2
380-415VAC
DCRM2 permits to control the reactive current of a plant,
eliminating it from the total current drawn from the
mains and correcting the cos-phi of the load to the best
possible value.
It can control the connection of two capacitor banks
maximum. Each one of the two banks can be individually
enabled and its power can be set through a dedicated
potentiometer.
It is also possible to adjust the time for connection and
disconnection of the capacitor banks, thereby modifying
the reaction speed of the system.
The controller can be used both in single-phase and
three-phase wiring.
Auxiliary supply voltage: 380-415VAC standard stock;
220-240VAC and 440-480VAC on request
Rated frequency: 50/60Hz
Voltage measurement input range: 80-528VAC
50/60Hz 1% self configurable
Current input:
By CT /5A
Measurement range: 0.1-6A
Automatic identification of CT polarity connection
(direct-reverse)
Relay outputs
2 outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
rated 8A-250VAC (in AC1 IEC) / B300
Independent enabling of each
terminals.
DCRM 2
ADJUSTMENTS
C/K Step 1
C/K Step 2
Connection delay
Disconnection delay
System configuration
C/K ratio threshold for step 1

OFF/0.15-2
C/K ratio threshold for step 2
OFF/0.15-2
Step connection delay 1-60s
Step disconnection delay
1-60s
Wiring selection for single or
three-phase system 1PH-3PH.
INDICATIONS
1 green LED for power on and inhibition time
2 red LEDs for step connection.
Certifications obained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (File E93601), as Auxliary Devices-Modular
ampere monitoring relays (with 415VAC maximum only).
IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n14.
Contactors for power factor correction
24
24-6
Dimensions
page 24-12
Wiring diagrams
page 24-13
page 24-15

DCRL series
Order code
Steps
Flush-mount
housing
size
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[mm/in]
[kg]
Single and three-phase low and medium-voltage systems.

DCRL 3
96x96/3.8x3.8 1
0.300
DCRL 5
96x96/3.8x3.8 1
0.350
Accessory.
EXP80 00
Plastic insert for fixing

customised labels
Order code
Description
10
0.050
DCRL 3 - DCRL 5
EXPANSION MODULES
Snap in fixing of only one module on DCRL rear.
Inputs and outputs.
EXP80 00
EXP10 06
2 relay outputs to increase number of

capacitor steps
EXP10 03
EXP10 10
EXP10 11
EXP10 12
EXP expansion module fixing

DCRL 3 - DCRL 5
EXP 10...
MAX
1
Backlight icon LDC screen

Inductive /
Capacitive
Automatic
mode
Cooling fan
status
Output status
Manual mode
Step status
Main display
Active alarm
conditions
Bar graph
DCRL series has been developed with advanced
functionality and made with a dedicated ultra compact
housing. It combines modern front design with mounting
and expandability ease. The LCD screen provides a clear
and intuitive user interface.
Backlight icon LCD with excellent information viewing
Alarm codes with scrolling tests, programmable in 6
languages (Italian, English, Spanish, French, German
and Portuguese)
Connection in single or three phase lines and
co-generation systems with 4-quadrant operation
Independent voltage measurement input which can be
used in medium-voltage lines with VTs
Extreme reduction of the number of switching
operations
Balanced use of steps with same power rating
Reactive power measurement per step installed
Capacitor over-current protection
Panel over-temperature protection by internal sensor
Accurate no-voltage release protection
Extensive choice of available measurements, including
voltage and current THD with single harmonic analysis
up to 15 order.
Wide voltage measurement range
High accuracy measurement (TRMS)
Front optical USB (with CX01 dongle) or Wi-Fi (with
CX02 dongle) communication port for PC, smartphone
and tablet connection
DCRJ SW setup software
Compatible with
Front label customising facility.
Voltage circuit:
Auxiliary supply: 100-440VAC
Frequency: 50/60Hz 10%
Voltage input:
Rated voltage: 600VAC L-L (346VAC L-N)
Frequency range: 45-65Hz
Current input:
Single phase connection
Rated current: 1A or 5A configurable
Measurement and control
Power factor adjustment: 0.5 ind to 0.5 cap
Voltage measurement range: 50-720VAC L-L;
50-415VAC L-N
Current measurement range: 0.025-1.2A for 1A full
scale; 0.025-6A for 5A full scale
Type of voltage and current measurement: TRMS
Relay outputs (steps)
DCRL3: 3 outputs
DCRL5: 5 outputs
Output arrangement: Normally Open (NO / SPST)
contact; except the last being a changeover (SPDT)
Rated capacity: 5A 250VAC (UL/CSA B300 general
use)
Flush-mount housing: 96x96mm/3.8x3.8
terminals.
Certifications and compliance:
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listing for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices Power factor controllers.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n14.
Secondary display
Alphanumeric display

24
See Section 27.

pages 24-9 and 10
Expansion modules
page 28-2
Dimensions
page 24-12
Wiring diagrams
page 24-13
page 24-16
24-7

Serie DCRG
Order code
Steps Flush-mount
housing
size
Qty Wt
per
pkg
[mm(in)]
[kg]
Single and three-phase low and medium-voltage systems.

DCRG 8
144x144 (5.7x5.7)
0.980
NTC 01
External/remote temperature
1
sensor, with 3m/3.3yd long cable
0.150
Order code
Description
Accessories.
EXPANSION MODULES
Snap in fixing of 4 modules on DCRG 8 rear.
Inputs and outputs.
DCRG 8
EXP 10...
EXP10 06
2 relay outputs to increase number of

capacitor steps
EXP10 00
EXP10 01
4 opto-isolated static outputs to increase

number of static steps
EXP10 02

opto-isolated
EXP10 03
EXP10 04
2 opto-isolated analog inputs PT100 or

0/4-20mA or 0-10V or 05mA
EXP10 05

0-10V or 05mA
EXP10 08

EXP10 16
Capacitor bank protection with 2 temperature

measurement inputs for NTC 01 sensors
and 2 three phase current measurement
inputs
EXP10 10
EXP10 11
EXP10 12
EXP10 13
Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with web

server function
EXP10 14
Other functionality.
EXP10 15
GPRS/GSM modem without antenna
For configuration by software, consult Customer Service; see contact details

Maximum DCRG 8 expandability

DCRG 8
DCRG 8
Controller
EXP10 06
EXP10 01
2 relay-output 4 static-output
module
module
TOTAL
STEPS
N of steps N of modules N of modules Relay
MAX
4
Static
1 (2 steps)
10
1 (2 steps)
1 (4 steps)
10
2 (4 steps)
12
2 (4 steps)
1 (4 steps)
12
3 (6 steps)
14
4 (8 steps)
16
1 (4 steps)
2 (8 steps)
24
DCRG8 controller has been designed to satisfy technical
requirements of modern electrical installations in industry.
Main power factor controller characteristics include:
reliability, capability of working in all conditions and the
ability to detect critical operating conditions, all this to
protect the power factor correction system.
DCRG8 can to satisfy these requirements and with the
option to extend its own functionality by using EXP series
expansion modules. A standard-supplied USB optic port
is also available for controller programming, diagnostics
and data downloads.
User interface is easy thanks to the backlight graphic LCD
that contributes to excellent data reading even with bad
lighting conditions and to view information clearly and
comprehensively.
Main features are:
Backlight graphic 128x80 pixel LCD with text in 10
languages: Italian, English, Spanish, French, German,
Czech, Polish, Russian, Portuguese and 1 customisable
Automatic identification of direction of CT current flow
Connection to single and three-phase lines, threephase lines with neutral control and co-generation
systems with 4-quadrant operation
Use with medium-voltage lines by VTs
Capability to correctly operate also in systems having
high harmonic content
Extreme reduction of the number of switching operations
Balanced use of steps with same power rating
Reactive power measurement per step installed
Recording of the number of connections per step
Capacitor over-current protection on all three phases
Over-temperature protection by internal or remote
sensor
Accurate no-voltage release protection
Current and voltage harmonic analysis
Quick CT programming function
USB (CX01 dongle) and Wi-Fi (CX02 dongle)
communication interface for personal computer,
smartphone and tablet connection
Modbus-RTU and ASCII communication protocols
DCRJ SW setup software
Compatible with
SMS and email sending for alarm conditions with
EXP10 15 expanision module.
Voltage circuit
Auxiliary power supply: 100-415VAC
Rated frequency: 50/60Hz 10%
Current circuit
Single and three-phase input
Rated current Ie: 5A (1A programmable)
Measurement and control
Power factor adjustment: 0.8 ind to 0.8 cap
Temperature measurement range: -30...+85C
Capacitor over-current measurement: 0-250%
TRMS voltage and current measurements
Reconnection delay time of the same step: 5-3600s
Tripping sensitivity: 5-600s/step
Relay outputs
8 outputs, each with 1 Normally Open (NO / SPST)
contact, except the last being a changeover (SPDT)
Rated capacity: 5A 250VAC (in AC1 IEC) / B300
Flush-mount housing, 144x144mm/5.7x5.7
terminals.
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listing for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices Electronic power factor regulator.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n14.
See Section 27.
24-8

pages 24-9 and 10
Expansion modules
page 28-2
Dimensions
page 24-12
Wiring diagrams
page 24-14
page 24-16

Master-Slave power factor correction system with DCRG 8
Master
When the correction system is subdivided into various panel
boards, a DCRG8 Master controller can control up to 8
DCRG8 Slave controllers.
The Slave controllers serve as remote outputs for the
connection of capacitor banks that carry out the Master
controller commands.
The monitoring of the electric panel board and specifically
the capacitor banks is under control of the single Slave
controllers.
Slave 1
Slave 2
Slave 8

for DCRL 3, DCRL 5 and
DCRG 8
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.246
51 C2
PCDCRL/DCRG c/w EXP10 11 1

connecting cable, 1.8m/2yd long
0.090
51 C4
PC4 PX1 converter drive

1
connecting cable,1.8m/2yd long
0.147
51 C5
Analog modem DCRL/DCRG 1

c/w EXP10 11 connecting cable,
1.8m/2yd long
0.111
51 C6
4 PX1 converter driveDCRG8 1

c/w EXP10 11 connecting cable
1.8m/2yd long
0.102
51 C9
PCAnalog modem connecting 1

cable, 1.8m/2yd long
0.137
4 PX1
RS232/RS485 converter drive, 1

galvanically isolated, 220-240VAC
(110-120VAC on request)
0.600
Setup and automatic panel test software.

DCRJ SW
For DCRL... and DCRG 8 types

with 51 C2 connecting cable
Accessories.
51 C4

front cover.
RS232/RS485 opto-isolated analag modem, 38,400 Baud rate maximum,

power supply (110-120VAC on request).
By using the DCRJ SW software, the quick setup of the
controllers can be done by PC avoiding parameter
programming error and omissions.
The parameter programming of a DCRL or DCRG8
controller can also be PC saved and quickly uploaded
into another device requiring the same programming.
It permits to carry out the following operations:
Control installation operation:
Bar graph and numerical viewing of measurements
Controller status
Control of capacitor bank efficiency:
Actual kvar measurement of each step
View counters for number of switching operations
per step
View total count for total connection time of each step
Access all setup parameters
Save, upload and print parameter programming
Changed programming highlighted in bold
Automatic test of electric panel board.
The
software provides for the remote control
and supervision of the DCRL and DCRG8 controllers.
See details given in Section 27.
Its structure and applications are based on MS SQL
relational database management system . Consulting is
made through popular programs for Internet browsing
available across different platforms and operating systems.
It is a highly versatile system, simultaneously accessible
to a large number of users/workstations via intranets,
VPN or Internet.
APP for smartphone and tablet
(Setup And Maintenance 1) application allows
the user to program the controller, view alarm
conditions, send commands, read measurements,
download statistical data and events and send retrieved
data by email. The connection is made by Wi-Fi with a
smartphone or tablet using the CX02 dongle.
It is iOS and Android compatible. For more details, see
Section 27 or consult Customer Service; see contact
24-9
24

Order code
Description
Qty Wt
per
conf.
CX 01
PCDCRL/DCRG connecting
1
cable, with USB dongle for
diagnostics and firmware upgrade
0.090
PCDCRL/DCRG Wi-Fi dongle 1

for programming, data
download, diagnostics and
cloning
0.090
CX 02
CX 01
[kg]
For DCRG8 type only.

CX 03
CX 02
CX 03
GSM quad-band antenna

(800/900/1800/1900MHz) for
EXP10 15 expansion module
0.090
Communication and connection devices allow DCRL 3,
DCRL 5 and DCRG8 controllers to be linked to:
Personal computers (PC)
Smartphones
Tablets.
CX 01
This USB dongle, complete with cable, provides for
connection of the controller with a PC without even
disconnecting the power supply of the electric panel
board and to be able to:
Program parameters
Download data and events
Complete diagnotics.
CX 02
Using Wi-Fi connection, the power factor controllers can
be viewed by a PC, smartphone and tablet without
having to connect cables and permits to:
Program parameters
Download data and events
Complete diagnotics.
CX 03
Compatible with major worldwide mobile phone
networks, thanks to the 800/900/1800/1900MHz
frequencies.
IEC protection degree: IP67.
Fixing by 12mm/0.04 drilling.
For overall dimensions, wiring diagrams and technical
characteristics, refer to technical instructions manual
online in Downloads of local or global websites or
consult Customer Service; see details on inside front
cover.
24
24-10

Thyristor modules
Order code
Step description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
DCTM3 400 030 30-kvar step module,

400-480VAC
4.300

400-525VAC
4.300

400-525VAC
5.600
Power rating available depending on voltage

DCTM3 400 030 DCTM3 400 050 DCTM3 400 100
DCTM3 400...
Current Ie [A]
43A
72A
144A
Voltage
[VAC]
Power
[kvar]
Power
[kvar]
Power
[kvar]
400
30
50
100
440
33
55
110
480
36
60
120
525
66
131
Suitable for dynamic (fast) power factor correction
Capacitor switching at current flow zero-crossing
Protection against high in-rush currents at capacitor
switching
Protection against over temperature detected by the
built-in sensor.
30-kvar, 50-kvar and 100-kvar steps
Rated operational voltage:
400-480VAC for DCTM3 400 030 type
400-525VAC for DCTM3 400 050 and
DCTM3 400 100 types
Auxiliary fan power supply: 230VAC (DCTM3 400 100
only)
Rated frequency: 50/60Hz
Control circuit input range: 8-30VDC
Controlled phases: 2
Forced ventilation: DCTM3 400 100 only
Ambient conditions
Use at higher temperatures with power derating,
refer to page 24-17
INDICATIONS
Auxiliary power on
Over temperature alarm
Trigger LED.
Reference standards
Compliant with standards: EN 50178.
24
Dimensions
page 24-12
Wiring diagrams
page 24-14
page 24-17
24-11

REACTIVE CURRENT CONTROLLER
DCRM 2
4.2
(0.16")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
98.3 (3.87")
58 (2.28")
43.7 (1.72")
104.7 (4.12")
5
(0.20")
53.5 (2.11")
59.9 (2.36")

DCRL 3 - DCRL 5
Cutout
65 (2.56)
55 (2.16)
92 (3.62)
8.5
(0.33)
96 (3.78)
92 (3.62)
96 (3.78)
EXP 10...
Cutout
DCRG 8
138.5 (5.45)
144 (5.67)
9
(0.35)
THYRISTOR MODULES
DCTM3 400 030 - DCTM3 400 050
DCTM3 400 100

157 (6.18)
145 (5.71)
134 (5.27)
123 (4.84)
200 (7.87)
170 (6.69)
120 (4.72)
157 (6.18)
145 (5.71)
134 (5.27)
123 (4.84)
205 (8.07)
135 (5.31)
2.5 (0.10)
253 (9.96)
137 (5.39)
64.5 (2.54)
73 (2.87)
EXP 10...
200 (7.87)
170 (6.69)
120 (4.72)
138.5 (5.45)
44
(1.73)
144 (5.67)
53 (2.09)
61 (2.40)
24
83 (3.27)
135 (5.31)
5
(0.20)
24-12
78 (3.07)
83 (3.27)
103 (4.05)
64 (2.52)
Automatic power factor controllers and thryistor modules

Wiring diagrams
REACTIVE CURRENT CONTROLLER
DCRM 2
Single-phase connection
BFK... type
contactor
connection
BFK... type
contactor
connection

DCRL... with BFK type contactors
MAINS
EXP10 06
max. 1 modulo
DCRL 5
L1 L2 L3
DCRL 5
14 13
FU7
2x1A
CT1
9 10 11 12
11 14 21 24
FU8
2x1A
QS1
FU1
FU6
FU9
10A
FU5
FU2
R
FU10
5A
KM1
KM2
KM5
LOAD
BFK... type
contactor
connection
TC1
K1
K2
K5
IMPORTANT
a. For three-phase connection, the voltage input must be connected
between two phases only; the line current transformer must be
connected on the remaining free phase.
b. The polarity of the current input is irrelevant.
CAUTION! Always remove the power supply before operating on the
terminals.
24
24-13

Wiring diagrams
DCRG 8 with BFK... type contactor
MAINS
DCRG8
L1 L2 L3
100-240VAC
INPUT
VOLTAGE
100-690VAC
0V
AUX
SUPPLY
11
12
L1 L2 L3
CURRENT
/5A
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S2
S2
C 1
2 3 4
5 6 7
8 9 10
EXP10 06
max. 4 moduli
EXP10 01
max. 2 moduli
11 14 21 24
13 14 23 24 33 34 43 44
CT1
FU17
QS1
FU2
FU1
FU13
FU16
FU14
FU12
FU15
KM2
KM1
KM12
BFK... type
contactor
connection
LOAD
K1
K2
K8
IIMPORTANT
a. For three-phase connection, the voltage input must be connected
between two phases only; the line current transformer must be
connected on the remaining free phase.
b. The polarify of the current input is irrelevant.
CAUTION! Always remove the power supply before operating on the
terminals.
THYRISTOR MODULES
DCTM3 400...
MAINS
L1 L2 L3
DCTM3
L1
C1
C1
L3
-
C3
+
L N
Fan power supply 240VAC input

(DCTM3 400 100 only)
LOAD
24
24-14
Control circuit input

8...30VDC

DCRM series - Reative current controller
TYPE
DCRM 2
AUXILIARY SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Rated auxiliary voltage Us
380-415VAC (standard); 220-240VAC and 440-480VAC on request
Operating range
0.85-1.1 Us
Rated frequency
50/60Hz 5%
Power consumption/dissipation maximum
4.4VA / 2.4W
17ms
No-voltage release
8ms
VOLTAGE INPUT
480VAC
Measurement range
80-528VAC
Frequency range
Measurement input impedance
Type of connection
50 or 60Hz 1% self configurable

>1M
L1-L2 or L-N
CURRENT INPUT
Type of connection
Rated current Ie
Measurement range
Type of input
Measurement method
Overload capacity
By current transformer (CT)

5A AC
0.1...6A
Shunt supplied by external current transformer (low voltage). Max. 5A
True RMS value
+20% Ie
Overload peak
10In for 1s
Dynamic limit
160A for 10ms
Burden
0.6W
ADJUSTMENTS
C/K step 1 and 2
Connection and disconnection time delays
System configuration
OFF / 0.15-2
1 - 60s
3 phase or 1 phase
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number and type of outputs
2 each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
250VAC
400VAC

Mechanical life
8A
B300
105 cycles
30x106 cycles
CONNECTIONS
0.8Nm (7 lbin; 7-9lbin per UL/CSA)
0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12AWG per UL/CSA)
Rated insulation voltage
480VAC
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
20...+60C
Storage temperature
30...+80C
HOUSING
Material
UL/CSA certified with 415VAC maximum.
24
24-15
Automatic power factor controllers and thyristors modules

DCRL and DCRG series - Power factor controllers
TYPE
DCRL3 - DCRL5
DCRG8
100-440VAC
100-415VAC
Operating range
90-484VAC
100-415VAC
Rated frequency
50Hz; 60Hz
50Hz; 60Hz
AUXILIARY SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Power consumption maximum
9.5VA
27VA
Power dissipation maximum

(output contacts excluded)
3.5W
4.5W
Control voltage
100-600VAC L-L; 100-346VAC L-N
100-600VAC L-L; 100-346VAC L-N
Operating range
50-720VAC L-L; 50-415VAC L-N
VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
50-720VAC L-L; 50-415VAC L-N
Rated voltage
45-65Hz
35ms (110VAC) - 80ms (220-415VAC)

8ms
No-voltage release
CURRENT CIRCUIT
Rated current Ie
Programmable 5A or 1A
Operating range
0.025-6A for 5A full scale; 0.025-1.2A for 1A full scale
Constant overload
1.2 Ie
Short time withstand current
50 Ie for 1s
Current consumption
0.6VA
MEASUREMENT DATA
Type of voltage-current measurement
TRMS
Power factor adjustment
0.5 inductive 0.5 capacitive
Type of temperature sensor
Internal
Internal + PT100 with EXP10 04 + NTC with EXP10 16
Temperature measurement range
0-100C
0-212C
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs
Contact arrangement
IEC rated capacity
3/5 (up to 7 with EXP...)
8 (10, 12, 14, 16 with EXP...)
2/4 NO (SPST) + 1 changeover (SPDT)
7 NO (SPST) + 1 changeover (SPDT)
5A 250V AC1
5A 250V AC1
Maximum capacity of common terminal of contacts
10A
415VAC
B300
105 cycles
Electrical life (at rated load)
30x106 cycles
Mechanical life
STATIC OUTPUTS
Number of outputs
4 or 8 with EXP10 01
INSULATION
600VAC
9.5kV
Power frequency withstand voltage
5.2kV
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminal
Removable/plug-in
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12AWG)

AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-20...+60C
-20...+70C
Storage temperature
-30...+80C
-30...+80C
HOUSING
Version
Material
24
24-16
Flush mount 96x96mm/3.8x3.8
Flush mount 144x144mm/5.7x5.7

Polycarbonate
IP54

Thyristor modules DCTM3...
TYPE
DCTM3 400 30
DCTM3 400 50
DCTM3 400 100
400-480VAC 10%
400-525VAC 10%
400-525VAC 10%
43A
72A
144A
Step power at 400VAC
30kvars
50kvars
100kvars
Maximum inverse voltage
2200VAC
2800VAC
2800VAC
230VAC 10%
230VAC 10%
230VAC 10%
VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
Rated current Ie
Number of controlled phases

Auxiliary voltage
Power consumption
maximum
9VA
Control circuit
8-30VDC
(2mA at 12VDC)
Over-temperature protection
Cooling system
Yes
Natural
Natural
Forced ventilation
IP10
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
-10...+45C (Ie<50A)
-10...+50C (Ie<48A)
-10...+55C (Ie<46A)
Storage temperature
Altitude
-10...+45C (Ie<100A)
-10...+50C (Ie<90A)
-10...+55C (Ie<85A)
-10...+45C (Ie<190A)
-10...+50C (Ie<180A)
-10...+55C (Ie<170A)
-30...+80C
maximum
1000m with no derating; higher up derating: 10%/1000m from 1000m to 4000m
HOUSING
Material
Metal
24
24-17
Page 25-4
ATL 600
Automatic transfer switch controller with
optical port and graphic LCD
AC power supply
6 programmable digital inputs
7 programmable relay outputs.
Page 25-4
ATL 610
Automatic transfer switch controller with
optical port and graphic LCD
Virtual calendar clock (RTC)
AC and DC power supply
Expandable with EXP series modules (inputs
and outputs, communication ports)
7 programmable relay outputs.
Page 25-5
ATL DPS1
Module specifically designed to control
power supply voltage of motorised circuit
breakers and changeover switches
Continuous monitoring of supply line status
Microcontroller management.
25
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROLLERS
Supervision of two three-phase

supply lines
Emergency demand supervision
for standby generating set
Control of contactors, motorised
circuit breakers or motorised
changeover switches
Event logging
TRMS measurements of voltage
values
Remote control and supervision
Front optical port
Expandability
Modbus-RTU and Modbus-ASCII
Real time clock.

ATL 600 type non expandable ............................................................................................................................................
ATL 610 type expandable ...................................................................................................................................................
Dual power source module ................................................................................................................................................
Communication devices, software and accessories ............................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
25
25
25
25
2
3
5
6
E NERGY M ANAGEMENT
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 25 - 7

ATL series
NON-STOP CONTROL!
BACKLIGHT GRAPHIC DISPLAY
120x80 pixel with excellent legibility with adjustable
brightness and contrast.
STREAMLINE
DESIGN
ATL controllers have an
ergonomic design and
particular care has been given
to details.
CUSTOMISING
OPTION
There is a customising slot
available on the front to show
controller brand name,
trademark, part number, brief
indication or wording, etc.
COMPACT SIZE
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION PORT

The optical port on the front, using a standard USB or
Wi-Fi point, permits to communicate with a PC,
smartphone and tablet, to carry out programming,
diagnostics and data download without removing power
to the electric panel.
FIXING SYSTEM
DUAL POWER SUPPLY

ATL 610 versions has both 110-240VAC line and 12-24VDC battery supply.
EMERGENCY DEMAND SUPERVISION FOR STANDBY GENERATING SET

In applications where one of the two supply sources is a generating set, the
transfer switch controller has specific functions to supervise the generator
starting and stopping operations.
EXPANDIBILITY
Basic functions of the transfer switch controllers can be easily extended using
EXP series expansion modules:
- Relay outputs
- Opto-isolated Ethernet interface
The use of modules dedicated to communications, the transfer switch
controller can be controlled and supervised by the
software.
44mm
9mm
Trim frame profile and reduced

total depth simplify installation of
the transfer switch controller also in
very compact electric panels.
HIGH PROTECTION DEGREE

The controller front and the optional
frame seal have been designed to
warrant an IP65 protection degree.
64.5
144
137
44
25
73
EXP 10...
25-2
The fixing system with metal

screws guarantees excellent
adhesion over time.
FIVE-LANGUAGE TEXT
Viewing of events, alarms and
measurements are in Italian,
English, Spanish, French and
German.
MAX
2
12/24VDC battery supply input
ATL 600
ATL 610
POWER SUPPLY
Rated DC supply voltage
Rated AC supply voltage
12/24VDC
(9-36VDC range)
110-240VAC
(90-264VAC range)
110-240VAC
(90-264VAC range)
Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD
Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD
FRONT PANEL / HOUSING

Backlight display
Multilanguage (5 standard onboard; others downloadable)
Size
144x144mm / 5.7x5.7
144x144mm / 5.7x5.7
IP54 / optional IP65
IP54 / optional IP65

Expandable with EXP series modules

VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT INPUT
Line 1 controlled voltage
3 phases + neutral
3 phases + neutral
Line 2 controlled voltage
3 phases + neutral
3 phases + neutral
Rated voltage Ue L-L
100-480VAC
(50-576VAC range)
100-480VAC
(50-576VAC range)
Frequency range
Type of voltage control
45-65Hz
45-65Hz
L-L and L-N
L-L and L-N
BUILT-IN DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Number of inputs
Number of outputs
Contactors
Motorised automatic circuit breakers
Motorised changeover switches
LINE SWITCHING DEVICE CONTROL
INTERFACE
USB communication
EXP10 10
RS232 communication
EXP10 11
RS485 communication
EXP10 12
EXP10 13
Ethernet communication with web server function

Front optical USB communication port
CX01 dongle
CX01 dongle
Front optical Wi-Fi communication port
CX02 dongle
CX02 dongle
Line/Line function
Line/Generator function
FUNCTIONS
Real time clock with back reserve energy

Event logging
25
25-3

Non expandable
Order code
Description
ATL 600

controller with optical port
for 2-line control
(144x144mm/5.7x5.7)
power supply 110-240VAC
Order code
Description
ATL 610

controller with optical port
for 2-line control
(144x144mm/5.7x5.7)
power supply 110-240VAC
and 12/24VDC
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.540
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.640
ATL 600
Expandable
ATL 610
ATL610 EXPANSION MODULES

Snap in fixing of two modules on ATL 610 rear.
Inputs and outputs.
EXP10 00
EXP10 01
EXP10 02

opto-isolated
EXP10 03
EXP 10...
EXP10 10
EXP10 11
EXP10 12
EXP10 13

ATL 610
MAX
2
The automatic transfer switch controller ATL 600/610 is
used for the automatic switching of the load from the
MAIN LINE to a stand-by or emergency SECONDARY
LINE and vice versa.
It has two outputs for the automatic and/or manual
control of contactors or motorised circuit breakers.
The transfer switch controller has the following main
features:
Supply input:
Single in AC for ATL 600
Dual in AC and DC for ATL 610
Measurement inputs for three phase + neutral voltage
values; also suitable for 1 and 2 phase lines
1 backlight 128x80 pixel LCD to view measurements,
events and alarms in multi languages
2 status indication LEDs
7 programmable relay outputs
Viewing of L-L and L-N voltage values of the
controlled lines
Status viewing of contactor or motorised circuit
breakers
Configuration programming of lines, control and
supervision parameters for emergency demand of
generating set
Event logging
Microprocessor supervision of functions; including
virtual real time clock for ATL 610
Communication interface by front optical port using
USB CX01 or Wi-Fi CX02 dongle
software
Compatible with
ATL SW programming and remote control software with
direct PC connection or by Ethernet network.
CONTROL FUNCTIONS OF THE LINES
Phase sequence and phase loss
Minimum and maximum voltage
Voltage asymmetry
Minimum and maximum frequency.
Power supply voltage: 110-240VAC for both;
12/24VDC for ATL 610
Voltage range:
90-264VAC for both; 9-36VDC for ATL 610
Voltage measurement inputs
Rated voltage Ue: 100-480VAC L-L
Measurement range: 50-576VAC L-L
Frequency range: 45-65Hz
Programmable digital inputs
Type of input: Negative
Programmable relay outputs
5 each with 1 normally open contact (NO - SPST)
rated 8A 250VAC
2 each with 1 changeover contact (NO/NC - SPDT)
rated 8A 250VAC
Flush-mount housing: 144x144mm/5.7x5.7
IEC degree of protection: IP20 at rear; IP54 on front
with optional IP65 using EXP80 01.
See Section 27.
Certificates pending: EAC; cULus.
IEC/EN 60947-6-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n14.
25
25-4

page 25-6
Expansion modules
page 28-2
Dimensions
page 25-7

Dual power supply
module
Order code
Description
ATL DPS1
For measurement and

control of voltages
present at supply inputs to
power motorised circuit
breakers/changeover
switches, 110/230VAC
configurable
ATL DPS1
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.300
ATL DPS1 is capable of measuring and controlling
voltages at its inputs designating the most ideal to
connect to the output. It is suitable to supply motorised
circuit breakers and changeover switches in automatic
switching systems of 2 three phase supply lines.
The two voltage inputs of the module are independent
and insulated; each is capable of supplying the internal
measuring circuit managed by the microcontroller. It
reduces the number of components and improves
installation safety.
Main ATL DPS1 features include:
Voltage value selectable via bypass terminals
Minimum and maximum voltage tripping thresholds
2 single phase L+N inputs
1 single phase L+N output
L1 priority line
Use with motorised control units powered at 110VAC
or 230VAC
Indicating LEDs for abnormal conditions and status of
inputs and outputs.
Rated supply voltage: 110/230VAC configurable
Frequency: 50/60Hz
Input voltage range: 80-300VAC
Voltage tripping thresholds min / max: 80% / 120% of
preset value
2 line inputs L1-L2: Single phase, between phase and
neutral
Current output: 4A max
Priority line: L1 when both input values are within
limits
Fixed delay time between line switching: 0.5 second
4 status indiction LEDs for voltage of each line within
limits, voltage present at output, relay output anomaly
Mounting: on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or by
screws using extractible clips
IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at rear.
Certifications and compliance:
IEC/EN 60947-6-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n14.
25
Dimensions
page 25-7
25-5

CX 01
Order code
Description
CX 01

1
with optical port for
0.090
CX 02
Wi-Fi dongle for PC LOVATO 1

Electric product programming,
data download, diagnostics and
cloning
0.090
GSM/GPRS quad-band antenna 1

(800/900/1800/1900MHz) for
EXP1015 expansion module
0.090
CX 03
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Software.
Parameter programming and 1
remote control software
complete with 51 C2 cable
0.246
EXP80 01
IP65 gasket seal for internal 1

ATL 6display frame
0.150
51 C2
1
For PC ATL610 +
EXP1011 module, 1.8m/2yd
long
0.090
51 C4
For PC 4PX1 converter

drive, 1.8m/2yd long
0.147
51 C5
For ATL610 + EXP1011

module analog modem,
1.8m/2yd long
0.111
51 C6
For ATL610 + EXP1011

module 4PX1 converter
drive, 1.8/2yd long
0.102
51 C7
For ATL610 GSM modem, 1

1.8m/2yd long
0.101
ATL SW
Accessories.
51 C4
RS232/RS485 converter drive.

4 PX1
Opto-isolated, 220-240VAC 1
supply (110-120VAC on
request)
0.600

front page.
RS232/485 opto-isolated converter drive, 38,400 Baud rate maximum,

(110-120VAC supply on request).
25
25-6
CX 02
By Wi-Fi connection, compatible LOVATO Electric
products can be viewed on PCs, smartphones and tablets
with no need for cabling.

Customer Service. See contact details on the inside front
cover.
CX 03
4 PX1
CX 01
The USB/optical dongle, complete with cable, allows the
connection of products compatible with PCs without
having to disconnect the power supply from the electric
panel.
CX 03
Antenna compatible with the major part of worldwide
mobile networks thanks to the available frequencies at
800/900/1800/1900MHz.
drilling.
CX 02
Communication devices for connection of LOVATO
Electric products to personal computers, smartphones
and tablets.
By using the ATL SW software, the quick setup of the
controllers can be done by PC avoiding parameter
programming errors and omissions.
The parameter programming of ATL controllers can
also be PC saved and quickly uploaded into another
device requiring the same programming.
It permits to carry out the control of the installation
operation, bar graph and numerical viewing of
measurements and controller status.
The
software provides for the remote control
and supervision of the ATL transfer switch controllers.
available across different platforms and operating
systems.
It is a highly versatile system, simultaneously accessible
to a large number of users/workstations via intranets,
VPN or Internet.
(Setup And Maintenance 1) application allows
the user to program the controller, view alarm conditions,
send commands, read measurements, download
statistical data and events and send retrieved data by
email. The connection is made by Wi-Fi with a
smartphone or tablet using the CX02 dongle.
Section 27 or consult Customer Service; see contact

TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROLLERS
ATL 600 - ATL 610
Cutout
138.5 (5.45)
144 (5.67)
137 (5.39)
64.5 (2.54)
73 (2.87)
EXP 10...
(2 max)
138.5 (5.45)
43
(1.69)
144 (5.67)
9.2
(0.36)
DUAL POWER SUPPLY MODULE

ATL DPS1
63 (2.48)
43.8 (1.72)
42.7
(1.68)
45 (1.77)
63.5 (2.50)
93.4 (3.68)
5
(0.20)
105.4 (4.15)
90 (3.54)
71.6 (2.82)
36.4
(1.43)
25
25-7
Page 26-6
ENGINE PROTECTION CONTROLLERS
Starting with or without power key switch
Programmable inputs and outputs
Front LED indicators for engine alarm
conditions and diagnostics.
Page 26-8
AUTO MAINS FAILURE (AMF) GEN-SET
CONTROLLERS
Automatic starting of generator and load
switching to stand-by emergency source in
case of mains failure
Supervision in open transition for contactors,
motorised circuit breakers and motorised
changeover switches
Engine protection
Programmable inputs, outputs and alarms.
Page 26-10
REMOTE UNITS
Remote viewing and control panels
Remote annunciator for alarm and status
indication
Digital outputs for alarm and status
condition remoting.
Page 26-7
STAND ALONE GEN-SET CONTROLLERS
Generator voltage and current control
Engine protection
Programmable inputs and outputs
Programmable alarm properties.
Page 26-9
PARALLELING CONTROLLERS FOR
MAINS-GENERATOR AND GENERATOR-GENERATOR
Mains-generator closed transition synchronising
Mains-generator load sharing with source peak
demand control
Generator paralleling supervision (island mode with
load sharing).
Page 26-11
COMMUNICATION DEVICES, SOFTWARE AND
ACCESSORIES
Communication interfaces
Additional digital and analog inputs and outputs
GPRS-GSM module
Setup and supervision software and APP.
ENGINE
26
AND GENERATOR CONTROLLERS
Extensive selection of functions to

satisfy all application requirements
Power supply range 12-24VDC for
each single product
Totally programmable inputs,
outputs and alarms
RS232, RS485, USB, Ethernet
communication interface
Engine control by CANbus
Setup and supervision software
Modem control for sending alarm
messages and emails.
Engine protection controllers ..........................................................................................................................................

Stand alone gen-set controllers .......................................................................................................................................
Automatic mains failure (AMF) gen-set controllers .........................................................................................................
Paralleling controllers for mains-generator and generator-generator .............................................................................
Remote units ....................................................................................................................................................................
Communication devices and accessories . ......................................................................................................................
Software ..........................................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 26
13
E NERGY M ANAGEMENT

Characteristics

RGK20
RGK40
RGK600 SA
RGK601 SA
RGK700 SA
Generator voltage control
L-N
L1-L2-L3/N
L1-L2-L3-N
L1-L2-L3-N
L1-L2-L3-N
Current control
L1
L1-L2-L3
L1-L2-L3
L1-L2-L3-N
50/60/400Hz
Rated frequency
RGK800 SA
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
2 (Relay)
3 (SSR)
1 (Relay) + 4 (SSR)
6 (SSR)
3 (Relay) + 4 (SSR)
3 (Relay)+6 (SSR)+1(SO)
D+ and AC
D+ and AC
D+ and AC
D+
D+ and AC
D+ and AC
Engine running inputs

Ohmic inputs for fuel-pressure-temperature
Remote control
CANbus interface
RGK601SA
Rated battery voltage
12/24VDC
12/24VDC
12/24VDC
12/24VDC
12/24VDC
12/24VDC
Power supply range
9-33VDC
9-35VDC
9-35VDC
7-33VDC
7-33VDC
7-33VDC
Mains voltage control
Rated voltage range
10-277VAC
100-415VAC
100-480VAC
30-600VAC
30-600VAC
5A
5A/1A
5A/1A
5A/1A
4-digit LCD
Graphic backlight
LCD,
128x80 pixels
Graphic backlight
LCD,
128x80 pixels
Graphic backlight
LCD,
128x80 pixels
W or generator
frequency
or Pick-up
W or generator
frequency
or Pick-up
VT programming
Rated input current
TRMS voltage measurement
TRMS current measurement
Display
7 digit LCD
Engine running magnetic pick-up input

Engine speed input
RGK600SA
W or generator
frequency
W or generator
frequency
W or generator
frequency or
Pick-up (RGK600SA)
Auxiliary analog input
I/O expansion
RGK RR
RGK RR
3 x EXP... + RGK RR
USB/Optical port on front
EXP1010
Wi-Fi port on front
USB port at rear
Ethernet port with Web server function
EXP1013
GPRS/GSM modem
EXP1015
RS232 serial port
(TTL)
(TTL)
RS485 serial port
Event logging
RTC (Real Time Clock)
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
PLC logic function
EXP1011
Alarms
13
25
59
60
60
User alarms
Alarm property customising
Texts for alarms, events and parameters
Multilanguage (type)
Upload languages
Load sharing
Generator paralleling
Mains-generator synchronising
(closed transition)
IEC front degree of protection
26
STAND ALONE GEN-SET CONTROLLERS
RGK30
Certifications
Frequency only.
Controller uploading of other mutilanguage sets.
IP65 with optional gasket seal.
26-2
5 (GB - I - F - P - E) 5 (GB - I - F - P - E) 5 (GB - I - F - P - E)
IP41
IP41
IP54
IP54
IP65
IP65
cULus, EAC
cULus, EAC
cULus, EAC
cULus, EAC
cULus, EAC
cULus, EAC
AUTO MAINS (AMF) GEN-SET CONTROLLERS
Generator voltage control
PARALLELING / LOAD SHARING
RGK600
RGK601
RGK700
RGK800
RGK900
RGK900 SA
L1-L2-L3-N
L1-L2-L3-N
L1-L2-L3-N
L1-L2-L3-N
L1-L2-L3-N
Current control
L1-L2-L3
L1-L2-L3
L1-L2-L3-N
L1-L2-L3-N
L1-L2-L3-N
Rated frequency
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
50/60/400Hz
50/60/400Hz
50/60/400Hz
13
13
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
6 (SSR)
3 (Relay) + 4 (SSR)
D+
D+ and AC
D+ and AC
D+ and AC
D+ and AC
Engine running inputs
3 (Relay) + 6 (SSR) + 1(SO) 3 (Relay) + 6 (SSR) + 1(SO) 3 (Relay) + 6 (SSR) + 1(SO)
Ohmic inputs for fuel-pressure-temperature

Remote control
CANbus interface
RGK601
Rated battery voltage
12/24VDC
12/24VDC
12/24VDC
12/24VDC
12/24VDC
Power supply range
7-33VDC
7-33VDC
7-33VDC
7-36VDC
7-36VDC
L1-L2-L3-N
L1-L2-L3-N
L1-L2-L3-N
100-480VAC
30-600VAC
30-600VAC
30-600VAC
30-600VAC
5A/1A
5A/1A
5A/1A
5A/1A
5A/1A
Graphic backlight
LCD,
192x112 pixels
Graphic backlight
LCD,
128x80 pixels
Graphic backlight
LCD,
128x80 pixels
Graphic backlight
LCD,
128x112 pixels
Graphic backlight
LCD,
128x112 pixels
W or generator
frequency
or Pick-up
W or generator
frequency
or Pick-up
W or generator
frequency
or Pick-up
W or generator
frequency
or Pick-up
Mains voltage control

Rated voltage range
VT programming
Rated input current
TRMS voltage measurement
TRMS current measurement
Display
Engine running magnetic pick-up input
RGK600
Engine speed input
W or generator
frequency (RGK600)
or Pick-up
Auxiliary analog input
RGK RR
RGK RR
3 x EXP... + RGK RR
4 x EXP... + RGK RR
4 x EXP... + RGK RR
USB port at rear
EXP1010
EXP1010
EXP1010
Ethernet port with Web server function
EXP1013
EXP1013
EXP1013
GPRS/GSM modem
EXP1015
EXP1015
EXP1015
RS232 serial port
EXP1011
EXP1011
EXP1011
RS485 serial port
I/O expansion
USB/Optical port on front
Wi-Fi port on front
Event logging
RTC (Real Time Clock)
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
PLC logic function
Alarms
59
60
60
67
67
User alarms
16
16
5 (GB - I - F - P - E)
5 (GB - I - F - P - E)
5 (GB - I - F - P - E)
5 (GB - I - F - P - E)
5 (GB - I - F - P - E)
Alarm property customising

Texts for alarms, events and parameters
Multilanguage (type)
Upload languages
Load sharing
Generator paralleling
Mains-generator synchronising
(closed transition)
IEC front degree of protection

Certifications
IP54
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
cULus, EAC
cULus, EAC
cULus, EAC
cULus
cULus
26
26-3

RGK 700 - 800 - 900
SUPERIOR CLASS!
CUSTOMISING OPTION
There is a customising slot available on the front to show
controller brand name, logo, trademark, part number,
brief indication or wording, etc.
PROGRAMMING OPTICAL PORT

The optical port on the panel front, using a standard USB or
Wi-Fi point, allows to communicate with a PC, smartphone
and tablet, to carry out programming, diagnostics and data
download, without removing power to the electric panel.
COMPACT SIZE
33
43
IP65 DEGREE OF PROTECTION

The controller front and the internal
display frame seal have been
designed to warrant an IP65
protection degree (optional IP65
gasket for RGK 600-RGK 601). This
with the UV film also allow outdoor
installation.
CABLING AND EXPANSION MODULE FIXING SYSTEM

The controller rear has 4 fitting slots to secure cables connected to the
terminals with cable ties, in an orderly way inside the electric panel. In addition,
a plastic retainer is standard supplied to keep the expansion modules in place
when installed in applications with strong vibrations.
RGK 800
RGK 900
35
RGK 600
RGK 601
RGK 700
RGK 800
RGK 900
Trim frame profile and reduced total

depth simplify installation of the
controllers also in very compact
electric panels.
157
EXP...
INSTALLATION
The fixing with metal screws guarantees
excellent adhesion over time.
EXPANDABILITY
Basic RGK 800 and RGK 900 controller functions can be easily extended using
up to 4 EXP series expansion modules:
- Opto-isolated static outputs
- Relay outputs
- Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with Web server function
- Data logging and clock-calendar (RTC)
- GPRS/GSM modem
RGK 800 (3 modules)

RGK 900 (4 modules)
26
K!
CLIC
56
59
RGK 800
RGK 900
26-4
12

RGK 700 - 800 - 900
EXPANDABILITY
An extensive selection of modules is available to increase the
controller functionity.
GPRS/GSM MODEM
Among the expansion modules, there is a GPRS/GSM modem,
automatically configured by genset controller.
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance supervision at programmed intervals.
STREAMLINE DESIGN
The controller has an ergonomic design and, at the same
time, particular care has been given to details.
GPRS/GSM MODEM
PLC FUNCTION
REMOTE UNITS
Remote displays panels
Once a data-enabled SIM card is

inserted, RGK 800 - RGK 900
controllers can send SMS and email
messages with alarm and event
conditions as well as the latest logged
events to a FTP server.
OPTO-ISOLATED ETHERNET INTERFACE

WITH WEB SERVER FUNCTION
Web Browsing of the single controller

connected in Ethernet by EXP10 13
expansion module.
CANBUS COMMUNICATION PORT

Most models are standard equipped
with CAN-J1939 communication
port.
Capability to combine together

internal status of controllers with
signals incoming from the field to
activate outputs and generate alarms.
LOAD MANAGEMENT
There are different methods of
controlling the load conditions; each
controller has special parameters
functions as follows:
- RGK 600 - RGK 700 - RGK800
types: load shedding and dummy
load modes
- RGK 900 types: base-load and
peak shaving modes.
PARALLELING
RGK 900 and RGK 900SA
controllers can control the
switching between the mains and
generators without having to switch
off the power supply to the load.
In addition, they can control the
paralleling connection of two or
more generators sharing in this way
the load on more than one source.
The RGK 900MC can control and
synchronise mains parallel
operation with a power bus
composed by a series of generating
sets.
There are mirror display units

available to remotely operate as if in
front of the generating set.
Remote annunciator
A remote display can view alarm

conditions and can be operated for
silencing them.
Alarm-state relay unit
The relay unit allows to transmit, on
volt-free contacts, the status and
alarms of RGK... controllers.
SUPERVISION SOFTWARE
is web-based and provides
for an easy and efficient way to
monitor and control electrical
installations as well as field
equipment.
With this versatile system, the user

can parameterise controllers, get
data-log files and commands
carried out, compile graphic pages
and charts and implement access
level management.
Server-multiclient system based on

MS SQL RDBMS with web-browser
interface.
Simultaneous management of
different communication channels
with independent configuration
(protocols, speed rate, RS232,
RS485, Ethernet, modem).
26
26-5

Engine protection
controllers
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
RGK 30
12/24VDC for external

start-stop key switch
[kg]
0.160
RGK 20
12/24VDC, built-in power 1

supply key switch, with
TTL programming port
0.270
RGK 30
General characteristics for RGK 30

OPERATOR INTERFACE
2 programming key buttons
1 LED indicator for engine status
1 LED indicator for glow plug pre-heating
5 LED indicators for alarm status
Remote starting only.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Digital inputs: 3 negative and 1 positive
(start/stop by remote key switch)
Digital outputs: 2 relay (1 programmable).
(cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices-Generator
controllers; GOST TR-CU.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, EN 55011, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
OPERATOR INTERFACE
1 ON-OFF power supply key selector switch
1 semi-automatic engine START button
2 programmable key buttons
7 digit LCD display (Hours, Hz, VBatt)
1 LED indicator for engine status
5 LED indicators for alarm status
Local or remote starting.
RGK 20
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Programmable functions:
Generator frequency input
Digital outputs: 3 static (1 programmable)
Inputs, outputs and alarms, all with programmable
properties.
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Quick set-up with PC software (TTL/RS232 serial
port).
Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary DevicesGenerator controllers.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
26
26-6
Accessories
page 26-11
Dimensions
page 26-13

Stand alone gen-set
controllers
RGK 40
Order code
Description
RGK 40
12/24VDC, built-in power 1

key switch, with TTL
programming port
0.400
RGK 600SA
12/24VDC, graphic LCD, 1

USB/optical and Wi-Fi
point programming port
on front, W/Pick-up speed
input, IP54
0.540
RGK 601SA
12/24VDC, graphic LCD,

on front, CANbus port,
IP54
0.540
RGK 700SA

RS232 serial port and
IP65
0.900

RS485 serial port and
IP65.
Expandible with EXP...
modules
RGK 600SA - RGK 601SA
RGK 800SA
RGK 700SA - RGK 800SA
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.980
Programmable functions and properties

Characteristics
RGK 6...SA
RGK 700SA
RGK 800SA
Inputs
Relay outputs
Protected static
outputs
Order code
Description
ACCESSORY FOR RGK 600SA AND RGK 601SA

RGK X00
IP65 gasket seal for internal display frame
EXPANSION MODULES FOR RGK 800SA

Inputs and outputs.
EXP 10...
STAND ALONE APPLICATION
G
CONTROL PANEL
LOAD
EXP10 00
EXP10 01
EXP10 02
EXP10 03
EXP10 04

PT100 or 0-10V or 0...5V
EXP10 05

0-10V or 0...5V
EXP10 08

Communications interface.
EXP10 10
EXP10 11
EXP10 12
EXP10 13
EXP10 15
GPRS/GSM modem
See Section 27.
Accessories and software

pages 26-11 and 12
Expansion modules
page 28-2
Dimensions
page 26-13

OPERATOR INTERFACE
1 ON-OFF power supply key selector switch
1 semi-automatic engine START button
2 programming key buttons
4 digit LED display (V, A, kVA, Hours, Vbatt, Hz)
6 LED indicators for measurements/readings
2 LED indicators for genset status indication
8 LED indicators s for alarm status
Local and remote starting.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Programmable functions:
VAC inputs: Generator L1-L2-L3/N
Digital outputs: 1 relay and 4 static
Programmable properties for inputs, outputs and
alarms.
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Quick set-up with PC software (TTL/RS232 port)
Certifications: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and Canada
(cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Generator
controller.
General characteristics for
RGK 600SA - RGK 601SA - RGK 700SA - RGK 800SA
VAC inputs: Generator L1-L2-L3-N
Single, two and three phase voltage control, with or
without neutral
Rated measurement voltage range:
50-576VAC for RGK 600SA and RGK 601SA
30-720VAC for RGK 700SA and RGK 800SA
Programmable VT ratio
Current measurement range (3 PH): 0.050-6A or
0.050-1.2A
Graphic LCD: 128x80 pixels with backlight
1 USB/optical and Wi-Fi port on front for programming
Engine running detection: D+, generator voltage and
frequency
2 engine speed inputs: W or Magnetic Pick-up
(RGK 601SA excluded)
1 CANbus-J1939 port (RGK 600SA excluded)
3 analog ohmic inputs for oil pressure, engine
temperature and fuel level control
1 built-in alarm remoting port
Non-volatile memory for event storage
Alarm, event and parameter text in 5 languages
Alarm text customisable (8 alarms)
Event log
Modbus-RTU and Modbus-ASCII protocols
Customisation manager software available; compatible
with
software
Certifications: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and Canada
(cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices
Generator controllers.
For RGK 700SA RGK 800SA only
PLC logic for inputs, outputs and internal status
1 communication port: RS232 for RGK700SA; RS485
for RGK 800SA
Degree of protection: IEC IP65 on front; suitable for
use with UL/CSA Type 4X outdoor enclosure
installation.
For RGK 800SA only
Neutral current measurement range: 0.050-6A or
0.050-1.2A
400Hz frequency support
1 programmable analog input
Modbus-TCP communication protocol
Current leakage control towards earth/ground
Clock-calendar (RTC).
MAIN FUNCTIONS FOR RGK 600SA-RGK 601SARGK 700SA-RGK 800SA
Menus for quick selection of rated parameter settings
Autocall function for automatic sending of emails
and/or SMS at predefined events/alarms
Generator controls: phase sequence, maximum and
minimum voltage and frequency, voltage asymmetry
Programmable maintenance.
26-7
26

Automatic mains failure
(AMF) gen-set controllers
Order code
Description
RGK 600
12/24VDC, graphic LCD, 1

on front, W/Pick-up speed
input
0.540
RGK 601

on front, CANbus port
0.540
RGK 700

with RS232 port and
IP65
0.880
RGK 800
12/24VDC, graphic LCD

with RS485 port and
IP65.
Expandible with EXP...
modules
0.880
RGK 600 - RGK 601
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
RGK 700 - RGK 800
General characteristics for

RGK 600 - RGK 601 - RGK 700 - RGK 800
VAC inputs: Mains and generator L1-L2-L3-N
Voltage control for one, two and three phase systems
Rated measurement voltage:
480VAC for RGK 600 and RGK 601
600VAC for RGK 700 and RGK 800
Rated measurement voltage range:
50-576VAC for RGK 600 and RGK 601
30-720VAC for RGK 700 and RGK 800
Current measurement range (3 PH): 0.050-6A or
0.050-1.2A
Graphic LCD: 128x80 pixels with backlight
1 USB/optical and Wi-Fi port on front for programming
Engine running detection: D+, generator voltage and
frequency
2 engine speed inputs: W or Magnetic Pick-up
(RGK 601 excluded)
1 CANbus-J1939 port (RGK 600 excluded)
temperture and fuel level control
1 built-in alarm remoting port
Non-volatile memory for event storage
Alarm, event and parameter text in 5 languages
Event log
Modbus-RTU and Modbus-ASCII communication
protocols
with
software.
Programmable functions and properties

Characteristic
RGK 600 RGK 601 RGK 700 RGK 800
Inputs
Relay outputs
Protected static
outputs
Order code
Description
ACCESSORY FOR RGK 600 AND RGK 601

RGK X00
IP65 gasket seal for internal display frame
EXPANSION MODULES FOR RGK 800

Inputs and outputs.
EXP 10...
EXP10 00
EXP10 01
EXP10 02
EXP10 03
EXP10 04

PT100 or 0-10V or 0...5V
EXP10 05

0-10V or 0...5V
EXP10 08

AMF (AUTOMATIC MAINS FAILURE)

APPLICATION
EXP10 10
EXP10 11
EXP10 12
EXP10 13
EXP10 15
GPRS/GSM modem
AMF PANEL
LOAD
26-8

pages 26-11 and 12
For RGK 800 only

Neutral current measurement range:
0.050-6A or 0.050-1.2A
400Hz frequency support
Modbus-TCP communication protocol
Clock-calendar (RTC).
MAIN FUNCTIONS FOR RGK 600-RGK 601-RGK 700RGK 800
Generator controls: Phase sequence, maximum and
minimum voltage and frequency, voltage asymmetry
Programmable maintenance.
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices Generator controllers.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
See Section 27.
26
For RGK 700 RGK 800 only

PLC logic for inputs, outputs and internal status
1 communication port: RS232 for RGK700; RS485 for
RGK 800
Degree of protection: IEC IP65 on front; suitable for
use with UL/CSA Type 4X outdoor enclosure
installation.
Expansion modules
page 28-2
Dimensions
page 26-13

Paralleling controllers for
mains-generator and
generator-generator
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Stand-alone controller.
RGK 900SA
Paralleling control among 1

generating sets.
RS485 port and USB/optical
and Wi-Fi point programming
port on front. Expandable
with EXP... modules
1.040
AMF (Automatic Mains Failure) controller.

RGK 900
RGK 900SA - RGK 900
Mains-generator paralleling 1
control.
with RS485 port, USB/optical
and Wi-Fi point programming
port on front. Expandable
with EXP... modules
1.040
Mains-ATS (Automatic Transfer Switching) controller.

RGK 900 MC
Order code
Control of mains, automatic 1

transfer switching (ATS),
and paralleling on multiple
generators controlled by
RGK 900SA.
with RS485 port and
USB/optical and Wi-Fi point
programming port.
Expandable with EXP...
modules
0.940
Description
EXPANSION MODULES FOR RGK 900...

Inputs and outputs.
EXP 10...
EXP10 00
EXP10 01
EXP10 02
EXP10 03
EXP10 04

PT100 or 0-10V or 0...5V
EXP10 05
2 opto-isolated static outputs 0/4-20mA or

0-10V or 0...5V
EXP10 08


EXP10 10
EXP10 11
EXP10 12
EXP10 13
Ethernet interface with web server function
EXP10 15
GPRS/GSM modem
MAINS-GENERATOR PARALLELING
G
PANEL WITH
PARALLEL SOURCES
ISLAND MODE
VAC inputs: Mains L1-L2-L3-N for RGK 900 only
VAC inputs: Generator L1-L2-L3-N
Voltage measurement rated value: 600VAC (UL/CSA)
Frequency measurement range: 45-65Hz or 360-440Hz
Current measurement input (3 PH+N): 0.05-6A or
0.05-1.2A
Fourth CT for neutral measurement or earth/ground
leakage detection
Graphic LCD, 128x112 pixels with backlight
13 digital inputs
6 static outputs rated 2A, protected
1 static output 50mA
Engine running detection: D+ generator voltage and
frequency
1 engine speed input: W or Magnetic Pick-up
temperature and fuel level control
2 analog outputs for engine speed control (governor) /
voltage regulator (AVR)
Alarm-event-parameter text in 5 languages (Web upload)
Event log
Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII and Modbus-TCP
Boolean logic for inputs, outputs and internal status
with
software
Degree of protection: IEC IP65 on front; suitable for use
with UL/CSA Type 4X outdoor enclosure installation
Built-in buzzer
Multi-level passwords
Sleep function (power saving mode)
Synchronising and load sharing.
MAIN FUNCTIONS
Mains (for RGK 900 only) / Generator controls: Phase
sequence, phase loss, max and min voltage and
frequency, voltage asymmetry
Programmable maintenance at various intervals
Mains-generator synchronising (ATS closed transition)
Mains in base-load with generator in peak shaving
Paralleling supervision of generators (island mode)
Generating set start scheduling.
(cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices, Generator
controllers.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
ATS AND PARALLELING OF MAINS WITH MULTIPLE GENSETS
PANEL
PANEL
PANEL
PANEL
PANEL
PANEL
PANEL
LOAD
LOAD
RGK 900 is designed for mains-generator synchronising
applications, such as:
a) Single generator in maintained parallel with the mains in
base-load mode (generator power supplied at a steady
rate)
b) Single generator in maintained parallel with the mains, in
peak-shaving mode (import-export mains power is
limited to constant value and load peaks during heavy
demand for power are supplied by generator)
c) Single generator in AMF with temporary parallel with the
mains (for emergency, with AMF in closed transition).

pages 26-11 and 12
Expansion modules
page 28-2
RGK 900SA is designed for applications with load sharing on

an isolated bus, without mains:
a) Parallel among generators working together in island
mode on power bus with load shared among them
b) Generators connected together to maintain the power
reserve (total power available minus load power) within a
preset range, switching on and off generators according to
a priority level.
Dimensions
page 26-13
LOAD
Combination of RGK 900SA and RGK 900MC units is designed for load govern
controls with multiple generators in parallel on power bus and mains.
In these circumstances, the RGK 900MC unit controls, in base-load or peakshaving mode, the mains and power bus composed by multiple generators, each
controlled by an RGK 900SA.
26-9
26

Remote access devices
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
RGK 800 RD SA
Remote display panel for 1
[kg]
0.820
RGK 800SA, 12/24VDC,

IP65 protection degree
RGK 800 RD
0.820
RGK 800, 12/24VDC,

RGK 900 RD SA
0.980
RGK 900SA, 12/24VDC,

RGK 800 RD
RGK 900 RD
0.980
RGK 900, 12/24VDC,

RGK RA
Remote annunciator,
1
graphic LCD, touch screen
128x112 pixels, IP54 protection
0.360
RGK RA
Alarm-status relay unit
Order code
Description
RGK RR
Remote unit for alarms/status,

12/24VDC, 12 relay outputs,
pulse input, CANbus
communication port
RGK RR
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.420
Remote display panel characteristics

For remote controller supervision and viewing, the user
operates the remote display panel as if directly in front of
the generating set.
12/24VDC battery power supply
Graphic LCD with backlight:
128x80 pixels for RGK 800...
128x112 pixels for RGK 900...
13 function and setting keys
10 Indication LEDs for operating modes and status
Built-in buzzer
4 digital inputs
2 digital outputs
Conductor cross section: 0.2-2.5mm (24-12 AWG;
18-12 AWG per UL/CSA)
Tightening torque: 0.56Nm (4.5lbin)
Front degree of protection: IEC IP65; UL/CSA Type 4X
outdoor enclosure installation
Serial interface ports: opto-isolated RS485 (RGKRD);
CANbus-J1979 (RGKSA).
Remote annunciator characteristics
Alarm conditions can be viewed on the remote display
and alarm silencing can also be activated.
Dual 100-240VAC / 12-24VDC power supply
Touch screen 120x112 pixel backlight graphic LCD
Built-in buzzer
Static (SSR) output for global alarm signalling
Opto-isolated RS485 interface port
Conductor cross section: 0.2-2.5mm (24-12 AWG;
18-12 AWG per UL/CSA)
Tightening torque: 0.56Nm (4.5lbin)
Front degree of protection: IEC IP54; UL Type 1.
Alarm-status relay unit characteristics
External relay expansion unit for alarm and status
remoting.
Communication with RGK... controllers by CANbus or
pulse inputs:
12 relay outputs of which 5 with changeover (SPDT)
contact rated 5A 250VAC / B300 and 7 N/O (SPST)
contact rated 2.5A 250VAC / C300
12/24VDC power supply
Up to 2 RGK RR units can be connected in cascade for
a total of 24 relays
Maximum installation distance from the RGK 6... and
RGK 700... RGK 900 controllers:
CANbus: 30m/33yd (high speed)
Inputs/Outputs: 1,000m/1,094yd (low speed)
Conductor cross section: 0.2-2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG)
Tightening torque: 0.56 Nm/4.5lbin.
Canada (cULus File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices,
Generator controllers remote and relay units for all
except pending for RGK900 types.
Comply with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14.
For wiring schemes and technical characteristics, refer to
technical instructions in Downloads of local or global
website or consult Customer Service; see contact details
26
26-10
Dimensions
page 26-13

Communication devices for
RGK 600... - RGK 700...
RGK 800... - RGK 900...
Order code
Description
CX 01

1
PCcontroller connecting cable
for programming, data download,
diagonistics and firmware upgrade
0.090
CX 02
Wi-Fi dongle for PC controller 1

diagnotics and firmware upgrade,
project upload/download and
controller cloning
0.090
CX 03
GSM/GPRS quad-band antenna

(800/900/1800/1900MHz) for
EXP10 15 expansion module for
RGK 800... - RGK 900...
0.090
CX 01
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
CX 02
Communication and connection devices for generating
set controllers RGK 600-RGK 700-RGK 800-RGK 900...
for personal computers, smartphones, tablets, modems,
bus drives.
CX 01
The USB/optical connector, complete with cable, allows
to connect RGK 600-RGK 700-RGK 800-RGK 900...
controllers to a PC without having to disconnect the
power supply from the electric panel and to carry out
parameter programming, data and event download,
diagnostics and firmware upgrade.
CX 02
By Wi-Fi connection, RGK 600..., RGK 700..., RGK 800...
and RGK 900... controllers can be viewed by PC,
smartphone and tablet with no need for cabling and to
carry out parameter programming, data and event
download, diagnostics project upload/download and
controller cloning.
CX 03
Compatible with the major part of worldwide mobile
networks thanks to the available frequencies at
800/900/1800/1900MHz.
IP67 IEC protection degree. Fixing by 12mm/0.04
drilling.
CX 03
For wiring schemes and technical characteristics, refer to

technical instructions in Downloads of local or global
website or consult Customer Service; see contact details
Accessories
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Connecting cables.
51 C4
51 C2
For PC controller,
1.8m/2yd long
0.090
51 C3
For PC GSM modem

1.8/2yd long
0.210
51 C4
For PC RS232/RS485,
converter drive, 1.8m/2yd long
0.147
51 C11
For PC TTL/RS232
communication port
2.8m/3yd long
0.090
0.600
0.100
RS232/485 converter drive.

4 PX1
Opto-isolated, 220-240VAC
power supply (110-120VAC on
request)
CONNECTING CABLES 51 C
They are used to link the RGK controllers to personal
computers, modems, bus converters.
RS232/RS485 CONVERTER DRIVE
It can interface slave devices connected in an RS485
bus with a master equipped with RS232 interface port.
GASKET SEAL
To increase the protection degree of RGK600/610 types
to IEC IP65, the gasket needs to be installed in the fixing
slot on the inside surface of the display frame.
For RGK 600. and RGK 601 controllers.

RGK X00
IP65 gasket seal for internal

dislpay frame
RS232/RS485 opto-isolated converter drive, 38,400 Baud rate

maximum, automatic or manual TRANSMIT line supervision,
220-240VAC 10% (110-120VAC supply on request).
26
26-11

Software
Order code
Description
RGK SW10
Customisation manager software

complete with 51 C2 connecting
cable
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.246
Customisation manager software

Once installed on a personal computer, besides setting up all
functional parameters of the controllers, this RGK SW10
software allows to handle many types of data such as texts,
analog sensor response definition (for fuel, pressure,
temperature), current overload protection, logo or trademark
display at power up and setup exit, custom information
pages.
The user can enable and disable alarms along with defining
the controller feedback for alarm conditions and saving
projects with the described types of files in single blocks
despite the fact that different projects can share certain files.
For instance, two projects can have the same text file but
distinct sensor response files.
RGK SW10
APP
The
software provides for the remote control and
supervision of the RGK controllers.
available across different platforms and operating systems.
It is a highly versatile system, simultaneously accessible to a
large number of users/workstations via intranets, VPN or
Internet.
(Setup And Maintenance 1) application allows the
user to program the controller, view alarm conditions, send
commands, read measurements, download statistical data
and events and send retrieved data by email. The connection
is made by Wi-Fi with a smartphone or tablet using the CX02
dongle.
Section 27 or consult Customer Service; see contact details
26
26-12

RGK 20
14
(0.55")
96 (3.78")
92 (3.62")
81 (3.19")
44 (1.73")
68 (2.68")
STAND-ALONE GEN-SET CONTROLLER RGK 40
9
(0.35")
16
(0.63")
96 (3.78")
45 (1.77")
27
(1.06")
72 (2.83")
10
(0.39")
Cutout
68 (2.68")
48 (1.89")
72 (2.83")
RGK 30
Cutout
9
(0.35")
73.5 (2.89")
Cutout
62 (2.44")
92 (3.62")
6
(0.24")
92 (3.62")
90 (3.54")
96 (3.78")
27
(1.06")
GEN-SET CONTROLLERS RGK 600... - RGK 601...

43.3 (1.70)
Cutout
10
(0.39)
138 (5.43)
138 (5.43)
144 (5.67)
144 (5.67)
35
(1.38)
GEN-SET CONTROLLERS RGK 700... - RGK 800... - RGK 900... - REMOTE DISPLAYS PANELS RGK 800RD - RGK 800RDSA - RGK 900RD - RGK 900RDSA
Cutout
220 (8.66")
240 (9.45")
180 (7.09")
157 (6.18")
160 (6.30")
33
(1.30")
RGK 700, RGK 800RD..., RGK 900RD... excluded.
56 (2.20")
59 (2.32")
ALARM-STATUS RELAY UNIT RGK RR

19.8
(0.78")
54.2 (2.13")
D8
OUT 3
OUT 4
9 10 11 12 13 14
OUT 4
D9
D20
D29
D28
OUT 7
OUT 8
OUT 9
D10
OUT 5
OUT 6
15 16 17 18
OUT 5
CAN
OUT 7
OUT 6
D18
D27
96 (3.78")
D7
OUT 2
OUT 3
ON
D2
D19
D21
D30
D22
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
COM
26
REMOTE RELAYS UNIT

OUT 8
OUT 9
OUT 10
OUT 11
OUT 12
PULSE IN
INP
99.6 (3.92")
92 (3.62")
96 (3.78")
90.8 (3.57")
OUT 1
OUT 2
107 (4.21")
TR
OUT 1
SG
92 (3.62")
96 (3.78")
19
(0.75")
Cutout
24
(0.94")
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 27 29 30 31 32
116 (4.57")
+COM
REMOTE DISPLAY RGK RA
12
(0.47")
SUPPLY
__
33 34 35 36
46.5 (1.83")
26-13
Page 27-6
SUPERVISION AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT
SOFTWARE
Structure and applications based on MS SQL
relational database management system
Data consulting made through popular
programs for Internet browsing
Highly versatile system, simultaneously
accessible to a large number of
users/workstations via intranets, VPN or
Internet.
Page 27-7
SMARTPHONE AND TABLET APPS
Users can program the controller, view alarm
conditions, send commands, read
measurements, download statistical data and
events and send retrieved data by email
iOS and Android compatible.
27
SOFTWARE AND APPLICATIONS
Web-based and multiclient

software
Management of multiple
communication
channels simultaneously
Three level multiuser access using
Internet.
Software
Parameterising and enable licences .................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
27 - 6
E NERGY M ANAGEMENT
Applications ................................................................................................................ 27 - 7
UNCOVER
ITS GREAT POTENTIAL!

SIMPLE, GUIDED, INTUITIVE CONFIGURATION
programming does not require any particular computer knowledge since
specific configuring instruments have been developed to guide through the
configuration of product networks, graphic pages, datalog reports and charts, in a
simple and intuitive way.
FUNCTIONALITY
Serial communication via Ethernet or modem
SERVER-MULTICLIENT SYSTEM
structure and applications are based on MS (Micrcsoft) SQL Relational
Database management system (RDBMS).
consulting (Client) is made through popular programs for Internet
browsing that are available across different platforms and operating systems.
These features allow
to be a highly versatile system, simultaneously
accessible to a large number of users/workstations, via intranets, VPN or Internet.
is a supervision and energy management web-based software that provides for the monitoring and control of the electrical installation, in a simple
and efficient way.
It is a valid software to sustain the activities indicated by the standard EN ISO 5000-1 Energy management systems. Requirements with guidance for use.
In addition to electrical quantities, it allows to check all environmental and process information (operating status, alarms, etc.), acquired from LOVATO Electric
products, equipped with communication port, and thereby to carry out commands and parameterising.
27
COMMUNICATION NETWORKS/CHANNELS
can interface LOVATO Electric devices only.
It simultaneously manages different communication channels with
independent configuration for protocol, speed rate, etc. Channels are to
be intended as one for each different TCP/IP address and every other
communication port RS232, RS485, etc. In addition to wired
connections of devices through wired networks (RS232, RS485 and
Ethernet), Synergy also permits the management of analog and
GSM/GPRS modems.
Available communication protocols are Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII and
Modbus-TCP/IP.
LOVATO Electric devices, directly connected to an Ethernet network,
can be predisposed to also handle dynamic TCP/IP addresses.
27-2
MANAGEMENT OF INTERFACED DEVICES

Each device can also be identified by a customised description of the
electrical utility/application to which it makes reference to. Using the
specific control menu, it is possible to verify if it is correctly
communicating and when the last measurement was done.
can query about exclusive data required by datalog files on
a regular basis to optimise network data traffic as well as for other
eventual information contained in the graphic page viewed in that
moment.
With
, internal device parameters can be possibly changed
or saved on hard disk and retrieved later on for quick configuration
duplication in other devices.
GRAPHIC PAGES
allows to create an unlimited number of pages, to include static images and dynamic
indicators of various types and easily configure them.
Therefore, the user can create pages with installation overall view, synoptic and/or topographic
representations of the electrical network and pages of the single electrical lines and/or applications
with all detailed information.
By using pushbuttons, commands can be sent to the installations, if obviously foreseen in the field
devices.
Page configuration permits to also interactively browse
among these same pages.
The dynamic objects available are:
Analog instruments at 90 and 270
Digital instrumentation
Digital instrumentation with vertical or horizontal bar graphs
10-digit hour counter
Simple label or with dynamic image
Multi-measurement panel
Chart of single measurements
Harmonic status bar graph.
ACCESS LEVELS
allows access to a large number of users with different access levels and authorisations.
Three access levels are available:
Administrator:
Power users:
Complete access to all functions
Viewing of a limited number of field devices,
predefined by the administrator, with possible
creating or changing of graphic pages, datalog
reports and relative export and change of
device setup.
Users:
Viewing of a limited number
of devices, predefined by the administrator,
and the relative pages.
LANGUAGES
is available in the following languages: English, Italian, Spanish, French, Polish and Russian. The up-to-date list of available languages can be
consulted at: www.LovatoElectric.com
ALARMS
Data stored in datalog files can be used even to elaborate controls with
regards to the correct operation of the installations. Eventual conditions to
keep monitored can be linked with alarms, that are recorded in a specific
alarm list, highlighted in the
headline and conveniently
described in the homepage. The same alarms can be transformed into
commands and transmitted to the devices for an automatic control of that
installation.
HOME PAGE
Main diagnostic data is concentrated in a single page to allow quick
spotting of abnormal conditions of the entire system under control:
List of last 10 alarms
Status summary of communication channels and devices
Link to main graphic pages and preferred charts.
27
27-3
Supervision for industry, shopping malls
Quality control of power grid supply

Consumption accounting for cost centres
Monitoring of machinery/production lines
Operation monitoring of motors
Operation monitoring of generating sets
Monitoring of power factor correction
installations
Monitoring of process/environmental data
(values of pressure, flow rate,
temperature, ).
Supervision for chains of stores

Monitoring of energy consumption (electricity lines,
air conditioning,...)
Installation diagnostics
Consumption report for cost centres.
DATALOG FILES
allows to record data read on field devices in different datalog
files (unlimited number), each with freely user-customisable configuration.
Therefore, it is possible to gather different information per time sampling
(e.g. electric power or gas consumption counts every hour; average active
power and current values every 15 minutes and active power and current
values every 10 seconds, ...), per each single electric line or grouped
together per department or production bay. The recorded measurements
by devices can be used as parameters for mathematical functions to
permit additional calculations or information elaborations not readily or not
even available of the installation, for instance the sum of consumption for a
certain area so the cost of electricity can be calculated. Automatic export
with customisable rate (daily, weekly or monthly) and standard Excel or text
format can be defined for each file. The generated files are saved on hard
disk and sent by email / FTP wherever required.
In the case of data networks with potential reliability problems, separate
data storage modules are available for data logging, to fit exclusively on
devices that are expandable with the EXM1030 or EXP1030 unit.
will provide for automatic recovery of stored data when
network connection is restored.
CHARTS
Data recorded in datalog files can also be viewed in charts.
Harmonic analysis in bar graph and table format
27
27-4
Supervision of photovoltaic
installations
Energy monitoring
Generated
Consumed
Exchanged In-Out.
Supervision of waterworks and wells
Quality control of power grid supply

Energy accounting
Operation monitoring of pumps
Operation monitoring of generating sets
Monitoring of process/environmental data (values of pressure, flow
rate, temperature, )
Monitoring of remote wells.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Supported operating system
MS Windows XP SP3
Windows Vista
Windows 7 32/64-bit
Windows server 2003
Windows server 2008.
PC/Server hardware requirements

Dual core CPU, 2GHz
2GHz of RAM
60GB hard disk (hard disk partition or volume
depends on how much data you intend to
record)
SVGA 1024x768 16-bit pixels
Type and number of communication ports
based on use, be they Ethernet, RS485 serial,
RS232 serial or modem.
PRODUCTS THAT SUPPORT

The up-to-date list of LOVATO Electric devices interfaceable with
Supported browser
MS IExplorer 9 64-bit
MS IExplorer 10
Google Chrome
Apple Safari
Mozilla FireFox
Opera.
software is available at www.LovatoElectric.com
27
27-5

software
Order code
Description
SYN 1 SW00
Parameterising software for

LOVATO Electric devices.
Include 60-day trial period of
remote control supervision
function (measurements,
monitoring control and web
server) in DVD format.
SYN 1 SW10
Enable licence of supervision

monitoring, control and web
server). Includes licence for
one device (excluding
RG series gen-set controllers)
SYN 1 SW11

monitoring, control and web
server). Includes licence for
one RG series gen-set
controllers
SYN 1 SW20

for n5 additional devices
(excluding RG series gen-set
controllers)
SYN 1 SW21

function for one additional
RG series gen-set controllers
SYN 1 SW X00 Enable licence for sending

emails and FTP files
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.210
is a remote control and supervision software of

LOVATO Electric devices equipped with communication
capabilities via serial ports, Ethernet or modem in a
simple and reliable way. The supported protocols are
Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII and Modbus-TCP.
Express that uses a MS IIS Express web server to control
the user interface.
The software is capable of:
Managing multiple communication channels
simultaneously
Connecting the devices to the various channels
Collecting data from all the devices and storing them
in a database
Displaying collected data in graphical pages and tables
Allowing access to the devices and their data
according to the rights of the different users.
NOTE: For the number of licences, only devices equipped with

communication port can be considered.
SYN 1 SW 20
Enable licence
every 5 additional
devices (no RG...)
SYN 1 SW 10
Supervision + enabling
for 1 device (no RG...)
SYN 1 SW 00
Setup
SYN 1 SW 21
Enable licence
as alternative to
each additional
RG... device
SYN 1 SW 11
Supervision + enabling
for 1 RG... device
SYN 1 SW X...
option
valid for all
devices
Application example - Mixed Ethernet/RS485 networks, Modbus-TCP and RTU protocols

Total of 10 network nodes monitored. Network of multimeters/power analyzers, power factor controllers and energy
meters. Extra enable licence for sending emails and FTP.
www
internet
PC SERVER with
SYNERGY SW installed
PANEL 1
ON
DATA
MENU
USB interface
Access to SYNERGY website
DMED 310 T2 EXM 1013

(Ethernet)
PANEL 2
PANEL 4
PANEL 5
PANEL 3
DMG 800 +
EXP 1013
(Ethernet)+
EXP 1012
(RS485)
ON
ON
DATA
DATA
ON
DATA
MENU
USB interface
DMG 300
USB interface
EXM 1013
(Ethernet)
MENU
DCRG8 +
EXP 1013
EXM 1012
(RS485)
DMG 300
USB interface
Devices installed
Order code
Panel 1
DMED 310 T2
EXM 1013
Panel 2
DCRG 8
EXP 1013
Panel 3
DMG 300
EXM 1013
Panel 4
DMG 300
EXM1013
EXM 1012
DMG 210
Panel 5
DMG 800
EXP 1013
EXP 1012
DMG 210
Qty
Description
1
1
3-phase digital energy meter 5A with 2 prog. outputs

Ethernet opto-isolated expansion module
1
1
Power factor controller

1
1
Modular digital multimeter

1
1
1
2
Modular digital multimeter

RS485 opto-isolated expansion module
Modular digital multimeter with RS485
1
1
1
3
Flush-mount 96x96mm digital multimeter

RS485 opto-isolated expansion module
Modular digital multimeter with RS485
EXM 1013
(Ethernet)
Software/licences to purchase
Number of monitored nodes is 10. In addition, control of logged data email transmission.
27
MENU
ETH
RS485
27-6
DMG 210
MENU
DMG 210
MENU
DMG 210
MENU
DMG 210
MENU
DMG 210
Order code
Qty
Description
SYN1 SW 00
SYN1 SW 10
SYN1 SW 20
SYN1 SWX 01
1
1
2
1
Setup software
Supervision licence + enable for n1 device
Supervision licence + enable for n5 extra devices
Enable licence for sending emails and FTP

APP
Applications - APP
Configuration and maintenance operations, often done in
intolerable or awkward ambiance due to weather or noisy
conditions or narrow places, are now easier to do for all
LOVATO Electric devices with communication interface
on front, compatible with CX02 dongle. Indeed, tablets
and smartphones with Android or iOS operating system
can connect to them using the new application called
(Setting And Maintenance 1), directly
downloadable from Google Play or iTunes. Therefore, it is
no longer necessary to connect and switch on a PC using
cables to change configurations, set up parameters or
even clone device programming.
With this APP, a file previously saved can be uploaded;
commands can be sent; measured quantities can be read
from LOVATO Electric devices. The events can be viewed
and saved in a text file and later copied and sent by email
or to FTP servers.
app can be downloaded from Google Play Store
or Apple iTunes.
Upgrades
Send emails
(events, parameters)
PARAMETER SETTING
SEND COMMANDS
EVENT LOG VIEWING
ALARM VIEWING
MEASUREMENT
VIEWING
27
27-7
Page 28-2
EXP SERIES EXPANSION MODULES
Digital inputs and outputs
Inputs for PT100 sensors
Communication modules (RS232, RS485,
Ethernet, etc.)
GSM/GPRS modem
Data storage with clock-calendar (RTC)
Powered directly by the base product
Automatic identification by base product.
Page 28-3
EXM SERIES EXPANSION MODULES
Communication modules (RS232, RS485,
Ethernet, etc.)
Data storage with clock-calendar (RTC)
Separate auxiliary power supply
Base product connection by IR port
Automatic identification by base product.
Page 28-4
ACCESSORIES
Protective covers
RS232/RS485 converter drive
Connecting cables.
EXPANSION
28
MODULES AND ACCESSORIES

Communication interface
Data storage with clock-calendar
Communication devices to connect
LOVATO Electric products to
personal computers, smartphones
and tablets
Connecting cables to link LOVATO
Electric products to personal
computers, modems and converter
drives.
Expansion modules
EXP series ........................................................................................................................................................................
EXM series .......................................................................................................................................................................
SEC. - PAGE
28 - 2
28 - 3
Accessories
28
28
28
28
4
4
5
5
E NERGY M ANAGEMENT
Communication devices ...................................................................................................................................................

Protective covers .............................................................................................................................................................
Converter drive ................................................................................................................................................................
Connecting cables ............................................................................................................................................................

EXP series
Expansion modules for
flush-mount products
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Inputs and outputs.
EXP10...
EXP10 00
4 digital inputs, opto-isolated
0.060
EXP10 01
4 static outputs, opto-isolated
0.054
EXP10 02
2 digital inputs and 2 static

outputs, opto-isolated
0.058
EXP10 03
2 relay outputs, rated 5A 250VAC 1
0.050
EXP10 04
2 analog inputs, opto-isolated

0/4-20mA, PT100, 0-10V or
0...5V
0.056
EXP10 05
2 analog outputs, opto-isolated

0/4-20mA, 0-10V or 0...5V
0.064
EXP10 06
2 relay outputs to increase

number of steps
0.064
EXP10 08
2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 1

0.058
EXP10 10
0.060
EXP10 11
0.040
EXP10 12
0.050
EXP10 13

with Web server function
0.060
EXP10 14
Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface 1
0.080
EXP10 18
0.060
Various functionality.
EXP10 15
GPRS/GSM modem
0.080
EXP10 16
Capacitor bank protection
0.080
EXP10 30
Data storage, clock-calendar

with backup battery for data
logging
0.050
EXP10 31
Data storage, with Energy Quality 1

(EN 50160), clock-calendar
1
with backup reserve energy for
data logging
0.060
0.050
EXP series expansion modules can increase the
functionality of the LOVATO Electric products, such as:
Digital inputs
Relay outputs
Static outputs
Analog inputs
Inputs for PT100 temperature sensor
Analog outputs
GPRS/GSM modem (without antenna, see page 28-4)
Data storage.
Powered directly by the base product
Automatic identification by the base product
Rear base product mounting with no need of tools.
(File E93601), as Listed Accessory under Auxiliary
Devices; EXP10 08 and EXP10 18 excluded.
Compliant with standards:
For EXP10 18: IEC/EN 61850 and Italian CEI 0-16,
CEI 0-20
For EXP10 04 and EXP10 10: IEC/EN 61010-1,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n 14
For EXP10 15: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 62311,
ETSI EN 301 489-1, ETSI EN 301 469-7, EN 301511,
USA/FCC 47 CFR part 15, Subpart B, CAN/ICES-003
For all other types: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14
characteristics, consult the technical instructions in
Downloads of the local or global websites; see details on
inside front cover.
Expansion module fixing

The module will be made available only when the competent authorities
have established the exact terms of the supervision and control of the
specific commands (at the time of catalogue printing, currently under
study as specified in the Italian CEI 0-16 and CEI 0-21 standards).
A2
A1
CLICK!
EXP series compatibility with LOVATO Electric products

INTERFACE
PROTECTION
SYSTEM
UNITS
TYPE
DIGITAL
POWER
ANALYZERS
PFC
CONTROLLERS
DMG 700
DMG 800
DMG 900/900T
DCRG 8
ATL 610
RGK 800...
RGK 900
EXP10 01
EXP10 02
EXP10 04
EXP10 05
EXP10 06
EXP10 10
EXP10 11
EXP10 12
EXP10 13
EXP10 08
EXP10 14
EXP10 15
EXP10 18

EXP10 31
28-2

EXP10 30
Max n of
modules
addable

EXP10 16
28
GENSET
CONTROLLERS
DMG 600/610
DCRL 3/5
ATS
CONTROLLERS
EXP10 00
EXP10 03
PMVF20/30
DIGITAL MULTIMETERS

EXP series
Expansion modules for
modular products
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Inputs and outputs.

EXM10 00
2 digital inputs and 2 static

outputs, opto-isolated
0.137
EXM10 01
2 digital inputs, opto-isolated and 1

2 relay outputs, rated 5A 250VAC
0.147
EXM10 02
4 opto-isolated digital inputs and 1

0.155
EXM10 00
EXM10 10
0.140
EXM10 11
0.125
EXM10 12
0.140
EXM10 13

with Web server function
0.140
EXM10 18 IEC/EN 61850 interface
0.140
EXM10 20
Opto-isolated RS485 interface and 1

2 relay outputs, rated 5A 250VAC
0.140
EXM10 30
Data storage, RTC with backup

0.140
EXM10 10

The module will be made available only when the competent authorities
have established the exact terms of the supervision and control of the
specific commands (at the time of catalogue printing, currently under
study as specified in the Italian CEI 0-21 standard).
EXM series expansion modules can increase functionality
of LOVATO Electric products, such as:
Digital inputs
Relay outputs
Static outputs
Data storage.
Connection to base product by IR (infrared beam) port
Automatic identification by base product
Side base product mounting.
Canada (File E93601), as Listed Accessory under
Auxiliary Devices; EXM10 18 excluded.
Compliant with standards:
For EXM10 18: IEC/EN 61850 and Italian CEI 016
For EXM10 10: IEC(EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14
For all other types: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508, CSA C22.2 n 14.
characteristics, consult technical instructions online in
Downloads of the local or global website; see details on
inside front cover.
Expansion module fixing
CLICK!
EXM series compatibility with LOVATO Electric products

INTERFACE PRO. SYSTEM UNITS
PMVF50
PMVF51
EXM10 00
EXM10 01
ENERGY METERS
DATA CONCENTRATORS
DME D310 T2
DME CD
DMED CDPV1
DMG 300
EXM10 02
DIGITAL MULTIMETER
DMED 130
EXM10 10
EXM10 11
EXM10 12
EXM10 13
EXM10 18

EXM10 20
EXM10 30
Max n of
modules
addable
28
28-3

Accessories
CX 01
Order
code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
n
[kg]
CX 01

connecting cable, with USB
optic connector for
diagnostics and firmware
upgrade
0.090
CX 02
CX 03
Wt
PC LOVATO Electric product 1

Wi-Fi connecting device for
0.090
GSM quad-band antenna

1
(800/900/1800/1900MHz)
for EXP10 15 expansion module
0.090
EXP80 00
28
28-4
CX 02
With a Wi-Fi point connection, the LOVATO Electric
products can be viewed by a PC, smartphone and tablet
without having to connect cables.

Downloads of local global website; see details on inside
front cover.
CX 03
Accessories
CX 01
This USB/optical connector, complete with cable, allows
to connect compatible Lovato Electric products with a PC
without having to disconnect the the power supply from
the electric panel.
CX 03
Compatible with major part of worldwide mobile
networks, thanks to the 800/900/1800/1900MHz
frequencies.
drilling.
CX 02
Protective covers
Communication devices to link Lovato Electric products to:
Personal computers (PC)
Smartphones
Tablets.
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
PA 96X48
Front IP65 protective cover

for DMK 0/1...
[kg]
0.048
31 PA96X96 Front IP54 protective cover

for DMK 2/3... and DMK 40
0.077
Order code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
EXP80 00
Plastic insert for customising 0 10

label for DMG 600/601 and
DCRL
0.005
EXP80 01
IP65 gasket seal for ATL600/610 1

internal display frame
0.150
EXM80 04
Set of sealable terminal covers

for DMG200/210/300
0.020
NTC 01
External/remote temperature
1
sensor, with 3m/3.3yd long cable
0.150
RGK X00
IP65 gasket seal for

RGK600/601 internal display
frame
0.100
Caratteristiche generali
In caso di necessit di elevati gradi di protezione IP, le
calotte forniscono la protezione necessaria ai dispositivi
su cui sono montati.

Accessories
Converter drive
4 PX1
Connecting cables
Order code
Description
4 PX1
RS232/RS485 converter drive,

opto-isolated, 220-240VAC
power supply (110-120VAC
on request).
Repeater drive for RS485 bus
extention
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
0.600
The 4 PX1 converter drive can interface slave devices
connected in an RS485 bus with a master equipped
with RS232 interface port.
RS232/RS485 opto-isolated converter drive, 38,400 Baud rate

maximum, automatic or manual TRANSMIT line supervision,
220...240VAC 10% power supply (110-120VAC supply on request).
Order
code
Description
Qty
per
pkg
Wt
[kg]
Connecting cables to link LOVATO Electric devices to:
Personal computer (PC)
Modem
Bus converter .
Connecting cables.
51 C2
For PC LOVATO Electric

device, 1.8m/2yd long
0.090
51 C3
For PC GSM modem,

1.8m/2yd long
0.210
51 C4
For PC RS232/RS485 converter 1

drive, 1.8m/2yd long
0.147
51 C5
For Analog modem LOVATO 1

Electric device, 1.8m/2yd long
0.111
51 C6
For 4 PX1 converter drive

LOVATO device + EXP10 11,
1.8m/2yd long
0.102
51 C7
For GSM modem LOVATO

1
Electric device, 1.8m/2yd long
0.101
51 C8
For ADX remote keypad,

3m/3.3yd long
0.081
51 C9
For PC analog modem,

1.8m/2yd long
0.137
51 C11
For PC RS232/TTL
communication port,
2.8m/2yd long
0.090
51 C4

Downloads of local or global website; see details on inside
front cover.

front cover.
28
28-5

Catalogo Geral Lovato PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalogo Geral Lovato PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Index

Motor protection circuit breakers

Motor protection relays

Pushbuttons and selector switches

Signal towers and beacons

Limit, micro and foot switches

Rotary cam switches

Fuse holders and fuses

Miniature and residual circuit breakers

Surge protection devices

Earth leakage relays

Level control relays

Switching power supplies

Automatic battery chargers

Metering instruments and current transformers

Power factor controllers and thyristor modules

Automatic transfer switch controllers

Engine and generator controllers

Software and applications

2014 new products

ADXC soft starters

Control stations and

IP65 enclosed switch

Fuse holders 10x38

LOVATO Electric have

The range is composed of:

New GE series handles

LOVATO Electric release two

The PMVF 51 interface

2014 new products

Micro PLC with

The new BGC battery charger

Supervision and energy management

DME energy meters

Dual power supply

The story of a family,

LOVATO Electric head offices were first established in

In the Bergamo headquarters, the research staff and design

Making reliable, innovative products and

Leading-edge manufacturing facilities

Highly qualified technical assistance

Successful products and

Motor protection circuit

Motor protection circuit

Motor protection circuit

Motor protection relays

Motor protection relays

Miniature and residual

Motor protection relays

Metering instruments and

Pushbuttons and selector

Pushbuttons and selector

Automatic power factor

Pushbuttons and selector

Signal towers and beacons

Signal towers and beacons

Signal towers and beacons

Limit, micro and foot

Rotary cam switches

Setup and remote control

Limit, micro and foot

Rotary cam switches

Miniature and residual